FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Mobile 2-way Radio

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO SYSTEM MOTOTRBO MOBILE XPR 4000/5000/5000e SERIES INSTALLATION GUIDE 0 Foreword This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment. Specifically, it contains installation information required for the XPR Series Mobile Radios. For information related to the service of the XPR Series Mobile Radios, refer to Related Publications on page v for the list of applicable manuals available separately. Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards on page ii. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. To obtain PMRs, go to:

https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the service manuals listed in Related Publications on page v. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2006 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:

Install only Motorola approved antennas and accessories. Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation on page 2-12 of this manual. Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio. Before using this product, the operator must be familiar with the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with each radio (Motorola publication part number 6881095C99_) to ensure compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) energy exposure limits. For radios installed in vehicles fuelled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. This radio has a transmitter Time-out Timer that disables the transmitter during a transmission after a pre-

defined time period, which by default is set to 60 seconds. It is recommended NOT to change the default 60 seconds time period for the Time-out Timer as the radio is intended for intermittent duty cycle operation. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site, which lists approved accessories for your radio model:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com

W A R N I N G C a u t i o n ii Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Foreword ..........................................................................................................i Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance .............................................................................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights ...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards .......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme....................................................vi Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................vii Limited Warranty ....................................................................................................................................... vii MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS ............................................................................... vii I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long..................................................................... vii II. General Provisions ................................................................................................................ vii III. State Law Rights ................................................................................................................. viii IV. How to Get Warranty Service ............................................................................................. viii V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover................................................................................... viii VI. Patent and Software Provisions............................................................................................ix VII. Governing Law.....................................................................................................................ix Chapter 1 Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio ............................................................................. 1-4 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration ........................................................................................... 1-5 1.3 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Chapter 2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations ............. 2-1 2.2.2 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 Tools Required for Installation .......................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 2.1.2 Installation Example.......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2 Radio Mounting ............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Locking Kit (Optional) ....................................................................................................... 2-7 2.2.2.1 All Radios................................................................................................................. 2-7 2.2.3 DIN Mount......................................................................................................................... 2-7 To install the frame into the dashboard ................................................................... 2-7 To Mount the radio in the frame............................................................................... 2-8 To Remove the radio from the frame....................................................................... 2-9 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion............................................................................................ 2-9 2.3 Power Cable .................................................................................................................................. 2-9 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 iv 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable.................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.5 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-12 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle ........................................ 2-12 Antenna Installation Procedure....................................................................................... 2-13 Antenna Connection ....................................................................................................... 2-14 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-15 Standard Hang-Up Clip................................................................................................... 2-15 2.7 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-15 2.6.1 Chapter 3 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 3-1 3.1 Accessory Installation .................................................................................................................... 3-1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation ............................................................ 3-3 3.1.1 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay ........................................................................... 3-4 External Speaker ............................................................................................................. 3-5 3.1.3 Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting................ 4-1 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing ..................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring................................... 4-2 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines...................................................... 4-2 4.3 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 4-3 4.4 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker.................................................................................... 4-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering ............................................. A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information ............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online .............................................................................................................................A-1 Appendix B Motorola Service Centers .................................................. B-1 B.1 Servicing Information .....................................................................................................................B-1 B.2 Motorola Solutions de Mxico, S.A. ..............................................................................................B-1 B.3 Motorola Solutions de Colombia, Ltd. ...........................................................................................B-1 B.4 Motorola Solutions Brazil, Ltd. ......................................................................................................B-1 Index .....................................................................................................Index-1 List of Figures List of Figures v Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 4100/6100 Series .................... 1-2 Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBODGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series 1-2 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series............................................................. 1-3 Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series............................................................. 1-3 Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio ............................................................................................. 1-4 Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration................................................................. 1-6 Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration ........................................................................................ 2-1 Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations .................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)............................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) ....................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile .................................................................. 2-5 Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................................ 2-6 Locking Kit (Optional)............................................................................................................ 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO DGM 4100/6100 Series ........................................... 2-8 Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO DGM 5000/5000e/8000/8000e Series ..................... 2-8 Figure 2-11 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount................................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-12 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount............................................................... 2-11 Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio.................................................................... 2-13 Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection ......................................................................................................... 2-14 Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector .......................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) ...... 3-2 Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting................................................................................................... 3-5 Related Publications MOTOTRBO XPR 4350/4550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .....................................................6880309T21_ MOTOTRBO XPR 4380/4580 Mobile Basic Service Manual ..................................................68009272001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5350/5550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .................................................. 68009515001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5580/5380 ............................................................................................. MN000305A01_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5000e Series Mobile Service Manual.......................................................MN002201A01_ vi Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Below is the model numbering scheme for XPR 5000e:

Model No.Example :

AA M Position

1 2 2 8 3 J 4 Q 5 C 6 9 7 R 8 A 9 1 A N 10 11 12 AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America MD: Europe Mobile MOTOTRBO Mobile XPR 5000e Series : 28 Band J

: 136174 MHz M

: 217222 MHz K : 300360 MHz P

: 350400 MHz Q

: 403470 MHz T

: 450527 MHz X

: 450520 MHz U

: 806941 MHz V

: 806870 MHz Power Level N: 125 W P: 2540 W Q: 2545 W R: 140 W M: 1035 W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display H: Monochrome Display N: Color Display X: No Control Head AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America (except Mexico) MD: Europe/Middle East/

Africa/Australasia Mobile Mobile Model Series MOTOTRBO XPR 4000 Series: 27 MOTOTRBO XPR 5000 Series: 28 Band J : 136174 MHz Q: 403470 MHz T : 450527 MHz X : 450520 MHz U : 806941 MHz Power Level N: 125W R: 140W M: 1035W P: 2540W Q: 2545W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display Model H: Monochrome Display Model

(XPR 4000 Series) N: Color Display Model

(XPR 5000 Series) Unique Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U (Mobile) 2: BNC (Mobile) Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only D: Limited System E: Modified Conventional Primary Operation J: Basic (No GNSS, no Bluetooth) K: GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) and Bluetooth L: GPS only M: Bluetooth only R: GNSS, WiFi and Bluetooth S: WiFi and Bluetooth only V: Basic (No WiFi, No GNSS, No Bluetooth, No embedded GOB) W: GNSS only Channel Information 9: Variable/Programmable Channel Spacing Unique Model Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U 2: BNC Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only Primary Operation J: Basic (w/o Bluetooth or GPS) K: w/ Bluetooth and GPS L: w/ GPS Only M: w/ Bluetooth Only Channel Spacing 9: Variable/Programmable Below is the numbering scheme of XPR 4000 and 5000 series. Model No.Example :

AA M Position

1 2 2 7 3 Q 4 P 5 H 6 9 7 L 8 A 9 1 A N 10 11 12 Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme vii

. vii Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

XPR Series Mobile Radios Product Accessories Two (2) Years One (1) Year The mobiles additionally ship with a standard 1-year Repair Service Advantage (RSA) (for U.S. customers) or 1-year Extended Warranty (for Canada customers). However, at the time of order, you may choose to omit these warranties. For more RSA or Extended Warranty information, please refer to the price pages or Motorola Online (https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com) > Resource Center > Services > Service Product Offerings > Repair Service Advantage or Extended Warranty. Motorola, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. Commercial Warranty II. General Provisions viii This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How to Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:

tampering.

- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of

- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. ix Commercial Warranty I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. Patent and Software Provisions MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A. B. that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for XPR Series Mobile Radios and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Overview Model XPR 4300 Description Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons and a 2-character 7-segment display. XPR 4350/

XPR 4380 Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons, a 2-character 7-segment display, and GPS. XPR 4500 Display model with 4 programmable buttons and a dot-matrix LCD. XPR 4550/

XPR 4580 Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a dot-matrix LCD, and GPS. XPR 5350 XPR 5550 XPR 5580 XPR 5380 Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5350e Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5550e Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5580e Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. XPR 5380e Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. 1-2 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1.1.2 Dimensions Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4 show the basic dimensions of the dash mount trunnion of the mobile radio. When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections; in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling; and to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion wing screws. 8.2 6.8 8.2 6.9 Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/

XPR 4000e Series Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBOXPR 5000/

XPR 5000e Series Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 8.3 7.9 8.1 7.4 2 2.4 2.1 2.5 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series NOTE: The MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile models use wing screws with thread length of 14.9 mm while the XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries models require wing screws with thread length of 9.9 mm to secure the radio to the mounting trunnion. Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series NOTE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in (19.1 mm) to the overall length. 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio Figure 1-5 shows the connections that are found on the back of the radio. For complete pin configuration of the rear accessory connector, see Figure 3-2 on page 3-2. Rear Accessory Connector Antenna Connector Battery+ Battery-

GPS-Antenna Connector Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio Introduction Standard Configurations 1-5 1.2 Standard Configurations The XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile can be either dash mounted or remote mounted. The XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series mobile can only be dash mounted at this time. 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration In the dash mount configuration of the mobile radio, the control head is mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio via a flexible cable between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head. For details on this configuration, see Section 2.2.1 on page 2-6. Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration (XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobiles Only) In the remote control version, the control head and the transceiver are mounted separately in the vehicle. The control head is mounted in a remote trunnion (PMLN4912_) near the operator using an extension cable. The transceiver is mounted using one of the trunnion mounting options shown in Table 2-1 on page 2-4. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, be sure that secure mounting and sufficient cooling are provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, etc. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobile Radio remote mount control head installation instructions. 1-6 1.3 Introduction Base/Control Stations Base/Control Stations If the mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the radio and antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the Safety Booklet (Motorola publication part number 68P81095C99_) provided with the radio:

For outdoor antenna installations, proper site grounding and lightning protection are vitally important. Failure to provide proper lightning protection may result in permanent damage to the radio equipment. Refer to Motorola Quality Standards Fixed Network Equipment Installation Manual R56 (which can be obtained by ordering CDROM 9880384V83) for complete information regarding lightning protection. C a u t i o n The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible and the antenna cable should be earth grounded. The radio chassis must be earth grounded and a lightning surge protector should be used in line with the radio connector and the outdoor antenna. The lightning surge protector should be earth grounded and located at the point where the antenna cable enters the building. The line voltage power supply must have a proper ground connection. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Also, additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. Figure 1-7 shows a typical setup of a Base/Control Station configuration. Line Cord with Ground Wall-

outlet Power Supply Lightning Protector With Quarter Wave Shorting Stub Outdoor Antenna Desktop Power Cable Desk Microphone Speaker C C C C C C C CC C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CC C C CCCC C C Antenna Cable Antenna Connector Radio in Desktop Tray Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration Chapter 2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.1 Planning the Installation The mobile radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems. Before starting the radio installation, make sure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity will not damage the radio, but will cause the cable fuses to blow. Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable runs to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating. Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. C a u t i o n 2.1.1 Tools Required for Installation Tool Motorola Part Number 11/32 hex driver Rubber-coated pliers Regular slot screwdriver or Phillips #2 Pin removal tool 1/4 hex driver 6680163F01 Radio Battery Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration 2.1.2 Installation Example The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be a dash or remote mount (XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series models can only be dash mounted). (See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2). Speaker Antenna 1/4-Wavelength 2-2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Speaker Antenna - Wavelength Control Head Radio Battery Control Head Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams Figure 2-3 shows the wiring diagrams for some of the possible configurations. Identify the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY

(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/

LIGHT FUSE MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC CONTROL HEAD EMERGENCY SWITCH Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)

(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-3 GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY

(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/

LIGHT FUSE SPEAKER EMERGENCY SWITCH MIC CLIP CONTROL HEAD MIC

(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) 2-4 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2 Radio Mounting C a u t i o n C a u t i o n C a u t i o n DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic dashboard without first reinforcing the dashboard; the weight of the radio may crack or break the dashboard. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that will permit routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. For new or existing installations, use one of the mounting kits as specified in Table 2-1. Orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-5. Table 2-1. Mounting Kits Mounting Kit Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships as part of mobile radio package) RLN6076_ Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships in a box intended for resale) RLN6077_ Standard Profile Trunnion Kit Key Lock Trunnion Kit DIN Mount Kit Motorola Part Number for XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Motorola Part Number for XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series RLN6469_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6465_ RLN6078_ RLN6079_ RLN5933_ RADIO FRONT Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-5 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion 1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-6) or under the dash (see Figure 2-7). When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care the transmission housing is not affected. 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outermost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the self-drilling screws provided. The number of screws used will depend on how the radio is mounted (see Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7). 5. Position the radio to align the trunnion with the trunnion mounting features on the radio (see Figure 2-6). Secure the radio with the two wing screws and lock washers (position the flat side of the washer to the thumbscrew and the washer sharp side to the trunnion) provided. Threaded Hole for Wing Screw Lock Washer Tabs Wing Screw Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Wing Screw Lock Washer Trunnion Trunnion Wing Screw Lock Washer Lock Washer Wing Screw Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting 2-6 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.2.1 All Radios If an optional locking kit is used (shown in Figure 2-8), position the lock bottom housing on the trunnion before installing the radio mounting screws. Then slip the top lock housing on and remove the key. You can install the lock on either side of the radio. Lock Figure 2-8 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.3 DIN Mount 2.2.3.1 To install the frame into the dashboard 1. Open up the radio cut-out in the dashboard to ISO7736 specification (182 mm x 53 mm). 2. Insert the mounting frame into the cut-out and retain it by bending back the relevant fixing tabs (using all 6 where possible). Check the orientation of the frame is correct by ensuring that the word TOP is uppermost. NOTE: The tabs are easily bent back by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: For a more secure installation the frame should also be secured with the appropriate number of screws to the mounting conditions (min. 1). NOTE: The demounting tool can be used as an aid to mounting as well as demounting. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-7 2.2.3.2 To Mount the radio in the frame 1. Provide the electrical connections for the radio (power, antenna, accessories). 2. Plug in all the connectors and push the radio firmly into the mounting frame until the two springs snap into place (shown in Figure 2-9). Fixing Tabs Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Fixing Tabs Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN5933_ Demounting Tool Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN6465_ Demounting Tool Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries 2-8 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2.2.3.3 To Remove the radio from the frame 1. Push the two demounting tools through the openings in the frame until the two springs release the radio. 2. Slide out the radio. NOTE: The fixing tabs should be checked for tightness each time the radio is removed. The tabs are easily tightened by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: The frame is not designed for regular mounting and demounting. 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual for restrictions (e.g. due to the gas tank location). For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola is the vehicles trunk. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile radio remote mount control head installation instructions. 2.3 Power Cable Route the red radio power cable from the radio to the vehicles battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15-Amp (part number 6580283E06) or 20-Amp (part number 6580283E07) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 2-12. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the batterys negative terminal. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2-9 I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I C C A N O

F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I T E M M O R G E S U F A 4 R O A 3 I N O T N G I I I O D A R

) D E R n h t

i E L B A C Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O

T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I I N O T U A C y r a m l i i r p k c a b e h t a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A i d n a n o i t a r e p o o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p i l

. t i k e b a c d n a o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t l

. e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f e c h e v e h t o i l t n o i t c e n n o C

) D N U O R G K L B

E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B A 0 2 R O A 5 1 E S U F E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R

E T O N E E S E N O H P O R C M I H C I O D A R R E K A E P S r o t c e n n o c r a e R O

6 4 6 7 2

F P E A M i i

) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a

. e

. i

g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t n e h w o d a r e h t f o e s u s s e c x e

, y r e t t a b s r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i i l I N O T N G I i I s o d a r e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i

n o i t u a C

. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t o d a r e h t s w o i l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i

. y r e t t a b s r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s a n i t l u s e r d u o c i l l

E T O N

. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u f y n o l l i l i w o d a r e h t

, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I i I s o d a r e h t f I t n u o M h s a D r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 1 1

2 e r u g F i 2-10 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O T N E M T R A P M O C I O D A R F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I T E M M O R G E S U F A 4 R O A 3 I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I C C A N O

R E K A E P S I N O T N G I I I O D A R

) D E R n h t

i E L B A C E N O H P O R C M I CONTROL HEAD

I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B A 0 2 R O A 5 1 E S U F E T O N E E S T E M M O R G E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R

T E M M O R G

) D N U O R G K L B

E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I I N O T U A C y r a m i l i r p k c a b e h t a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A i d n a n o i t a r e p o o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p i l

. t i k e b a c d n a o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t l

. e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f e c h e v e h i l t o t n o i t c e n n o C INTERFACE I O D A R r o t c e n n o c r a e R i i

) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a

. e

. i

g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s

r a c e h t i n e h w o d a r e h t f o e s u s s e c x e

, y r e t t a b s

r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i l I N O T N G I

i I s o d a r e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i

n o i t u a C

. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t o d a r e h t s w o i l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i

. y r e t t a b i s

r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s a n i t l u s e r d u o c l l

E T O N

. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u f y n o l l i l i w o d a r e h t

, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I

i I s o d a r e h t f I t n u o M e t o m e R r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 2 1

2 e r u g F i Installation Details for Standard Configurations Ignition Sense Cable 2-11 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable Motorola supplies an ignition sense cable and recommends that it be used with every mobile installation. The ignition sense cable allows the radio to be turned on and off with the vehicle ignition switch, and allows the radio to remember the state of the radio on/off switch, even if it is changed while the vehicle is off. For radio ON/OFF control independent of the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable (pin 25 of accessory connector) to battery hot at the vehicle fuse block (dash mount only). For radio ON/OFF control via the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable to ignition at the fuse block. The ignition sense cable uses either a 3-Amp (P/N 6500139764) or 4-Amp (P/N 6580283E02) fuse. For other considerations when connecting the ignition cable, see Basic Service Manuals in Related Publications on page 1-v. 2.5 Antenna Installation IMPORTANT NOTE: To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 watts or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola approved antennas (HAF4025_ and HAF4029_ for 800/900 band) and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with rated power greater than 7 Watts, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Section 2.5.1 below. 2.5.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External Installation - Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof Top - For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety Standards, mount the antenna in the center of the roof. 3. Trunk Lid - On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sport utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center of the roof. BEFORE INSTALLING AN ANTENNA ON THE TRUNK LID,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm (33 inches) from the front surface of the rear seat-back to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. NOTE: If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models:

For all VHF and UHF models, the 1/4 wave antenna, RAD4218_ & RAD4227_ antenna should be mounted only in the center area of the roof, not on the trunk lid, to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards. 2-12 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 5. Ensure the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from the vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. 7. Make sure the mobile radio antenna is installed at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from any other antenna on the vehicle. 8. For XPR Series Mobile Radio models with GPS using a GPS only or a combined RF/GPS antenna, ensure that the antenna has a clear view of the sky and that the antenna base with the GPS receiver is not covered by any metallic or radio frequency absorbing material. Any non-glass-mount GPS antenna should be positioned next to the RF antenna. Any other mobile radio antenna should be at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from the RF antenna. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 2.5.2 Antenna Installation Procedure 1. Mount the antenna according to the instructions provided with the antenna kit. Run the coaxial cable to the radio mounting location. If necessary, cut off the excess cable and install the cable connector. 2. Connect the antenna cable connector to the radio antenna connector on the rear of the radio. 3. In case of a GPS model, connect the GPS antenna to the GPS antenna connector on the rear of the radio. Antenna Connector GPS-Antenna Connector Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-13 2.5.3 Antenna Connection To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable's mini-UHF plug to a radio's mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system will loosen. NOTE: Applying excessive force with a tool can cause damage to the antenna or the connector (e.g., stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break). Motorola recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system (see Figure 2-14):

Mini UHF Jack Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Cable Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection 1. Make sure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. 2. Make sure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. 3. Slide the collar back against the flange. Insert the antenna cable plugs pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 4. Ensure that the plugs and jacks interlocking features are fully seated. Check this by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 5. Finger-tighten the antenna cable plugs collar onto the radios jack. 6. Give a final tug, by hand, to the collar, and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 7. Use the rubber-coated pliers to grip the plugs knurled collar, then turn clockwise to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. Turning counterclockwise loosens the collar. NOTE: Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. 2-14 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s). Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. The microphone hang-up clip must be grounded. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. 2.7 Completing the Installation Complete the installation by connecting the power wires and plugging in the microphone cable to the mobile. Chapter 3 Options and Accessories Installation 3.1 Accessory Installation The accessories must be installed through the rear accessory connector that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Most of the Motorola-approved accessories are supplied with female terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the rear accessory connector. Insert the female terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate locations. The accessory connector assembly is provided together with the accessory. Connect the accessory connector assembly to the rear accessory connector on the back of the mobile. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittences and may cause damage to the plug. Rear Accessory Connector Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-2 Pin No. Table 3-1 Rear Accessory Connector Pin Functions Pin Name Pin Function Pin Name Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 USB+

USB-

VBUS USB/MAP_ID GND MAP_ID_2 MAP_ID_1 SW B+

USB + (Data) USB - (Data) USB Power (5V from USB accessory/cable) USB/MAP_ID Ground Accessory Identifier Accessory Identifier Switched Battery Voltage PWRGND Ground SPKR-

SPKR+

Tx Audio Audio GND Speaker - (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Speaker + (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Rear External Microphone Input4 Audio Ground AUX Audio 1 PUBLIC Address 1 Pin No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Rx Audio AUX Audio 2 Receive Live Audio2 PUBLIC Address 2 GND Ground GP5-1 (PTT) GND 5V Level GPIO, PTT Input1 Ground GP5-2 (Monitor) 5V Level GPIO, Monitor Input3 GP5-6 GP5-3 GP5-7 5V Level GPIO 5V Level GPIO, Channel Activity Function 5V Level GPIO EMERGENCY Emergency Switch Input GP5-8 5V Level GPIO IGN SENSE VIP-1 Ignition Sense5 12V Tolerant, 5V GPIO, External Alarm 1 Pulling this line to ground will activate PTT function, activating the AUX_MIC input. 2 Fixed level (independent of volume level) received audio signal, including alert tones. Flat or de-emphasis are programmed by CPS. Output voltage is approximately 330 mVrms per 1kHz of deviation. 3 This input is used to detect when a rear microphone accessory is taken off-hook, to override PL to alert the user to busy traffic prior to transmitting. 4 This microphone signal is independent of the microphone signal on the front microphone connector. The nominal input level is 80mVrms for 60% deviation. The DC impedance is 660 ohms and the AC impedance is 560 ohms. 5 See Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-12 for wiring information. d n u o r G D _ P A M I

B S U 4 3 s u b V

D 2 1

D d n u o r G r e w o P 8 7

B W S

r k p S 10 9

r k p S d n u o r G o d u A i 12 11 i o d u A x T I 1 _ D _ P A M 6 5 I 2 _ D _ P A M

) m r a A l t x E

1 _ P V I 26 25 e s n e S n g I i o d u A x R 14 13 D x R

1 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 16 15 D x T

2 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 18 17

) T T P

1 _ 5 P G 6 _ 5 P G 20 19

) r o t i n o M

2 _ 5 P G 8 _ 5 P G 24 23 w S g r e m E 7 _ 5 P G 22 21

) t c A n a h C

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-3 3.1.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the emergency pushbutton (Motorola part number RLN5926A_) or the footswitch (Motorola part number RLN5929A_) using the hardware that comes with the kit. Press the terminal into the accessory connector housing. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 23 and 18 (see Figure 3-3). Route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. SPST NORMALLY OPEN EMERGENCY SWITCH d n u o r G D _ P A M I

B S U 4 3 s u b V

D 2 1

D d n u o r G r e w o P 8 7

B W S

r k p S 10 9

r k p S d n u o r G o d u A i 12 11 i o d u A x T I 1 _ D _ P A M 6 5 I 2 _ D _ P A M NOTE 1 PIN 23 PIN 18 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR

) m r a A l t x E

1 _ P V I 26 25 e s n e S n g I i o d u A x R 14 13 D x R

1 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 16 15 D x T

2 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 18 17

) T T P

1 _ 5 P G 6 _ 5 P G 20 19

) r o t i n o M

2 _ 5 P G 8 _ 5 P G 24 23 w S g r e m E 7 _ 5 P G 22 21

) t c A n a h C

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram 3-4 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay Allows the user to be alerted to an incoming call when away from the vehicle. The vehicle's horn or lights or both are used depending on which option is connected to the accessory port. When the radio receives a call alert or emergency alarm/call, there is a delay before activating the horn and/or lights. The delay is programmable using the Horn & Lights Delay Time feature in the CPS. Once activated, the Horn and/or Lights remain active depending on the option selected. The Horn & Lights feature can be toggled between ON or OFF, via a short or long programmable button press (Horn &

Lights On/Off) or Horn/Lights (Utilities Menu) feature. For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting (normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 3-4, perform the following procedure:

1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the headlamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the accessory connector. Y d n u o r G D I _ P A M

B S U 4 3 s u b V

D 2 1

D d n u o r G r e w o P 8 7

B W S

r k p S 10 9

r k p S d n u o r G o d u A i 12 11 i o d u A x T I 1 _ D _ P A M 6 5 I 2 _ D _ P A M

) m r a A l t x E

1 _ P V I 26 25 e s n e S n g I i o d u A x R 14 13 D x R

1 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 16 15 D x T

2 t i u O o d u A x u A d n u o r G 18 17

) T T P

1 _ 5 P G 6 _ 5 P G 20 19

) r o t i n o M

2 _ 5 P G 8 _ 5 P G 24 23 w S g r e m E 7 _ 5 P G 22 21

) t c A n a h C

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-5 3.1.3 External Speaker DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output (dc voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit will result if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. C a u t i o n The external speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the external speaker can mount permanently on the dashboard or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the external speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the external speaker out of the way so that it will not be kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the external speaker as follows:

1. Use the external speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the external speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure the wires are out of the way and will not be snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting 3-6 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation Notes Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:

Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"

Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio intermittently resets Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off via the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control heads on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicles fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTE: Motorola recommends protecting or isolating the radios ignition sense input from voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and etc.), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (i.e. MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 volts will suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only via the control heads on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This will mean the ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring will be necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 4-2 4.2 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicles chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and etc.), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radios receive performance. 4.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC) from the radios ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radios ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter will introduce a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and etc.), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, etc. are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting 4-3 4.4 Jump-Start the Vehicle Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. C a u t i o n The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. 1. Locate the ignition sense line and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with any moving parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owners manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. 2. Refer to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 4-4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Notes Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. See Related Publications on page 1-iv for the radio basic service manuals which consists the parts list and part numbers for ordering. A.2 Motorola Online Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at:

https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com To register for online access, please call 1-800-422-4210 (for U.S. and Canada Service Centers only). International customers can obtain assistance by go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com , select your region > SUPPORT. Mail orders are only accepted by the U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD):

A.3 Mail Orders Motorola 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor - Order Processing Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. A.4 Telephone Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time) Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.) 1-800-422-4210 1-847-538-8023 (United States and Canada) U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD) 1-877-873-4668 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) Replacement Parts Ordering Fax Orders A-2 A.5 Fax Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 1-800-622-6210 1-847-576-3023 (International) USFGMD

(Federal Government Orders) 1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Purchase Orders) A.6 Parts Identification Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 1-800-422-4210 A.7 Product Customer Service Radio Products and Solutions Organization (United States and Canada) 1-800-927-2744

* The Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO) was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). Appendix B Motorola Service Centers B.1 Servicing Information If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, please send the radio to a Motorola Service Center as listed below. B.2 Motorola Service Center 1220 Don Haskins Drive Suite A El Paso, TX 79936 Tel: 915-872-8200 B.3 Motorola Federal Technical Center 10105 Senate Drive Lanham, MD 20706 Tel: 1-800-969-6680 Fax: 1-800-784-4133 181 Whitehall Drive Markham, Ontario, L3R 9T1 Tel: 1-800-543-3222 Fax: 1-888-331-9872 or 1-905-948-5970 B.4 Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center B-2 Motorola Service Centers Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center Notes Index I ignition installation cable ....................................................................2-12 examples ...............................................................2-1 Index accessories installing antenna dash mount

........................................................3-1 cable, see Cables, antenna connection ...........................................................2-14 diagrams ..............................................................2-14 installing ...............................................................2-12 mounting ..............................................................2-12 base stations .............................................................1-6 black lead ..................................................................2-9 cables antenna .........................................................2-4, 2-14 connection .............................................................4-1 diagrams ............................. 2-2, 2-3, 2-10, 2-11, 2-14 ignition .................................................................2-12 ignition sense .......................................................2-12 power .....................................................................2-9

............................................................1-5 configurations dash mount control head dash mount see also specific model names

............................................................1-5 control stations ..........................................................1-6 dash mount accessories installations ........................................3-1 configuration ..........................................................1-5 installation .......................................................2-2, 2-3 radio dimensions ....................................................1-2 trunnion ..................................................................2-6 emergency footswitch ................................................3-3 emergency pushbutton ..............................................3-3 A B C D E F H J J2 L M O P R S T pin configuration .............................................2-2, 2-3 leads black ......................................................................2-9 light relay ...................................................................3-4 locking kit, installing ...................................................2-7 microphone hang-up clip, standard .........................................2-15 S-hook ...................................................................2-6 mounting configurations ............................................2-4 dash ................................................................1-5, 2-6 ordering replacement parts ...................................... A-1 parts, ordering replacement pin

..................................... A-1 functions ................................................................3-2

...........................................................2-1 removal tool pin configurations J2 ....................................................................2-2, 2-3 pushbutton, emergency .............................................3-3 rear accessory jack, see J2 relays horn ........................................................................3-4

........................................................................3-4 light replacement parts, ordering ..................................... A-1 footswitch, emergency ...............................................3-3 speaker connecting ...........................................................2-15 mounting ................................................................3-5 horn relay ..................................................................3-4 tools, required ............................................................2-1 trunnion Index-2 bracket for speaker ................................................ 3-5 dash mount ............................................................ 2-6 locking kit ............................................................... 2-7 mounting bracket

................................................... 2-6 orientation .............................................................. 2-5 transmission hump mounting ................................ 2-6 W wiring diagrams ......................................................... 2-2 Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2006 2016 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. August 2016. www.motorolasolutions.com

*6880309T23*

6880309T23-FA

 

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 5550/XPR 5550e, XPR 5580/XPR 5580e ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY MOBILE RADIO USER GUIDE en-US fr-CA AUGUST 2020 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*MN003677A01*

MN003677A01-AG English Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Address: 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL. 60196 Model Name: XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

2 1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. For country code selection usage (WLAN devices) NOTICE:

The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regula-

tion, all Wi-Fi products marketed in the US must be fixed to US operation channels only. English 3 English Contents Supplier's Declaration of Conformity.............................. 2 Important Safety Information........................................ 34 Notice to Users (FCC).................................................. 35 Notice to Users (Industry Canada)............................... 36 Software Version.......................................................... 37 Copyrights.................................................................... 38 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 40 Radio Care................................................................... 41 Chapter 1: Getting Started........................................... 43 1.1 Turning the Radio On.................................. 43 1.2 Turning the Radio Off.................................. 43 1.3 Adjusting the Volume...................................43 Chapter 2: Radio Controls............................................44 2.1 Volume/Channel Knob.................................44 2.1.1 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference.............................................. 45 2.2 Keypad Microphone Buttons....................... 46 Chapter 3: WAVE......................................................... 48 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................48 4 3.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode........................................... 48 3.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls............49 3.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls................................. 49 3.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls................................ 50 3.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode ........................................... 50 3.2.1 Setting Active WAVE Channels .... 51 3.2.2 Viewing WAVE Channel Information..............................................51 3.2.3 Viewing WAVE Endpoints Information..............................................52 3.2.4 Changing WAVE Configuration..... 52 3.2.5 Making WAVE Group Calls............53 3.2 WAVE Tactical/5000....................................51 Part I: Capacity Max..................................................... 54 4.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button......................... 54 4.2 Programmable Buttons................................54 4.3 Assignable Radio Functions........................ 55 4.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions...... 57 4.5 Accessing Programmed Functions..............57 4.6 Status Indicators..........................................58 4.6.1 Icons.............................................. 58 4.6.2 LED Indicator................................. 64 4.6.3 Tones.............................................65 4.6.3.1 Audio Tones.....................65 4.6.3.2 Indicator Tones................ 66 4.7 Registration................................................. 66 4.8 Zone and Channel Selections..................... 67 4.8.1 Selecting Zones ............................ 67 4.8.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search............................................68 4.8.3 Selecting a Call Type.....................68 4.8.4 Selecting a Site..............................69 4.8.5 Roam Request...............................69 4.8.6 Site Lock On/Off............................ 70 4.8.7 Site Restriction...............................70 4.8.8 Site Trunking .................................70 4.9 Calls.............................................................71 4.9.1 Group Calls....................................72 4.9.1.1 Making Group Calls......... 72 4.9.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List................ 73 4.9.2 Broadcast Call .............................. 78 English 4.9.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 74 4.9.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search ................75 4.9.1.5 Responding to Group Calls............................................. 77 4.9.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls .. 78 4.9.2.2 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List ................. 78 4.9.2.3 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key................................. 79 4.9.2.4 Receiving Broadcast Calls ............................................ 80 4.9.3.1 Making Private Calls........ 81 4.9.3.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 81 4.9.3.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search ................82 5 4.9.3 Private Call.................................... 80 English 6 4.9.4 All Calls .........................................87 4.9.3.4 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button ..... 84 4.9.3.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial.................. 85 4.9.3.6 Receiving Private Calls.... 86 4.9.3.7 Accepting Private Calls ... 86 4.9.3.8 Declining Private Calls .... 87 4.9.4.1 Making All Calls .............. 87 4.9.4.2 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ................................ 88 4.9.4.3 Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search.................89 4.9.4.4 Receiving All Calls .......... 90 4.9.5.1 Making Phone Calls......... 91 4.9.5.2 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button

.......92 4.9.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List ............... 94 4.9.5.4 Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search.................97 4.9.5 Phone Calls................................... 91 4.9.5.5 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial.................. 99 4.9.5.6 Dual Tone Multi Frequency.................................. 102 4.9.5.6.1 Initiating DTMF Calls................................ 102 4.9.5.7 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls........................ 102 4.9.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls.................. 103 4.9.5.9 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls................. 103 4.9.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt.......... 104 4.9.7 Call Preemption........................... 104 4.9.8 Voice Interrupt............................. 105 4.9.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt.105 4.10 Advanced Features................................. 106 4.10.1 Call Queue.................................106 4.10.2 Priority Call................................ 106 4.10.3 Talkgroup Scan .........................107 4.10.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off........................... 107 4.10.4 Receive Group List.................... 108 4.10.5 Priority Monitor...........................108 4.10.5.1 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup................................... 109 4.10.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation.......... 110 4.10.6.1 Adding Talkgroup Affiliation.................................... 110 4.10.6.2 Removing Talkgroup Affiliation.................................... 111 4.10.7 Talkback ................................... 112 4.10.8 Bluetooth....................................112 4.10.8.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off....................................... 113 4.10.8.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................... 114 4.10.8.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode.................... 115 4.10.8.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................... 115 4.10.8.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device................. 116 4.10.8.6 Viewing Device Details 116 English 4.10.8.7 Deleting Device Name. 117 4.10.8.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain.......117 4.10.9 Indoor Location.......................... 118 4.10.9.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.................................... 118 4.10.9.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information... 120 4.10.10 Multi-Site Controls................... 120 4.10.10.1 Enabling Manual Site Search........................................120 4.10.10.2 Site Lock On/Off.........120 4.10.10.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List.................................... 121 4.10.11 Home Channel Reminder........ 121 4.10.11.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder..................... 121 4.10.11.2 Setting New Home Channels....................................122 4.10.12 Remote Monitor....................... 122 4.10.12.1 Initiating Remote Monitor....................................... 123 7 4.10.12.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ............................................ 123 4.10.12.3 Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial.............................................124 4.10.13 Contacts Settings.....................125 4.10.13.1 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys ....126 4.10.13.2 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys .......................................... 127 4.10.13.3 Adding New Contacts

................................................... 128 4.10.14 Call Indicator Settings..............128 4.10.14.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls............................... 129 4.10.14.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages ..........................129 English 8 4.10.14.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts...................................130 4.10.14.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls........................... 131 4.10.14.5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text........ 131 4.10.14.6 Assigning Ring Styles 132 4.10.14.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..............................133 4.10.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls. 133 4.10.15.2 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List........................ 134 4.10.15.3 Deleting Calls from the Call List................................ 134 4.10.15.4 Deleting All Calls from the Call List ............................... 135 4.10.15.5 Viewing Details from the Call List................................ 136 4.10.15 Call Log Features ................... 133 4.10.16 Call Alert Operation................. 136 4.10.16.1 Making Call Alerts...... 137 4.10.16.2 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............. 137 4.10.16.3 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................138 4.10.17 Dynamic Caller Alias................138 4.10.17.1 Viewing the Caller Aliases List................................. 138 4.10.17.2 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List....... 139 4.10.18 Mute Mode...............................139 4.10.18.1 Turning On Mute Mode.......................................... 140 4.10.18.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer.......................................... 140 4.10.18.3 Exiting Mute Mode..... 141 4.10.19 Emergency Operation..............141 4.10.19.1 Sending Emergency Alarms........................................ 142 4.10.19.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call......................... 143 4.10.19.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow....... 145 4.10.20 Status Message....................... 149 English 4.10.19.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms ....................................... 146 4.10.19.5 Responding to Emergency Alarms ....................147 4.10.19.6 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call...... 148 4.10.19.7 Exiting Emergency Mode.......................................... 149 4.10.20.1 Sending Status Messages...................................149 4.10.20.2 Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button................ 150 4.10.20.3 Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List............................................. 151 4.10.20.4 Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial. 152 4.10.20.5 Viewing Status Messages...................................153 4.10.20.6 Responding to Status Messages...................................153 9 English 4.10.20.7 Deleting a Status Message.................................... 154 4.10.20.8 Deleting All Status Messages ..................................155 4.10.21 Text Messaging ...................... 155 4.10.21.1 Text Messages...........156 4.10.21.1.1 Viewing Text Messages........................ 156 4.10.21.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages........................ 156 4.10.21.1.3 Responding to Text Messages............ 157 4.10.21.1.4 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text....................... 157 4.10.21.1.5 Resending Text Messages................ 159 4.10.21.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages................ 159 4.10.21.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial............... 160 10 4.10.21.1.8 Editing Text Messages........................ 160 4.10.21.1.9 Writing Text Messages........................ 161 4.10.21.1.10 Sending Text Messages................ 162 4.10.21.1.11 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 163 4.10.21.1.12 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 163 4.10.21.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages................ 165 4.10.21.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages................ 165 4.10.21.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder............ 166 4.10.21.2.4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder ..... 166 4.10.21.2 Sent Text Messages.. 164 4.10.21.3 Saved Text Messages

................................................... 167 4.10.21.3.1 Viewing Saved Text Messages.....167 4.10.21.3.2 Editing Saved Text Messages................ 168 4.10.21.3.3 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder..... 168 4.10.21.4 Quick Text Messages

................................................... 169 4.10.21.4.1 Sending Quick Text Messages .....169 4.10.22 Text Entry Configuration.......... 170 4.10.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct..............................170 4.10.22.2 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict.............................. 171 4.10.22.3 Sentence Cap............ 172 4.10.22.4 Viewing Custom Words.........................................173 4.10.22.5 Editing Custom Words

................................................... 173 4.10.23 Job Tickets...............................177 English 4.10.22.6 Adding Custom Words

................................................... 174 4.10.22.7 Deleting a Custom Word.......................................... 175 4.10.22.8 Deleting All Custom Words.........................................176 4.10.23.1 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder.............................. 178 4.10.23.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server..................... 178 4.10.23.3 Creating Job Tickets.. 179 4.10.23.4 Responding to Job Tickets........................................179 4.10.23.5 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template.180 4.10.23.6 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template......................... 181 4.10.23.7 Deleting Job Tickets...181 4.10.23.8 Deleting All Job Tickets........................................182 4.10.24 Privacy..................................... 183 11 English 12 4.10.24.1 Turning Privacy On or Off.............................................. 184 4.10.25 Stun/Revive............................. 184 4.10.25.1 Stunning a Radio....... 185 4.10.25.2 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List ............. 185 4.10.25.3 Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................ 186 4.10.25.4 Reviving a Radio........ 187 4.10.25.5 Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List.............. 188 4.10.25.6 Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial................ 188 4.10.26 Radio Kill..................................189 4.10.28 Password Lock........................ 190 4.10.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password.................... 190 4.10.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State.............................. 191 4.10.28.3 Turning Password Lock On or Off............................191 4.10.28.4 Changing Passwords. 192 4.10.29 Notification List ....................... 193 4.10.29.1 Accessing Notification List ............................................ 194 4.10.30 Over-the-Air Programming ......194 4.10.31 Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes.............195 4.10.32 Received Signal Strength Indicator................................................ 195 4.10.32.1 Viewing RSSI Values. 195 4.10.33 Front Panel Configuration........196 4.10.33.1 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode....................196 4.10.33.2 Editing FPC Mode Parameters................................ 196 4.10.34.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.............................................. 198 4.10.34.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control)...................................... 198 4.10.34.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a 4.10.27 Lone Worker............................ 190 4.10.34 Wi-Fi Operation........................197 Designated Radio (Group Control)...................................... 199 4.10.34.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 200 4.10.34.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status......................201 4.10.34.6 Refreshing the Network List............................... 201 4.10.34.7 Adding a Network.......202 4.10.34.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points.............. 202 4.10.34.9 Removing Network Access Points............................ 203 4.10.35 Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA)............................. 204 4.10.35.1 Making DGNA Calls... 205 4.10.35.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls........................................... 205 4.10.35.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls....... 206 4.11 Utilities..................................................... 206 4.11.1 Power Levels............................. 206 4.11.1.1 Setting Power Levels... 206 English 4.11.2 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.....................................................207 4.11.3 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......................................................... 208 4.11.4 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels.........................................208 4.11.5 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off......................................................... 209 4.11.6 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off......................................................... 210 4.11.7 Setting Text Message Alert Tones....................................................210 4.11.8 Changing Display Modes...........211 4.11.9 Adjusting Display Brightness..... 212 4.11.10 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off

..............................................................212 4.11.11 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......................................................... 213 4.11.12 Turning Public Address System On or Off.................................. 214 4.11.13 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................... 214 4.11.14 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off............................................... 215 13 English 14 4.11.15 Setting Languages...................216 4.11.16 Identifying Cable Type............. 216 4.11.17 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off .............................................. 217 4.11.18 Turning Option Board On or Off......................................................... 217 4.11.19 Text-to-Speech........................ 217 4.11.19.1 Setting Text-to-

Speech.......................................217 4.11.20 Setting Menu Timer................. 218 4.11.21 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 219 4.11.22 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off......................................................... 219 4.11.23 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 220 4.11.24 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.....................................................221 4.11.25 Audio Ambience.......................222 4.11.25.1 Setting Audio Ambience................................... 222 4.11.26 Audio Profiles...........................223 4.11.26.1 Setting Audio Profiles.223 4.11.27 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................... 224 4.11.28 General Radio Information ......224 4.11.28.1 Checking Radio Alias and ID ....................................... 225 4.11.28.2 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions..............225 4.11.28.3 Checking Software Update Information.................... 226 4.11.28.4 Checking GNSS Information................................. 226 4.11.28.5 Displaying Site Information................................. 227 4.11.29 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details..................................227 Part II: Connect Plus.................................................. 229 5.1 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode................................................................229 5.1.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button..........229 5.1.2 Programmable Buttons................ 229 5.1.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions................................... 230 5.1.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions..........................231 5.1.3 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode.............................. 232 5.1.3.1 Display Icons..................232 5.1.3.2 Call Icons....................... 234 5.1.3.3 Advanced Menu Icons... 235 5.1.3.4 Sent Item Icons ............. 236 5.1.3.5 Bluetooth Device Icons.. 236 5.1.3.6 LED Indicator................. 237 5.1.3.7 Indicator Tones.............. 238 5.1.3.8 Alert Tones.....................238 5.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes..............238 5.2 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode........................................................239 5.2.1 Selecting a Site............................239 5.2.1.1 Roam Request............... 239 5.2.1.2 Site Lock On/Off.............239 5.2.1.3 Site Restriction............... 240 5.2.2 Selecting a Zone..........................240 5.2.3 Using Multiple Networks.............. 241 English 5.2.4 Selecting a Call Type...................241 5.2.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call............................................. 242 5.2.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call.......242 5.2.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call..... 243 5.2.5.3 Receiving a Site All Call. 243 5.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call..................... 244 5.2.5.4.1 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call.................................. 244 5.2.5.4.2 Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call.......... 245 5.2.5.5 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call................ 245 5.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi-

Group Call.................................. 245 5.2.6 Making a Radio Call.....................246 5.2.6.1 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob.............. 246 15 English 16 5.2.6.1.1 Making a Group Call.................................. 246 5.2.6.1.2 Making a Private Call...................... 247 5.2.6.1.3 Making a Site All Call............................. 248 5.2.6.1.4 Making a Multi-

group Call........................ 248 5.2.6.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button.... 249 5.2.6.3 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.........................................249 5.2.6.3.1 Making a Private Call...................... 250 5.2.6.4 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button.........................................250 5.2.6.5 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu...............................251 5.2.6.6 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts.....................................252 5.2.6.7 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call................................. 253 5.2.6.8 Making a Buffered Over-

Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call..................... 254 5.2.6.9 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call..................... 255 5.3 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

.........................................................................255 5.3.1 Home Channel Reminder............ 255 5.3.2 Auto Fallback............................... 256 5.3.2.1 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode............................256 5.3.2.2 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode........................ 257 5.3.2.3 Returning to Normal Operation................................... 258 5.3.3 Radio Check................................ 258 5.3.3.1 Sending a Radio Check. 258 5.3.4 Remote Monitor........................... 259 5.3.4.1 Initiating Remote Monitor

................................................... 260 5.3.5 Scan.............................................261 5.3.5.1 Starting and Stopping Scan...........................................261 5.3.5.2 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan...... 262 5.3.6 User Configurable Scan...............262 5.3.7 Turning Scan On or Off................263 5.3.8 Editing the Scan List.................... 264 5.3.9 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu............................. 265 5.3.10 Understanding Scan Operation. 267 5.3.11 Scan Talkback........................... 267 5.3.12 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup.. 268 5.3.13 Contacts Settings.......................269 5.3.13.1 Making a Private Call from Contacts.............................270 5.3.13.2 Making a Call Alias Search........................................270 5.3.13.3 Adding a New Contact. 271 5.3.14 Call Indicator Settings................272 English 5.3.14.1 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert.................................... 272 5.3.14.2 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls............................... 273 5.3.14.3 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message............................ 273 5.3.14.4 Selecting a Ring Alert Type........................................... 274 5.3.14.5 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.......................................275 5.3.15 Call Log......................................275 5.3.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls... 275 5.3.15.2 Deleting a Call from a Call List...................................... 276 5.3.15.3 Viewing Details from a Call List...................................... 276 5.3.16 Call Alert Operation................... 277 5.3.16.1 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................277 5.3.16.2 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List.................. 277 17 English 18 5.3.16.3 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button... 278 5.3.17 Mute Mode.................................279 5.3.17.1 Turning On Mute Mode 279 5.3.17.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer.......................................... 279 5.3.17.3 Exiting Mute Mode....... 280 5.3.18 Emergency Operation................281 5.3.18.1 Receiving an Incoming Emergency................................. 282 5.3.18.2 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List............. 283 5.3.18.3 Deleting the Emergency Details..................... 283 5.3.18.4 Responding to an Emergency Call..........................284 5.3.18.5 Responding to an Emergency Alert........................ 284 5.3.18.6 Ignore Emergency Revert Call................................. 285 5.3.18.7 Initiating an Emergency Call.............................................285 5.3.19 Text Messaging ........................ 287 5.3.18.8 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow............ 286 5.3.18.9 Initiating an Emergency Alert............................................286 5.3.18.10 Exiting Emergency Mode.......................................... 287 5.3.19.1 Sending a Quick Text Message.................................... 288 5.3.19.2 Sending Quick Text Messages with the One Touch Access Button............................ 288 5.3.19.3 Accessing the Drafts Folder.........................................289 5.3.19.3.1 Viewing a Saved Text Message...... 289 5.3.19.3.2 Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message..........................290 5.3.19.3.3 Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts...................... 291 5.3.19.4 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages...........................291 5.3.19.4.1 Resending a Text Message..................292 5.3.19.4.2 Forwarding a Text Message..................292 5.3.19.5 Managing Sent Text Messages...................................292 5.3.19.5.1 Viewing a Sent Text Message..................293 5.3.19.5.2 Sending a Sent Text Message......... 293 5.3.19.5.3 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items....................... 295 5.3.19.6 Receiving a Text Message.................................... 295 5.3.19.7 Reading a Text Message.................................... 296 5.3.19.8 Managing Received Text Messages...........................296 5.3.19.8.1 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox..296 5.3.19.8.2 Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox............................... 297 English 5.3.19.8.3 Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox..298 5.3.19.8.4 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 299 5.3.20 Privacy....................................... 300 5.3.20.1 Making a Privacy-

Enabled (Scrambled) Call.......... 301 5.3.21 Security......................................301 5.3.21.1 Radio Disable...............301 5.3.21.2 Radio Enable............... 303 5.3.22 Bluetooth Operation...................305 5.3.22.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off....................................... 305 5.3.22.2 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device................. 306 5.3.22.3 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).................. 307 5.3.22.4 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device........................308 5.3.22.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device................. 308 19 English 20 5.3.22.6 Viewing Device Details 309 5.3.22.7 Deleting Device Name. 309 5.3.22.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain.......310 5.3.23 Indoor Location.......................... 310 5.3.23.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off.................................... 310 5.3.23.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information... 312 5.3.24 Notification List.......................... 312 5.3.24.1 Accessing the Notification List...........................312 5.3.25 Wi-Fi Operation..........................313 5.3.25.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off314 5.3.25.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control)...................................... 314 5.3.25.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control)...................................... 315 5.3.25.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 316 5.3.26 Utilities....................................... 320 5.3.25.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status......................317 5.3.25.6 Refreshing the Network List............................................. 318 5.3.25.7 Adding a Network.........318 5.3.25.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points.............. 319 5.3.25.9 Removing Network Access Points............................ 320 5.3.26.1 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off............... 321 5.3.26.2 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level...................321 5.3.26.3 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off........................... 322 5.3.26.4 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off...................323 5.3.26.5 Setting the Power Level

................................................... 323 5.3.26.6 Changing the Display Mode.......................................... 324 5.3.26.7 Adjusting the Display Brightness.................................. 325 5.3.26.8 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off........................ 326 5.3.26.9 Language..................... 326 5.3.26.10 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off..................... 327 5.3.26.11 Identifying Cable Type

................................................... 327 5.3.26.12 Voice Announcement.328 5.3.26.13 Menu Timer................ 328 5.3.26.14 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off.................................... 329 5.3.26.15 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference.................330 5.3.26.16 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D)...................................... 330 5.3.26.17 Intelligent Audio......... 331 5.3.26.18 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.................................... 332 5.3.26.19 Turning GNSS On or Off.............................................. 333 5.3.26.20 Accessing General Radio Information.......................334 English 5.3.26.20.1 Checking the Radio Model Number Index............................... 334 5.3.26.20.2 Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File..........335 5.3.26.20.3 Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) 335 5.3.26.20.4 Checking the Site Info........................... 336 5.3.26.20.5 Checking the Radio ID.......................... 336 5.3.26.20.6 Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version............337 5.3.26.20.7 Checking for Updates........................... 338 5.3.26.21 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details............. 345 Part III: Other Systems............................................... 347 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button..................................347 6.2 Programmable Buttons..............................347 6.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions........ 348 21 English 22 6.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.............................................. 350 6.2.3 Accessing Programmed Functions.............................................. 351 6.3 Status Indicators........................................351 6.3.1 Icons............................................ 352 6.3.2 LED Indicators ............................ 358 6.3.3 Tones...........................................359 6.3.3.1 Indicator Tones.............. 359 6.3.3.2 Audio Tones...................360 6.4 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes....360 6.5 Icon Information.........................................361 6.6 IP Site Connect..........................................361 6.7 Capacity PlusSingle-Site

.................... 362

...................... 362 6.8 Capacity PlusMulti-Site 6.9 Zone and Channel Selections................... 363 6.9.1 Selecting Zones .......................... 363 6.9.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search..........................................364 6.9.3 Selecting Channels......................364 6.10 Calls.........................................................365 6.10.1 Group Calls................................366 6.10.2 Private Calls

......................... 369 6.10.1.1 Making Group Calls..... 366 6.10.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List ............. 367 6.10.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key

..................... 367 6.10.1.4 Responding to Group Calls........................................... 368 6.10.2.1 Making Private Calls

................................................... 369

.........370 6.10.2.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List 6.10.2.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial 6.10.2.4 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key

..................... 372

...........371 6.10.2.5 Responding to Private Calls

......................................373 6.10.3 All Calls......................................373 6.10.3.1 Receiving All Calls....... 373 6.10.3.2 Making All Calls........... 374 6.10.3.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key

..........................375 6.10.4 Selective Calls

...................... 375 6.10.4.1 Making Selective Calls. 375 6.10.4.2 Responding to Selective Calls

...................... 376 6.10.5 Phone Calls

.......................... 377 377 6.10.5.1 Making Phone Calls 6.10.5.2 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List 6.10.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial

...........381

.........378 6.10.5.4 Making Group, Private, Phone or All Calls by Using the Alias Search

..................... 383 6.10.5.5 Dual Tone Multi Frequency.................................. 385 6.10.5.5.1 Initiating DTMF Calls..................... 385 6.10.5.6 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls

............. 386 English 6.10.5.7 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls

................... 386 6.10.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls

............387 6.10.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt

...388 6.10.7 Talkaround.................................388 6.10.7.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes........................................ 388 6.10.8 Broadcast Voice Calls................389 6.10.8.1 Making Broadcast Voice Calls................................. 389 6.10.8.2 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key 6.10.8.3 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search 6.10.8.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls................................. 392

.................................. 390

. 390 6.10.9 Unaddressed Calls.................... 392 6.10.9.1 Making Unaddressed Calls........................................... 393 23 6.10.9.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls.....................393 6.10.10 Open Voice Channel Mode

(OVCM).................................................394 6.10.10.1 Making OVCM Calls...394 6.10.10.2 Responding to OVCM Calls........................................... 395 6.11 Advanced Features................................. 395 6.11.1 Home Channel Reminder.......... 396 6.11.1.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder..................... 396 6.11.1.2 Setting New Home Channels....................................396 6.11.2 Radio Check

......................... 397 6.11.2.1 Sending Radio Checks

...............................................397 6.11.2.2 Sending Radio Checks by Using the Manual Dial

......398 6.11.3 Remote Monitor......................... 399 6.11.3.1 Initiating Remote Monitor....................................... 399 English 24 6.11.3.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List ............................................ 400 6.11.3.3 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial

........................................400 6.11.4 Scan Lists.................................. 402 6.11.4.1 Viewing Entries in the Scan List ................................... 402 6.11.4.2 Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search .......................................402 6.11.4.3 Adding New Entries to the Scan List.............................. 403 6.11.4.4 Adding New Entries to the Scan List by Using the Alias Search

.................................. 404 6.11.4.5 Deleting Entries from the Scan List.............................. 405 6.11.4.6 Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List.............. 406 6.11.5 Scan...........................................406 6.11.5.1 Turning Scan On or Off

................................................... 407 6.11.5.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning 408 6.11.5.3 Deleting Nuisance Channels....................................408 6.11.5.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels....................................408 6.11.6 Vote Scan

....................... 409 6.11.7 Contacts Settings.......................409 6.11.7.1 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List ............. 410 6.11.7.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List 6.11.7.3 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys

................................................... 411

.........410 6.11.7.4 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys

................................................... 412 6.11.7.5 Adding New Contacts . 413 6.11.7.6 Setting Default Contact

...............................................414 English 6.11.8 Call Indicator Settings................414 6.11.8.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts...................................414 6.11.8.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls

..........................415

...................... 416 6.11.8.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls 6.11.8.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages 6.11.8.5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text........ 417

..................... 417 6.11.8.6 Assigning Ring Styles.. 418 6.11.8.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.......................................419 6.11.9 Call Log Features ..................... 419 6.11.9.1 Viewing Recent Calls... 419 6.11.9.2 Deleting Calls from the Call List

................................. 420 25 English 26 6.11.9.3 Viewing Call List Details

...................................420 6.11.9.4 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List

...................421 6.11.10 Call Alert Operation................. 421 6.11.10.1 Making Call Alerts...... 422 6.11.10.2 Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List.............. 422 6.11.10.3 Making Call Alerts by Using the Manual Dial................ 423 6.11.10.4 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................423 6.11.11 Dynamic Caller Alias................424 6.11.11.1 Viewing the Caller Aliases List................................. 424 6.11.11.2 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List....... 425 6.11.12 Mute Mode...............................425 6.11.12.1 Turning On Mute Mode.......................................... 425 6.11.12.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer.......................................... 426 6.11.12.3 Exiting Mute Mode..... 427 6.11.13 Emergency Operation .............427 6.11.13.1 Receiving Emergency Alarms........................................ 428 6.11.13.2 Responding to Emergency Alarms.....................429 6.11.13.3 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm...................... 430 6.11.13.4 Sending Emergency Alarms ....................................... 430 6.11.13.5 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call ........................ 431 6.11.13.6 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow .................. 433 6.11.13.7 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow

..433 6.11.13.8 Reinitiating Emergency Mode....................... 434 6.11.13.9 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm...................... 434 6.11.13.10 Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List............. 435 6.11.14 Text Messaging ...................... 435 6.11.14.1 Text Messages

..... 436 6.11.14.1.1 Viewing Text Messages........................ 436 6.11.14.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages........................ 436

.......437 6.11.14.1.3 Responding to Text Messages 6.11.14.1.4 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text 6.11.14.1.5 Resending Text Messages................ 439

..................438

...........439 6.11.14.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages 6.11.14.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial

.......... 440 6.11.14.1.8 Editing Text Messages........................ 440 6.11.14.1.9 Writing Text Messages........................ 441 English 6.11.14.1.10 Sending Text Messages................ 442 6.11.14.1.11 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox............................... 443 6.11.14.1.12 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox

.......................... 444 6.11.14.2 Sent Text Messages

...........445

...............................................444 6.11.14.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages 6.11.14.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages 6.11.14.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder

...........446

.......446 6.11.14.2.4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder ..... 447 6.11.14.3 Saved Text Messages

................................................... 447 6.11.14.3.1 Viewing Saved Text Messages.....448 27 English 28 6.11.14.3.2 Editing Saved Text Messages................ 448 6.11.14.3.3 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder..... 449 6.11.14.4 Quick Text Messages

...............................................449 6.11.14.4.1 Sending Quick Text Messages 449 6.11.15 Text Entry Configuration.......... 450 6.11.15.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct..............................451 6.11.15.2 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict.............................. 452 6.11.15.3 Sentence Cap............ 452 6.11.15.4 Viewing Custom Words.........................................453 6.11.15.5 Editing Custom Words

................................................... 453 6.11.15.6 Adding Custom Words

................................................... 455 6.11.15.7 Deleting a Custom Word.......................................... 456 6.11.15.8 Deleting All Custom Words.........................................456 6.11.16 Job Tickets...............................457 6.11.16.1 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder.............................. 458 6.11.16.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server..................... 459 6.11.16.3 Creating Job Tickets.. 459 6.11.16.4 Responding to Job Tickets........................................460 6.11.16.5 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template.460 6.11.16.6 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template......................... 461 6.11.16.7 Deleting Job Tickets...462 6.11.16.8 Deleting All Job Tickets........................................463 6.11.17 Privacy

................................463 6.11.17.1 Turning Privacy On or Off

......................................... 464 6.11.18 Multi-Site Control

.......... 465 6.11.18.1 Enabling Manual Site Search........................................465 6.11.18.2 Site Lock On/Off.........466 6.11.18.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List.................................... 466 6.11.19 Security

...............................466 6.11.19.1 Disabling Radios

...467 6.11.19.2 Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List 6.11.19.3 Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial

...........468

.........467 6.11.19.4 Enabling Radios

....469 6.11.19.5 Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List 6.11.19.6 Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial

.........469

...........470 6.11.20 Lone Worker............................ 471 6.11.21 Bluetooth..................................472 6.11.21.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off....................................... 472 6.11.21.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................... 473 English 6.11.21.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode.................... 474 6.11.21.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................... 475 6.11.21.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device.. 476 6.11.21.6 Viewing Device Details........................................ 476 6.11.21.7 Deleting Device Name

................................................... 476 6.11.21.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain.....477 6.11.22 Indoor Location........................ 477 6.11.22.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off......................478 6.11.22.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information... 479 6.11.23 Notification List ....................... 480 6.11.23.1 Accessing Notification List ............................................ 480 29 English 30 6.11.24 Auto-Range Transponder 6.11.30 Wi-Fi Operation........................487 System

.......................................480 6.11.25 Over-the-Air Programming

. 481 6.11.26 Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes.............482 6.11.27 Received Signal Strength Indicator................................................ 482 6.11.27.1 Viewing RSSI Values. 482 6.11.28 Password Lock........................ 483 6.11.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password.................... 483 6.11.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State.............................. 484 6.11.28.3 Turning Password Lock On or Off............................484 6.11.28.4 Changing Passwords. 485 6.11.29 Front Panel Configuration........486 6.11.29.1 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode....................486 6.11.29.2 Editing FPC Mode Parameters................................ 487 6.11.30.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.............................................. 488 6.11.30.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control)...................................... 488 6.11.30.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control)...................................... 489 6.11.30.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 490 6.11.30.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status......................491 6.11.30.6 Refreshing the Network List............................... 492 6.11.30.7 Adding a Network.......492 6.11.30.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points.............. 493 6.11.30.9 Removing Network Access Points............................ 494 6.12 Utilities..................................................... 494 6.12.1 Squelch Levels ......................... 495 6.12.1.1 Setting Squelch Levels

................................................... 495 6.12.2 Power Levels............................. 496 6.12.2.1 Setting Power Levels... 496 6.12.3 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.....................................................497 6.12.4 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off......................................................... 497 6.12.5 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels.........................................498 6.12.6 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off......................................................... 499 6.12.7 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off......................................................... 499 6.12.8 Setting Text Message Alert Tones....................................................500 6.12.9 Changing Display Modes...........501 6.12.10 Adjusting Display Brightness... 501 6.12.11 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off

..............................................................502 6.12.12 Turning LED Indicators On or Off......................................................... 503 English 6.12.13 Turning Public Address System On or Off.................................. 503 6.12.14 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................... 504 6.12.15 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off............................................... 504 6.12.16 Setting Languages...................505 6.12.17 Identifying Cable Type............. 506 6.12.18 Voice Operating Transmission.506 6.12.18.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off.............................................. 507 6.12.19 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off .............................................. 507 6.12.20 Turning Option Board On or Off......................................................... 508 6.12.21 Text-to-Speech........................ 508 6.12.21.1 Setting Text-to-

Speech.......................................508 6.12.22 Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off............................ 509 6.12.23 Setting Menu Timer................. 509 31 English 32 6.12.24 Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 510 6.12.25 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off ..................................... 511 6.12.26 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off......................................................... 511 6.12.27 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 512 6.12.28 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.....................................................513 6.12.33.2 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions..............518 6.12.33.3 Checking Software Update Information.................... 518 6.12.33.4 Checking GNSS Information................................. 519 6.12.33.5 Displaying Site Information................................. 520 6.12.34 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details..................................520 6.12.29 Audio Ambience.......................514 Part IV: Authorized Accessories List.......................... 522 6.12.29.1 Setting Audio Ambience................................... 514 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 529 Special Channel Assignments.........................529 6.12.30 Audio Profiles...........................515 6.12.30.1 Setting Audio Profiles.515 6.12.31 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................... 516 6.12.32 Flexible Receive List

...........516 6.12.32.1 Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off................517 Emergency Channel............................. 529 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 529 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 530 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................532 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................532 6.12.33 General Radio Information ......517 Limited Warranty........................................................ 533 6.12.33.1 Checking Radio Alias and ID ....................................... 518 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 533 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 533 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS............................ 534 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................534 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE......534 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER............................................................534 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS535 VII. GOVERNING LAW................................... 536 English 33 This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. English Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-

Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the user's authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. 34 Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 35 English Notice to Users (Industry Canada) The operation of your Motorola Solutions radio is subject to the Radiocommunications Act and must comply with rules and regulations of the Federal Governments department of Industry Canada. Industry Canada requires that all operators using Private Land Mobile frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. 36 Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.20.02.0000 or later. See Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions on page 225 to determine the software version of your radio. Contact your dealer or administrator for more information. English 37 English Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. 38 Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Open Source Content This product contains Open Source software used under license. Refer to the product installation media for full Open Source Legal Notices and Attribution content. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. English 39 patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including 40 Radio Care This section describes the basic handling precaution of the radio. Table 1: IP Specification IP Specification Description IP67 Allows your radio to with-

stand adverse field condi-

tions such as being sub-

mersed in water. CAUTION:

Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio. If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance. If your radio's battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio English and the battery before attaching the battery to radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio. If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery. To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into radio and your radio's submersibility may be lost. Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label. Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent. Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to your radio. 41 English When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio. 42 Getting Started 1.2 Turning the Radio Off Getting Started provides instructions to prepare your radio for use. 1.1 Turning the Radio On Press the On/Off button. If successful, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. NOTICE:

If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is no tone upon powering up. The green LED lights up. The display shows MOTOTRBO (TM), followed by a welcome message or image. The Home screen lights up. If your radio does not power up, check your battery. Make sure that the battery is charged and properly attached. Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up. English Press and hold the On/Off button. The radio may take up to seven seconds to completely turn off. The display shows Powering Down. 1.3 Adjusting the Volume To adjust the volume of your radio, perform one of the following actions:

To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume Control knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume Control knob counterclockwise. NOTICE:

Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. 43 English Radio Controls This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. 1 On/Off/Information Button 2 Volume/Channel Knob 3 Display 4 Menu/OK Button 5 Scroll Up/Down Buttons 6 Speaker 44 7 Return/Home Button 8 Front Programmable Buttons 9 Accessory Connector 10 LED Indicators 2.1 Volume/Channel Knob The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed for dual volume and channel control, or for volume control only. To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 43. To change the channels, press and hold the Volume/

Channel Knob until the channel selection state is displayed. Turn the Volume/Channel Knob to select the channel. Do one of the following to exit the channel selection state:

Press the Volume/Channel Knob. Press Press

. Wait for the menu timer to expire. 12346591078 2.1.1 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Follow the procedure to set the dual knob operation preference of the radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. English 4 5 Press select. or to Dual Knob. Press to The display shows Volume Only and Volume &

Channel. Press or to the required setting. Press to select. appears beside the selected settings. The A screen returns to the previous menu. 45 You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola Solutions part number RMN5127_) to access your radio features. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. 5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12

13

English 2.2 Keypad Microphone Buttons Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 1 A D G J 2

. B E H K 3

, C F I L 4

2 3 4 5 46 Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 2 N Q U X 3 O R V Y 4 6 S 8 Z 5 7 9 1 M P T W 0

* or del

# or spac e NOTICE:

Press to enter "0" and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. NOTICE:

Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a "*". NOTICE:

Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a "#". English 47 English WAVE Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE) provides a new method of making calls between two or more radios. WAVE allows you to communicate across different networks and devices using Wi-Fi. WAVE calls are made when the radio is connected to an IP network through Wi-

Fi. Your radio supports different system configurations:

WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise WAVE Tactical/5000 The method to initiate a WAVE Call is different for each system type. Refer to the appropriate section depending on the system configuration of your radio. Table 2: WAVE Display Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display when WAVE is enabled. WAVE Connected WAVE is connected. 48 WAVE Disconnected WAVE is disconnected. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to specific models only. 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise 3.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed WAVE button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to WAVE. Press to select. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to WAVE, then shows Preparing WAVE. 3.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls English NOTICE:

Your radio automatically enables Wi-Fi after you switch to WAVE mode. If successful:

The blinking yellow LED turns off. The display shows the WAVE connected icon,

<Talkgroup Alias>, and <Channel Index>. If unsuccessful:

A negative tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows the WAVE disconnected icon and No Connection or Activation: Fail, depending on the error type. NOTICE:

Synchronization occurs when new settings are updated to your radio. When you enter the WAVE mode, your radio displays Syncing.... When the synchronization completes, your radio returns to the home screen. 1 Use the channel selector knob or buttons to select a WAVE talkgroup. 2 To call, press the PTT button. If the call is successful, the display shows the Group Call icon and the WAVE talkgroup alias. If the call is unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a momentary notice of Call Failed or No Participants. 3.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls When you receive a WAVE group call:

A tone sounds. The display shows the group call icon, WAVE talkgroup alias, and caller alias. 49 Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. 3.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls When you receive a WAVE private call:

A tone sounds. The display shows the private call icon and caller alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Mode button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Radio Mode. Press to The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows a momentary notice of Switching to Radio and then shows Preparing Radio. When successful:

The blinking yellow LED turns off. The WAVE connected icon disappears on the status bar. The display shows <Talkgroup Alias> and

<Channel Index>. English 3.1.5 50 English 3.2 WAVE Tactical/5000 3.2.2 Viewing WAVE Channel Information 3.2.1 Setting Active WAVE Channels NOTICE:

WAVE channels are configured through CPS. Your radio automatically enables Wi-Fi and logs in to the WAVE server once you enter WAVE channel. Press to access the menu. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed WAVE Channel List button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to WAVE Channels. Press Press to select. or to WAVE Channels. Press Press to select. Press or to the required WAVE channel. 2 3 4 Press or to the required WAVE channel. or to View Details. Press Press to select. Press to select. The display shows the WAVE channel details. 1 2 3 4 Press to select. or to Set As Active. Press The display shows beside the selected channel. 51 3.2.3 Viewing WAVE Endpoints Information 1 Do one of the following:

Changing WAVE Configuration Follow the procedure to set the WAVE server IP address, user ID, and password. Press the programmed Contact button. Skip to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Endpoints. Press to Press or to the required WAVE Endpoint. Press to select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press or to WAVE. Press to select. Press to select View Details. Press to select Server Address. Press The display shows the WAVE Endpoint details. to change the server address. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to User ID. Press to change the user ID. Press to select. English 2 3 4 3.2.4 52 7 8 Press to Password. Press to view or change the WAVE password. Press to select. Press changes made. to Apply. Press to apply all the The display shows the positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Radio Settings screen. 3.2.5 Making WAVE Group Calls 1 Select the WAVE channel with the required group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line displays the Group Call icon and alias. The second text line displays the WAVE group alias. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. English Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds.The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 53 English Capacity Max Capacity Max is a trunked radio system based on MOTOTRBO control channels. MOTOTRBO digital radio products are marketed by Motorola Solutions primarily to business and industrial users. MOTOTRBO uses the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) Digital Mobile Radio (DMR) standard, that is, two-slot Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), to pack simultaneous voice or data in a 12.5 kHz channel (6.25 kHz equivalent). 4.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button serves two basic purposes. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. make a new call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 54 If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an Emergency call. You should release the PTT button. 4.2 Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Pressing and releasing rapidly. Short press Long press While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 427 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. English 4.3 Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons by your dealer or system administrator. Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Contacts Call Alert Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Call Log Selects the call log list. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or off. 55 English Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Manual Site Roam Starts the manual site search. Mic AGC Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Remote Monitor Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Site Info Site Lock Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Displays the current Capacity Max site name and ID. Notifications One Touch Access Provides direct access to the Notifications list. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message. Telemetry Control Option Board Feature Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Toggles privacy on or off. Public Address (PA) Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Phone Privacy 56 Toggle Call Priority Level Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/

Normal. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. English Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Announcement for Channel Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Display Mode Power Level Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of zones. 4.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Toggles transmit power level between high and low. 4.5 Accessing Programmed Functions Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. Tones/Alerts Backlight Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 57 3 Do one of the following:

Table 3: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. English 4.6.1 Icons 58 Press to return to the previous screen. Long press to return to the Home screen. Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone Buttons on page 46. 4.6 Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Blue-

tooth device is connected. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. DGNA Radio is in DGNA Talkgroup. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-

ble. GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available1 Indoor location status is on and avail-

able. Indoor Location Unavailable1 Indoor location status is on but un-

available due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Blue-

tooth. Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. English Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only) Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. Indicates Priority Talkgroup 1. Priority 1 Priority 2 Indicates Priority Talkgroup 2. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. 1 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. 59 English This icon is only displayed while re-

ceiving. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Response Inhibit Response Inhibit is enabled. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Shared Frequency Indicates radio is locking to shared control channel. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Status Indicates a new status message. 2 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. 60 Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Wi-Fi Excellent2 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good2 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average2 Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor2 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable2 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Table 4: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not selec-

ted. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Table 5: Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. English Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Bluetooth Sensor Device2 Bluetooth-enabled sensor device, such as gas sensor. Table 6: Call Icons The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in pro-

gress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID

(number). 61 Call Priority High Indicating Call Priority Level High is enabled. DGNA Call Indicates a DGNA Call is in progress. Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dis-

patcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). Table 7: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. English 62 In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Successfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. Table 8: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. English Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. In Progress or The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledge-

ment. The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. 63 Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Table 9: Sent Items Icons English or or or or 4.6.2 64 Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. LED Indicator Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Send Failed The text message cannot be sent. Sent Successfully The text message has been success-

fully sent. The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is detecting activity over the air. NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Solid Yellow Blinking Yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. English Low Pitched Tone 4.6.3.1 Audio Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Continuous Tone Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Periodic Tone Radio is locked. 4.6.3 Tones High Pitched Tone The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. 65 Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. English 4.6.3.2 Indicator Tones Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone 4.7 Registration There are a number of registration-related messages that you may receive. Registering Typically, registration is sent to the system during power-

up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list. The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully 66 but is waiting for a response to the registration messages from the radio. When Registering is displayed on the radio, a tone sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. If the indications persist, the user should change locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site. Out of Range A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is unable to detect a signal from the system or from the current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF) coverage range. When Out of Range is displayed on the radio, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still receives out of range indications while being in an area with good RF coverage. Talkgroup Affiliation Failed A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during registration. A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to affiliate to. When a radio fails to affiliate with a Talkgroup, UKP Alias is displayed in the home screen with a highlighted background. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives affiliation failure indications. Register Denied Registration denied indicators are received when the registration with the system is not accepted. The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration is denied when the system operator has disabled the access of the radio to the system. When a radio is denied registration, Register Denied is displayed on the radio and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. 4.8 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250 Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions.Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions. 4.8.1 Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. English 67 English 2 3 1 2 68 Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. Press or to the required zone. Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 4.8.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Press to access the menu. Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 4.8.3 Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position

(that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. 4.8.4 Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites. 4.8.5 English Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:

The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:

This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. 69 English 4.8.6 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. 4.8.8 Site Trunking The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches for a different network site. When experiencing site restrictions, your radio displays Register Denied and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. Site Trunking is only available with Capacity Max system. A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller to be considered as System Trunking. If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and visual indication to the user to inform the user of their limited functionality. When a radio is in Site Trunking, the radio displays Site Trunking and a repetitive tone sounds. 4.8.7 Site Restriction 70 In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and individual voice calls as well as send text messages to other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate to the radios at the site. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites would be lost. NOTICE:

If there are multiple sites that cover the current location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within coverage. 4.9 Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. NOTICE:

You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. English 71 English Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. 4.9.1.1 Making Group Calls Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. 1 Do one of the following:

NOTICE:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 463 for more information. Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 4.9.1 Group Calls 72 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 68. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first text line shows the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. Press select. 2 3 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, Press to select. you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. 4.9.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List 1 Press to access the menu. English or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. 5 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 73 English 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 4.9.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 74 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. 4.9.1.4 Making Group Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. English 3 4 5 or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and button to proceed. If successful, the press the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, 75 English the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits button to proceed. The DTMF and press the tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to end the call. If deaccess code was Press not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the 8 76 to proceed. The deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. English The call initiator can press Call. to end the Group NOTICE:

The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit 1 Do one of the following:

button or to exit alias alias search. Press search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 4.9.1.5 Responding to Group Calls When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 77 English 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 4.9.2 Broadcast Call Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and alias. A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond. The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of users, the radio must be configured as part of a group. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the 4.9.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls 1 Do one of the following:

4.9.2.2 Making Broadcast Calls Using the Contact List Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 1 See Selecting a Call Type on page 68. Press to access the menu. 78 or to Contacts. Press to Press select. 2 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED blinks. The first line displays the subscriber alias or ID. The second line displays Group Call and the Group Call icon. 5 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the 4.9.2.3 English Making Broadcast Calls Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Calls on your radio using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 79 Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press Broadcast Call. to end the NOTICE:

Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The display shows Talkback Prohibit. The Talkback Prohibit Tone plays momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call. 4.9.2.4 Receiving Broadcast Calls Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your radio. 4.9.3 Private Call When you receive a Broadcast Call:

The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU). OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio presence check and completes the call automatically. The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call. The type of call is configured by the system administrator. English 80 NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 4.9.3.1 Making Private Calls English 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative indicator tone when you initiate the call. If the target radio is not available, a short tone sounds and the display show Party Not Available. 5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone.The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 68. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. 4.9.3.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. 81 English If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 4.9.3.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Alias Search 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. Press to access the menu. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, subscriber ID or alias, and call status. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. 1 2 3 4 or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 4 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. 82 5 or to Call Phone and Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display English shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 8 to end the call. If deaccess code was Press not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the to proceed. The deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. 83 If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button 9 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. NOTICE:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit button or alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. English 4.9.3.4 84 English When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to 5 Do one of the following:

Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. press to proceed. 4.9.3.5 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 85 English The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing

. Accepting Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

The green LED blinks. 4.9.3.6 Receiving Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU):

The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is configured, either OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to Private Calls may or may not require user acknowledgment. For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes and the call connects automatically. 4.9.3.7 86 1 To accept a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:

Press or to Accept and press to answer a Private Call. Press the PTT button on any entry. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. English NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by All Calls pressing

. 4.9.3.8 Declining Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

The green LED blinks. To decline a Private Call configured as FOACSU, do one of the following:

An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on system configuration. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the system cannot respond to an All Call. Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. The system administrator may configure one or both of these in your radio. NOTICE:

Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support System-Wide All Calls. Press or to Reject and press to decline a Private Call. Press to decline a Private Call. 4.9.4.1 Making All Calls 4.9.4 Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 68. 87 English 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. The call initiator can press to end the All Call. 4.9.4.2 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 88 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press to end the All Call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. 4.9.4.3 Making All Calls by Using the Alias Search 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. English 4 5 to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone. Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 89 English 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits button to proceed. The DTMF and press the tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to end the call. If deaccess code was Press not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the to proceed. The deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the 8 90 Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

The call initiator can press to end the All Call. When you receive an All Call, the following occur:

4.9.4.4 Receiving All Calls A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds De-access code through the speaker. The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the call ends during an All Call. 4.9.5 Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a group of radios and a telephone. Depending on how the radio is configured, the following features may or may not be made available:

Access code Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call Ability to reject or accept a phone call The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.9.5.1 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code is not preconfigured in the Contact List, the display shows Access Code:. 2 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. English 91 The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

5 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the A tone sounds. call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 6 Press to end the call. 7 Do one of the following:

If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 4.9.5.2 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the programmable button. 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. English 92 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. English Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press the proceed. button to The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status. If the call-setup is successful:

The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in 3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call. Do one of the following:

Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits:

and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and button to proceed. The DTMF press the tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. 93 Enter the deaccess code and press the to proceed. button The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. to During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Offbutton, Volume On/Off Volume Knob , and Channel Up/Down Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 4.9.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. English 94 Press to access the menu. or to Call Phone. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

If the selected entry is empty:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. English Press select. 4 5 The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The display shows Calling, subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:

user. The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the Phone Call icon, and Phone Call. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. 95 A negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds. The display shows Press OK to Place Call. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-

Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

7 Release the PTT button to listen. A tone sounds. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Press to end the call. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. English 96 NOTICE:

During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. to dismiss During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 4.9.5.4 Making Phone Calls by Using the Alias Search You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the alias search. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press or ID. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. or to the required subscriber alias to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone. Press to If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful:

The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. 97 The display shows the subscriber alias or ID, the RSSI icon, Phone Call, and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. 8 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:

and a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, If successful:

do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The display shows Extra Digits:

and a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. press the tone sound button to proceed. The DTMF If unsuccessful:

Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. English 98 When you press the PTT button while in the NOTICE:

Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. English During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit button or alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 4.9.5.5 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 Press to access the menu. 99 English Press select. Press select. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Phone Number. Press The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. to The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows subscriber alias and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 7 Press to end the call. 8 Do one of the following:

to proceed. Enter the access code, and press The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon, subscriber alias, and call status. If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. If the call is successful:

100 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 7, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. English NOTICE:

When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. During the channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. to During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, 101 English and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 4.9.5.6 Dual Tone Multi Frequency The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows your radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. Disabling all radio tones and alert will automatically turn off the DTMF tone. 4.9.5.6.1 Initiating DTMF Calls 4.9.5.7 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The display shows either All Call, Site All Call, or Multi Site Call depending on the type of configuration and Phone Call. Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. The green LED blinks. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 102 Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 4.9.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call. The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. English NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 4.9.5.9 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon and Phone Call. 103 English The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 104 4.9.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. The receiving radio displays Call Interrupted. 4.9.7 Call Preemption Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission. With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked channels are unavailable. Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well. 4.9.8 Voice Interrupt Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress voice transmission. This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in-

progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice transmission to the participant in the stopped call. The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to the intended parties when a call is in progress. Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.9.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your radio. English Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call, press the PTT button. On the interrupted radio, the display shows Call Interrupted. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 105 English 4.10 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT button to begin voice transmission. If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:

If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds. The display shows the failure notice screen momentarily. The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup. 4.10.1 Call Queue 4.10.2 Priority Call When there are no resources available to process a call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the system queue for the next available resources. You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard. If the call setup is successful, the following occur:

The green LED blinks. If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds. The display shows the call type icon, ID or alias. Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high priority call when all channels are busy. With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the system does not preempt any calls, and places the requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call queue, it declares failure. The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured. Press the programmable button to toggle between normal and high priority level. When you use the following features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the preconfigured setting. 106 DMR Text Message/Text Message The following are the types of Priority Call:

The radio displays Next Call: High Priority. Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio display. All voice calls Job Ticket Remote monitor High Priority Normal Priority English When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive transmission from any members of the Receive Group List, except for All Call, Permanent Talkgroup, and the selected Talkgroup. 4.10.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on your radio. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority. Press to access the menu. The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Call Priority High icon disappears. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority. 3 Do one of the following:

1 2 4.10.3 Talkgroup Scan Press select. Press select. or to Turn On. Press to or to Turn Off. Press to This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined by a Receive Group List. When scan is enabled, your radio unmutes to any member in its Receive Group List. If scan is enabled:

The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. 107 English The yellow LED blinks. A positive indicator tone sounds. If scan is disabled:

The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. A negative indicator tone sounds. 4.10.4 Receive Group List Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the talkgroup scan list. This list is created when your radio is programmed and it determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in this list. If your radio has been programmed to edit the scan list, you can:

Add/remove talkgroups. Add, remove, and/or edit priority for talkgroups. Refer to Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 109. 108 Add, remove, and/or edit affiliation talkgroups. Refer to Adding Talkgroup Affiliation on page 110 and Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 111. Replace the existing scan list with a new scan list. If a talkgroup is programmed as Permanent Talkgroup, you are unable to edit the talkgroup from the scan list. IMPORTANT:

To add member into the list, the talkgroup must first be configured in the radio. NOTICE:

Receive Group List is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.10.5 Priority Monitor The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority talkgroup call. English NOTICE:

This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup Scan feature is enabled. Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups:

Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives transmission according to the priority order below:

1 Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup 2 Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup NOTICE:

This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.10.5.1 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup In the Talkgroup Scan Menu, you can view or edit the priority of a talkgroup. 3 Emergency Call for Non-priority Talkgroups in the Press to access the menu. Receive Group List 4 All Call 5 P1 Talkgroup Call 6 P2 Talkgroup Call 7 Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List See Editing Priority for a Talkgroup on page 109 for more information on how to add, remove, and/or edit the priority of the talkgroups in the scan list. 1 2 3 4 Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to View/Edit List. Press to select. to select. Press or to the required talkgroup. Press The current priority is indicated by a Priority 1 or Priority 2 icon beside the talkgroup. 109 English Press to select. 5 6 or to Edit Priority. Press Press or to the required priority level. Press to select. If another talkgroup has been assigned to Priority 1 or Priority 2, you can choose to overwrite the current priority. When the display shows Overwrite Existing?, press options:

or to the following No to return to the previous step. Yes to overwrite. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears beside the talkgroup. 4.10.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation Your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at a site. 110 Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are automatically affiliated. 4.10.6.1 Adding Talkgroup Affiliation Follow the procedure to add a talkgroup affiliation. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press or to View/Edit List. Press to select. Press or to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected English 5 Press or to Edit Affiliation. Press 4.10.6.2 Removing Talkgroup Affiliation to select. 6 Do one of the following:

Press Press select. or or When the affiliation list is full and you want to select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. Follow the procedure to remove a talkgroup affiliation. to On. Press to select. to Off. Press to Press to access the menu. When On is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. appears beside the Press or to Scan. Press to select. If affiliation is successful, the display shows selected talkgroup ID or alias. beside the If affiliation is unsuccessful, ID or alias. remains beside the talkgroup NOTICE:

The radio displays List Full when a maximum of seven talkgroups are selected for affiliation in the scan list. To select a new talkgroup for affiliation, remove an existing affiliated talkgroup to make way for the new addition. See Removing Talkgroup Affiliation on page 111 for more information. Press or to View/Edit List. Press to select. Press or to the required talkgroup ID or alias. Press to select. The affiliation status is displayed at the View/Edit List. The display shows talkgroup ID or alias. beside the selected 111 1 2 3 4 English 5 6 Press or to Edit Affiliation. Press to select. currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Press or to Off. Press to select. When Off is selected, talkgroup ID or alias. disappears from beside the If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. Talkback Enabled 4.10.7 Talkback The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a transmission while scanning. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the 112 NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. 4.10.8 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. Turning Bluetooth On and Off Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:

If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. 4.10.8.1 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to My Status. Press to The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. English 113 English 4.10.8.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press or to the required device. Press to select. 5 Press select. or to Connect. Press to Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. The display shows Connecting to <Device>. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required device. Bluetooth Connected icon. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Press to select. The display shows beside the connected device. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 114 English NOTICE:

If pin code is required, see Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. 4.10.8.3 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. The display shows beside the connected device. If unsuccessful:

Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 4.10.8.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. or to Bluetooth. Press to Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 Press select. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to 115 or to Find Me. Press Press select. The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to Wait for acknowledgment. English 4 5 to select. Press select. Press or to the required device. Press or to Disconnect. Press to Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. The display shows Disconnecting from

<Device>. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. NOTICE:

Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective user manuals of any Bluetooth-

enabled devices. The display shows one of the following results:

A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. Bluetooth. Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. The disappears beside the connected device. 4.10.8.6 Viewing Device Details 1 Press to access the menu. 4.10.8.5 116 Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 1 or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to or to Devices. Press to Press or to the required device. Press Press or to the required device. Press to select. to select. Press to select. or to View Details. Press Press select. The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to 4.10.8.7 Deleting Device Name 4.10.8.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 1 English 117 English Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 or to Bluetooth. Press to limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. or to BT Mic Gain. Press to 4.10.9.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. Press the values here. to select. You can edit Access this feature through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. Press or to increase or to decrease b. Press or to Bluetooth and press values. Press to select. to select. 4.10.9 Indoor Location NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a 118 c. Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. English 119 English 1 2 3 4 4.10.10 120 4.10.9.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. 4.10.10.1 Enabling Manual Site Search Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press A positive tone sounds. If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. Press select. or to Beacons and press to The display shows the beacons information. A negative tone sounds. 4.10.10.2 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

Press select. 3 4 You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. to select. The display shows Site Unlocked. English or to Radio Info. Press to Press or to Neighbor Sites. Press 4.10.11 Home Channel Reminder 4.10.10.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:

If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:

Press to access the menu. sound. The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to The display shows Non Home Channel. 4.10.11.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. 121 English Press the programmed Silence Home Channel Reminder button. The display shows HCR Silenced. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 3 4 5 Press to select. or to Home Channel. Press Press or to the desired new home channel alias. Press to select. The display shows channel alias. beside the selected home 4.10.12 Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 4.10.11.2 Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to 2 Press select. 122 If initiated, the green LED blinks once on the target radio. This feature automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. 4.10.12.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.12.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to English 123 English 3 4 Press select. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Remote Mon.. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 124 The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.12.3 Initiating Remote Monitors by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press English Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press The display shows a negative mini notice. to proceed. proceed. 6 Press select. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to 4.10.13 Contacts Settings or to Remote Mon.. Press to Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, Broadcast Call, Site All Call, Multi-site All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:

You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. 125 Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

or to Contacts. Press to English Call Type Call Alias Call ID NOTICE:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, All Calls, and Phone Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to decrypt the transmission. 4.10.13.1 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to assign entries to programmable number keys on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 126 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Program Key. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press or to the desired number key. Press to select. If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:

Press select. or to Yes. Press to The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. 1 Do one of the following:

Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. English Press previous step. or to No to return to the Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a is before Empty, that assigned to an entry. If the number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 4.10.13.2 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys Follow the procedure to remove the associations between entries and programmable number keys on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 6 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Program Key. Press to Press or to Empty. Press to select. The first text line shows Clear from all keys. Press or to Yes. Press to select. 127 English NOTICE:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Press or to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press to proceed. to proceed. 4 7 4.10.13.3 Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. Press to select. Press to access the menu. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to the required ringer type. or to Contacts. Press to 4.10.14 Call Indicator Settings or to New Contact. Press to This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 128 4.10.14.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Press to access the menu. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press 4.10.14.2 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages to select. Press to access the menu. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Utilities. Press to Press select. to select. or to Call Ringers. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Private Call. Press Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. 7 1 2 3 4 English 129 or to Call Ringers. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Text Message. Press The display shows and the current tone. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected tone. or to Tones/Alert. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press or to Call Alert. Press to 4.10.14.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected tone. 3 4 5 6 7 to select. Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English Press to select. Press to select. 5 6 7 1 2 130 4.10.14.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press 6 7 1 2 Press or to Selective Call. Press to select. The display shows and the current tone. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected tone. 4.10.14.5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English 131 English to select. 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. or to Tones/Alert. Press to Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to Telemetry. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. 4.10.14.6 Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The Press select. or to View/Edit. Press to Press until display shows Ringer menu A indicates the current selected tone. 1 2 3 4 5 132 English 6 Press or to the required tone. Press to select. A appears beside the selected tone. Delete Call Delete All Calls View Details 4.10.14.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 4.10.15 Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store Alias or ID to Contacts 1 2 3 4 4.10.15.1 Viewing Recent Calls Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to Press options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. to the preferred list. The or Press to select. The display shows the most recent entry. Press or to view the list. You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. 133 4.10.15.2 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press to select. You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4.10.15.3 Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls on your radio from the Call list. Press to access the menu. or to Call Log. Press to 1 2 3 Press select. Press to select. If the list is empty:

A tone sounds. Press or to Store. Press to select. or to the required list. Press The display shows a blinking cursor. English 1 2 3 4 5 134 Press select. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 The display shows List Empty. Press to access the menu. Press or to the required alias or ID. or to Call Log. Press to 4 5 Press to select. Press to select. or to Delete Entry?. Press or to the required list. Press 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 4.10.15.4 Deleting All Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete all calls on your radio from the Call list. Press to select. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press to select Yes to delete all entries. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. English 135 English 1 2 3 4 5 136 4.10.15.5 Viewing Details from the Call List 4.10.16 Call Alert Operation Follow the procedure to view details on your radio from the Call list. Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press to select. or to View Details. Press The display shows the details. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio user when available. Voice communication is not involved in this feature. The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or the system administrator in two ways:

The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a Private Call. The radio is configured to allow you to press the PTT button and continue with other Talkgroup communication. Pressing the PTT button on the call alert entry will not allow the user to respond to the call initiator. The user must navigate to the Missed Call Log option at the Call Log menu and respond to the Call Alert from there. English An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended being used for the Call Alert feature. See Private Call on page 80. Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List Press to access the menu. 4.10.16.1 Making Call Alerts or to Contacts. Press to Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. Press or to the required alias or ID. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.16.2 or to Call Alert. Press to The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. 137 If the acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. See Notification List on page 193 and Call Log Features on page 133 for more information. 4.10.16.3 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:

Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. 4.10.17 Dynamic Caller Alias This feature allows you to dynamically edit a Caller Alias from your radio front panel. NOTICE:

A keypad microphone is required to perform this feature. When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias of the transmitting radio. The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the Caller Aliases list. 4.10.17.1 Viewing the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the transmitting Caller Alias details. English 138 Press to select. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 1 English Press to access the menu. Press or to Caller Aliases. Press Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to select. or to the <required Caller 2 3 to select. Press Alias>. or to the preferred list. Press 4 To call, press and hold the PTT button. or to View Details. Press 4.10.18 Mute Mode 4.10.17.2 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private Call. Press to access the menu. Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. 139 English 4.10.18.1 Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. that is configured. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 4.10.18.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range 140 between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Mute Timer. Press to Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press

. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 4.10.18.3 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. Short Press Long Press NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. 4.10.19 English 141 English NOTICE:

If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Regular Silent 142 Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. 4.10.19.1 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by the dealer or system administrator. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. English The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

When configured for Emergency Alarm only, the emergency process consists only of the Emergency Alarm delivery. The emergency ends when an acknowledgment is received from the system, or when channel access attempts have been exhausted. No voice call is associated with the sending of an Emergency Alarm when operating as Emergency Alarm Only. 4.10.19.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon acknowledgment by the infrastructure within the group, a group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm and Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm process. 143 English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The Emergency icon appears.The green LED lights up. NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is successfully received:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not successfully received:

All retries are exhausted. A low-pitched tone sounds. 144 The display shows Alarm Failed. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. The green LED lights up.The display shows the Group Call icon. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 5 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not hear a Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or system administrator can provide more information on how your radio has been programmed for Emergency. The Emergency Call initiator may press to end an on-going emergency call. The radio returns to a call idle state but the emergency call screen remains open. 4.10.19.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate English with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. 145 English NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. 4.10.19.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms The receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. Follow the procedure to receive and view Emergency Alarms on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

The display shows the Emergency Alarm List, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. 1 Press to view the alarm. 146 2 3 4 Press the entry in the Alarm List. to view the action options and details of Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. The radio returns to the home screen with an Emergency Icon displayed at the top, indicating the unresolved Emergency Alarm. The Emergency Icon disappears once the entry in the Alarm List is deleted. Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 6 The tone sounds and the red LED blinks until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:

Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. 4.10.19.5 English Responding to Emergency Alarms When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 If the Emergency Alarm Indication is enabled, the Emergency Alarm List appears when the radio receives an Emergency Alarm. Press to the required alias or ID. or 2 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 147 English Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the Emergency Call Indication and Emergency Call Decode Tone is enabled. The Emergency Call Tone will not sound if only the Emergency Call Indication is enabled. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The display shows the Emergency Call icon at the top The red LED blinks. right corner. The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. The text line shows the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 4.10.19.6 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms with Call on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Call:

148 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The red LED blinks. The display shows the Emergency Call icon, the Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. NOTICE:

If the Emergency Call Indication is not enabled, the display shows the Group Call icon, Emergency Talkgroup ID or alias, and the ID or alias of the transmitting radio. 4.10.19.7 Exiting Emergency Mode Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Your radio shows the following indications:

The tone ceased. The red LED extinguished. When acknowlegment is received, the display of the transmitting radio shows Cancel Emer Success. If no acknowledgement is received, the display shows Cancel Emer Failed. English NOTICE:

If the Cancel Emergency configuration is enabled on the transmitting radio, the emergency alarm in your receiving radio will cease and the status is added to the Alarm List of the receiving radio. 4.10.20 Status Message This feature allows the user to send status messages to other radios. The Quick Status list is configured by using CPS-RM and comprises up to a maximum of 99 statuses. The maximum length for each status message is 16 characters. NOTICE:

Every status has a corresponding digital value ranging from 099. An alias can be specified to each status for ease of reference. 4.10.20.1 Sending Status Messages Follow the procedure below to send a status message. 149 English Press select. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Skip the following steps. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. Press to access the menu. or to Status. Press to or to Quick Status. Press Press or to the required status message. Press to select. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. 4.10.20.2 Sending Status Message by Using Programmable Button Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the programmable button. Press or to the required subscriber alias 1 Press the programmed Status Message button. or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. 2 Press or to the required status message. Press to select. The contact list is displayed. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. 150 3 Press or to the required subscriber alias Press to access the menu. or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. Press to select. or to Send Status. Press to Press or to the required status message. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before Press to select. returning to the Quick Status screen. 4.10.20.3 Sending a Status Message by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the contacts list. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. 151 English If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. 4 6 7 Press to select. or to Radio Number. Press The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. 5 Enter the required subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID, and press to proceed. 4.10.20.4 Sending Status Message by Using Manual Dial Follow the procedure to send a status message by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Send Status. Press to Press or to the required status message. Press to select. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. or to Contacts. Press to The LED turns off. or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows beside the sent status message. The display shows a positive mini notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 152 The LED turns off. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Quick Status screen. Received status messages can also be viewed by accessing the Notification List. See Notification List on page 193 for more information. 4.10.20.5 Viewing Status Messages Follow the procedure to view status messages. 4.10.20.6 Responding to Status Messages Follow the procedure to reply status messages. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. or to Status. Press to Press select. or to Status. Press to or to Inbox. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to the required status message. Press to select. Press to select. The content of the status message is displayed to the radio user. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to Press or to the required status message. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 English 153 Press or to Reply. Press to select. Press or to the required status message. Deleting a Status Message Follow the procedure to delete a status message from your radio. Press to select. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the Inbox screen. The display shows beside the sent status message. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Status. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to the required status message. Press to select. The display shows the failure notice momentarily before returning to the Inbox screen. The content of the status is displayed. Press select. to Press select. or to Delete. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 English 6 7 4.10.20.7 154 Press or to Yes. Press to select. Press or to Yes. Press to select. 5 The display shows a positive mini notice before The display shows List Empty. returning to the Inbox screen. English 7 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 4.10.20.8 Deleting All Status Messages Follow the procedure to delete all status messages from your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Status. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. or to Delete All. Press to 4.10.21 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 155 English 4.10.21.1 Text Messages The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home 4.10.21.1.1 Viewing Text Messages Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. 4.10.21.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to or to Messages. Press to Press select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. Press or to the required message. Press A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. to select. 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Press select. 156 You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. 4.10.21.1.3 Responding to Text Messages When you receive a text message:

The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. NOTICE:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. 1 Do one of the following:

Press select. or to Read. Press to English The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-

mail application. Press or to Read Later. Press to select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. 4.10.21.1.4 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text Follow the procedure to respond to text messages with Quick Text messages on your radio. 157 English 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step 3. or to Quick Reply. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to the required message. Press Press select. or to Messages. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. 9 Wait for acknowledgment. to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Press select. 7 8 to select. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. Press or to the required message. Press The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press or to Reply. Press to select. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 2 3 4 5 6 158 4.10.21.1.5 Resending Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

Forwarding Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

English The display shows a positive mini notice. Press to select. Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. to resend the same message to the If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. 1 2 or Press send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to Press or to the required alias or ID. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 159 4.10.21.1.6 The display shows a positive mini notice. NOTICE:

You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial on page 440). 4 Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 4.10.21.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial or to Forward. Press to 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows Radio Number:. 4.10.21.1.8 Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. NOTICE:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. English 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 160 1 3 Press or to Edit. Press to select. The display shows a blinking cursor. Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. 4.10.21.1.9 Writing Text Messages Press to move one space to the left. Follow the procedure to write text message on your radio. Press or to move one space to the right. 1 Do one of the following:

Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to Send and press to send the message. Press or to Save and press to save the message to the Drafts folder. Press to edit the message. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Compose. Press to A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type your message. English 161 English Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:

Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press to select. Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Manual Dial. Press 5 Press once message is composed. Do one of the following:

to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press Press to send the message. Press

. Press or to choose among editing, deleting, or saving the message. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Press to select. 4.10.21.1.10 Sending Text Messages It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. 162 The display shows positive mini notice. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A low tone sounds. The display shows negative mini notice. The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. The display shows List Empty. NOTICE:

For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. A tone sounds. 4.10.21.1.11 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to Press select. 2 3 Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

English 4 5 6 7 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press select. or to Delete. Press to Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. 4.10.21.1.12 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Do one of the following:

163 English Press the programmed Text Message button. Sent Text Messages Proceed to step 3. 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. Press select. or to Delete All. Press to Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you long press Home screen. at any time, the radio returns to the 4.10.21.2 164 NOTICE:

If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 4 to select. Press or to the required message. Press 4.10.21.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Sent Item Icons. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. 4.10.21.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages When you are viewing a Sent message:

Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to 2 3 Press select. Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. 1 Press

. 2 You can either resend or forward the sent text message. Do one of the following:

to Forward. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. or to Sent Items. Press to to Resend. Press to select. English 165 English 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 159 for more information. 4.10.21.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 1 Press

. 166 2 Press select. or to Delete. Press to 4.10.21.2.4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to 2 3 Press select. Press select. If the Sent Items folder is empty:

When you are viewing a Sent message:

or to Sent Items. Press to The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. or to Delete All. Press to 4 Press select. 5 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. The Drafts folder stores a maximum of 10 last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. 4.10.21.3.1 Viewing Saved Text Messages 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 4.10.21.3 Saved Text Messages You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to English 167 English 4 1 2 168 Press or to the required message. Press Press once message is composed. 4 to select. Do one of the following:

4.10.21.3.2 Editing Saved Text Messages Press while viewing the message. Press or to Edit. Press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press

. Press or to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press to select. 4.10.21.3.3 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder Press to move one space to the left. 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to move one space to the right. Proceed to step 3. Press the programmed Text Message button. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press to access the menu. Long press to change text entry method. 2 Press select. or to Messages. Press to 3 4 5 Press select. or to Drafts. Press to Press or to the required message. Press to select. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. Proceed to step 6. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Press delete the text message. or to Delete. Press to Press to access the menu. 4.10.21.4 Quick Text Messages Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 4.10.21.4.1 Sending Quick Text Messages or to Messages. Press to or to Quick Text. Press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 Press or to the required Quick Text message. Press to select. 5 Do the following to select the recipient and send the Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. message. English 169 English The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that your message is being sent. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 159 for more information. Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Word Correct Sentence Cap My Words Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) NOTICE:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the Home 4.10.22 Text Entry Configuration Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

4.10.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-built dictionary. Word Predict 170 Press to access the menu. Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 4.10.22.2 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict Press or to Radio Settings. Press Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. or to Text Entry. Press to Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press select. Press to select. or to Word Correct. Press or to Utilities. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Word Correct. Press to select. to select. Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. or to Text Entry. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 171 or to Word Predict. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press 3 4 5 to select. Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Sentence Cap. Press 6 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. English 5 Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

Press enabled, to enable the Word Predict. If appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. 4.10.22.3 Sentence Cap 1 2 172 Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.10.22.4 Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to English 6 Press to select. or to List of Words. Press The display shows the list of custom words. 4.10.22.5 Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Text Entry. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to My Words. Press to or to Text Entry. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. to select. 173 English Press select. Press to select. 5 6 7 8 174 or to My Words. Press to Press once your custom word is completed. or to List of Words. Press Display shows the list of custom words. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. Press or to the required word. Press to select. 4.10.22.6 Adding Custom Words Press or to Edit. Press to select. You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to access the menu. Press to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Long press to change text entry method. 10 1 2 3 or to Text Entry. Press to Press once your custom word is completed. 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to My Words. Press to or to Add New Word. Press Display shows the list of custom words. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 4.10.22.7 Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. Press key to move one space to the right. Press to access the menu. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Long press to change text entry method. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 8 1 2 3 English 175 or to Text Entry. Press to Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. or to My Words. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to the required word. Press or to Utilities. Press to or to Delete. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to return to the previous screen. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or to Delete All. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. English 4 5 6 7 Press select. Press select. Press select. to select. 4.10.22.8 176 7 Do one of the following:

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows All Entries Deleted. Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. 4.10.23 Job Tickets This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:

This feature can be customized through the Customer Programming Software (CPS) according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:

My Tasks folder Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. English Shared Tasks folder Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is turned off and turned on again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 177 English has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Press or to the required folder. Press Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:

to select. Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. 4.10.23.1 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press to select. 4.10.23.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Log In. Press to Press to access the menu. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. or to Job Tickets. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 3 4 1 2 2 Press select. 178 The display shows a positive mini notice. or to Create Ticket. Press 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.23.3 Creating Job Tickets Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. 1 Press to access the menu. English or to Job Tickets. Press to Press select. Press to select. 2 3 1 2 3 4.10.23.4 Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to the required folder. Press to select. 179 English 4 5 6 180 Press or to the required job ticket. Press to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. Press or to the required job ticket. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.23.5 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Room Status. Press to Press or to the required option. Press to select. Press or to Send. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. 2 If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English Press or to Send. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.23.6 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. 4.10.23.7 Deleting Job Tickets 1 Press or to the required option. Press Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. to select. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 181 English 2 3 4 5 6 7 Press select. Press select. Press select. 182 Press to access the menu. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

or to Job Tickets. Press to A positive indicator tone sounds. Press or to the required folder. Press to select. or to All folder. Press to The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.23.8 Deleting All Job Tickets Press or to the required Job Ticket. Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. Press to select. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. or to Delete. Press to Press to access the menu. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 2 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to the required folder. Press to select. or to All folder. Press to or to Delete All. Press to 6 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 4.10.24 Privacy English based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Your radio only supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. 183 English NOTICE:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4 Press select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to Privacy. Press to 4.10.24.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the steps below. 4.10.25 Stun/Revive Press to access the menu. This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, the dealer or system administrator may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. A radio can be disabled (stunned) or enabled (revived) either through the console or through a command initiated by another radio. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press select. 2 3 to select. 184 Once a radio is disabled, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the home screen shows Channel Denied. When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor receive any user initiated services on the system that performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio can switch to another system. The radio continues to send GNSS location reports and can be monitored remotely when it was stunned. NOTICE:

The dealer or system administrator may permanently disable a radio. See Radio Kill on page 189 for more information. 4.10.25.1 Stunning a Radio Follow the procedure to disable a radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. English 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.25.2 Stunning a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the Contacts List. 185 English 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4.10.25.3 Stunning a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable a radio by using the manual dial. Press to select. or to Radio Disable. Press Press to access the menu. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Radio Number. Press The first text line shows Radio Number:. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 186 5 6 Press to select. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. or to Radio Disable. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 4.10.25.4 Reviving a Radio Follow the procedure to enable a radio. English 187 English 4.10.25.5 Reviving a Radio by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Contacts List. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press to select. or to Radio Enable. Press The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 1 2 3 4 188 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable Successful. The display shows Radio Enable Failed. 4.10.25.6 Reviving a Radio by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable a radio by using the Manual Dial. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to A tone sounds. The display shows Radio Enable Failed. English or to Private Call. Press The first text line shows Radio Number:. 4.10.26 Radio Kill Press select. Press to select. 3 4 5 6 Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Press to select. or to Radio Enable. Press The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

The display shows Radio Enable Successful. This feature is an enhanced security measure to restrict unauthorized access to a radio. Radio Kill causes a radio to be rendered inoperable. For example, the dealer may want to kill a stolen or misplaced radio to prevent unauthorized usage. When powered on, a killed radio displays Radio Killed on the screen momentarily to indicate the killed state. NOTICE:

A killed radio can only be revived at a Motorola Solutions service depot. Contact your dealer for more information. 189 English 4.10.27 Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an emergency condition as programmed by the dealer. 4.10.28 Password Lock 4.10.28.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password Turn on your radio. 1 Enter the four-digit password. a Use a keypad microphone. b To edit the numeric value of each digit, press or

. To enter and move to the next digit, press

. NOTICE:

The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access the radio. You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. 2 Press to confirm the password. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. You can also use a keypad microphone to enter the password. If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. A continuous tone sounds. The display shows Wrong Password. 190 English Repeat step 1. Do one of the following:

If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. NOTICE:

In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 4.10.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190 to access the radio. 4.10.28.3 Turning Password Lock On or Off Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 191 3 4 6 English to select. Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Passwd Lock. Press to 5 Enter the current four-digit password. Use a keypad microphone. Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press the next digit. A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit pressed. to enter and move to Press to enter the password. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. 1 2 3 Press select. 7 Do one of the following:

192 or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Turn On. Press to beside Turn On. to Turn Off. Press to beside Turn Off. 4.10.28.4 Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. English 4 Press select. Press select. 6 7 5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. or to Change PWD. Press to Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press to proceed. If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. 4.10.29 Notification List Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. 193 English 4.10.29.1 Accessing Notification List Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Notification. Press Press or to the required event. Press to select. 4.10.30 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio by using Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. 194 When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:

The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 226 for the updated software version. Long press to return to the Home screen. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:

4.10.31 Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes Follow the procedure to select one of the following third-

party peripherals connection modes:

Press select. 4 5 Motorola Solutions PC and Audio Data Accessory Telemetry Generic 1 2 3 Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. English or to Cable Type. Press to Press or to the required connection mode. Press to select. The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen returns to the previous menu. 4.10.32 Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. 4.10.32.1 Viewing RSSI Values Attach the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola Solutions part number RMN5127_) to your radio. 195 English At the home screen, using the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone, press three times and immediately press three times. The display shows the current RSSI values. To return to the home screen, press and hold

. 4.10.33 Front Panel Configuration You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the use of your radio. 4.10.33.1 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Press to access the menu. 1 196 2 3 Press select. Press to select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Program Radio. Press 4.10.33.2 Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters.

, Scroll through options, increase/

decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. 4.10.34 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. English NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi remotely by using a designated radio (see Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) on page 198 and Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) on page 199). Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 197 English 4.10.34.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 2 Access this feature using the menu. a Press to access the menu. b Press select. to select. c Press or to WiFi On and press d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows Enabled. beside If Wi-Fi is off, the Enabled. disappears from beside 4.10.34.2 198 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control

(One to One). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Long press the programmable button. Use the keypad to enter the ID and press Proceed to step 3. to select. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Contacts and press to or to WiFi and press to 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to WiFi Control and press Press to access the menu. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to WiFi Control and press 3 4 5 to select. Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice. 4.10.34.3 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control

(One to Many). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press subscriber alias or ID. or to select the required to select. Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. English 199 English 4.10.34.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to a network access point and press to select. 200 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. NOTICE:

For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 5 Press select. press

. by using RM. 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. 4.10.34.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.10.34.6 Refreshing the Network List Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to c. Press or to Networks and press to select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. 201 or to Refresh and press to Press or to Add Network and press The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. to select. 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 4.10.34.7 Adding a Network NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to

. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press

. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. 4.10.34.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. 4 6 7 1 English Press select. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 202 Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to a network access point and press to select. Press or to View Details and press to select. NOTICE:

WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. English For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. 4.10.34.9 Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 1 Press to access the menu. 203 English 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press select. 4.10.35 204 or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. A tone sounds. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. A tone sounds. Dynamic Group Number Assignment

(DGNA) Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA) is a feature which allows the console to assign and remove a new talkgroup from your radio over the air. When the console assigns DGNA to your radio, your radio is in DGNA mode:

The display shows <DGNA Talkgroup Alias>

Assigned momentarily before returning to the home screen. The DGNA icon appears in the status bar. The home screen displays DGNA talkgroup alias. When the console removes DGNA from your radio, your radio returns to the previous talkgroup:

The display shows <DGNA Talkgroup Alias>

Removed momentarily before returning to the home screen. The DGNA icon disappears from the status bar. The home screen displays the previous talkgroup alias. Depending on how your radio is programmed, you can view, edit, and listen to the original scan lists channels and the non-DGNA talkgroups. When your radio is in DGNA mode, pressing the PTT button allows you to communicate only with the current DGNA talkgroup. To communicate with the previous non-

DGNA talkgroup, program the One Touch Access button. See Making Non-DGNA Calls on page 205. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.10.35.1 Making DGNA Calls When your radio is in DGNA mode, press the PTT button to make the call. A DGNA tone sounds. The display shows the DGNA icon and the DGNA talkgroup alias. English NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a tone, indicating error. The display remains unchanged. 4.10.35.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. A positive tone sounds. Voice Announcement sounds One Touch Replaced Call. The display shows <Talkgroup Alias> and Press PTT momentarily. NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a negative tone, indicating error. The display remains unchanged. 2 Press PTT button before a negative tone sounds and your radio returns to the home screen. 205 English NOTICE:

When your radio is in the home screen, a PTT press makes call to the DGNA talkgroup. 4.11.1 Power Levels 4.10.35.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls When you receive a DGNA call:

A DGNA tone sounds. The display shows the DGNA icon, DGNA talkgroup alias, and radio alias. through the speaker. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 4.11 Utilities 206 This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. High Low This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 4.11.1.1 Setting Power Levels 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip the steps below. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. Press or to Power. Press to select. Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to High. Press to beside High. to Low. Press to beside Low. Long press to return to the Home screen. 2 3 4 6 English 4.11.2 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 207 or to All Tones. Press to or to Tones/Alerts. Press English Press select. 5 6 1 2 3 Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable all tones and alerts. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.3 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 208 4 5 6 1 Press to select. Press to select. or to Keypad Tones. Press Press display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable keypad tones. The If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.4 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press level. or to Utilities. Press to Press to exit. The changes are discarded. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 4.11.5 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Vol. Offset. Press to or to Utilities. Press to or to the required volume offset Press or to Radio Settings. Press A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 7 Do one of the following:

level is saved. Press to select. The required volume offset or to Talk Permit. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press select. to select. English 209 to enable or disable the Talk Permit or to Tones/Alerts. Press The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.6 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press to select. Press select. 4 5 6 or to Power Up. Press to Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.7 Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 Press to access the menu. to select. English 6 Press Tone. 1 2 3 Press select. 210 English 2 3 4 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press to select. or to Message Alert. Press Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Display Mode button. Skip the following steps. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to access the menu. Press or to Momentary. Press to select. The display shows beside Momentary. Press or to Repetitive. Press to select. The display shows beside Repetitive. 4.11.8 or to Utilities. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Display. Press to The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. 211 Press or to the required setting. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. to select. The display shows beside the selected setting. English 5 212 4.11.9 Adjusting Display Brightness Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 5 Press select. or to Brightness. Press to The display shows the progress bar. Press or to decrease or increase the display brightness. Press to select. The setting value is varied from 1 to 8. 4.11.10 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Turning LED Indicators On or Off Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. Skip the steps below. Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press to select. Press to select. or to Horns/Lights. Press or to LED Indicator. Press Press display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. The display shows one of the following results:

If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 2 3 4 5 4.11.11 English 213 English 4.11.12 Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. 5 Press to enable or disable Public Address. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 4.11.13 Turning External Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 Do one of the following:

Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. to select. Press or to Public Address. Press Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 2 3 4 214 Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 5 1 to select. Press or to External Public Address. Press to select. to enable or disable external public Press address. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.14 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press to select. Press Screen. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Display. Press to or to Intro Screen. Press to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 215 English 4.11.15 Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. Identifying Cable Type Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. to select. or to Languages. Press to or to Cable Type. Press to Press or to the required language. Press The current cable type is indicated by a

. to select. The display shows beside the selected language. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 4.11.16 216 English 4.11.17 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:

This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. Current Channel Current Zone 4.11.18 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. 4.11.19 Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 4.11.19.1 Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. 217 English 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press or to Voice Announcement. Press to select. Press or to any of the following features. Press to select. Program Button appears beside the selected setting. 4.11.20 Setting Menu Timer You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to The available features are as follows:

Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. to select. or to Display. Press to All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone 218 English to select. 3 4 5 Press select. Press AGC. Press select. to select. 5 6 1 2 or to Menu Timer. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to the required setting. Press or to Mic AGC-D. Press to 4.11.21 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to to enable or disable Digital Microphone The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 4.11.22 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. 219 NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 4.11.23 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off Press select. or to Utilities. Press to This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu. to select. to select. Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press 1 2 3 5 Do one of the following:

to select. English 2 3 4 220 English 4 Press or to AF Suppressor and press Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. to select. You can also use or buttons to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Suppressor. The Enabled. 2 3 4 4.11.24 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to Trill Enhance. Press Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 221 English 4.11.25 Audio Ambience Default Loud This is the default setting. You can customize the audio ambience for your radio according to your environment. This setting enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group This setting enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 4.11.25.1 Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 222 Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Audio Ambience. Press 3 4 5 to select. to select. Press or to the required setting. Press to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. 4.11.26 Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles for your radio according to your preference. Default This is the default setting. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 These settings are intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost These settings are intended for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. 4.11.26.1 Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Audio Profiles. Press 3 4 5 to select. to select. Press or to the required setting. Press to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your 223 English preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. The display shows beside the selected setting. Press the programmed GNSS button. Press to access the menu. Proceed to the 4.11.27 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. next step. Press select. to select. 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press to enable or disable GNSS. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. 4.11.28 General Radio Information Your radio contains information on various general parameters. 1 224 The general information of your radio is as follows:

Radio alias and ID. Firmware and Codeplug versions. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. NOTICE:

English Press to access the menu. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to Press to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Press or to My ID. Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. 4.11.28.1 Checking Radio Alias and ID 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. 4.11.28.2 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Press to access the menu. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 225 2 3 4 1 2 English Press select. Press select. 3 4 1 2 226 or to Radio Info. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to Versions. Press to or to SW Update. Press to The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. 4.11.28.3 Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the procedure to check the software update information on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 481 for more information. 4.11.28.4 Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

3 4 Press select. Press select. Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Displaying Site Information Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Utilities. Press to English or to Radio Info. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to or to GNSS Info. Press to or to Site Info. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press select. or Press to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to the required item. Press Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. 4.11.28.5 The display shows the current site name. 4.11.29 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. 227 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Certificate Menu. Press to select. appears beside ready certificates. Press or to the required certificate. Press to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:

For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. English 1 2 3 4 228 Connect Plus Connect Plus is a full trunking solution based on DMR technology. Connect Plus uses a dedicated control channel for channel requests and allocations. 5.1 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 246). If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. 5.1.2 Programmable Buttons This chapter explains the additional radio controls available to the radio user through preprogrammed means such as programmable buttons and assignable radio functions. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

5.1.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 281 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. English 229 English 5.1.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Busy Queue Cancellation Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Call Log Selects the call log list. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. 230 Contacts Emergency On/Off Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Indoor Location Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Radio Check Determines if a radio is active in a system. English Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Announcement On/Off Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Radio Enable Radio Disable Remote Monitor Wi-Fi Zone Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Allows selection from a list of zones. Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Ring Alert Type Roam Request Requests to search for a different site. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Site Lock On/Off 5.1.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Backlight Brightness Adjusts the brightness level. Channel Up/Down When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Display Mode Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. 231 English Power Level Unassigned Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. 5.1.3 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode 5.1.3.1 Display Icons The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the radio signal strength. Four bars indi-

cate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available 3 Indoor location status is on and available. Indoor Location Unavailable 3 3 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware 232 Indoor location status is on but unavailable due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Bluetooth. Mute Mode Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is mut-

ed. Notification Notification List has items to review. Power Level or Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. GNSS Available English The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-

ble. GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. The Privacy feature is enabled. Secure Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. Contact Radio contact is available. 233 English Call Log Radio call log. Message Incoming message. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Vibrate Vibrate mode is enabled. Vibrate and Ring Wi-Fi Excellent 4 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good 4 Wi-Fi signal is good. Vibrate and Ring mode is enabled. 4 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e 234 Wi-Fi Average 4 Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor 4 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable 4 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. 5.1.3.2 Call Icons The following icons appear on your radio display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscrib-

er alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/Site All Call Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. English Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in pro-

gress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Blue-

tooth PC Call alias (name) or ID (num-

ber). Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. 5.1.3.3 Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. 235 English 5.1.3.4 Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radio display in the Sent Items folder. Send Failed OR Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. The text message has not been sent. OR Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. OR In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is OR pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. OR 236 5.1.3.5 Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Bluetooth Sensor Device Bluetooth-enabled sensor device, such as gas sensor. 5.1.3.6 LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Au-

to-Range Transponder System. Mute Mode is enabled. Rapidly blinking red Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option English Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-

ceived a text message or Scan is ena-

bled and is receiving activity. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Radio is powering up, receiving a call or data. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Blinking green and yellow Solid yellow Double blinking yel-

low Blinking yel-

low Blinking green Double blinking green 237 Blinking red Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. English 5.1.3.7 Indicator Tones Periodic Tone The following are the tones that sound through the radio speaker. High pitched tone Low pitched tone Repetitive Tone Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Momentary Tone Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone 5.1.3.8 Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. 238 5.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones. 5.2 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode This section explains general radio operations and call features that are available in your radio. 5.2.1 Selecting a Site English The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:

This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. 5.2.1.2 Site Lock On/Off 5.2.1.1 Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:

When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The radio displays Searching and Selected Channel Alias and continues to search through the list of sites. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

239 English You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:

The display shows Site Unlocked. Group Call 5.2.1.3 Site Restriction Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating: Site <number given>

Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. 5.2.2 Selecting a Zone The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. 240 Multi-group Call Site All Call Private Call Radio Con-

trols Programmed Zone Selec-

tion button Radio menu 1 Access the Zone feature by performing the following:

Steps Press the programmed Zone Selection button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or Zone and press select. to to The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or Press to the required zone. or and scroll 3 Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 5.2.3 Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. 5.2.4 English Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. 241 English 5.2.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. NOTICE:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID

(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 300 for more information. 5.2.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 242 When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. NOTICE:

See Making a Group Call on page 246 for details on making a Group Call. 5.2.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. English The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 247 for details on making a Private Call. 5.2.5.3 Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the user's full attention. When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to a Site All Call. 243 English NOTICE:

See Making a Site All Call on page 248 for details on making a Site All Call. The display shows Phone Call Ended. The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. 5.2.5.4.1 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button. followed by Press insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. within 2 seconds to The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits. 5.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. 244 2 Long press to end the call. 2 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. The display shows Phone Call Ended. English 5.2.5.4.2 Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call 5.2.5.5 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits. 5.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and 245 English 246 the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio speaker. 5.2.6 Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. 5.2.6.1 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob This feature allows the radio users to make different call types : Group Call, Private Call, Site All Call, Multi-group Call. 5.2.6.1.1 Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 241. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 269). 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) NOTICE:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 300 for more information. from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radio speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 5.2.6.1.2 Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call using the One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. 1 Do one of the following. English Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 241. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 247 Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. 5.2.6.1.3 Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5.2.6.1.4 Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. NOTICE:

Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-

group Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 241. group alias or ID. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-

2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. English 248 5.2.6.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button NOTICE:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. English The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. 5.2.6.3 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button This feature allows the radio users to make private calls using the programmable manual dial button. 249 English 5.2.6.3.1 Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 250 When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 5.2.6.4 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. If is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 3 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. English 5.2.6.5 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Phone and press to Press to select Manual Dial. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. 251 Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. If is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 5 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. 5.2.6.6 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts NOTICE:

If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to Manual Dial and press to select. to select. Press or to Phone Number and press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. English 252 5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and The display shows Phone Call Ended. press to place a call to the entered number. If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If is pressed with no telephone number entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 6 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... 5.2.6.7 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. Long press to end the call. The display returns to the previous screen. English 253 If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 3 Do one of the following. Press to return to the Phone Call screen. Long press to end the call. English 5.2.6.8 Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press followed by within 2 seconds to insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits. 2 Press the button. 254 English 5.2.6.9 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 2 Long press to end the call. The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... 5.3.1 Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled by using the CPS, the Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound, the first line of the display shows Non and the second line shows Home Channel periodically when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:

The display shows Phone Call Ended. Return to the home channel. 5.3 Mute the reminder temporarily by using the programmable button. Set a new home channel by using the programmable button. 255 periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact

(Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. English 5.3.2 Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact, if certain types of failures occur in the Connect Plus system. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but cannot communicate with either the site controller or Connect Plus network at that moment. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. 5.3.2.1 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display 256 5.3.2.2 English Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode NOTICE:

Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-

equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time (or at 257 English almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. 5.3.2.3 Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration "beep"

when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site (that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for 258 your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode (display indicates Searching). 5.3.3 Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber IDs. 5.3.3.1 Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Program-

med Ra-

a Press the programmed Radio Check button. Steps 2 Wait for acknowledgment. Radio Control dio Check button Menu b Press or to the re-

quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press to select. c Press or to the re-

quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. d Press or to Radio Check and press to select. The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. English If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button. 5.3.4 Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 259 English 5.3.4.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Radio Control Steps NOTICE:

Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio. 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Steps Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Re-

mote Monitor Button Menu a Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. b Press or to the re-

quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press to select. c Press or to the re-

quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. d Press or to Manual Dial and press to select. e Press or to Remote Mon. and press to select. The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green. 260 English 2 Wait for acknowledgment. Starting and Stopping Scan If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. NOTICE:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some

(or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 264 for more information. You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 5.3.5 Scan 5.3.5.1 This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Scan and press to Press or to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled. 261 The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is 4 Release the PTT button to listen. English enabled. disabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is 5.3.5.2 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 262 If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. 5.3.6 User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (for example, not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. 5.3.7 Turning Scan On or Off NOTICE:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 Press to access the menu. English or to Scan and press to Press select. 2 3 Press or to Turn On or Turn Off and press to select. The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is disabled. is enabled. 263 English 5.3.8 Editing the Scan List NOTICE:

If the scan list entry happens to be the currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multi-group, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members. Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can:

Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu on page 265. 264 NOTICE:

A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone Scan List. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press or to View/Edit List and press to select. Press or to the desired Group name. If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. to select the desired Group. English The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) and press to select. Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. 5.3.9 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a "scan candidate"). Thus, the list of "scan candidates" described in step 6 and step 7 If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently selected zone, or to delete a group from the scan list of the currently selected zone. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Scan option and press Press or to <Add Members> and press to select. The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n =

the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone). 4 Do one of the following. 265 English If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5. 5 or Press zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone. to scroll a list of Connect Plus 6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press to select. Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called "scan candidates", because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone (or they are already on the zone scan list). If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates. 266 7 8 9 Press candidate groups. or to scroll through the list of If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added. Press displayed. when the desired group alias is If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed. Press Delete). to accept the displayed message (Add or If deleting a group from the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will no longer display immediately before the alias. If adding a group to the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will display before the alias. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is already full, the radio displays List Full. If this should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group from the scan list prior to adding a new one. 10 When finished, press necessary to return to the desired menu. as many times as on the display). Scan list member has been disabled via the menu (see Editing the Scan List on page 264). You are participating in a call already. No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). 5.3.10 Understanding Scan Operation 5.3.11 Scan Talkback NOTICE:

If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Scan Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected English 267 English channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Scan Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. There are two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 and P2. P1 has higher priority than P2. NOTICE:

If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is configured in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, there are three levels of priority for talkgroups: P0, P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent Emergency Revert Group ID and the highest priority. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. 5.3.12 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup with higher priority when it is in another call. A tone sounds when the radio switches to the call with higher priority. 268 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Scan and press to Press or to View/Edit List and press to select. Press or to the required talkgroup and press to select. 5 6 Press or to Edit Priority and press to select. Press or to the required priority level and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears on the left of the talkgroup. English If only one zone is configured in the radio, the Contact List directly displays the list from the current selected zone. If multiple zones are configured in the radio, the Zone Contact Folder displays all zones with identical network IDs as the current selected zone. The user can access the contacts in these zones. Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:

5.3.13 Contacts Settings NOTICE:

You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. Access to Contact Lists depends on the zone configuration:

Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Voice Site All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. 269 5.3.13.1 Making a Private Call from Contacts Press to access the menu. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. or to Contacts and press to 5.3.13.2 Making a Call Alias Search The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. Press to access the menu. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. or to Contacts and press to The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and then press the required alias. or button to locate the 1 2 Press select. English 1 2 Press select. 270 2 3 6 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to New Contact and press to select. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. 5.3.13.3 Adding a New Contact 1 Press to access the menu. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press press to confirm. to confirm. If adding a Radio Contact, press or to the required ringer type and press to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. English 271 English 5.3.14 Call Indicator Settings This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. 5.3.14.1 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. Press or to Tones/Alert and press to select. to select. Press or to Call Ringers and press Press to select. or to Call Alert and press The current tone is indicated by a

. 4 5 6 7 Press to access the menu. Press or to the required tone and press Press to select. or to Utilities and press to select. appears beside selected tone. Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 1 2 3 272 5.3.14.2 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press Press or to Tones/Alerts and press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. to select. to select. 6 7 1 English Press or to Private Call and press to select. Press tones. to enable/disable the Private Call ringing The display shows ringing tones are enabled. beside Enabled, if Private Call is not displayed when Private Call ringing The tones are disabled. 5.3.14.3 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. Press or to Call Ringers and press Press to access the menu. 273 English Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 274 or to Utilities and press Press or to the required tone and press 7 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. appears beside selected tone. to select. to select. to select. to select. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press Press or to Call Ringers and press Press or to Text Message and press The current tone is indicated by a

. 5.3.14.4 Selecting a Ring Alert Type NOTICE:

The programmed Ring Alert Type button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can program the radio calls to one predetermined vibrate call. If All Tones status is disabled, the radio displays the All Tone Mute icon. If All Tones status is enabled, the related ring alert type is displayed. The radio vibrates once if it is a momentary ring style. The radio vibrates repetitively if it is a repetitive ring style. When set to Ring and Vibrate, the radio sounds a specific ring tone if there is any incoming radio transaction (for example, Call Alert or Message). It sounds like a positive indicator tone or missed call. 5.3.14.5 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. Press to access the menu. Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

5.3.15 Call Log Delete View Details 5.3.15.1 Press select. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 or to Call Log and press to or to preferred list and press The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. Press or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. English 275 English 5.3.15.2 Deleting a Call from a Call List Press to access the menu. Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Press select. or to Call Log and press to 5.3.15.3 Viewing Details from a Call List Press or to the required list and press to select. Press to access the menu. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on . Press select. or to Call Log and press to Press or to the required alias or ID and Press or to the required list and press press to select. to select. Press select. or to Delete and press to press to select. Press or to the required alias or ID and 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 Do one of the following:

276 5 Press or to View Details and press with the alias or ID of the calling radio. The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert to select. Display shows details of call list. 5.3.16 Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu by using Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button. 5.3.16.1 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:

Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. See Notification List on page 193 and Call Log Features on page 133 for more information. 5.3.16.2 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List 1 Press to access the menu. English 277 English 2 Press select. or to Contacts and press to or to Call Alert and press 4 Press to select. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias directly Press or to the required subscriber alias and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu Press or to Manual Dial and press to select. The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press

. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. 5.3.16.3 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. 278 The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. 5.3.17 Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. 5.3.17.1 English Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. Radio is muted. that is configured. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration 5.3.17.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range 279 between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. Exiting Mute Mode If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. Press to access the menu. This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. or to Utilities. Press to The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Mute Timer. Press to Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press

. Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. English 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 5.3.17.3 280 5.3.18 Emergency Operation NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 256. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down English feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Long press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:

281 English Emergency Call Regular You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Silent For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. Silent with Voice The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. Emergency Alert An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert by using the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:

5.3.18.1 Receiving an Incoming Emergency Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. 282 At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radio display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. 5.3.18.2 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press

. The Exit Alarm List screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes and press to save the emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. 5.3.18.3 Deleting the Emergency Details 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press

. The Delete screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes and press emergency details. to delete the Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details screen. English 283 English 5.3.18.4 Responding to an Emergency Call NOTICE:

If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 284 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. 5.3.18.5 Responding to an Emergency Alert NOTICE:

The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. 5.3.18.6 Ignore Emergency Revert Call This feature enhancement provides an option for your radio to disregard an active Emergency Revert Call. To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, your radio must be configured through the Connect Plus Customer Programming Software (CPCPS). When the feature is enabled, the radio does not display Emergency Call indications and does not receive any audio on the default Emergency Revert Group ID. Contact with your dealer for more information. 5.3.18.7 English Initiating an Emergency Call NOTICE:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. 285 English If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. 5.3.18.8 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as "hot mic". The "hot mic" applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 The microphone remains active for the "hot mic" time specified in your radio codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 5.3.18.9 Initiating an Emergency Alert NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed for "Silent" or "Silent with Voice", it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for "Silent", the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for "Emergency Off". If programmed for "Silent with Voice", the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radio display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone 286 sounds and the radio displays Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. 5.3.18.10 Exiting Emergency Mode NOTICE:

If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. English If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. 5.3.19 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 287 English 5.3.19.1 Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-

to-Send Text Messages on page 291). If you are sending the message, perform the following to select a recipient:

Press or to the required alias and press to select. Press or to Manual Dial, and press 5.3.19.2 Sending Quick Text Messages with the One Touch Access Button To send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias, press the programmed One Touch Access button. to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID The display shows Sending Message. If message is successfully sent, your radio shows the following indications:

and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. A positive tone sounds. The display shows Message Sent. If message fails to be sent, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. 288 The display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. See Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 291. 5.3.19.3 Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. NOTICE:

You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 290. Long press the Home screen. at any time to return to Press select. 2 3 5.3.19.3.1 Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. English Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Mes-

sage button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. or to Drafts and press to Press or to the required message and press to select. 289 English 5.3.19.3.2 Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message Press again while viewing the message. Press select. or to Edit and press to A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or the the key to move one space to the right. Press key to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. 5 Select the message recipient by:

1 2 4 290 Press or to the required alias and press to select. Press or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. English Press or to the required message and press to select. Press delete the text message. or to Delete and press to 5.3.19.4 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit 5.3.19.3.3 Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts 1 Access the Text Message feature. 3 4 Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Mes-

sage button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 Press select. or to Drafts and press to 291 English 5.3.19.4.1 Resending a Text Message Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. to resend the same message to the If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. 5.3.19.4.2 Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 Press select. or to Forward and press to 2 To select the message recipient, press or to the required alias or ID and press to select. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. 5.3.19.5 Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. 292 at any time to return to the Home or to Sent Items and press English Press to select. 2 3 Press or to the required message and press to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 236). Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 5.3.19.5.2 Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

5.3.19.5.1 Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Steps NOTICE:

Long press screen. Radio Controls Pro-

gram-

med Text Message button Menu a Press to access the menu. Edit b Press or to Messag es and press to select. 1 Resend Forward Delete Press again while viewing the message. 293 or to one of the following options and Option Steps English 2 press to select. Option Steps Forward Delete Resend 294 Select Forward to send the selec-

ted text message to another sub-

scriber/group alias or ID (see For-

warding a Text Message on page 292). Select Delete to delete the text message. Select Resend to resend the selec-

ted text message to the same sub-

scriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Mes sage, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message fails to send, the ra-

dio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without any audio or visual indication. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. 5.3.19.5.3 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature. Press to select. or to Sent Items and press When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on. 2 3 English Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Mes-

sage button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. Press to select. or to Delete All and press 4 Choose one of the following. Press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to Yes and press or Press or return to the previous screen. to No and press to 5.3.19.6 Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. 295 English Read Read Later Delete 5.3.19.8 296 You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Managing Received Text Messages 5.3.19.7 Reading a Text Message 1 Press select. or to Read? and press to Selected message in the Inbox opens. Forward Delete Delete All 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the Inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply (via Quick Text) NOTICE:

If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press screen. at any time to return to the Home 5.3.19.8.1 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Press to access the menu. or to Messages and press to Steps or to Inbox and press to Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. English Radio Controls Pro-

gram-

med Text Message button Menu Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 Press or to view the messages. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to select the current message, and press message. again to reply, forward, or delete that Long press to return to the Home screen. 5.3.19.8.2 Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Messag es and press to select. Press select. or to Inbox and press to Press or to the required message and press to select. 2 3 4 297 1 Access the Text Message feature. Press once more to access the sub-menu. English 5 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. Steps 6 Press once message is composed. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-

Send Text Messages on page 291). 5.3.19.8.3 Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. 298 Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Mes-

sage button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Inbox and press to Press or to the required message and press to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Delete and press to Radio Con-

trols Steps 5 6 Press select. Press select. or to Yes and press to The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. 5.3.19.8.4 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Mes-

sage button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. a Press menu. to access the The display shows Inbox Cleared. b Press or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Inbox and press to When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 208). Press to select. Press select. or to Delete All and press or to Yes and press to English 299 English 5.3.20 Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. 300 The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. described next. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps NOTICE:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press to select. 4 Press or to Enhanced Privacy. If the display shows Turn On, press Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. to enable If the display shows Turn Off, press to disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. 5.3.20.1 Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. English This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. 5.3.21 Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. NOTICE:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.3.21.1 Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

301 English Steps Radio Controls Radio Disable button Radio menu a Press the programmed Radio Disable button. b Press or quired alias or ID and press to the re-

to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Con tacts and press The entries are alphabetically sorted. to select. c Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

Select the required alias or ID directly. 302 Radio Controls Steps Press to the required alias or ID or and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press to Manual Dial and press or to select. Press or Radio Number and press to to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-

play shows a blinking cur-

sor. Use the keypad to en-

Radio Controls Steps Radio Enable ter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. d Press or to Radio Disable and press lect. to se-

The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. 5.3.21.2 1 Access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Steps Radio Con-

trols Radio Enable button Radio menu a Press the programmed Radio En-

able button. b Press or to the re-

quired alias or ID and press to select. a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Contacts and press tries are alphabetically sorted. to select. The en-

English 303 English Steps Radio Con-

trols c Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID directly. Press or to the required alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. Press to Manual Dial and press or to select. 304 Steps Radio Con-

trols Press or to Ra dio Number and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-

play shows a blinking cur-

sor. Use the keypad to en-

ter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. d Press or to Radio Enable and press to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. 5.3.22 Bluetooth Operation NOTICE:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. English It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radio's Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW

(4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device

(POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device's user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device's full capabilities. 5.3.22.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 Press to access the menu. 305 English 2 3 Press to select. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press or to My Status and press The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to On and press select. The display shows On and a of the selected status. to appears left Press or to Off and press select. The display shows Off and a left of the selected status. to appears 5.3.22.2 306 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation. 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled device user manual. On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press 2 3 4 Press to select. Press select. or to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required device and press to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press or to the required device and press to select. 6 Press select. or to Connect and press to Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. If successful, the radio display shows

<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. appears If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. 5.3.22.3 English Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device (Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 305. Press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press 2 3 4 Press to select. Press select. or to Find Me and press to Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. 307 English 1 2 3 4 5 308 Press to select. Press select. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. 5.3.22.4 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears beside the On your radio, press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press or to Devices and press to Press or to the required device and press to select. Press to select. or to Disconnect and press Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require 5.3.22.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. Bluetooth. 5.3.22.6 Viewing Device Details Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press select. or to Bluetooth and press or to Devices and press to Press or to the required device and Press to select. Press select. English Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. Press to access the menu. or to Bluetooth and press or to Devices and press to press to select. Press or to the required device and Press or to View Details and press press to select. to select. 5.3.22.7 Press select. or to Delete and press to The display shows Device Deleted. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 309 English 5.3.22.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device microphone gain value. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press Press or to BT Mic Gain and press to select. Press or current values. to the BT Mic Gain type and the 5.3.23 Indoor Location NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. 5.3.23.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. To edit values, press to select. a. Press to access the menu. Press or to increase or to decrease values and press to select. b. Press or to Bluetooth and press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 310 c. Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. Access this feature by using the programmed button. English The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. 311 If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. 4 Press select. or to Beacons and press to 5.3.23.2 Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. The display shows the beacons information. 5.3.24 Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your

"unread" events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. NOTICE:

After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. 5.3.24.1 Accessing the Notification List Follow the procedure to access the notification list. English 1 2 3 312 Press or to Notification and press Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Press or to the required event and press WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 to select. to select. Long press to return to the Home Screen. 5.3.25 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. English Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 313 English NOTICE:

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi remotely by using a designated radio (see Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) on page 198 and Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) on page 199). Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows Enabled. beside If Wi-Fi is off, the Enabled. disappears from beside 5.3.25.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 2 Access this feature using the menu. a Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to c Press or to WiFi On and press b Press select. to select. 314 5.3.25.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control

(One to One). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Do one of the following:

English Long press the programmable button. Use the keypad to enter the ID and press Proceed to step 3. to select. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to WiFi Control and press Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control

(One to Many). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. to select. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 5.3.25.3 Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 1 2 3 4 Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press subscriber alias or ID. or to select the required Press or to WiFi Control and press to select. 315 Press or to select On or Off. or to WiFi and press to English 5 6 316 Press to select. If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 5.3.25.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Press to access the menu. or to Networks and press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 Press select. press

. Press or to a network access point and press to select. NOTICE:

For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. 5.3.25.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. English 317 English 5.3.25.6 Refreshing the Network List 5.3.25.7 Adding a Network Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to c. Press or to Networks and press to select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to or to Refresh and press to Press or to Add Network and press The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. to select. Press select. 318 or to Open and press to Press or to a network access point and Enter the password and press

. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. to select. Press or to View Details and press 6 7 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. Press select. 5.3.25.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to English 4 5 press to select. NOTICE:

WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. 319 English For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. 5.3.25.9 Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to 5.3.26 Utilities or to Networks and press to This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 320 5.3.26.1 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. English Press to select. or to All Tones and press Press to enable/disable all tones and alerts. The display shows beside Enabled. The disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press 5.3.26.2 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. to select. to select. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 5 6 1 2 321 English 3 4 5 6 to select. to select. to select. Press or to Radio Settings and press Press or to Tones/Alerts and press 5.3.26.3 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. Press to access the menu. Press or to Vol. Offset and press or to Utilities and press Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. to select. to select. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press Press or to Talk Permit and press Press or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press to keep the required displayed volume value. Press to exit without changing the current volume offset settings. 322 6 1 2 3 Press to enable/disable the Talk Permit Tone. Press or to Tones/Alerts and press The display shows beside Enabled. The disappears from beside Enabled. to select. or to Power Up and press to 5.3.26.4 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. to enable/disable the Power Up Alert The display shows beside Enabled. The disappears from beside Enabled. 4 5 6 Press select. Press Tone. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 5.3.26.5 Setting the Power Level You can customize your radio power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. English 323 Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. appears beside selected setting. At any time, long press to return to the Home screen. Screen returns to the previous menu. Press to access the menu. 5.3.26.6 Changing the Display Mode Press to select. or to Utilities and press You can change radio display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Press or to Radio Settings and press Press to access the menu. to select. Press select. or to Power and press to Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press 1 2 3 Press or to the required setting and to select. press to select. English 1 2 3 4 5 324 or to Display and press to Press or to Radio Settings and press 4 5 1 2 Press select. press setting. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. Press or to the required setting and to enable. appears besides selected 5.3.26.7 Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. NOTICE:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press English to select. Press select. Press to select. 3 4 5 6 or to Display and press to or to Brightness and press The display shows a progress bar. Decrease display brightness by pressing or increase the display brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press your entry. to confirm 325 5.3.26.8 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off 6 Press Screen. You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. to enable/disable the Introduction The display shows beside Enabled. The disappears from beside Enabled. Press to access the menu. 5.3.26.9 Language Press to select. or to Utilities and press You can set your radio display to be in your required language. Press or to Radio Settings and press Press to access the menu. or to Display and press to Press to select. or to Utilities and press 1 2 3 Press or to Intro Screen and press to select. Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. Press select. to select. English 1 2 3 4 5 326 English or to Languages and press Press or to LED Indicator and press 4 5 1 2 3 Press to select. press language. Press or to the required language and to enable. appears beside selected 5.3.26.10 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. Press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. The display shows beside Enabled. The disappears from beside Enabled. 5.3.26.11 Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 4 5 1 2 3 to select. Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. 327 English 4 Press to select. or to Cable Type and press Press or to Voice Announcement and 5 The current cable type is indicated by a

. You can also use or to change the selected option. press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Voice Announcement. The display shows beside Enabled. Press to disable Voice Announcement. The disappears from beside Enabled. 5.3.26.13 Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Press to access the menu. 4 1 2 5.3.26.12 Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Utilities and press 1 2 3 328 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press or to Display and press to or to Menu Timer and press 3 4 5 6 to select. Press select. Press to select. 5.3.26.14 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through the rear accessory connector of your radio by your dealer. English Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. to select. Press or to Horn/Lights and press Press to enable/disable Horns/Lights. The display shows beside Enabled. 329 Press or to the required setting and press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press English 1 2 3 4 select. or to select. select. 330 The disappears from beside Enabled. 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume & Ch. 5.3.26.15 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to or to select. to the required setting and press appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. 5.3.26.16 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. to Radio Settings and press Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. or to Dual Knob and press to 4 Press to select. or to Mic AGC-D and press 5 Do one of the following:

Steps Radio Con-

trol Menu Press shows beside Enabled . to enable Mic AGC-D . The display Press to disable Mic AGC-D . The disappears from beside Enabled . 5.3.26.17 Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. 1 Press to access the menu. English a Press to access the menu. b Press or to Radio Settings and press lect. to se-

c Press or to Radio Settings and press lect. to se-

d Press or to Intelli gent Audio and press lect. to se-

NOTICE:

You can also use or to change the selected op-

tion. e Do one of the following:

331 English Steps Radio Con-

trol Press to enable Intelligent be-

Audio. The display shows side Enabled. Press Audio. The beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press to enable Intelligent Audio. The display shows beside Enabled. Press to disable Intelligent Audio. The disappears from beside Enabled. See Authorized Accessories List for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. 5.3.26.18 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Press or to Radio Settings and press to select. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press or to Intelligent Audio and Press to select. or to Utilities and press press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

2 3 4 332 Press or to Radio Settings and press Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). 3 4 to select. to select. Press or to AF Suppressor and press You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Suppressor. The Enabled. 5.3.26.19 Turning GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), English NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press or to GNSS. Press to select. 333 English 5 Press to enable/disable GNSS. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. See Checking the GNSS Information on page 344 for details on retrieving GNSS information. 5.3.26.20 Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Site Number Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GNSS Information 334 Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press to return to the Home screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 5.3.26.20.1 Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radio model-specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press 4 1 2 3 Press or to Model Index and press Press or to OB OTA CPcrc and press to select. to select. The display shows the Model Number Index. 5.3.26.20.2 Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. Press to access the menu. The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. 5.3.26.20.3 Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) NOTICE:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:

Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press to access the menu. or to Radio Info and press Press to select. or to Utilities and press 4 1 2 English 335 English Press to select. 3 4 or to Radio Info and press numbers separated by commas). Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater (five If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. to select. Press to access the menu. Press or to Site Number and press The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Site Info and press The display shows the Site Info. 5.3.26.20.4 Checking the Site Info NOTICE:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:

Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control 5.3.26.20.5 Checking the Radio ID Channel repeater. This feature displays the ID of your radio. 336 English Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. Press to access the menu. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. or to Utilities and press Press to access the menu. or to Radio Info and press or to My ID and press to or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press The display shows the radio ID. or to Versions and press to 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. 5.3.26.20.6 The display a list with the following information:

(Radio) Firmware Version

(Radio) Codeplug Version Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version 337 English Option Board Codeplug Version See what percentage of packets has been collected so 5.3.26.20.7 Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files

(Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File, and Option Board Firmware File) Over-The-Air (OTA). NOTICE:

Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version by using a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about through system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the file packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:

See the version number of the pending file. 338 far. packets. Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus OTA file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. NOTICE:

The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all OTA file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:

The radio system administrator re-initiates the OTA file transfer. The Option Board pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume through the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depend on how the radio has been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio user will not be able to make or receive calls until English the process is completed. During the process, radio display prompts user to not turn off the radio. 5.3.26.20.7.1 Firmware File The following section provides information on the radio firmware. 5.3.26.20.7.1.1 Firmware Up to Date NOTICE:

If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date

(and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version,

%Received, and Download. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press to select. or to Utilities and press 339 3 4 5 1 2 3 English Press to select. Press select. Press select. Press to select. Press to select. 340 or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Updates and press to or to Firmware and press to or to Firmware and press to or to Version and press to The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. 5.3.26.20.7.2 Pending Firmware Version Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date. 5.3.26.20.7.3 Pending Firmware % Received Press to access the menu. or to Radio Info and press Press to select. or to Utilities and press Press select. Press select. Press select. 4 5 6 1 2 English or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Firmware and press to Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. Press to access the menu. 3 4 5 6 Press to select. Press select. Press select. Press to select. 5.3.26.20.7.4 or to %Received and press The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. NOTICE:

When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. Press select. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Firmware and press to 341 or to Download and press to Frequency File Up to Date English 6 Press select. The display shows the following:

Download Available Start Download No Download Availa-

ble Download not avail able 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press previous menu. to return to the The following section provides information on the frequency file of the radio. 5.3.26.20.7.5 Frequency File 5.3.26.20.7.5.1 342 NOTICE:

If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. or to Frequency and press The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. 5.3.26.20.7.5.2 Frequency File Pending Version 5.3.26.20.7.5.3 Frequency File Pending % Received Press to access the menu. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to or to Updates and press to or to Frequency and press or to %Received and press or to Version and press to The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. Press to select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. Press to select. English 343 English 5.3.26.20.7.5.4 Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. 5 6 Press to select. Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to Updates and press to 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press select. 344 or to Frequency and press or to Download and press to Download Currently Unavailable Download not available Download Currently Available Start Download 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press to return to the previous menu. 5.3.26.20.7.6 Checking the GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) See Turning GNSS On or Off on page 333 for details on GNSS. Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities and press or to Radio Info and press or to GNSS Info and press 5 1 2 3 English Press or to the required item and press to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. 5.3.26.21 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Certificate Menu. Press to select. 345 English appears beside ready certificates. 4 Press or to the required certificate. Press to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:

For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. 346 Other Systems Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. is enabled, If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving English your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted. You should release the PTT button if you hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone. 6.2 Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 427 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 347 English 6.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions Call Forwarding Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Audio Ambience Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Audio Profiles Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Call Alert 348 Call Log Selects the call log list. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Contacts Emergency Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Toggles Indoor Location on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Manual Dial Initiates a Private Call by keying in any subscriber ID. Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Indoor Location English Manual Site Roam 5 Starts the manual site search. Permanent Monitor5 Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Phone Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Mic AGC Monitor Notifications Monitors a selected channel for activity. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Nuisance Channel Delete5 Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. Option Board Feature Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Public Address (PA) Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Radio Check Radio Disable Radio Enable Remote Monitor Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. 5 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. 349 English Repeater/Talkaround5 Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Scan 6 Site Info Toggles scan on or off. Displays the current site name and ID of Capacity Plus-

Multi-Site. Wi-Fi Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Site Lock5 When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Text Message Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Stops an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Toggles VOX on or off. Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Selection Allows selection from a list of zones. 6.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. 6 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. 350 Tones/Alerts Backlight Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Display Mode Power Level Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. 6.2.3 Accessing Programmed Functions Follow the procedure to access programmed functions in your radio. English 2 Press or to the menu function, and press to select a function or enter a sub-menu. 3 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the previous screen. Long press to return to the Home screen. Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to the Home screen. The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone. See Keypad Microphone Buttons on page 46. 6.3 Status Indicators 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed button. Proceed to step 3. This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. Press to access the menu. 351 English 6.3.1 Icons The Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. Table 10: Display Icons The following icons appear on the status bar at the top of the radio display. The icons are arranged left most in order of appearance or usage, and are channel-specific. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Blue-

tooth device is connected. Bluetooth Not Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device connected. Call Log Radio call log. 7 Only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. 352 Contact Radio contact is available. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. GNSS Available GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is availa-

ble. GNSS Not Available GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. High Volume Data Radio is receiving high volume data and channel is busy. Indoor Location Available 7 Indoor location status is on and avail-

able. Indoor Location Unavailable7 Indoor location status is on but un-

available due to Bluetooth disabled or Beacons Scan suspended by Blue-

tooth. Message Incoming message. Monitor Mute Mode Selected channel is being monitored. Mute Mode is enabled and speaker is muted. Notification Notification List has one or more missed events. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. (Option board enabled models only.) 8 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. English Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic restart of radio. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while re-

ceiving. Ring Only Ringing mode is enabled. Scan 8 Scan feature is enabled. Scan-Priority 18 Radio detects activity on channel/

group designated as Priority 1. 353 English Scan-Priority 28 Radio detects activity on channel/

group designated as Priority 2. The Privacy feature is enabled. Secure Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote serv-

er. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. Silent Ring Silent ring mode is enabled. Site Roaming 9 The site roaming feature is enabled. 9 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. 10 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e . 354 Talkaround8 In the absence of a repeater, the ra-

dio is configured for direct radio to ra-

dio communication. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. The Privacy feature is disabled. Unsecure Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. Wi-Fi Excellent 10 Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good10 Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average10 Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor10 Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable10 Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. English Table 12: Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Table 11: Advance Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates that the option is selected. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates that the option is not selec-

ted. Solid Black Box Indicates that the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Bluetooth Sensor Device10 Bluetooth-enabled sensor device, such as gas sensor. 355 English Table 13: Call Icons The following icons appear on the display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or ID type. Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in pro-

gress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID

(number). Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dis-

patcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). 356 Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID (number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a phone alias (name) or ID (number). Table 14: Job Tickets Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display in the Job Ticket folder. All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. New Jobs Indicates new jobs. In Progress Jobs are transmitting. This is seen before indication for Job Tickets Send Failed or Sent Succesfully. Send Failed Jobs cannot be sent. Sent Successfully Jobs have been successfully sent. English Table 15: Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the display after an action to perform a task is taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Successful Transmission (Positive) Successful action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Indicates Priority Level 1 for jobs. Table 16: Sent Items Icons Indicates Priority Level 2 for jobs. The following icons appear at the top right corner of the display in the Sent Items folder. Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Indicates Priority Level 3 for jobs. or In Progress The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledge-

ment. 357 or or or or The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. LED Indicators LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Individual or Group Message Read The text message has been read. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Individual or Group Message Unread The text message has not been read. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Send Failed The text message cannot be sent. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Sent Successfully The text message has been success-

fully sent. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions. Radio is detecting activity over the air. English 6.3.2 358 NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. There is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air in Capacity Plus. 6.3.3 Tones English Radio is not connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus. All Capacity Plus channels are busy. The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Solid Yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Blinking Yellow Radio is scanning for activity. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Radio has Flexible Receive List enabled. All Capacity PlusMulti-Site channels are busy. Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. High Pitched Tone Low Pitched Tone 6.3.3.1 Indicator Tones Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. 359 English 6.3.3.2 Audio Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. Conventional Analog and Digital Modes Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. 1 : Channel Selector Knob Use the Channel Rocker to switch between an analog or a digital channel. Certain features are unavailable when switching from digital to analog mode. The icons for digital features reflect this change by appearing grayed out. The disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital modes. The minor differences in the way each feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. NOTICE:

Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan. See Scan on page 406 for more information. 6.4 360 6.5 Icon Information Throughout this publication, the icons described are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional analog or conventional digital mode, or made available with a keypad-enabled microphone. Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional analog and digital modes, both icons are not shown. 6.6 IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site by connecting to different available sites by using an Internet English Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site mode. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions. This is done either automatically or manually depending on your settings. In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater. NOTICE:

Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channels in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels, including the selected channel. 361 NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry in the roam list. Contact your dealer for more information. 6.8 Capacity PlusMulti-Site 6.7 Capacity PlusSingle-Site Capacity PlusSingle-Site is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusSingle-Site by using a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Capacity PlusMulti-Site is a multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Capacity PlusMulti-Site allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected with an IP network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest RSSI value. English 362 In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Capacity PlusMulti-Site enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity PlusSingle Site, icons of features not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site by using a programmable button press. 6.9 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. A zone is a group of channels. English Your radio supports up to 99 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per zone. Each channel can be programmed with different features and/or support different groups of users. 6.9.1 Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Zone Selection button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. 363 Press or to the required zone. Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 6.9.2 Selecting Zones by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio by using the alias search. 4 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 5 Press to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Press to access the menu. 6.9.3 Selecting Channels Press or to Zone. Press to select. The display shows and the current zone. Follow the procedure to select the required channel on your radio after you have selected a zone. 3 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. Do one of the following:

Press the Scroll Up/Down button. Use the Volume/Channel Knob. English 3 1 2 364 Press the programmed Channel Up/Down buttons. 6.10 Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Alias Search This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. Contacts List This method provides direct access to the Contacts list. Manual Dial (by using Contacts) This method is used for Private and Phone Calls only with a keypad microphone. Programmed Number Keys This method is used for Group, Private, and All Calls only with a keypad microphone. English NOTICE:

You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. All the number keys on a keypad microphone can be assigned. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. 365 English NOTICE:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 463 for more information. 6.10.1 Group Calls Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 6.10.1.1 Making Group Calls Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 366 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and the group call alias. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6.10.1.2 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.10.1.3 Making Group Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. English 367 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. Responding to Group Calls The green LED lights up. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, corner. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the English 6.10.1.4 368 transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. Private Calls The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. If the radio receives a Group Call while not on the Home screen, it remains on its current screen prior to answering the call. Long press caller alias before replying. to return to the Home screen to view the 6.10.2 A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first type sets up the call after performing a radio presence check, while the second type sets up the call immediately. Only one of these types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. 6.10.2.1 Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, a negative indicator tone sounds when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. For more information, see Text Messaging on page 155 or Call Alert Operation on page 421. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. English 369 English Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 370 6.10.2.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.10.2.3 Making Private Calls by Using the Manual Dial English 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press 5 Do one of the following:

Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Edit the previously dialed subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 1 Press to access the menu. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 371 English 8 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.10.2.4 Making Private Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. 372 If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon at the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line shows the call status. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the destination alias. 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. ongoing interruptible call and free the channel for you to respond. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. The green LED lights up. 6.10.2.5 Responding to Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Private Call:

The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.10.3 All Calls An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 6.10.3.1 Receiving All Calls When you receive an All Call:

If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop an A tone sounds. English 373 English corner. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right 6.10.3.2 Making All Calls The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds or ID. through the speaker. Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias The radio returns to the screen before receiving the All Call when the call ends. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of an All Call. 374 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon and All Call. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 6.10.3.3 Making All Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 Long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID when you are on the Home screen. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. A negative indicator tone sounds if the number key is not associated to an entry. English 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. 6.10.4 Selective Calls 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. You cannot respond to an All Call at the moment. 6.10.4.1 Making Selective Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make Selective Calls on your radio. 375 English ID. 1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. 6 The display shows Call Ended. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Private Call icon, the subscriber alias, and call status. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6.10.4.2 Responding to Selective Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on your radio. When you receive a Selective Call:

The green LED blinks. The first text line shows the Private Call icon and the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. through the speaker. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 376 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. 6.10.5 Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a telephone. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio:

The display shows Unavailable. Your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. digits. During the Phone Call, your radio attempts to end the call when:

You press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured. You enter the deaccess code as the input for extra During channel access, access or deaccess code, or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to the On/Off , Volume Control, and Channel Selector buttons or knobs only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. During channel access, press attempt. A tone sounds. to dismiss the call NOTICE:

The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.5.1 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code is not preconfigured in the Contact List, the display shows Access Code:. English 377 English 2 Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 5 Press to end the call. 6 Do one of the following:

If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. 378 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the last two steps or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.10.5.2 Making Phone Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 1 Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to or to Call Phone. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. The display shows Access Code: if the access code was not preconfigured. Press select. 2 3 Press select. 4 5 English Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. When you press the PTT button while on the Phone Contacts screen:

The first line of the display shows Phone The second line of the display shows a blinking Number:. cursor. If the selected entry is empty:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Invalid #. and the RSSI icon. Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The first text line shows Calling. The second text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias or ID, The second text line shows Phone Call, and the Phone Call icon. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. 379 6 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The RSSI icon disappears. A tone sounds. English The display shows Phone Call Failed and then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Enter extra digits with the keypad if requested by the call, and press to proceed. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. The DTMF Tone sounds. Your radio returns to the previous screen. 9 Press to end the call. 380 10 If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-

Access Code:, and press to proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 9 and step 10, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

During the channel access, press the call attempt and a tone sounds. to dismiss During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/ deaccess code or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. Press select. Press select. Press to select. 6.10.5.3 Making Phone Calls by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio by using the manual dial. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 7 English or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Phone Number. Press The display shows Number: and a blinking cursor. Enter the telephone number, and press proceed. to The display shows Access Code: and a blinking cursor if the access code was not preconfigured. Enter the access code, and press to proceed. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. The first text 381 English line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line shows the call status. If the call is successful:

The DTMF Tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The display continues to show the Phone Call icon at the top right corner. If the call is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. then, Access Code:. Your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call if the access code has been preconfigured in the Contacts list. If the deaccess code was not preconfigured, enter the deaccess code when the display shows De-Access Code:, and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF Tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 8, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. The display shows Phone Call Failed and A tone sounds. 8 Press to end the call. 9 Do one of the following:

382 NOTICE:

When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on before initiating the call. During the channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. to During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, English and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 6.10.5.4 Making Group, Private, Phone or All Calls by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to make any calls by using the alias search. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. or to the required subscriber alias Press or ID. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. 383 English 4 5 384 to select. If the entry selected is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 8 to end the call. If deaccess code was Press not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the to proceed. The deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. NOTICE:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit or to exit alias alias search. Press search. During the call, when you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/ deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 6.10.5.5 English Dual Tone Multi Frequency The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows your radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to the telephone systems. Disabling all radio tones and alert will automatically turn off the DTMF tone. 6.10.5.5.1 Initiating DTMF Calls Follow the procedure to initiate DTMF calls on your radio. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter the desired number to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. Press to initiate a DTMF call. 385 English 6.10.5.6 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right 6.10.5.7 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls corner. The display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right the PTT button to listen. corner. The display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. 2 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. 386 Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

The display shows the Phone Call icon at the top right 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. corner. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows All Call and Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat step 3 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 6.10.5.8 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. The display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 Press to end the call. The display shows Ending Phone Call. If the call ends successfully:

A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. If the call fails to end, the radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. English 387 English 6.10.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. Perform data transmission. Press the programmed TX Interrupt Remote Dekey button. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus Single-Site, Capacity PlusMulti-Site, and Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 6.10.7.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on your radio. The recipient radio displays Call Interrupted. 1 Do one of the following:

6.10.7 Talkaround This feature allows you to continue communicating when your repeater is non-operational, or when your radio is out of range from the repeater but within the talk range of other radios. The talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. Press select. 2 3 Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 388 4 Press select. or to Talkaround. Press to Making Broadcast Voice Calls Program your radio to make Broadcast Voice Calls. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. The screen automatically returns to the previous screen. 6.10.8 Broadcast Voice Calls A Broadcast Voice Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Voice Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond (no Call Hang Time). Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.8.1 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows Broadcast Call, the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. NOTICE:

Users on the channel cannot respond to Broadcast Voice Calls. The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends. English 389 English 6.10.8.2 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Voice Call on your radio by using the programmable number key. 1 On the Home screen, long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 6.10.8.3 390 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to The display shows the entries in alphabetical order. or to the required subscriber alias The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Press select. Press or ID. 1 2 3 5 to select. If the selected entry is empty, Press a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #

See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys on page 411 for more information. 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. 6 or to Call Phone and Press Press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the button to proceed. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 7 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 8 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows English Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the button to proceed. The DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 9 to end the call. If deaccess code was Press not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the to proceed. The deaccess code and press radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone 391 English sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. corner. The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon at the top right NOTICE:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds button or to exit button or alias search. Press to exit alias search. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. 6.10.8.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls When you receive a Broadcast Voice Call:

A tone sounds. 392 The first text line shows the caller alias ID. The second text line displays Broadcast Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. When the call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen. A Broadcast Voice Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. You cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the Broadcast Voice Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You cannot continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of the Broadcast Voice Call. 6.10.9 Unaddressed Calls An Unaddressed Call is a group call to one of the 16 predefined group IDs. This feature is configured using CPS-RM. A contact for one of the predefined IDs is required to initiate and/or receive an Unaddressed Call. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.9.1 Making Unaddressed Calls 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up.The text line shows Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon and alias. 3 Do one of the following:

English shows Unaddress Call, the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating that the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press to end a Group Call. 6.10.9.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak When you receive an Unaddressed Call:

clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The green LED blinks. A momentary tone sounds. The text line shows Unaddress Call, the caller alias, and the group call alias. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. A momentary tone sounds. The display 393 Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 6.10.10 Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) An Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) allows a radio that is not preconfigured to work in a particular system to both receive and transmit during a group or individual call. The OVCM group call also supports broadcast calls. Program your radio to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.10.1 Making OVCM Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an OVCM Call. Follow the procedure to make OVCM Calls on your radio. 1 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. English 394 The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM and alias. indicating that the radio has entered OVCM State. English indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

6.10.10.2 Responding to OVCM Calls When you receive an OVCM Call:

The green LED blinks. The text line shows the call type icon, OVCM, and alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.11 Advanced Features If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. 395 English Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.1 Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled through CPS, when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:

The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound. The first line of the display shows Non. The second line shows Home Channel. You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:

Return to the home channel. Mute the reminder temporarily using the programmable button. button. 396 6.11.1.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. Press the programmed Silence Home Channel Reminder button. The display shows HCR Silenced. 6.11.1.2 Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. Skip the following steps. The first line of the display shows the channel alias and the second line shows New Home Ch. Set a new home channel using the programmable Press to access the menu. English Press select. 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities. Press to Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Press or to Radio Settings. Press 6.11.2.1 Sending Radio Checks to select. Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio. Press to select. or to Home Channel. Press 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press or to the desired new home Press to select. channel alias. Press to select. The display shows channel alias. beside the selected home The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress.The green LED lights up. 6.11.2 Radio Check This feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the radio user. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Wait for acknowledgment. If you press acknowledgment, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. when the radio is waiting for If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. 397 English If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. 6.11.2.2 Sending Radio Checks by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to send radio checks on your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to select. 398 5 Do one of the following:

Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to to proceed. proceed. 6 Press select. or to Radio Check. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If you press acknowledgement, a tone sounds, the radio terminates all retries, and exits Radio Check mode. when the radio is waiting for or to Manual Dial. Press to If successful:

or to Radio Number. Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. 6.11.3 Remote Monitor This feature is used to turn on the microphone of a target radio with a subscriber alias or ID. You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. This feature stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. 6.11.3.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. English 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. Press or to the required alias or ID. 2 3 Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 399 English 6.11.3.2 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the Contacts list. Press to access the menu. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press or to Remote Mon.. 6.11.3.3 Initiating Remote Monitor by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio by using the manual dial. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 1 Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 5 400 Press select. Press select. Press to select. 2 3 4 6 or to Contacts. Press to Press to select. 7 or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. or to Radio Number. Press If successful:

8 Wait for acknowledgment. 5 Do one of the following:

Enter the subscriber alias or ID, and press to proceed. proceed. Edit the previously dialed ID, and press to Press or to Remote Mon.. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The audio from the monitored radio starts playing for a programmed duration, and the display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, an alert tone sounds, and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English 401 English 6.11.4 Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels or groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel or group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel or group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio by using Front Panel Programming. See Front Panel Configuration on page 196 for more information. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. 402 6.11.4.1 Viewing Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to view the entries in the Scan list on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. or to Scan List. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press list. or to view each member on the 6.11.4.2 Viewing Entries in the Scan List by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to view entries in the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press select. or to Scan List. Press to 4 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 5 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 6.11.4.3 English Adding New Entries to the Scan List Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. or to Scan List. Press to or to Add Member. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 403 English 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. or to Scan List. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

or to Add Member. Press to 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Yes to add another entry. Press to select. Repeat step 5 and step 6. Press or to No to save the current list. Press to select. 6.11.4.4 Adding New Entries to the Scan List by Using the Alias Search Follow the procedure to add new entries to the Scan list on your radio by using the alias search. Press to access the menu. 1 404 5 Enter the first character of the required alias. The display shows a blinking cursor. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more entries with the same name, the display shows the entry listed first in the list. The first text line shows the characters you entered. The following text lines show the shortlisted search results. 7 Press to select. 8 Press or to the required priority level. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice and then, Add Another?. or to Scan List. Press to 9 Do one of the following:

Press or to Yes to add another entry. Press step 8. to select. Repeat Step step 5 to Step Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Delete. Press to Press or to No to save the current list. The display shows Delete Entry?. Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 6.11.4.5 Deleting Entries from the Scan List Follow the procedure to delete entries from the Scan list. Press or to Yes to delete the entry. Press The display shows a positive mini notice. to select. 1 Press to access the menu. Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. English 405 7 Repeat step 4 to step 6 to delete other entries. or to Edit Priority. Press English 8 1 2 3 4 406 Long press deleting all required aliases or IDs. to return to the Home screen after 6.11.4.6 Setting Priority for Entries in the Scan List Follow the procedure to set priorities for entries in the Scan list on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Scan. Press to select. Press select. or to Scan List. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press to select. 5 6 Press or to the required priority level. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The Priority icon appears on the left of the member alias. 6.11.5 Scan Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity when you start a scan. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. There are two ways of initiating scan:

English Press or to Scan. Press to select. or to Scan State. Press to Press or to the required scan state and press to select. If scan is enabled:

The display shows Scan On and Scan icon. The yellow LED blinks. If scan is disabled:

The display shows Scan Off. The Scan icon disappears. The LED turns off. Main Channel Scan (Manual) Your radio scans all the channels or groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may, depending on the settings, automatically start on the last scanned active channel or group, or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic) Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel or group that has Auto Scan enabled. 2 3 4 Press select. NOTICE:

When you configure Receive Group Message In Scan, your radio is able to receive group messages from non-home channels. Your radio is able to reply the group messages on home channel but is not able to reply on non-home channels. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.5.1 Turning Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. 407 English 6.11.5.3 408 6.11.5.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning. Deleting Nuisance Channels If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise,

(termed a "nuisance" channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED lights up. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio returns to scanning other channels or groups if you do not respond within the hang time. 6.11.5.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your radio. Do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Scan button or menu. Contacts Settings Change the channel using the Channel Up/

Down button. 6.11.6 Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio receives transmissions from that base station. During a vote scan, the yellow LED blinks and the display shows the Vote Scan icon. To respond to a transmission during a vote scan, see Responding to Transmissions During Scanning on page 408. 6.11.7 English Contacts provides address book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. The entries are alphabetically sorted. Each entry, depending on context, associates with the different call types: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call, or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for further details. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. NOTICE:

You see a checkmark before each number key that is assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty, you have not assign a number key to the entry. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Type Call Alias 409 English Call ID NOTICE:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Calls, Private Calls, and All Calls on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to decrypt the transmission. 6.11.7.1 Making Group Calls by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio by using the Contacts list. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when any user in the group responds. The display shows the Group Call icon, and alias or ID, and the transmitting radio alias or ID. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to 6.11.7.2 Making Private Calls by Using the Contacts List Press or to the required alias or ID. 1 Press to access the menu. Press to select. 1 2 3 410 or to Contacts. Press to The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. The display shows Call Ended. English Press select. 2 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the destination alias. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. The display shows the transmitting user alias or ID. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. 6.11.7.3 Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Program Key. Press to 5 Do one of the following:

411 If the desired number key has not been assigned to an entry, press or to the desired number key. Press to select. If the desired number key has been assigned to an entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first text line shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following:

Press select. or to Yes. Press to The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved and a positive mini notice. Press previous step. or to No to return to the Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a is before Empty, that assigned to an entry. If the number key is not assigned. If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 6.11.7.4 Removing Associations Between Entries and Programmable Number Keys 1 Do one of the following:

Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID. Proceed to step 4. Press to access the menu. 2 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to English 412 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Adding New Contacts Follow the procedure to add new contacts on your radio. English 3 4 5 6 6.11.7.5 Press select. or to Program Key. Press to Press or to Empty. Press to select. The first text line shows Clear from all keys. Press or to Yes. Press to select. NOTICE:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows Contact Saved. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to or to New Contact. Press to Press or to select contact type Radio Contact or Phone Contact. Press to select. 5 Enter the contact number with the keypad, and press 6 Enter the contact name with the keypad, and press to proceed. to proceed. 413 Press or to the required ringer type. Press or to Set as Default. Press Press to select. to select. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows the selected default alias or ID. beside 6.11.7.6 Setting Default Contact Follow the procedure to set the default contact on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to 6.11.8 Call Indicator Settings This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. 6.11.8.1 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 4 1 2 English 7 1 2 3 414 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Tones/Alert. Press to Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Private Calls on your radio. or to Call Ringers. Press Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to or to Call Alert. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press 3 4 5 6 7 Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected tone. or to Tones/Alerts. Press 6.11.8.2 or to Call Ringers. Press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press to select. Press to select. English 415 or to Private Call. Press or to Utilities. Press to beside On if Private Call ringing Press or to Radio Settings. Press The display shows ringing tones are disabled. beside Off if Private Call to select. Press to select. The display shows tones are enabled. English 6 7 Press or to the required tone. Press to select. If enabled, disappears beside Enabled. appears beside Enabled. If disabled, 6.11.8.3 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Calls Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for Selective Calls on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 416 Press select. Press to select. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 7 or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press Press or to Selective Call. Press to select. The display shows and the current tone. Press or to the required tone. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected tone. 6.11.8.4 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Messages Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for text messages on your radio. Press to select. or to Text Message. Press The display shows and the current tone. Press or to the required tone. Press Press to access the menu. to select. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Call Ringers. Press The display shows beside the newly selected tone. 6.11.8.5 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text Follow the procedure to activate or deactivate call ringers for telemetry status with text on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 6 7 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 English 417 English to select. 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. or to Tones/Alert. Press to Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to or to Call Ringers. Press The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to Telemetry. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. 6.11.8.6 Assigning Ring Styles The radio can be programmed to sound one of eleven predefined ringing tones when receiving a Private Call, a Call Alert, or a Text Message from a particular contact.The Press select. or to View/Edit. Press to Press until display shows Ringer menu A indicates the current selected tone. 1 2 3 4 5 418 English 6 Press or to the required tone. Press to select. A appears beside the selected tone. Delete Call Delete All Calls View Details 6.11.8.7 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 6.11.9 Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. The call log feature is used to view and manage recent calls. Missed Call Alerts may be included in the call logs, depending on the system configuration on your radio. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store Alias or ID to Contacts 1 2 3 4 6.11.9.1 Viewing Recent Calls Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to Press options are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing lists. to the preferred list. The or Press to select. The display shows the most recent entry. Press or to view the list. You can start a call with the alias or ID the display is currently showing by pressing the PTT button. 419 6.11.9.2 Deleting Calls from the Call List Follow the procedure to delete calls from the Call list. 5 Press to select. or to Delete Entry?. Press Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to Call Log. Press to or to the required list. Press If the list is empty:

A tone sounds. The display shows List Empty. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

Press to select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 6.11.9.3 Viewing Call List Details Follow the procedure to view call details on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Call Log. Press to English 1 2 3 4 420 English or to the required list. Press or to the required list. Press Press to select. 3 4 5 Press to select. Press to select. 3 4 5 1 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press to select. or to View Details. Press Press or to Store. Press to select. The display shows the call details. 6.11.9.4 Storing Aliases or IDs from the Call List Follow the procedure to store aliases or IDs on your radio from the Call list. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Call Log. Press to The display shows a blinking cursor. 6 Enter the rest of the characters of the required alias. Press to select. You can store an ID without an alias. The display shows a positive mini notice. 6.11.10 Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back. 421 This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu using Contacts, manual dial, or a programmed One Touch Access button. Making Call Alerts by Using the Contacts List 6.11.10.1 Making Call Alerts Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. or to Contacts. Press to 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to Call Alert. Press to The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If the acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. English 6.11.10.2 422 If the acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.10.3 Making Call Alerts by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the subscriber ID and press to proceed. Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 English 5 Press select. or to Call Alert. Press to The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, the display shows a positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.10.4 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. 423 English The display shows the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio. Depending on the configuration by your dealer or system administrator, you can respond to a Call Alert by doing one of the following:

Press the PTT button and respond with a Private Call directly to the caller. Press the PTT button to continue normal talkgroup communication. The Call Alert is moved to the Missed Call option at the Call Log menu. You can respond to the caller from the Missed Called log. NOTICE:

A keypad microphone is required to perform this feature. When in a call, the receiving radio displays the Caller Alias of the transmitting radio. The Caller Aliases list can store up to 500 Caller Aliases of transmitting radio. You can view or make Private Calls from the Caller Aliases list. When you turn off your radio, the history of receiving Caller Aliases is removed from the Caller Aliases list. 6.11.11.1 Viewing the Caller Aliases List See Notification List on page 193 and Call Log Features on page 133 for more information. You can access the Caller Aliases list to view the transmitting Caller Alias details. 6.11.11 Dynamic Caller Alias This feature allows you to dynamically edit a Caller Alias from your radio front panel. 1 2 Press to access the menu. Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to select. 424 3 4 1 2 3 or to the preferred list. Press 4 To call, press and hold the PTT button. or to View Details. Press 6.11.12 Mute Mode Press to select. Press to select. 6.11.11.2 Initiating Private Call From the Caller Aliases List You can access the Caller Aliases list to initiate Private Call. Press to access the menu. Press or to Caller Aliases. Press to select. Press Alias>. or to the <required Caller Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. 6.11.12.1 Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. English 425 Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. If the timer is left at 0, the radio remains in Mute mode for an indefinite period until the programmed Mute Mode button is pressed. Press to access the menu. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode On. until Mute Mode is exited. Display shows Mute Mode icon on home screen. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking or to Utilities. Press to Radio is muted. that is configured. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press 6.11.12.2 Setting Mute Mode Timer Mute Mode feature can be enabled for a pre-configured amount of time by setting the Mute Mode Timer. The timer duration is configured in the radio menu and can range between 0.56 hours. Mute Mode is exited once the timer expires. or to Mute Timer. Press to Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press

. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. English 426 English 6.11.12.3 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Long Press Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Display shows Mute Mode Off. The blinking red LED turns off. Mute Mode icon disappears from home screen. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. 6.11.13 Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. NOTICE:

If a short press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a long press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. If a long press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a short press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm 427 Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Receiving Emergency Alarms When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. In addition, each alarm has the following types:

The display shows the Emergency icon, and the Emergency caller alias or if there is more than one alarm, all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. 1 Do one of the following:

Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. 2 3 If only one alarm, press details. to view more If more than one alarm, press or to the required alias, and press details. to view more Press to view the action options. Press and select Yes to exit the Alarm list. English Regular Silent 6.11.13.1 428 4 Press to access the menu. 5 Select Alarm List to revisit the Alarm list. 6 The tone sounds and the LED blinks red until you exit the Emergency mode. However, the tone can be silenced. Do one of the following:

Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. Exit Emergency mode. See Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm on page 430. 7 To return to home screen, perform the following actions:

a Press

. b Press or to Yes. c Press to select. The radio returns to the home screen and the display shows the Emergency icon. 6.11.13.2 Responding to Emergency Alarms 1 Make sure the display shows the Alarm List. Press or to the required alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group the Emergency Alarm targeted. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. English 429 NOTICE:

Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios, including the emergency receiving radio, transmit non-emergency voice. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Do one of the following to exit Emergency mode after receiving Emergency alarm:

The green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. Delete the alarm items. Power down the radio. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The green LED blinks. The display shows the Group Call icon and ID, transmitting radio ID, and the Alarm list. 6.11.13.4 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarms and the destination alias. English 6.11.13.3 430 The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed through CPS. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A tone sounds. The display shows Alarm Failed. English The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. 6.11.13.5 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The display shows Sending Alarm, which alternates with your radio ID. You see the following:

The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. 431 English NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. The display shows the caller and group aliases. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows Alarm Sent. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Your radio enters the Emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. 7 To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends, press the Emergency Off button. The radio returns to the Home screen. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display shows the Group Call icon. 4 Do one of the following:

432 6.11.13.6 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. English If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.13.7 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. You see one of these results:

The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The green LED lights up. The Emergency icon appears. 433 English 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. 3 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. The radio returns to the Home screen. 6.11.13.8 Reinitiating Emergency Mode Perform one of the following actions:

Change the channel while the radio is in only). Emergency mode. 434 NOTICE:

You can reinitiate emergency mode only if you enable emergency alarm on the new channel. Press the programmed Emergency On button during an emergency initiation or transmission state. The radio exits the Emergency mode, and reinitiates Emergency. 6.11.13.9 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Your radio exits Emergency mode when:

An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency Alarm All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. NOTICE:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio does not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on your radio. 3 4 Press or to the required alarm item. Press to select. Press select. or to Delete. Press to Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Change the channel to a new channel that has no 6.11.14 Text Messaging emergency system configured. The display shows No Emergency. Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. 6.11.13.10 Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Alarm List. Press to English 435 The text messages are stored in an Inbox, and sorted according to the most recently received. 6.11.14.1.2 Viewing Telemetry Status Text Messages English NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 6.11.14.1 Text Messages 6.11.14.1.1 Viewing Text Messages Press to access the menu. 1 2 3 436 Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. If the Inbox is empty:

4 1 2 3 The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned on. Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Follow the procedure to view a telemetry status text message from the inbox. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press or to the required message. Press to select. You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. 4 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. 6.11.14.1.3 Responding to Text Messages Follow the procedure to respond to text messages on your radio. The display shows the Notification list with the alias or ID of the sender. The display shows the Message icon. English NOTICE:

The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the message if the PTT button is pressed. 1 Do one of the following:

or to Read. Press Press select. The display shows the text message. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-

mail application. to Press or to Read Later. Press to select. The radio returns to the screen you were on prior to receiving the text message. Press select. 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to inbox. 437 When you receive a text message:

or to Delete. Press to English Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. 6.11.14.1.4 Responding to Text Messages with Quick Text Follow the procedure to respond to text messages with Quick Text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to Step step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to to select. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press select. 2 3 438 4 5 6 7 8 Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press or to Reply. Press to select. Press select. or to Quick Reply. Press to Press or to the required message. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming the message is being sent. 9 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The radio returns to the Resend option screen. English The display shows a positive mini notice. A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio returns to the Resend option screen. Follow the procedure to forward text messages on your radio. 6.11.14.1.6 Forwarding Text Messages 6.11.14.1.5 Resending Text Messages When you are at the Resend option screen:

Press same subscriber or group alias or ID. to resend the same message to the If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. When you are at the Resend option screen:

1 2 or Press send the same message to another subscriber or group alias or ID. to Forward, and press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. 439 English The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. or to Manual Dial. Press to The display shows Radio Number:. Press select. 3 4 NOTICE:

You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial on page 440). Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 6.11.14.1.7 Forwarding Text Messages by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to forward text messages by using the manual dial on your radio. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. or to Forward. Press to The display shows a negative mini notice. Press subscriber or group alias or ID. to send the same message to another 6.11.14.1.8 Editing Text Messages Select Edit to edit the message. Press select. 1 2 440 NOTICE:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. Press or to Edit. Press to select. The display shows a blinking cursor. Press or to Save and press to save the message to the Drafts folder. Press to edit the message. Press to choose between deleting the message or saving it to the Drafts folder. 2 Use the keypad to edit your message. Press to move one space to the left. 6.11.14.1.9 Writing Text Messages Press or to move one space to the right. Follow the procedure to write text message on your radio. Press to delete any unwanted characters. 1 Do one of the following:

Long press to change text entry method. Proceed to step 3. Press the programmed Text Message button. Press once message is composed. Press to access the menu. 4 Do one of the following:

or to Messages. Press to 2 Press select. 1 3 Press or to Send and press to send the message. English 441 English 3 Press select. or to Compose. Press to 6.11.14.1.10 Sending Text Messages A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 5 Press once message is composed. Do one of the following:

Press to send the message. It is assumed that you have a newly written text message or a saved text message. Select the message recipient. Do one of the following:

Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press or to Manual Dial. Press to select.Key in the subscriber ID. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID. Press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Press

. Press or to choose among editing, deleting, or saving the message. Press to select. If successful:

A tone sounds. The display shows positive mini notice. 442 If unsuccessful:

A low tone sounds. The display shows negative mini notice. Press select. or to Messages. Press to The message is moved to the Sent Items folder. Press or to Inbox. Press to select. The message is marked with a Send Failed icon. If the Inbox is empty:

NOTICE:

For a newly written text message, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. 6.11.14.1.11 Deleting Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. Press or to the required message. Press to select. The display shows a subject line if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to access the sub-menu. Press select. or to Delete. Press to 2 3 4 5 6 English 443 English 7 Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. The screen returns to the Inbox. The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. or to Delete All. Press to 6.11.14.1.12 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox Follow the procedure to delete all text messages from the Inbox on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to Press or to Inbox. Press to select. Press select. 2 3 If the Inbox is empty:

444 Press select. 4 5 Press or to Yes. Press to select. The display shows a positive mini notice. 6.11.14.2 Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items folder. You can resend, forward, edit, or delete a Sent text message. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of 30 last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message If you long press Home screen. at any time, the radio returns to the If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items folder is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five In-Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. NOTICE:

If the channel type, for example a conventional digital or Capacity Plus channel, is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 6.11.14.2.1 Viewing Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to view sent text messages on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press select. Press select. on. 2 3 4 English Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to or to Sent Items. Press to A low tone sounds, if the Keypad Tone is turned Press or to the required message. Press to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Sent Item Icons. 445 English 6.11.14.2.2 Sending Sent Text Messages Follow the procedure to send a sent text message on your radio. When you are viewing a Sent message:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 159 for more information. to Forward. Press to select. When you are viewing a Sent message:

6.11.14.2.3 Deleting Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder Follow the procedure to delete sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. Press

. 1 2 Press select. or to Delete. Press to 1 Press while viewing the message. 2 You can either resend or forward the sent text message. Do one of the following:

to Resend. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

446 English or to Delete All. Press to 6.11.14.2.4 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from the Sent Items Folder 4 Press select. Follow the procedure to delete all sent text messages from the Sent Items folder on your radio. 5 Do one of the following:

1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to 6.11.14.3 Saved Text Messages or to Sent Items. Press to If the Sent Items folder is empty:

The display shows List Empty. A tone sounds. You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. 447 English The Drafts folder stores a maximum of 10 last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. 6.11.14.3.2 Editing Saved Text Messages Press while viewing the message. 6.11.14.3.1 Viewing Saved Text Messages 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 to select. 448 1 2 4 Press or to Edit. Press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. Press or to Send. Press to send the message. Press or to the required message. Press Do one of the following:

Press

. Press or to choose between saving or deleting the message. Press to select. 4 5 to select. Press or to the required message. Press English 6.11.14.3.3 Deleting Saved Text Messages from the Drafts Folder 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press select. Press select. or to Messages. Press to or to Drafts. Press to Press delete the text message. or to Delete. Press to 6.11.14.4 Quick Text Messages Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 6.11.14.4.1 Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Text Message button. Proceed to step 6. 449 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. Proceed to step 6. Press to access the menu. or to Messages. Press to or to Quick Text. Press to Press or to the required Quick Text message. Press to select. 5 Do the following to select the recipient and send the message. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that your message is being sent. English Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 450 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The radio proceeds to the Resend option screen. See Resending Text Messages on page 159 for more information. 6.11.15 Text Entry Configuration Your radio allows you to configure different text. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Predict Word Correct Sentence Cap Your radio supports the following text entry methods:

Press select. or to Utilities. Press to My Words Numbers Symbols Predictive or Multi-Tap Language (If programmed) NOTICE:

Press at any time to return to the previous screen or long press Screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. to return to the Home 6.11.15.1 Enabling or Disabling Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-built dictionary. 1 Press to access the menu. English 2 3 4 5 to select. Press select. Press to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Text Entry. Press to or to Word Correct. Press 6 Do one of the following:

Press or to Word Correct. Press to select. Press to enable Word Correct. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Word Correct. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 451 English 6.11.15.2 Enabling or Disabling Word Predict Word Predict: Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press select. Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

452 Press enabled, to enable the Word Predict. If appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Microphone Dynamic disappears Distortion Control. If disabled, beside Enabled. This feature is used to automatically enable capitalization of the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. Press to access the menu. 6.11.15.3 Sentence Cap 1 2 3 Press select. to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to Utilities. Press to or to Word Predict. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Text Entry. Press to or to Utilities. Press to or to Sentence Cap. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press 4 5 Press select. Press to select. 6 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Sentence Cap. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Sentence Cap. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to to select. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press to select. 6.11.15.4 Viewing Custom Words You can add your own custom words into the in-built dictionary of your radio. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. 1 Press to access the menu. or to List of Words. Press The display shows the list of custom words. 6.11.15.5 Editing Custom Words You can edit custom words saved in your radio. English 453 Press to access the menu. Press or to Edit. Press to select. 8 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. Press to move one space to the left. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press key to move one space to the right. Press the characters. key to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 10 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. English 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to select. Press select. Press select. Press to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or to List of Words. Press Display shows the list of custom words. Press or to the required word. Press to select. 454 English 6.11.15.6 Adding Custom Words 6 Press to select. or to Add New Word. Press You can add custom words into the in-built radio dictionary. Display shows the list of custom words. Press to access the menu. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. or to Utilities. Press to Press to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. Press or to Radio Settings. Press key to delete any unwanted Press the characters. to select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to Long press to change text entry method. 8 Press once your custom word is completed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display show positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display show negative mini notice. 455 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press select. English 6.11.15.7 Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to 7 Press select. or to Delete. Press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows Entry Deleted. Press or to No. Press to return to the previous screen. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 6.11.15.8 Deleting All Custom Words or to Text Entry. Press to You can delete all custom words from the in-built dictionary of your radio. or to My Words. Press to Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. Press or to the required word. Press to select. 456 Press or to Radio Settings. Press Job Tickets to select. 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. or to Text Entry. Press to or to My Words. Press to or to Delete All. Press to 7 Do one of the following:

At Delete Entry?, press to select Yes. The display shows All Entries Deleted. Press or to No to return to the previous screen. Press to select. 6.11.16 English This feature allows your radio to receive messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks to perform. NOTICE:

This feature can be customized through the Customer Programming Software (CPS) according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. There are two folders that contain different Job Tickets:

My Tasks folder Personalized Job Tickets assigned to your signed in user ID. Shared Tasks folder Shared Job Tickets assigned to a group of individuals. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All, New, Started, and Completed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Job Tickets are retained even after the radio is turned off and turned on again. All Job Tickets are located in the All folder. Depending on how your radio is programmed, Job Tickets are sort by their priority level followed by time received. New Job Tickets, 457 English Job Tickets with recent changes in state, and Job Tickets with the highest priority are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 or 500 Job Tickets, depending on your radio model. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio automatically detects and discards duplicated Job Tickets with the same Job Ticket ID. Depending on the importance of the Job Tickets, the dispatcher adds a Priority Level to them. There are three priority levels: Priority 1, Priority 2, and Priority 3. Priority 1 has the highest priority and Priority 3 has the lowest priority. There are also Job Tickets with no priority. Modify content of Job Tickets. Add or edit Priority Level of Job Tickets. Move Job Tickets from folder to folder. Canceling of Job Tickets. 6.11.16.1 458 Your radio updates accordingly when dispatcher makes the following changes:

to select. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Follow the procedure to access the Job Ticket folder. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to Press or to the required folder. Press Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press to select. 6.11.16.2 Logging In or Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Log In. Press to If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. English 6.11.16.3 Creating Job Tickets Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which are based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. CPS programming software is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Press to access the menu. or to Job Tickets. Press to or to Create Ticket. Press 1 2 3 Press select. Press to select. 459 English 6.11.16.4 Responding to Job Tickets Follow the procedure to respond to job tickets on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Job Tickets. Press to to select. to select. Press or to the required job ticket. Press Press once more to access the sub-menu. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. 1 2 3 4 5 460 6 Press or to the required job ticket. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 7 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.16.5 Sending Job Tickets Using One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Ticket. Press or to the required folder. Press If unsuccessful:

English 2 3 4 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number. The display shows a negative mini notice. Press to select. Press select. or to Room Status. Press to Press or to the required option. Press to select. 6.11.16.6 Sending Job Tickets Using More Than One Job Ticket Template If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket template, perform the following actions to send the Job Tickets. Press or to Send. Press to select. Press or to the required option. Press The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. to select. 5 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. Press or to Send. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. 1 2 The display shows a positive mini notice. 3 Wait for acknowledgment. If unsuccessful:

If successful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. 461 English If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.16.7 Deleting Job Tickets Press select. or to All folder. Press to Press or to the required Job Ticket. Press to select. 4 5 6 7 Follow the procedure to delete job tickets on your radio. Press again while viewing the Job Ticket. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Delete. Press to The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. or to Job Tickets. Press to 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

Press or to the required folder. Press A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. Press select. 2 3 to select. 462 The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.16.8 Deleting All Job Tickets Follow the procedure to delete all job tickets on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Job Ticket button. Proceed to step 3. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to the required folder. Press to select. or to All folder. Press to or to Job Tickets. Press to 6.11.17 Privacy English or to Delete All. Press to 5 Press select. 6 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows a positive mini notice. to Yes. Press to Press or to No. Press to select. The radio returns to the previous screen. This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. 463 English Some radio models may not offer Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Your radio supports two types of privacy, but only one can be assigned to your radio. They are:

Basic Privacy Enhanced Privacy To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key for Basic Privacy, or the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key ID, you either hear a garbled transmission for Basic Privacy or nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. 464 6.11.17.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Privacy button. Skip the proceeding steps. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press select. 2 3 to select. Press or to <required privacy>. Press to select. If privacy is on, display shows beside Enabled. If privacy is off, display shows empty box beside Enabled. 4 6.11.18 Multi-Site Control Your radio is able to search for sites and switch between sites when signal is weak or your radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. When the signal is strong, the radio remains on the current site. This setting is applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Capacity PlusMulti-Site configuration. Your radio can perform either one of the following site searches:

Automatic Site Search English Manual Site Search If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, and the site is unlocked, your radio also performs automatic site search. 6.11.18.1 Enabling Manual Site Search If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A positive tone sounds. If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. 465 English 6.11.18.2 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to Neighbor Sites. Press to select. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. 6.11.19 Security The display shows Site Unlocked. 6.11.18.3 Accessing Neighbor Sites List This feature allows the user to check the adjacent sites list of the current home site. Follow the procedure to access the Neighbor Sites List:

466 This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. You will not receive an acknowledgment if you press during Radio Enable or Radio Disable operation. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.19.1 Disabling Radios Follow the procedure to disable your radio. 6.11.19.2 Disabling Radios by Using the Contacts List 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the Contacts list. 2 3 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press or to Radio Disable. English 467 English 5 Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to Press select. Press select. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Radio Number. Press The first text line shows Radio Number:. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. Press or to Radio Disable. Press to select. The display shows a transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.19.3 Disabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to disable your radio by using the manual dial. 468 8 Wait for acknowledgment. 4 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.19.4 Enabling Radios Follow the procedure to enable your radio. 1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button. 6.11.19.5 Enabling Radios by Using the Contacts List Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the Contacts list. Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to access the menu. 2 3 Press to select. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 1 2 Press select. or to Contacts. Press to English 469 English 3 4 5 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. Press or to Radio Enable. Press to select. The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 6 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 6.11.19.6 470 Enabling Radios by Using the Manual Dial Follow the procedure to enable your radio by using the manual dial. Press to access the menu. or to Contacts. Press to or to Manual Dial. Press to or to Private Call. Press The first text line shows Radio Number:. Press select. Press select. Press to select. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press or to Radio Enable. The display shows a negative mini notice. Enter the subscriber ID, and press to proceed. 7 Press to select. The green LED blinks. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 8 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.20 Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or channel selection, for a predefined time. English Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this feature:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 427 for more information on ways to exit Emergency. NOTICE:

This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 471 English 6.11.21 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with 472 Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:

If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. 6.11.21.1 Turning Bluetooth On and Off Follow the procedure to turn Bluetooth on and off. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to 3 Press select. or to My Status. Press to or to Bluetooth. Press to The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. or to Devices. Press to 2 3 Press select. Press select. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 6.11.21.2 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. 1 Press to access the menu. 4 Do one of the following:

Press or to the required device. Press to select. Press or to Find Devices to locate available devices. Press or to the required device. Press to select. 5 Press select. or to Connect. Press to English 473 English 6.11.21.3 474 Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. Connecting to Bluetooth Devices in Discoverable Mode The display shows Connecting to <Device>. Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices in discoverable mode. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Press to access the menu. The display shows beside the connected device. or to Bluetooth. Press to Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. Bluetooth Connected icon. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. NOTICE:

If pin code is required, see Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190. 1 2 3 Press select. or to Find Me. Press Press select. The radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. to Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Connected and the Bluetooth Connected icon. The display shows beside the connected device. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The display shows Connecting Failed. 5 Press select. or to Disconnect. Press to The display shows Disconnecting from

<Device>. 6.11.21.4 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. Press to access the menu. NOTICE:

Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective user manuals of any Bluetooth-

enabled devices. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Wait for acknowledgment. A tone sounds. The display shows <Device> Disconnected and the Bluetooth Connected icon disappears. The disappears beside the connected device. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press or to the required device. Press to select. English 475 English 6.11.21.5 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. Press select. Press select. or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. to select. Press or to the required device. Press The display shows one of the following results:

A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to A tone sounds. The display shows Route Audio to Radio. Bluetooth. 6.11.21.6 Viewing Device Details Follow the procedure to view device details on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 476 Press to select. or to View Details. Press 6.11.21.7 Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 1 Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. to select. 2 3 4 5 1 or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Bluetooth. Press to or to Devices. Press to or to BT Mic Gain. Press to English Press or to the required device. Press Press or to the BT Mic Gain type and the Press select. The display shows Device Deleted. to Delete. Press or to 6.11.21.8 Bluetooth Mic Gain This feature allows the user to control the microphone gain value of the connected Bluetooth-enabled device. 6.11.22 Indoor Location Press to access the menu. current values. Press the values here. to select. You can edit Press or to increase or to decrease values. Press to select. NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a 477 English limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. 6.11.22.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off You can turn on or turn off Indoor Location by performing one of the following actions. Access this feature through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press or to Bluetooth and press to select. c. Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. e. Press to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. You hear a negative indicator tone. d. Press to turn on Indoor Location. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location Access this feature by using the programmed button. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. button to turn on Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location On. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. 478 If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon appears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning On Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. Accessing Indoor Location Beacons Information Follow the procedure to access Indoor Location beacons information. b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. The display shows Indoor Location Off. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, the Indoor Location Available icon disappears on the Home screen display. If unsuccessful, the display shows Turning Off Failed. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Bluetooth and press Press or to Indoor Location and press to select. Press select. or to Beacons and press to 6.11.22.2 The display shows the beacons information. English 479 English 6.11.23 Notification List Your radio has a Notification list that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The display shows the Notification icon when the Notification list has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of 40 unread events. When the list is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification list. For text messages, missed calls, and call alert events, the maximum number of notifications are 30 text messages and 10 missed calls or call alerts. This maximum number depends on individual feature (job tickets or text messages or missed calls or call alerts) list capability. 6.11.23.1 Accessing Notification List Follow the procedure to access the Notification list on your radio. 480 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press to select. or to Notification. Press Press or to the required event. Press to select. Long press to return to the Home screen. 6.11.24 Auto-Range Transponder System The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios. ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

First-Time Alert A tone sounds. The display shows channel alias and In Range. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed. The display shows channel alias and In Range. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly blinks. The display shows Out of Range alternating with the Home screen. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.25 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio through Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without any physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:

English The display shows the High Volume Data icon. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. When OTAP completes, depending on the configuration:

A tone sounds. The display shows Updating Restarting. Your radio restarts by powering off and on again. You can select Restart Now or Postpone. When you select Postpone, your radio returns to the previous screen. The display shows the OTAP Delay Timer icon until the automatic restart occurs. When your radio powers up after automatic restart:

If successful, the display shows Sw Update Completed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Sw Update Failed. See Checking Software Update Information on page 226 for the updated software version. 481 English 6.11.26 Selecting Third-Party Peripherals Connection Modes Follow the procedure to select one of the following third-

party peripherals connection modes:

Press select. 4 5 Motorola Solutions PC and Audio Data Accessory Telemetry Generic 1 2 3 Press select. 482 Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. or to Cable Type. Press to Press or to the required connection mode. Press to select. The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen returns to the previous menu. 6.11.27 Received Signal Strength Indicator This feature allows you to view the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) values. The display shows the RSSI icon at the top right corner. See Display Icons for more information on the RSSI icon. 6.11.27.1 Viewing RSSI Values Attach the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola Solutions part number RMN5127_) to your radio. At the home screen, using the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone, press three times and Accessing the Radio by Using Password immediately press three times. Turn on your radio. The display shows the current RSSI values. To return to the home screen, press and hold

. 1 Enter the four-digit password. a Use a keypad microphone. English 6.11.28 Password Lock You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. You can also use a keypad microphone to enter the password. Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. 6.11.28.1 b To edit the numeric value of each digit, press or

. To enter and move to the next digit, press

. NOTICE:

The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access the radio. 2 Press to confirm the password. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A continuous tone sounds. The display shows Wrong Password. Repeat step 1. 483 English If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Wrong Password and then, Radio Locked. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. NOTICE:

In locked state, your radio responds to inputs from the On/Off/Volume Control Knob and programmed Backlight button only. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 6.11.28.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:

484 If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 190 to access the radio. 6.11.28.3 Turning Password Lock On or Off Follow the procedure to turn password lock on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 3 4 6 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press select. or to Passwd Lock. Press to or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Turn On. Press to beside Turn On. to Turn Off. Press to beside Turn Off. 5 Enter the current four-digit password. Use a keypad microphone. Press or to edit the numeric value of each digit, and press the next digit. A positive indicator tone sounds for every digit pressed. to enter and move to Press to enter the password. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. 1 2 3 Press select. 7 Do one of the following:

6.11.28.4 Changing Passwords Follow the procedure to change passwords on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. English 485 or to Passwd Lock. Press to The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 5 Enter the current four-digit password, and press to proceed. 6.11.29 Front Panel Configuration If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. You are able to customize certain feature parameters in Front Panel Configuration (FPC) to enhance the use of your radio. or to Change PWD. Press to 6.11.29.1 Entering Front Panel Configuration Mode Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Enter a new four-digit password, and press proceed. to 8 Re-enter the new four-digit password, and press If successful, the display shows Password Changed. If unsuccessful, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. 1 2 Press select. to proceed. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to English 4 Press select. Press select. 6 7 486 English 3 Press to select. or to Program Radio. Press 6.11.29.2 Editing FPC Mode Parameters NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication.

, Scroll through options, increase/

decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. 6.11.30 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to 487 English user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi remotely by using a designated radio (see Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) on page 198 and Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) on page 199). Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.30.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 2 Access this feature using the menu. a Press to access the menu. b Press select. or to WiFi and press to 488 c Press or to WiFi On and press to select. d Press to turn on/off Wi-Fi. If Wi-Fi is on, the display shows Enabled. beside If Wi-Fi is off, the Enabled. disappears from beside 6.11.30.2 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Individual Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Individual Control

(One to One). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 Do one of the following:

English Long press the programmable button. Use the keypad to enter the ID and press Proceed to step 3. to select. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press or to WiFi Control and press Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Remotely by Using a Designated Radio (Group Control) You can turn Wi-Fi on or off remotely in Group Control

(One to Many). NOTICE:

Only radio with specific CPS setting supports this function, check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. to select. Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 Press or to select On or Off. Press to select. If successful, the display shows a positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.30.3 1 2 3 4 Press select. or to Contacts and press to Press subscriber alias or ID. or to select the required Press or to WiFi Control and press to select. 489 Press or to select On or Off. or to WiFi and press to English 5 6 490 Press to select. If successful, the display shows Sent Successfully. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice. 6.11.30.4 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

You can also connect to a network access point using the menu. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 Press to access the menu. or to Networks and press to Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 Press select. press

. Press or to a network access point and press to select. NOTICE:

For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, if a network access point is not preconfigured, the Connect option is not available. or to Connect and press to 6 For WPA-Personal Wi-Fi, enter the password and 7 For WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi, password is configured by using RM. Announcement sounds Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. If the preconfigured password is correct, your radio automatically connects to the selected network access point. If the preconfigured password is incorrect, the display shows Authentication Failure, and automatically returns to the previous menu. If the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. If the connection is unsuccessful, the radio displays shows the failure notice screen momentarily and automatically returns to the previous menu. 6.11.30.5 Checking Wi-Fi Connection Status Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status by using Voice Announcement. Voice The display shows WiFi Off when the Wi-Fi is turned off. The display shows WiFi On, Connected when the radio is connected to a network. The display shows WiFi On, Disconnected when the Wi-Fi is turned on but the radio is not connected to any network. Voice Announcements for the Wi-Fi status query results can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. English 491 English 6.11.30.6 Refreshing the Network List 6.11.30.7 Adding a Network Perform the following actions to refresh the network list through the menu. a. Press to access the menu. b. Press select. or to WiFi and press to c. Press or to Networks and press to select. When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to or to Refresh and press to Press or to Add Network and press The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. to select. Press select. 492 or to Open and press to Press or to a network access point and Enter the password and press

. The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the network is successfully saved. to select. Press or to View Details and press 6 7 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. Press select. 6.11.30.8 Viewing Details of Network Access Points You can view details of network access points. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press to English 4 5 press to select. NOTICE:

WPA-Personal Wi-Fi and WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi display different details of Network Access Points. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address. For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID and Security Mode. WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi For a connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) Method, Phase 2 Authentication, Cert Name, MAC address, IP address, Gateway, DNS1, and DNS2. 493 English For a non-connected network access point, your radio displays SSID, Security Mode, Identity, EAP Method, Phase 2 Authentication, and Cert Name. 6.11.30.9 Removing Network Access Points NOTICE:

This task is not applicable to Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press or to the selected network access point and press to select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays a positive mini notice to indicate that the selected network access point is successfully removed. Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to 6.12 Utilities or to Networks and press to This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. 494 2 3 4 6.12.1 Squelch Levels Press to access the menu. You can adjust the squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels with noise higher than normal background. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Normal Tight This is the default setting. This setting filters out unwanted calls and/or background noise. Calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 6.12.1.1 Setting Squelch Levels Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Squelch button. Skip the following steps. Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press select. 5 Do one of the following:

or to Squelch. Press to or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to Normal. Press to beside Normal. to Tight. Press to beside Tight. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. English 495 English 6.12.2 Power Levels You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press to access the menu. This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 6.12.2.1 Setting Power Levels Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Power Level button. Skip High Low 496 2 3 4 6 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press or to Power. Press to select. 5 Do one of the following:

or Press select. The display shows or Press select. The display shows to High. Press to beside High. to Low. Press to beside Low. the steps below. Long press to return to the Home screen. 6.12.3 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

English Press select. or to All Tones. Press to Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable all tones and alerts. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press the programmed Tones/Alerts button. Skip the following steps. 6.12.4 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off Press to access the menu. Follow the procedure to turn keypad tones on or off on your radio. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press to access the menu. Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Utilities. Press to Press select. to select. Press to select. or to Tones/Alerts. Press to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press 2 3 4 497 5 6 1 2 3 or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Utilities. Press to or to Keypad Tones. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press select. Press level. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Vol. Offset. Press to or to the required volume offset A feedback tone sounds with each corresponding volume offset level. 7 Do one of the following:

English Press to select. Press to select. 4 5 6 1 498 Press display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable keypad tones. The If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.12.5 Setting Tones/Alerts Volume Offset Levels This feature adjusts the volume of the tones or alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. Follow the procedure to set the tones and alerts volume offset levels on your radio. Press to access the menu. level is saved. Press to select. The required volume offset Press to exit. The changes are discarded. to enable or disable the Talk Permit 6.12.6 Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talk Permit Tone on or off on your radio. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to 6.12.7 Turning Power Up Tone On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Power Up Tone on or off on your radio. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu. or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Utilities. Press to or to Talk Permit. Press to to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press to select. Press select. 6 Press Tone. 1 2 3 Press select. English 499 or to Tones/Alerts. Press or to Contacts. Press to or to Power Up. Press to Press or to the required alias or ID. Press select. 2 3 4 Press to select. Press The display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable the Power Up Tone. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press to select. or to Message Alert. Press 5 Do one of the following:

6.12.8 Setting Text Message Alert Tones You can customize the text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. Follow the procedure to set the text message alert tones on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press or to Momentary. Press to select. The display shows beside Momentary. Press or to Repetitive. Press to select. The display shows beside Repetitive. English Press to select. Press select. 4 5 6 1 500 English 6.12.9 Changing Display Modes You can change the display mode of the radio between Day or Night, as needed. This feature affects the color palette of the display. Follow the procedure to change the display mode of your radio. Press select. 4 5 or to Display. Press to The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. Press or to the required setting. Press 1 Do one of the following:

to select. Press the programmed Display Mode button. The display shows beside the selected setting. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press select. 2 3 to select. 6.12.10 Adjusting Display Brightness Follow the procedure to adjust the display brightness on your radio. Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Brightness button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. 501 English Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 5 or to Utilities. Press to accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. to select. or to Brightness. Press to 1 Do one of the following:

Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. The display shows the progress bar. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to decrease or increase the display brightness. Press to select. The setting value is varied from 1 to 8. 6.12.11 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear 502 2 3 4 5 Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press to select. or to Horns/Lights. Press Press display shows one of the following results:

to enable or disable Horns/Lights. The If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.12.12 Turning LED Indicators On or Off Follow the procedure to turn the LED indicators on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press 1 2 3 4 5 to select. Press to select. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. English 6.12.13 Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. or to LED Indicator. Press or to Utilities. Press to Press to enable or disable the LED indicator. The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press select. 2 3 to select. 503 Press or to Public Address. Press or to Utilities. Press to English 4 5 504 to select. Press to enable or disable Public Address. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.12.14 Turning External Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. Skip the following steps. Press to access the menu. Press select. to select. 2 3 4 5 Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to External Public Address. Press to select. to enable or disable external public Press address. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.12.15 Turning Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen by following the procedure. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. 6.12.16 Setting Languages Follow the procedure to set the languages on your radio. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Display. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Intro Screen. Press to select. or to Languages. Press to 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press Screen. to enable or disable the Introduction The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. Press or to the required language. Press to select. The display shows beside the selected language. English 505 English 6.12.17 Identifying Cable Type Do the following steps to select the type of cable your radio uses. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to to select. or to Cable Type. Press to The current cable type is indicated by a

. 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. 6.12.18 506 Voice Operating Transmission The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you to initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the following:

VOX. VOX. Change the channel by using the Scroll Up/Down buttons to enable VOX. Change the channel by using the Volume/Channel Knobto enable VOX. Turn VOX on or off by using the programmed VOX button or menu to enable or disable VOX. Press the PTT button during radio operation to disable Press or to Radio Settings. Press Turn the radio off and then power it on again to enable NOTICE:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4 5 6.12.18.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed VOX button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press select. 2 3 to select. English Press or to VOX. Press to select. Press to enable or disable VOX. NOTICE:

If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. See Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 209 for more information. 6.12.19 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This is typically useful when the user has difficulty reading the content shown on the display. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. 507 English 6.12.20 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. 6.12.21 Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:

Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages 508 Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This feature is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 6.12.21.1 Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Press or to Voice Announcement. Press to select. 5 Press or to any of the following features. or to Utilities. Press to Press to select. The available features are as follows:

All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button appears beside the selected setting. 6.12.22 Turning Automatic Call Forwarding On or Off You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. 1 Press to access the menu. English Press select. 2 3 4 to select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to select. or to Call Forward. Press 5 Do one of the following:

Press or to enable Call Forwarding. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press If disabled, or disappears beside Enabled. to disable Call Forwarding. 6.12.23 Setting Menu Timer You can set the time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. Follow the procedure to set the menu timer. 509 Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. Turning Analog Microphone AGC On or Off The Analog Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on an analog system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Analog Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. or to Display. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Menu Timer. Press to or to Utilities. Press to Press or to the required setting. Press Press or to Radio Settings. Press to select. to select. or to Mic AGC-A. Press to 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. English 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press select. Press select. 6.12.24 510 5 Press AGC. to enable or disable Analog Microphone or to Utilities. Press to The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press or to Radio Settings. Press If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. to select. English 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press select. Press AGC. or to Mic AGC-D. Press to to enable or disable Digital Microphone The display shows one of the following results:

If enabled, appears beside Enabled. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. 6.12.26 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise 511 6.12.25 Turning Digital Microphone AGC On or Off The Digital Microphone Automatic Gain Control (AGC) controls the microphone gain of the radio automatically while transmitting on a digital system. This feature suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. Follow the procedure to turn Digital Microphone AGC on or off on your radio. 1 Press to access the menu. English sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. 5 Do one of the following:

Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 6.12.27 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize Acoustic Feedback Suppressor in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select.. or to Utilities. Press to NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. Skip the steps below. Press to access the menu. Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Intelligent Audio. Press 2 3 4 512 to select. to select. English Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press to access the menu. 3 4 to select. Press to select. or to AF Suppressor. Press 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. If enabled, appears beside Enabled. Press to disable Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. If disabled, disappears beside Enabled. to select. Press to select. 2 3 4 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press or to Trill Enhance. Press 5 Do one of the following:

Press or The display shows to On. Press beside On. to select. Press or select. The display shows to Off. Press to beside Off. 6.12.28 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button. Skip the steps below. 513 English 6.12.29 Audio Ambience Default Loud This is the default setting. You can customize the audio ambience for your radio according to your environment. This setting enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group This setting enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 6.12.29.1 Setting Audio Ambience Follow the procedure to set the audio ambience on your radio according to your environment. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to 1 2 514 Press select. Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Audio Ambience. Press 3 4 5 to select. to select. Press or to the required setting. Press to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default for the default factory settings. Choose Loud to increase speaker loudness when using in noisy surroundings. Choose Work Group to reduce acoustic feedback when using with a group of radios that are near to each other. The display shows beside the selected setting. 6.12.30 Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles for your radio according to your preference. Default This is the default setting. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 These settings are intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost These settings are intended for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. 6.12.30.1 Setting Audio Profiles Follow the procedure to set audio profiles on your radio. Press to access the menu. 1 2 Press select. or to Utilities. Press to English Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to Audio Profiles. Press 3 4 5 to select. to select. Press or to the required setting. Press to select. The settings are as follows. Choose Default to disable the previously selected audio profile and return to the default factory settings. Choose Level 1, Level 2, or Level 3 for audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-

induced hearing loss that is typical for adults over 40 years of age. Choose Treble Boost, Mid Boost, or Bass Boost for audio profiles that align with your 515 English preference for tinnier, more nasal, or deeper sounds. The display shows beside the selected setting. Press the programmed GNSS button. Press to access the menu. Proceed to the 6.12.31 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. next step. Press select. to select. 3 4 5 6 or to Utilities. Press to Press or to Radio Settings. Press Press or to GNSS. Press to select. Press to enable or disable GNSS. If enabled, If disabled, appears beside Enabled. disappears beside Enabled. 2 Do one of the following steps to toggle GNSS on or off on your radio. Flexible Receive List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the receive talkgroup list. Your 6.12.32 Flexible Receive List 1 516 radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. This feature is supported in Capacity Plus. 6.12.32.1 Turning Flexible Receive List On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Flexible Receive List on or off. 1 Do one of the following:

English or Press select. A negative indicator tone sounds. to Turn Off. Press to The display shows a negative mini notice. 6.12.33 General Radio Information Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. Skip the following steps. Your radio contains information on various general parameters. Press to access the menu. 2 Press or to Flexible Rx List. Press The general information of your radio is as follows:

Radio alias and ID. Firmware and Codeplug versions. to select. 3 Do one of the following:

or Press select. A positive indicator tone sounds. to Turn On. Press to The display shows a positive mini notice. Software update. GNSS information. Site information. NOTICE:

Press to return to the previous screen. Long to return to the Home screen. The radio press exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 517 English 6.12.33.1 Checking Radio Alias and ID 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button. Skip the following steps. A positive indicator tone sounds. You can press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. 6.12.33.2 Checking Firmware and Codeplug Versions Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to Press to access the menu. or to Radio Info. Press to or to Utilities. Press to or to Versions. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. Press or to My ID. Press to select. The first text line shows the radio alias. The second text line shows the radio ID. 6.12.33.3 Checking Software Update Information This feature shows the date and time of the latest software update carried out through OTAP or Wi-Fi. Follow the Press select. Press select. 2 3 4 518 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press select. 1 2 3 4 Press select. Press select. Press select. procedure to check the software update information on your radio. Checking GNSS Information Displays the GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to or to Radio Info. Press to Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) or to SW Update. Press to The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. Press to access the menu. Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP or Wi-Fi session. See Over-the-Air Programming on page 481 for more information. or to Utilities. Press to 6.12.33.4 or to Radio Info. Press to Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Satellites Version 1 2 3 Press select. Press select. English 519 or to GNSS Info. Press to or to Site Info. Press to or Press to select. The display shows the requested GNSS information. to the required item. Press 6.12.33.5 Displaying Site Information Follow the procedure to display the current site name your radio is on. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to The display shows the current site name. 6.12.34 Viewing Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate Details You can view the details of the selected Enterprise Wi-Fi Certificate. Press to access the menu. or to Utilities. Press to 4 Press select. 1 2 3 Press select. or to Radio Info. Press to to select. appears beside ready certificates. Press or to Certificate Menu. Press 4 5 1 2 3 English Press select. Press select. Press select. 520 4 Press or to the required certificate. Press to select. Your radio displays the full details of the certificate. NOTICE:

For unready certificates, the display shows only Status. English 521 Authorized Accessories List Part Number Description Motorola Solutions provides a list of accessories to improve the productivity of your radio. Table 17: Antenna Part Number Description HAE4010_ HAE4011_ HAE4012_ HAE4013_ HAE6019_ HAE6020_ HAE6022_ HAE6024_ UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U English HAD4006_ HAD4007_ HAD4008_ HAD4009_ HAE4002_ HAE4003_ HAE4004_ 522 Part Number Description Part Number Description HAE6026_ HAF4027_ HAF4029_ HAF4030_ HAF4032_ HAF4033_ PMAE4030_ Combination GPS/UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U 800/900, 806941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U PMAE4031_ PMAE4032_ PMAE4033_ PMAE4034_ PMAN4002_ PMAN4004_ RAD4214_ English Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Magnetic Mount GPS Active Anten-

na Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U 523 PMAN4000_ Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna PMAN4001_ Window Mount GPS Active Antenna Part Number Description Table 18: Antenna for use with base PMAN4004_ only Combination GPS/VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Moun, Mini-U (with base) UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (with-

out base) Part Number Description HAE6027_ HAE6028_ HAE6029_ HAE6030_ UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount PMAE4039_ UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave PMAE4041_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave PMAE4040_ UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain PMAE4042_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain PMAE4043_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain RAD4223_ RAD4224_ RAD4225_ RAD4226_ VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave English RAD4215_ RAD4216_ RAD4217_ RAD4218_ RAE4004_RB RAE4004_ 524 Part Number Description Part Number Description RAD4227_ VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain NNTN8296_11 Table 19: Audio Accessories Part Number Description 89409N HK200 Bluetooth Headset with US Plug HMN4098_ Telephone Style Handset NNTN8125_ NNTN8126_ NNTN8127_ NNTN8189_ Operations Critical Wireless Ear-

piece, 12 in. Cable Operations Critical Wireless Ear-

piece, 9.5 in. Cable Operations Critical Wireless Push-

to-Talk POD Non-Secure Wireless Headset &

Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-

Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable NNTN8190_ Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5 in. Cable NNTN8385_13 PMLN7181_13 PMLN7203_13 RLN4922_13 RLN6490_ RLN6491_ RLN6500_ English Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud (Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-the-shelf headphones Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook for Completely Dis-

creet Kit Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, Multipack Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset XBT Overhead, Non-secure Wire-

less Heavy Duty Headset MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA Power Supply 11 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 525 Part Number Description Part Number Description Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Micro-

phone for Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3 HKN4137_ HKN4191_ RMN5050_ Desktop Microphone RMN5052_ Compact Microphone HKN4192_ IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone HKN6184_ Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-

metre) Cable, 15 amp (125 Watt) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-

metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-

metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable Heavy Duty Microphone with En-

hanced Audio Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio Table 20: Cables Part Number Description 3075336B07 3075336B10 Compact Microphone Replacement Cable Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement Cable PMKN4010_ MAP Programming Cable PMKN4016_ MAP Programming and Test Cable PMKN4018_ Mobile and Repeater Rear Acces-

sory Connector Universal Cable PMKN4033_ Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet PMKN4034_ Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet PMKN4143_ Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable PMKN4144_ Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable RKN4136_ Ignition Sense Cable English RLN6550_13 RMN5127_ RMN5053_ RMN5054_ 526 English Table 21: Desktop Accessories Part Number Description 3060665A04 US Line Cord GKN6266_ GLN7318_ GPN6145_ HPN4007_ HPN4011_ PMLN5072_ Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 Desktop Tray without Speaker Switchmode Power Supply with CE marked (125 Watt Models) Power Supply and Cable Power Supply 14 Volt 15 Amp UNI 117/240 VAC, UK Plug Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector RSN4005_ Desktop Tray with Speaker Table 22: Mounting Kits Part Number Description Part Number Description RLN6465_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6469_ PMLN6402_ PMLN6403_ In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit Low Profile Trunnion Kit High Profile Trunnion Kit Key Lock Trunnion Kit Low Profile Trunnion Bag Remote Mount Transceiver Inter-

face Remote Mount Control Head Inter-

face Table 23: Miscellaneous Accessories Part Number Description DQT1 Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit DSISB50LNC2 MA Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead AY000269A01_ 12 Screen Protector, Clear (single pack contains one unit) HKN9557_ PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8 feet (2.4 metre) Cable 12 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 527 Table 24: Speakers Part Number Description RSN4002_ RSN4003_ RSN4004_ 13 W External Speaker 7.5 W External Speaker 5 W External Speaker Part Number Description English HLN9073_ HLN9414_ PMKN4072_ PMKN4070_ Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Mi-

crophones) Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip

(All Microphones) IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter PMLN5718_S Generic Option Board PMLN7052_13 Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance Kit with translucent tube RLN5926_ RLN5929_ Push Button PTT Emergency Footswitch 13 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 528 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude English bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. 529 Operating Frequency Requirements Table 25: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

ber Frequency (MHz) Transmit English A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. 530 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 67**

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80

77**

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 English 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 531 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime 532 Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources Table 26: Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

Motorola Solutions, Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Mobile Radios Two (2) Years Product Accessories One (1) Year Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted English for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. 533 English II. GENERAL PROVISIONS This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (for example, dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER 1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 534 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, English 535 English 2 Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 Should the Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. 536 Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. Franais (Canada) Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur Rglement CFR 47, partie 2, section 2.1077(a) de la FCC Partie responsable Nom : Motorola Solutions, Inc. Adresse : 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL. 60196 Numro de tlphone : 1 800 927-2744 Dclare par les prsentes que le produit :

Nom du modle : XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e est conforme aux rglementations suivantes :

Partie 15, sous-partie B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) et section 15.109(a) des rglements de la FCC Appareil numrique de classe B En tant que priphrique dordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux dispositions de la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :

2 Franais (Canada) 1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; et 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. AVIS:

Cet quipement a fait lobjet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, conformment la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin doffrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie de radiofrquence et, sil nest pas install ou utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, il est impossible de garantir quil ny aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant lappareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre lquipement et le rcepteur. Brancher lappareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter le distributeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de laide. Pour un usage en fonction de la slection du code de pays (appareils WLAN) AVIS:

La slection du code de pays est pour les modles non .-U. seulement et nest pas disponible sur tous les modles amricains. Conformment la rglementation de la FCC, tous les produits Wi-Fi commercialiss aux tats-Unis doivent tre fixs sur des canaux fonctionnant aux tats-Unis uniquement. 3 Franais (Canada) Table des matires Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur.......................2 Consignes de scurit importantes.............................. 38 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC)...........................................39 Avis aux utilisateurs (Industrie Canada).......................40 Version du logiciel........................................................ 41 Droits dauteur.............................................................. 42 Droits dauteur du logiciel............................................. 44 Entretien de la radio..................................................... 45 Chapitre 1: Pour commencer...................................... 47 1.1 Mise sous tension de la radio...................... 47 1.2 teindre la radio.......................................... 47 1.3 Rglage du volume......................................47 Chapitre 2: Commandes de la radio............................49 2.1 Bouton Volume/Canal..................................49 2.1.1 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double..............50 2.2 Touches du microphone clavier................50 Chapitre 3: WAVE....................................................... 53 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................53 4 3.1.1 Passage du mode Radio au mode WAVE........................................... 53 3.1.2 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE..................................................... 54 3.1.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel de groupe WAVE.................................... 55 3.1.4 Recevoir et rpondre un appel priv WAVE............................................ 55 3.1.5 Passage du mode WAVE au mode Radio............................................ 55 3.2.1 Rglage des canaux actifs WAVE

................................................................56 3.2.2 Afficher l'information de canal WAVE............................................56 3.2.3 Afficher l'information de points d'extrmit WAVE...................................57 3.2.4 Changer la configuration WAVE.... 57 3.2.5 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE..................................................... 58 3.2 WAVE Tactical/5000....................................56 Section I: Capacity Max...............................................60 4.1 Bouton dmission (PTT)............................. 60 4.2 Touches programmables.............................60 4.3 Fonctions attribuables de la radio................61 4.9 Appels..........................................................78 4.4 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables............. 63 4.9.1 Appels de groupe...........................80 4.5 Accs aux fonctions programmes............. 64 4.6 Indicateurs d'tat......................................... 64 4.6.1 Icnes............................................ 64 4.6.2 Voyant lumineux............................ 71 4.6.3 Tonalits........................................ 72 4.6.3.1 Tonalits audio.................72 4.6.3.2 Tonalits d'avertissement............................ 73 4.7 Enregistrement............................................ 73 4.8 Slection des zones et des canaux............. 74 4.8.2 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias.....................................75 4.8.3 Slection dun type dappel............76 4.8.4 Slectionner un site....................... 76 4.8.5 Demande ditinrance....................76 4.8.6 Verrouillage de site activ/

dsactiv.................................................77 4.8.7 Restriction de site.......................... 77 4.8.8 ADF de site.................................... 78 Franais (Canada) 4.9.1.1 Faire des appels de groupe..........................................80 4.9.1.2 Appels de groupe faits laide de la liste de contacts......... 81 4.9.1.3 Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable ............................. 82 4.9.1.4 Appels de groupe faits laide de la recherche dalias .......83 4.9.1.5 Rponse un appel de groupe..........................................85 4.9.2.1 Faire des appels de diffusion .......................................87 4.9.2.2 Faire des appels de diffusion laide de la liste de contacts .......................................87 4.9.2.3 Appels de diffusion faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable.............................. 88 4.9.2.4 Rception d'appels de diffusion .......................................89 5 4.8.1 Slection des zones.......................75 4.9.2 Appel de diffusion ......................... 86 Franais (Canada) 4.9.3 Appel priv.....................................89 4.9.3.1 Passer des appels individuels.................................... 90 4.9.3.2 Appels individuels faits laide de la touche numrique programmable ............................. 91 4.9.3.3 Appels individuels faits laide de la recherche dalias........91 4.9.3.4 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche................................ 94 4.9.3.5 Appels individuels faits laide de la numrotation manuelle...................................... 94 4.9.3.6 Rception d'un appel individuel...................................... 96 4.9.3.7 Accepter des appels individuels.................................... 96 4.9.3.8 Refus des appels individuels.................................... 97 4.9.4 Appels gnraux ...........................97 4.9.4.1 Appels gnraux ............. 97 6 4.9.5 Appels tlphoniques.................. 101 4.9.4.2 Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable ............................. 98 4.9.4.3 Appels gnraux faits laide de la recherche dalias........99 4.9.4.4 Rception d'un appel gnral ...................................... 101 4.9.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique.............................. 102 4.9.5.2 Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable

............103 4.9.5.3 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts .....................................105 4.9.5.4 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la recherche dalias.........................................108 4.9.5.5 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 110 4.9.5.6 Multifrquence deux tonalits......................................113 4.9.5.6.1 Excution dun appel DTMF.................... 113 4.9.5.7 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral....................................... 113 4.9.5.8 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe........................................114 4.9.5.9 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel.................................... 114 4.9.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission..........................................115 4.9.7 Priorit d'appel............................. 115 4.9.8 Interruption vocale....................... 116 4.9.8.1 Activation de l'interruption vocale.................... 116 4.10 Fonctions avances.................................117 4.10.1 Files dattente dappels.............. 117 4.10.2 Appel prioritaire..........................118 4.10.3 Balayage de groupe dappels ... 119 4.10.3.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe................... 119 Franais (Canada) 4.10.4 Liste de groupe de rception..... 120 4.10.5 Surveillance de la priorit.......... 120 4.10.5.1 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels...... 121 4.10.6 Affiliation de groupes multiples.. 122 4.10.6.1 Ajout d'affiliation de groupe........................................122 4.10.6.2 Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe.................. 124 4.10.7 TalkBack (rponse) ...................124 4.10.8 Bluetooth....................................125 4.10.8.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth....................................126 4.10.8.2 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth................... 126 4.10.8.3 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection....................................128 4.10.8.4 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth................... 128 4.10.8.5 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth 129 7 Franais (Canada) 4.10.8.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils.................................... 129 4.10.8.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif..................................... 130 4.10.8.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth....................................130 4.10.9 Localisation lintrieur............. 131 4.10.9.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur........131 4.10.9.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur........ 133 4.10.10 Rglages multisite................... 133 4.10.10.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle.........................134 4.10.10.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv......................... 134 4.10.10.3 Accs la liste de sites voisins................................134 4.10.11 Rappel du canal daccueil........135 4.10.11.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil........... 135 8 4.10.11.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil........................ 135 4.10.12 coute distance.................... 136 4.10.13 Rglages des contacts............ 139 4.10.12.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance....................... 136 4.10.12.2 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts .....................................137 4.10.12.3 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.............. 138 4.10.13.1 Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable ........................... 140 4.10.13.2 Dissociation d'une entre et de la touche numrique programmable ......... 141 4.10.13.3 Ajout d'un nouveau contact....................................... 142 4.10.14 Rglages de lindicateur dappel.................................................. 143 4.10.14.1 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels privs.......... 143 4.10.14.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des messages textes.....144 4.10.14.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel....................................... 145 4.10.14.4 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels slectifs....... 145 4.10.14.5 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte........................................... 146 4.10.14.6 Attribuer des styles de sonneries................................... 147 4.10.14.7 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme................ 148 4.10.15 Fonctions du Journal des appels................................................... 148 4.10.15.1 Affichage des derniers appels........................................ 148 Franais (Canada) 4.10.15.2 Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels.......... 149 4.10.15.3 Suppression des appels de la liste dappel............150 4.10.15.4 Suppression d'un appel gnral de la liste d'appel.151 4.10.15.5 Affichage des dtails de la liste dappels..................... 151 4.10.16.1 Excution dune alerte dappel....................................... 153 4.10.16.2 Avis dappels faits laide de la liste de contacts....... 153 4.10.16.3 Rponse un avertissement dappel................ 154 4.10.16 Fonction Avis dappel...............152 4.10.17 Alias dappelant dynamique.....154 4.10.17.1 Affichage de la liste des alias dappelants................. 155 4.10.17.2 Lancement dun appel priv partir de la liste dalias dappelants.................................155 4.10.18 Mode muet...............................156 4.10.18.1 Activation du mode muet........................................... 156 9 Franais (Canada) 4.10.18.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet............ 156 4.10.18.3 Quitter le mode muet. 157 4.10.19 Fonctionnement durgence...... 158 4.10.19.1 Envoi d'alarmes durgence................................... 159 4.10.19.2 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel............160 4.10.19.3 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal...........................................162 4.10.19.4 Rception dune alarme durgence....................... 164 4.10.19.5 Rponse une alarme durgence ...................... 165 4.10.19.6 Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel.166 4.10.19.7 Quitter le mode durgence................................... 167 4.10.20 Message d'tat.........................167 4.10.20.1 Envoi de messages dtat.......................................... 168 10 4.10.20.2 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable............................ 169 4.10.20.3 Envoi d'un message d'tat en utilisant la liste de contacts......................................169 4.10.20.4 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 170 4.10.20.5 Affichage des messages d'tat......................... 171 4.10.20.6 Rponse des messages d'tat......................... 172 4.10.20.7 Suppression d'un message d'tat...........................173 4.10.20.8 Suppression de tous les messages d'tat................... 173 4.10.21 Messagerie texte .................... 174 4.10.21.1 Messages texte.......... 174 4.10.21.1.1 Affichage des messages texte............... 175 4.10.21.1.2 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie........................ 175 4.10.21.1.3 Rponse des messages texte........ 176 4.10.21.1.4 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide................ 177 4.10.21.1.5 Renvoi des messages texte............... 178 4.10.21.1.6 Transfre des messages texte............... 179 4.10.21.1.7 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle..........................179 4.10.21.1.8 Modification de messages texte.......... 180 4.10.21.1.9 Rdaction de messages texte............... 181 4.10.21.1.10 Envoi de messages texte............... 182 4.10.21.1.11 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception........... 183 4.10.21.1.12 Suppression de tous les messages Franais (Canada) texte de la bote de rception......................... 184 4.10.21.2 Messages texte envoys......................................185 4.10.21.2.1 Affichage des messages texte envoys.185 4.10.21.2.2 Envoi de messages texte envoys.186 4.10.21.2.3 Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys........................... 187 4.10.21.2.4 Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys......... 187 4.10.21.3 Messages texte enregistrs................................. 188 4.10.21.3.1 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs...................... 188 4.10.21.3.2 Modification de messages texte enregistrs...................... 189 11 Franais (Canada) 12 4.10.21.3.3 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons......................... 190 4.10.21.4 Message texte rapide 190 4.10.21.4.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides . 190 4.10.22 Configuration de saisie de texte...................................................... 191 4.10.22.1 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct...... 192 4.10.22.2 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte........................................... 193 4.10.22.3 Majuscule en dbut de phrase................................... 194 4.10.22.4 Afficher des mots personnaliss............................. 194 4.10.22.5 Modifier des mots personnaliss............................. 195 4.10.22.6 Ajouter des mots personnaliss............................. 196 4.10.22.7 Supprimer un mot personnalis...............................197 4.10.22.8 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss.................... 198 4.10.23 Tickets de tche.......................199 4.10.23.1 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche......................... 200 4.10.23.2 Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant. 201 4.10.23.3 Cration de tickets de tche.......................................... 202 4.10.23.4 Rpondre des tickets de tche.......................... 202 4.10.23.5 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche............................203 4.10.23.6 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche.......... 204 4.10.23.7 Suppression de tickets de tche.......................... 204 4.10.23.8 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche.......................... 205 4.10.24 Confidentialit.......................... 206 4.10.24.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage................................. 207 4.10.25 Interrompre/Raviver................. 208 4.10.25.1 Interrompre une radio 209 4.10.25.2 Interruption d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts......................................209 4.10.25.3 Dsactiver une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 210 4.10.25.4 Relance d'une radio... 211 4.10.25.5 Relance d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts....... 211 4.10.25.6 Rallumer une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 212 4.10.26 Dsactivation permanente de la radio.................................................. 213 4.10.27 Travailleur solitaire...................213 4.10.28 Verrouillage par mot de passe.214 4.10.28.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe............ 214 4.10.28.2 Dverrouillage de la radio........................................... 215 Franais (Canada) 4.10.28.3 Activation/

dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe............................. 215 4.10.28.4 Changement de mot de passe.................................... 216 4.10.29 Liste de notifications................ 217 4.10.29.1 Accs liste de notification..................................218 4.10.30 Programmation par onde radio 218 4.10.31 Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers..........219 4.10.32 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu.......................................................220 4.10.32.1 Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal)....................220 4.10.33 Configuration du panneau avant..................................................... 220 4.10.33.1 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant.......................................... 220 4.10.33.2 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC .........221 4.10.34 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi..............221 13 Franais (Canada) 14 4.10.34.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi......................... 222 4.10.34.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle)................................ 223 4.10.34.3 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe).......................................224 4.10.34.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau...........................224 4.10.34.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi................ 226 4.10.34.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux..........................226 4.10.34.7 Ajout dun rseau....... 227 4.10.34.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau........... 228 4.10.34.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau...........................229 4.10.35 Attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe (DGNA)........ 230 4.10.35.1 Effectuer un appel DGNA.........................................230 4.10.35.2 Effectuer un appel non DGNA..................................231 4.10.35.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel DGNA....................... 231 4.11 Utilitaires..................................................232 4.11.1 Niveaux de puissance................232 4.11.1.1 Configuration de la puissance...................................232 4.11.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio.............233 4.11.3 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier................................ 234 4.11.4 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes........................235 4.11.5 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler.............236 4.11.6 Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension............... 236 4.11.7 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte..................... 237 4.11.8 Changement des modes daffichage............................................ 238 4.11.9 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage.........................................239 4.11.10 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares...................... 239 4.11.11 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL......................................... 240 4.11.12 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique.............. 241 4.11.13 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe. 242 4.11.14 Activer ou dsactiver lcran dintroduction........................................ 242 4.11.15 Slection de la langue............. 243 4.11.16 Dterminer le type de cble.....244 4.11.17 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle................................ 244 4.11.18 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption.................................... 245 4.11.19 Synthse texte-parole..............245 4.11.19.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole.................245 Franais (Canada) 4.11.20 Rglage du dlai menu............246 4.11.21 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique......................... 247 4.11.22 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent................... 248 4.11.23 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques...........................................249 4.11.24 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration................. 249 4.11.25 Ambiance audio....................... 250 4.11.25.1 Configuration de lambiance audio........................ 251 4.11.26 Profils audio............................. 251 4.11.26.1 Configuration des profils audio................................252 4.11.27 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial................................253 4.11.28 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio.................................................. 254 4.11.28.1 Vrification de lalias et lID de la radio........................ 254 15 Franais (Canada) 4.11.28.2 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug.................................... 255 4.11.28.3 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel........................................ 255 4.11.28.4 Consulter les informations du GNSS............... 256 4.11.28.5 Affichage de linformation sur le site............... 257 4.11.29 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise................... 257 Section II: Connect Plus............................................ 259 5.1 Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus................................................... 259 5.1.1 Bouton d'mission (PTT)............. 259 5.1.2 Touches programmables............. 259 5.1.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio.................................. 260 5.1.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables................................ 262 5.1.3 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus......................... 262 5.1.3.2 Icnes d'appels.............. 265 5.1.3.3 Icnes de menu avanc. 266 5.1.3.4 Icnes de messages envoys......................................266 5.1.3.5 Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth....................................267 5.1.3.6 Voyant lumineux............ 268 5.1.3.7 Tonalits d'avertissement.......................... 269 5.1.3.8 Tonalits dalerte............269 5.1.4 Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus..................... 269 5.2 Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus................................................... 270 5.2.1 Slectionner un site..................... 270 5.2.1.1 Demande ditinrance.... 270 5.2.1.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv......................... 271 5.2.1.3 Restriction de site.......... 271 5.2.2 Slection d'une zone....................271 5.2.3 Utilisation de rseaux multiples... 272 5.2.4 Slection dun type dappel..........273 5.1.3.1 Icnes daffichage.......... 262 5.2.5 Rception et rponse un appel.273 16 5.2.5.1 Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre..................273 5.2.5.2 Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre.............. 274 5.2.5.3 Rception d'un appel gnral....................................... 275 5.2.5.4 Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant.. 275 5.2.5.4.1 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant............................. 276 5.2.5.4.2 Composition surnumraire en direct lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant............................. 277 5.2.5.5 Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant.......................277 5.2.5.6 Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant.................... 277 5.2.6 Faire un appel radio.....................278 Franais (Canada) 5.2.6.1 Faire un appel l'aide du bouton slecteur de canal.....278 5.2.6.1.1 Pour passer un appel de groupe.............. 278 5.2.6.1.2 Passer un appel individuel......................... 279 5.2.6.1.3 Faire un appel gnral de site.................280 5.2.6.1.4 Appel multigroupe..................... 281 5.2.6.2 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche.............................. 281 5.2.6.3 Passer un appel au moyen de la touche programmable de composition manuelle.................................... 282 5.2.6.3.1 Passer un appel individuel......................... 282 5.2.6.4 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant l'aide du bouton programmable de numrotation manuelle......... 283 17 Franais (Canada) 5.2.6.5 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant au moyen du menu du tlphone................................... 284 5.2.6.6 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant partir des Contacts..................... 285 5.2.6.7 Attente d'autorisation de canal lors d'un appel individuel sortant........................................ 286 5.2.6.8 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant.. 286 5.2.6.9 Composition surnumraire en direct en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant........................................ 287 5.3 Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus..................................................................288 5.3.1 Rappel du canal daccueil............288 5.3.2 Plan de secours automatique...... 288 5.3.2.1 Indications de mode de reprise dappel automatique.......289 18 5.3.2.2 Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise........ 289 5.3.2.3 Retour au fonctionnement normal.............. 290 5.3.3 Vrification de la radio................. 290 5.3.3.1 Envoyer une vrification radio........................................... 291 5.3.4 coute distance........................ 292 5.3.4.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance....................... 292 5.3.5 Balayage......................................294 5.3.5.1 Dmarrer et arrter le balayage.................................... 294 5.3.5.2 Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage.................................... 295 5.3.6 Balayage configurable par l'utilisateur............................................. 295 5.3.7 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage 296 5.3.8 Modifier la liste de balayage........ 297 5.3.9 Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre............ 298 5.3.10 Comprendre la fonction de balayage............................................... 300 5.3.14.5 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme................ 309 5.3.11 Rponse de balayage................301 5.3.15 Journal des appels.....................309 Franais (Canada) 5.3.12 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels.................................... 301 5.3.13 Rglages des contacts.............. 303 5.3.14 Rglages de lindicateur dappel 306 5.3.13.1 Passer un appel individuel partir des contacts...303 5.3.13.2 Faire un appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias............... 304 5.3.13.3 Ajout d'un nouveau contact....................................... 305 5.3.14.1 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des avertissements d'appel.............. 306 5.3.14.2 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels individuels.................................. 307 5.3.14.3 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte.......................... 308 5.3.14.4 Slection dun type de sonnerie davertissement........... 309 5.3.16 Fonction Avertissement dappel.311 5.3.15.1 Affichage des derniers appels........................................ 310 5.3.15.2 Supprimer un appel d'une liste d'appels.....................310 5.3.15.3 Afficher les dtails d'une liste d'appels.....................311 5.3.16.1 Rponse un avertissement dappel................ 312 5.3.16.2 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel partir de la liste des contacts....................312 5.3.16.3 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct.........313 5.3.17.1 Activation du mode muet........................................... 314 5.3.17.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet............................ 314 5.3.17.3 Quitter le mode muet... 315 19 5.3.17 Mode muet.................................313 Franais (Canada) 5.3.18 Fonctionnement durgence........ 316 5.3.18.1 Recevoir un appel d'urgence entrant....................... 317 5.3.18.2 Enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes............................... 318 5.3.18.3 Supprimer les dtails de l'urgence................................319 5.3.18.4 Rponse un appel d'urgence................................... 319 5.3.18.5 Rpondre une alerte d'urgence................................... 320 5.3.18.6 Ignorer Appel dannulation durgence...............320 5.3.18.7 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence................................... 321 5.3.18.8 Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal 321 5.3.18.9 Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence................................... 322 5.3.18.10 Quitter le mode durgence................................... 322 5.3.19 Messagerie texte ...................... 323 20 5.3.19.1 Envoyer un message texte rapide................................ 323 5.3.19.2 Envoyer des messages texte rapides au moyen de la touche daccs direct................. 324 5.3.19.3 Accs au dossier Brouillons................................... 325 5.3.19.3.1 Afficher un message texte enregistr 325 5.3.19.3.2 Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr............... 326 5.3.19.3.3 Supprimer un message texte enregistr dans les brouillons.......... 327 5.3.19.4 Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte.......... 328 5.3.19.4.1 Renvoyer un message texte................. 328 5.3.19.4.2 Transfrer un message texte................. 328 5.3.19.5 Gestion de messages texte envoys............................. 329 5.3.19.5.1 Affichage d'un message texte envoy.... 329 5.3.19.5.2 Envoi d'un message texte envoy.... 330 5.3.19.5.3 Supprimer tous les messages envoys du dossier des messages envoys......... 332 5.3.19.6 Recevoir un message texte........................................... 333 5.3.19.7 Lire un message texte..333 5.3.19.8 Grer les messages texte reus................................. 333 5.3.19.8.1 Afficher un message texte partir de la bote de rception........334 5.3.19.8.2 Rpondre un message texte partir de la bote de rception........334 5.3.19.8.3 Supprimer un message texte de la bote de rception.................... 336 5.3.19.8.4 Suppression de tous les messages Franais (Canada) texte de la bote de rception......................... 337 5.3.20 Cryptage.................................... 338 5.3.20.1 Faire un appel crypt... 339 5.3.21 Scurit......................................339 5.3.21.1 Dsactiver la radio....... 340 5.3.21.2 Activer la radio............. 342 5.3.22 Bluetooth....................................344 5.3.22.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth....................................345 5.3.22.2 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion 346 5.3.22.3 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion

(Mode dtection)........................ 347 5.3.22.4 Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth.....................347 5.3.22.5 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth 348 5.3.22.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils.................................... 348 21 Franais (Canada) 22 5.3.22.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif..................................... 349 5.3.22.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth....................................349 5.3.23 Localisation lintrieur............. 350 5.3.23.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur........350 5.3.23.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur........ 352 5.3.24 Liste de notifications.................. 352 5.3.24.1 Accder la liste de notifications................................ 353 5.3.25 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi................353 5.3.25.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi............................. 354 5.3.25.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle)................................ 355 5.3.25.3 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe).......................................356 5.3.25.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau...........................356 5.3.25.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi..................... 358 5.3.25.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux................................. 358 5.3.25.7 Ajout dun rseau......... 359 5.3.25.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau........... 360 5.3.25.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau...........................361 5.3.26.1 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio......... 362 5.3.26.2 Rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement.......................... 363 5.3.26.3 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler.. 364 5.3.26 Utilitaires.................................... 362 5.3.26.4 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension....................................... 364 5.3.26.5 Rgler le niveau de puissance...................................365 5.3.26.6 Changer le mode d'affichage..................................366 5.3.26.7 Rgler la luminosit de l'cran.........................................366 5.3.26.8 Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction.................. 367 5.3.26.9 Language..................... 368 5.3.26.10 Activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL.............................368 5.3.26.11 Dterminer le type de cble.......................................... 369 5.3.26.12 Annonce vocale......... 370 5.3.26.13 Dlai de menu............ 370 5.3.26.14 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur /

des phares................................. 371 5.3.26.15 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double.........................372 Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.16 Contrle de gain automatique de microphone numrique (Mic. CGA-D)........... 372 5.3.26.17 Audio intelligent..........373 5.3.26.18 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques................ 375 5.3.26.19 Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS.............. 376 5.3.26.20 Accs aux renseignements gnraux sur la radio........................................... 377 5.3.26.20.1 Vrifier l'index de numro de modle de la radio...........377 5.3.26.20.2 Vrification fichier de codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC..378 5.3.26.20.3 Affichage de l'ID du site (numro du site)................................. 379 5.3.26.20.4 Vrification de l'info du site................ 379 23 Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.20.5 Vrifier l'ID de la radio....................... 380 5.3.26.20.6 Vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code...... 381 5.3.26.20.7 Recherche des mises jour.............. 381 5.3.26.21 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise... 390 Section III: Autres systmes......................................392 6.1 Bouton PTT............................................... 392 6.2 Touches programmables...........................392 6.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables........................................... 396 6.2.3 Accs aux fonctions programmes........................................396 6.3 Indicateurs d'tat....................................... 397 6.3.1 Icnes.......................................... 397 6.3.2 Voyants DEL................................404 6.3.3 Tonalits...................................... 405 6.3.3.1 Tonalits d'avertissement.......................... 405 24 6.3.3.2 Tonalits audio...............406 6.4 Mode analogique ou numrique classique 406 6.5 Information relative aux icnes..................407 6.6 Sites IP interconnects..............................407 6.7 Capacity Plus site unique .................... 408 6.8 Capacity Plus multisite ........................ 409 6.9 Slection des zones et des canaux........... 410 6.9.1 Slection des zones.....................410 6.9.2 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias...................................410 6.9.3 Slection des canaux...................411 6.10.1 Appels de groupe.......................413 6.10.1.1 Appels de groupe.........413 6.10.1.2 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts.... 414 6.10.1.3 Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable

................... 415 6.10.1.4 Rponse un appel de groupe........................................415 6.10.2 Appels privs

......................... 417 6.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio 393 6.10 Appels......................................................411 6.10.2.1 Passer des appels individuels

.............................. 417 6.10.2.2 Appels privs faits laide de la liste de contacts ....418 6.10.2.3 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

............................... 419 6.10.2.4 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable

.................... 420 6.10.2.5 Rponse des appels individuels ............................... 421 6.10.3 Appels gnraux........................421 6.10.3.1 Rception dun appel gnral....................................... 422 6.10.3.2 Appel gnral...............422 6.10.3.3 Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable

.......................423 6.10.4 Appels slectifs

......................424 6.10.4.1 Excution dun appel slectif........................................ 424 Franais (Canada) 6.10.4.2 Rponse un appel slectif

....................................425 6.10.5 Appels tlphoniques

............ 425 6.10.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique

.......................... 426 6.10.5.2 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts 6.10.5.3 Appels tlphoniques faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

................................. 427

................................ 430 6.10.5.4 Pour passer des appela de groupe, individuels, tlphoniques ou gnraux l'aide de la recherche d'alias

................................................433 6.10.5.5 Multifrquence deux tonalits......................................435 6.10.5.5.1 Excution dun appel DTMF.................... 435 6.10.5.6 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe

....................................435 25 Franais (Canada) 26 6.10.8 Appel vocal de diffusion.............439 6.11 Fonctions avances.................................447 6.10.5.7 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral

...................................436 6.10.5.8 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel

................................437 6.10.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission 6.10.7 Mode direct................................ 438

..................................... 438 6.10.7.1 Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct.......... 438 6.10.8.1 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion....................... 439 6.10.8.2 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion laide de la touche numrique programmable

.......................440 6.10.8.3 Faire des appels vocaux de diffusion laide de la recherche dalias 6.10.8.4 Recevoir un appel vocal de diffusion....................... 443

....................440 6.10.9 Appel sans destinataire............. 444 6.10.9.1 Effectuer un appel sans destinataire................................ 444 6.10.9.2 Rpondre un appel sans destinataire........................ 445 6.10.10 Mode de canal vocal ouvert

(OVCM).................................................445 6.10.10.1 Effectuer un appel OVCM........................................ 446 6.10.10.2 Rpondre un appel OVCM........................................ 446 6.11.1 Rappel du canal daccueil..........447 6.11.1.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil........... 448 6.11.1.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil........................ 448 6.11.2 Vrification de la radio

........... 449

.......................................449 6.11.2.1 Envoi des vrifications radio 6.11.2.2 Envoi des vrifications radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

............................... 450 6.11.3 coute distance...................... 451 6.11.3.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance....................... 451 6.11.3.2 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts .....................................452 6.11.3.3 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

.......... 453 6.11.4 Listes de balayage.....................454 6.11.4.1 Affichage d'une entre de la liste de balayage............... 454 6.11.4.2 Affichage des entres de la liste de balayage laide de la recherche dalias .............. 455 6.11.4.3 Ajout dentres la liste de balayage........................ 456 6.11.4.4 Ajout d'entres la liste de balayage l'aide de la recherche d'alias

....................457 6.11.4.5 Suppression d'une entre de la liste de balayage.... 458 Franais (Canada) 6.11.4.6 Configuration de lordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage............................... 459 6.11.5 Balayage....................................460 6.11.5.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage.................................... 460 6.11.5.2 Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage.................................... 461 6.11.5.3 Suppression des canaux nuisibles........................ 462 6.11.5.4 Restauration des canaux nuisibles........................ 462 6.11.6 Balayage par vote 6.11.7 Rglages des contacts.............. 463

...........462 6.11.7.1 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts.... 463 6.11.7.2 Appels privs faits laide de la liste de contacts ....464 6.11.7.3 Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables

......................465 27 Franais (Canada) 28 6.11.8 Rglages de lindicateur dappel 468 6.11.7.4 Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable

......466 6.11.7.5 Ajout d'un nouveau contact....................................... 467 6.11.7.6 Configuration du contact par dfaut

.................. 468 6.11.8.1 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel....................................... 469 6.11.8.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels privs 6.11.8.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs 6.11.8.4 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des messages textes 6.11.8.5 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats

...... 469

...470

.471 de tlmtrie avec message texte........................................... 472 6.11.8.6 Attribuer des styles de sonneries................................... 473 6.11.8.7 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme................ 474 6.11.9 Fonctions du Journal des appels

..............................................................474 6.11.9.1 Affichage des derniers appels........................................ 474 6.11.9.2 Suppression des appels de la liste d'appel

........475 6.11.9.3 Afficher les dtails de la liste d'appel 6.11.9.4 Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels .......476

............................ 476 6.11.10 Fonction Avertissement dappel.................................................. 477 6.11.10.1 Excution dune alerte dappel....................................... 477 6.11.10.2 Avis dappels faits laide de la liste de contacts....... 478 6.11.10.3 Avis d'appel fait l'aide de la numrotation manuelle.................................... 479 6.11.10.4 Rponse un avertissement dappel................ 479 6.11.11 Alias dappelant dynamique.....480 6.11.11.1 Affichage de la liste des alias dappelants................. 480 6.11.11.2 Lancement dun appel priv partir de la liste dalias dappelants.................................481 6.11.12 Mode muet...............................481 6.11.12.1 Activation du mode muet........................................... 482 6.11.12.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet............ 482 6.11.12.3 Quitter le mode muet. 483 6.11.13 Fonctionnement durgence ..... 483 6.11.13.1 Rception dune alarme durgence....................... 484 6.11.13.2 Rponse une alarme durgence....................... 486 Franais (Canada) 6.11.13.3 Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence......................486 6.11.13.4 Envoi des alarmes durgence................................... 487 6.11.13.5 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel............488 6.11.13.6 Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal............. 489 6.11.13.7 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal

...................................... 490 6.11.13.8 Ractivation du mode durgence................................... 491 6.11.13.9 Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence...................... 491 6.11.13.10 Supprimez lalarme de la liste dalarmes................... 492 6.11.14 Messagerie texte .................... 492 6.11.14.1 Messages texte

......493 6.11.14.1.1 Affichage des messages texte............... 493 29 Franais (Canada) 30 6.11.14.1.2 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie........................ 493 6.11.14.1.3 Rponse des messages texte

.... 494 6.11.14.1.4 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide 6.11.14.1.5 Renvoi des messages texte............... 496

............ 495

...........496 6.11.14.1.6 Transfre des messages texte 6.11.14.1.7 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle 6.11.14.1.8 Modification de messages texte.......... 498

..................... 497 6.11.14.1.9 Rdaction de messages texte............... 499 6.11.14.1.10 Envoi de messages texte............... 500 6.11.14.1.11 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception........... 501 6.11.14.1.12 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception

..................... 502 6.11.14.2 Messages texte envoys

................................. 503 6.11.14.2.1 Affichage des messages texte envoys

..................................... 503 6.11.14.2.2 Envoi de messages texte envoys

..................................... 504 6.11.14.2.3 Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys

.......................505 6.11.14.2.4 Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys......... 505 6.11.14.3 Messages texte enregistrs................................. 506 6.11.14.3.1 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs...................... 506 6.11.14.3.2 Modification de messages texte enregistrs...................... 507 6.11.14.3.3 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons......................... 508 6.11.14.4 Message texte rapide

................................................508 6.11.14.4.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides

..................................... 509 6.11.15 Configuration de saisie de texte...................................................... 510 6.11.15.1 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct...... 510 6.11.15.2 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte........................................... 511 Franais (Canada) 6.11.15.3 Majuscule en dbut de phrase................................... 512 6.11.15.4 Afficher des mots personnaliss............................. 513 6.11.15.5 Modifier des mots personnaliss............................. 513 6.11.15.6 Ajouter des mots personnaliss............................. 515 6.11.15.7 Supprimer un mot personnalis...............................516 6.11.15.8 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss.................... 517 6.11.16.1 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche......................... 519 6.11.16.2 Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant. 520 6.11.16.3 Cration de tickets de tche.......................................... 520 6.11.16.4 Rpondre des tickets de tche.......................... 521 6.11.16.5 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche............................522 31 6.11.16 Tickets de tche.......................518 Franais (Canada) 32 6.11.16.6 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche.......... 522 6.11.16.7 Suppression de tickets de tche.......................... 523 6.11.16.8 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche.......................... 524 6.11.17 Confidentialit

......................525 6.11.17.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage

............................. 526 6.11.18 Commande multisite

...... 527 6.11.18.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle.........................527 6.11.18.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv......................... 527 6.11.18.3 Accs la liste de sites voisins................................528 6.11.19 Scurit

............................... 528 6.11.19.1 Dsactivation des radios

..................................... 529 6.11.19.2 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts

................................. 529 6.11.19.3 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

.......... 530 6.11.19.4 Activation des radios

................................................531 6.11.19.5 Activation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts 532 6.11.19.6 Activation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle

................................ 532 6.11.20 Travailleur solitaire...................533 6.11.21 Bluetooth..................................534 6.11.21.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth....................................535 6.11.21.2 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth................... 535 6.11.21.3 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection....................................537 6.11.21.4 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth................... 537 6.11.21.5 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth 538 6.11.21.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils.................................... 538 6.11.21.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif............................. 539 6.11.21.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth....................................539 6.11.22 Localisation lintrieur........... 540 6.11.22.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur........540 6.11.22.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur... 542 6.11.23 Liste de notifications................ 542 6.11.23.1 Accs liste de notification..................................543 Franais (Canada) 6.11.24 Systme ARTS

............. 543 6.11.25 Programmation par onde radio

...........................................................544 6.11.26 Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers..........545 6.11.27 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu.......................................................545 6.11.27.1 Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal)....................546 6.11.28 Verrouillage par mot de passe.546 6.11.28.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe............ 546 6.11.28.2 Dverrouillage de la radio........................................... 547 6.11.28.3 Activation/

dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe............................. 548 6.11.28.4 Changement de mot de passe.................................... 549 6.11.29 Configuration du panneau avant..................................................... 550 33 Franais (Canada) 6.11.29.1 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant.......................................... 550 6.11.29.2 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC .........550 6.11.30 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi..............550 6.11.30.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau........... 557 6.11.30.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau...........................558 6.12 Utilitaires..................................................559 6.12.1 Niveau de silencieux..................559 6.11.30.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi......................... 552 6.11.30.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle)................................ 552 6.11.30.3 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe).......................................553 6.11.30.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau...........................554 6.11.30.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi................ 555 6.11.30.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux..........................556 6.11.30.7 Ajout dun rseau....... 556 6.12.1.1 Configuration du niveau du silencieux.............................. 560 6.12.2 Niveaux de puissance................560 6.12.2.1 Configuration de la puissance...................................561 6.12.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio.............562 6.12.4 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier................................ 562 6.12.5 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes........................563 6.12.6 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler.............564 6.12.7 Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension............... 565 6.12.8 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte..................... 566 34 6.12.9 Changement des modes daffichage............................................ 567 6.12.10 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage.........................................567 6.12.11 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares...................... 568 6.12.12 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL......................................... 569 6.12.13 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique.............. 570 6.12.14 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe. 571 6.12.15 Activer ou dsactiver lcran dintroduction........................................ 571 6.12.16 Slection de la langue............. 572 6.12.17 Dterminer le type de cble.....573 6.12.18 Transmission vocale................ 573 6.12.18.1 Activation ou dsactivation de lmission commande par la voix (VOX)... 574 6.12.19 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle................................ 575 6.12.20 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption.................................... 575 Franais (Canada) 6.12.21 Synthse texte-parole..............575 6.12.21.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole.................576 6.12.22 Activer ou dsactiver le renvoi dappel automatique............................. 577 6.12.23 Rglage du dlai menu............577 6.12.24 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone analogique........................ 578 6.12.25 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique......................... 579 6.12.26 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent................... 580 6.12.27 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques...........................................581 6.12.28 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration................. 581 6.12.29 Ambiance audio....................... 582 6.12.29.1 Configuration de lambiance audio........................ 583 6.12.30 Profils audio............................. 583 6.12.30.1 Configuration des profils audio................................584 35 Franais (Canada) 6.12.31 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial................................585 6.12.32 Liste de rception flexible

.... 586 6.12.32.1 Activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible........ 586 6.12.33 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio.................................................. 586 6.12.33.1 Vrification de lalias et lID de la radio........................ 587 6.12.33.2 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug.................................... 588 6.12.33.3 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel........................................ 588 6.12.33.4 Consulter les informations du GNSS............... 589 6.12.33.5 Affichage de linformation sur le site............... 590 Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF........................................................... 600 Affectations de canaux spciaux..................... 600 Garantie limite.......................................................... 605 Canal durgence....................................600 Canal dappel non commercial............. 601 Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement................................................ 601 Dclaration de conformit pour lutilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit............ 603 Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes......................... 603 PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS.............................. 605 I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :...................................................... 605 II. CONDITIONS GNRALES....................... 606 III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :............................................ 606 IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE...................................................... 606 6.12.34 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise................... 590 Section IV: Liste des accessoires approuvs............592 36 V. CE QUI NEST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE......................................... 607 VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS...................... 608 VII. LOI APPLICABLE..................................... 609 Franais (Canada) 37 gain de lantenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte quil ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola Solutions offrant le gain maximal autoris et limpdance requise pour le type dantenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit dutiliser avec cet appareil tout type dantenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Franais (Canada) Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit MISE EN GARDE:

Cette radio doit tre utilise des fins professionnelles uniquement. Avant dutiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient dimportantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur lexposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Selon la rglementation dIndustrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis quavec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le 38 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC daprs les conditions suivantes : s Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. Toute modification apporte cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Franais (Canada) 39 Franais (Canada) Avis aux utilisateurs

(Industrie Canada) Le fonctionnement de votre radio Motorola Solutions est assujetti la Loi sur la radiocommunication et doit se conformer aux rgles et rglements du ministre Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada du gouvernement fdral. Industrie Canada exige que les utilisateurs de frquences mobiles terrestres prives obtiennent une licence avant dutiliser leur quipement. 40 Version du logiciel Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version du logiciel R02.20.01.0000R02.20.02.0000R01.01.45.0000R03.01.01 R01.20.01.0000 ou une version ultrieure. Reportez-vous Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug la page 255 pour dterminer la version logicielle de votre radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) 41 Franais (Canada) Droits dauteur Les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce document peuvent inclure des programmes informatiques protgs par des droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions. Les lois des tats-Unis et dautres pays rservent Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs pour les programmes informatiques protgs par droits dauteur. Par consquent, tout programme informatique protg par droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions compris dans les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans le prsent document ne peut tre copi ni reproduit de quelque manire que ce soit sans lautorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Aucune partie du prsent document ne peut tre reproduite, transmise, stocke dans un systme de recherche documentaire ou traduite dans une autre langue ou dans un langage informatique, sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans lautorisation crite pralable de Motorola Solutions, Inc. De plus, lachat de produits Motorola ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits dauteur, des droits de brevets ou dune demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, lexception 42 dune licence dutilisation normale et non exclusive, libre de toute redevance, prvue par la loi lors de la vente dun produit. Avis de non-responsabilit Veuillez noter que certaines fonctionnalits, installations et capacits dcrites dans ce document pourraient ne pas sappliquer ou tre accordes sous licence pour lutilisation sur un systme particulier, ou pourraient dpendre des caractristiques dune unit mobile dabonn ou dune configuration de certains paramtres. Veuillez consulter votre personne-ressource chez Motorola Solutions pour en savoir plus. Marques de commerce MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Contenu code source libre Ce produit contient des logiciels libres utiliss sous licence. Reportez-vous au support d'installation du produit pour obtenir tous les avis juridiques relatifs aux logiciels libres et les contenus d'attribution. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas) vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre. Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Franais (Canada) 43 intellectuelle, notamment les droits de brevet, les droits dauteur et les secrets industriels de Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Cette technologie de codage vocal nest concde sous licence que pour une utilisation avec cet quipement de tlcommunication. Il est explicitement interdit tout utilisateur de cette technologie de tenter de dcompiler, de faire lingnierie rebours ou de dsassembler le code excutable, ou encore de convertir de toute autre manire le code excutable dans un format lisible par lutilisateur. Brevets des tats-Unis n 5,870,405, n 5,826,222, n 5,754,974, n 5,701,390, n 5,715,365, n 5,649,050, n 5,630,011, n 5,581,656, n 5,517,511, n 5,491,772, n 5,247,579, n 5,226,084 et n 5,195,166. Franais (Canada) Droits dauteur du logiciel Les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel peuvent inclure des logiciels Motorola Solutions protgs en vertu de la loi sur le droit dauteur enregistrs dans des mmoires semi-conducteurs ou dans dautres supports. Les lois du Canada, des tats-Unis et dautres pays protgent, au nom de Motorola Solutions, certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, notamment les droits exclusifs de copie et de reproduction sous toute forme que ce soit des logiciels protgs par la loi sur le droit dauteur. Par consquent, la loi sur le droit dauteur protgeant tous les logiciels de Motorola Solutions inclus avec les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel interdit toute copie, reproduction, modification, ingnierie rebours ou distribution de ces logiciels sans lautorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. De plus, lachat de produits Motorola Solutions ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits dauteur, des droits de brevets ou dune demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, lexception dune licence dutilisation normale et non exclusive prvue par la loi lors de la vente dun produit. La technologie de codage vocal AMBE+2 incluse dans ce produit est protge par les droits de proprit 44 Entretien de la radio Cette section dcrit les prcautions de base respecter lors de la manipulation de la radio. Tableau 1: Spcification IP Spcification IP Description IP67 Permet votre radio de rsister aux conditions difficiles sur le terrain comme une immersion dans leau. MISE EN GARDE:

Ne dmontez pas votre radio. Cela pourrait endommager les joints de lappareil et occasionner une infiltration deau dans la radio. Lentretien de la radio devrait tre effectu uniquement dans un centre de rparations quip pour mettre lessai et remplacer le joint sur lappareil. Si la radio a t submerge, secouez-la afin dvacuer leau susceptible dtre emprisonne dans la grille du haut-parleur et dans le port du microphone. Leau emprisonne pourrait nuire la qualit audio. Franais (Canada) Si la zone de contact de la batterie de la radio est expose leau, nettoyez et schez les contacts de batterie sur la radio et sur la batterie avant de connecter cette dernire lappareil. Leau rsiduelle pourrait court-circuiter la radio. Si la radio a t plonge dans un liquide corrosif (p. ex. de leau sale), rincez la radio et la batterie leau douce puis schez-les. Pour nettoyer les surfaces extrieures de la radio, utilisez une solution dilue deau et de dtergent liquide pour vaisselle (p. ex. une cuillre th de dtergent dans environ quatre litres deau). Nenfoncez rien dans louverture situe sur le chssis de la radio, sous le contact de la batterie. Cette ouverture permet dquilibrer la pression dans la radio. Le fait denfoncer un objet dans cette ouverture risque de provoquer des infiltrations deau dans la radio, qui ne serait alors plus submersible. Nobstruez jamais ou ne couvrez jamais cette ouverture, mme avec une tiquette. Assurez-vous quaucune substance huileuse nentre en contact avec cette ouverture. La radio, dont lantenne est correctement rattache, est conue pour tre submersible une profondeur 45 Franais (Canada) maximale de 1 mtre (3,28 pieds), pendant une dure maximale de 30 minutes. Une utilisation excessive, suprieure la limite maximale, ou sans antenne pourrait endommager la radio. Lorsque vous nettoyez la radio, nutilisez pas de jet haute pression, car la pression de leau serait alors suprieure la pression correspondant une profondeur de 1 mtre et leau risquerait de sinfiltrer dans la radio. 46 Franais (Canada) Pour commencer fixe. Contactez votre dtaillant si la radio ne sallume toujours pas. Cette section fournit les instructions pour la prparation de votre radio en vue de son utilisation. 1.2 teindre la radio 1.1 Mise sous tension de la radio Appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrt. En cas de russite, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. AVIS:

Si la fonction Tonalits/alertes est dsactive, il ny a aucune tonalit lors de la mise sous tension. Lcran affiche MOTOTRBO (TM), suivi dune image ou Le voyant DEL vert sallume. dun message de bienvenue. Lcran daccueil sallume. Si la radio ne se met pas sous tension, vrifiez la batterie. Assurez-vous que la batterie est charge et correctement Maintenez le bouton Marche/Arrt enfonc. Il peut s'couler jusqu' 7 secondes avant que votre radio soit compltement teinte. L'cran affiche Mise hors tension. 1.3 Rglage du volume Pour rgler le volume de votre radio, effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

Pour augmenter le volume, tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens horaire. Pour rduire le volume, tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens antihoraire. 47 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vous pouvez programmer un cart de volume minimal afin dempcher le rglage du volume un niveau plus faible que le niveau minimum programm. 48 Commandes de la radio 7 Bouton Retour/Accueil 8 Boutons programmables du panneau avant Ce chapitre dcrit les touches de commande et les fonctions de la radio. 9 Connecteur daccessoire 10 Voyants DEL Franais (Canada) 2.1 Bouton Volume/Canal Le bouton Volume/Canal peut tre programm comme un bouton double fonction pour le volume et le canal, ou comme commande de volume seulement. Pour rgler le volume, consultez la section Rglage du volume la page 47. Pour changer les canaux, appuyez et maintenez le bouton Volume/Canal jusqu' ce que l'tat de slection de canal s'affiche. Tournez le bouton Volume/Canal pour slectionner le canal. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode de slection de canal :

Appuyez sur le bouton Volume/Canal. Appuyez sur Appuyez sur

. 49 1 Bouton Marche/Arrt/Information 2 Bouton Volume/Canal 3 cran 4 Bouton Menu/OK 5 Boutons de dfilement haut/bas 6 Haut-parleur 12346591078 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Double slect. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche Volume uniq. et Volume & canal. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'icne L'cran revient au menu prcdent. s'affiche ct des rglages slectionns. Franais (Canada) Attendez que la minuterie du menu arrive son terme. 2.1.1 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double de la radio. 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2.2 Touches du microphone clavier 1 2 3 50 Le clavier alphanumrique 3 x 4 (7,6 sur 10,2 cm) du microphone clavier navigation multidirectionnelle (numro de pice Motorola Solutions RMN5127_) vous permet d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appuyez plusieurs fois sur la mme touche pour entrer certains caractres. Le tableau indique le nombre de pressions requises pour la saisie du caractre voulu. Tou che Nombre de pressions sur la touche 5

6

7

8

9

10 11

12

13

Franais (Canada) 1 1 A D G J M 2

. B E H K N 3

, C F I L O 4

2 3 4 5 6 51 Franais (Canada) Tou che Nombre de pressions sur la touche 2 Q U X 3 R V Y 4 S 8 Z 5 7 9 1 P T W 0

* ou del

# ou espa ce 52 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 AVIS:

Appuyez sur cette touche une fois pour entrer 0 et maintenez-la enfonce pour activer le verrouillage des majuscules. Pour dsactiver le verrouillage des majuscules, maintenez-

la enfonce de nouveau. AVIS:

Pour supprimer un caractre entr, appuyez sur cette touche pendant la saisie du texte. Pour entrer * , appuyez sur cette touche en mode de saisie numrique. AVIS:

Pour insrer une espace, appuyez sur cette touche pendant la saisie de texte. Pour entrer

# , appuyez sur cette touche en mode de saisie numrique. WAVE Lenvironnement de voix rseau tendu (Wide Area Voice Environment ou WAVE) offre une nouvelle mthode de faire des appels entre deux radios. WAVE vous permet de communiquer sur diffrents rseaux et appareils au moyen du Wi-Fi. Les appels WAVE sont effectus lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau IP par Wi-Fi. Votre radio prend en charge diffrentes configurations systme :

WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise WAVE Tactical/5000 Franais (Canada) WAVE connect WAVE est connect. WAVE dconnect WAVE est dconnect. AVIS:

Cette fonction s'applique seulement certains modles. 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise La mthode pour lancer un appel WAVE est diffrente dun type de systme lautre. Reportez-vous la section correspondant la configuration systme de votre radio. 3.1.1 Passage du mode Radio au mode WAVE Tableau 2: Icnes d'affichage WAVE Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur l'cran lorsque le mode WAVE est activ. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme WAVE. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 53 Franais (Canada) 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' WAVE. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche momentanment l'avis Passage WAVE, puis affiche Prparation WAVE. AVIS:

Votre radio active automatiquement le Wi-Fi lorsquelle passe au mode WAVE. En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignotant s'teint. L'cran affiche licne de connexion WAVE, <Alias de groupe> et <Index des canaux>. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche licne de dconnexion WAVE ainsi que le message Aucune connexion ou Activation :

chec, selon le type d'erreur. 54 AVIS:

La synchronisation se produit lorsque de nouveaux paramtres sont diffuss sur votre radio. Lorsque la radio entre en mode WAVE, elle affiche Synchronisation. Une fois la synchronisation termine, la radio retourne l'cran d'accueil. 3.1.2 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE 1 Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal ou les touches pour slectionner un groupe WAVE. 2 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . Si lappel russit, lcran affiche licne dappel de groupe et lalias du groupe WAVE. Si lappel nest pas russi :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche momentanment lavis Appel chou ou Aucun participant. Franais (Canada) 3.1.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel de groupe WAVE Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe WAVE :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . 2 Pour couter, relchez le bouton PTT. L'cran affiche l'icne dappel de groupe WAVE, lalias de groupe WAVE et lalias de lappelant. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 3.1.5 Passage du mode WAVE au mode Radio 1 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . 2 Pour couter, relchez le bouton PTT. 3.1.4 Recevoir et rpondre un appel priv WAVE Lorsque vous recevez un appel priv WAVE :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche l'icne dappel priv et l'alias de l'abonn. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode Radio. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mode Radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche momentanment l'avis Passage radio, puis affiche Prparation radio. 55 Franais (Canada) En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignotant s'teint. L'icne de connexion WAVE ne s'affiche plus dans la barre d'tat. L'cran affiche <Alias de groupe> et

<Index des canaux>. 3.2 WAVE Tactical/5000 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au canal WAVE voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rgler comme actif. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct du canal slectionn. 3.2.1 Rglage des canaux actifs WAVE 3.2.2 Afficher l'information de canal WAVE AVIS:

Les canaux WAVE sont configurs par le CPS. Votre radio active automatiquement le Wi-Fi et se connecte au serveur WAVE une fois que vous entrez le canal WAVE. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Liste de canaux WAVE. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Canaux WAVE. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Canaux WAVE. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 2 1 2 56 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au canal WAVE Appuyez sur ou jusqu Points voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. dextrmit. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficher les dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche les dtails du canal WAVE. 3.2.3 Afficher l'information de points d'extrmit WAVE Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au point d'extrmit WAVE voulu. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur dtails. pour slectionner Afficher les L'cran affiche les dtails du point d'extrmit WAVE. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Contact. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 3.2.4 Changer la configuration WAVE Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer ladresse IP du serveur, lID utilisateur et le mot de passe du serveur WAVE. 2 3 4 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 57 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur jusquau Mot de passe. Appuyez Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. sur pour afficher ou modifier le mot de passe Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' WAVE. Appuyez apportes. sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour slectionner Adresse du serveur. Appuyez sur pour changer l'adresse du serveur. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 7 8 WAVE. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur jusqu Appliquer. Appuyez sur pour appliquer toutes les modifications L'cran affiche un mini-avis positif avant de revenir momentanment l'cran Paramtres de la radio. 3.2.5 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE 1 Slectionnez le canal WAVE qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour un ID utilisateur. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de Appuyez sur pour changer l'ID dutilisateur. conversation PTT. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias s'affichent sur la premire ligne de 2 3 4 5 6 58 l'cran. L'alias du groupe WAVE s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Franais (Canada) 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond.L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 59 Franais (Canada) Capacity Max Capacity Max est un systme radio ADF bas sur les canaux de contrle MOTOTRBO. Les radios numriques MOTOTRBO sont vendues par Motorola Solutions principalement aux entreprises et aux utilisateurs de lindustrie. MOTOTRBO se fonde sur la norme des radios mobiles numriques (DMR) de lInstitut europen des normes de tlcommunication (ETSI), cest-

-dire, le mode daccs multiple par rpartition dans le temps (AMRT) deux intervalles de temps, pour la prise en charge simultane de la voix et des donnes sur un canal de 12,5 kHz (quivalent 6,25 kHz). 4.1 Bouton dmission (PTT) Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales. Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. 60 Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT est activ, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. La tonalit continue dun signal dinterdiction se fait entendre si votre appel est interrompu, par exemple si la radio reoit un appel durgence. Dans ce cas, relchez le bouton PTT. 4.2 Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Franais (Canada) Appui bref Appui long Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:

Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 483 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 4.3 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables par le dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Ambiance audio Profils audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner un environnement dans lequel la radio fonctionne. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Contacts Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Avertissement d'appel Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts de la radio afin de slectionner le destinataire d'un avertissement d'appel. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner le profil audio prfr. Urgence Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. 61 Franais (Canada) Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Accs direct Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/

haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Lance directement un appel de diffusion, individuel, tlphonique ou de groupe, un avertissement d'appel ou un message texte rapide prdfini. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Fonction de carte d'option Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Tlphone Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. Confidentialit Permet laccs direct la liste des contacts du tlphone. Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Diffusion publique (PA) Audio intelligent Num. manuelle Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Permet deffectuer un appel priv en entrant un ID dabonn. Alias et ID de la radio Indique l'alias et l'ID de la radio. Itinrance de site manuelle coute distance Lance une recherche de site manuelle. Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. Permet l'accs direct la liste des notifications. CGA Mic. Notifications 62 Info site Affiche le nom et lID du site Capacity Max actuel. Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque lAnnonce vocale est active. Franais (Canada) Verrouillage de site Slection de zone Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. 4.4 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. Basculement entre les niveaux de priorit dappel Permet votre radio de passer au niveau de priorit dappel lev/normal. Amlioration de la vibration Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Annonces vocales pour canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Cette fonction n'est pas accessible si les annonces vocales ne sont pas actives. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Rtroclairage Active ou dsactive le rtroclairage de l'cran. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 63 Franais (Canada) 4.5 Accs aux fonctions programmes Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder aux fonctions programmes de votre radio. Maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir lcran daccueil. La radio quitte automatiquement le menu et revient l'cran d'accueil aprs une priode d'inactivit. Des touches de navigation se trouvent galement sur le microphone clavier. Voir Touches du microphone clavier la page 50. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme. Passez tape 3. 4.6 Indicateurs d'tat Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la fonction du menu et appuyez sur fonction ou entrer dans un sous-menu. pour slectionner une 4.6.1 Icnes 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Laffichage cristaux liquides (ACL) prsente ltat de la radio, les entres de texte et des menus. Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir l'cran Tableau 3: Icnes daffichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant dans la barre dtat qui apparat au haut de lcran. Les icnes sont 64 classes par ordre dutilisation ou dapparition partir de la gauche et sont spcifiques au canal. Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. Licne demeure allume tant quun dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance nest connect. La radio est dans le groupe DGNA. DGNA Urgence La radio est en mode durgence. Fonction GNSS disponible La fonction GNSS est active. Licne demeure allume tant que la rception dune position est disponible. Franais (Canada) Fonction GNSS non disponible La fonction GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. Localisation interne disponible1 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Positionnement lintrieur non disponible1 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Mode muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-

parleur est coup. 1 Ne sapplique quaux logiciels et au matriel les plus rcents. 65 Franais (Canada) Notification La liste de notifications comprend au moins un vnement manqu. Carte doptions La fonction Carte doption est active.

(Modles dots de la fonction Carte doption uniquement.) Absence de fonction de la carte doption La fonction Carte doption est dsactive. Retardateur de programmation par radiocommunication Indique le temps restant avant le redmarrage automatique de la radio. Indique le Groupe de priorit 1. Priorit 1 Priorit 2 Indique le Groupe de priorit 2. 66 Indicateur de puissance de signal reu (RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente lintensit du signal radio. Laffichage de quatre barres indique une intensit de signal maximale. Cette icne ne saffiche quen mode de rception. Suppr. rponse La suppression de rponse est active. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Scuris La fonction Cryptage est active. Frquence partage Indique que la radio se connecte au canal de contrle partag. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Itinrance de site La fonction ditinrance de site est active. tat Indique un nouveau message dtat. Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. Non scurise La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Wi-Fi Excellent2 Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. Wi-Fi bon2 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen2 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Franais (Canada) Wi-Fi faible2 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Wi-Fi non disponible2 Le signal Wi-Fi nest pas disponible. Tableau 4: Icnes de menu avanc Les icnes suivantes saffichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Case cocher (coche) Indique que loption est slectionne. Case cocher (vide) Indique que loption nest pas slectionne. Case noire Indique que loption slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-

menu. 2 Applicable uniquement pour les modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. 67 Franais (Canada) Tableau 5: Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Tableau 6: Icnes dappels Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant lcran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type dalias ou dID. Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque dcoute. Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif PTT

(messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement (POD). Capteur de lappareil Bluetooth2 Capteur dun appareil compatible Bluetooth, comme un capteur de gaz. 68 Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique quun appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de lappel PC par Bluetooth. Priorit dappel leve Indique que le niveau de priorit dappel lev est activ. Appel DGNA Indique quun appel DGNA est en cours. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact dappel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais dun serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. Appel de groupe/appel gnral Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel de groupe ou un appel gnral est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel priv Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel priv est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de labonn. Appel de groupe comme tant un appel de groupe/gnral Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un appel de groupe/

gnral en cours. Franais (Canada) Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel priv Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel priv en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du tlphone. Tableau 7: Icnes de tickets de tche Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur lcran dans le dossier Tickets de tche. Toutes les tches Indique toutes les tches de la liste. Nouvelles tches Indique les nouvelles tches. 69 Franais (Canada) 70 En cours Les travaux sont en cours de transmission. Ceci saffiche avant lindication dchec ou de russite denvoi de tickets de tche. chec de lenvoi Les travaux ne peuvent tre envoys. Russite de lenvoi Les travaux ont t envoys avec succs. Indique le niveau de priorit 1 pour les travaux. Indique le niveau de priorit 2 pour les travaux. Priorit 1 Priorit 2 Priorit 3 Indique le niveau de priorit 3 pour les travaux. Tableau 8: Icnes davertissement Les icnes dcrites ci-dessous saffichent momentanment lcran de la radio lors de lexcution dune tche. chec de transmission (ngatif) Laction excute na pas russi. Transmission russie (positif) Laction excute a russi. Transmission en cours (transitoire) Transmission en cours. Cette icne saffiche avant lindication de russite ou dchec de la transmission. Tableau 9: Icnes des lments envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran dans le dossier Messages envoys. En cours ou Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID dabonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. 4.6.2 Voyant lumineux Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. Rouge clignotant ou ou ou Message personnel ou de groupe non lu ou Le message texte na pas t lu. chec de lenvoi Le message texte ne peut tre envoy. Russite de lenvoi Le message texte a t envoy. Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio effectue une transmission. La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. 71 Franais (Canada) La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation par radiocommunication. Tonalits La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. AVIS:

Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. Jaune continu Jaune clignotant La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. Jaune clignotement double La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. 4.6.3 72 Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave 4.6.3.1 Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. La radio est verrouille. Tonalit priodique Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. 4.6.3.2 Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec 4.7 Enregistrement Il y a un certain nombre de messages lis l'enregistrement que vous pouvez recevoir. Franais (Canada) Enregistrement En rgle gnrale, l'enregistrement est envoy au systme lors de la mise sous tension, d'un changement de groupe d'appels ou durant l'itinrance de site. Si une radio ne parvient pas s'enregistrer sur un site, la radio tente automatiquement de se connecter un autre site. La radio supprime temporairement le site o l'enregistrement a t tent de la liste d'itinrance. L'indication signifie que la radio est occupe chercher un site pour l'itinrance ou qu'elle a russi trouver un site, mais est en attente d'une rponse aux messages d'enregistrement de la radio. Lorsque Enregistrement est affich sur la radio, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. Si les indications persistent, l'utilisateur doit changer d'emplacements ou s'il est autoris, manuellement se connecter un autre site. Hors de porte Une radio est juge hors de porte lorsqu'elle est incapable de dtecter un signal provenant du systme ou du site actuel. Rgle gnrale, cette indication signifie que la radio 73 Franais (Canada) est l'extrieur de plage de couverture radio de la radiofrquence sortante gographique. Lorsque Hors de porte s'affiche sur la radio, une tonalit rptitive retentit et le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit encore des indications comme tant hors de porte tout en tant dans une zone bnficiant d'une bonne couverture RF. chec d'affiliation au groupe d'appels Une radio tente de s'affilier au groupe d'appels spcifi dans les canaux ou la position du bouton unifie (UKP) au cours de l'enregistrement. Une radio qui est dans un tat d'chec d'affiliation ne peut pas mettre ou recevoir des appels du groupe d'appels auquel la radio tente de s'affilier. Lorsqu'une radio est incapable de s'affilier un groupe d'appels, UKP alias (alias KP) s'affiche dans l'cran d'accueil avec un arrire-plan en surbrillance. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit des indications d'chec d'affiliation. 74 Enregistrement refus Les indicateurs d'enregistrement refus sont reus lorsque l'enregistrement avec le systme n'est pas accept. La radio n'indique pas l'utilisateur radio la raison exacte du refus de l'enregistrement. Normalement, un enregistrement est refus lorsque l'oprateur du systme a dsactiv l'accs de la radio au systme. Lorsque l'enregistrement est refus la radio, Refus enregistrem. est affich sur la radio et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. 4.8 Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. La radio peut tre programme avec un maximum de 250 zones Capacity Max avec un maximum de 160 canaux par zone. Chaque zone Capacity Max contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables.Chaque zone Capacity Max contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables. Franais (Canada) 4.8.1 Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de zone. Passez tape 3. 4.8.2 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone voulue laide de la recherche dalias. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Zone. Appuyez 1 2 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche et la zone courante. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la zone voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche et la zone actuelle. 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 4 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. 75 Franais (Canada) La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non programm est slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. Lorsque la zone requise est affiche (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient lcran de la zone slectionne. 4.8.4 Slectionner un site 4.8.3 Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel de diffusion, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous modifier la position du bouton de slection de canaux ( une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le systme Capacity Max. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'appels qui a t programm pour le nouveau type d'appel de la position du bouton de slection de canal. 76 Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Capacity Max recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. Le systme Capacity Max peut prendre en charge jusqu'

250 sites. 4.8.5 Demande ditinrance Une demande ditinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Franais (Canada) Si aucun site nest disponible :

Lcran de la radio affiche le message Recherche et poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

toujours disponible. AVIS:

Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Appuyez sur la touche programme Itinrance de site manuelle. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. Lcran affiche ID du site <Numro du site>. 4.8.6 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

4.8.7 Restriction de site Pour les systmes Capacity Max, votre administrateur de systme radio est en mesure de dcider quels sites rseau sont autoriss ou non. Il n'est pas ncessaire de reprogrammer votre radio pour modifier la liste des sites autoriss et non autoriss. Si votre radio tente de s'inscrire sur un site non autoris, votre radio reoit l'indication que le site est refus. La radio recherche alors un autre site rseau. Lorsque vous rencontrez des restrictions de site, votre radio affiche Refus enregistrement et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. 77 Franais (Canada) 4.8.8 ADF de site LADF de site est disponible uniquement avec le systme Capacity Max. Un site doit tre en mesure de communiquer avec le contrleur de site ADF pour tre considr comme un systme ADF. Si le site ne parvient pas communiquer avec le tronon contrleur de site ADF, alors la radio entre en mode ADF de site. Lorsquen mode ADF de site, la radio envoie une indication audible et visuelle priodiquement pour informer lutilisateur de sa fonctionnalit limite. Lorsquune radio est en ADF de site, la radio affiche Res. partag. Site et une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Les radios en mode ADF de site sont toujours en mesure de passer des appels vocaux, individuels ou de groupe, et envoyer des messages texte dautres radios du mme site. Les consoles vocales, les enregistreurs de journalisation, les passerelles de tlphone et les applications de donnes ne peuvent communiquer avec les radios sur le site. Une fois quelle est en mode ADF de site, une radio qui participe des appels sur des sites multiples ne sera en mesure de communiquer quavec dautres radios au sein 78 dun mme site. La communication en provenance et destination dautres sites pourraient tre perdues. AVIS:

Sil y a plusieurs sites qui couvrent lemplacement actuel de la radio et lun des sites passe en mode ADF de site, les radios vont se connecter un autre site dans la couverture. 4.9 Appels Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :

Recherche d'alias Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel priv ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. Liste de contacts Cette mthode permet d'accder directement la liste des contacts. Franais (Canada) Numrotation manuelle ( partir de Contacts) Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel priv ou un appel tlphonique partir du microphone clavier. Touches numriques programmes Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel priv ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique . Bouton Volume/Canal Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. AVIS:

Vous ne pouvez attribuer qu'un seul alias ou ID une touche numrique, mais vous pouvez attribuer plus d'une touche numrique un alias ou un ID. Toutes les touches numriques du microphone clavier peuvent tre attribues. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. AVIS:

Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu durant la transmission dun appel crypt et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de confidentialit ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Confidentialit la page 525. 79 Franais (Canada) 4.9.1 Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. 4.9.1.1 Faire des appels de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 76. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 80 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias s'affichent sur la premire ligne de l'cran. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Le message Appel de groupe et l'icne Appel de groupe s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. Franais (Canada) 4.9.1.2 Appels de groupe faits laide de la liste de contacts 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID, et l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque 81 Franais (Canada) lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. 4.9.1.3 Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. 82 Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. 4 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 4.9.1.4 Appels de groupe faits laide de la recherche dalias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer lalias dun abonn. Cette fonction nest accessible quau moyen de la liste des contacts. 4 5 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Appuyez sur dabonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime jusqu lalias ou lID ou Franais (Canada) ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. tl. invalide. Appuyez sur ou pour un appel tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code daccs :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de lutilisateur. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias ou lID dabonn et licne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code 83 Franais (Canada) daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 8 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 84 pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de libration nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 9 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Linitiateur de lappel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pendant laccs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche dalias. ou pour quitter la Appuyez sur la touche recherche dalias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/retrait daccs ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 4.9.1.5 Rponse un appel de groupe Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. 85 Franais (Canada) L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

86 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 4.9.2 Appel de diffusion Un appel de diffusion est un appel vocal de n'importe quel utilisateur un groupe d'appels en entier. La fonction Appel de diffusion permet uniquement au lanceur d'appel de transmettre au groupe d'appels, mais les destinataires de l'appel ne peuvent pas rpondre. L'initiateur de la diffusion peut galement mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou pour appeler ce dernier, votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie de ce groupe. 4.9.2.1 Faire des appels de diffusion L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 76. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4.9.2.2 Faire des appels de diffusion laide de la liste de contacts Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Le message Appel de groupe et 87 Franais (Canada) l'icne Appel de groupe s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour 4.9.2.3 Appels de diffusion faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de diffusion l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. pour 88 4.9.2.4 Rception d'appels de diffusion Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir des appels de diffusion sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un Appel de diffusion :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de 4.9.3 Appel priv l'cran. l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Les destinataires ne sont pas en mesure de rpondre lors dun appel de diffusion. Lcran affiche Rponse interdite. La tonalit de rponse interdite retentit pendant un court instant si l'utilisateur appuie sur le bouton PTT pendant un appel de diffusion. Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type d'appel est appel appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission

(OACSU). Le mode OACSU dfinit l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio et met fin automatiquement l'appel. Le second type est appel tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU). Le mode FOACSU dfinit galement l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio. Cependant, un accus de rception de l'utilisateur est requis pour les 89 Franais (Canada) appels FOACSU afin de terminer l'appel et permettre l'utilisateur d'accepter ou de refuser l'appel. Le type d'appel est configur par l'administrateur systme. AVIS:

Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur le bouton

. 4.9.3.1 Passer des appels individuels Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction nest pas active, vous entendrez une tonalit dindication ngative lorsque vous lancez lappel.Si la radio cible nest pas disponible, une courte tonalit retentit et lcran affiche Appel non disponible. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez un canal qui correspond lalias ou lID dabonn. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 76. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 90 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel priv, lalias de labonn et ltat de lappel. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Vous entendrez une courte tonalit.Lcran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur dappel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur

. Franais (Canada) 4.9.3.2 Appels individuels faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs laide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de lcran daccueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu lalias ou lID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre si la touche numrique na pas t attribue une entre. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 4 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une courte tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur dappel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur

. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel priv, lalias de labonn et ltat de lappel. 4.9.3.3 Appels individuels faits laide de la recherche dalias 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 91 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. ou jusqu lalias ou lID Appuyez sur dabonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. tl. invalide. Appuyez sur ou pour un appel tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code daccs :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour 2 3 4 5 92 pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de lutilisateur. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias ou lID dabonn et licne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 8 pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de libration nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour continuer. de libration, puis appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Franais (Canada) Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 9 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une courte tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur dappel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur

. AVIS:

Pendant laccs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche dalias. pour quitter la ou Appuyez sur la touche recherche dalias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. 93 Franais (Canada) 4.9.3.4 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'appel individuel. 94 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur le bouton

. 4.9.3.5 Appels individuels faits laide de la numrotation manuelle 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusquau Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Entrez lID de labonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. Modifier les ID dabonn composs prcdemment et appuyez sur continuer. pour 6 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. Franais (Canada) 7 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 8 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de la radio mettrice. 9 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Le lanceur dappel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur

. 95 Franais (Canada) 4.9.3.6 Rception d'un appel individuel Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (OACSU) :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. AVIS:

Selon la configuration de votre radio, soit en mode appel individuel OACSU, soit en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU), rpondre des appels individuels peut ncessiter ou non un accus de rception de l'utilisateur. Pour la configuration OACSU, la sourdine est dsactive et l'appel se connecte automatiquement. 4.9.3.7 Accepter des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :

96 Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 1 Pour accepter un appel individuel configur comme FOACSU, effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes :

Appuyez sur ou Accepter, puis pour rpondre un appel appuyez sur individuel. entre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. AVIS:

Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur

. 4.9.3.8 Refus des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Pour refuser un appel individuel configur comme FOACSU, effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes :

Appuyez sur ou Rejeter, puis appuyez sur individuel. Appuyez sur individuel. pour refuser un appel pour refuser un appel 4.9.4 Franais (Canada) Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le site ou toutes les radios sur un groupe de sites, selon la configuration du systme. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du systme ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. Le mode Capacity Max prend en charge l'appel gnral de site et appel gnral multisite. L'administrateur systme peut configurer une ou les deux actions dans votre radio. AVIS:

Les abonns peuvent prendre en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme, mais l'infrastructure Motorola Solutions ne prend pas en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme. 4.9.4.1 Appels gnraux Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. 97 Franais (Canada) 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 76. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite, selon le type de configuration. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour 4.9.4.2 98 Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels gnraux l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.Lcran affiche Appel de groupe et Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 4.9.4.3 Appels gnraux faits laide de la recherche dalias 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. Tl. Invalide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appeler. pour effectuer la slection. Si le Appuyez sur code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code daccs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis pour continuer. En cas de appuyez sur russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne 99 Franais (Canada) dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 8 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 100 pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour continuer. de libration, puis appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. AVIS:

L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur mettre fin tous les appels. pour 4.9.4.4 Rception d'un appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral, voici ce qui arrive :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'ID de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. La deuxime ligne affiche Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. la fin de l'appel, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la rception de l'appel gnral. Franais (Canada) Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. 4.9.5 Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel entre une radio individuelle ou un groupe de radios et un tlphone. Selon la faon dont la radio est configure, les fonctions suivantes peuvent tre disponibles ou non :

Code daccs Doubles tonalits multi-frquence (DTMF) Code de non-accs Affichage de lalias ou de lID de lappelant sur rception dun appel tlphonique 101 Franais (Canada) Possibilit de refuser ou daccepter un appel tlphonique Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. La capacit dappel tlphonique peut tre active par lattribution et la configuration des numros de tlphone sur le systme. Vrifiez auprs de votre administrateur systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.9.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs une touche pour lalias ou lID prdfini. 3 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 5 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 6 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche le message Code daccs :. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour 2 102 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez les deux dernires tapes qui prcdent ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 4.9.5.2 Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable Suivez la procdure pour passer un appel tlphonique laide de la touche programmable. Franais (Canada) 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Tlphone pour accder au rpertoire tlphonique. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche le message Code daccs:. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn ou son ID et ltat de lappel. Si la configuration dappel russit :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias ou lID de labonn, Appel tl et ltat de lappel. Si la configuration dappel choue :

Une tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel tl. chou. 103 Franais (Canada) Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 3 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 4 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. Lcran affiche Chiffres suppl.: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, pour continuer. La tonalit puis appuyez sur DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 5 104 Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche Code de libration:. Entrez le code de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite de la configuration de fin dappel, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. En cas dchec de la prparation de lappel, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque lcran des contacts tlphoniques est affich, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. AVIS:

Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel

(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal et la transmission du code daccs/non-accs ou dchiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Volume/

Marche/Arrt Bouton de volume et Canal prcdent/suivantSlecteur de canal rpondent. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 4.9.5.3 Franais (Canada) Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que vous tes sur lcran Contacts tlphoniques :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Lcran affiche App. OK pour placer appel. Si lentre slectionne est vide :

105 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de labonn, licne Lcran affiche No dappel tlphonique non valide. Appel tl et Appel tl. Si lappel nest pas russi :

Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Appeler. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche Code daccs : si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Lcran affiche Appels, lalias ou lID de labonn et licne Appel tl. Si lappel est russi :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. 6 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Licne RSSI disparat. 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 8 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la 4 5 106 radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. affich, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche App. OK pour placer appel. Franais (Canada) Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. 9 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 10 Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 9 et tape 10 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone ait termin lappel. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque lcran des contacts tlphoniques est 107 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel (une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 4.9.5.4 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la recherche dalias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer lalias dun abonn. Cette fonction nest accessible quau moyen de la liste des contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels laide de la recherche dalias partir de la radio. 108 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Appuyez sur dabonn voulu. ou jusqu lalias ou lID pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran indique No. Tl. Invalide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Appeler. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste des contacts, lcran affiche Code daccs: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de labonn, licne RSSI, Appel tl et licne Appel tl. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. Lcran affiche Chiffres suppl.: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur DTMF se fait entendre pour continuer. La tonalit Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si lentre de la touche Accs une touche est vide, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste des contacts, lcran affiche Code de libration: et un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite :

109 Lcran affiche Appel tl. chou. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 8 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit retentit. AVIS:

Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec :

Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Pendant laccs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche dalias. ou pour quitter la Appuyez sur la touche recherche dalias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/retrait daccs ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 4.9.5.5 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. 110 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusquau Numro de tlphone. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Lcran affiche Numro : et un curseur clignotant. 5 Saisissez le numro de tlphone, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Lcran affiche Code daccs : et un curseur clignotant si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. 7 Franais (Canada) 6 pour Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn et ltat de lappel. Si lappel est russi :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche lalias de labonn et licne Appel tl. Si lappel nest pas russi :

Une tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 111 Franais (Canada) 8 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 7 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 112 AVIS:

Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque vous tes dans lcran de contacts, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appuyez sur OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel termin. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel

(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Franais (Canada) Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Entrez le numro voulu pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. 4.9.5.6 Multifrquence deux tonalits La fonction Multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) permet votre radio dutiliser un systme radio dot dune interface de systme tlphonique. La dsactivation de toutes les tonalits et de lalerte de la radio dsactive automatiquement la tonalit DTMF. 4.9.5.6.1 Excution dun appel DTMF Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels DTMF partir de la radio. suprieur droit. 1 Maintenez le bouton de transmission PTT enfonc. 4.9.5.7 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel gnral, la radio rceptrice ne peut pas parler ou rpondre. L'utilisateur destinataire n'est pas non plus autoris mettre fin l'appel gnral. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :

L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin L'cran affiche Appel gnral, Appel gnral de site ou Appel multisite selon le type de configuration et l'Appel tlphonique. 113 Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 4.9.5.8 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :

Lcran affiche licne Appel tl et Appel tl. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 3 114 AVIS:

Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 4.9.5.9 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :

Lcran affiche licne Appel tl et Appel tl. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 3 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. AVIS:

Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Franais (Canada) Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 4.9.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission Un appel en cours est interrompu lorsque vous effectuez les actions suivantes :

Appuyez sur le bouton Voix PTT. Appuyez sur le bouton durgence. La radio rceptrice affiche le message Appel interrompu. 4.9.7 Priorit d'appel La Priorit d'appel permet une radio d'arrter toute transmission vocale en cours et de lancer une transmission prioritaire. Grce la fonction Priorit d'appel, le systme des interrompt et place en priorit des appels en cours dans les 115 Franais (Canada) cas o les canaux de ressources partages sont indisponibles. Des appels de priorit plus leve, comme un appel d'urgence ou un appel gnral passent en priorit sur la radio l'origine de la transmission afin de rpondre l'appel de priorit suprieure. En l'absence d'autres canaux de radiofrquence (RF) disponibles, un appel d'urgence passe en priorit sur un appel gnral aussi. 4.9.8 Interruption vocale L'interruption vocale permet l'utilisateur d'arrter une transmission vocale en cours. Cette fonction utilise la composition de canal inverse pour arrter la transmission vocale en cours d'une radio, si la radio interrompue est configure pour l'interruption vocale et que la radio mettrice est configure pour pouvoir interrompre un appel vocal. La radio interrompue est alors autorise mettre une transmission vocale vers le participant dont l'appel est arrt. La fonction Interruption vocale amliore considrablement la probabilit de fournir une nouvelle transmission selon aux parties vises lorsqu'un appel est en cours. 116 L'utilisateur accs l'interruption vocale uniquement si cette fonction a t configure. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.9.8.1 Activation de l'interruption vocale Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction Interruption vocale sur votre radio. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 1 Pour interrompre la transmission pendant un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Sur la radio interrompue, l'cran affiche Appel termin. Une tonalit d'chec retentit tant que le bouton PTT n'est pas relch. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4.10 Fonctions avances Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.10.1 Franais (Canada) Files dattente dappels Lorsquil ny a pas de ressources disponibles pour traiter un appel, les files dattente dappels permettent de placer la demande dappel dans la file dattente du systme pour les prochaines ressources disponibles. Vous entendez une tonalit de file dattente dappels aprs avoir appuy sur le bouton PTT et lcran de la radio affiche Attente appel, ce qui indique que la radio est passe ltat de file dattente dappels. Le bouton PTT peut tre relch ds que la tonalit de File dattente dappels se fait entendre. Si la configuration de lappel est tablie, ce qui suit se produit :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si cette option est active, la tonalit dautorisation se fait entendre. Lcran affiche licne du type dappel, lID ou lalias. Lutilisateur de la radio a jusqu 4 secondes pour appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour commencer transmission vocale. Si la configuration de lappel choue, ce qui suit se produit :

117 Si cette option est active, la tonalit de rejet se fait Tous les appels vocaux Message texte DMR /Message texte Lcran affiche lavis dchec momentanment. Lappel est termin et la radio quitte la configuration des Bon de travail coute distance Franais (Canada) entendre. appels. 4.10.2 Appel prioritaire Les lments suivants sont les types dappel prioritaire :

Priorit leve La radio affiche Appel suivant : Haute priorit. Licne Priorit dappel leve saffiche dans le haut de lcran de votre radio. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :

Priorit leve. Priorit normale La radio affiche Appel suivant : Prior. normale. Licne Priorit dappel leve disparat. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :

Priorit normale. La fonction dappel prioritaire permet au systme de traiter en priorit un des appels non prioritaires sortants et dinitier lappel priorit leve demand lorsque tous les canaux sont occups. Quand tous les canaux sont occups traiter des appels priorit leve, le systme ne traite aucun appel en priorit et place lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file dattente des appels. Si le systme ne russit pas placer lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file dattente des appels, il gnre un avis dchec. Les paramtres par dfaut pour la fonction dappel prioritaire sont prconfigurs. Appuyez sur le bouton programmable pour basculer entre les niveaux de priorit normal et lev. Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions suivantes, le niveau de priorit de lappel revient automatiquement au rglage prconfigur. 118 4.10.3 Balayage de groupe dappels Cette fonction permet votre radio dcouter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes dfinis dans une liste de groupe dappels de rception. Lorsque le balayage est activ, la radio dsactive la sourdine de tous les membres de sa liste de groupes de rception. Lorsque le balayage est dsactiv, votre radio ne reoit aucune transmission des membres de la liste de groupes de rception, sauf sil sagit dun appel gnral provenant dun groupe permanent tant le groupe slectionn. 4.10.3.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Eteindre. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si le balayage est activ :

L'cran affiche Balayage activ et l'icne Balayage. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si le balayage est dsactiv :

L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv. L'icne de balayage disparat. Le voyant DEL steint. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 119 Franais (Canada) 4.10.4 Liste de groupe de rception La Liste de groupe de rception flexible vous permet de crer et daffecter des membres la liste de groupe de rception. Cette liste est cre lors de la programmation de votre radio et dtermine les groupes qui peuvent tre balays. Votre radio peut prendre en charge un maximum de 16 membres dans la liste. Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez :

Ajouter ou supprimer des groupes. Ajouter, supprimer ou modifier la priorit des groupes. Reportez-vous la section Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels la page 121. Ajouter, supprimer ou modifier laffiliation des groupes. Reportez-vous Ajout d'affiliation de groupe la page 122 et Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe la page 124. Remplacer la liste de balayage avec une nouvelle liste de balayage. 120 Si un groupe est programm en tant que groupe permanent, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le groupe partir de la liste de balayage. IMPORTANT:

Pour ajouter des membres dans la liste, le groupe doit dabord tre configur dans la radio. AVIS:

Cette dernire est programme par ladministrateur systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.10.5 Surveillance de la priorit La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio de recevoir automatiquement les transmissions de groupes avec une priorit suprieure, mme lorsquelle est sur appel de groupe. La radio quitte lappel de groupe de priorit infrieure pour les appels de groupe de priorit plus leve. AVIS:

Cette fonction est accessible uniquement lorsque le balayage de groupe est activ. La fonction Surveillance prioritaire sapplique uniquement aux membres de la liste de groupe de rception. Il y a deux groupes de priorit : priorit 1 (P1) et priorit 2 (P2). P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. Dans le systme Capacity Max, la radio reoit la transmission selon lordre de priorit ci-dessous :

1 Appel durgence pour le groupe P1 2 Appel durgence pour le groupe P2 3 Appel durgence pour les groupes non prioritaires dans la liste de groupes de rception 4 Tous les appels 5 Appel de groupe P1 6 Appel de groupe P2 7 Groupes non prioritaires dans la liste de groupe de rception Consultez la section Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels la page 121 pour en savoir plus sur la faon dajouter, de retirer ou de modifier la priorit pour les groupes dans la liste de balayage. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Cette fonction est programme par ladministrateur de systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.10.5.1 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels Dans le menu Balayage de groupe, vous pouvez afficher ou modifier la priorit d'un groupe. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir ou modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 121 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La priorit est indique par l'icne Priorit 1 ou Priorit 2 ct du groupe. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier les priorits. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au niveau de priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si un autre groupe a t attribu en priorit 1 ou priorit 2, vous pouvez choisir d'craser la priorit. Lorsque l'cran affiche Remplacer?, appuyez sur Oui pour remplacer. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran prcdent. L'icne de priorit s'affiche ct du groupe d'appels. 4.10.6 Affiliation de groupes multiples Votre radio peut tre configure pour comprendre un maximum de sept groupes un site. Des 16 groupes dans la liste de groupe de rception, jusqu sept groupes peuvent tre attribus titre de laffiliation de groupe. Le groupe slectionn et la priorit des groupes de conversation sont automatiquement affilis. 4.10.6.1 Ajout d'affiliation de groupe ou sur pour les options suivantes :

Non pour retourner l'tape prcdente. Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter une affiliation de groupe. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 122 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir ou modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'tat d'affiliation est affich dans Afficher/

modifier la liste. L'cran affiche l'alias ou de l'ID du groupe slectionn. ct de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modif. affiliation. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque Activ est slectionn, de l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. apparat ct Si l'affiliation est russie, l'cran affiche ou l'ID de groupe. ct de l'alias Si l'affiliation n'est pas russie, ou l'ID de groupe. demeure ct de l'alias AVIS:

La radio affiche le message Liste pleine quand un maximum de sept groupes est slectionn pour l'affiliation dans la liste de balayage. Pour slectionner un nouveau groupe pour l'affiliation, supprimer un groupe associ pour faire place la nouvelle. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe la page 124. 123 Franais (Canada) 4.10.6.2 Suppression de l'affiliation de groupe Lorsque la liste d'affiliations est pleine et que vous souhaitez slectionner un nouveau groupe pour l'affiliation, supprimer un groupe dj associ pour faire place la nouvelle. Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer une affiliation de groupe. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 6 L'tat d'affiliation est affich dans Afficher/

modifier la liste. L'cran affiche l'alias ou de l'ID du groupe slectionn. ct de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modif. affiliation. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque Dsactiv est slectionn, ct de l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. apparat Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir ou modifier la liste. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 4.10.7 TalkBack (rponse) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la La fonction Talkback vous permet de rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage. Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage d'appel, le fonctionnement de la radio dpendra de l'activation ou de la dsactivation 1 2 3 4 124 de l'option Talkback pendant la programmation de la radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.10.8 Bluetooth La fonction Talkback est dsactive La radio abandonne l'appel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien d'appel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal d'accueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le balayage de groupe aprs que le dlai d'attente du balayage soit coul. La fonction Talback est active Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de l'appel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. AVIS:

Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui n'est pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que l'appel se termine, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. Franais (Canada) Cette fonctionnalit vous permet dutiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par lintermdiaire dune connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts lemploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. Cest--

dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et laccessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et lappareil Bluetooth ( moins de 10 m lun de lautre) afin de rtablir la rception. La fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Par exemple, un 125 Franais (Canada) scanneur, un appareil capteur et un appareil PTT seulement (POD). Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel dutilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur lensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes dappareil Bluetooth est efface. 4.10.8.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mon tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche Activ et Arrt. Ltat actuel est indiqu par licne

. 4 Effectuez lune des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.8.2 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 1 2 126 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Connecter. 5 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. L'cran affiche le message Connexion

<appareil>. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. L'cran affiche ct de l'appareil slectionn. AVIS:

Si un code NIP est ncessaire, voir la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214. 127 Appuyez sur jusqu' Recherche pour trouver des appareils disponibles. Appuyez ou En cas d'chec :

sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. Franais (Canada) 4.10.8.3 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth en mode dtection. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. L'cran affiche ct de l'appareil slectionn. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.8.4 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Me chercher. pour effectuer la slection. Votre Appuyez sur radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres appareils Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

128 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dconnecter. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Dconnexion de

<appareil>. AVIS:

Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Attendez la confirmation. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> dconnect et l'icne Bluetooth connect disparat. Le disparat ct du de l'appareil connect. 4.10.8.5 Franais (Canada) Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers radio. vers Bluetooth. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Rout. audio 4.10.8.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appareil sur votre radio. 129 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficher les Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 5 4.10.8.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif 4.10.8.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de contrler la valeur du gain du microphone de l'appareil Bluetooth connect. 1 2 3 4 5 130 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Localisation lintrieur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Gain mic. BT. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. Appuyez jusqu'au type de gain du ou sur modifier les valeurs ici. pour effectuer la slection. Vous pouvez Appuyez sur ou pour augmenter ou AVIS:

La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. La fonction Localisation interne est utilise pour assurer le suivi de lemplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. 4.10.9.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur diminuer les valeurs. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. 1 2 3 4 5 4.10.9 Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 131 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. d. Appuyez sur l'intrieur. pour activer le positionnement programme. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 132 a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 4.10.9.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. 4.10.10 Rglages multisite Ces fonctions s'appliquent lorsque le canal courant de la radio est configur pour un systme Capacity Max. 133 Franais (Canada) 4.10.10.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Si la radio trouve un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si la radio choue trouver un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 4.10.10.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

134 4.10.10.3 Accs la liste de sites voisins Cette fonction permet lutilisateur de vrifier la liste des sites adjacents du site daccueil actuel. Suivez la procdure pour accder la liste des sites voisins :

1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur ou pour voir les sites voisins. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal daccueil en sourdine. Lcran affiche HCR en sourdine. 4.10.11 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet dmettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active lorsque la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain laps de temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :

La tonalit de Rappel de canal daccueil et lannonce sonore retentissent. Lcran affiche Non canal daccueil. 4.10.11.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. 4.10.11.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias du canal et la deuxime, Nouv. canal acc.. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 135 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Canal Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Si la fonction est amorce, le voyant DEL vert clignote une fois sur la radio cible. Cette fonction s'arrte automatiquement aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. d'accueil. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.10.12.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias du nouveau canal d'accueil. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour L'cran affiche slectionn. ct de l'alias de canal d'accueil distance. 2 Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4.10.12 coute distance Cette fonction est utilise pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible avec un alias ou un ID d'abonn. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. 136 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute Moniteur. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.12.2 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la liste de contacts de la radio. Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' coute distance Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 137 Franais (Canada) L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.12.3 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 138 3 4 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' coute distance Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) de diffusion, appel gnral de site, appel gnral multisite, appel PC ou appel de rpartition. Les appels PC et les appels console rpartiteur sont des appels de donnes. Ils ne sont disponibles quavec les applications. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous la documentation sur les applications de donnes. Le menu Contacts vous permet dattribuer chaque entre une ou plusieurs touches numriques programmables sur un microphone clavier. Si une touche numrique est attribue une entre, votre radio peut excuter la composition rapide de lentre. AVIS:

Un crochet prcde chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le crochet prcde le mot Vide, aucune touche numrique na t attribue lentre. Chaque entre des contacts affiche les renseignements suivants :

4.10.13 Rglages des contacts La fonction Contacts constitue le carnet dadresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. Les entres sont tries alphabtiquement. Chaque entre, selon le contexte, correspond diffrents types dappels : Appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel Type dappel Alias dappel ID dappel 139 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si la fonction Cryptage est active sur un canal, vous pouvez passer des appels de groupe, individuels, gnraux ou tlphoniques crypts sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. 4.10.13.1 Association d'une entre une touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour associer des entres aux touches numriques programmables de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 140 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Touche programmable. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la touche numrique voulue n'a t attribue une entre, appuyez sur ou jusqu' la touche numrique voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si la touche numrique voulue a t attribue une entre, l'cran affiche La cl est dj affect et puis, la premire ligne de texte affiche Remplacer?. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et l'cran affiche Contact enregistr et un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur revenir l'cran prcdent. ou jusqu' Non pour prcde Diffrentes touches numriques peuvent tre attribues chaque entre. Le signe chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si prcde Vide, la touche numrique n'est le signe pas attribue. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 4.10.13.2 Dissociation d'une entre et de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure pour dissocier les entres des touches numriques programmables de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) Appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Passez tape 4. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Touche programmable. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Vide. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de texte affiche Supprimer de toutes les touches. 2 3 4 5 141 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Franais (Canada) sur pour effectuer la slection. AVIS:

Lorsqu'une entre est supprime, l'association entre l'entre et les touches numriques programmes est supprime. Une tonalit de russite retentit. Lcran affiche le message Contact enregistr. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 4.10.13.3 Ajout d'un nouveau contact Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter de nouveaux contacts sur votre radio. 6 1 142 2 3 4 Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Nouveau contact. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur type de contact, soit Contact Radio, soit Contact pour slectionner le ou tl. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrer le numro du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Entrer le nom du contact l'aide du clavier et Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. appuyez sur pour continuer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 Une tonalit de russite retentit.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 4.10.14 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Cette fonction vous permet de configurer des sonneries d'appel ou de message texte. 4.10.14.1 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels privs Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Appel indiv. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 143 Appuyez sur ou jusqu la sonnerie Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tonalits/

Franais (Canada) voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, s'affiche plus ct de Activ. apparat ct ne 4.10.14.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des messages textes Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 7 1 2 3 144 4 5 6 7 Alertes. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Message texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu la sonnerie voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Lcran affiche slectionne. pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie Franais (Canada) 4.10.14.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Aver. dappel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu la sonnerie 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Lcran affiche slectionne. pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie 4.10.14.4 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des appels slectifs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 145 5 6 7 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 146 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appel slectif. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. 7 1 2 voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie 4.10.14.5 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel d'tat de tlmtrie avec message texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la prdfinies lorsque vous recevez un appel priv, un avertissement dappel ou un message texte de la part dun contact particulier.La radio fait entendre chaque style de sonnerie lorsque vous parcourez la liste. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tlmtrie. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.14.6 Attribuer des styles de sonneries Vous pouvez programmer votre radio pour quelle mette une sonnerie particulire parmi les onze sonneries Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les entres sont tries alphabtiquement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 Modifier. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 147 La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne

. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Voir/

Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur menu Sonnerie Licne slectionne. 5 6 jusqu ce que lcran affiche le indique la tonalit actuellement Appuyez sur ou jusqu la tonalit voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Licne saffiche ct de celui slectionn. 4.10.14.7 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 4.10.15 148 Fonctions du Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi de tous les appels individuels que vous avez faits, reus et manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Les Alertes d'appels manqus peuvent tre incluses dans les journaux d'appels, selon la configuration du systme sur votre radio. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :

Stocker l'alias ou l'ID dans les contacts Supprimer un appel Supprimer tous les appels Afficher les dtails 4.10.15.1 Affichage des derniers appels 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Les listes offertes sont Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. jusqu la liste voulue. ou Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche lentre la plus rcente. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur ou pour voir la liste. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 5 Vous pouvez lancer un Appel individuel avec lalias ou lID affich lcran en appuyant sur la touche PTT. 4.10.15.2 Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour stocker les alias ou les ID de la liste d'appels sur votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Stocker. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 149 Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez galement enregistrer un ID sans un alias. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche Liste vide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer l'entre?. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.15.3 Suppression des appels de la liste dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des appels de la liste d'appel. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si la liste est vide :

Une tonalit retentit. 150 4.10.15.4 Suppression d'un appel gnral de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les appels de la liste d'appel. 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui pour supprimer toutes les entres. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.15.5 Affichage des dtails de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des dtails de la liste d'appels sur la radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 151 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficher les dtails. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche les dtails. pour effectuer la 4.10.16 Fonction Avis dappel Lenvoi dun avertissement dappel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous 152 souhaitez quil vous rappelle lorsquil lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est offerte uniquement pour les alias ou les ID dabonn et est accessible par le menu Contacts, la numrotation manuelle ou la touche daccs direct programme. En mode Capacity Max, la fonction Avertissement dappel permet un utilisateur radio ou un rpartiteur denvoyer une alerte un autre utilisateur radio lui demandant de rappeler lutilisateur radio qui a lanc lalerte lorsquil est disponible. La communication vocale nest pas concerne par cette fonction. La Fonction Avertissement dappel peut tre configure par le fournisseur ou par ladministrateur systme de deux manires :

La radio est configure pour permettre lutilisateur dappuyer sur le bouton PTT pour rpondre directement au lanceur dappel en effectuant un appel priv. La radio est configure pour permettre lutilisateur dappuyer sur le bouton PTT et de poursuivre avec une autre communication de groupe. Appuyer sur le bouton PTT lors de lentre de lavertissement dappel ne permettra pas lutilisateur de rpondre au lanceur dappel. Lutilisateur doit naviguer sur loption Journal des appels manqus dans le menu Journal dappels et rpondre lavertissement dappel partir de l. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Franais (Canada) Un appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission (OACSU) permet lutilisateur de rpondre immdiatement, tandis que lutilisateur doit accuser rception dun appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale

(FOACSU). Par consquent, il est recommand dutiliser la fonction Avis dappel pour les appels de type OACSU. Voir Appel priv la page 89. 4.10.16.1 Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche le message Avis d'appel et l'alias ou lID de l'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. 4.10.16.2 Avis dappels faits laide de la liste de contacts 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 153 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Avert. dappel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Lcran affiche Avert. dappel ainsi que lalias ou lID dabonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 4.10.16.3 Rponse un avertissement dappel Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. 154 L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 217 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 148. 4.10.17 Alias dappelant dynamique Cette fonction vous permet de modifier dynamiquement un alias dappelant partir du panneau avant de la radio. AVIS:

Un microphone clavier est requis pour excuter cette fonction. Lors dun appel, la radio rceptrice affiche lalias de lappelant de la radio mettrice. La liste des alias dappelants peut stocker jusqu 500 alias de radios mettrices. Vous pouvez afficher ou faire des appels privs partir de la liste des alias dappelants. Lorsque vous teignez votre radio, lhistorique des alias dappelants rcepteurs est supprim de la liste des alias. 4.10.17.1 Affichage de la liste des alias dappelants Vous pouvez accder la liste des alias dappelants pour afficher les dtails de lalias metteur. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Alias dappelants. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 3 4 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Afficher les dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.10.17.2 Lancement dun appel priv partir de la liste dalias dappelants Vous pouvez accder la liste des alias dappelants pour lancer un appel priv. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Alias dappelants. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 155 Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur lappelant souhait.>

ou jusqu <lalias de Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. 4 Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. 4.10.18 Mode muet Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche licne Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. 4.10.18.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la 4.10.18.1 156 Franais (Canada) radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. 5 Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4.10.18.3 Quitter le mode muet Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. 157 Franais (Canada) parleur est rtabli. arrte. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf l'appui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons :

AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. Appui bref Appui long De 0,05 0,75 seconde. De 1,00 3,75 secondes. 4.10.19 Fonctionnement durgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. En mode Capacity Max, la radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme d'urgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme d'urgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Lorsqu'une alarme d'urgence est reue, le destinataire peut choisir de supprimer l'alarme et quitter la liste des alarmes, ou il peut rpondre une alarme d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton PTT et la transmission voix sans urgence. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. AVIS:

Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :

Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel 158 Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal Envoi d'alarmes durgence De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :

Rgulier Silencieux La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. AVIS:

Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. 4.10.19.1 Franais (Canada) Cette fonction vous permet denvoyer une alarme durgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication dalerte sur un groupe de radios. Suivez la procdure denvoi dalarmes durgence sur votre radio. Votre radio naffiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode durgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Vous voyez lun des rsultats suivants :

Lcran affiche le message Alarmes Tx et lalias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Licne Urgence saffiche. 159 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit de recherche durgence peut tre programme par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lcran affiche le message Alarme envoye En cas dchec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :

Une tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche le message chec de lalarme. La radio quitte le mode dalarme durgence et revient lcran daccueil. AVIS:

Lorsque la radio est configure pour une alarme durgence seulement, le processus durgence consiste uniquement lenvoi de lalarme durgence. Lurgence se termine lorsquun accus de rception est reu du systme ou lorsque les tentatives daccs au canal sont puises. Aucun appel vocal nest associ lenvoi dune alarme durgence lorsque la radio fonctionne en mode Alarme durgence seulement. 4.10.19.2 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet denvoyer une alarme durgence avec un appel un groupe de radios ou un rpartiteur. Lorsquune infrastructure du groupe accuse rception de lalarme durgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal durgence programm. 160 La radio doit tre configure avec pour lalarme et lappel durgence pour effectuer un appel durgence aprs le processus dalarme. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Lcran affiche le message Alarme Tx et lalias de destination. Licne Urgence apparat.Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et sarrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode durgence. Si un accus de rception de lalarme durgence est reu :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lcran affiche le message Alarme envoye Franais (Canada) Votre radio passe en mode dappel durgence lorsque lcran affiche le message Urgence et lalias du groupe de destination. Si un accus de rception de lalarme durgence nest pas reu :

Toutes les tentatives sont puises. Une tonalit grave retentit. Lcran affiche le message chec de lalarme. La radio quitte alors le mode dalarme durgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour lancer une transmission vocale. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.Lcran affiche licne Appel de groupe. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 161 Franais (Canada) 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lcran affiche lalias de lappelant et lalias de groupe. 5 Pour prendre lappel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. 6 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode durgence. La radio revient lcran daccueil. 162 AVIS:

Selon la configuration de votre radio, vous entendrez peut-tre une tonalit dautorisation de parler. Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut vous fournir plus dinformation sur la faon dont votre radio a t programme pour les urgences. Linitiateur de lappel durgence peut appuyer sur la touche programme fin lappel durgence en cours. La radio revient un tat dattente dappel, mais lcran dappel durgence reste ouvert. pour mettre 4.10.19.3 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:

Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. Vous voyez un des rsultats suivants :

L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgram Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Licne Urgence saffiche. 163 Franais (Canada) 2 Lorsque lcran affiche le message Alarme envoye, parlez clairement dans le micro. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :

Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre microphone branch et rception dappels arrive son terme. Aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. 3 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode d'urgence. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. 4.10.19.4 Rception dune alarme durgence La radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme durgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme durgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir et voir des alertes durgence sur votre radio. 164 Lorsque vous recevez une alarme durgence :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Lcran affiche la liste des alarmes durgence, lalias ou lID du groupe dappels durgence et lID ou lalias de la radio lorigine de la transmission. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour afficher lalarme. Appuyez sur et les dtails de lentre dans la liste des alarmes. pour afficher les options daction Appuyez sur liste des alarmes. et slectionnez Oui pour quitter la La radio revient lcran daccueil avec une icne durgence affiche dans le haut, indiquant une alarme durgence non rsolue. Licne durgence disparat une fois que lentre dans la liste des alarmes est supprime. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Slectionnez Liste des alarmes pour consulter de nouveau la liste des alarmes. 6 La tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL rouge clignote jusqu ce que vous quittiez le mode durgence. Cependant, la tonalit peut tre coupe. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour appeler le groupe de radios pour lequel une alarme durgence a t mise. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche programmable. 4.10.19.5 Rponse une alarme durgence Lorsqu'une alarme d'urgence est reue, le destinataire peut choisir de supprimer l'alarme et quitter la liste des alarmes, ou il peut rpondre une alarme d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton PTT et la transmission voix sans urgence. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre une alarme d'urgence partir de votre radio. 1 Si l'indication d'alarme d'urgence est active, la liste des alarmes d'urgence s'affiche lorsque la radio Franais (Canada) reoit une alarme d'urgence. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. 2 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour transmettre un message vocal sans urgence au groupe cibl par l'alarme d'urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :

Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. 165 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche l'icne Appel d'urgence, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. AVIS:

Si l'indication d'appel d'urgence n'est pas active, l'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. 4.10.19.6 Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel d'urgence :

La tonalit d'appel d'urgence retentit si l'indication d'appel d'urgence et la tonalit de dchiffrement d'appel d'urgence sont actives. La tonalit d'appel d'urgence ne retentira pas si seulement que l'indication d'appel d'urgence est active. 166 L'icne Appel d'urgence s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. La ligne de texte affiche l'ID ou l'alias du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :

Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel d'urgence, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. AVIS:

Si l'indication d'appel d'urgence n'est pas active, l'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe d'appels d'urgence et l'ID ou l'alias de la radio l'origine de la transmission. 4.10.19.7 Quitter le mode durgence Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. dsactiv. Votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

La tonalit a cess. Le voyant DEL rouge sest teint. Lorsquune confirmation est reue, laffichage de la radio mettrice indique Succs annul. urg. Si aucune confirmation nest reue, lcran affiche chec annul urg.. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si la configuration dannulation durgence est active sur la radio mettrice, lalarme durgence de la radio rceptrice cessera et ltat sera ajout la liste des alarmes de la radio rceptrice. 4.10.20 Message d'tat Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur d'envoyer des messages d'tat d'autres radios. La liste d'tats rapides est configure dans le CPS-RM et comprend un maximum de 99 tats. Un message texte peut comporter au maximum 16 caractres. AVIS:

Chaque tat a une valeur numrique correspondante allant de 0 99. Un alias peut tre spcifi pour chaque tat pour plus de commodit. 167 Franais (Canada) 4.10.20.1 Envoi de messages dtat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour envoyer un message d'tat. 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL steint. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. l'cran tat rapide. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir L'cran affiche ct du message d'tat envoy. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez En cas d'chec :

sur pour effectuer la slection. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL steint. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat rapide. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. l'cran tat rapide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 168 Franais (Canada) 4.10.20.2 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la touche programmable. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Message d'tat. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur La liste de contacts est affiche. pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. L'cran affiche ct du message d'tat envoy. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. 4.10.20.3 Envoi d'un message d'tat en utilisant la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 169 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID l'cran tat rapide. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 d'abonn ou de groupe voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. 170 4.10.20.4 Envoi de message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'tat l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. l'cran tat rapide. L'cran affiche ct du message d'tat envoy. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 5 Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn ou du groupe et appuyez sur pour continuer. 4.10.20.5 Affichage des messages d'tat Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour voir des messages d'tat. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 7 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche ct du message d'tat envoy. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le contenu du message d'tat est affich l'utilisateur radio. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran tat rapide. Les messages d'tat reus peuvent galement tre consults en accdant la liste de notification. Pour obtenir 1 2 3 4 171 Franais (Canada) plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Liste de notifications la page 217. 4.10.20.6 Rponse des messages d'tat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour rpondre aux messages d'tat. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 6 7 Le contenu de l'tat est affich. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez En cas de russite :

sur pour effectuer la slection. Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. L'cran affiche ct du message d'tat envoy. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL s'teint. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. 1 2 3 4 172 4.10.20.7 Suppression d'un message d'tat Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer un message d'tat de la radio. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran Bote de rception. 4.10.20.8 Suppression de tous les messages d'tat Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages d'tat de la radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message d'tat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Le contenu de l'tat est affich. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6 7 1 2 173 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. L'cran affiche Liste vide. 4.10.21 Messagerie texte 4.10.21.1 Messages texte Les messages texte sont enregistrs de la bote de rception et classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. Vous pouvez revenir lcran daccueil tout moment en maintenant la Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est touche enfonce. 174 4.10.21.1.1 Affichage des messages texte 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bote rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

Lcran affiche Liste vide. Une sonnerie se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. 4 1 2 3 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusquau message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne dobjet pourrait safficher si le message provient dune application de courriel. 4.10.21.1.2 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie Suivez la procdure permettant d'afficher un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie partir de la bote de rception. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 175 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie. L'cran affiche Tlmtrie : <Status Text Message>. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir 4.10.21.1.3 Rponse des messages texte Lorsque vous recevez un message texte :

Lcran affiche la liste de notification comprenant lalias ou lID de lexpditeur. Lcran affiche licne Message. 4 5 176 AVIS:

La radio quitte lcran dalerte de message texte et achemine un Appel individuel ou de groupe lexpditeur du message si le bouton PTT est enfonc. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Lire. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur Lcran affiche le message texte. La ligne dobjet pourrait safficher si le message provient dune application de courriel. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Lire plus tard. Appuyez sur slection. La radio revient lcran affich prcdant la rception du message texte. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. 4.10.21.1.4 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte par messages texte rapides partir de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

texte. Passez l'tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 7 rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rponse rapide. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 177 Appuyez sur la touche programme Message Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. Franais (Canada) 8 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 9 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Renvoi des messages texte Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :

Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour renvoyer le mme message En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. 4.10.21.1.5 178 4.10.21.1.6 Transfre des messages texte Depuis lcran doption Renvoyer :

1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Transfrer et appuyez sur un autre abonn ou un alias de groupe ou un ID. pour envoyer le mme message Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement slectionner manuellement ladresse de la radio cible

(consultez la section Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle la page 497). 4.10.21.1.7 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Transfrer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID dabonn ou de groupe. pour envoyer le mme message 179 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Lcran affiche Numro de la radio :. 3 4 Modification de messages texte Slectionnez Modifier pour modifier le message. AVIS:

Si le message comporte une ligne d'objet (s'il a t envoy partir d'une application de courriel), il est impossible de la modifier. Entrez lID de labonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour 1 Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.21.1.8 180 2 Utilisez les touches du clavier pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur ou pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres inutiles. Franais (Canada) Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 3 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur

. Rdaction de messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rdiger des messages texte sur la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message 4 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer, Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. puis appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Enregistrer, puis appuyez sur enregistrer le message dans le dossier Brouillons. pour Appuyez sur pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour choisir entre la suppression du message ou son enregistrement dans le dossier Brouillons. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Composer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Un curseur clignotant apparat. 4 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une 4.10.21.1.9 181 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 5 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur

. Envoi de messages texte Supposons que vous avez rcemment crit ou enregistr un message texte. Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu lalias ou lID voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Num. Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier, supprimer ou enregistrer le

. Appuyez sur message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur

. pour effectuer la manuelle. Appuyez sur slection.Entrez lID dabonn. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez lalias ou lID dabonn. Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. 4.10.21.1.10 182 Lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message Le message est dplac dans le dossier Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit faible retentit. Lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Messages envoys. denvoi. Le message est marqu avec une icne chec AVIS:

Pour un nouveau message texte crit, la radio vous renvoie lcran doption Renvoyer. 4.10.21.1.11 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bote rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne dobjet pourrait safficher si le message provient dune application de courriel. 183 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bote Appuyez sur ou jusqu Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Lcran revient la bote de rception. rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. 4.10.21.1.12 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 184 4.10.21.2 Messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Vous pouvez renvoyer, transfrer, modifier ou supprimer un message texte envoy. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne Franais (Canada) peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en appuyant longuement sur la touche

. AVIS:

Si le type de canal (p. ex. numrique conventionnel, Capacity Plus) ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement modifier, transfrer ou supprimer un message envoy. 4.10.21.2.1 Affichage des messages texte envoys 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 185 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages envoys. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :

Lcran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit grave se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message 2 Vous pouvez soit renvoyer ou transfrer le message texte envoy. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-

dessous :

pour Renvoyer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pour Transfrer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 Attendez la confirmation. Licne qui saffiche dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran indique le statut du message. Voir Icnes des lments envoys. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.21.2.2 Envoi de messages texte envoys Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :

Appuyez sur

. 1 186 La radio passe lcran doption Renvoyer. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 178. Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys. Franais (Canada) 4.10.21.2.3 Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :

Appuyez sur

. 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.21.2.4 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages envoys. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. 187 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout ou chang de mode, votre message est automatiquement enregistr dans les brouillons. supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Le message texte le plus rcent figure toujours en haut de la liste des brouillons. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.21.3 Messages texte enregistrs Vous pouvez enregistrer un message texte afin de l'envoyer plus tard. 2 Si l'cran de rdaction ou de modification de message se ferme pendant que vous rdigez ou modifiez un message texte, par exemple si vous avez appuy sur le bouton PTT 188 Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les 10 derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. 4.10.21.3.1 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Brouillons. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur dune Appuyez sur dune espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez sur inutiles. 4.10.21.3.2 Modification de messages texte enregistrs Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez

. sur

. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

3 4 2 Appuyez sur or to Modifier. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Un curseur clignotant apparat. 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Envoyer. Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir entre supprimer ou enregistrer le message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 189 Franais (Canada) 4.10.21.3.3 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Slectionnez pour supprimer le message texte. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. 4.10.21.4 Message texte rapide Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Brouillons. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 50 messages texte rapides selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. 4.10.21.4.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Passez tape 6. 2 3 4 190 Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Texte rapide. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusquau texte rapide voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le destinataire et envoyer le message. Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La radio passe lcran doption Renvoyer. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 178. 4.10.22 Configuration de saisie de texte Votre radio vous permet de configurer diffrents textes. Vous pouvez configurer les paramtres suivants pour la saisie de texte dans votre radio :

Prdiction de texte Mot correct Majuscule en dbut de phrase Mes mots Votre radio prend en charge les mthodes de saisie de texte suivantes :

191 Franais (Canada) Chiffres Symboles Frappe prdictive ou multiple Langue (si programme) AVIS:

Appuyez sur l'cran prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche en tout temps pour revenir pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. 4.10.22.1 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct Cette option fournit d'autres choix de mots quand le mot entr dans l'diteur de texte n'est pas reconnu par le dictionnaire intgr. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 192 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur pour activer la correction orthographique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la correction orthographique. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. 4.10.22.2 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte Prdiction de texte : Votre radio peut apprendre des squences de mots courantes que vous entrez souvent. Elle peut alors prdire le prochain mot que vous dsirez utiliser aprs la saisie du premier mot d'une squence de mots courante dans l'diteur de texte. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Prdict. texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour activer la prdiction de texte. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le contrle dynamique de la distorsion du microphone. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus 193 Franais (Canada) 4.10.22.3 Majuscule en dbut de phrase 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cette fonction met automatiquement la premire lettre du premier mot en majuscule pour chaque nouvelle phrase. Appuyez sur fonction est active, pour activer Maj. phrase. Si la apparat ct d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver Maj. phrase. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus 4.10.22.4 Afficher des mots personnaliss Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Vous pouvez ajouter vos propres mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Votre radio contient une liste de ces mots. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Maj. Phrase. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 5 194 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.22.5 Modifier des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez modifier les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. 1 2 3 4 5 6 195 Franais (Canada) 7 8 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au mot voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 9 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 1 2 10 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.22.6 Ajouter des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter des mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 196 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur dune espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Ajouter mot. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. 8 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et lcran 7 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot affiche un bref avis dchec. personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur dune espace vers la gauche. 4.10.22.7 Supprimer un mot personnalis Vous pouvez supprimer les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. 197 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusquau mot voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 1 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 8 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :

Au message Supprimer lentre?, appuyez sur Entre supprime. pour slectionner Oui. Lcran affiche Appuyez sur ou jusqu Non. Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir lcran 4.10.22.8 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss Vous pouvez supprimer tous les mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 198 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Au message Supprimer lentre?, appuyez sur Ttes entres supprimes. pour slectionner Oui. Lcran affiche Appuyez sur ou jusqu Non pour revenir lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.23 Tickets de tche Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cette fonction permet votre radio de recevoir des messages du rpartiteur dressant la liste des tches effectuer. AVIS:

Cette fonction peut tre personnalise partir du logiciel de programmation client (CPS) selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Il y a deux dossiers qui contiennent diffrents tickets de tche :

199 Franais (Canada) Le dossier Mes tches Les tickets de tche personnaliss attribus votre signature dans lID utilisateur. Le dossier Tches partages Les tickets de tche partags attribus un groupe de personnes. Vous pouvez rpondre aux tickets de tche afin de les classer dans les dossiers de tickets de tche. Par dfaut, les dossiers sont Tous, Nouveaux, Commencs et Termins. Pour obtenir dix autres dossiers, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Les tickets de tche sont conservs mme lorsque la radio est mise hors tension, puis remise sous tension. Tous les tickets de tche sont situs dans le dossier Tous. Selon la faon dont votre radio est programme, les tickets de tche sont tris par leur niveau de priorit suivi par lheure de rception. Les nouveaux tickets de tche, ceux avec les plus rcents changements ltat et ceux avec la plus haute priorit sont affichs en premier. Lorsque le nombre maximum de tickets de tche est atteint, le prochain ticket de tche remplace automatiquement le dernier ticket de tche sur la radio. Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 100 ou 500 tickets de tche, selon le modle de radio. Pour obtenir des 200 renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio dtectera et annulera automatiquement les tickets de tche dupliqus qui possdent le mme ID de ticket de tche. Selon limportance du ticket de tche, le rpartiteur ajoute un niveau de priorit pour eux. Il existe trois niveaux de priorit : Priorit 1, Priorit 2 et Priorit 3. La Priorit 1 est la plus haute priorit et la Priorit 3 est la priorit la plus basse. Il existe galement des tickets de tche sans aucune priorit. Votre radio est mise jour conformment lorsque le rpartiteur effectue les changements suivants :

Modifier le contenu de tickets de tche. Ajouter ou modifier le niveau de priorit de tickets de Dplacer les tickets de tche dun dossier un autre tche. dossier. Annuler des tickets de tche. 4.10.23.1 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche Suivez la procdure d'accs au dossier Tickets de tche. Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant Cette fonction permet de se connecter et de se dconnecter du serveur distant en utilisant votre ID utilisateur. Appuyez sur ou pour voir les Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Connexion. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si vous tes dj connect, l'option Dconnexion s'affiche dans le menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 2 3 4 4.10.23.2 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

201 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.23.4 Rpondre des tickets de tche 4.10.23.3 Cration de tickets de tche Votre radio peut crer des tickets de tche, bass sur un modle de ticket de tche, et envoyer la liste des tches accomplir. Un logiciel de programmation CPS est ncessaire pour configurer le modle de ticket de tche. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des tickets de tche sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Crer un ticket. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 202 Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la touche numrique correspondante (de 1 9) jusqu'

Rponse rapide. 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.23.5 Franais (Canada) Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer le ticket de tche. 1 Utilisez le clavier numrique pour saisir le numro de salle requis. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat de salle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' loption voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 203 Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 3 Attendez la confirmation. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. En cas de russite :

Franais (Canada) 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

4.10.23.6 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec plus d'un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer les tickets de tche. 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' loption voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 204 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.23.7 Suppression de tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de 7 tche. Passez tape 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 8 Attendez la confirmation. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier Tous. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.23.8 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche Appuyez de nouveau sur de travail est affich. pendant que le bon Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

205 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.24 Confidentialit Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier Tous. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; l'activation de la fonction n'est cependant pas ncessaire la rception d'une telle transmission. Pendant qu'un canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue d'tre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. 2 3 4 5 206 Votre radio prend uniquement en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel ou une transmission de donnes crypts, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser la mme valeur et le mme ID de cl de cryptage amlior que la radio mettrice. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (pour le cryptage amlior). Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. 2 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.10.24.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 207 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Confidentialit. Appuyez sur la slection. pour effectuer 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. 4.10.25 208 Interrompre/Raviver Cette fonction vous permet dactiver ou dsactiver nimporte quelle radio du rseau. Par exemple, le dtaillant ou ladministrateur du systme pourrait vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de sen servir, puis la ractiver une fois quelle est de nouveau en votre possession. Une radio peut tre dsactive (interrompue) ou active

(raviv) soit par la console, soit par une commande initie par une autre radio. Une fois la radio dsactive, la radio met une tonalit dchec et lcran daccueil affiche Canal refus. Lorsquune radio est dsactive temporairement, elle ne peut plus demander ni recevoir de services initis par lutilisateur sur le systme qui a effectu la procdure dinterruption. Cependant, la radio peut basculer vers un autre systme. La radio continue denvoyer des rapports de position GNSS et peut tre surveille distance lorsquelle a t interrompue. AVIS:

Le dtaillant ou ladministrateur de systme peut dsactiver en permanence une radio. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Dsactivation permanente de la radio la page 213. 4.10.25.1 Interrompre une radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) 4.10.25.2 Interruption d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 209 Franais (Canada) 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 4.10.25.3 Dsactiver une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. 1 2 210 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :

Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) 4.10.25.4 Relance d'une radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la 4.10.25.5 Relance d'une radio l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. radio. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 211 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur ou pour activer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Rallumer une radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Activer la radio russie. L'cran affiche chec de l'activation de la radio. 4.10.25.6 212 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appel indiv.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :

5 6 Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur ou pour activer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche Activer la radio ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Activer la radio russie. Franais (Canada) Dsactivation permanente de la radio Cette fonction est une mesure de scurit amliore qui restreint laccs non autoris une radio. La dsactivation permanente de la radio rend la radio inutilisable. Par exemple, le dtaillant peut vouloir dsactiver une radio perdue ou vole pour en empcher toute utilisation non autorise. Lors de la mise sous tension, une radio dsactive de manire permanente affiche des services Radio arrte sur lcran pendant un moment pour indiquer ltat de dsactivation. AVIS:

La radio dsactive peut uniquement tre ractive dans un centre de rparation de Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. Cette fonction dclenche le mode durgence sil ny a aucun signe dactivit par lutilisateur, tel quappuyer sur une 213 L'cran affiche chec de l'activation de la radio. 4.10.27 Travailleur solitaire 4.10.26 Franais (Canada) quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. Si aucune activit nest dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit lutilisateur de lexpiration du dlai dinactivit au moyen dun signal sonore. Si vous ne rpondez pas avant que la minuterie de rappel expire, la radio active une condition durgence selon la programmation effectue par le dtaillant. Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe Allumez la radio. 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. a Utilisez le microphone clavier. b Pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque 4.10.28 Verrouillage par mot de passe Vous pouvez dfinir un mot de passe pour restreindre laccs votre radio. Chaque fois que vous allumez votre radio, vous tes invit entrer le mot de passe. Votre radio prend en charge lentre de mots de passe de quatre chiffres. Vous pouvez galement utiliser un microphone clavier pour entrer le mot de passe. Lorsquelle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. chiffre, appuyez sur ou

. Pour valider et passer au chiffre suivant, appuyez sur

. AVIS:

Lutilisation de linterrupteur au pied durgence permet daccder la radio sans entrer de mot de passe. 2 Appuyez sur pour confirmer le mot de passe. Si vous entrez le mot de passe correctement, la radio se met sous tension. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs les premire et seconde tentatives, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

4.10.28.1 214 Une tonalit continue se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Mot de passe erron. Rptez la procdure tape 1. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs la troisime tentative, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. Lcran affiche Mot de passe erron, puis Verrouillage radio. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. AVIS:

En tat de verrouillage, la radio ragit uniquement aux commandes du bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume et de la touche programme Rtroclairage. Attendez 15 minutes, le temps que le dlai de la minuterie dtat de verrouillage sachve, puis recommencez la procdure tape 1. AVIS:

Si vous teignez et rallumez votre radio, la minuterie de 15 minutes redmarre. 4.10.28.2 Franais (Canada) Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214 pour accder la radio. Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche Radio verrouille. Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214 pour accder la radio. 4.10.28.3 Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le verrouillage par mot de passe de votre radio. 215 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour saisir le mot de passe. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Allumer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Eteindre. verr.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Eteindre. 5 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis pour modifier la pour valider et passer au appuyez sur chiffre suivant. Vous entendrez une tonalit de russite chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un chiffre. 4.10.28.4 Changement de mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mot de passe sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 1 1 2 3 4 216 2 3 4 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe verr.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe actuel quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Changer le MdP. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 7 Entrez un nouveau mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. 8 Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite, l'cran affiche Mot de passe chang. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche Mots de passe incorrects. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 4.10.29 Liste de notifications Votre radio offre une liste de notification qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte, les messages de tlmtrie, les appels manqus et les avertissements d'appel. L'cran affiche l'icne Notification lorsque la liste de notification comprend au moins un vnement. 217 Franais (Canada) La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. Dans le cas de messages texte, d'appels manqus ou dvnements davertissement d'appel, le nombre maximum est de 30 messages texte et 10 appels manqus ou avertissements d'appel. Ce nombre maximum est fonction des capacits de liste de chaque fonction (tickets de tche, message texte ou appels manqus et avertissements d'appel). 4.10.29.1 Accs liste de notification 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'vnement voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir 4.10.30 Programmation par onde radio Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder la liste de notification sur votre radio. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :

Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. L'cran affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Notifications. Appuyez sur slection. Le canal devient occup. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez pour effectuer la sur le bouton PTT. Lorsque l'OTAP est termine, selon la configuration :

1 2 218 Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Actualisation Motorola Solutions Franais (Canada) Redmarrage. La radio redmarre en se mettant hors tension puis nouveau sous tension. Vous pouvez slectionner Redmarrer maintenant ou Reporter. Lorsque vous slectionnez Reporter, votre radio revient l'cran prcdent. L'cran affiche l'icne Retardateur OTAP jusqu' ce que le dmarrage automatique se produise. Lorsque votre radio se met sous tension aprs un redmarrage automatique :

En cas de russite, l'cran affiche MJ logiciel russie. logiciel. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec de la MJ Consultez Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel la page 255 pour connatre la version logicielle actuelle. 4.10.31 Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner l'un des modes de connexion de priphriques tiers :

PC et audio Accs aux donnes Tlmtrie Gnrique 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Type cble. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 219 Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au mode de connexion voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Cet cran montre le mode de connexion slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. 4.10.32 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu Cette fonction vous permet de prendre connaissance des valeurs de l'indicateur d'intensit du signal reu (RSSI). L'cran affiche l'icne RSSI dans le coin suprieur droit. Consultez la section Icnes d'affichage pour des dtails sur l'icne RSSI. l'cran d'accueil, en utilisant le microphone clavier navigation quadridirectionnelle, appuyez trois fois, puis appuyez immdiatement sur sur trois fois. Lcran affiche les valeurs RSSI courantes. Pour revenir l'cran d'accueil, appuyez et maintenez enfonc

. 4.10.33 Configuration du panneau avant Il est possible de personnaliser certains paramtres des fonctions de Configuration du panneau avant (FPC) afin d'amliorer l'utilisation de votre radio. 4.10.32.1 Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal) 4.10.33.1 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant Fixez le microphone clavier navigation quadridirectionnelle (numro de pice Motorola Solutions RMN5127_) votre radio. Vous pouvez revenir lcran daccueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 220 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Programmer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4.10.33.2 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC Utilisez les touches suivantes au besoin pendant la navigation dans les paramtres.

, Pour parcourir les options, augmenter ou rduire les valeurs ou naviguer verticalement. Pour slectionnez l'option ou entrer dans un sous-menu. Appuyez brivement pour revenir au menu prcdent ou quitter l'cran de slection. Maintenez cette touche enfonce pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Franais (Canada) 4.10.34 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. 221 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

Il est possible dactiver ou de dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance l'aide dune radio dsigne (voir Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle) la page 223 et Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe) la page 224). Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 222 4.10.34.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. 2 Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi On, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. d Appuyez sur pour activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi. Si le Wi-Fi est activ, lcran affiche message Activ. ct du Si le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, le ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 4.10.34.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande individuelle) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande individuelle (un un). AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. 1 Effectuez lune des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez longuement sur la touche programmable. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer lID, puis appuyez sur tape 3. pour slectionner. Passez Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 223 AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche Envoi russi. En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner 4 5 6 4.10.34.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. Franais (Canada) 4.10.34.3 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande de groupe) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande de groupe (un plusieurs). Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur ou lID dabonn voulu. pour slectionner lalias 1 2 3 224 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. 5 Appuyez sur ou pour se Connecter, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. de passe et appuyez sur

. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. 225 Franais (Canada) Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.10.34.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 4.10.34.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, 226 c. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Franais (Canada) Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez laction suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Actualiser, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio sactualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. 4.10.34.7 Ajout dun rseau Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Ajouter un rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. appuyez sur

. 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis 1 2 3 4 227 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou pour lOuvrir, puis sur Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 3 4 5 4.10.34.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour afficher les dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. 6 7 1 2 228 Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. 4.10.34.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Oui, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. 229 Franais (Canada) 4.10.35 Attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe (DGNA) L'attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe

(DGNA) est une fonction qui permet la console d'assigner et de retirer par onde radio un nouveau groupe de votre radio. Lorsque la console assigne la fonction DGNA la radio, celle-ci est alors en mode DGNA. Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <Alias de groupe DGNA> Assign momentanment avant de revenir l'cran d'accueil. L'icne DGNA s'affiche dans la barre d'tat. L'cran d'accueil affiche l'alias de groupe DGNA. Lorsque la console retire la fonction DGNA de la radio, elle est rassigne au groupe prcdent :

momentanment avant de revenir l'cran d'accueil. L'icne DGNA disparat de la barre d'tat. L'cran d'accueil affiche l'alias de groupe prcdent. 230 Selon la faon dont la radio est programme, vous pouvez voir, modifier et couter les canaux des listes de balayage dorigine ainsi que les groupes non DGNA. Lorsque la radio est en mode DGNA, appuyer sur le bouton PTT permet de communiquer seulement avec le groupe DGNA actuel. Pour communiquer avec le groupe non DGNA prcdent, programmez la touche daccs direct. Voir Effectuer un appel non DGNA la page 231. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.10.35.1 Effectuer un appel DGNA Lorsque votre radio est en mode DGNA, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour effectuer l'appel. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Une tonalit DGNA se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <Alias de groupe DGNA> Retir L'cran affiche l'icne et lalias de groupe DGNA. AVIS:

Si votre radio n'est pas en mode DGNA et que vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, elle met une tonalit indiquant une erreur. L'cran demeure inchang. 4.10.35.2 Effectuer un appel non DGNA Franais (Canada) 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT avant quune tonalit d'chec se fasse entendre pour que votre radio retourne l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:

Lorsque votre radio est l'cran d'accueil, appuyer sur la touche PTT lance un appel au groupe DGNA. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Lannonce vocale met le son dappel remplac par accs direct. 4.10.35.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel DGNA Lorsque vous recevez un appel DGNA :

Une tonalit DGNA se fait entendre. L'cran affiche <Alias de groupe> et Appuyez L'cran affiche l'icne et lalias de groupe DGNA ainsi sur PTT momentanment. que lalias de la radio. AVIS:

Si votre radio n'est pas en mode DGNA et que vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, elle met une tonalit dchec indiquant une erreur. L'cran demeure inchang. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 231 Franais (Canada) 4.11 Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 4.11.1 Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Haute Faible 4.11.1.1 232 Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Puissance. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Haut. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Haut. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Basse. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Basse. 6 Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir 4.11.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte d'urgence entrante Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur le bouton programm Sonneries/

Alertes. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Toutes Tnlts. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 233 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur les tonalits et tous les avertissements. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 4.11.3 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 1 2 234 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tonalits du clavier numrique. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur tonalits du clavier. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver les Si la fonction est active, apparat ct Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

d'Activ. Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Franais (Canada) 4.11.4 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes Cette fonction permet de configurer le niveau sonore des sonneries et des alertes de manire ce qu'il soit plus ou moins haut que celui de la voix. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes de votre radio. 4 5 6 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonneries et alertes. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cart Vol. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur compensation voulu. ou jusqu'au niveau de Une tonalit se fait entendre correspondant chaque niveau de compensation de volume. 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le niveau d'cart de volume est enregistr. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour quitter. Les changements sont supprims. 235 Franais (Canada) 4.11.5 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Autorisation de parler. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. pour activer ou dsactiver la L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.6 Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit de mise sous tension de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 6 1 1 2 3 4 236 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. ct de Activ. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sous tension. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur tonalit de mise sous tension. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver la Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Franais (Canada) Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 4.11.7 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte Vous pouvez personnaliser la tonalit d'alerte de message texte sur Temporaire ou Rptitive pour chaque entre dans la liste de contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les sonneries d'avis de messages de votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 237 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avis de message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode d'affichage. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Temporaire. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Temporaire. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rptitive. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Rptitive. 4.11.8 Changement des modes daffichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio entre le mode Jour ou mode Nuit au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mode d'affichage de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

238 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Franais (Canada) 4.11.9 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage Suivez la procdure de rgler la luminosit de l'affichage sur votre radio. La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Luminosit. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche une barre de progression. Appuyez sur pour augmenter ou rduire la luminosit de l'affichage. Appuyez sur ou 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Luminosit. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. pour effectuer la slection. La valeur du paramtre varie de 1 8. 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.10 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. 239 Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./

phares. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avert./

phares. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver 2 3 4 5 240 Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 4.11.11 Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les voyants DEL sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Indicateur Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. DEL. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. pour activer ou dsactiver le Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 5 Appuyez sur voyant DEL. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 4.11.12 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Diffusion publique. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur diffusion publique. pour activer ou dsactiver la Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 241 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) 4.11.13 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Diffusion publique externe. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur diffusion publique externe. pour activer ou dsactiver la Si la fonction est active, apparat ct 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.14 Activer ou dsactiver lcran dintroduction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction selon la procdure suivante. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4 5 1 2 3 242 Franais (Canada) Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. ct de Activ. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.15 Slection de la langue Suivez la procdure suivante pour choisir la langue de votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cran intro. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur d'introduction. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Langues. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 243 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la langue Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Type cble. voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct de la langue slectionne. Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne

. 4 5 4.11.16 Dterminer le type de cble Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.17 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. 5 1 2 3 244 4.11.18 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. 4.11.19 Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, lAnnonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre les fonctionnalits suivantes :

1 2 3 Canal actuel Zone actuelle Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de bouton programm Contenu des messages texte reus Contenu des fiches de travail reues Lindicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette fonction est particulirement utile lorsquil est difficile de lire le contenu affich lcran. 4.11.19.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 245 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Assistance parle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou pour n'importe laquelle des fonctions suivantes. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Rglage du dlai menu Vous pouvez rgler la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le dlai menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Voici les options disponibles :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Tout Messages Tickets de tche Canal Contrleur Touche de programmation L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. 4.11.20 246 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dlai Menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 1 2 4.11.21 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone numrique

(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme numrique. Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mic.CGA-N. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 247 Franais (Canada) 4.11.22 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. 2 3 4 AVIS:

Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Audio intelligent. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. 248 4.11.23 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. Franais (Canada) 5 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. Lcran affiche du message Activ. ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. Licne plus ct du message Activ. ne saffiche 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 4.11.24 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Rducteur de 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

bruit, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Vous pouvez galement utiliser les touches ou pour changer l'option slectionne. Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. 249 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Amlioration de la vibration. Appuyez sur la slection. pour effectuer Fort 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. 4.11.25 Ambiance audio Vous pouvez personnaliser l'ambiance audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Par dfaut Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Cette configuration active la suppression du bruit et augmente le volume du haut-parleur pour une utilisation dans un environnement bruyant. Groupe de travail Cette configuration permet d'activer la rduction du bruit et de dsactiver l'AGC pour utilisation lorsqu'un groupe de radios sont proximit les unes des autres. 2 3 4 250 4.11.25.1 Configuration de lambiance audio Suivez la procdure pour dfinir l'ambiance audio sur votre radio en fonction de votre environnement. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Choisissez Par dfaut pour activer les paramtres d'origine par dfaut. Choisissez Fort pour augmenter le volume lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement bruyant. Choisissez Groupe travail afin de rduire la rtroaction acoustique lors de l'utilisation de la radio en combinaison avec un groupe de radios qui sont proximit de l'autre. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4.11.26 Profils audio Vous pouvez personnaliser les profils audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ambiance Par dfaut audio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Niveau 1, niveau 2 et niveau 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les paramtres sont les suivants. Ces paramtres sont des profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive cause par le bruit qui est typique chez les adultes dans la quarantaine, la cinquantaine, la soixantaine ou plus. 251 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Amplification des frquences aigus, moyennes et basses 5 Ces paramtres sont prvus pour des sons plus tnus, ou nasillards, ou graves. 4.11.26.1 Configuration des profils audio Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les profils audio par dfaut de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Profils audio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 252 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour dsactiver le profil audio slectionn prcdemment et revenir aux paramtres par dfaut. Choisissez Niveau 1, Niveau 2 ou Niveau 3 pour les profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive due au bruit qui est habituelle pour les adultes de plus de 40 ans. Choisissez Ampli. aigus, Ampli. mdiums, ou Ampli. basses pour les profils audio qui s'alignent avec votre prfrence pour des sons plus mtalliques, plus nasillards ou plus profonds. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. 4.11.27 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 Effectuez une des tapes suivantes pour activer ou dsactiver le GNSS sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm GNSS. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Passez l'tape suivante. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

GNSS. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur GNSS. pour activer ou dsactiver le Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus 253 Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 4.11.28 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur diffrents paramtres. Les informations gnrales de votre radio sont les suivantes :

Alias et ID de la radio. Mise jour du logiciel. Informations du systme GNSS. Information sur le site. AVIS:

Appuyez sur pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. pour revenir 4.11.28.1 254 Vrification de lalias et lID de la radio 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Une tonalit de russite retentit. Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio pour revenir lcran prcdent. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 4 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mon ID. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Versions. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lalias de la radio saffiche sur la premire ligne de lcran. LID de la radio saffiche sur la deuxime ligne de lcran. L'cran affiche la version actuelle du micrologiciel et celle de la codeplug. 4.11.28.2 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. 4.11.28.3 Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel Affiche la date et lheure de la dernire mise jour logicielle effectue par lintermdiaire de la Programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) ou Wi-Fi. Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les informations de mise jour du logiciel de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 1 2 255 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Direction Vlocit Appuyez sur ou jusqu M. j. Satellites logicielle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Version Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) Lcran affiche la date et lheure de la dernire mise jour logicielle. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Le menu de mise jour logicielle est uniquement disponible aprs au moins une session OTAP ou Wi-Fi russie. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Programmation par onde radio la page 544. 4.11.28.4 Consulter les informations du GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info GNSS. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 Latitude Longitude Altitude 256 5 1 2 3 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' llment voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info site. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le nom du site actuel. 4.11.28.5 Affichage de linformation sur le site Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher le nom du site sur lequel se trouve actuellement votre radio. 4.11.29 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou pour Menu Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 257 4 1 2 3 Franais (Canada) saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. 4 Appuyez sur ou jusquau certificat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. AVIS:

Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. 258 Connect Plus Le mode Connect Plus est une solution ADF base sur la technologie DMR. Le mode Connect Plus utilise un canal de contrle rserv pour les requtes de canal et les attributions. 5.1 Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit les commandes radio supplmentaires disponibles pour l'utilisateur de la radio laide de moyens prprogramms tels que les touches programmables et les fonctions attribuables de la radio. 5.1.1 Bouton d'mission (PTT) Le bouton PTT situ sur le ct de la radio a deux fonctions principales :

Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Franais (Canada) Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel (voir Faire un appel radio la page 278). Si la tonalit d'autorisation est active, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. 5.1.2 Touches programmables Votre dtaillant peut programmer les touches pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur ces boutons :

Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appui bref Appui long Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. 259 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

La dure programme pour la pression d'un bouton peut s'appliquer tous les rglages et toutes les fonctions attribuables de la radio. Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 316 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 5.1.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Annulation de file d'attente occupe La radio quitte le mode Occup quand un appel non urgent de la file d'attente Occup est effectu. Les appels d'urgence, une fois qu'ils sont accepts dans la file d'attente Occup, ne peuvent pas tre annuls. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Contacts Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Urgence active/dsactive Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Avertisseur/phares Active ou dsactive la fonction d'avertisseurs et de phares. Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Audio intelligent Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Dtection Bluetooth 260 Num. manuelle Selon la programmation choisie, permet d'effectuer un appel individuel ou un appel tlphonique en entrant un ID d'abonn ou un numro de tlphone. Balayage Demande d'itinrance Demande de recherche d'un autre site. Accs direct Permet de lancer un appel de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Vrification de la radio Dtermine si une radio est active dans un systme. Permet d'activer une radio cible distance. Permet de dsactiver une radio cible distance. Activer la radio Dsactiver la radio coute distance Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Type de sonnerie d'avertissement Fournit un accs direct au rglage du type de sonnerie d'avertissement. Franais (Canada) Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsqu'elle est dsactive, la radio recherche d'autres sites en plus du site courant. Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Wi-Fi Zone Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. 261 Franais (Canada) 5.1.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Non attribu Indique que la fonction du bouton n'a pas encore t attribue. FRduction bruit Active ou dsactive la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Toutes les tonalits/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Luminosit du rtroclairage Rgle le niveau de luminosit. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Systme satellite de navigation mondial (GNSS) Permet d'activer ou dsactiver le systme de navigation par satellite. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 5.1.3 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus 5.1.3.1 Icnes daffichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes s'affichant l'cran de la radio. Indicateur de puissance de signal reu

(RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente lintensit du signal radio. Laffichage de quatre barres indique une intensit de signal maximale. Cette icne ne saffiche quen mode de rception. 262 Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance nest connect. Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. Licne demeure allume tant quun dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. Localisation intrieure disponible3 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Localisation intrieure non disponible3 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce Franais (Canada) que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Mode Muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-parleur est coup. Notification La liste de notifications contient des lments passer en revue. Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. Carte doption La fonction Carte doption est active. Absence de fonction de la carte doption La fonction Carte doption est dsactive. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. Niveau de puissance ou La radio est rgle Faible tension ou Haute puissance. 3 Applicable uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel 263 Franais (Canada) Fonction GNSS disponible Contact La fonction GPS/GNSS est active. Licne demeure allume tant que la rception dune position est disponible. Fonction GNSS non disponible/hors de porte La fonction GPS/GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. La fonction de balayage est active. Balayage Urgence Scurise La radio est en mode durgence. La fonction Cryptage est active. Non scurise Le contact radio est disponible. Journal des appels Journal des appels radio. Message Arrive d'un message entrant. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Vibration Le mode vibration est activ. Vibration et sonnerie La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Le mode vibration et sonnerie est activ. Itinrance de site Wi-Fi excellent4 La fonction ditinrance de site est active. Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. 264 Wi-Fi bon4 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen4 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Wi-Fi faible4 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. Wi-Fi non disponible4 Le signal Wi-Fi nest pas disponible. 5.1.3.2 Icnes d'appels Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes s'affichant l'cran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type d'ID. Appel individuel 4 Ne sapplique quaux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e Franais (Canada) Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel individuel est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'abonn. Appel de groupe/Appel gnral de site Cette icne s'affiche lorsqu'un appel de groupe ou un appel gnral de site est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel individuel Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel individuel en cours. Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique qu'un appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. 265 Franais (Canada) Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique l'alias (nom) ou l'ID (numro) de l'appel PC par Bluetooth. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact d'appel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais d'un serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. 5.1.3.3 Icnes de menu avanc Les icnes suivantes saffichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Case noire Indique que l'option slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-

menu. 5.1.3.4 Icnes de messages envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran dans le dossier Msges envoys. Russite de lenvoi Le message texte a t envoy. OU OU Case cocher (vide) Indique que l'option n'est pas slectionne. Case cocher (coche) Indique que l'option est slectionne. En cours Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. 266 Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID dabonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. OU Message personnel ou de groupe non lu Le message texte na pas t lu. chec de lenvoi Le message texte n'a pas t envoy. OU OU 5.1.3.5 Franais (Canada) Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque dcoute. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif PTT (messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement

(POD). 267 Franais (Canada) Appareil capteur Bluetooth Capteur dun appareil compatible Bluetooth, comme un capteur de gaz. met niveau un nouveau fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option. Clignoteme nt vert et jaune La radio reoit une alerte d'appel, a reu un message texte ou le balayage est activ et elle reoit de l'activit. Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. 5.1.3.6 Voyant lumineux Rouge clignotant La radio met alors que le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, reoit une transmission d'urgence ou n'a pas russi l'auto-vrification la mise sous tension, ou a quitt la zone de couverture si la radio est configure avec le systme ARTS (Auto-Range Transponder System). Mode Muet est activ. La radio reoit un transfert de fichier par radiocommunication (fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option, fichier de frquence rseau ou fichier de codeplug de carte d'option) ou la radio Rouge clignotemen t rapide 268 Jaune continu Clignoteme nt jaune double Jaune clignotant Clignoteme nt vert Clignoteme nt vert rapide La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio reoit une alerte d'appel ou le balayage est activ alors qu'elle est inactive (ne dsactive pas la sourdine pour toute activit). La radio est en train de s'allumer, de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio reoit un appel crypt. Vert continu La radio est s'allume ou transmet. 5.1.3.7 Tonalits d'avertissement Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. Tonalit priodique Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit rptitive Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec Tonalit temporaire Franais (Canada) de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Le signal sonore retentit une fois pendant une courte priode, selon les rglages de la radio. 5.1.3.8 Tonalits dalerte La fonction Tonalits d'alerte vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit 5.1.4 Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus Pour passer un mode non Connect Plus, vous devez changer de zone, si la programmation par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme le prvoit. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour 269 Franais (Canada) savoir si votre radio a t programme avec des zones non Connect Plus, et quelles fonctions sont disponibles lors de lutilisation dans des zones non Connect Plus. 5.2 Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus Cette section explique le fonctionnement gnral de la radio et les fonctions d'appel qui sont disponibles sur votre radio. 5.2.1 Slectionner un site Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Un site Connect Plus est dot dun contrleur de site et dun maximum de 15 rpteurs. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Connect Plus recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. Demande ditinrance Une demande d'itinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Si aucun site n'est disponible :

La radio affiche la recherche et l'alias du canal slectionn et poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est toujours disponible. AVIS:

Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Demande d'itinrance. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. L'cran affiche ID du site <Numro du site>. 5.2.1.1 270 Franais (Canada) 5.2.1.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. pour modifier la liste des sites autoriss et non autoriss. Si votre radio tente de s'inscrire sur un site non autoris, un bref message s'affiche pour indiquer : Site <numro donn> non autoris. La radio recherche alors un autre site rseau. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. 5.2.2 Slection d'une zone La radio peut tre programme pour un maximum de 16 zones Connect Plus, et chaque zone contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables sur le bouton de slection de canaux. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la Chaque position assignable du bouton peut tre utilise pour dmarrer l'un des types d'appels vocaux suivants :

radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. 5.2.1.3 Restriction de site Votre administrateur de systme radio Connect Plus est en mesure de dcider quels sites du rseau sont autoriss ou non. Il n'est pas ncessaire de reprogrammer votre radio Appel de groupe Appel multigroupe Appel gnral de site Appel individuel 1 Accdez la fonction Zone en effectuant les commandes suivantes :

271 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio Touche programme Slection de zone Menu de la radio tapes suivre Commande radio tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de zone. a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu Rpondre, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur ou

, puis faites dfiler jusqu' la zone requise. 3 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. 5.2.3 Utilisation de rseaux multiples Si votre radio a t programme pour utiliser plusieurs rseaux Connect Plus, vous pouvez slectionner un autre rseau en passant la zone Connect Plus attribue au rseau dsir. Ces attributions rseau--zone sont configures par votre dtaillant par le biais de la programmation de la radio. La zone slectionne est affiche et indique par l'icne

. 2 Slectionnez la zone requise. 272 Franais (Canada) 5.2.4 Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel multigroupe, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous changez la position du bouton de slection de canaux (pour une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le site Connect Plus. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'enregistrement qui a t programm pour la nouvelle position du bouton de slection de canal le nouveau type d'appel. Si vous slectionnez une position laquelle aucun type d'appel n'est attribu, votre radio met une tonalit continue et lcran affiche Non programm. tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non programm est slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. Rception et rponse un appel Une fois le canal, l'ID d'abonn ou le type d'appel affich, vous pouvez recevoir des appels et y rpondre. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. AVIS:

Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt . Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 338. Lorsque la zone requise est affiche (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. 5.2.5.1 Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre 5.2.5 Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t 273 Franais (Canada) pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Si vous recevez un appel de groupe ( partir de l'cran d'accueil), le voyant DEL clignote en vert.L'icne d'appel de groupe apparat dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. AVIS:

Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel de groupe, consultez la section Pour passer un appel de groupe la page 278. 5.2.5.2 Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Lorsque vous recevez un Appel individuel, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. Le message Appel indiv. et l'icne d'appel individuel s'affichent sur la deuxime ligne. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur de la radio. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 2 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 274 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel individuel, consultez la section Passer un appel individuel la page 279. 5.2.5.3 Rception d'un appel gnral Un appel gnral est un appel provenant d'une radio individuelle et transmis toutes les radios du site. On l'utilise surtout pour faire une annonce importante exigeant toute l'attention de l'utilisateur. Lors de la rception d'un appel gnral de site, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL clignote en vert. L'icne d'appel de groupe apparat dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. Appel gnral de site s'affiche sur la deuxime Franais (Canada) ligne de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Une fois que l'appel gnral est termin, la radio revient lcran o elle tait avant de recevoir lappel. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral de site. AVIS:

Voir Faire un appel gnral de site la page 280 pour savoir comment faire un appel gnral de site. La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les fonctions des touches programmes tant que l'appel est en cours. 5.2.5.4 Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel individuel entrant, l'icne d'appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche 275 Franais (Canada) dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne de texte affiche Appel tl. l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Appel tl. 1 Pour rpondre et parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 Appuyez longuement sur l'appel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 1 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer les chiffres et appuyez sur le bouton

. Appuyez sur 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace

* et # sur l'afficheur.

, suivi de dans les L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche les chiffres saisis. 5.2.5.4.1 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de 2 Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 276 Franais (Canada) 5.2.5.4.2 Composition surnumraire en direct lors d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant 5.2.5.5 Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Appel tl. Lorsque vous recevez un appel de Talkgroup, l'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel1 1 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et utilisez le clavier pour saisir les chiffres. Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche les chiffres de composition en direct. 5.2.5.6 Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant 2 Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. L'cran d'appel tlphonique s'affiche. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Lorsque vous recevez un appel multigroupe, l'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit. La premire ligne affiche Appel multigroupe. La radio dsactive la sourdine et la tonalit d'appel multigroupe entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 277 Franais (Canada) 5.2.6 Faire un appel radio Aprs avoir slectionn un canal, vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn ou de groupe l'aide des lments suivants :

Le bouton de slection de canaux. Une touche programme daccs direct La fonction daccs direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel vers un ID prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul ID une touche daccs direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. La liste de contacts (voir Rglages des contacts la page 303). AVIS:

La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que ce canal soit en mesure d'envoyer des transmissions cryptes. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 338. 278 5.2.6.1 Faire un appel l'aide du bouton slecteur de canal Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de passer diffrents types d'appels : Appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel gnral de site, appel multigroupe. 5.2.6.1.1 Pour passer un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 273. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le tmoin DEL sallume en vert continu. L'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias d'appel de groupe s'affiche sur la premire ligne de texte. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, la radio dsactive la sourdine et la rponse se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. L'icne d'appel de groupe, l'alias ou l'ID du groupe ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio l'origine de la transmission s'affichent l'cran. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. La radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. 5.2.6.1.2 Passer un appel individuel Bien que vous puissiez recevoir un appel individuel effectu par une radio individuelle autorise et y rpondre, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de passer un appel individuel. Franais (Canada) Si cette fonction n'a pas t active, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre lorsque vous tentez de faire un appel individuel en passant par la touche d'accs direct, ou le bouton de slection de canaux,. 1 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 273. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran.. 279 Franais (Canada) 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, . S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. Votre radio peut tre programme de manire faire une vrification de prsence radio avant dtablir lappel individuel. Si la radio cible nest pas disponible, une courte tonalit se fait entendre et un bref avis dchec saffiche lcran. 5.2.6.1.3 Faire un appel gnral de site Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre un appel tous les utilisateurs du site qui ne sont pas actuellement en communication pour un autre appel. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. 280 Les utilisateurs du canal ou du site ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral de site. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias de groupe Appel gnral de site en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 273. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel gnral de site. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5.2.6.1.4 Appel multigroupe Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre tous les utilisateurs de groupes multiples. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. AVIS:

Les utilisateurs des groupes ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel multigroupe. 1 Tournez le bouton de slection de canaux pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID multigroupe. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Franais (Canada) Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche AVIS:

Les boutons programmables doivent tre enfoncs partir de l'cran d'accueil. La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quUN SEUL alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID multigroupe. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 5.2.6.2 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 281 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'appel individuel. Passer un appel individuel 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Num. manuelle pour afficher l'cran de composition manuelle. L'cran affiche Numro :. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un ID priv ou un alias Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. dabonn. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. 3 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 5.2.6.3 Passer un appel au moyen de la touche programmable de composition manuelle Cette fonction permet lutilisateur radio de faire des appels privs l'aide de la touche programmable de composition manuelle. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. L'icne d'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5.2.6.3.1 282 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. 5.2.6.4 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant l'aide du bouton programmable de numrotation manuelle 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Num. manuelle pour afficher l'cran de composition manuelle. L'cran affiche Numro :. 2 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone et appuyez sur numro. pour passer l'appel vers ce Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace

* et # sur l'afficheur.

, suivi de En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Si un numro de tlphone incorrect est slectionn, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Autorisations invalides. Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. 3 Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. 283 Franais (Canada) Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 5.2.6.5 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant au moyen du menu du tlphone Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tlphone, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur manuelle. pour slectionner Numrotation La premire ligne de lcran affiche le Numro et la deuxime ligne affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 4 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone et appuyez sur numro. pour passer l'appel vers ce 1 2 3 284 Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace

* et # sur l'afficheur.

, suivi de En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Si un numro de tlphone incorrect est slectionn, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Autorisations invalides. Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 4 5.2.6.6 Faire un appel tlphonique individuel sortant partir des Contacts AVIS:

Si la numrotation manuelle du tlphone est dsactive dans MOTOTRBRO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, le No. tlphone ne s'affichera pas dans le menu. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Numro de tlphone, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour La premire ligne de lcran affiche le Numro et la deuxime ligne affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 Utilisez le clavier pour saisir un numro de tlphone et appuyez sur numro. pour passer l'appel vers ce Si le bouton PTT est enfonc, l'cran affiche un mini-

avis ngatif Appuyez sur OK pour envoyer et revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres dans les inutiles. Appuyez sur 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace

* et # sur l'afficheur.

, suivi de En cas de russite, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. 285 Franais (Canada) Si vous appuyez sur et qu'aucun numro de tlphone n'a t saisi, la radio fait entendre une tonalit dindication positive suivie d'une tonalit ngative. L'afficheur ne change pas. de l'cran. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche un mini-avis ngatif, Appel tl. chou, Ressource indisponible, ou Invalid Permissions (Autorisations invalides). 6 Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 5.2.6.7 Attente d'autorisation de canal lors d'un appel individuel sortant Lorsque vous passez un appel individuel, la premire ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone compos. Une fois l'appel connect, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit Appuyez longuement sur lappel. pour mettre fin La radio revient l'cran prcdent. 5.2.6.8 Composition surnumraire en mmoire tampon en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte sur l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. 1 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer les chiffres. 286 Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur pour mettre fin lappel. Franais (Canada) inutiles. Appuyez sur dans les 2 secondes, pour insrer une pause. Le P remplace

* et # sur l'afficheur.

, suivi de La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le texte Chiffres suppl. et la deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche les chiffres supplmentaires. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton

. Si le bouton PTT est enfonc, l'cran affiche un mini-

avis ngatif Appuyez sur OK pour envoyer et revient l'cran prcdent. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone avec les chiffres supplmentaires (composition surnumraire). 3 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Appuyez sur tlphonique. pour revenir l'cran d'appel 5.2.6.9 Composition surnumraire en direct en cours d'appel tlphonique individuel sortant Pendant l'appel, l'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte sur l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et utilisez le clavier pour saisir les chiffres. L'icne Appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel individuel s'affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran. La premire ligne de texte de l'cran affiche le numro de tlphone avec les chiffres supplmentaires (composition surnumraire). 287 pour mettre fin lorsque la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Franais (Canada) 2 Appuyez longuement sur lappel. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Fin. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche Appel tl. Lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. 5.3 Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. 5.3.1 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active par le CPS, la tonalit de rappel du canal daccueil et lavertissement sonore retentissent. De plus, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Non et la deuxime Canal daccueil de manire rpte 288 Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :

Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. 5.3.2 Plan de secours automatique Le plan de secours automatique est une fonction du systme qui permet de continuer effectuer et recevoir des appels non urgents dans le groupe de contacts slectionn sil se produit certains types de dfaillance dans le systme Connect Plus. Si une telle dfaillance se produit, votre radio tente daccder un autre site Connect Plus. Ce processus de recherche peut amener votre radio trouver un site Connect Plus fonctionnel ou un canal de reprise dappel (si le plan de secours automatique est activ dans votre radio). Un canal de reprise dappel est un rpteur qui fait habituellement partie dun site Connect Plus fonctionnel, mais qui ne peut pas communiquer avec le contrleur de site ou le rseau Connect Plus ce moment. En mode de reprise dappel automatique, le rpteur fonctionne en tant que rpteur numrique autonome . Le mode de secours automatique ne prend en charge que les appels de groupe non urgents. Aucun autre type dappel nest pris en charge en mode de secours. 5.3.2.1 Indications de mode de reprise dappel automatique Lorsque votre radio utilise un canal de reprise dappel, vous pouvez entendre une tonalit de reprise intermittente peu prs toutes les quinze secondes (sauf durant la transmission). Lcran affiche brivement le message Canal de reprise dappel de manire priodique. Votre radio permet dutiliser le PTT uniquement avec le groupe de contacts slectionn (appel de groupe, appel multigroupe ou appel gnral de site). Elle ne vous permet pas de passer dautres types dappels. 5.3.2.2 Franais (Canada) Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise AVIS:

Les appels ne sont entendus que par les radios qui coutent le mme canal de reprise et qui ont slectionn le mme groupe. Les appels ne sont pas mis en rseau avec d'autres sites ou d'autres relais. Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont disponibles en mode de reprise. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton d'urgence en mode de reprise, la radio met une tonalit de touche non valide. Les radios dotes d'un cran affichent aussi le message Fonction non disponible . Les appels privs (de radio radio) et les appels tlphoniques ne sont pas disponibles en mode reprise. Si vous tentez d'appeler un contact individuel, vous recevrez une tonalit de refus. ce moment, vous devez slectionner un contact du groupe dsir. Voici d'autres types d'appels non pris en charge : coute ambiance, avertissement d'appel, vrification de la radio, activation de la radio, dsactivation de la radio, messagerie texte, actualisation demplacement et appels de donnes en paquets. 289 Franais (Canada) L'accs amlior au canal de trafic (ETCA) n'est pas pris en charge en mode de reprise automatique. Si deux utilisateurs de radio ou plus appuient sur le bouton PTT en mme temps (ou presque en mme temps), il est possible que les deux radios mettent jusqu' ce que le bouton PTT soit relch. Dans ce cas, il est possible qu'aucune transmission ne soit comprise par les radios rceptrices. Pour passer des appels en mode de reprise, procdez comme pour le fonctionnement normal. Slectionnez simplement le contact de groupe que vous dsirez utiliser

(en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio), puis appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour faire votre appel. Il est possible que le canal soit dj utilis par un autre groupe. Si le canal est dj utilis, une tonalit occup retentit et l'cran affiche Canal occup . Vous pouvez slectionner des contacts de groupe, multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio. Lorsque la radio est utilise sur le canal de reprise, les groupes multiples fonctionnent comme les autres groupes. Elle ne peut tre entendue que par les radios qui ont slectionn le mme multigroupe. 5.3.2.3 290 Retour au fonctionnement normal Si le site revient au fonctionnement ADF normal pendant que vous vous trouvez porte du rpteur de secours, votre radio quitte automatiquement le mode de secours automatique. Un bip retentit lorsque votre radio est enregistre. Si vous tes porte d'un site fonctionnel (qui n'est pas en mode de secours), vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton de demande d'itinrance (si cette fonction est programme dans votre radio) pour forcer votre radio rechercher un site disponible et s'y enregistrer. Si aucun autre site n'est disponible, votre radio retourne au mode de secours automatique une fois la recherche termine. Si vous sortez de la zone de couverture de votre rpteur de secours, votre radio se met en mode de recherche (lcran affiche Recherche). 5.3.3 Vrification de la radio Lorsquactive, la fonction Vrif. radio vous permet de dterminer si une autre radio est en fonction au sein dun systme, sans importuner lutilisateur de cette radio. Aucune notification sonore ou visuelle ne se manifeste sur la radio cible. Cette fonction ne sapplique quaux ID dabonn. 5.3.3.1 Envoyer une vrification radio Commande radio tapes suivre 1 Accdez la fonction Vrification de la radio. Commande radio Touche programme Vrif. radio Menu tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme Vrif. radio. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) c Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour d Appuyez sur ou Vrification radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche l'alias cible indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio cible est active dans le systme, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche brivement le message Radio cible disponible. 291 Franais (Canada) Si la radio cible n'est pas active dans le systme, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche brivement le message Radio cible Non disponible. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn lorsque la commande est active partir du menu. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil si la commande est active partir du bouton programmable. Lancer la fonction coute ambiance AVIS:

Le moniteur distance s'arrte automatiquement aprs une dure programme ou lors d'une tentative de transmission, de changement de canal ou de mise hors tension de la radio. 1 Accdez la fonction coute ambiance. 5.3.4 coute distance Utilisez la fonction coute ambiance pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible (alias ou ID d'abonn seulement). Le voyant DEL clignotera une fois en vert sur l'abonn vis. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. 5.3.4.1 292 Commande radio Touche programme coute ambiance. Menu tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Commande radio tapes suivre Commande radio tapes suivre Franais (Canada) b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour d Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour e Appuyez sur ou jusqu' coute amb., puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour La premire ligne de l'cran affiche coute. distance. La deuxime ligne affiche l'alias cible, indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL passe au vert clignotant. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message coute amb. coute russie. Votre radio fait entendre l'audio provenant de la radio coute pendant une dure programme, et l'cran affiche coute Moniteur, suivi par l'alias cible. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, la radio fait entendre une tonalit davertissement et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec, une tonalit d'indication ngative se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message coute amb. chec dcoute. 293 Franais (Canada) 5.3.5 Balayage Vous pouvez lancer et arrter un balayage en appuyant sur la touche programme Balayage OU en suivant la procdure ci-dessous. Cette fonction permet votre radio d'couter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes/canaux dfinis dans une liste de balayage prprogramme. Lorsque la fonction de balayage est active, l'icne de balayage apparat dans la barre d'tat. Le voyant DEL clignote en jaune si le balayage devient inactif. 5.3.5.1 Dmarrer et arrter le balayage 1 2 3 AVIS:

Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes zones Connect Plus avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Il est important de noter que mme lorsque la fonction de balayage est active au moyen de cette procdure, le balayage peut encore tre dsactiv pour certains groupes (ou tous) de votre liste de balayage. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Modifier la liste de balayage la page 297. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'option Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Allumer ou teindre, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Scan Activ lorsque le balayage est activ. Le menu Balayage affiche le message teindre si le balayage est activ. L'cran affiche Scan dsactiv lorsque le balayage est dsactiv. 294 Franais (Canada) Le menu Balayage affiche le message Allumer si le balayage est dsactiv. Si vous ne rpondez pas avant que la priode d'attente soit coule, la radio reprend le balayage des autres groupes. 5.3.5.2 Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage 5.3.6 Balayage configurable par l'utilisateur Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio balaie en continu pour dtecter des membres de la liste de balayage lorsqu'elle se trouve sur le canal de contrle. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si le menu Modifier liste est activ, l'utilisateur peut ajouter ou supprimer des membres de la liste de balayage partir du menu Ajouter membre. Un membre de la liste de balayage doit tre un contact de groupe rgulier (p. ex. non pas un contact multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site/de rseau) qui est actuellement affect une position du slecteur de canal dans une zone Connect Plus avec le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. De plus, l'alias du groupe ne doit concorder avec aucun groupe dj inclus dans la liste de balayage de la zone courante. Le balayage peut tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen du menu ou en appuyant sur un balayage activ/dsactiv programm. Cette fonction n'est accessible que si la radio n'a pas d'appel en cours. Si vous avez un appel en cours, votre radio ne peut pas effectuer de balayage pour rechercher 295 Franais (Canada) d'autres appels de groupe et n'en peroit donc pas. Une fois l'appel termin, votre radio retourne au crneau temporel du canal de contrle et est en mesure de balayer pour reprer les groupes de la liste de balayage. dsactiv, utilisez-le pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Si votre radio a t programme pour que le balayage puisse tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen du menu, procdez comme suit. 5.3.7 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage AVIS:

Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes les zones avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Il est important de noter que mme lorsque la fonction de balayage est active au moyen de cette procdure, le balayage peut encore tre dsactiv pour certains groupes (ou tous) de votre liste de balayage. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements, consultez la section suivante. Lorsque le balayage est activ, l'icne de balayage s'affiche l'cran. Lorsque le balayage est activ et que vous n'avez pas d'appel en cours, le voyant DEL clignote en vert et jaune. La procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage dpend de la faon dont votre radio est programme. Si elle a t programme avec un bouton de balayage activ/

296 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'option Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Allumer ou teindre, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Balayage activ pendant un moment lorsque le balayage est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv pendant un moment lorsque le balayage est activ. 5.3.8 Modifier la liste de balayage vous la section Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre la page 298. AVIS:

Si l'entre de la liste de balayage se trouve tre dans le groupe actuellement slectionn, la radio vrifie s'il y a de l'activit dans ce groupe, qu'il y ait ou non un crochet devant l'entre de la liste. Quand une radio n'a pas d'appel en cours, la radio vrifie s'il y a de l'activit dans le groupe slectionn, le multigroupe, l'appel gnral de site et son groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut (s'il y en a un de configur). Cette opration ne peut pas tre dsactive. Si le balayage est activ, la radio vrifie galement s'il y a de l'activit auprs des membres activs de la liste de balayage de zone. Votre liste de balayage dtermine les groupes qui peuvent tre balays. La liste est cre lors de la programmation de votre radio. Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez :

Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupes individuels dans la liste. Ajouter ou supprimer des membres de la liste de balayage partir du menu Ajouter membre. Reportez-

Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Un membre de la liste de balayage doit tre un contact de groupe rgulier (et non pas un contact multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site/de rseau) qui est actuellement affect une position du slecteur de canal dans une zone Connect Plus avec le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. De plus, l'alias du groupe ne doit concorder avec aucun groupe dj inclus dans la liste de balayage de la zone courante. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir/Modif liste, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voulu. ou jusqu'au nom de groupe S'il y a un crochet devant le nom du groupe, le balayage est actuellement activ pour ce groupe. 297 Franais (Canada) S'il n'y a pas de crochet devant le nom du groupe, le balayage est actuellement dsactiv pour ce groupe. 4 pour slectionner le groupe voulu. L'cran affiche Activer si le balayage est dsactiv pour le groupe. L'cran affiche Dsactiver si le balayage est activ pour le groupe. 5 Slectionnez l'option affiche (Activer ou Dsactiver), puis appuyez sur slectionner. pour Selon l'option qui a t slectionne, la radio affiche brivement Balayage activ ou Balayage dsactiv en guise de confirmation. Ajouter ou supprimer un groupe partir du menu Ajouter membre La radio Connect Plus n'autorise pas les numros ou les alias de groupe en double tre insrs dans une liste de balayage de zone (ou tre affichs en tant que candidats pour le balayage ). Ainsi, la liste des candidats pour le balayage dcrite aux tapes tape 6 et tape 7 change parfois aprs l'ajout ou la suppression d'un groupe dans la liste de balayage de zone. Si votre radio a t programme pour vous permettre de modifier la liste de balayage, vous pouvez utiliser le menu Ajouter membre pour ajouter un groupe la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne ou pour supprimer un groupe de la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne. La radio affiche de nouveau la liste de balayage de la zone. Si le balayage est activ pour le groupe, le crochet est affich devant le nom du groupe. Si le balayage est dsactiv pour le groupe, le crochet est supprim devant le nom du groupe. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'option Balayage, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.9 298 3 5 Appuyez sur ou pour <Ajouter membre>, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le message Ajouter membre de la zone n (o n = le numro de zone Connect Plus de la premire zone Connect Plus de votre radio possdant le mme ID rseau que votre zone actuellement slectionne). 4 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. Si le groupe que vous souhaitez ajouter la liste de balayage est affect une position du slecteur de canaux dans cette zone, passez tape 6. Si le groupe que vous souhaitez ajouter la liste de balayage est affect une position du slecteur de canaux dans une autre zone Connect Plus, passez tape 5. Appuyez sur liste de zones Connect Plus possdant le mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. pour faire dfiler une ou Franais (Canada) 6 Aprs avoir localis la zone Connect Plus dans laquelle le groupe dsir est affect une position du slecteur de canal, appuyez sur slectionner. pour Votre radio affiche la premire entre d'une liste de groupes affects une position du slecteur de canal dans cette zone. Les groupes de la liste sont appels candidats pour le balayage parce qu'ils peuvent tre ajouts la liste de balayage de votre zone actuellement slectionne (ou qu'ils se trouvent dj dans la liste de balayage de la zone). Si la zone ne comprend aucun groupe pouvant tre ajout la liste de balayage, la radio affiche le message Aucun candidat. 7 ou Appuyez sur des groupes candidats. pour faire dfiler la liste Si un signe plus (+) est affich immdiatement avant l'alias d'un groupe, cela indique que le groupe figure actuellement dans la liste de balayage de la zone slectionne. Si le signe plus (+) n'est pas affich immdiatement avant l'alias d'un groupe, cela signifie que le groupe 299 Franais (Canada) ne figure actuellement pas dans la liste de balayage, mais qu'il peut tre ajout. supprimer un groupe de la liste de balayage avant d'en ajouter un nouveau. Appuyez sur s'affiche. lorsque l'alias de groupe dsir 10 Si ce groupe ne figure pas actuellement dans la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne, le message Ajouter (alias du groupe) s'affiche. Si ce groupe figure dj dans la liste de balayage de la zone actuellement slectionne, le message Supprimer (alias du groupe) s'affiche. Appuyez sur

(Ajouter ou Supprimer). pour accepter le message affich Si vous supprimez un groupe de la liste, vous saurez que l'opration a russi lorsque le signe plus (+) n'apparatra plus immdiatement devant l'alias. Si vous ajoutez un groupe de la liste, vous saurez que l'opration a russi lorsque le signe plus (+) apparatra immdiatement devant l'alias. Si vous tentez d'ajouter un groupe et que la liste est dj pleine, la radio affiche le message Liste pleine. Dans une telle ventualit, vous devrez Lorsque vous avez termin, appuyez sur autant de fois que ncessaire pour revenir au menu dsir. 5.3.10 Comprendre la fonction de balayage AVIS:

Si la radio se joint un appel pass un membre de zone de liste de balayage partir d'une zone diffrente et que le minuteur de mise en attente d'appel expire avant que vous puissiez rpondre, vous devez alors atteindre la zone et le canal du membre de la liste de balayage et passer un nouvel appel. Il y a des circonstances dans lesquelles vous pouvez manquer des appels de groupe qui se trouvent dans votre liste de balayage. Si vous manquez un appel pour l'une des raisons suivantes, cela n'indique pas que votre radio prsente un problme. Il s'agit du fonctionnement normal du balayage en mode Connect Plus. 8 9 300 Franais (Canada) La fonction de balayage n'est pas active (recherchez l'icne de balayage l'cran). balayage de groupe une fois que le dlai dattente du balayage est coul. Un canal membre de la liste de balayage a t Rponse de balayage active dsactiv par le biais du menu (consultez la section Modifier la liste de balayage la page 297). Vous avez dj un appel en cours. Aucun membre du groupe balay n'est enregistr auprs de votre site (systmes multisite seulement). 5.3.11 Rponse de balayage Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage dappel, le fonctionnement de la radio dpendra de lactivation ou de la dsactivation de loption de rponse de balayage pendant la programmation de la radio. Rponse de balayage dsactive La radio abandonne lappel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien dappel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal daccueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de lappel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. AVIS:

Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui nest pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que vous manquez le temps de maintien dappel, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. 5.3.12 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio d'automatiquement recevoir les transmissions du groupe d'appels avec une priorit suprieure lorsqu'elle est sur un autre appel. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque la radio passe l'appel la priorit plus leve. Il existe deux niveaux de priorit pour les groupes d'appels : P1 et P2. P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. 301 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modif. priorit, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au niveau de priorit requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir l'cran prcdent. L'icne de priorit s'affiche la gauche du groupe d'appels. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut est configur dans le CPS de la carte d'option MOTOTRBO Connect Plus, il existe trois niveaux de priorit pour des groupes d'appels : P0, P1 et P2. P0 est l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence permanente et la priorit la plus leve. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'option Balayage, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Voir/Modif liste, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au groupe voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 302 Franais (Canada) 5.3.13 Rglages des contacts Chaque zone permet d'avoir une liste pouvant contenir jusqu' 100 contacts. Les types de contacts suivants sont disponibles :

AVIS:

Vous pouvez ajouter ou modifier des ID d'abonn pour les contacts Connect Plus. La suppression des ID dabonn ne peut tre effectue que par votre dtaillant. La fonction de cryptage est active sur un canal;

vous pouvez passer un appel vocal crypt sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Appel individuel Appel de groupe Appel multigroupe Appel gnral de site vocal Appel gnral de site texte Appel de rpartition Laccs des listes de contacts dpend de la configuration de zone :

Si seulement un fuseau horaire est configur dans la radio, la liste de contacts affiche directement la liste partir de la zone slectionne. Si plusieurs zones sont configurs dans la radio, le dossier de contacts de la zone affiche toutes les zones avec les mmes ID rseau que la zone slectionne. L'utilisateur peut accder aux contacts dans ces zones. La fonction Contacts correspond au carnet dadresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. Le type de contact dappel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais dun serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. 5.3.13.1 Passer un appel individuel partir des contacts 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 303 Franais (Canada) Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. 3 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 4 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. Faire un appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias Vous pouvez galement utiliser un alias ou une recherche alphanumrique pour rcuprer lalias dun abonn. Cette fonction nest accessible quau moyen de la liste des contacts. 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert et l'cran affiche l'ID de l'utilisateur qui effectue la transmission. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias requis, puis S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. appuyez sur la touche l'alias requis. ou pour localiser Une courte tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel termin. 4 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 5.3.13.2 304 Franais (Canada) 5 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 6 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Nouveau contact, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 4 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer le numro du contact et Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Lcran affiche Appel termin. 5.3.13.3 Ajout d'un nouveau contact 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. appuyez sur pour confirmer. 5 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer le nom du contact et appuyez sur pour confirmer. Si vous ajoutez un contact radio, appuyez sur ou jusqu'au type de sonnerie voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et l'cran affiche le message Contact enregistr. 2 3 6 305 Franais (Canada) 5.3.14 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de configurer un appel ou un message texte sonneries. 5.3.14.1 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des avertissements d'appel Vous pouvez slectionner, activer ou dsactiver les sonneries des avertissements d'appel que vous recevez. Appuyez sur ou Tnlts/Avert., puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avert. d'appel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 4 5 6 7 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne

. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la tonalit appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. voulue, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'icne s'affiche ct de la tonalit slectionne. 1 2 3 306 5.3.14.2 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels individuels Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver les sonneries des appels individuels que vous recevez. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyer sur ou jusqu' Appel individuel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 5 6 7 Appuyez sur sonneries d'appel individuel. pour activer ou dsactiver les Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche ct du message Activ. Le symbole d'appel individuel sont dsactives. n'est pas affich lorsque les tonalits 307 5 6 7 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Message texte, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne

. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la tonalit voulue, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'icne s'affiche ct de la tonalit slectionne. Franais (Canada) 5.3.14.3 Activer et dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des messages texte que vous recevez. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 308 Franais (Canada) 5.3.14.4 Slection dun type de sonnerie davertissement 5.3.14.5 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme AVIS:

La touche programme Type de sonnerie davertissement est attribue par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Vous pouvez programmer une alerte par vibration unique prdtermine pour les appels radio. Si l'tat Toutes Tonalits est dsactiv, la radio affiche l'icne Toutes Tonalits dsactives. Si l'tat Toutes les tonalits est activ, le type de sonnerie d'alerte est affich. La radio vibre une fois s'il s'agit d'un style de sonnerie momentan. La radio vibre de faon rptitive s'il s'agit d'un style de sonnerie rptitif. Lorsque l'option Sonnerie et vibration est slectionne, la radio met une sonnerie particulire lors d'une communication radio entrante (p. ex. alerte d'appel ou message). Elle ressemble une tonalit dindication positive ou un appel manqu. Vous pouvez programmer la radio pour qu'elle mette une alarme continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 5.3.15 Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi des appels individuels que vous avez faits, que vous avez reus et que vous avez manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :

Supprimer Afficher les dtails 309 Franais (Canada) 5.3.15.1 Affichage des derniers appels Supprimer un appel d'une liste d'appels Les listes offertes sont : Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Journal d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu la liste voulue, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'entre la plus rcente au sommet de la liste. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Journal d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Lorsque vous slectionnez une liste et qu'elle ne contient aucune entre, l'cran affiche Liste vide, , et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou pour voir la liste. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour passer un appel individuel l'alias ou l'ID slectionn. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 5.3.15.2 310 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue, sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 3 4 5 5 1 2 6 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non, puis appuyez sur appuyez sur la touche retourner la fentre prcdente. pour 5.3.15.3 Afficher les dtails d'une liste d'appels Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Journal d'appels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour afficher les dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche les dtails de la liste d'appel. 5.3.16 Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle lorsqu'il lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est accessible partir du menu en allant sur Contacts, numrotation manuelle ou ou par la touche programme d'accs direct. 311 Franais (Canada) 5.3.16.1 Rponse un avertissement dappel Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 217 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 148. Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. 5.3.16.2 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel partir de la liste des contacts 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 3 Suivez une des tapes ci-dessous pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu :

slectionner l'alias d'abonn directement Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias d'abonn requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. utiliser le menu Num. manuelle 312 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran de saisie de texte de numrotation manuelle doit tre affich. Entrez l'ID d'abonn, puis appuyez sur

. 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avert. d'appel, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel : <alias ou ID d'abonn>Avert. d'appel et l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, indiquant que l'avertissement d'appel a t envoy. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant l'envoi de l'avertissement d'appel. Si la radio reoit l'accus de rception de lavertissement dappel, lcran affiche Avert. appel russi. Sinon, lcran affiche Avert. appel chou. Franais (Canada) 5.3.16.3 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs direct pour envoyer un avertissement d'appel l'ID prdfini. L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn pour vous aviser que l'avertissement a t envoy. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant l'envoi de l'avertissement d'appel. Si la confirmation d'avertissement d'appel est reue, l'cran indique Avert. dappel russi. Si la confirmation de l'avis d'appel n'est pas reue, l'cran indique Avert. dappel chou. 5.3.17 Mode muet Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. 313 Franais (Canada) Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche licne Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. La radio est en sourdine. IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. 5.3.17.1 Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. 1 2 La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. 5.3.17.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 314 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de entre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mode muet. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou

. 5.3.17.3 Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

parleur est rtabli. arrte. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. 315 Franais (Canada) 5.3.18 Fonctionnement durgence AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme pour l'activation du mode durgence Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux dans la plupart des cas aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence ou de l'alerte d'urgence. L'exception cette rgle est le cas o Alerte d'urgence est le mode d'urgence configur et Silencieux est le type d'urgence configur. Si votre radio est programme de cette manire, le mode silencieux est maintenu jusqu' ce que vous l'annuliez en appuyant sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urgence dsactive . Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont pris en charge en mode de secours automatique Connect Plus. Pour de plus amples renseignements, voir Plan de secours automatique la page 288. Une alerte d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps, partir de nimporte quel cran, mme si de lactivit se droule sur le canal actuel. Le mode d'urgence programm se dclenche lorsque vous appuyez sur le 316 bouton Urgence. Le mode d'urgence programm peut aussi tre dclench en activant la fonction de situation de dtresse en option. La fonction d'urgence peut tre dsactive sur votre radio. Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref Appui long De 0,05 0,75 seconde. De 1,00 3,75 secondes. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Lorsqu'une zone Connect Plus est slectionne, votre radio prend en charge trois modes durgence :

Franais (Canada) Appel d'urgence Rgulier Vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour parler dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu. La radio met une alarme et active des indicateurs sonores et/ou visuels. Appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Silencieux Lors de la premire transmission dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu, la sourdine du microphone est dsactive et vous pouvez parler sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. De cette faon, le microphone est branch pendant la dure programme dans la radio. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Alerte d'urgence Une alerte d'urgence n'est pas un appel vocal. Il s'agit d'une notification d'urgence qui est envoye aux radios configures pour recevoir de type d'alerte. La radio envoie une alerte d'urgence par le canal de contrle du site actuellement enregistr. L'alerte d'urgence est reue par les radios du rseau Connect Plus qui sont programmes pour les recevoir (quel que soit le site rseau auprs duquel elles sont enregistres). Seul un des modes d'urgence peut tre affect au bouton Urgence pour chaque zone. De plus, chaque mode durgence comprend les types suivants :

La radio lance une urgence sans indication sonore ou visuelle. La radio coupe toutes les indications sonores ou visuelles relatives l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Silencieux avec voix Identique au mode Silencieux, sauf que la sourdine de la radio se dsactive galement pour certaines transmissions vocales. 5.3.18.1 Recevoir un appel d'urgence entrant Votre radio peut tre programme pour mettre une tonalit dalerte et afficher de l'information au sujet de l'avis d'urgence entrant. Si la radio est programme de cette faon, la rception de l'avertissement d'urgence entrant, l'cran affiche les dtails de l'urgence avec l'icne d'urgence, lalias ou de lID de la radio qui a fait la demande durgence, le contact du groupe utilis pour l'urgence et une ligne additionnelle d'information. 317 Franais (Canada) L'information supplmentaire est le nom de la zone qui contient le contact de groupe. Pour le moment, la radio n'affiche que la plus rcente urgence avoir t dcode. Si une nouvelle urgence est reue avant que l'urgence prcdente soit efface, les dtails de la nouvelle urgence remplacent ceux de l'urgence prcdente. Selon la faon dont votre radio a t programme, l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou de la liste des alarmes) reste affich mme aprs la fin de l'urgence. Vous pouvez enregistrer les dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes ou les supprimer de la faon dcrite dans les sections suivantes :

5.3.18.2 318 Enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes L'enregistrement des dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes permet dafficher les dtails plus tard en slectionnant la liste des alarmes dans le menu principal. 1 Pendant que l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes) est affich, appuyez sur

. L'cran Quitter la liste des alarmes s'affiche. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes :

Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur pour enregistrer les dtails de l'urgence dans la liste des alarmes et pour quitter l'cran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes). Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur pour revenir lcran des dtails de l'urgence (ou la liste des alarmes). 5.3.18.3 Supprimer les dtails de l'urgence Rponse un appel d'urgence 1 Pendant que l'cran des dtails de l'urgence est affich, appuyez sur

. L'cran Supprimer s'affiche. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions suivantes :

Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur supprimer les dtails de l'urgence. pour Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur pour revenir lcran des dtails de l'urgence. 5.3.18.4 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si vous ne rpondez pas l'appel d'urgence dans le dlai de rponse prvu, l'appel d'urgence prend fin. Si vous dsirez parler au groupe aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence, vous devez d'abord slectionner la position du canal attribue au groupe

(si elle n'est pas dj slectionne). Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton PTT pour effectuer un appel non urgent au groupe. 1 Lors de la rception d'un appel d'urgence, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche pour interrompre toutes les indications de rception d'appel d'urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour diffuser une transmission vocale dans le groupe d'urgence. Toutes les radios qui coutent ce groupe entendront votre transmission. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Le voyant DEL s'allume en vert. 319 5.3.18.6 Ignorer Appel dannulation durgence Cette amlioration de la fonction propose une option permettant votre radio dignorer un appel dannulation durgence actif. Pour activer la fonction Ignorer lappel dannulation durgence, la radio doit tre configure avec le logiciel de programmation client Connect Plus (CPCPS). Lorsque la fonction est active, la radio naffiche pas les indications dappel durgence et elle ne reoit pas le signal audio de lID de groupe dannulation durgence par dfaut. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. Franais (Canada) 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio mettrice de lappel durgence rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. L'icne d'appel de groupe, l'ID du groupe ainsi que l'ID de la radio mettrice s'affichent l'cran. 5.3.18.5 Rpondre une alerte d'urgence AVIS:

Le contact du groupe utilis pour l'alerte d'urgence ne doit pas tre utilis pour les communications vocales. Cela aurait pour effet d'empcher d'autres radios d'envoyer et de recevoir des alertes d'urgence dans ce groupe. Une alerte d'urgence provenant d'une radio indique que l'utilisateur se trouve dans une situation d'urgence. Vous pouvez ragir l'alerte en faisant un Appel individuel la radio qui a dclar l'urgence, en faisant un appel de groupe au groupe dappel dsign, en envoyant une alerte d'appel la radio, en amorant la surveillance distance de radio, etc. La rponse approprie est dtermine par votre organisation et par la situation particulire. 320 5.3.18.7 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence AVIS:

Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle durant l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux avec voix, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle de mode durgence. Cependant, votre radio dbloque le son pour les transmissions des radios qui rpondent votre urgence. Les indicateurs d'urgence ne se manifestent que lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Tant en mode Silencieux que Silencieux avec voix , la radio quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour diffuser une transmission vocale dans le groupe d'urgence. Franais (Canada) Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit pendant la priode alloue comme dlai d'appel d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant ce temps, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit. 5.3.18.8 Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Votre radio doit tre programme pour ce mode. Dans ce mode, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton programm Urgence et que votre radio reoit un crneau temporel, le microphone est automatiquement activ sans que vous ayez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . Le microphone branch s'applique la premire transmission vocale de votre radio durant l'appel d'urgence. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 321 Franais (Canada) 2 Le microphone reste actif pendant la dure de microphone branch prcise dans la programmation de la codeplug radio. Pendant ce temps, le voyant DEL s'allume en vert. 3 Maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc pour parler plus longtemps que la dure programme. 5.3.18.9 Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme pour Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle qu'elle est en train d'envoyer une alerte d'urgence. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux , le mode silencieux est maintenu indfiniment jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urg. Ds. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux avec voix , la radio annule automatiquement le mode silencieux lorsque le contrleur de site diffuse l'alerte d'urgence. 322 Appuyez sur le bouton Urgence orange. Une fois l'alerte d'urgence transmise au contrleur de site, l'cran de la radio affiche l'icne d'urgence, le contact du groupe utilis pour l'alerte d'urgence l'alarme TX. Une fois que l'alerte d'urgence est envoye avec succs et qu'elle est diffuse l'intention des autres radios, une tonalit de russite retentit et l'cran de la radio affiche Alerte envoye. Si l'alerte d'urgence est sans succs, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre et la radio affiche chec alerte. 5.3.18.10 Quitter le mode durgence AVIS:

Si l'appel d'urgence prend fin en raison de l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence alors que la situation d'urgence existe toujours, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton Urgence pour redmarrer le processus. Si vous lancez une alerte d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, la radio quitte automatiquement le mode durgence aprs avoir reu une rponse du systme Connect Plus. Si vous lancez un appel d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, votre radio est automatiquement associe un canal ds qu'il y en a un de disponible. Une fois que votre radio a transmis un message pour signaler une urgence, vous ne pouvez pas annuler votre appel d'urgence. Cependant, si vous avez appuy par accident sur le bouton ou si l'urgence n'existe plus, vous pourriez vouloir le dire sur le canal associ. Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. Si votre radio est configure pour la fonction Urgence suivi d'un appel vocal, utilisez la priode de micro ouvert pour expliquer votre erreur, puis appuyez brivement sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin la transmission. L'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. 5.3.19 Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. Franais (Canada) Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 5.3.19.1 Envoyer un message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 10 messages texte rapides, selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. 323 Franais (Canada) Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. Si vous envoyez le message, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour slectionner un destinataire :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la Alias voulu, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, puis Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. En cas dchec de lenvoi du message texte, lcran doption Renvoyer saffiche (consultez la section Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 328). 5.3.19.2 Envoyer des messages texte rapides au moyen de la touche daccs direct Pour envoyer un message texte rapide prdfini un alias prdfini, appuyez sur la touche programme daccs direct. appuyez sur

. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Lcran affiche Envoi du message. Si le message est envoy avec succs, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Lcran affiche le message Message envoy 324 Si lenvoi du message a chou, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche chec de lenvoi du message. Si lenvoi du message texte choue, la radio affiche de nouveau lcran de loption Renvoyer. Voir Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 328. 5.3.19.3 Accs au dossier Brouillons Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les dix (10) derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vous pouvez modifier un message texte enregistr avant de l'envoyer. Cette fonction ne peut tre utilise qu'avec un microphone clavier (consultez la section Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr la page 326). Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 5.3.19.3.1 Afficher un message texte enregistr 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Touche programme Message texte Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Menu a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 325 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio tapes suivre 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier, puis b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'aux Brouillons, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.19.3.2 Modifier et envoyer un message texte enregistr 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez

. ce qui suit :

sur

. 326 sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Un curseur clignotant apparat. 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur ou sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur la touche supprimer les caractres inutiles. Appuyez pour longuement sur saisie de texte. pour modifier le mode de 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur 5 Slectionnez le destinataire du message en faisant Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la Alias voulu, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn, puis 5.3.19.3.3 Supprimer un message texte enregistr dans les brouillons 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Touche programme Message texte Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. appuyez sur

. Menu L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. Si le message texte ne peut pas tre envoy, il est dplac dans le dossier des lments envoys et marqu d'une icne d'chec d'envoi. 2 a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'aux Brouillons, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 327 Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyer sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis appuyez sur pour supprimer le message texte. 5.3.19.4 Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes dans l'cran Renvoyer :

Renvoyer un message texte Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour renvoyer le mme message Si le message a bien t envoy, une tonalit Se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Si le message ne peut pas tre envoy, l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 5.3.19.4.2 Transfrer un message texte Slectionnez Transfrer pour envoyer le message un autre alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Transfrer, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Renvoyer Suivante Modifier 5.3.19.4.1 328 2 Pour slectionner le destinataire du message, appuyez sur ou l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. 5.3.19.5 Gestion de messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 5.3.19.5.1 Affichage d'un message texte envoy 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Touche program me Message texte Menu Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder 329 Franais (Canada) Comman des de la radio tapes suivre Envoi d'un message texte envoy Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes lorsque vous consultez un message texte envoy :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' lments 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur Suivante pour slectionner. Renvoyer Modifier Suppression sur

. 2 envoys, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'icne affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran indique l'tat du message (consultez la section Icnes de messages envoys la page 266). 2 3 5.3.19.5.2 330 ou jusqu' l'une des options suivantes et appuyez sur pour slectionner. Option tapes suivre Suivant e Slectionnez Transfrer pour envoyer le message texte slectionn un autre alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe (voir Transfrer un message texte la page 328). Option tapes suivre Option tapes suivre Suppres sion Renvoye r Slectionnez Supprimer pour supprimer le message texte. Slectionnez Renvoyer pour envoyer nouveau le message texte slectionn au mme alias ou ID d'abonn/de groupe. L'cran affiche Envoi de Message, indiquant que le mme message est envoy la mme radio cible. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche chec de l'envoi du message. Lorsque l'envoi d'un message texte choue, l'cran d'option Renvoyer s'affiche de nouveau. Appuyez sur pour renvoyer le message au Franais (Canada) mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. 331 Franais (Canada) 5.3.19.5.3 Supprimer tous les messages envoys du dossier des messages envoys 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Touche programme Message texte Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Menu a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' lments envoys, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Lorsque vous slectionnez le dossier lments envoys et qu'il ne contient aucun message texte, l'cran affiche Liste vide et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer tout, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 4 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :

b Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui, puis Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour appuyez sur affiche un bref avis de russite. pour slectionner. L'cran Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non et appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir l'cran 332 5.3.19.6 Recevoir un message texte Lorsque votre radio reoit un message, l'cran affiche la liste de notifications comprenant l'alias ou l'ID de l'expditeur et l'icne de message. Vous pouvez slectionner l'une des options suivantes lorsque vous recevez un message texte :

Lecture Lire plus tard Suppression 5.3.19.7 Lire un message texte Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. 5.3.19.8 Grer les messages texte reus Utilisez la bote de rception pour grer vos messages texte. La bote de rception peut contenir au maximum 30 messages. Les messages texte de la bote de rception sont classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. Votre radio prend en charge les options de messagerie texte suivantes :

Rpondre (par texte rapide) 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Lire?, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Le message slectionn dans la bote de rception s'ouvre. Suivante Suppression Supprimer tout 2 Faites un des suivants :

333 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si le type de canal ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement transfrer un message, supprimer un message ou supprimer tous les messages reus. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. 4 Appuyez sur messages. ou pour afficher les 5 Faites un des suivants :

5.3.19.8.1 Afficher un message texte partir de la bote de rception Appuyez sur pour slectionner le message actuel, puis appuyez de nouveau sur rpondre au message, envoyer une , transfrer le message ou le supprimer. pour Maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. lcran daccueil. Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.19.8.2 Rpondre un message texte partir de la bote de rception Appuyez sur ou pour aller Bote de 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 1 2 3 334 Comman des de la radio Touche program me Message texte Menu tapes suivre Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 2 Appuyez sur ou pour aller Bote de rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au 5 Utilisez le clavier pour composer ou modifier votre 6 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur message. L'cran affiche Envoi de message, confirmant que votre message est en cours d'envoi. Si le message est envoy, une tonalit retentit et l'cran affiche Message envoy. Si le message n'a pas pu tre envoy, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche Echec de l'envoi du message. En cas dchec de lenvoi du message, lcran doption Renvoyer saffiche (voir Grer les checs d'envoi de message texte la page 328). 335 Franais (Canada) 5.3.19.8.3 Supprimer un message texte de la bote de rception 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Touche programme Message texte Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Menu a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou appuyez sur slectionner. pour 336 Appuyez sur ou pour aller Bote de rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 2 3 4 5 6 appuyez sur pour Slectionnez. L'cran affiche Message supprim, puis revient la bote de rception. Messages, puis sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui, puis 5.3.19.8.4 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception 1 Accdez la fonction Message texte. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Touche programme Message texte Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Menu a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou Messages, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou pour aller Bote de rception, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Lorsque vous slectionnez la Bote rcept. ne contenant aucun message texte, l'cran indique Liste vide et une tonalit grave se fait entendre si les tonalits du clavier sont actives (consultez la section Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier la page 234). Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer tout, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui, puis appuyez sur pour slectionnez. L'cran affiche Bote rcept. Vide. 337 Franais (Canada) 5.3.20 Cryptage Si elle est active, cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active la position courante du slecteur de canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; lactivation de la fonction nest cependant pas ncessaire la rception dune telle transmission. Lorsqu'elle est une position de slecteur de canal crypt, la radio reste en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Votre radio prend en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser les mmes valeurs et ID de cl (pour le cryptage amlior) que la radio mettrice. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (cryptage amlior). Si un type de cryptage a t attribu la radio, l'icne de transmission scurise ou non s'affiche l'cran d'accueil, 338 sauf lorsque la radio envoie ou reoit un appel ou une alarme d'urgence. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et clignote rapidement en vert lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. Vous pouvez accder cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Cryptage pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Utilisez le menu de la radio en suivant les tapes suivantes. AVIS:

Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Param. radio ou ou jusqu' Connect Plus, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur amlior. ou pour le cryptage Si l'cran affiche Allumer, appuyez sur pour activer le cryptage. La radio affiche un message de confirmation de votre slection. Si l'cran affiche teindre, appuyez sur pour dsactiver le cryptage. La radio affiche un message de confirmation de votre slection. Si un type de cryptage a t attribu la radio, l'icne de transmission scurise ou non s'affiche dans la barre d'tat, sauf lorsque la radio envoie ou reoit une alarme d'urgence. 5.3.20.1 Franais (Canada) Faire un appel crypt Le cryptage peut tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen de la touche programme Cryptage ou du menu. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que la position du canal actuellement slectionn envoie des transmissions cryptes. Lorsque le cryptage est activ pour la position du canal actuellement slectionn, toutes les transmissions vocales effectues par votre radio sont brouilles. Cela inclut les types dappels suivants : appel de groupe, appel multigroupe, rplique en cours dappel balay, appel gnral de site, appel d'urgence et appel individuel. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. 5.3.21 Scurit Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver n'importe quelle radio du systme. Par exemple, vous pourriez vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de s'en servir, puis la ractiver une fois qu'elle est de nouveau en votre possession. 339 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

L'excution des fonctions Dsactiver radio et Activer radio est limite aux radios sur lesquelles ces fonctions sont actives. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Comman des de la radio Menu de la radio tapes suivre 5.3.21.1 Dsactiver la radio 1 Accdez cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :

tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Touche Dsac radio 340 a Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour a Appuyez sur au menu. pour accder b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. c Suivez une des tapes ci-

dessous pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu :

Slectionnez l'alias ou l'ID directement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez Comman des de la radio tapes suivre tapes suivre Comman des de la radio Franais (Canada) sur slectionner. pour Utilisez le menu Numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou Numro de radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer l'ID ou l'alias dabonn, puis appuyez sur

. d Appuyez sur ou Dsactiver la radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Dsactiver la radio : <Alias ou ID cible > et le voyant DEL clignote en vert. 341 Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Dsact. radio russi. En cas d'chec, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Dsact. radio chou. Menu de la radio Commandes de la radio tapes suivre 5.3.21.2 Activer la radio 1 Accdez cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :

Commandes de la radio Touche Activer radio tapes suivre a Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la radio. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, 342 puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou Contacts, puis sur appuyez pour slectionner. sur Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. c Suivez une des tapes ci-

dessous pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID de l'abonn voulu Slectionnez l'alias ou l'ID directement. Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Utilisez le menu Numrotation manuelle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Numrotation manuelle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) Numro de radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer l'ID ou l'alias dabonn, puis appuyez sur

. d Appuyez sur ou Activer la radio, puis 343 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio tapes suivre Bluetooth sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Activer radio : <<Alias ou l'ID d'abonn > et le voyant DEL passent au vert continu. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite, une tonalit dindication positive retentit et lcran affiche le message Dsact. radio russi. En cas d'chec, une tonalit dindication ngative retentit et l'cran affiche le message Dsact. radio chou. AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes d'appareil Bluetooth est efface. Cette fonctionnalit vous permet d'utiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par l'intermdiaire d'une connexion sans fil Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts l'emploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 mtres (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. C'est--dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Il n'est pas recommand de laisser votre radio l'cart et vous ne devez pas vous attendre ce que l'appareil Bluetooth offre une fiabilit leve lorsque les deux appareils sont spars. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et l'appareil Bluetooth moins de 5.3.22 344 10 mtres (32 pieds) l'un de l'autre afin de rtablir la rception. La fonctionnalit Bluetooth de votre radio offre une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi). Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu' quatre connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Vous pouvez par exemple connecter un casque et un dispositif PTT. Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalits compltes de votre appareil compatible Bluetooth, reportez-vous son guide d'utilisation. 5.3.22.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur ou pour afficher Mon tat, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Activ et Arrt. L'tat actuel est indiqu par l'icne

. 4 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Activer, puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Activ, puis l'icne gauche de l'tat slectionn. pour slectionner. apparat Appuyez sur ou jusqu Dsactiver, puis sur appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dsactiv, puis l'icne apparat gauche de l'tat slectionn. pour slectionner. 345 Franais (Canada) 5.3.22.2 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion Il ne faut pas mettre le dispositif Bluetooth hors tension ni appuyer sur connexion, car cela annulerait l'opration. pendant le processus de dtection et de 1 Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou Recherche dappareils pour trouver des ou jusqu'

appareils disponibles. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Sur la radio, appuyez sur menu. pour accder au Appuyez sur ou pour se Connecter, 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5 Effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le message Connexion <nom dispositif>. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. Si l'appariement russit, la radio affiche le message <nom dispositif> connect. Une se fait entendre et 2 3 4 346 Franais (Canada) s'affiche ct du dispositif connect. L'icne Bluetooth activ s'affiche dans la barre d'tat. 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Me chercher, En cas d'chec, la radio affiche Connexion choue. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.22.3 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion (Mode dtection) vitez de mettre le dispositif Bluetooth ou votre radio hors tension pendant le processus de dtection et de connexion, car cela annulerait l'opration. 1 Activez Bluetooth. Voir Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth la page 345. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Votre radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres dispositifs Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. 5 Mettez sous tension votre dispositif Bluetooth et appariez-le votre radio. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. 5.3.22.4 Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Sur la radio, appuyez sur menu. pour accder au 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 347 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Vous pouvez faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Dconnecter, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le message <Dconnexion de lappareil>. Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. La radio affiche le message <Dispositif> dconnect. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et l'icne cesse de s'afficher ct du dispositif connect. L'icne Bluetooth activ ne s'affiche plus dans la barre d'tat. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Rout. audio vers radio. Une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Rout. audio vers Bluetooth. 5.3.22.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 3 4 5 5.3.22.5 348 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils, puis Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou pour afficher les Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer, puis dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. 5.3.22.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. 5.3.22.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth Permet de contrler la valeur de gain du microphone d'un dispositif Bluetooth connect. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 349 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Localisation lintrieur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Gain mic. BT, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. jusqu'au type de gain du Pour modifier les valeurs, appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou pour augmenter ou diminuer les valeurs, puis appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. La fonction Localisation interne est utilise pour assurer le suivi de lemplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. 5.3.23.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 4 5 5.3.23 350 d. Appuyez sur l'intrieur. pour activer le positionnement programme. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche b. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Franais (Canada) L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 351 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 5.3.23.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 352 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. 5.3.24 Liste de notifications Votre radio comprend une liste de notifications qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte non lus, les appels manqus et les avertissements dappel. L'icne de notification s'affiche dans la barre d'tat lorsque la liste de notifications prsente au moins un vnement. La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir AVIS:

Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. 5.3.25 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Franais (Canada) 5.3.24.1 Accder la liste de notifications Suivez la procdure pour actualiser la liste de notification. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Notification, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' lvnement voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. 353 Franais (Canada) Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 354 AVIS:

Il est possible dactiver ou de dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance l'aide dune radio dsigne (voir Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle) la page 223 et Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe) la page 224). Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5.3.25.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. 2 Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi On, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 Effectuez lune des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez longuement sur la touche programmable. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer lID, d Appuyez sur pour activer ou dsactiver le pour slectionner. Passez puis appuyez sur tape 3. Franais (Canada) Wi-Fi. Si le Wi-Fi est activ, lcran affiche message Activ. ct du Si le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, le ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus 5.3.25.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande individuelle) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande individuelle (un un). AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. 355 Franais (Canada) En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 5.3.25.3 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande de groupe) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande de groupe (un plusieurs). AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. 3 4 5 6 ou Appuyez sur ou lID dabonn voulu. pour slectionner lalias Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche Envoi russi. En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.25.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. 1 2 356 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. 5 Appuyez sur ou pour se Connecter, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. de passe et appuyez sur

. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. 357 Franais (Canada) Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 5.3.25.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.25.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, 358 c. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Franais (Canada) Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez laction suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Actualiser, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio sactualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. 5.3.25.7 Ajout dun rseau Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Ajouter un rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. appuyez sur

. 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis 1 2 3 4 359 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou pour lOuvrir, puis sur Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 3 4 5 5.3.25.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour afficher les dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. 6 7 1 2 360 Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. 5.3.25.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Oui, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. 361 Franais (Canada) 5.3.26 Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 5.3.26.1 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et tous les avertissements de la radio (sauf la tonalit davertissement durgence entrant), au besoin. Appuyez sur la touche programme Toutes Tnlts/Avert. pour activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits ou suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour accder cette fonction depuis le menu de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 362 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Toutes les tonalits, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur les tonalits et alertes. pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Licne Activ. Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.2 Rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement Vous pouvez rgler l'cart de volume des tonalits d'avertissement au besoin. Cette fonction permet de rgler le niveau sonore des tonalits et des avertissements de manire ce qu'il soit plus lev ou moins lev que celui de la voix. 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cart Vol., puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur volume requis. ou jusqu'au rglage de La radio met une tonalit correspondant chaque rglage de volume. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 7 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur pour conserver le rglage de volume affich. Appuyez sur pour quitter sans modifier les rglages actuels de l'cart de volume. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 363 Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.3 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler, au besoin. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 364 5 6 1 Appuyer sur d'autorisation de parler, puis sur appuyez sur jusqu' Tonalit ou pour slectionner. Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. pour activer ou dsactiver la Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Licne Activ. 5.3.26.4 Activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension au besoin. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Tonalits/alertes, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour activer, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur tonalit d'alerte de mise sous tension. pour activer ou dsactiver la Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Licne Activ. Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.5 Rgler le niveau de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci lev ou bas pour chaque zone Connect Plus. Haute permet des communications, en mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs une distance considrable. Basse permet des communications, en mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs proximit. Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance pour alterner entre un niveau de puissance lev ou bas. Pour accder cette fonction partir de l'cran de la radio, suivez la procdure suivante. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 365 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour ou pour afficher Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur l'alimentation, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner pour appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir , le rglage requis, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. Appuyez Appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis longuement sur l'cran d'accueil. tout moment pour retourner L'cran revient au menu prcdent. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. 2 3 4 5 5.3.26.6 Changer le mode d'affichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio pour le faire passer du mode Jour au mode Nuit et inversement, au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au rglage dsir, puis appuyez sur L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. pour activer la slection. 5.3.26.7 Rgler la luminosit de l'cran Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosit de l'affichage de la radio selon vos besoins. 4 5 1 366 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 AVIS:

La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Rduisez la luminosit de l'cran en appuyant sur ou augmentez-la en appuyant sur

. Slectionnez un rglage de 1 8. Appuyez sur pour confirmer le rglage. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.26.8 Activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction, au besoin. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu Luminosit, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche une barre de progression. appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 367 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cran intro., Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Langues, puis Appuyez sur d'introduction. L'cran affiche ct du message Activ. ne s'affiche plus ct du message L'icne Activ. 5.3.26.9 Language Vous pouvez configurer la langue d'affichage de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la langue voulue, puis sur L'icne s'affiche ct de la langue slectionne. pour activer la slection. 5.3.26.10 Activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le voyant DEL, au besoin. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 1 4 5 6 1 368 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Dterminer le type de cble Vous pouvez slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu lindicateur DEL, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur voyant DEL. pour activer ou dsactiver le Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Licne Activ. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Type cble, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5 Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne

. 2 3 4 5 5.3.26.11 369 Franais (Canada) 5.3.26.12 Annonce vocale Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre la zone ou le canal que l'utilisateur vient d'attribuer, ou de signaler l'appui sur une touche programmable. L'indicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. 5 Effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

Appuyez sur pour activer la fonction d'annonce vocale. L'cran affiche message Activ. ct du Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la fonction d'annonce vocale. L'icne ct du message Activ. ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.26.13 Dlai de menu Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyer sur ou jusqu' Annonce vocale, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Rglez la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 370 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Affichage, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dlai de fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./

phares pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Avert./phares. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. menu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au paramtre appuyez sur pour slectionner. voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, 5.3.26.14 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Cette fonction doit tre installe par le connecteur d'accessoire larrire de votre radio par votre dtaillant. Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avert./

phares, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 2 3 4 371 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. pour activer ou dsactiver Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus ct du message Licne Activ. 3 4 ou jusqu' Config. radio, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou jusqu' Double slect., puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.26.15 Rgler les prfrences d'utilisation du slecteur double Votre radio est dote d'un slecteur double Volume/Canal. Si vous dsactivez l'option de slecteur double, le slecteur permet uniquement de rgler le volume. 5 L'cran affiche Volume uniq. et Volume & Canal. ou jusqu'au rglage voulu, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. pour accder au menu. ou jusqu Utilitaires, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.26.16 Contrle de gain automatique de microphone numrique (Mic. CGA-D) Cette fonction gre automatiquement le gain du microphone de votre radio pendant la transmission sur un systme numrique. La fonction limine l'audio fort ou 5 1 2 372 Franais (Canada) augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. 5.3.26.17 Audio intelligent 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mic. CGA-D, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour activer Mic.CGA-D. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver Mic.CGA-D. Le ne s'affiche plus ct d'Activ . Votre radio peut rgler automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans l'environnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. tapes suivre Gestionnaire de Menu a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 373 Franais (Canada) Gestionnaire de tapes suivre Gestionnaire de tapes suivre c Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour d Appuyez sur jusqu' Audio intelligent, puis sur ou appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur pour activer la fonction Audio intelligent. Lcran affiche ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la fonction Audio intelligent. Licne ne saffiche plus ct du message Activ. AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. e Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 374 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Audio intelligent, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 5 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur intelligent. Lcran affiche Activ. pour activer la fonction Audio ct du message Appuyez sur Audio intelligent. Licne ct du message Activ. pour dsactiver la fonction ne saffiche plus Consultez la section Liste des accessoires approuvs pour connatre les accessoires audio Bluetooth recommands avec rglage de volume automatique intgr permettant d'obtenir un rendement similaire. 5.3.26.18 Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Paramtres radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Rducteur de bruit, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Vous pouvez galement utiliser ou pour changer l'option slectionne. 5 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. 375 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. Lcran affiche du message Activ. ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. Licne plus ct du message Activ. ne saffiche 5.3.26.19 Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de navigation mondial (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). 376 AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur la touche programmeGNSS pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

GNSS. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Index de numro de modle de la radio Codeplug de carte d'option par radiocommunication

(OTA) CRC Numro du site 4 5 Appuyez sur GNSS. pour activer ou dsactiver le Info site Alias et ID de la radio Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus Reportez-vous la section Consulter les informations du systme GNSS la page 389 sur l'accs aux informations du GNSS. 5.3.26.20 Accs aux renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur les lments suivants :

Batterie Degr d'inclinaison (acclromtre) Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes Informations du systme GNSS Appuyez sur en tout temps pour revenir l'cran pour prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. 5.3.26.20.1 Vrifier l'index de numro de modle de la radio Ce numro d'index identifie le matriel propre au modle de votre radio. Votre administrateur de systme radio 377 Franais (Canada) pourrait vous demander ce numro lors de la prparation d'une nouvelle codeplug de carte d'option pour votre radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Index modle, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'index de numro de modle. 5.3.26.20.2 Vrification fichier de codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC Si votre administrateur de systme radio vous demande d'afficher la vrification CRC de fichier de codeplug de 378 carte d'option OTA (par radiocommunication) CRC, suivez les instructions ci-dessous. Cette option de menu n'apparat que si la carte doption a reu sa dernire mise jour de codeplug par radiocommunication. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' crcCP OTA OB, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche des chiffres et des lettres. Transmettez cette information votre administrateur de systme radio exactement telle qu'elle est affiche. 5.3.26.20.3 Affichage de l'ID du site (numro du site) 4 AVIS:

Si vous n'tes pas enregistr auprs d'un site, l'cran affiche Non enregistr. La radio affiche brivement l'ID du site au moment de son enregistrement comme site Connect Plus. Aprs l'enregistrement, la radio n'indique habituellement pas le numro du site. Pour afficher le numro de site enregistr, procdez comme suit :

1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Numro du site, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'ID du rseau et le numro du site. 5.3.26.20.4 Vrification de l'info du site AVIS:

Si vous n'tes pas enregistr auprs d'un site, l'cran affiche Non enregistr. La fonction Info site fournit des renseignements qui peuvent tre utiles un technicien de service. Il s'agit des renseignements suivants :

Le numro du relais de canal de contrle courant. RSSI : Dernire valeur de puissance du signal mesure partir du relais de canal de contrle. Liste de voisins envoye par le relais de canal de contrle (cinq chiffres spars par des virgules). 379 Franais (Canada) Si la radio vous demande d'utiliser cette fonction, veuillez rapporter l'information affiche exactement telle qu'elle apparat l'cran. Pour accder cette fonction partir de l'cran de la radio, suivez la procdure ci-dessous. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mon ID, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'ID de la radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Infos site, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche l'info du site. 5.3.26.20.5 Vrifier l'ID de la radio Cette fonction permet d'afficher l'ID de votre radio. 380 5.3.26.20.6 Vrifier les versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de code Affiche la version du micrologiciel de la radio. Version du micrologiciel de la carte d'option Version de frquence de la carte d'option Version de matriel de la carte d'option Version de codeplug de la carte d'option Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Versions, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche une liste avec les renseignements suivants :

Version du micrologiciel (radio) Version de codeplug (radio) 5.3.26.20.7 Recherche des mises jour Connect Plus offre la possibilit de mettre jour certains fichiers (codeplug de carte d'option, fichier de frquence rseau et fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option) par radiocommunication. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir si cette fonction a t active pour votre radio. L'cran de la radio Connect Plus a la possibilit d'afficher sa codeplug de carte d'option OTA CRC courante, la version du fichier de frquence ou du micrologiciel de carte d'option laide dune option de menu. De plus, les radios afficheur sur lesquelles le transfert de fichier par radiocommunication a t activ peuvent afficher la version des fichiers en attente. Un fichier en attente est un 381 Franais (Canada) fichier de frquence ou de micrologiciel de carte d'option dont la radio Connect Plus est informe par la messagerie du systme, mais dont elle n'a pas encore recueilli tous les paquets. Si une radio afficheur Connect Plus a un fichier en attente, le menu offre les options suivantes :

Afficher le numro de version du fichier en attente. Afficher le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers recueillis jusque-l. Demander que la radio Connect Plus reprenne la cueillette des paquets de fichiers. Si le transfert de fichier par radiocommunication Connect Plus est activ sur la radio, la radio peut parfois amorcer un transfert de fichier sans en aviser au pralable l'utilisateur de la radio. Lorsque la radio recueille des paquets de fichiers, le voyant DEL clignote rapidement en rouge et la radio affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev sur la barre d'tat de l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:

La radio Connect Plus ne peut pas recueillir des paquets de fichiers et recevoir des appels simultanment. Pour annuler le transfert du fichier, appuyez brivement sur le bouton PTT. La radio fait alors une demande d'appel pour le nom du contact slectionn et annule le transfert de fichier pour cette radio jusqu' ce que le processus reprenne plus tard. Plusieurs choses peuvent dclencher la reprise du transfert de fichier. Le premier exemple s'applique tous les types de fichiers par radiocommunication. Les autres exemples ne s'appliquent qu'au fichier de frquence rseau et au fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option :

L'administrateur de systme radio redmarre le transfert du fichier par radiocommunication. Le dlai de la minuterie prdfinie de la carte doption expire, ce qui dclenche la reprise automatique du processus de cueillette des paquets par la carte doption. Le dlai de la minuterie n'est pas expir, mais l'utilisateur de la radio demande la reprise du transfert du fichier l'aide de l'option du menu. 382 Franais (Canada) Une fois que la radio Connect Plus a fini de tlcharger tous les paquets de fichiers, elle doit procder la mise niveau vers le fichier nouvellement acquis. Pour le fichier de frquence rseau, il s'agit d'un processus automatique qui n'exige pas de rinitialisation de la radio. Pour le fichier de codeplug de carte d'option, il s'agit d'un processus automatique qui interrompt temporairement le service pendant que la carte doption charge l'information de la nouvelle codeplug et acquiert de nouveau un site rseau. La vitesse laquelle la radio procde la mise niveau vers le fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option dpend de la faon dont la radio a t configure par le dtaillant ou l'administrateur systme. Soit que la radio procdera la mise niveau immdiatement aprs avoir recueilli tous les paquets de fichiers ou qu'elle attendra jusqu' la mise sous tension de la radio par l'utilisateur. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Le processus de mise niveau vers un nouveau fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option prend quelques secondes et requiert que la carte doption Connect Plus rinitialise la radio. Une fois la mise niveau commence, la radio ne peut ni faire ni recevoir dappel tant que le processus n'est pas termin. Durant ce processus, l'cran de la radio informe les utilisateurs qu'ils ne doivent pas teindre la radio. 5.3.26.20.7.1 Fichier de micrologiciel La section suivante fournit des informations sur le micrologiciel de la radio. 5.3.26.20.7.1.1 Micrologiciel jour AVIS:

Si le fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option n'est pas jour (et si la radio a rcemment recueilli en partie une version plus rcente du fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option version), la radio affiche une liste d'options additionnelles : Version,

%reu et Tlcharger. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 383 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Appuyez sur ou jusqu Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 3 4 5 6 L'cran affiche Firmware jour. 5.3.26.20.7.2 Firmware en attente Version Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Version, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. S'il y a un fichier de firmware de carte d'option en attente, l'cran affiche le numro de version du firmware en attente. S'il y a un fichier de micrologicielde carte d'option en attente, l'cran affiche Firmware jour. 3 4 5 1 2 384 5.3.26.20.7.3 Firmware en attente % reu 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu %reu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers de firmware recueillis jusque-l. AVIS:

Lorsque le pourcentage est de 100 %, la radio doit tre teinte puis rallume pour amorcer la mise niveau du firmware. 5.3.26.20.7.4 Firmware en attente Tlchargement Si la radio Connect Plus a pralablement laiss un transfert de fichier de firmware de carte d'option OTA avec un fichier partiel, l'appareil retourne automatiquement au transfert du fichier (s'il est encore en cours) l'expiration du dlai de la minuterie interne. Si vous voulez que l'appareil retourne au transfert d'un fichier de firmware de carte d'option en cours avant l'expiration du dlai de cette minuterie interne, 385 Franais (Canada) utilisez l'option de tlchargement de la faon dcrite ci-

dessous. 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tlcharger, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche les lments suivants. Tlchargement disponible Aucun tlchargement disponible Lancer le tlchargement Tlchargement non disponible Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, 7 Faites un des suivants :

puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur la touche pour commencer le tlchargement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur la touche Micrologiciels, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour pour revenir au menu prcdent. 1 2 3 4 5 386 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Frquence, puis 5.3.26.20.7.5 Fichier de frquence 5.3.26.20.7.5.1 Fichier de frquence jour La section suivante fournit des informations sur le fichier de frquence de la radio. sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche Fichier de frq. jour. AVIS:

Si le fichier de frquence n'est pas jour (et si la radio rcemment recueillie en partie une version plus rcente du fichier de frquence) la radio affiche une liste d'options additionnelles : Version, %reu et Tlcharger. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5.3.26.20.7.5.2 Fichier de frquence en attente Version Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 387 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Frquence, puis Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Version, puis Appuyez sur ou jusqu %reu, puis sur sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. appuyez sur pour slectionner. S'il y a un fichier de frquence en attente, l'cran affiche le numro de version du fichier de frquence en attente. L'cran affiche le pourcentage de paquets de fichiers de frquence recueillis jusque-l. 5.3.26.20.7.5.3 Fichier de frquence en attente % reu 5.3.26.20.7.5.4 Fichier de frquence en attente Tlchargement Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur Si la radio Connect Plus a pralablement laiss un transfert de fichier de frquence rseau OTA avec un fichier partiel, l'appareil retourne automatiquement au transfert du fichier

(s'il est encore en cours) l'expiration du dlai de la minuterie interne. Si vous voulez que l'appareil retourne au transfert d'un fichier de frquence rseau avant l'expiration du dlai de cette minuterie interne, utilisez l'option de tlchargement de la faon dcrite ci-dessous. appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4 5 1 5 6 1 2 3 388 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Tlchargement actuellement disponible Lancer le tlchargement Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mises jour, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 7 Faites un des suivants :

Slectionnez Oui, puis appuyez sur la touche pour commencer le tlchargement. Slectionnez Non, puis appuyez sur la touche pour revenir au menu prcdent. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Frquence, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 5.3.26.20.7.6 Consulter les informations du systme GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tlcharger, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Tlchargement actuellement non disponible Tlchargement non disponible Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Vlocit 389 Franais (Canada) Satellites Version Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) Voir Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS la page 376 pour en savoir plus au sujet du systme GNSS. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou Utilitaires, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou Info radio, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Infos GNSS, 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' llment voulu, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. 1 2 3 4 5 390 5.3.26.21 Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Menu 4 Appuyez sur ou jusquau certificat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. AVIS:

Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. Franais (Canada) 391 Franais (Canada) Autres systmes Les fonctions qui sont disponibles pour les utilisateurs radio en vertu de ce systme sont disponibles dans le prsent chapitre. 6.1 Bouton PTT Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales :

Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Appuyez longuement sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. est activ, Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit 392 lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous entendez une tonalit d'interdiction de parler en continu si votre appel est interrompu. Vous devez relcher le bouton PTT si vous entendez une tonalit d'interdiction de parler continue. 6.2 Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appui bref Appui long Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:

Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 483 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. Franais (Canada) 6.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables. Avertissement d'appel Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts de la radio afin de slectionner le destinataire d'un avertissement d'appel. Ambiance audio Profils audio Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner un environnement dans lequel la radio fonctionne. Permet l'utilisateur de slectionner le profil audio prfr. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Contacts Urgence Renvoi d'appel Active ou dsactive le renvoi d'appel. Journal des appels Permet d'ouvrir le journal des appels. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Permet l'accs direct la liste des contacts. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/

haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Localisation interne Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de localisation interne. 393 Franais (Canada) Audio intelligent Num. manuelle Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Permet d'effectuer un appel individuel en entrant un ID d'abonn. Itinrance de site manuelle 5 Lance une recherche de site manuelle. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. Surveille l'activit du canal slectionn. CGA Mic. Moniteur Notifications Permet l'accs direct la liste des notifications. Suppression des nuisances sur le canal5 Permet de retirer temporairement un canal nuisible de la liste de balayage, sauf le canal slectionn. Le canal slectionn rfre la zone ou la combinaison de canaux slectionne de l'utilisateur partir duquel le balayage est effectu. Accs direct Permet de lancer un appel tlphonique, de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. Fonction de carte d'option Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. coute permanente5 Surveille le trafic radio d'un canal slectionn jusqu' ce que la fonction soit dsactive. Permet laccs direct la liste des contacts du tlphone. Tlphone Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Diffusion publique (PA) Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Alias et ID de la radio Indique l'alias et l'ID de la radio. 5 Ne sapplique pas Capacity Plus. 394 Franais (Canada) Vrification de la radio Dtermine si une radio est active dans un systme. Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque l'Annonce vocale est active. Dsactiver la radio Permet de dsactiver une radio cible distance. Permet d'activer une radio cible distance. Activer la radio coute distance Relais/Direct5 Active le microphone d'une radio cible sans indication. Verrouillage de site5 Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. Permet d'alterner entre l'utilisation d'un rpteur et les communications directes avec une autre radio. Message texte Slectionne le menu de la messagerie texte. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Balayage 6 Info site Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Affiche le nom et l'ID du site actuel Capacity Plus -

multisite. 6 Ne s'applique pas Capacity Plus-Site unique. Interruption de transmission Met fin un appel interruptible afin de librer le canal. Amlioration de la vibration Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Transmission vocale (VOX) Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la transmission vocale. 395 Franais (Canada) Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Slection de zone Permet de slectionner une zone dans une liste. 6.2.3 Accs aux fonctions programmes Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder aux fonctions programmes de votre radio. 6.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. 2 Rtroclairage Active ou dsactive le rtroclairage de l'cran. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Mode d'affichage Permet d'alterner entre l'activation et la dsactivation des modes d'affichage Jour et Nuit. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 396 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la fonction du menu et appuyez sur fonction ou entrer dans un sous-menu. pour slectionner une 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir l'cran Maintenez enfonce la touche pour revenir lcran daccueil. La radio quitte automatiquement le menu et revient l'cran d'accueil aprs une priode d'inactivit. Des touches de navigation se trouvent galement sur le microphone clavier. Voir Touches du microphone clavier la page 50. 6.3 Indicateurs d'tat Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. 6.3.1 Icnes Laffichage cristaux liquides (ACL) prsente ltat de la radio, les entres de texte et des menus. Tableau 10: Icnes daffichage Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant dans la barre dtat qui apparat au haut de lcran. Les icnes sont classes par ordre dutilisation ou dapparition partir de la gauche et sont spcifiques au canal. Franais (Canada) Bluetooth connect La fonction Bluetooth est active. Licne demeure allume tant quun dispositif Bluetooth distant est connect. Bluetooth non connect La fonction Bluetooth est active, mais aucun appareil Bluetooth distance nest connect. Journal des appels Journal des appels radio. Le contact radio est disponible. Contact Urgence La radio est en mode durgence. Liste de rception flexible La liste de rception flexible est active. Fonction GNSS disponible La fonction GNSS est active. Licne demeure allume tant que la 397 Franais (Canada) rception dune position est disponible. Fonction GNSS non disponible La fonction GNSS est active, mais ne reoit aucune donne du satellite. Donnes volume lev La radio reoit des donnes volume lev et le canal est occup. Localisation interne disponible7 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ et disponible. Positionnement lintrieur non disponible7 Ltat de la localisation intrieure est activ, mais non disponible parce que la fonction Bluetooth est dsactive ou parce que la dtection des balises a t suspendue par Bluetooth. Message Arrive dun message entrant. 7 Ne sapplique quaux logiciels et au matriel les plus rcents. 398 Le canal slectionn est surveill. coute Mode muet Le mode Muet est activ et le haut-

parleur est coup. Notification La liste de notifications comprend au moins un vnement manqu. Carte doptions La fonction Carte doption est active.

(Modles dots de la fonction Carte doption uniquement.) Absence de fonction de la carte doption La fonction Carte doption est dsactive. Retardateur de programmation par radiocommunication Indique le temps restant avant le redmarrage automatique de la radio. Indicateur de puissance de signal reu (RSSI) Le nombre de barres reprsente lintensit du signal radio. Laffichage de quatre barres indique une intensit de signal maximale. Cette icne ne saffiche quen mode de rception. Sonnerie seulement Le mode sonnerie est activ. Balayage 8 La fonction de balayage est active. Balayage Priorit 18 La radio dtecte de lactivit sur le canal ou le groupe de canaux Priorit 1. Balayage Priorit 28 La radio dtecte de lactivit sur le canal ou le groupe de canaux Priorit 2. 8 Ne sapplique pas Capacity Plus. 9 Ne sapplique pas Capacity PlusSite unique. Franais (Canada) La fonction Cryptage est active. Scuris Connexion La radio sest connecte au serveur distant. Dconnexion La radio sest dconnecte du serveur distant. Sonnerie silencieuse Le mode de sonnerie silencieuse est activ. Itinrance de site 9 La fonction ditinrance de site est active. 8Mode direct En labsence dun rpteur, la radio est configure pour la communication directe radio radio. 399 Franais (Canada) Dsactivation des tonalits Les tonalits sont dsactives. Non scurise Wi-Fi Excellent10 Le signal Wi-Fi est excellent. Wi-Fi bon10 Le signal Wi-Fi est bon. Wi-Fi moyen10 Le signal Wi-Fi est moyen. Wi-Fi faible10 Le signal Wi-Fi est faible. La fonction Cryptage est dsactive. Tableau 11: Icnes de menu avanc Balayage par vote La fonction de balayage par vote est active. Les icnes suivantes saffichent prs des lments de menu qui offrent un choix entre deux options ou qui prsentent un sous-menu offrant aussi deux options. Wi-Fi non disponible10 Le signal Wi-Fi nest pas disponible. Case cocher (coche) Indique que loption est slectionne. Case cocher (vide) Indique que loption nest pas slectionne. Case noire Indique que loption slectionne dans le menu comporte un sous-

menu. 10 Applicable uniquement pour les modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e. 400 Tableau 12: Icnes de dispositif Bluetooth Tableau 13: Icnes dappels Les icnes suivantes accompagnent les lments de la liste de dispositifs Bluetooth afin de vous informer sur le type du dispositif. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les icnes saffichant lcran de la radio pendant un appel. Ces icnes apparaissent galement dans la liste de contacts pour indiquer le type dalias ou dID. Franais (Canada) Dispositif audio Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif audio compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un casque dcoute. Dispositif de donnes Bluetooth Dispositif de transfert de donnes Bluetooth, par exemple, un lecteur de codes barres. Dispositif PTT Bluetooth Il sagit dun dispositif PTT

(messagerie vocale instantane) compatible avec la technologie Bluetooth, comme un dispositif fonction PTT uniquement (POD). Capteur de lappareil Bluetooth10 Capteur dun appareil compatible Bluetooth, comme un capteur de gaz. Appel PC par Bluetooth Indique quun appel PC par Bluetooth est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de lappel PC par Bluetooth. Appel de rpartition Le type de contact dappel de rpartition sert envoyer un message texte un PC rpartiteur par le biais dun serveur de messagerie texte de tiers. Appel de groupe/appel gnral Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel de groupe ou un appel gnral est en cours. 401 Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel priv Cette icne saffiche lorsquun appel priv est en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) de labonn. Appel de groupe comme tant un appel de groupe/gnral Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un appel de groupe/

gnral en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du groupe. Appel tlphonique comme tant un appel priv Indique un appel tlphonique comme tant un Appel priv en cours. Dans la liste de contacts, elle indique lalias (nom) ou lID (numro) du tlphone. Tableau 14: Icnes de tickets de tche Les icnes suivantes apparaissent momentanment sur lcran dans le dossier Tickets de tche. Toutes les tches Indique toutes les tches de la liste. Nouvelles tches Indique les nouvelles tches. En cours Les travaux sont en cours de transmission. Ceci saffiche avant lindication dchec ou de russite denvoi de tickets de tche. chec de lenvoi Les travaux ne peuvent tre envoys. Franais (Canada) 402 Russite de lenvoi Les travaux ont t envoys avec succs. Indique le niveau de priorit 1 pour les travaux. Indique le niveau de priorit 2 pour les travaux. Priorit 1 Priorit 2 Priorit 3 Indique le niveau de priorit 3 pour les travaux. Tableau 15: Icnes davertissement Les icnes dcrites ci-dessous saffichent momentanment lcran de la radio lors de lexcution dune tche. chec de transmission (ngatif) Laction excute na pas russi. Transmission russie (positif) Laction excute a russi. Franais (Canada) Transmission en cours (transitoire) Transmission en cours. Cette icne saffiche avant lindication de russite ou dchec de la transmission. Tableau 16: Icnes des lments envoys Les icnes ci-dessous apparaissent dans le coin suprieur droit de lcran dans le dossier Messages envoys. En cours ou Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID dabonn est en attente de transmission et sera ensuite en attente de confirmation. Le message texte destin un alias ou un ID de groupe est en attente de transmission. Message personnel ou de groupe lu Le message texte a t lu. ou 403 Franais (Canada) Message personnel ou de groupe non lu ou Le message texte na pas t lu. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. chec de lenvoi Le message texte ne peut tre envoy. Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu ou ou Russite de lenvoi Le message texte a t envoy. La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio est en cours de transmission. La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation. La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. AVIS:

Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Le voyant DEL ne s'allume pas si la radio dtecte de l'activit de liaison radio Capacity Plus. 6.3.2 Voyants DEL Les voyants DEL indiquent l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. 404 Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. 6.3.3 Tonalits Jaune continu La radio surveille un canal classique. La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Jaune clignotant La radio effectue un balayage pour dtecter de l'activit. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. La Liste de rception flexible de la radio est active. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus multi-site sont occups. Jaune clignotement double La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. La radio est verrouille. La radio n'est pas connecte au rpteur en mode Capacity Plus. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus sont occups. Franais (Canada) Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. 6.3.3.1 Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec 405 Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. 1 : Bouton slecteur de canal Franais (Canada) 6.3.3.2 Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit priodique Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. 406 6.4 Mode analogique ou numrique classique Vous pouvez configurer chaque canal de la radio de manire analogique classique ou numrique classique. Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour alterner entre les canaux analogiques et numriques. Certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous basculez du mode numrique au mode analogique. Les icnes des fonctions numriques non disponibles sont estompes. Les fonctions dsactives sont masques dans le menu. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode analogique et numrique. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent pas au rendement de la radio. AVIS:

La radio peut aussi alterner entre les modes analogique et numrique pendant le balayage bimode. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Balayage la page 460. 6.5 Information relative aux icnes Dans le prsent document, les icnes dcrites sont utilises pour signaler les fonctions prises en charge en mode analogique classique ou en mode numrique classique ou si elles sont disponibles au moyen dun microphone clavier. Indique une fonction propre au mode analogique classique seulement. Indique une fonction propre au mode numrique classique seulement. Franais (Canada) Les fonctions offertes en mode conventionnel analogique et en mode numrique ne sont accompagnes d'aucune icne. 6.6 Sites IP interconnects Cette fonction permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP (Internet Protocol). Il s'agit d'un mode multisite classique. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Cette opration s'effectue automatiquement ou manuellement en fonction de vos paramtres. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le rpteur du site dont la valeur RSSI (indicateur d'intensit de rception du signal) est la plus leve. 407 Franais (Canada) Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement dans la zone de couverture dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance, mais qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant et s'y connecte. AVIS:

Pour chaque canal, seule l'option Balayage ou Itinrance peut tre active, mais non les deux en mme temps. Les canaux pour lesquels cette fonctionnalit est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche le ou les canaux dans la liste d'itinrance afin de dterminer le meilleur site. Une liste d'itinrance peut contenir un maximum de 16 canaux, y compris le canal slectionn. AVIS:

Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. Capacity Plus site unique Capacity Plus site unique est une configuration de partage de canaux site unique du systme radio MOTOTRBO qui prend en charge des centaines d'utilisateurs et un maximum de 254 groupes l'aide d'un bassin de canaux. Ainsi, votre radio peut utiliser efficacement tous les canaux programms disponibles en mode Rpteur. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus Site unique l'aide d'une touche programmable. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode numrique conventionnel, Sites IP interconnects et Capacity Plus. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent PAS la performance de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements au sujet de cette configuration, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.7 408 6.8 Capacity Plus multisite Capacity Plus multisite est une configuration de partage de canaux multisite du systme radio MOTOTRBO alliant les principaux avantages des configurations Capacity Plus et Sites IP interconnects. Capacity Plus Multisite permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP. Cette fonction permet galement d'accrotre la capacit en utilisant efficacement le nombre disponible combin de canaux programms pris en charge par chacun des sites disponibles. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Selon la configuration choisie, cette opration se fait de faon automatique ou manuelle. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce Franais (Canada) site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le relais du site dont la valeur RSSI. Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement porte dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance (qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant) et s'y connecte. Les canaux pour lesquels la configuration Capacity Plus multisite est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche ces canaux afin d'identifier le meilleur site. AVIS:

Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Tout comme pour Capacity Plus site unique, les icnes des fonctions qui ne sont pas offertes en mode Capacity Plus multisite ne sont pas disponibles dans le menu. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus multisite l'aide d'une touche programmable. 409 Franais (Canada) 6.9 Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. Une zone est un groupe de canaux. Votre radio prend en charge jusqu 99 canaux et 2 zones, avec un maximum de 99 canaux par zone. Chaque canal peut tre programm avec diffrentes fonctions ou divers groupes d'utilisateurs. 6.9.1 Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

zone. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 410 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Zone. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche et la zone courante. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la zone voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient l'cran de la zone slectionne. 6.9.2 Slection des zones laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone voulue laide de la recherche dalias. 2 3 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Slection de Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Zone. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche et la zone actuelle. Slection des canaux Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner le canal voulu aprs avoir slectionn la zone. 3 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. Appuyez sur la touche de dfilement vers le L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 4 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. Appuyez sur les touches programmes Canal Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

haut/bas. Utilisez le bouton Volume/Canal. prcdent/suivant. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 6.10 Appels Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche <Zone> slectionne pendant un moment et revient lcran de la zone slectionne. Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :

Recherche d'alias Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel priv ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. 411 2 5 6.9.3 Franais (Canada) Liste de contacts Cette mthode permet d'accder directement la liste des contacts. Numrotation manuelle ( partir de Contacts) Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel priv ou un appel tlphonique partir du microphone clavier. Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique . Touches numriques programmes Bouton Volume/Canal Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel de groupe, un appel priv ou un appel gnral partir du microphone clavier. AVIS:

Vous ne pouvez attribuer qu'un seul alias ou ID une touche numrique, mais vous pouvez attribuer plus d'une touche numrique un alias ou un ID. Toutes les touches numriques du microphone clavier peuvent tre attribues. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. 412 AVIS:

Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu durant la transmission dun appel crypt et met un clignotement double en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de confidentialit ou des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Confidentialit la page 525. 6.10.1 Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. 6.10.1.1 Franais (Canada) Appels de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de groupe partir de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. programme. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et l'alias du groupe. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur 413 Franais (Canada) de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. 6.10.1.2 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 414 3 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.1.3 Appels de groupe faits laide de la touche numrique programmable 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 4 Franais (Canada) 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 6.10.1.4 Rponse un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce 415 Franais (Canada) groupe. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel de groupe sur votre radio. son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. l'cran. L'alias du groupe s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le 416 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Si la radio affiche un cran autre que l'cran d'accueil et reoit un appel de groupe, elle continue d'afficher l'cran slectionn. Appuyez longuement sur d'accueil et afficher l'alias de l'appelant avant de rpondre. pour retourner l'cran 6.10.2 Appels privs Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type transmet l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio, tandis que le deuxime type transmet l'appel immdiatement. Un seul de ces types d'appels peut tre programm dans votre radio par votre dtaillant. 6.10.2.1 Passer des appels individuels Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'est pas active, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre lorsque vous lancez l'appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels privs partir de la radio. Servez-vous des fonctions de messagerie texte ou d'avertissement d'appel pour communiquer avec une radio individuelle. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous la section Messagerie texte la page 174 ou Fonction Avertissement dappel la page 477. Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. programme. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv., l'alias de l'abonn et l'tat de l'appel. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que 417 Franais (Canada) vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. 6.10.2.2 Appels privs faits laide de la liste de contacts Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 418 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. 6.10.2.3 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. Modifier les ID d'abonn composs prcdemment et appuyez sur continuer. pour 6 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 7 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 9 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton 419 pour effectuer la 8 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Franais (Canada) PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. 6.10.2.4 Appels individuels faits l'aide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels privs l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 420 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv. dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. L'cran affiche l'alias de destination. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme.Une tonalit retentit. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Franais (Canada) Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. appel interruptible afin de librer le canal pour vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6.10.2.5 Rponse des appels individuels Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un Appel individuel :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si l'interruption de transmission est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin un 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.3 Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio priv et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le canal. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. 421 Franais (Canada) 6.10.3.1 Rception dun appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'ID de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de 6.10.3.2 Appel gnral l'cran. l'cran. Appel gnral s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. la fin de l'appel, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la rception de l'appel gnral. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels gnraux partir de la radio. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne d'appel de groupe et Appel gnral. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

422 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. 6.10.3.3 Appels gnraux faits laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels gnraux l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Franais (Canada) Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si la touche numrique n'a pas t attribue une entre. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral en ce moment. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. La radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Lorsque l'appel individuel se termine, une courte tonalit retentit. 423 Franais (Canada) Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 6.10.4 Appels slectifs Un appel slectif est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il s'agit d'un appel priv effectu en mode analogique. 6.10.4.1 Excution dun appel slectif Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel slectif. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels slectifs partir de la radio. 1 Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. 424 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel indiv., l'alias de l'abonn et l'tat de l'appel. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6 L'cran affiche Appel termin. 6.10.4.2 Rponse un appel slectif Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel slectif sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel slectif :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. La premire ligne de texte affiche l'icne Appel indiv. et l'alias de l'appelant ou Appel slectif ou Avert. avec appel. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. prcdent. Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit.L'cran affiche Appel termin. 6.10.5 Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers un tlphone. Si la fonction Appel tlphonique n'est pas active sur votre radio :

L'cran affiche Non disponible. Votre radio dsactive le son de l'appel. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran Lors de votre appel tlphonique, votre radio tente de mettre fin l'appel lorsque :

425 Franais (Canada) Vous appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct si le code de non-accs est prconfigur. Vous entrez le code de non-accs comme entre pour les autres chiffres. Durant laccs aux canaux, la transmission du code d'accs ou de retrait d'accs ou de chiffres supplmentaires, votre radio rpond la touche Activ/

dsactiv, du Rglage du volumeet du slecteur de canal seulement. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur mettre fin la tentative dappel. Une tonalit retentit. pour AVIS:

Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. 426 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs une touche pour lalias ou lID prdfini. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, lcran affiche le message Code daccs :. 2 Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. 3 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 4 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez les deux dernires tapes qui prcdent ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. 6.10.5.2 Appels tlphoniques faits laide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques laide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. 427 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que vous tes sur lcran Contacts tlphoniques :

La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Si lentre slectionne est vide :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 5 Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche En appel La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne Appel tlphonique. Si lappel est russi :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. Lcran affiche No dappel tlphonique non La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID valide. d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appeler. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche Code daccs : si le code daccs nest pas prconfigur. La deuxime ligne affiche Appel tlphonique et l'icne Appel tlphonique. Si lappel nest pas russi :

Une tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche chec de lappel tlphonique, puis, Code daccs :. 3 4 428 Si le code daccs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran prcdant la tentative dappel. 10 Si le code de non-accs nest pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque lcran affiche 6 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Licne RSSI disparat. 7 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 8 Saisissez des chiffres supplmentaires laide du clavier si lappel le demande et appuyez sur pour continuer. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. La radio revient lcran prcdent. 9 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Franais (Canada) Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 9 et tape 10 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone ait termin lappel. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la 429 Franais (Canada) radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. AVIS:

Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel (une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 6.10.5.3 430 Appels tlphoniques faits l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels tlphoniques l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de la radio. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de tlphone. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche Numro : et un curseur clignotant. 5 Saisissez le numro de tlphone, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. L'cran affiche Code d'accs : et un curseur clignotant si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur. 6 7 Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur continuer. pour Le code daccs ou de non-accs ne peut dpasser 10 caractres. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne de l'cran. L'tat de l'appel s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne de l'cran. Si l'appel est russi :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. L'alias de l'abonn s'affiche sur la premire ligne programme. de l'cran. Franais (Canada) L'cran continue d'afficher l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. Si l'appel n'est pas russi :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche chec de l'appel tlphonique, puis, Code d'accs :. Si le code d'accs a t prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient l'cran prcdant la tentative d'appel. 8 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. 9 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si le code de non-accs n'est pas prconfigur, entrez le code de non-accs lorsque l'cran affiche Code de non-accs :, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct 431 Franais (Canada) Si la touche d'accs direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tlphonique. Si l'appel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si l'appel choue, la radio revient l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Rptez tape 8 ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 432 AVIS:

Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque vous tes dans lcran de contacts, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appuyez sur OK pour placer appel. Lorsque l'utilisateur a termin d'utiliser le tlphone, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel termin. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel tlphonique, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel

(une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-

accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 6.10.5.4 Pour passer des appela de groupe, individuels, tlphoniques ou gnraux l'aide de la recherche d'alias Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer n'importe quel type d'appel l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur d'abonn voulu. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur l'entre slectionne est vide, une tonalit d'indication ngative se fait entendre et l'cran indique No. Tl. Invalide. Appuyez sur ou pour un appel tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection.. Si le code d'accs n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code d'accs :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code d'accs, puis appuyez sur pour pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn et l'icne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de 433 Franais (Canada) lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. 8 6 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 7 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de l'une des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche d'accs 434 direct n'est pas programme, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de libration n'est pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de l'cran indique Code de libration :. La deuxime ligne de l'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code pour continuer. de libration, puis appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et l'cran affiche Fin de lappel tl.. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas d'chec, votre radio retourne l'cran d'appel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lcran Contacts tl, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque l'utilisateur a termin d'utiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et l'cran affiche le message Fin appel tl.. Si l'appel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par l'appel tlphonique, la radio revient l'cran affich avant la tentative d'appel. AVIS:

Pendant l'accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche d'alias. ou pour quitter la Appuyez sur recherche d'alias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant l'accs un canal, un code daccs/de libration ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. 6.10.5.5 Multifrquence deux tonalits La fonction Multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) permet votre radio dutiliser un systme radio dot dune interface de systme tlphonique. La dsactivation de toutes les tonalits et de lalerte de la radio dsactive automatiquement la tonalit DTMF. Franais (Canada) 6.10.5.5.1 Excution dun appel DTMF Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels DTMF partir de la radio. 1 Maintenez le bouton de transmission PTT enfonc. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Entrez le numro voulu pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. Appuyez sur pour faire un appel DTMF. 6.10.5.6 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :

435 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'cran affiche l'alias du groupe et Appel tl. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral, vous ne pouvez y rpondre ou y mettre fin que si le canal est du type appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :

L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. 2 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. L'cran affiche Appel gnral et Appel tl. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez l'tape ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 6.10.5.7 436 Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, la premire ligne de lcran affiche Indisponible, et votre radio met les appels en sourdine. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran o vous tiez avant de faire l'appel. L'cran affiche Appel gnral et Appel 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. termin. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez tape 3 ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 2 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. Lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. Si lappel se termine avec succs :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. Si lappel choue, la radio revient lcran dappel tlphonique. Rptez l'tape ou attendez que l'utilisateur du tlphone mette fin l'appel. 6.10.5.8 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :

L'cran affiche l'icne Appel tlphonique dans le coin suprieur droit. L'cran affiche l'alias de l'appelant ou Appel tl. 437 Franais (Canada) 6.10.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Appuyez sur le bouton Voix PTT. Appuyez sur le bouton durgence. Effectuez la transmission de donnes. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interruption de transmission. La radio du destinataire affiche le message Appel interrompu. 6.10.7 Mode direct Cette fonction vous permet de continuer de communiquer lorsque votre rpteur ne fonctionne pas ou lorsque la radio est hors de la porte du rpteur, mais demeure la porte des autres radios. 2 Ce rglage demeure activ mme aprs la mise hors tension. AVIS:

Cette fonction ne s'applique pas aux canaux Capacity Plus site unique, Capacity Plus multisite et Bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. 6.10.7.1 Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct Suivez la procdure pour alterner entre les modes Rpteur et Direct sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton programm Repeater/

Talkaround. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 438 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Direct. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6.10.8 Appel vocal de diffusion Un appel vocal de diffusion est un appel vocal unidirectionnel effectu par n'importe quel utilisateur vers un groupe en entier. La fonction Appel vocal de diffusion permet uniquement au lanceur d'appel de transmettre au groupe, et les Franais (Canada) destinataires de l'appel ne peuvent pas rpondre (aucun dlai dexpiration). Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.8.1 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion Programmer votre radio pour effectuer des appels vocaux de diffusion. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche Appel de diffusion ainsi que licne et lalias Appel de groupe. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

439 Franais (Canada) Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Si la touche numrique na pas t attribue une entre, vous entendrez une tonalit dchec. AVIS:

Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre aux appels vocaux de diffusion. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient au menu prcdent. 6.10.8.2 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure pour effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas 440 Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables la page 465. 6.10.8.3 Faire des appels vocaux de diffusion laide de la recherche dalias 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche les entres dans l'ordre alphabtique. Appuyez sur dabonn voulu. ou jusqu lalias ou lID La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro de tlphone :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. 4 Utilisez le clavier pour entrer un numro de tlphone. Franais (Canada) prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code daccs :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite, la tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de lutilisateur. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias ou lID dabonn et licne RSSI. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche Appel tl. et licne dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. pour effectuer la slection. Si Appuyez sur lentre slectionne est vide, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre et lcran affiche No. tl. invalide. Appuyez sur ou pour un appel tlphonique, puis sur Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Si le code daccs na pas t pour 7 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. Licne RSSI disparat lors de la transmission. 8 Pour entrer dautres chiffres, si demand durant lappel, procdez de lune des faons suivantes. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche pour commencer entrer de nouveaux chiffres. La 441 vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT lcran Contacts tl., une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. Si lappel se termine pendant que vous entrez les autres chiffres demands par lappel tlphonique, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Franais (Canada) premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Chiffres suppl. :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez les chiffres supplmentaires, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et la radio revient lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 9 pour mettre fin lappel. Si le Appuyez sur code de retrait daccs nest pas prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la premire ligne de lcran indique Code de retrait daccs :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez le code de retrait daccs, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. La radio revient lcran prcdent. La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre et lcran affiche Fin de lappel tl. En cas de russite, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche Appel tl. termin. Votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. En cas dchec, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand 442 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pendant laccs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel et une tonalit se fait entendre ou pour quitter la recherche dalias. pour quitter la ou Appuyez sur la touche recherche dalias. Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. Pendant laccs un canal, un code daccs/

retrait daccs ou encore lors dune transmission dautres chiffres, seuls les boutons Marche/Arrt, Rglage du volume et le slecteur de canal sont actifs. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. L'icne Appel de groupe s'affiche dans le coin droit suprieur de l'cran. L'ID de l'appelant s'affiche sur la premire ligne de Appel de diffusion s'affiche sur la deuxime ligne l'cran. de l'cran. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Lorsque lappel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran prcdent. Les appels vocaux de diffusion n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel vocal de diffusion. 6.10.8.4 Recevoir un appel vocal de diffusion Lorsque vous recevez un appel vocal de diffusion :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 443 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel vocal de diffusion si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements dans les menus tant que l'appel vocal de diffusion est en cours. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume.La ligne de texte affiche Appel sans dest., licne Appel de groupe et lalias. 6.10.9 Appel sans destinataire Un appel sans destinataire est un appel de groupe pour l'un des 16 ID de groupe prdfinis. Cette fonction se configure laide du CPS-RM. Un contact pour l'un des ID prdfinis est ncessaire pour lancer ou recevoir un appel sans destinataire. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.9.1 Effectuer un appel sans destinataire 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond lalias ou lID de groupe. 444 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. Une tonalit momentane se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Appel sans dest., licne Appel de groupe et lalias ou lID, ainsi que lalias ou lID de la radio mettrice. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre Franais (Canada) et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Linitiateur de lappel peut appuyer sur mettre fin un appel de groupe. pour Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6.10.9.2 Rpondre un appel sans destinataire Lorsque vous recevez un appel sans destinataire :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Une tonalit momentane se fait entendre. La ligne de texte affiche Appel sans dest., lalias de lappelant et lalias de lappel de groupe Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal 6.10.10 Mode de canal vocal ouvert (OVCM) Le mode de canal vocal ouvert (OVCM) permet une radio qui n'est pas prconfigure pour une utilisation au sein dun 445 Franais (Canada) systme particulier de recevoir et d'mettre pendant un appel de groupe ou individuel. Les appels de groupe OVCM prennent galement en charge les appels de diffusion. Programmez votre radio pour permettre lutilisation de cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.10.1 Effectuer un appel OVCM Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6.10.10.2 Rpondre un appel OVCM Lorsque vous recevez un appel OVCM :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour quil soit possible d'effectuer un appel OVCM. Suivez la procdure pour faire des appels OVCM partir de la radio. lalias. La ligne de texte affiche licne du type dappel, OVCM et 1 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. La ligne de texte affiche l'icne du type d'appel, OVCM et lalias., indiquant que la radio est passe l'tat OVCM. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 446 Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.11 Fonctions avances Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. 6.11.1 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active via le CPS lorsque la radio n'est pas rgle sur le canal d'accueil pendant un certain temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :

La tonalit de Rappel de canal d'accueil et l'annonce sonore retentissent. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche le message Non. La deuxime ligne affiche Canal d'accueil. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :

Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. 447 Franais (Canada) Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. 6.11.1.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal daccueil en sourdine. Lcran affiche HCR en sourdine. courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. La premire ligne de lcran affiche lalias du canal et la deuxime, Nouv. canal acc.. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 3 4 6.11.1.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Canal Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. d'accueil. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal 448 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias du 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Vrif. radio. nouveau canal d'accueil. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 2 L'cran affiche slectionn. ct de l'alias de canal d'accueil Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours.Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Attendez la confirmation. Si vous appuyez sur confirmation, une tonalit se fait entendre, la radio met fin toutes les tentatives et quitte le mode de vrification de radio. pendant l'attente de En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn. 449 6.11.2 Vrification de la radio La fonction Vrification de la radio vous permet de dterminer si une autre radio est en fonction au sein d'un systme, sans importuner l'utilisateur de cette radio. Aucune notification sonore ou visuelle ne se manifeste sur la radio cible. Cette fonction n'est offerte que pour les alias ou ID d'abonn. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. 6.11.2.1 Envoi des vrifications radio Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des vrifications radio partir de votre radio. Franais (Canada) 6.11.2.2 Envoi des vrifications radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer les vrifications de radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Vrifications de radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 7 Attendez la confirmation. Si vous appuyez sur confirmation, une tonalit se fait entendre, puis la radio met fin aux tentatives et quitte le mode de vrification de radio. pendant l'attente de En cas de russite :

5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 1 2 3 4 450 En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'alias ou d'ID d'abonn. 6.11.3 coute distance Cette fonction est utilise pour activer le microphone d'une radio cible avec un alias ou un ID d'abonn. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Cette fonction s'arrte aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. 6.11.3.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. Appuyez sur voulu. 2 3 ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute Moniteur. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 451 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.3.2 Activation de l'coute ambiance l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la liste de contacts de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Une tonalit d'chec retentit. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Appuyez sur distance ou jusqu' coute 1 2 3 4 452 Franais (Canada) 6.11.3.3 Activation de l'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la fonction d'coute distance l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. Entrez l'ID ou l'alias de l'abonn et appuyez sur pour continuer. Modifiez les ID composs prcdemment et appuyez sur pour continuer. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur distance ou jusqu' coute 6 7 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'coute des sons ambiants de la radio surveille commence pour la dure programme et l'cran affiche coute distance. Lorsque la 1 2 3 4 453 Franais (Canada) minuterie sarrte, une tonalit davertissement est mise et le voyant DEL steint. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.4 Listes de balayage Les listes de balayage sont cres et attribues des canaux ou des groupes. Votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la squence de canaux et de groupes dfinie dans la liste de balayage du canal ou du groupe actuel. Votre radio prend en charge jusqu' 250 listes de balayage, chacune pouvant comprendre jusqu' 16 membres. Il vous est galement possible de joindre une nouvelle liste de balayage l'aide de la fonction de programmation du clavier. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Configuration du panneau avant la page 220. L'icne Priorit s'affiche gauche de l'alias du membre, s'il est dfini, pour indiquer si le membre fait partie d'une liste de canaux de Priorit 1 ou de Priorit 2. Vous ne pouvez pas avoir plusieurs canaux de Priorit 1 ou de Priorit 2 dans une liste de balayage. Aucune icne Priorit ne s'affiche si le rglage de la priorit est Aucun. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. 6.11.4.1 Affichage d'une entre de la liste de balayage Chaque liste de balayage peut comprendre des entres analogiques et des entres numriques. Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des entres de la liste de balayage sur votre radio. Lorsque vous modifiez une liste de balayage, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des canaux ou en tablir l'ordre de priorit. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 454 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur des membres de la liste. ou pour afficher chacun 4 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 6.11.4.2 Affichage des entres de la liste de balayage laide de la recherche dalias Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des entres de la liste de balayage de la radio l'aide de la recherche d'alias. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 455 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) 6.11.4.3 Ajout dentres la liste de balayage 6 Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter des entres la liste de balayage de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 4 5 456 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ajouter un membre. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au niveau de priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite, immdiatement suivi du message En ajouter un autre?. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour ajouter une entre. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Rptez tape 5 et tape 6. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour enregistrer la liste actuelle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.4.4 Ajout d'entres la liste de balayage l'aide de la recherche d'alias Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter des entres la liste de balayage de la radio l'aide de la recherche d'alias. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ajouter un membre. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 5 Entrez le premier caractre de l'alias voulu. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. La recherche d'alias n'est pas sensible la casse. Si deux entres ou plus portent le mme nom, la radio affiche l'entre figurant en premier dans la liste. La premire ligne de texte affiche les caractres que vous avez entrs. La ligne de texte suivante affiche les rsultats de la recherche. 7 8 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au niveau de priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite, immdiatement suivi du message En ajouter un autre?. 9 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

457 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour ajouter une entre. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. Rptez l'tape tape 8 jusqu l'tape tape 5 . pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID enregistrer la liste actuelle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 6.11.4.5 Suppression d'une entre de la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les entres de la liste de balayage. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 458 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche Supprimer l'entre?. 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui pour supprimer l'entre. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 Rptez tape 4 jusqu' tape 6 pour supprimer d'autres entres. Appuyez longuement sur d'accueil aprs avoir supprim les alias et les ID voulus. pour revenir l'cran 6.11.4.6 Configuration de lordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer lordre de priorit des entres de la liste de balayage de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 8 1 2 Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Liste de balayage. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Modifier les priorits. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusquau niveau de priorit voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Lcran affiche un bref avis de russite avant de revenir lcran prcdent. Licne Priorit saffiche la gauche de lalias du membre. 459 Franais (Canada) 6.11.5 Balayage Lorsque vous dmarrez un balayage, votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la liste de balayage du canal actuel. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. Pendant un balayage bimode, si vous employez un canal numrique et si votre radio capte un canal analogique, votre radio passe automatiquement du mode numrique au mode analogique pendant la dure de la communication. L'inverse est galement vrai. Il y a deux faons de dmarrer un balayage :

Balayage du canal principal (manuel) Votre radio effectue le balayage de tous les canaux et de tous les groupes de votre liste de balayage. Au dmarrage du balayage, votre radio peut, selon les rglages dfinis, commencer automatiquement par le dernier canal ou groupe actif lors du dernier balayage ou par le canal partir duquel le balayage a t lanc. 460 Balayage auto (automatique) Votre radio dmarre automatiquement le balayage lorsque vous slectionnez un canal ou un groupe pour lequel la fonction balayage auto est active. AVIS:

Lorsque vous configurez la Rception de messages de groupe dans la liste de balayage, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des messages de groupe partir de canaux autres que de l'accueil. Votre radio est en mesure de rpondre au groupe des messages sur votre canal d'accueil, mais n'est pas en mesure de rpondre des canaux autres que ceux de l'accueil. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-

vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.11.5.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage sur votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balayer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat scan. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un canal ou un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio demeure sur ce canal pendant une dure programme appele priode d'attente . Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des transmissions pendant le balayage. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'tat de 1 balayage requis, puis appuyez sur slectionner. pour le Si le balayage est activ :

L'cran affiche Balayage activ et l'icne Balayage. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Si le balayage est dsactiv :

L'cran affiche Balayage dsactiv. L'icne de balayage disparat. Le voyant DEL steint. 6.11.5.2 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. La radio reprend le balayage des autres canaux ou des groupes si vous ne rpondez pas dans le dlai de mise en attente. 461 Franais (Canada) 6.11.5.3 Suppression des canaux nuisibles Si un canal met continuellement des appels indsirables ou du bruit (canal nuisible ), vous pouvez liminer temporairement ce canal indsirable de la liste de balayage. Cette possibilit n'existe pas pour le canal employ comme canal slectionn. Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. 1 Lorsque votre radio capte un canal indsirable ou nuisible, appuyez sur la touche programme Suppr. canal nuisible et maintenez-la jusqu' ce qu'une tonalit retentisse. 2 Relchez la touche programme Suppr canal nuisible. Le canal nuisible est supprim. 6.11.5.4 Restauration des canaux nuisibles Suivez la procdure suivante pour restaurer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. 462 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la. Arrtez et redmarrez un balayage l'aide de la touche programme Balayage ou du menu. Changez de canal l'aide de la touche Canal prcdent/suivant. 6.11.6 Balayage par vote Le balayage par vote vous permet d'obtenir une zone de couverture tendue l o plusieurs stations de base transmettent des donnes identiques sur diffrents canaux analogiques. Votre radio effectue le balayage des canaux analogiques de plusieurs stations de base et slectionne le signal reu le plus fort. Une fois la slection dtermine, la radio reoit les transmissions de cette station de base. Pendant un balayage par vote, le voyant DEL jaune clignote et l'cran affiche l'icne Balayage par vote. Pour rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage par vote, consultez la section Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage la page 461. 6.11.7 Rglages des contacts La fonction Contacts constitue le carnet d'adresses de votre radio. Chaque entre est associe un alias ou un ID que vous utilisez pour passer un appel. Les entres sont classes alphabtiquement. Chaque entre, selon le contexte, correspond diffrents types d'appels : appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel gnral, appel PC ou appel de rpartition. Les appels PC et les appels console rpartiteur sont des appels de donnes. Ils ne sont disponibles qu'avec les applications. Pour plus de dtails, reportez-vous la documentation sur les applications de donnes. De plus, le menu Contacts vous permet d'attribuer chaque entre une ou plusieurs touches numriques programmables sur un microphone clavier. Si une touche numrique est attribue une entre, votre radio peut excuter la composition rapide de l'entre. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Un crochet prcde chaque touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le crochet prcde le mot Vide, aucune touche numrique n'a t attribue l'entre. Chaque entre des contacts affiche les renseignements suivants :

Type d'appel Alias d'appel ID dappel AVIS:

Si la fonction Cryptage est active sur un canal, vous pouvez passer des appels crypts de type groupe, individuel ou gnral sur ce canal. Seule une radio cible dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. 6.11.7.1 Appels de groupe faits l'aide de la liste de contacts Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des appels de groupe l'aide de la liste de contacts partir de la radio. 463 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre.Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.7.2 Appels privs faits laide de la liste de contacts 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsqu'un utilisateur du groupe rpond. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe, et l'alias ou l'ID ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID de la radio mettrice. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 464 4 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche lalias de destination. 6.11.7.3 Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables Franais (Canada) 5 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. Lcran affiche lalias ou lID de la radio mettrice. 7 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Appel termin. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Touche programmable. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la touche numrique voulue na pas t attribue une entre, appuyez sur ou 465 Franais (Canada) jusqu la touche numrique voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si la touche numrique voulue a t attribue une entre, lcran affiche La cl est dj affecte et puis, la premire ligne de texte affiche Remplacer?. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La radio fait entendre une tonalit de russite et lcran affiche Contact enregistr et un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur revenir lcran prcdent. ou jusqu Non pour Chaque entre peut tre associe diffrentes touches numriques. Le signe touche numrique attribue une entre. Si le signe prcde chaque prcde le message Vide, cette touche numrique nest pas attribue. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas 2 3 prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Lcran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6.11.7.4 Dissociation dune entre et de la touche numrique programmable 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu lalias ou lID voulu. Passez tape 4. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 466 Franais (Canada) 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Touche programmable. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.11.7.5 Ajout d'un nouveau contact Suivez la procdure suivante pour ajouter de nouveaux contacts sur votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Vide. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de texte affiche Supprimer de toutes les touches. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. AVIS:

Lorsquune entre est supprime, lassociation entre lentre et les touches numriques programmes est supprime. Une tonalit de russite retentit. Lcran affiche le message Contact enregistr. Lcran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Nouveau contact. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur type de contact, soit Contact Radio, soit Contact pour slectionner le ou tl. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 467 Franais (Canada) 5 Entrer le numro du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. 6 Entrer le nom du contact l'aide du clavier et appuyez sur pour continuer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Une tonalit de russite retentit.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Configurer par dfaut. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Une tonalit de russite retentit.L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche l'alias ou de l'ID slectionn par dfaut. ct de 6.11.7.6 Configuration du contact par dfaut Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le contact par dfaut de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6.11.8 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Cette fonction vous permet de configurer des sonneries d'appel ou de message texte. 7 1 468 Franais (Canada) 6.11.8.1 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries dappel des avertissements dappel Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Aver. dappel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu la sonnerie 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. voulue. Appuyez sur slection. Lcran affiche slectionne. pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie 6.11.8.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels privs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels privs de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 469 5 6 7 1 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appel indiv.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche ct du message Allum. 2 3 4 5 6 470 7 1 Si les sonneries d'appel individuel sont actives, l'cran affiche ct du message teint. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la fonction est active, d'Activ.Si cette option est dsactive, s'affiche plus ct de Activ. apparat ct ne 6.11.8.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel des appels slectifs de la radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appel Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la slectif. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 6 7 1 L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. pour effectuer la ct de la sonnerie 6.11.8.4 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries d'appel des messages textes Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries de messages texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 471 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la sonnerie Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de ct de la nouvelle sonnerie voulue. Appuyez sur slection. L'cran affiche slectionne. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Message texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche et la sonnerie actuelle. 6.11.8.5 Activer ou dsactiver les sonneries dappel des tats de tlmtrie avec message texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries d'appel d'tat de tlmtrie avec message texte sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 472 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la prdfinies lorsque vous recevez un appel priv, un avertissement dappel ou un message texte de la part dun contact particulier.La radio fait entendre chaque style de sonnerie lorsque vous parcourez la liste. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonn. dappels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tlmtrie. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.8.6 Attribuer des styles de sonneries Vous pouvez programmer votre radio pour quelle mette une sonnerie particulire parmi les onze sonneries Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les entres sont tries alphabtiquement. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 Modifier. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 473 La tonalit slectionne est indique par l'icne

. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Voir/

Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur menu Sonnerie Licne slectionne. 5 6 jusqu ce que lcran affiche le indique la tonalit actuellement Appuyez sur ou jusqu la tonalit voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Licne saffiche ct de celui slectionn. 6.11.8.7 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 6.11.9 474 Fonctions du Journal des appels Votre radio fait le suivi de tous les appels individuels que vous avez faits, reus et manqus rcemment. Utilisez le journal des appels pour afficher et grer les derniers appels. Les Alertes d'appels manqus peuvent tre incluses dans les journaux d'appels, selon la configuration du systme sur votre radio. Dans chacune des listes d'appels, vous pouvez excuter les tches suivantes :

Stocker l'alias ou l'ID dans les contacts Supprimer un appel Supprimer tous les appels Afficher les dtails 6.11.9.1 Affichage des derniers appels 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur Les listes offertes sont Manqus, Rpondus et Sortants. jusqu la liste voulue. ou Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche lentre la plus rcente. Si la liste est vide :

Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou pour voir la liste. L'cran affiche Liste vide. Vous pouvez lancer un Appel individuel avec lalias ou lID affich lcran en appuyant sur la touche PTT. 6.11.9.2 Suppression des appels de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des appels de la liste d'appel. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer l'entre?. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 475 1 2 3 4 5 La radio revient l'cran prcdent. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficher les Franais (Canada) 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour slectionner Oui et supprimer l'entre. L'cran affiche Entre supprime. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.9.3 Afficher les dtails de la liste d'appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appel sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Journal des appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 476 3 4 5 1 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche les dtails dappel. 6.11.9.4 Stockage des alias ou des ID de la liste dappels Suivez la procdure suivante pour stocker les alias ou les ID de la liste d'appels sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Journal des Vous pouvez galement enregistrer un ID sans un alias. appels. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Stocker. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 6 Entrez le reste des caractres de l'alias voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.10 Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle. Cette fonction est offerte uniquement pour les alias ou les ID d'abonn et est accessible par le menu Contacts, la numrotation manuelle ou la touche d'accs direct programme. 6.11.10.1 Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. 477 Franais (Canada) 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche le message Avis d'appel et l'alias ou lID de l'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Avert. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. dappel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Lcran affiche Avert. dappel ainsi que lalias ou lID dabonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 4 6.11.10.2 Avis dappels faits laide de la liste de contacts 5 Attendez la confirmation. Si la radio reoit la confirmation, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 478 Franais (Canada) 6.11.10.3 Avis d'appel fait l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour passer des avis d'appel l'aide de la numrotation manuelle partir de votre radio. 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Aver. d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche Avert. d'appel ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 Attendez la confirmation. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Si la radio reoit la confirmation de lavis dappel, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Dans le cas contraire, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour 6.11.10.4 Rponse un avertissement dappel Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. 1 2 3 4 479 Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche la liste des notifications d'avertissement d'appel accompagne de l'alias ou de l'ID de la radio de l'appelant. AVIS:

Un microphone clavier est requis pour excuter cette fonction. Selon la configuration par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme, vous pouvez rpondre un avertissement d'appel en procdant de l'une des manires suivantes :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT et rpondez par un appel individuel directement l'appelant. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour continuer la communication de groupe d'appels normale. L'avertissement d'appel est dplac vers l'option Appel manqu dans le menu du Journal d'appels. Vous pouvez rpondre l'appelant partir du journal Appel manqu. Lors dun appel, la radio rceptrice affiche lalias de lappelant de la radio mettrice. La liste des alias dappelants peut stocker jusqu 500 alias de radios mettrices. Vous pouvez afficher ou faire des appels privs partir de la liste des alias dappelants. Lorsque vous teignez votre radio, lhistorique des alias dappelants rcepteurs est supprim de la liste des alias. 6.11.11.1 Affichage de la liste des alias dappelants Vous pouvez accder la liste des alias dappelants pour afficher les dtails de lalias metteur. Pour plus d'informations ce sujet, reportez-vous Liste de notifications la page 217 et Fonctions du Journal des appels la page 148. 6.11.11 Alias dappelant dynamique Cette fonction vous permet de modifier dynamiquement un alias dappelant partir du panneau avant de la radio. 1 2 480 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Alias dappelants. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 3 4 1 2 Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur lappelant souhait.>

ou jusqu <lalias de 4 Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Appuyez sur ou jusqu la liste voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Afficher les dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.11.12 Mode muet 6.11.11.2 Lancement dun appel priv partir de la liste dalias dappelants Vous pouvez accder la liste des alias dappelants pour lancer un appel priv. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Alias dappelants. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. 481 Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 6.11.12.1 Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet activ. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. L'cran affiche licne Mode muet sur l'cran d'accueil. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. 6.11.12.2 Rglage de la minuterie du mode muet La fonction Mode muet peut tre active pour une dure prdtermine en rglant la minuterie du mode muet. La 482 dure de la minuterie est configure dans le menu de la radio et peut tre comprise entre 0,5 et 6 heures. Le mode muet est quitt lorsque la minuterie expire. Si la minuterie est laisse 0, la radio reste en mode muet pendant une priode indfinie jusqu' ce que lon appuie sur la touche programme Mode muet. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mode muet. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis appuyez sur pour modifier la valeur ou parleur est rtabli. 5

. 6.11.12.3 Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. L'cran affiche Mode muet dsactiv. Franais (Canada) Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est arrte. AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. 6.11.13 Fonctionnement durgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref De 0,05 0,75 seconde. Appui long 483 Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. De 1,00 3,75 secondes. L'icne Mode muet disparat de l'cran d'accueil. Franais (Canada) La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. Rgulier Silencieux AVIS:

Si un appui bref sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une longue pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si un appui long sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une courte pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :

Alarme durgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal AVIS:

Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :

La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. 6.11.13.1 Rception dune alarme durgence Lorsque vous recevez une alarme d'urgence :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche l'icne Urgence et l'alias de l'metteur de l'appel d'urgence; s'il y a plus d'une alarme 484 Franais (Canada) d'urgence, tous les alias de l'metteur de l'appel d'urgence sont affichs dans liste des alarmes. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

S'il y a une seul l'alarme, appuyez sur pour afficher plus de dtails. 6 La tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL clignote en rouge jusqu ce que vous quittiez le mode durgence. Cependant, la tonalit peut tre coupe. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour appeler le groupe de radios pour lequel une alarme durgence a t mise. S'il y a plus d'une alarme, appuyez sur ou Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche jusqu' l'alias requis, puis appuyez sur pour plus de dtails. programmable. Quittez le mode durgence. Voir Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence la page 486. Appuyez sur s'offrent vous. pour afficher les options qui 7 Pour revenir l'cran d'accueil, effectuez les oprations suivantes :

Appuyez sur liste des alarmes. et slectionnez Oui pour quitter la a Appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. c Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Slectionnez Liste des alarmes pour consulter de nouveau la liste des alarmes. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil et l'cran affiche l'icne d'urgence. 2 3 4 485 Franais (Canada) 6.11.13.2 Rponse une alarme durgence 1 Assurez-vous que l'cran affiche la liste des 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. alarmes. Appuyez sur ou l'ID voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour transmettre un message vocal sans urgence au groupe cibl par l'alarme d'urgence. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. AVIS:

La voix d'urgence ne peut tre transmise que par la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence. Toutes les autres radios (y compris la radio rceptrice de la transmission d'urgence) transmettent la voix sans urgence. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. L'cran affiche l'icne Appel de groupe et l'ID, l'ID de la radio mettrice et la liste des alarmes. 6.11.13.3 Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence aprs avoir reu une alarme d'urgence :

Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Votre radio demeure en mode d'urgence. Supprimez les alarmes. 486 teignez la radio. 6.11.13.4 Envoi des alarmes durgence Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication d'alerte sur un groupe de radios. Votre radio n'affiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode d'urgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des alertes d'urgence partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Vous voyez lun des rsultats suivants :

L'cran affiche le message Alarmes Tx et l'alias de destination. Lcran affiche le message Tlgramme Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit Recherche d'urgence peut tre programme partir du CPS. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye. En cas d'chec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche le message chec de l'alarme. La radio quitte le mode d'alarme d'urgence et revient l'cran d'accueil. 487 Franais (Canada) 6.11.13.5 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence avec un appel un groupe de radios. Lorsqu'une radio du groupe accuse rception de l'alarme d'urgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal d'urgence programm. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. L'cran affiche Envoi d'alarme en alternance avec l'ID de votre radio. Vous voyez ce qui suit :

Lcran affiche le message Tlgramme Tx et lalias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence.La tonalit de la recherche d'urgence peut tre programme par votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur systme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche Alarme envoye. Votre radio passe en mode d'appel d'urgence lorsque l'cran affiche le message Urgence et l'alias du groupe de destination. 488 3 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de 7 Pour quitter le mode d'urgence une fois l'appel conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel de groupe. termin, appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsactive. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. Franais (Canada) 4 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'cran affiche l'alias de l'appelant et l'alias de groupe. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 6.11.13.6 Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . AVIS:

Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. 489 Franais (Canada) Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:

Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 490 6.11.13.7 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active ou sur l'interrupteur au pied Urgence. Vous voyez l'un des rsultats suivants :

L'cran affiche le message Alarme Tx et l'alias de destination. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. L'icne Urgence s'affiche. 2 Lorsque l'cran affiche le message Alarme envoye, parlez clairement dans le microphone. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :

Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre microphone branch et rception dappels arrive son terme. Aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode d'urgence. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil. 6.11.13.9 Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence 6.11.13.8 Ractivation du mode durgence Cette fonction n'est offerte que sur la radio qui envoie l'alarme d'urgence. Votre radio quitte le mode d'urgence lorsque :

Un accus de rception est reu (dans le cas de Effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

l'alarme d'urgence seulement). Changez le canal pendant que la radio est en Toutes les tentatives d'envoi de l'alarme ont t mode d'urgence. effectues. AVIS:

Vous pouvez ractiver le mode d'urgence seulement si vous activez l'alarme d'urgence sur le nouveau canal. Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active pendant que la radio est dans un tat d'activation du mode d'urgence ou de transmission d'urgence. La radio quitte alors le mode d'urgence et ractive l'urgence. AVIS:

Si la radio est mise hors tension, elle quitte le mode d'urgence. La radio ne ractive pas automatiquement le mode durgence lorsquelle est remise sous tension. Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence sur votre radio. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. dsactiv. 491 Franais (Canada) Changez de canal pour un nouveau canal qui n'a pas t configur avec le mode d'urgence. L'cran affiche Pas d'urgence. 6.11.14 Messagerie texte 6.11.13.10 Supprimez lalarme de la liste dalarmes Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste Alarmes. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alarme voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 492 Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 6.11.14.1 Messages texte Les messages texte sont enregistrs de la bote de rception et classs du plus rcent au plus ancien. 6.11.14.1.1 Affichage des messages texte 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bote rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

Lcran affiche Liste vide. Une sonnerie se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. 4 1 2 3 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusquau message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne dobjet pourrait safficher si le message provient dune application de courriel. 6.11.14.1.2 Afficher des messages texte dtat de tlmtrie Suivez la procdure permettant d'afficher un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie partir de la bote de rception. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 493 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un message texte d'tat de tlmtrie. L'cran affiche Tlmtrie : <Status Text Message>. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir 6.11.14.1.3 Rponse des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un message texte :

L'cran affiche la liste de notification comprenant l'alias ou l'ID de l'expditeur. 494 AVIS:

La radio quitte lcran dalerte de message texte et achemine un Appel individuel ou de groupe lexpditeur du message si le bouton PTT est enfonc. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Lire. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche le message texte. La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Lire plus tard. Appuyez sur slection. La radio revient l'cran affich prcdant la rception du message texte. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

L'cran affiche l'icne Message. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur rception. pour revenir la bote de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de Appuyez nouveau sur pour rpondre au message texte, le transfrer ou le supprimer. 6.11.14.1.4 Rponse des messages texte par un texte rapide Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre aux messages texte par des messages texte rapides sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

texte. Passez l'tape tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 7 rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne d'objet pourrait s'afficher si le message provient d'une application de courriel. Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rponse rapide. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 495 Appuyez sur la touche programme Message Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rpondre. Franais (Canada) 8 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 9 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. 6.11.14.1.5 496 Renvoi des messages texte Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :

Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour renvoyer le mme message En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio revient l'cran d'option Renvoyer. 6.11.14.1.6 Transfre des messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte partir de votre radio. Depuis l'cran d'option Renvoyer :

1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Transfrer et appuyez sur un autre abonn ou un alias de groupe ou un ID. pour envoyer le mme message Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement slectionner manuellement l'adresse de la radio cible

(consultez la section Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle la page 497). 6.11.14.1.7 Transfre des messages texte laide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour transfrer les messages texte l'aide de la numrotation manuelle de votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Transfrer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur au mme alias ou ID d'abonn ou de groupe. pour envoyer le mme message 497 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la L'cran affiche Numro de la radio :. 3 4 Modification de messages texte Slectionnez Modifier pour modifier le message. AVIS:

Si le message comporte une ligne d'objet (s'il a t envoy partir d'une application de courriel), il est impossible de la modifier. Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour 1 L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.14.1.8 498 2 Utilisez les touches du clavier pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur ou pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur pour supprimer les caractres inutiles. Franais (Canada) Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 3 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur

. Rdaction de messages texte Suivez la procdure suivante pour rdiger des messages texte sur la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message 4 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer, Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. puis appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Enregistrer, puis appuyez sur enregistrer le message dans le dossier Brouillons. pour Appuyez sur pour modifier le message. Appuyez sur pour choisir entre la suppression du message ou son enregistrement dans le dossier Brouillons. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Composer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Un curseur clignotant apparat. 4 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur d'une 6.11.14.1.9 499 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur d'une espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 5 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur

. Envoi de messages texte Supposons que vous avez rcemment crit ou enregistr un message texte. Slectionnez le destinataire du message. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu lalias ou lID voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu Num. Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur ou pour modifier, supprimer ou enregistrer le

. Appuyez sur message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur

. pour effectuer la manuelle. Appuyez sur slection.Entrez lID dabonn. La premire ligne de lcran affiche le message Numro radio :. La deuxime ligne de lcran affiche un curseur clignotant. Entrez lalias ou lID dabonn. Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenvoi du message est en cours. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. 6.11.14.1.10 500 Lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message Le message est dplac dans le dossier Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit faible retentit. Lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. Messages envoys. denvoi. Le message est marqu avec une icne chec AVIS:

Pour un nouveau message texte crit, la radio vous renvoie lcran doption Renvoyer. 6.11.14.1.11 Suppression des messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Franais (Canada) texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bote rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La ligne dobjet pourrait safficher si le message provient dune application de courriel. 501 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Oui. Appuyez Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bote de sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Lcran revient la bote de rception. 6.11.14.1.12 Suppression de tous les messages texte de la bote de rception Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte de la bote de rception de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. rception. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la bote de rception est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 2 3 4 5 5 6 7 502 6.11.14.2 Messages texte envoys Une fois qu'un message texte est envoy vers une autre radio, il est enregistr dans les messages envoys. Le dernier message texte envoy s'affiche toujours en haut de la liste des messages envoys. Vous pouvez renvoyer, transfrer, modifier ou supprimer un message texte envoy. Le dossier des messages envoys peut contenir au maximum les 30 derniers messages envoys. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message envoy remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. Si vous quittez l'cran d'envoi de message pendant que l'envoi du message est en cours, la radio met jour l'tat du message dans le dossier des messages envoys sans fournir d'indication sonore ou visuelle. Si la radio change de mode ou est mise hors tension avant que l'tat du message ne soit mis jour dans le dossier des messages envoys, la radio ne peut terminer l'envoi du message en cours et marque automatiquement celui-ci d'une icne chec de l'envoi. La radio prend en charge un maximum de cinq envois de message en cours la fois. Pendant ce temps, la radio ne Franais (Canada) peut envoyer aucun autre message et marque automatiquement les nouveaux messages de l'icne chec de l'envoi. Vous pouvez revenir l'cran d'accueil tout moment en appuyant longuement sur la touche

. AVIS:

Si le type de canal (p. ex. numrique conventionnel, Capacity Plus) ne correspond pas, vous pouvez uniquement modifier, transfrer ou supprimer un message envoy. 6.11.14.2.1 Affichage des messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher des messages texte envoys partir de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 503 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages envoys. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit grave se fait entendre, si la sonnerie du pav numrique est active. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'icne affiche dans le coin suprieur droit de l'cran indique l'tat du message. Voir Icnes des lments envoys. Envoi de messages texte envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message texte envoy sur votre radio. Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :

1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez sur

. 2 Vous pouvez soit renvoyer ou transfrer le message texte envoy. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-

dessous :

pour Renvoyer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pour Transfrer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. 6.11.14.2.2 504 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 178. 6.11.14.2.3 Suppression d'un message texte envoy partir du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous affichez un message envoy :

1 Appuyez sur

. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.14.2.4 Suppression de tous les messages texte envoys du dossier messages envoys Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les messages texte du dossier des messages envoys. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 505 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages envoys. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si le dossier Messages envoys est vide :

L'cran affiche Liste vide. Une tonalit retentit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient l'cran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 506 6.11.14.3 Messages texte enregistrs Vous pouvez enregistrer un message texte afin de l'envoyer plus tard. Si l'cran de rdaction ou de modification de message se ferme pendant que vous rdigez ou modifiez un message texte, par exemple si vous avez appuy sur le bouton PTT ou chang de mode, votre message est automatiquement enregistr dans les brouillons. Le message texte le plus rcent figure toujours en haut de la liste des brouillons. Le dossier Brouillons permet de stocker au maximum les 10 derniers messages enregistrs. Une fois le dossier plein, le prochain message enregistr remplace automatiquement le plus ancien message enregistr dans le dossier. 6.11.14.3.1 Affichage de messages texte enregistrs 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur or to Modifier. Appuyez 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Brouillons. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusquau message voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.14.3.2 Modification de messages texte enregistrs sur pour effectuer la slection. Un curseur clignotant apparat. 3 Utilisez le clavier pour taper votre message. Appuyez sur espace vers la gauche. pour dplacer le curseur dune Appuyez sur dune espace vers la droite. ou pour dplacer le curseur Appuyez sur inutiles. pour supprimer les caractres Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 1 Pendant que vous visualisez le message, appuyez 4 Une fois votre message compos, appuyez sur sur

. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

507 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Envoyer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Brouillons. Appuyez sur pour envoyer le message. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir entre supprimer ou enregistrer le Appuyez sur ou jusquau message message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Slectionnez pour supprimer le message texte. 6.11.14.4 Message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 50 messages texte rapides, selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. Les messages texte rapides sont prdfinis, mais vous pouvez modifier chaque message avant de l'envoyer. 6.11.14.3.3 Suppression de messages texte enregistrs du dossier brouillons 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 508 Franais (Canada) 6.11.14.4.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au texte rapide voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le destinataire et envoyer le message. Appuyez sur la touche programme Message texte. Passez tape 6. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'envoi du message est en cours. Passez tape 6. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. En cas d'chec :

2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Messages. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Texte rapide. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. La radio passe l'cran d'option Renvoyer. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Renvoi des messages texte la page 178. 509 Franais (Canada) 6.11.15 Configuration de saisie de texte Votre radio vous permet de configurer diffrents textes. Vous pouvez configurer les paramtres suivants pour la saisie de texte dans votre radio :

Prdiction de texte Mot correct Majuscule en dbut de phrase Mes mots Chiffres Symboles Frappe prdictive ou multiple Langue (si programme) Votre radio prend en charge les mthodes de saisie de texte suivantes :

AVIS:

Appuyez sur l'cran prcdent ou maintenez enfonce la touche en tout temps pour revenir pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. 6.11.15.1 Activation ou dsactivation du mot correct Cette option fournit d'autres choix de mots quand le mot entr dans l'diteur de texte n'est pas reconnu par le dictionnaire intgr. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 510 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Correction ortho. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur pour activer la correction orthographique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la correction orthographique. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. 6.11.15.2 Activation ou dsactivation de la prdiction du texte Prdiction de texte : Votre radio peut apprendre des squences de mots courantes que vous entrez souvent. Elle peut alors prdire le prochain mot que vous dsirez utiliser aprs la saisie du premier mot d'une squence de mots courante dans l'diteur de texte. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 511 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Prdict. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour activer la prdiction de texte. Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. apparat ct Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le contrle dynamique de la distorsion du microphone. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus 6.11.15.3 Majuscule en dbut de phrase Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver Maj. Phrase. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cette fonction met automatiquement la premire lettre du premier mot en majuscule pour chaque nouvelle phrase. Appuyez sur fonction est active, pour activer Maj. phrase. Si la apparat ct d'Activ. 512 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour dsactiver Maj. phrase. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.15.4 Afficher des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter vos propres mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Votre radio contient une liste de ces mots. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. 6.11.15.5 Modifier des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez modifier les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4 5 6 1 513 Franais (Canada) 7 8 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au mot voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Modifier. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 9 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la gauche. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur d'une espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste de mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 2 3 4 5 6 514 10 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'enregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et l'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.15.6 Ajouter des mots personnaliss Vous pouvez ajouter des mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de la radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Ajouter mot. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche la liste des mots personnaliss. 7 Utilisez le clavier pour modifier votre mot personnalis. Appuyez sur pour dplacer le curseur dune espace vers la gauche. 515 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche pour dplacer le curseur dune espace vers la droite. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur la touche caractres inutiles. pour supprimer les Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur ou jusquau mot voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez longuement sur mode de saisie de texte. pour modifier le 8 Appuyez sur personnalis est termin. une fois que votre mot Lcran affiche un bref avis indiquant que lenregistrement de votre mot personnalis est en cours. Si le mot personnalis est sauvegard, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre et lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. 6.11.15.7 Supprimer un mot personnalis Vous pouvez supprimer les mots personnaliss enregistrs dans votre radio. 516 Sinon, une tonalit grave se fait entendre et lcran Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. affiche un bref avis dchec. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Supprimer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 7 1 8 Slectionnez un des lments suivants :

Au message Supprimer lentre?, appuyez sur Entre supprime. pour slectionner Oui. Lcran affiche Appuyez sur ou jusqu Non. Appuyez sur prcdent. pour revenir lcran 6.11.15.8 Supprimer tous les mots personnaliss Vous pouvez supprimer tous les mots personnaliss dans le dictionnaire intgr de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu Saisie texte. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mes mots. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

517 Franais (Canada) Au message Supprimer lentre?, appuyez Le dossier Mes tches sur Ttes entres supprimes. pour slectionner Oui. Lcran affiche Appuyez sur ou jusqu Non pour revenir lcran prcdent. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.16 Tickets de tche Cette fonction permet votre radio de recevoir des messages du rpartiteur dressant la liste des tches effectuer. AVIS:

Cette fonction peut tre personnalise partir du logiciel de programmation client (CPS) selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Il y a deux dossiers qui contiennent diffrents tickets de tche :

Les tickets de tche personnaliss attribus votre signature dans lID utilisateur. Le dossier Tches partages Les tickets de tche partags attribus un groupe de personnes. Vous pouvez rpondre aux tickets de tche afin de les classer dans les dossiers de tickets de tche. Par dfaut, les dossiers sont Tous, Nouveaux, Commencs et Termins. Pour obtenir dix autres dossiers, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Les tickets de tche sont conservs mme lorsque la radio est mise hors tension, puis remise sous tension. Tous les tickets de tche sont situs dans le dossier Tous. Selon la faon dont votre radio est programme, les tickets de tche sont tris par leur niveau de priorit suivi par lheure de rception. Les nouveaux tickets de tche, ceux avec les plus rcents changements ltat et ceux avec la plus haute priorit sont affichs en premier. Lorsque le nombre maximum de tickets de tche est atteint, le prochain ticket de tche remplace automatiquement le dernier ticket de tche sur la radio. Votre radio prend en charge un maximum de 100 ou 500 tickets de tche, selon le modle de radio. Pour obtenir des 518 renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio dtectera et annulera automatiquement les tickets de tche dupliqus qui possdent le mme ID de ticket de tche. Selon limportance du ticket de tche, le rpartiteur ajoute un niveau de priorit pour eux. Il existe trois niveaux de priorit : Priorit 1, Priorit 2 et Priorit 3. La Priorit 1 est la plus haute priorit et la Priorit 3 est la priorit la plus basse. Il existe galement des tickets de tche sans aucune priorit. Votre radio est mise jour conformment lorsque le rpartiteur effectue les changements suivants :

Modifier le contenu de tickets de tche. Ajouter ou modifier le niveau de priorit de tickets de Dplacer les tickets de tche dun dossier un autre tche. dossier. Annuler des tickets de tche. 6.11.16.1 Accs au dossier Tickets de tche Suivez la procdure d'accs au dossier Tickets de tche. Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou pour voir les Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 519 Franais (Canada) 6.11.16.2 Connexion ou dconnexion du serveur distant En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Cette fonction permet de se connecter et de se dconnecter du serveur distant en utilisant votre ID utilisateur. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Connexion. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si vous tes dj connect, l'option Dconnexion s'affiche dans le menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 1 2 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. 1 2 520 6.11.16.3 Cration de tickets de tche Votre radio peut crer des tickets de tche, bass sur un modle de ticket de tche, et envoyer la liste des tches accomplir. Un logiciel de programmation CPS est ncessaire pour configurer le modle de ticket de tche. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 3 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Crer un ticket. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.11.16.4 Rpondre des tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des tickets de tche sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 5 6 Appuyez de nouveau sur sous-menu. pour accder au Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la touche numrique correspondante (de 1 9) jusqu'

Rponse rapide. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 7 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 521 Franais (Canada) 6.11.16.5 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer le ticket de tche. 1 Utilisez le clavier numrique pour saisir le numro de salle requis. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' tat de salle. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' loption voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 522 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 5 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.16.6 Envoi de tickets de tche en utilisant plus d'un modle de ticket de tche Si votre radio est configure avec plus d'un modle de ticket de tche, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour envoyer les tickets de tche. Franais (Canada) 1 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' loption voulue. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Suppression de tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer des tickets de tche de votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Envoyer. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 3 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.16.7 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier Tous. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 523 Franais (Canada) 5 6 7 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au ticket de tche voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez de nouveau sur de travail est affich. pendant que le bon Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. 6.11.16.8 Supprimer tous les tickets de tche Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer tous les tickets de tche de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Tickets de tche. Passez tape 3. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusquaux Tickets de tche. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au dossier Tous. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 524 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tout supprimer. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Non. Appuyez sur La radio revient lcran prcdent. pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.17 Confidentialit Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir lcoute dun canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et lidentification de lutilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Franais (Canada) Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; lactivation de la fonction nest cependant pas ncessaire la rception dune telle transmission. Pendant quun canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue dtre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Certains modles de radio noffrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio prend en charge deux types de cryptage, mais un seul peut tre attribu votre radio. Ces fonctions sont les suivantes :

Cryptage de base Cryptage amlior Pour dcoder un appel crypt ou une transmission de donnes crypte, votre radio doit tre programme de manire avoir la mme cl de cryptage (cryptage de base) ou la mme valeur et le mme ID de cl (cryptage amlior) que la radio lorigine de la transmission. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant une cl de cryptage diffrente ou une valeur et un ID de cl diffrents, vous entendrez une transmission brouille 525 Franais (Canada)

(cryptage de base) ou vous nentendrez rien du tout

(cryptage amlior). Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. Le voyant DEL vert sallume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. AVIS:

Cette fonction nest pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. 6.11.17.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. Passez les tapes prcdentes. 526 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusquau <cryptage dsir>. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Si la fonction de cryptage est active, lcran affiche le signe vis--vis du message Activ. Si la fonction de cryptage est dsactive, lcran affiche une case vide vis--vis du message Activ. 6.11.18 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle Franais (Canada) Commande multisite Votre radio peut rechercher des sites et passer dun site un autre lorsque le signal est faible ou quelle ne parvient pas dtecter le signal provenant du site actuel. Lorsque le signal est fort, la radio demeure sur le site courant. Ce paramtre sapplique lorsque le canal actuel de la radio fait partie dune configuration de site IP interconnect ou multisite Capacity Plus. Votre radio peut excuter lune ou lautre des recherches de site suivantes :

Recherche de site automatique Recherche de site manuelle Si le canal courant est un canal multisite comportant une liste ditinrance et se trouvant hors de porte, et que le site est dverrouill, votre radio effectue galement la recherche de site automatique. 6.11.18.1 Si la radio trouve un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si la radio choue trouver un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 6.11.18.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. L'cran affiche Site verrouill. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

527 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la 4 radio est dverrouille. L'cran affiche Site Dverrouill. Appuyez sur ou pour voir les sites voisins. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.11.18.3 Accs la liste de sites voisins 6.11.19 Scurit Cette fonction permet lutilisateur de vrifier la liste des sites adjacents du site daccueil actuel. Suivez la procdure pour accder la liste des sites voisins :

Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Cette fonction vous permet d'activer ou dsactiver n'importe quelle radio du rseau. Par exemple, vous pourriez vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de s'en servir, puis la ractiver une fois qu'elle est de nouveau en votre possession. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Vous ne recevrez aucune confirmation si vous appuyez sur Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. pendant que le processus d'activation ou de dsactivation de la radio est en cours. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. AVIS:

Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 1 2 3 528 6.11.19.1 Dsactivation des radios Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Dsac radio. Franais (Canada) L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.19.2 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts 2 3 Appuyez sur voulu. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 4 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Contacts.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu.Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. ou jusqu' Dsactiver la 529 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 5 L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.19.3 Dsactivation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour dsactiver votre radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 530 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au Numro de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :

Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur radio. ou jusqu' Dsactiver la 7 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID L'cran affiche un bref avis indiquant que l'excution de la requte est en cours. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Appuyez sur voulu. 2 3 Franais (Canada) 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.11.19.4 Activation des radios Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Activer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 531 Franais (Canada) 6.11.19.5 Activation des radios l'aide de la liste de contacts 5 Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer votre radio l'aide de la liste de contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert clignote.L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas dchec :

6 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur radio. ou pour activer la 6.11.19.6 Activation des radios l'aide de la numrotation manuelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer la radio l'aide de la numrotation manuelle. 1 2 3 4 532 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 7 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Num. manuelle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appel indiv.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La premire ligne de l'cran affiche Numro de la radio :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote.L'cran affiche le message Radio active ainsi que l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 8 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. Entrez l'ID de l'abonn et appuyez sur continuer. pour Appuyez sur radio. ou pour activer la 6.11.20 Travailleur solitaire Cette fonction dclenche le mode d'urgence s'il n'y a aucun signe d'activit par l'utilisateur, tel qu'appuyer sur une quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. 533 Franais (Canada) Si aucune activit n'est dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit l'utilisateur de l'expiration du dlai d'inactivit au moyen d'un signal sonore. 6.11.21 Bluetooth Si l'utilisateur ne donne aucune rponse l'avertissement avant l'expiration du dlai prdfini subsquent, la radio active une alarme d'urgence. Seulement une des alarmes d'urgence suivantes est associe cette fonction :

Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal La radio demeure dans l'tat d'urgence, ce qui permet la transmission des messages vocaux, jusqu' ce qu'une action soit excute. Reportez-vous Fonctionnement durgence la page 483 pour en savoir plus sur les faons de quitter le mode Urgence. AVIS:

L'excution de cette fonction est limite aux radios sur lesquelles la fonction est active.Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-

vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Cette fonctionnalit vous permet dutiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par lintermdiaire dune connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts lemploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. Cest--

dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et laccessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et lappareil Bluetooth ( moins de 10 m lun de lautre) afin de rtablir la rception. La fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Par exemple, un 534 scanneur, un appareil capteur et un appareil PTT seulement (POD). Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel dutilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur lensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes dappareil Bluetooth est efface. 6.11.21.1 Activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver Bluetooth. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mon tat. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lcran affiche Activ et Arrt. Ltat actuel est indiqu par licne

. 4 Effectuez lune des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. 6.11.21.2 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 535 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Connecter. 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 4 Faites un des suivants :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. L'cran affiche le message Connexion

<appareil>. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. L'cran affiche ct de l'appareil slectionn. Appuyez sur jusqu' Recherche pour trouver des appareils disponibles. Appuyez ou En cas d'chec :

sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. AVIS:

Si un code NIP est ncessaire, voir la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214. 1 2 3 536 Franais (Canada) 6.11.21.3 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth en mode Dtection Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth en mode dtection. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Une tonalit de russite retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> connect et l'icne de connexion Bluetooth. L'cran affiche ct de l'appareil slectionn. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. L'cran affiche le message Connexion choue. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.21.4 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Me chercher. pour effectuer la slection. Votre Appuyez sur radio peut maintenant tre dtecte par d'autres appareils Bluetooth pendant une dure programme. Il s'agit du Mode dtection. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 537 Franais (Canada) 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dconnecter. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le message Dconnexion de

<appareil>. AVIS:

Il est possible que la dconnexion de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Attendez la confirmation. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche <appareil> dconnect et l'icne Bluetooth connect disparat. Le disparat ct du de l'appareil connect. 6.11.21.5 538 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Rout. audio vers radio. vers Bluetooth. Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Rout. audio 6.11.21.6 Affichage de renseignements dtaills sur les appareils Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher les dtails de l'appareil sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Appareils. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'appareil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficher les Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Supprimer. dtails. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur L'cran affiche Dispositif supprim. pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 5 6.11.21.7 Supprimer le nom dun dispositif 6.11.21.8 Gain du micro Bluetooth Vous pouvez retirer un dispositif dconnect de la liste des dispositifs Bluetooth. Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur de contrler la valeur du gain du microphone de l'appareil Bluetooth connect. 539 Franais (Canada) 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Localisation lintrieur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Gain mic. BT. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur micro Bluetooth et aux valeurs courantes. Appuyez jusqu'au type de gain du ou sur modifier les valeurs ici. pour effectuer la slection. Vous pouvez Appuyez sur ou pour augmenter ou AVIS:

La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. La fonction Localisation interne est utilise pour assurer le suivi de lemplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. 6.11.22.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur diminuer les valeurs. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes. Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6.11.22 540 d. Appuyez sur l'intrieur. pour activer le positionnement programme. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche b. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. c. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. e. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver le positionnement l'intrieur. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Franais (Canada) L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. Une tonalit dchec retentit. a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne active. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible apparat sur l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec activation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 541 Franais (Canada) b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. L'cran affiche Localis. interne dsactive. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, l'icne de positionnement l'intrieur disponible disparat de l'cran d'accueil. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec dsactivation. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 2 3 4 6.11.22.2 Accs aux donnes sur lemplacement des balises de positionnement lintrieur Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder l'information des balises d'emplacement intrieur. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 542 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Bluetooth puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Localis. interne puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Balises, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Lcran affiche les informations sur les balises. 6.11.23 Liste de notifications Votre radio offre une liste de notification qui rassemble tous les vnements non lus sur le canal, par exemple les messages texte, les messages de tlmtrie, les appels manqus et les avertissements d'appel. L'cran affiche l'icne Notification lorsque la liste de notification comprend au moins un vnement. La liste prend en charge au maximum quarante (40) vnements non lus. Une fois la liste pleine, le prochain vnement remplace automatiquement l'vnement le plus ancien. Une fois les vnements lus, ils sont retirs de la liste de notifications. Dans le cas de messages texte, d'appels manqus ou dvnements davertissement d'appel, le nombre maximum est de 30 messages texte et 10 appels manqus ou avertissements d'appel. Ce nombre maximum est fonction des capacits de liste de chaque fonction (tickets de tche, message texte ou appels manqus et avertissements d'appel). 6.11.23.1 Accs liste de notification Suivez la procdure suivante pour accder la liste de notification sur votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 Franais (Canada) 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'vnement voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Maintenez enfonce la touche l'cran d'accueil. pour revenir 6.11.24 Systme ARTS Le systme ARTS est une fonctionnalit analogique seulement conue pour vous informer quand votre radio est en dehors de la zone de couverture des autres radios dotes du systme ARTS. Les radios dotes du systme ARTS transmettent ou reoivent priodiquement des signaux pour confirmer qu'elles se trouvent dans la zone de couverture l'une de l'autre. Votre radio fournit des indications d'tat comme suit :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Notifications. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Alerte initiale Une tonalit se fait entendre. L'cran affiche l'alias du canal et porte. 543 Franais (Canada) Alerte ARTS dans la zone de couverture Une tonalit se fait entendre, si programme. L'cran affiche l'alias du canal et porte. L'cran affiche l'icne Donnes volume lev. Le canal devient occup. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez Alerte ARTS hors de la zone de couverture sur le bouton PTT. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote rapidement. L'cran affiche Hors de la zone de couverture en alternance avec l'cran d'accueil. AVIS:

Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.11.25 Programmation par onde radio Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :

544 Lorsque l'OTAP est termine, selon la configuration :

Une tonalit retentit. L'cran affiche Actualisation Redmarrage. La radio redmarre en se mettant hors tension puis nouveau sous tension. Vous pouvez slectionner Redmarrer maintenant ou Reporter. Lorsque vous slectionnez Reporter, votre radio revient l'cran prcdent. L'cran affiche l'icne Retardateur OTAP jusqu' ce que le dmarrage automatique se produise. Lorsque votre radio se met sous tension aprs un redmarrage automatique :

En cas de russite, l'cran affiche MJ logiciel russie. logiciel. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche chec de la MJ Consultez Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel la page 255 pour connatre la version logicielle actuelle. 6.11.26 Slection de modes de connexion de priphriques tiers Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner l'un des modes de connexion de priphriques tiers :

4 5 Motorola Solutions PC et audio Accs aux donnes Tlmtrie Gnrique 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Type cble. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au mode de connexion voulu. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Cet cran montre le mode de connexion slectionn. L'cran revient au menu prcdent. 6.11.27 Indicateur dintensit du signal reu Cette fonction vous permet de prendre connaissance des valeurs de l'indicateur d'intensit du signal reu (RSSI). L'cran affiche l'icne RSSI dans le coin suprieur droit. Consultez la section Icnes d'affichage pour des dtails sur l'icne RSSI. 545 Franais (Canada) 6.11.27.1 Affichage des valeurs RSSI (indicateur dintensit de rception du signal) Fixez le microphone clavier navigation quadridirectionnelle (numro de pice Motorola Solutions RMN5127_) votre radio. Votre radio prend en charge lentre de mots de passe de quatre chiffres. Vous pouvez galement utiliser un microphone clavier pour entrer le mot de passe. Lorsquelle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. l'cran d'accueil, en utilisant le microphone clavier navigation quadridirectionnelle, appuyez trois fois, puis appuyez immdiatement sur sur trois fois. 6.11.28.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe Allumez la radio. Lcran affiche les valeurs RSSI courantes. Pour revenir l'cran d'accueil, appuyez et maintenez enfonc

. 6.11.28 Verrouillage par mot de passe Vous pouvez dfinir un mot de passe pour restreindre laccs votre radio. Chaque fois que vous allumez votre radio, vous tes invit entrer le mot de passe. 546 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. a Utilisez le microphone clavier. b Pour modifier la valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, appuyez sur ou

. Pour valider et passer au chiffre suivant, appuyez sur

. AVIS:

Lutilisation de linterrupteur au pied durgence permet daccder la radio sans entrer de mot de passe. 2 Appuyez sur pour confirmer le mot de passe. Si vous entrez le mot de passe correctement, la radio se met sous tension. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs les premire et seconde tentatives, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit continue se fait entendre. Lcran affiche Mot de passe erron. Rptez la procdure tape 1. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs la troisime tentative, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. Lcran affiche Mot de passe erron, puis Verrouillage radio. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. AVIS:

En tat de verrouillage, la radio ragit uniquement aux commandes du bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume et de la touche programme Rtroclairage. Franais (Canada) Attendez 15 minutes, le temps que le dlai de la minuterie dtat de verrouillage sachve, puis recommencez la procdure tape 1. AVIS:

Si vous teignez et rallumez votre radio, la minuterie de 15 minutes redmarre. 6.11.28.2 Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214 pour accder la radio. Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche Radio verrouille. 547 Franais (Canada) Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 214 pour accder la radio. 6.11.28.3 Activation/dsactivation du verrouillage par mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le verrouillage par mot de passe de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 548 4 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe verr.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. Utilisez le microphone clavier. Appuyez sur ou valeur numrique de chaque chiffre, puis pour modifier la pour valider et passer au appuyez sur chiffre suivant. Vous entendrez une tonalit de russite chaque fois que vous appuyez sur un chiffre. Appuyez sur pour saisir le mot de passe. Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct de Allumer. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Eteindre. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Eteindre. 6.11.28.4 Changement de mot de passe Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mot de passe sur votre radio. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) 4 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mot de passe verr.. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Entrez le mot de passe actuel quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. Si le mot de passe n'est pas valide, l'cran affiche Mot de passe erron et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Changer le 7 Entrez un nouveau mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. 8 Entrez de nouveau le mot de passe quatre chiffres, puis appuyez sur pour continuer. En cas de russite, l'cran affiche Mot de passe chang. En cas d'chec, l'cran affiche Mots de passe incorrects. 549 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. MdP. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 3 6.11.29 Configuration du panneau avant Il est possible de personnaliser certains paramtres des fonctions de Configuration du panneau avant (FPC) afin d'amliorer l'utilisation de votre radio. 6.11.29.1 Entre dans la Mode de configuration du panneau avant Vous pouvez revenir lcran daccueil tout moment en maintenant la touche enfonce. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Programmer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.11.29.2 Modifier les paramtres de mode FPC Utilisez les touches suivantes au besoin pendant la navigation dans les paramtres.

, Pour parcourir les options, augmenter ou rduire les valeurs ou naviguer verticalement. Pour slectionnez l'option ou entrer dans un sous-menu. Appuyez brivement pour revenir au menu prcdent ou quitter l'cran de slection. Maintenez cette touche enfonce pour revenir l'cran d'accueil. 6.11.30 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises 1 2 550 jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. Franais (Canada) La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

Il est possible dactiver ou de dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance l'aide dune radio dsigne (voir Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande individuelle) la page 223 et Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne (commande de groupe) la page 224). Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 551 Franais (Canada) 6.11.30.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Si le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, le ct du message Activ. ne saffiche plus 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. 2 Accdez cette fonction partir du menu. a Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour c Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi On, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. d Appuyez sur pour activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi. Si le Wi-Fi est activ, lcran affiche message Activ. ct du 6.11.30.2 Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande individuelle) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande individuelle (un un). AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. 1 Effectuez lune des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez longuement sur la touche programmable. Utilisez le clavier pour entrer lID, puis appuyez sur tape 3. pour slectionner. Passez 552 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la ou Appuyez sur Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche un bref avis de russite. En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 6.11.30.3 Franais (Canada) Activer ou dsactiver le Wi-Fi distance laide dune radio dsigne

(commande de groupe) Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi distance partir de la commande de groupe (un plusieurs). AVIS:

Seule une radio dote dun rglage de CPS particulier prend en charge cette fonction. Consultez votre revendeur ou votre administrateur systme pour plus dinformations. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contacts, puis appuyez sur pour slectionner. ou Appuyez sur ou lID dabonn voulu. pour slectionner lalias 553 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu Contrle Wi-

Fi, puis appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou Activ ou Dsactiv. pour slectionner Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. En cas de russite, lcran affiche Envoi russi. En cas dchec, lcran affiche un bref avis dchec. 6.11.30.4 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. 4 5 6 554 AVIS:

Vous pouvez galement vous connecter un point daccs rseau partir du menu. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, si un point daccs rseau nest pas prconfigur, loption Connecter nest pas disponible. Si la connexion choue, la radio affiche lcran davis dchec pendant un moment et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 5 Appuyez sur ou pour se Connecter, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 6 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel, entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur

. 7 Pour un rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise, le mot de passe est configur partir de RM. Si le mot de passe prconfigur est correct, votre radio se connecte automatiquement au point daccs rseau slectionn. Si le mot de passe prconfigur nest pas valide, lcran affiche Authentificat. - chec et revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. Lorsque la connexion est russie, la radio affiche un avis et le point daccs rseau est enregistr dans la liste des profils. 6.11.30.5 Vrification de l'tat de la connexion Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi pour connatre l'tat de la connexion avec l'annonce vocale. L'annonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv, Le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il n'y a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est dsactiv. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, connect lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau. L'cran affiche Wi-Fi activ, dconnecte lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais que la radio n'est pas connecte un rseau. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, 555 Franais (Canada) adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte d'tat Wi-Fi est affecte par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 6.11.30.6 Actualisation de la liste de rseaux Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour actualiser la liste de rseaux partir du menu. a. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. b. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 6.11.30.7 Ajout dun rseau c. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Quand vous entrez dans le menu Rseaux, la radio actualise automatiquement la liste des rseaux. Si vous tes dj dans le menu Rseaux, effectuez laction suivante pour actualiser la liste de rseaux. Appuyez sur ou pour Actualiser, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio sactualise et affiche la dernire liste de rseaux. AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. 556 Si un rseau prfr nest pas dans la liste de rseaux disponibles, effectuez les oprations suivantes pour ajouter un rseau. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour Ajouter un rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour 6 7 1 2 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou pour lOuvrir, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Entrez le mot de passe et appuyez sur

. La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le rseau est correctement enregistr. 6.11.30.8 Affichage des dtails de points daccs rseau Vous pouvez afficher les dtails des points daccs rseau. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 5 Entrez lidentifiant SSID (Service Set Identifier), puis appuyez sur

. Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 557 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour Appuyez sur ou pour afficher les dtails, puis sur appuyez sur slectionner. pour AVIS:

Lcran affiche des dtails diffrents pour les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA personnel et Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise. Wi-Fi WPA personnel Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche lidentifiant Service Set Identifier (SSID), le mode de scurit, ladresse Media Access Control (MAC) et ladresse Internet Protocol (IP). Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID et le mode de scurit. 3 4 5 558 Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise Pour un point daccs rseau connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP), lauthentification de phase 2, le nom du certificat, ladresse MAC, ladresse IP, la passerelle, le DNS1 et le DNS2. Pour un point daccs rseau non connect, votre radio affiche le SSID, le mode de scurit, lidentit, la mthode EAP, lauthentification de phase 2 et le nom du certificat. 6.11.30.9 Retrait de points daccs rseau AVIS:

Cette tche nest pas applicable aux rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise. Effectuez les oprations suivantes pour supprimer des points daccs rseau dans la liste de profils. 1 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou pour choisir le Wi-Fi, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. 6.12 Utilitaires Appuyez sur ou pour les Rseaux, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Appuyez sur ou pour slectionner un point daccs rseau, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 6.12.1 Niveau de silencieux Vous pouvez rgler le niveau du silencieux de la radio de manire filtrer les appels indsirables faible intensit de signal ou les canaux caractriss par un bruit de fond anormalement lev. Appuyez sur ou pour le Supprimer, puis Normal sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Serr Appuyez sur ou pour choisir Oui, puis sur appuyez sur pour slectionner. La radio affiche un mini-avis positif pour indiquer que le point daccs rseau slectionn est supprim avec succs. Ce filtre limine les appels indsirables ou le bruit de fond. Cependant, les appels provenant d'emplacements distants risquent alors d'tre galement limins. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. 559 Franais (Canada) 6.12.1.1 Configuration du niveau du silencieux Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le niveau du silencieux de recherche de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Silencieux. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Silencieux. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 560 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Normal. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Normal. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Serr. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Serr. L'cran revient automatiquement au menu prcdent. 6.12.2 Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Haute Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Faible Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. 6.12.2.1 Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) 3 4 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Puissance. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Haut. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Haut. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Basse. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Basse. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. pour revenir 561 Franais (Canada) 6.12.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte d'urgence entrante Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton programm Sonneries/

Alertes. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/Avert. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Toutes Tnlts. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur les tonalits et tous les avertissements. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver toutes Si la fonction est active, apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. d'Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.12.4 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les tonalits du clavier sur votre radio. 2 3 562 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la d'Activ. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur tonalits du clavier. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver les Si la fonction est active, apparat ct Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tonalits du clavier numrique. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour 6.12.5 Configuration de la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes Cette fonction permet de configurer le niveau sonore des sonneries et des alertes de manire ce qu'il soit plus ou moins haut que celui de la voix. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la compensation de volume des sonneries et des alertes de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6 1 563 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sonneries et alertes. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Le niveau d'cart de volume est enregistr. Appuyez sur pour quitter. Les changements sont supprims. 6.12.6 Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit d'autorisation de parler sur votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cart Vol. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur compensation voulu. ou jusqu'au niveau de Une tonalit se fait entendre correspondant chaque niveau de compensation de volume. 7 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

564 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Activation et dsactivation de la tonalit de mise sous tension Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la tonalit de mise sous tension de votre radio. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Autorisation de parler. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur tonalit d'autorisation de parler. pour activer ou dsactiver la L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Tnlts/

Avert.. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 4 5 6 6.12.7 565 Franais (Canada) 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Sous tension. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Contacts. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur tonalit de mise sous tension. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver la Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 6.12.8 Configuration des sonneries davis de messages texte Vous pouvez personnaliser la tonalit d'alerte de message texte sur Temporaire ou Rptitive pour chaque entre dans la liste de contacts. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les sonneries d'avis de messages de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avis de message. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Temporaire. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Temporaire. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rptitive. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct de Rptitive. 5 6 1 566 6.12.9 Changement des modes daffichage Vous pouvez changer le mode d'affichage de la radio entre le mode Jour ou mode Nuit au besoin. Ce rglage modifie la palette de couleurs de l'cran. Suivez la procdure suivante pour modifier le mode d'affichage de la radio. 4 5 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode d'affichage. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche Mode Jour et Mode Nuit. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. 6.12.10 Configuration de la luminosit de l'affichage Suivez la procdure de rgler la luminosit de l'affichage sur votre radio. La luminosit de lcran ne peut tre ajuste lorsque la fonction Luminosit auto est active. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Luminosit. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. 567 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Luminosit. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche une barre de progression. Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./

phares. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. pour augmenter ou Appuyez sur rduire la luminosit de l'affichage. Appuyez sur ou 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

pour effectuer la slection. La valeur du paramtre varie de 1 8. Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 2 3 4 5 6.12.11 568 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Activation ou dsactivation des voyants DEL Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les voyants DEL sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) 3 4 5 6.12.12 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Avert./

phares. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur l'avertisseur ou les phares. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

pour activer ou dsactiver Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Indicateur DEL. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur voyant DEL. pour activer ou dsactiver le L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

569 Franais (Canada) Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.12.13 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Diffusion publique. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. Appuyez sur diffusion publique. pour activer ou dsactiver la 3 4 5 Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 570 6.12.14 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Diffusion publique externe. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Appuyez sur diffusion publique externe. pour activer ou dsactiver la Si la fonction est active, apparat ct 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.12.15 Activer ou dsactiver lcran dintroduction Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver l'cran d'introduction selon la procdure suivante. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 4 5 1 571 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. ct de Activ. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.12.16 Slection de la langue Suivez la procdure suivante pour choisir la langue de votre radio. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' cran intro. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur d'introduction. pour activer ou dsactiver l'cran L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Langues. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 2 3 4 5 6 572 5 1 2 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' la langue Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Type cble. voulue. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche ct de la langue slectionne. Le type de cble actuel est indiqu par l'icne

. 4 5 Franais (Canada) 6.12.17 Dterminer le type de cble Procdez comme suit pour slectionner le type de cble utilis par votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la fonction VOX. 6.12.18 Transmission vocale La transmission vocale (VOX) vous permet d'tablir une communication vocale en mode mains libres sur un canal programm. La radio transmet automatiquement, pendant une priode programme, ds que le microphone de l'accessoire VOX dtecte une voix. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX en procdant de l'une ou l'autre des manires suivantes :

teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la pour activer la 573 Franais (Canada) Changez de canal l'aide de la touche Canal prcdent/suivant pour activer la fonction VOX. Changez de canal l'aide du bouton Volume/Canal pour activer la fonction VOX. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX l'aide de la touche programme VOX ou du menu. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que la radio fonctionne pour dsactiver la fonction VOX. AVIS:

L'activation ou la dsactivation de cette fonction est limite aux radios sur lesquelles la fonction associe est active. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.12.18.1 Activation ou dsactivation de lmission commande par la voix

(VOX) Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le VOX sur votre radio. 574 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton programm VOX. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

VOX. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur fonction VOX. pour activer ou dsactiver la Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Si la fonction de tonalit d'autorisation est active, utilisez un mot dclencheur pour faire l'appel. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler, puis parlez clairement dans le microphone. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler la page 236. Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. 6.12.19 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. Cette option est particulirement utile lorsqu'il est difficile de lire le contenu affich l'cran. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. 6.12.21 Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, lAnnonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre les fonctionnalits suivantes :

Canal actuel Zone actuelle 6.12.20 575 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction de bouton programm Contenu des messages texte reus Contenu des fiches de travail reues Lindicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Cette fonction est particulirement utile lorsquil est difficile de lire le contenu affich lcran. 4 5 6.12.21.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Assistance parle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou pour n'importe laquelle des fonctions suivantes. Appuyez sur effectuer la slection. pour Voici les options disponibles :

Tout Messages Tickets de tche Canal Contrleur Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Touche de programmation Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'icne s'affiche ct du rglage slectionn. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 576 6.12.22 Activer ou dsactiver le renvoi dappel automatique Appuyez sur ou pour activer le renvoi d'appel. Si la fonction est active, ct d'Activ. apparat Vous pouvez configurer votre radio de manire ce qu'elle transfre automatiquement les appels vocaux une autre radio. Appuyez sur ou pour dsactiver le renvoi d'appel. Si cette option est dsactive, le ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Renvoi d'appel. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

6.12.23 Rglage du dlai menu Vous pouvez rgler la dure pendant laquelle la radio affiche le menu avant de revenir automatiquement l'cran d'accueil. Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le dlai menu. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 577 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Afficheur. microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme analogique. Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dlai Menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mic. CGA-A. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.12.24 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone analogique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone analogique

(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du 3 4 5 6 578 Franais (Canada) 5 Appuyez sur analogique. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. niveau audio uniforme. Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le CGA du microphone de votre radio. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. ct de Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Mic.CGA-N. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur numrique. pour activer la fonction CGA Mic. L'cran affiche un des rsultats suivants :

Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. 579 6.12.25 Activation ou dsactivation du microphone numrique Le contrle de gain automatique du microphone numrique

(CGA) permet de rguler automatiquement le gain du microphone de la radio durant la transmission sur un systme numrique. Cette fonction limine l'audio fort ou augmente l'audio faible en fonction d'une valeur prdtermine afin d'assurer un Franais (Canada) Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 6.12.26 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. AVIS:

Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. 580 2 3 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Audio intelligent. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 3 4 Franais (Canada) 6.12.27 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la suppression de la raction acoustique lors de la rception d'appels. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique sur votre radio. 1 2 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection.. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Rduction bruit. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur pour activer la suppression de la raction acoustique. Si la fonction est active, apparat ct d'Activ. Appuyez sur pour dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique. Si cette option est dsactive, ne s'affiche plus ct de Activ. 6.12.28 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes 581 Franais (Canada) alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration. Passez les tapes ci-dessous. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Activ. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Dsactiver. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche pour effectuer la slection. ct du message Dsactiv. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 6.12.29 Ambiance audio Vous pouvez personnaliser l'ambiance audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Par dfaut Fort Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Amlioration de la vibration. Appuyez sur la slection. pour effectuer Groupe de travail 5 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cette configuration active la suppression du bruit et augmente le volume du haut-parleur pour une utilisation dans un environnement bruyant. Cette configuration permet d'activer la rduction du bruit et de dsactiver l'AGC pour utilisation lorsqu'un groupe de radios sont proximit les unes des autres. 2 3 4 582 6.12.29.1 Configuration de lambiance audio Suivez la procdure pour dfinir l'ambiance audio sur votre radio en fonction de votre environnement. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Franais (Canada) Choisissez Par dfaut pour activer les paramtres d'origine par dfaut. Choisissez Fort pour augmenter le volume lorsque vous utilisez la radio dans un environnement bruyant. Choisissez Groupe travail afin de rduire la rtroaction acoustique lors de l'utilisation de la radio en combinaison avec un groupe de radios qui sont proximit de l'autre. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 6.12.30 Profils audio Vous pouvez personnaliser les profils audio de votre radio selon vos prfrences. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Ambiance Par dfaut audio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Niveau 1, niveau 2 et niveau 3 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les paramtres sont les suivants. Ces paramtres sont des profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive cause par le bruit qui est typique chez les adultes dans la quarantaine, la cinquantaine, la soixantaine ou plus. 583 1 2 3 4 5 Franais (Canada) Amplification des frquences aigus, moyennes et basses 5 Ces paramtres sont prvus pour des sons plus tnus, ou nasillards, ou graves. 6.12.30.1 Configuration des profils audio Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer les profils audio par dfaut de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Profils audio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. 1 2 3 4 584 Appuyez sur ou jusqu'au profil voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Les paramtres sont les suivants. Choisissez Par dfaut pour dsactiver le profil audio slectionn prcdemment et revenir aux paramtres par dfaut. Choisissez Niveau 1, Niveau 2 ou Niveau 3 pour les profils audio destins compenser la perte auditive due au bruit qui est habituelle pour les adultes de plus de 40 ans. Choisissez Ampli. aigus, Ampli. mdiums, ou Ampli. basses pour les profils audio qui s'alignent avec votre prfrence pour des sons plus mtalliques, plus nasillards ou plus profonds. L'cran affiche ct du profil slectionn. 6.12.31 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 1 2 Effectuez une des tapes suivantes pour activer ou dsactiver le GNSS sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm GNSS. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Passez l'tape suivante. 3 4 5 6 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Paramtres de la radio. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

GNSS. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur GNSS. pour activer ou dsactiver le Si la fonction est active, d'Activ. Si cette option est dsactive, ct de Activ. apparat ct ne s'affiche plus 585 Franais (Canada) 6.12.32 Liste de rception flexible La Liste de rception flexible vous permet de crer et d'affecter des membres la liste de groupe d'appels de rception. Votre radio peut prendre en charge un maximum de 16 membres dans la liste. Cette fonction est prise en charge en mode Capacity Plus. 6.12.32.1 Activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la liste de rception flexible. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Liste de rception flexible. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. 586 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Liste Rx flexible. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Activer. Appuyez sur Une tonalit de russite retentit. pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis de russite. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Eteindre. Appuyez sur Une tonalit d'chec retentit. pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche un bref avis d'chec. 6.12.33 Renseignements gnraux sur la radio Votre radio contient des renseignements sur diffrents paramtres. Les informations gnrales de votre radio sont les suivantes :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio pour revenir lcran prcdent. Franais (Canada) Alias et ID de la radio. Versions du micrologiciel et de la fiche de codes. Mise jour du logiciel. Informations du systme GNSS. Information sur le site. AVIS:

Appuyez sur pour revenir l'cran prcdent. Maintenez enfonce la touche lcran daccueil. Lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit pendant une dure prdfinie, la radio quitte l'cran en cours. pour revenir 6.12.33.1 Vrification de lalias et lID de la radio 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Alias et ID de la radio. Ignorez les tapes suivantes. Une tonalit de russite retentit. 2 3 4 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Mon ID. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Lalias de la radio saffiche sur la premire ligne de lcran. LID de la radio saffiche sur la deuxime ligne de lcran. 587 Franais (Canada) 6.12.33.2 Vrification des versions du micrologiciel et de la codeplug Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Vrification des informations de mise jour du logiciel Affiche la date et lheure de la dernire mise jour logicielle effectue par lintermdiaire de la Programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) ou Wi-Fi. Suivez la procdure suivante pour vrifier les informations de mise jour du logiciel de votre radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Versions. Appuyez sur ou jusqu Info de la Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche la version actuelle du micrologiciel et celle de la codeplug. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 6.12.33.3 588 4 Appuyez sur ou jusqu M. j. Dilution of Precision, ou HDOP) Affaiblissement de la prcision horizontale (Horizontal Franais (Canada) logicielle. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la Satellites Version Lcran affiche la date et lheure de la dernire mise jour logicielle. Le menu de mise jour logicielle est uniquement disponible aprs au moins une session OTAP ou Wi-Fi russie. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Programmation par onde radio la page 544. 6.12.33.4 Consulter les informations du GNSS Affiche les informations GNSS sur votre radio, par exemple, les valeurs suivantes :

Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Vlocit 1 2 3 4 5 Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info GNSS. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' llment voulu. Appuyez sur L'cran affiche les informations GNSS demandes. pour effectuer la slection. 589 Franais (Canada) 6.12.33.5 Affichage de linformation sur le site Suivez la procdure suivante pour afficher le nom du site sur lequel se trouve actuellement votre radio. Affichage des dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise Vous pouvez afficher les dtails du certificat Wi-Fi dentreprise slectionn. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur pour accder au menu. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Utilitaires. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info de la Appuyez sur ou jusqu'

Utilitaires.Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la radio. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Appuyez sur ou pour Menu Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Info site. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. L'cran affiche le nom du site actuel. Certificat. Appuyez sur slection. pour effectuer la saffiche vis--vis des certificats prts. Appuyez sur ou jusquau certificat voulu. Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. Votre radio affiche les dtails complets du certificat. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 6.12.34 590 AVIS:

Pour les certificats non prts, lcran affiche uniquement ltat. Franais (Canada) 591 Franais (Canada) Liste des accessoires approuvs Motorola Solutions fournit une liste daccessoires pour amliorer la productivit de votre radio. Tableau 17: Antenne Description Numro de pice HAD4006_ HAD4007_ HAD4008_ HAD4009_ HAE4002_ HAE4003_ 592 VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice HAE4004_ HAE4010_ HAE4011_ HAE4012_ HAE4013_ HAE6019_ HAE6020_ Description UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U GPS/UHF combins, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Description Description Numro de pice HAE6022_ HAE6024_ HAE6026_ HAF4027_ HAF4029_ HAF4030_ HAF4032_ UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U 800/900, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice HAF4033_ PMAE4030_ PMAE4031_ PMAE4032_ PMAE4033_ PMAE4034_ Franais (Canada) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U PMAN4000_ Antenne GPS active fixe 593 Franais (Canada) Description Description Numro de pice PMAN4001_ PMAN4002_ PMAN4004_ RAD4214_ RAD4215_ RAD4216_ RAD4217_ 594 Antenne GPS active monte sur fentre Antenne GPS active support magntique GPS+RF combins, base uniquement, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice RAD4218_ RAE4004_RB RAE4004_ GPS/VHF combins, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (avec base) UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (sans base) Tableau 18: Antenne pour une utilisation avec base PMAN4004_ uniquement Numro de pice HAE6027_ HAE6028_ HAE6029_ Description UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion Franais (Canada) Description Tableau 19: Accessoires audio Numro de pice HAE6030_ UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion PMAE4039_ UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde Description Numro de pice 89409N Casque Bluetooth HK200 prise amricaine PMAE4041_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde HMN4098_ Combin style tlphone PMAE4040_ UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB NNTN8125_ PMAE4042_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB PMAE4043_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 5 dB RAD4223_ RAD4224_ RAD4225_ RAD4226_ RAD4227_ VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB NNTN8126_ NNTN8127_ NNTN8189_ Oreillette sans fil indispensable, cble de 30,5 cm (12 po) Oreillette sans fils indispensable, cble de 24 cm (9,5 po) Dispositif PTT de messagerie vocale instantane sans fil indispensable Casque sans fil non scuris et dispositif PTT avec audio PTT, cble de 30,5 cm (12 pouces) NNTN8190_ Ensemble daccessoires Bluetooth, SP, cble de 24 cm (9,5 po) 595 Description Description Franais (Canada) Numro de pice NNTN8296_11 NNTN8385_13 PMLN7181_13 PMLN7203_13 RLN4922_13 Ensemble discret sans fil, comprend deux ensembles dcouteurs 2 fils

(1 noir et 1 blanc), oreillette 1 fil

(noir) et un adaptateur de 3,5 mm brancher dans tous les modles dcouteurs disponibles dans le commerce Adaptateur sans fil en Y et crochet de rtention pour couteurs entirement dissimuls Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige, emballage multiple Trousse doreillette entirement dissimule Numro de pice RLN6490_ RLN6491_ RLN6500_ RLN6550_13 Casque robuste sans fil non scuris contour doreille XBT Casque robuste sans fil non scuris serre-tte XBT Trousse daccessoires Bluetooth MOTOTRBO avec bloc dalimentation AN Oreillette pivotante avec microphone en ligne pour accessoire de bouton Bluetooth, paquet de 3 RMN5050_ Microphone de bureau RMN5052_ Microphone compact RMN5127_ RMN5053_ Microphone clavier IMPRES pour navigation quatre directions Microphone robuste avec audio avanc 11 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 596 Description Description Microphone pour pare-soleil fonction audio amliore Avant mobile (MMP), cble de programmation PMKN4010_ Cble de programmation MAP Tableau 20: Cbles Numro de pice RMN5054_ Numro de pice 3075336B07 3075336B10 HKN4137_ HKN4191_ HKN4192_ Description Cble de rechange pour microphone compact Cble de rechange pour microphone clavier ou microphone robuste Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 15 ampres

(1 25 watts) Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 20 ampres

(1 45 watts) Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 6 m (20 pi), 20 ampres

(1 45 watts) Franais (Canada) Numro de pice HKN6184_ PMKN4016_ PMKN4018_ PMKN4033_ PMKN4034_ Cble de programmation et de test MAP Cble universel de connecteur daccessoire arrire pour dispositif sans fil et rpteur Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 3 m (10 pi) Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 6 m (20 pi) PMKN4143_ Cble pour support distant, 3 m PMKN4144_ Cble pour support distant, 5 m RKN4136_ Cble de dtection dallumage 597 Franais (Canada) Tableau 21: Accessoires de bureau Tableau 22: Trousses de montage Numro de pice Description Numro de pice Description 3060665A04 Cordon dalimentation .-U. AY000269A01_ 12 Protecteur dcran, clair (paquet dune seule unit) GKN6266_ GLN7318_ GPN6145_ HPN4007_ HPN4011_ PMLN5072_ RSN4005_ Cble dalimentation radio pour GPN6145 Support de bureau sans haut-

parleur Bloc dalimentation dcoupage, marqu CE (modles de 1 25 W) Bloc dalimentation et cble Bloc dalimentation 14 volts, 15 ampres UNI 117/240 V c.a., prise R.-U. Trousse pour connecteur daccessoire arrire Plateau de bureau avec haut-

parleur RLN6465_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6469_ PMLN6402_ PMLN6403_ Matriel de fixation pour tableau de bord (DIN) Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil bas Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil haut Ensemble de fixation du verrouillage par tourillons Sac de fixation par tourillons profil bas Interface dmetteur-rcepteur montage distance Interface de tte de commande de montage distance 12 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 598 Franais (Canada) Tableau 23: Accessoires divers Description Numro de pice DQT1 Protection contre les surtensions, trousse de montage sur tour Description Numro de pice PMLN7052_13 Trousse de surveillance un fil pour missions critiques avec tube translucide DSISB50LNC2 MA Protection contre les surtensions, cloison de protecteur coaxial RLN5926_ RLN5929_ Bouton PTT Interrupteur durgence au pied HKN9557_ HLN9073_ HLN9414_ PMKN4072_ PMKN4070_ Adaptateur dantenne PL259/Mini-

U, cble de 2,4 m (8 pi) Pince de suspension pour microphone (tous les microphones) Pince de suspension universelle pour microphone (tous les microphones) Adaptateur mobile MMP IMPRES, sans PC Adaptateur mobile MAP IMPRES, sans PC PMLN5718_S Carte doption gnrique Tableau 24: Haut-parleurs Description Numro de pice RSN4002_ RSN4003_ RSN4004_ Haut-parleur externe de 13 W Haut-parleur externe de 7,5 W Haut-parleur externe de 5 W 13 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 599 Franais (Canada) Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF Affectations de canaux spciaux Canal durgence Si vous tes expos un danger grave et imminent en mer et avez besoin dune aide durgence, utilisez le canal VHF 16 pour lancer un appel de dtresse aux navires qui se trouvent proximit et la Garde ctire des tats-

Unis. Transmettez les renseignements suivants dans cet ordre :

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 ICI _____________________, INDICATIF DAPPEL __________. Dites le nom du navire en dtresse trois fois, suivi de lindicatif dappel ou dune autre identification du navire, en lnonant trois fois. 3 Rptez MAYDAY et le nom du navire. 4 NOTRE POSITION EST _______________________. Indiquez la position du navire en dtresse en ajoutant tout renseignement pouvant aider les rpondants vous localiser, p. ex :

la latitude et la longitude;

le relvement (dites si vous utilisez le nord gographique ou magntique);

votre distance par rapport un point de repre connu;

la route, la vitesse ou la destination du navire. 5 noncez la nature de la situation de dtresse. 6 Prcisez laide dont vous avez besoin. 7 Indiquez le nombre de personnes bord du navire et le nombre de personnes ncessitant une assistance mdicale, le cas chant. 8 Mentionnez toute autre information pouvant tre utile aux rpondants, comme le type de navire, sa longueur ou son tonnage, la couleur de la coque, etc. 9 TERMIN. 10 Attendez une rponse. 11 Si vous ne recevez pas de rponse immdiate, restez prs de la radio et rptez votre transmission intervalles jusqu ce que lon vous rponde. Soyez prt suivre les instructions qui vous seront donnes. 600 Canal dappel non commercial Pour transmettre des messages non commerciaux, comme des rapports de pche, des arrangements de rendez-vous, des planifications de rparation ou des informations daccostage, utilisez le canal VHF 9. Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement Toute radio conue pour la navigation doit tre conforme la section 80 des rglements de la Commission fdrale des communications (FCC), comme suit :

sur les navires soumis la section II du titre III de la Loi sur les communications (Communications Act) des tats-Unis, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner sur la frquence 156,800 MHz;

sur les navires soumis la Convention de scurit, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner :

- en mode simplex sur le poste du navire qui transmet les frquences prcises sur la bande de frquences 156,025 -157,425 MHz, et

- en mode semi-duplex sur les deux canaux de frquence prciss dans le tableau ci-dessous. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82 et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements sur les exigences de fonctionnement des Services maritimes, consultez la version intgrale de la section 80 des rglements de la FCC ou communiquez avec la Garde ctire amricaine. Tableau 25: Liste des canaux de la bande maritime VHF Numro de canal Frquence (MHz) Transmission Rception 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 160,650 160,700 160,750 160,800 160,850 160,950 601 Franais (Canada) 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 602 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 161,500 161,550 161,600 161,650 161,700 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 27 28 60

62 63

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 67**

157,350 157,400 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725

161,950 162,000 160,625 160,675 160,725 160,775 160,825 160,875 160,925 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,675 156,725

77**

78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425 161,525 161,575 161,625 161,675 161,725 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 161,975 162,025 AVIS:

*Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82 et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines.

**Faible puissance (1 W) seulement.

***Bande de garde. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Le symbole dans la colonne Rception indique quil sagit dun canal de transmission seulement. Dclaration de conformit pour lutilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit L'quipement radio n'utilise pas de modulation autre que la modulation adopte l'chelle internationale pour l'usage en mer sur les frquences de dtresse et de scurit spcifies dans la section 7.3 du CNR-182. Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes Tableau 26: Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes RS232 18 V USB 3,6 V SB9600 5 V Tension d'entre 603 Franais (Canada) RS232 USB SB9600 28 kbit/s 12 Mbit/s 9,6 kbit/s 5000 ohms 90 ohms 120 ohms

(tension crte crte) Dbit binaire maximum Impdanc e 604 Franais (Canada) Garantie limite PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :

Motorola Solutions Inc. ( Motorola Solutions ) garantit les produits de tlcommunications identifis ci-dessous (le Produit ) fabriqus par Motorola Solutions contre tout dfaut de matriel ou de fabrication dans des conditions normales dutilisation et dentretien, pour une priode suivant la date dachat, tel quil est stipul ci-dessous :

Radios mobiles Deux (2) ans Accessoires des produits Un (1) an sa discrtion, Motorola Solutions rparera sans frais le produit (avec des pices neuves ou remises neuf), le remplacera (par un produit neuf ou remis neuf) ou remboursera le prix dachat du produit durant la priode de garantie, condition que le produit soit retourn au lieu dachat conformment aux modalits de la prsente garantie. Les pices et les cartes remplaces sont garanties pour le reste de la priode de garantie dorigine. Toute pice remplace du produit devient la proprit de Motorola Solutions. Cette garantie limite expresse est accorde par Motorola Solutions lacheteur ou lutilisateur final dorigine seulement, et ne peut tre ni transfre ni cde un tiers. La prsente garantie constitue la garantie complte du produit fabriqu par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions nassume aucune obligation ni responsabilit pour quelque ajout ou modification la prsente garantie, moins dtre en prsence dun document crit sign par un cadre suprieur de Motorola Solutions. Sauf dans le cadre dune entente distincte conclue entre Motorola Solutions et lacheteur ou lutilisateur final dorigine, Motorola Solutions ne garantit pas linstallation, lentretien, ni la rparation du produit. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit lgard de tout quipement ou accessoire qui nest pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est branch sur le produit ou utilis conjointement avec celui-ci, ainsi qu lgard du fonctionnement du produit utilis conjointement 605 Franais (Canada) avec tout quipement ou accessoire, et tous les quipements de cette nature sont expressment exclus de la prsente garantie. Compte tenu du caractre unique de chaque systme pouvant utiliser le produit, Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit lgard de la porte, de la diffusion et du fonctionnement du systme. PERTES COMMERCIALES, DES PERTES DE PROFIT OU D'CONOMIES, NI RELATIVEMENT TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE ACCESSOIRE, SPCIAL OU INDIRECT RSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'INCAPACIT D'UTILISER CE PRODUIT. II. CONDITIONS GNRALES La prsente garantie prcise l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions l'gard du produit. la discrtion de Motorola Solutions, la rparation du produit, son remplacement ou le remboursement de son prix d'achat constituent le seul recours. CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPRESSE. TOUTES LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES, COMPRENANT, SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALIT MARCHANDE ET D'ADAPTATION UN USAGE PARTICULIER, SONT LIMITES LA PRIODE DFINIE PAR CETTE GARANTIE LIMITE. DANS LA MESURE AUTORISE PAR LA LOI, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS NE POURRA EN AUCUN CAS TRE TENUE RESPONSABLE DE DOMMAGES DONT LA VALEUR DPASSE LE PRIX D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT, NI L'GARD DES PERTES DE JOUISSANCE, DES PERTES DE TEMPS, DES DRANGEMENTS, DES 606 III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :

CERTAINES PROVINCES NE PERMETTENT AUCUNE EXCLUSION NI LIMITATION QUANT AUX DOMMAGES CONSCUTIFS OU INDIRECTS, NI AUCUNE LIMITE SUR LA DURE D'UNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, DE SORTE QUE LES LIMITES OU EXCLUSIONS MENTIONNES PLUS HAUT PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER DANS VOTRE CAS. La prsente garantie confre des droits juridiques prcis et il est possible que vous jouissiez d'autres droits, selon votre province de rsidence. IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE Pour que la rparation soit couverte par la garantie, vous devez fournir une preuve d'achat (portant la date d'achat et le numro de srie du Produit). De plus, vous devez livrer ou expdier le Produit, en payant d'avance les frais de transport et d'assurance, un centre de service homologu. Les rparations sous garantie seront effectues par Motorola Solutions l'un de ses centres de service autoriss. Dans certains cas, il est plus facile d'obtenir les rparations couvertes par la garantie en s'adressant d'abord l'entreprise qui vous a vendu le produit (p. ex. le dtaillant ou votre fournisseur de services de tlcommunication). Vous pouvez galement appeler Motorola Solutions au numro 1 800 927-2744. V. CE QUI NEST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE 1 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant de l'utilisation du Produit autrement que dans des conditions normales et habituelles. 2 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant d'une mauvaise utilisation, d'un accident, de la ngligence ou de l'exposition des liquides. 3 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant de mthodes d'essai, de fonctionnement, d'entretien, d'installation, de modification ou de rglage non adquates. Franais (Canada) 4 Les bris et dommages des antennes, sauf si cela est caus directement par un dfaut de fabrication ou de main-d'uvre. 5 Un Produit soumis des modifications, des rparations ou un dmontage non autoriss (y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'ajout au Produit d'un quipement quelconque non fourni par Motorola Solutions) et qui ont un effet ngatif sur le rendement du Produit ou qui nuisent l'inspection ou l'essai normal sous garantie du Produit par Motorola Solutions en cas de rclamation. 6 Tout produit dont le numro de srie a t supprim ou rendu illisible. 7 Batteries rechargeables si :

une protection tanche du botier protgeant les cellules de la batterie a t rompue ou prsente des signes d'altration;

le dommage ou la dfectuosit sont provoqus par la charge ou l'utilisation de la batterie dans un quipement ou avec un service autres que ceux qui sont spcifis pour le Produit. 8 Frais de transport vers l'atelier de rparation. 9 Tout produit qui, cause de modifications illgales ou interdites apportes au logiciel ou au micrologiciel du Produit, ne fonctionne pas conformment aux 607 Franais (Canada) spcifications nonces par Motorola Solutions ou sur l'tiquette de conformit de la FCC en vigueur pour le Produit lorsque le Produit a t initialement distribu par Motorola Solutions. 10 Les gratignures et autres dommages superficiels ne nuisant pas au fonctionnement du Produit. 11 L'usure et le vieillissement normaux et habituels. VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS Motorola Solutions dfendra ses frais toute poursuite mene en justice contre l'acheteur dans la mesure o la poursuite revendique que le produit ou certaines de ses pices enfreignent un brevet des tats-Unis, et Motorola Solutions paiera les frais et dommages finalement accords au dtriment de l'acheteur dans toute poursuite judiciaire attribuable une quelconque revendication de cette nature, une telle dfense et un tel paiement tant soumis aux conditions suivantes :

1 Motorola Solutions doit tre rapidement notifie, par crit, d'une telle rclamation par l'acheteur;

608 2 Motorola Solutions matrisera entirement la dfense de l'action juridique et toutes les ngociations d'accord ou de compromis;

3 Si le produit ou les pices font ou, de l'avis de Motorola Solutions, pourraient faire l'objet d'une poursuite pour contrefaon d'un brevet amricain ou canadien, l'acheteur accordera le droit Motorola Solutions, la discrtion et aux frais de cette dernire, soit de procurer l'acheteur le droit de continuer d'utiliser le produit ou les pices, soit de remplacer ou de modifier ces derniers de manire ce qu'ils n'enfreignent plus le brevet, soit d'accorder l'acheteur un crdit quivalent la valeur dprcie du produit ou des pices et d'accepter de reprendre ceux-ci. La dprciation reprsentera un montant gal pour chaque anne de dure de vie utile du produit ou des pices, tel que dtermin par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit l'gard de toute poursuite pour contrefaon de brevet fonde sur une adaptation du produit ou des pices mentionnes dans la prsente un logiciel, un appareil ou un quipement non fourni par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage galement de toute responsabilit l'gard de tout quipement ou logiciel qui n'est pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est rattach au produit ou utilis conjointement avec ce dernier. Ce qui prcde nonce l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions pour la contrefaon de brevets relative au produit ou toute pice de ce dernier. Les lois au Canada, aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays protgent au nom de Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, comme ceux de reproduire des copies et de distribuer des copies desdits logiciels Motorola Solutions. Les logiciels Motorola Solutions ne peuvent tre utiliss qu'avec les produits l'intrieur desquels ils taient installs l'origine. Il est interdit de remplacer, de copier, de distribuer, de modifier d'aucune faon et d'utiliser le logiciel l'intrieur du produit en vue de fabriquer un quelconque produit driv. Aucune autre utilisation, y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'altration, la modification, la reproduction, la distribution ou l'ingnierie rebours, d'un quelconque logiciel Motorola Solutions n'est permise. Aucune licence n'est accorde pour infrence, estoppel ou autre en vertu des droits de brevets ou des droits d'auteur de Motorola Solutions ou de tiers. VII. LOI APPLICABLE Cette garantie est rgie par les lois de l'tat de l'Illinois, .-

U. Franais (Canada) 609 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo Motorola Solutions, Inc. 500 W Monroe Street Chicago, IL 60661 U.S.A. Printed in U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2017 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 5350/XPR 5350e, XPR 5380/XPR 5380e NUMERIC DISPLAY MOBILE RADIO USER GUIDE en-US fr-CA AUGUST 2020 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

*MN003680A01*

MN003680A01-AG English Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Supplier's Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Address: 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL. 60196 Model Name: XPR 5350/XPR 5380/XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

2 1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful inter-

ference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. For country code selection usage (WLAN devices) NOTICE:

The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US models. Per FCC regula-

tion, all Wi-Fi products marketed in the US must be fixed to US operation channels only. English 3 English Contents Supplier's Declaration of Conformity.............................. 2 Important Safety Information........................................ 16 Notice to Users (FCC).................................................. 17 Notice to Users (Industry Canada)............................... 18 Software Version.......................................................... 19 Copyrights.................................................................... 20 Computer Software Copyrights.................................... 22 Radio Care................................................................... 23 Chapter 1: Getting Started........................................... 25 1.1 Turning the Radio On.................................. 25 1.2 Turning the Radio Off.................................. 25 1.3 Adjusting the Volume...................................25 Chapter 2: Radio Controls............................................26 2.1 Volume/Channel Knob.................................26 Chapter 3: WAVE......................................................... 27 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................27 3.1.1 Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode........................................... 27 3.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls............28 4 3.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls................................. 28 3.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls................................ 28 3.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode ........................................... 29 Part I: Capacity Max..................................................... 30 4.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button......................... 30 4.2 Programmable Buttons................................30 4.3 Assignable Radio Functions........................ 31 4.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions...... 32 4.5 Status Indicators..........................................33 4.5.1 LED Indicator................................. 33 4.5.2 Tones.............................................34 4.5.2.1 Audio Tones.....................34 4.5.2.2 Indicator Tones................ 34 4.6 Registration................................................. 35 4.7 Zone and Channel Selections..................... 36 4.7.1 Selecting Zones ............................ 36 4.7.2 Selecting a Call Type.....................36 4.7.3 Selecting a Site..............................37 4.7.4 Roam Request...............................37 4.7.5 Site Lock On/Off............................ 38 4.8.5 Phone Calls................................... 46 4.7.6 Site Restriction...............................38 4.7.7 Site Trunking .................................38 4.8 Calls.............................................................39 4.8.1 Group Calls....................................39 4.8.1.1 Making Group Calls......... 39 4.8.1.2 Responding to Group Calls............................................. 40 4.8.2 Broadcast Call .............................. 41 4.8.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls .. 41 4.8.2.2 Receiving Broadcast Calls ............................................ 41 4.8.3 Private Call.................................... 42 4.8.3.1 Making Private Calls........ 42 4.8.3.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button ..... 43 4.8.3.3 Receiving Private Calls.... 44 4.8.3.4 Accepting Private Calls ... 44 4.8.3.5 Declining Private Calls .... 44 4.8.4 All Calls .........................................45 4.8.4.1 Making All Calls .............. 45 4.8.4.2 Receiving All Calls .......... 45 English 4.8.5.1 Making Phone Calls......... 46 4.8.5.2 Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button ........... 47 4.8.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls.......................... 48 4.8.5.4 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls.................... 49 4.8.5.5 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls................... 49 4.8.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt............ 50 4.8.7 Call Preemption............................. 50 4.8.8 Voice Interrupt............................... 50 4.8.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt...51 4.9 Advanced Features..................................... 51 4.9.1 Call Queue.....................................51 4.9.2 Priority Call.................................... 52 4.9.3 Talkgroup Scan .............................53 4.9.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off...................................... 53 4.9.4 Receive Group List........................ 53 4.9.5 Priority Monitor...............................53 5 English 4.9.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation.............. 54 4.9.7 Talkback ....................................... 54 4.9.8 Bluetooth........................................55 4.9.8.1 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices........................................ 56 4.9.8.2 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices........................ 56 4.9.8.3 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device...................56 4.9.9 Multi-Site Controls......................... 57 4.9.9.1 Enabling Manual Site Search..........................................57 4.9.9.2 Site Lock On/Off...............57 4.9.10 Home Channel Reminder............ 57 4.9.10.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder....................... 58 4.9.10.2 Setting New Home Channels......................................58 4.9.11 Remote Monitor........................... 58 4.9.11.1 Initiating Remote Monitor......................................... 58 4.9.12.1 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.........................................59 4.9.13 Call Alert Operation..................... 59 4.9.13.1 Making Call Alerts.......... 60 4.9.13.2 Responding to Call Alerts ...........................................60 4.9.14 Mute Mode...................................60 4.9.14.1 Turning On Mute Mode.. 60 4.9.14.2 Exiting Mute Mode......... 61 4.9.15 Emergency Operation..................61 4.9.15.1 Sending Emergency Alarms.......................................... 62 4.9.15.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call........................... 63 4.9.15.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow......... 65 4.9.15.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms ......................................... 66 4.9.15.5 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call........ 67 4.9.15.6 Exiting Emergency Mode............................................ 67 4.9.12 Call Indicator Settings..................59 4.9.16 Status Message........................... 67 6 4.9.16.1 Sending Status Messages.....................................68 4.9.17 Text Messaging .......................... 68 4.9.17.1 Quick Text Messages ... 69 4.9.17.1.1 Sending Quick Text Messages ................. 69 4.9.18 Privacy......................................... 69 4.9.18.1 Turning Privacy On or Off................................................ 70 4.9.19 Stun/Revive................................. 70 4.9.20 Radio Kill......................................70 4.9.21 Lone Worker................................ 71 4.9.22 Password Lock............................ 71 4.9.22.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password........................... 71 4.9.22.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State................................ 72 4.9.23 Over-the-Air Programming ..........72 4.9.24 Wi-Fi Operation............................73 4.9.24.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..73 4.9.24.2 Connecting to a Network Access Point.................. 74 4.10 Utilities....................................................... 76 English 4.9.25 Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA)............................... 74 4.9.25.1 Making DGNA Calls....... 75 4.9.25.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls............................................. 75 4.9.25.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls......... 75 4.10.1 Power Levels............................... 76 4.10.1.1 Setting Power Levels..... 76 4.10.2 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.......................................................76 4.10.3 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off ...77 4.10.4 Turning Public Address System On or Off................................................. 77 4.10.5 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................................... 77 4.10.6 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off ................................................ 78 4.10.7 Turning Option Board On or Off...78 4.10.8 Text-to-Speech............................ 79 4.10.8.1 Setting Text-to-Speech.. 79 7 English 4.10.9 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off........................................................... 79 4.10.10 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off................ 79 4.10.11 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.......................................................80 4.10.12 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off...................... 80 Part II: Connect Plus.................................................... 81 5.1 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode..................................................................81 5.1.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button............81 5.1.2 Programmable Buttons.................. 81 5.1.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions..................................... 82 5.1.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions............................83 5.1.3 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode................................ 83 5.1.3.1 LED Indicator................... 84 5.1.3.2 Indicator Tones................ 85 5.1.3.3 Alert Tones.......................85 8 5.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes................85 5.2 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode..........................................................86 5.2.1 Selecting a Site..............................86 5.2.1.1 Roam Request................. 86 5.2.1.2 Site Lock On/Off...............86 5.2.2 Selecting a Zone............................87 5.2.3 Using Multiple Networks................ 87 5.2.4 Selecting a Call Type.....................87 5.2.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call............................................... 88 5.2.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call.........88 5.2.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call....... 89 5.2.5.3 Receiving a Site All Call... 89 5.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call....................... 90 5.2.5.5 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call.................. 90 5.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi-

Group Call....................................90 5.2.6 Making a Radio Call.......................90 5.2.6.1 Making a Call .................. 91 5.2.6.1.1 Making a Group Call.................................... 91 5.2.6.1.2 Making a Private Call........................ 91 5.2.6.1.3 Making a Site All Call............................... 92 5.2.6.1.4 Making a Multi-

group Call.......................... 93 5.2.6.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button...... 93 5.3 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode

...........................................................................94 5.3.1 Home Channel Reminder.............. 94 5.3.2 Auto Fallback................................. 94 5.3.2.1 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode..............................95 5.3.2.2 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode.......................... 95 5.3.2.3 Returning to Normal Operation..................................... 96 5.3.3 Scan...............................................96 English 5.3.3.1 Starting and Stopping Scan.............................................96 5.3.3.2 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan........ 97 5.3.4 Turning Scan On or Off..................97 5.3.5 Understanding Scan Operation..... 98 5.3.6 Scan Talkback............................... 98 5.3.7 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup...... 99 5.3.8 Call Indicator Settings....................99 5.3.8.1 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.........................................99 5.3.9 Call Alert Operation..................... 100 5.3.9.1 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................100 5.3.9.2 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button... 100 5.3.10 Mute Mode.................................100 5.3.10.1 Turning On Mute Mode 101 5.3.10.2 Exiting Mute Mode....... 101 5.3.11 Emergency Operation................102 5.3.11.1 Responding to an Emergency Call..........................103 9 English 10 5.3.11.2 Ignore Emergency Revert Call................................. 103 5.3.11.3 Initiating an Emergency Call.............................................104 5.3.11.4 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow............ 104 5.3.11.5 Initiating an Emergency Alert............................................105 5.3.11.6 Exiting Emergency Mode.......................................... 105 5.3.12 Text Messaging ........................ 106 5.3.12.1 Sending Quick Text Messages with the One Touch Access Button............................ 106 5.3.13 Privacy....................................... 107 5.3.13.1 Making a Privacy-

Enabled (Scrambled) Call.......... 107 5.3.14 Password Lock Features........... 108 5.3.14.1 Accessing the Radio from Password........................... 108 5.3.14.2 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State...................... 108 5.3.15 Bluetooth Operation...................109 5.3.15.1 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device.................109 5.3.15.2 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device........................110 5.3.15.3 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device................. 110 5.3.16 Wi-Fi Operation..........................110 5.3.16.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off111 5.3.16.2 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 111 5.3.17 Utilities....................................... 112 5.3.17.1 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off............... 112 5.3.17.2 Setting the Power Level

................................................... 112 5.3.17.3 Voice Announcement...113 5.3.17.4 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off.................................... 113 5.3.17.5 Intelligent Audio........... 114 5.3.17.6 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.................................... 114 5.3.17.7 Turning GNSS On or Off.............................................. 114 Part III: Other Systems............................................... 115 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button..................................115 6.2 Programmable Buttons..............................115 6.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions........ 116 6.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.............................................. 118 6.3 Status Indicators........................................118 6.3.1 LED Indicators ............................ 118 6.3.2 Tones...........................................119 6.3.2.1 Indicator Tones.............. 119 6.3.2.2 Audio Tones...................120 6.4 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes....120 6.5 Icon Information.........................................121 6.6 IP Site Connect..........................................121 6.7 Capacity PlusSingle-Site

.................... 122 6.8 Capacity PlusMulti-Site

...................... 122 6.9 Zone and Channel Selections................... 123 6.9.1 Selecting Zones .......................... 123 6.9.2 Selecting Channels......................124 6.10 Calls.........................................................124 English 6.10.1 Group Calls................................125 6.10.1.1 Making Group Calls..... 125 6.10.1.2 Responding to Group Calls........................................... 125 6.10.2 Private Calls

......................... 126 6.10.2.1 Making Private Calls

................................................... 126 6.10.2.2 Responding to Private Calls

......................................127 6.10.3 All Calls......................................128 6.10.3.1 Receiving All Calls....... 128 6.10.3.2 Making All Calls........... 128 6.10.4 Selective Calls

...................... 129 6.10.4.1 Making Selective Calls. 129 6.10.4.2 Responding to Selective Calls

...................... 129 6.10.5 Phone Calls

.......................... 130 6.10.5.1 Making Phone Calls 130 6.10.5.2 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls

............. 131 6.10.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls

................... 132 11 English 12 6.10.5.4 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls

............132 6.10.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt

...132 6.10.7 Talkaround.................................133 6.10.7.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes........................................ 133 6.10.8 Broadcast Voice Calls................133 6.10.8.1 Making Broadcast Voice Calls................................. 134 6.10.8.2 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key ..... 134 6.10.8.3 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search

.................................. 134 6.10.8.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls................................. 135 6.10.9 Unaddressed Calls.................... 135 6.10.9.1 Making Unaddressed Calls........................................... 135 6.10.9.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls.....................136 6.10.10 Open Voice Channel Mode

(OVCM).................................................136 6.10.10.1 Making OVCM Calls...137 6.10.10.2 Responding to OVCM Calls........................................... 137 6.11 Advanced Features................................. 138 6.11.1 Home Channel Reminder.......... 138 6.11.1.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder..................... 138 6.11.1.2 Setting New Home Channels....................................138 6.11.2 Remote Monitor......................... 139 6.11.2.1 Initiating Remote Monitor....................................... 139 6.11.3 Scan Lists.................................. 139 6.11.4 Scan...........................................139 6.11.4.1 Turning Scan On or Off

................................................... 140 6.11.4.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning 140 6.11.4.3 Deleting Nuisance Channels....................................141 6.11.4.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels....................................141 6.11.5 Vote Scan

....................... 142 6.11.6 Call Indicator Settings................142 6.11.6.1 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume.......................................142 6.11.7 Call Alert Operation................... 142 6.11.7.1 Making Call Alerts........ 142 6.11.7.2 Responding to Call Alerts .........................................143 6.11.8 Mute Mode.................................143 6.11.8.1 Turning On Mute Mode 143 6.11.8.2 Exiting Mute Mode....... 144 6.11.9 Emergency Operation ...............144 6.11.9.1 Receiving Emergency Alarms........................................ 145 6.11.9.2 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm...................... 146 6.11.9.3 Sending Emergency Alarms ....................................... 146 English 6.11.9.4 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call ........................ 146 6.11.9.5 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow ..........................148 6.11.9.6 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow

..148 6.11.9.7 Reinitiating Emergency Mode.......................................... 149 6.11.9.8 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm...................... 149 6.11.10 Text Messaging ...................... 150 6.11.10.1 Quick Text Messages

...............................................150 6.11.10.1.1 Sending Quick Text Messages 150 6.11.11 Privacy

................................151 6.11.11.1 Turning Privacy On or Off

......................................... 151 6.11.12 Multi-Site Control

.......... 152 6.11.12.1 Enabling Manual Site Search........................................152 13 English 14 6.11.12.2 Site Lock On/Off.........153 6.11.19 Wi-Fi Operation........................158 6.11.13 Lone Worker............................ 153 6.11.14 Bluetooth..................................154 6.11.14.1 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices...................... 154 6.11.14.2 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices...................... 155 6.11.14.3 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device.. 155 6.11.15 Indoor Location........................ 155 6.11.15.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off......................156 6.11.16 Auto-Range Transponder System

.......................................156 6.11.17 Over-the-Air Programming

. 157 6.11.18 Password Lock........................ 157 6.11.18.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password.................... 157 6.11.18.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State.............................. 158 6.11.19.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off.............................................. 159 6.11.19.2 Connecting to a Network Access Point................ 159 6.12 Utilities..................................................... 160 6.12.1 Squelch Levels ......................... 160 6.12.1.1 Setting Squelch Levels

................................................... 160 6.12.2 Power Levels............................. 160 6.12.2.1 Setting Power Levels... 160 6.12.3 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off.....................................................161 6.12.4 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off .161 6.12.5 Turning Public Address System On or Off............................................... 162 6.12.6 Turning External Public Address System On or Off.................................. 162 6.12.7 Voice Operating Transmission...162 6.12.7.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off.............................................. 163 English 6.12.8 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off .............................................. 163 Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources...................................................177 6.12.9 Turning Option Board On or Off.164 Limited Warranty........................................................ 178 6.12.10 Text-to-Speech........................ 164 6.12.10.1 Setting Text-to-

Speech.......................................164 6.12.11 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off......................................................... 164 6.12.12 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off.............. 165 6.12.13 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off.....................................................165 6.12.14 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off.................... 165 MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.................... 178 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:........................................... 178 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS............................ 179 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:................................179 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE......179 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER............................................................179 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS180 VII. GOVERNING LAW................................... 181 Part IV: Authorized Accessories List.......................... 167 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range.... 174 Special Channel Assignments.........................174 Emergency Channel............................. 174 Non-Commercial Call Channel............. 174 Operating Frequency Requirements............... 175 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies.....................177 15 This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola Solutions-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. English Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios CAUTION:

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-

Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola Solutions, may void the user's authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum

(or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. 16 Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. English 17 English Notice to Users (Industry Canada) The operation of your Motorola Solutions radio is subject to the Radiocommunications Act and must comply with rules and regulations of the Federal Governments department of Industry Canada. Industry Canada requires that all operators using Private Land Mobile frequencies obtain a radio license before operating their equipment. 18 Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.20.02.0000 or later. Contact your dealer or administrator for more information. English 19 English Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. 20 Disclaimer Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a specific system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a specific mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Open Source Content This product contains Open Source software used under license. Refer to the product installation media for full Open Source Legal Notices and Attribution content. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. English 21 patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including 22 Radio Care This section describes the basic handling precaution of the radio. Table 1: IP Specification IP Specification Description IP67 Allows your radio to with-

stand adverse field condi-

tions such as being sub-

mersed in water. CAUTION:

Do not disassemble your radio. This could damage radio seals and result in leak paths into the radio. Radio maintenance should only be done in service depot that is equipped to test and replace the seal on the radio. If your radio has been submersed in water, shake your radio well to remove any water that may be trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port. Trapped water could cause decreased audio performance. If your radio's battery contact area has been exposed to water, clean and dry battery contacts on both your radio English and the battery before attaching the battery to radio. The residual water could short-circuit the radio. If your radio has been submersed in a corrosive substance (for example, saltwater), rinse radio and battery in fresh water then dry radio and battery. To clean the exterior surfaces of your radio, use a diluted solution of mild dishwashing detergent and fresh water (for example, one teaspoon of detergent to one gallon of water). Never poke the vent (hole) located on the radio chassis below the battery contact. This vent allows for pressure equalization in the radio. Doing so may create a leak path into radio and your radio's submersibility may be lost. Never obstruct or cover the vent, even with a label. Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with the vent. Your radio with antenna attached properly is designed to be submersible to a maximum depth of 1 m (3.28 ft) and a maximum submersion time of 30 minutes. Exceeding either maximum limit or use without antenna may result in damage to your radio. 23 English When cleaning your radio, do not use a high pressure jet spray on radio as this will exceed the 1 m depth pressure and may cause water to leak into your radio. 24 Getting Started Turning the Radio Off Getting Started provides instructions to prepare your radio for use. Press and hold the On/Off button. The radio may take up to seven seconds to completely turn off. 1.1 Turning the Radio On Press the On/Off button. If successful, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. NOTICE:

If the Tones/Alerts function is disabled, there is no tone upon powering up. The green LED lights up. The display screen lights up. If your radio does not power up, check your battery. Make sure that the battery is charged and properly attached. Contact your dealer if your radio still does not power up. 1.2 1.3 Adjusting the Volume To adjust the volume of your radio, perform one of the following actions:

To increase the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume Control knob clockwise. To decrease the volume, turn the On/Off/Volume Control knob counterclockwise. NOTICE:

Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed minimum volume. English 25 English Radio Controls 7 LED Indicators This chapter explains the buttons and functions to control the radio. 2.1 Volume/Channel Knob The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed for dual volume and channel control, or for volume control only. To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 25. To change the channels, press and hold the Volume/

Channel Knob until the display blinks to enter the channel selection state. Turn the Volume/Channel Knob to select the channel. The display continues blinking until you exit the channel selection state. Do one of the following:

Press the Volume/Channel Knob. Wait for the menu timer to expire. 1 On/Off/Information Button 2 Volume/Channel Knob 3 Display 4 Speaker 26 5 Front Programmable Buttons 6 Accessory Connector 1236745 WAVE Wide Area Voice Environment (WAVE) provides a new method of making calls between two or more radios. WAVE allows you to communicate across different networks and devices using Wi-Fi. WAVE calls are made when the radio is connected to an IP network through Wi-

Fi. Your radio supports different system configurations:

WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise Switching from Radio Mode to WAVE Mode Press the programmed WAVE button. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows a blinking -. NOTICE:

Your radio automatically enables Wi-Fi after you switch to WAVE mode. The method to initiate a WAVE Call is different for each system type. Refer to the appropriate section depending on the system configuration of your radio. If successful:

The blinking yellow LED turns off. The display shows the <Channel Index>. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to specific models only. 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise 3.1.1 If unsuccessful:

A negative tone sounds. The red LED blinks. The display shows --. English 27 English NOTICE:

Synchronization occurs when new settings are updated to your radio. When you enter the WAVE mode, your radio displays Syncing.... When the synchronization completes, your radio returns to the home screen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. 3.1.2 Making WAVE Group Calls 1 Use the channel selector knob or buttons to select a WAVE talkgroup. 2 To call, press the PTT button. If the call is unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 3.1.3 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Group Calls When you receive a WAVE group call:

A tone sounds. 28 3.1.4 Receiving and Responding to WAVE Private Calls When you receive a WAVE private call:

A tone sounds. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 To call, press the PTT button. 2 To listen, release the PTT button. 3.1.5 Switching from WAVE Mode to Radio Mode Press the programmed Radio Mode button. The yellow LED double blinks. The display shows a blinking -. When successful:

The blinking yellow LED turns off. The display shows <Channel Index>. English 29 English Capacity Max Capacity Max is a trunked radio system based on MOTOTRBO control channels. MOTOTRBO digital radio products are marketed by Motorola Solutions primarily to business and industrial users. MOTOTRBO uses the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) Digital Mobile Radio (DMR) standard, that is, two-slot Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), to pack simultaneous voice or data in a 12.5 kHz channel (6.25 kHz equivalent). 4.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button serves two basic purposes. While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. make a new call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 30 If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an Emergency call. You should release the PTT button. 4.2 Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Pressing and releasing rapidly. Short press Long press While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. English NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 144 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 4.3 Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons by your dealer or system administrator. Bluetooth Audio Switch Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Manual Site Roam Starts the manual site search. Mic AGC Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. One Touch Access Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Directly initiates a predefined Broadcast, Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, or a Quick Text message. Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Privacy Phone Exit Ends a Phone Call. Toggles privacy on or off. Cancel Allows users to end selected calls. 31 English Site Info Site Lock Public Address (PA) Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Voice Announcement for Channel Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Toggle When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Status Selects the status list menu. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Toggle Call Priority Level Enables your radio to enter Call Priority Level High/

Normal. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Allows radio user to toggle between Zone 1 and Zone 2. 4.4 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. 32 Power Level Radio is transmitting. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. 4.5 Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. 4.5.1 LED Indicator The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is powering up. Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is detecting activity over the air. NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Solid Yellow Blinking Yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. English 33 Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. 4.5.2.2 Indicator Tones Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone English 4.5.2 Tones High Pitched Tone Low Pitched Tone 4.5.2.1 Audio Tones 34 4.6 Registration There are a number of registration-related messages that you may receive. Registering Typically, registration is sent to the system during power-

up, Talkgroup change, or during site roaming. If a radio fails registration on a site, the radio automatically attempts to roam to another site. The radio temporarily removes the site where registration was attempted from the roaming list. The indication means that the radio is busy searching for a site to roam, or that the radio has found a site successfully but is waiting for a response to the registration messages from the radio. When a radio is registering, a tone sounds and the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. If the indications persist, the user should change locations or if allowed, manually roam to another site. English Out of Range A radio is deemed to be out of range when the radio is unable to detect a signal from the system or from the current site. Typically, this indication means that the radio is outside of the geographic outbound radio frequency (RF) coverage range. When a radio is out of range, a repetitive tone sounds and the red LED flashes. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio still receives out of range indications while being in an area with good RF coverage. Talkgroup Affiliation Failed A radio tries to affiliate to the Talkgroup specified in the channels or Unified Knob Position (UKP) during registration. A radio that is in affiliation fail state is unable to make or receive calls from the Talkgroup that the radio is trying to affiliate to. Contact your dealer or system administrator if the radio receives affiliation failure indications. 35 English Register Denied Registration denied indicators are received when the registration with the system is not accepted. The radio does not indicate to the radio user the specific reason the registration was denied. Normally, a registration is denied when the system operator has disabled the access of the radio to the system. When a radio is denied registration, the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. 4.7 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 250 Capacity Max Zones with a maximum of 160 Channels per zone. Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions.Each Capacity Max zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions. 4.7.1 36 Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. Press the programmed Zone Toggle button. One of the following tone sounds:

Positive Indicator Tone Radio is in Zone 2. Negative Indicator Tone Radio is in Zone 1. NOTICE:

For all Non-keypad radio, you are recommended to enable Voice Announcement feature for selecting zone. The Voice Announcement feature can only be enabled through CPS. 4.7.2 Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Broadcast Call, All Call, or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position

(that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Capacity Max System. The radio registers with the Talkgroup ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available:

The radio continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. Once the required zone is set (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. NOTICE:

This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. 4.7.3 Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. In a multi-site network, the Capacity Max radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. The Capacity Max system can support up to 250 sites. 4.7.4 English 37 English 4.7.5 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. 4.7.6 Site Restriction In Capacity Max system, your radio administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. The radio does not have to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio 38 attempts to register at a disallowed site, your radio receives indication that the site is denied. The radio then searches for a different network site. When experiencing site restrictions, the yellow LED double flashes to indicate a site search. 4.7.7 Site Trunking Site Trunking is only available with Capacity Max system. A site must be able to communicate with the Trunk Controller to be considered as System Trunking. If the site cannot communicate with the Trunk Controller in the system, a radio enters Site Trunking mode. While in Site Trunking, the radio provides a periodic audible and visual indication to the user to inform the user of their limited functionality. When a radio is in Site Trunking, a repetitive tone sounds. The radios in Site Trunking are still able to make group and individual voice calls as well as send text messages to other radios within the same site. Voice consoles, logging recorders, phone gateways, and data applications cannot communicate to the radios at the site. Once in Site Trunking, a radio that is involved in calls across multiple sites will only be able to communicate with other radios within the same site. Communication to and from other sites would be lost. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. NOTICE:

If there are multiple sites that cover the current location of the radio and one of the sites enters Site Trunking, the radio roams to another site if within coverage. 4.8.1 Group Calls 4.8 Calls This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 4.8.1.1 Making Group Calls To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 36. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. English 39 English 40 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

4.8.1.2 Responding to Group Calls When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 1 Do one of the following:

4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press the programmed Cancel button to end a Group Call. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. clearly into the microphone if enabled. See Selecting a Call Type on page 36. English 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 4.8.2 Broadcast Call A Broadcast Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond. The broadcast initiator can also end the broadcast call. To receive a call from a group of users, or to call a group of users, the radio must be configured as part of a group. 4.8.2.1 Making Broadcast Calls 1 Do one of the following:

Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. The call initiator can press the programmed Cancel button to end the Broadcast Call. 4.8.2.2 Receiving Broadcast Calls Follow the procedure to receive a Broadcast Call on your radio. When you receive a Broadcast Call:

The green LED blinks. 41 English Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

Recipient users are not allowed to Talkback during a Broadcast Call. The Talkback Prohibit Tone plays momentarily if the PTT button is pressed during a Broadcast Call. 4.8.3 Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first call type is called Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU). OACSU sets up the call after performing a radio presence check and completes the call automatically. The second type is called Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU). FOACSU also sets up the call after performing a radio presence check. However, FOACSU calls require user acknowledgment to complete the call and allows the user to either Accept or Decline the call. The type of call is configured by the system administrator. 42 NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the programmed Cancel button. 4.8.3.1 Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, you hear a negative indicator tone when you initiate the call. If the target radio is not available, a short tone sounds. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 36. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. You can only have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 5 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. You will hear a short tone. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the programmed Cancel button. 4.8.3.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the programmed Cancel button. English 43 English 4.8.3.3 Receiving Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU):

action:

The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is configured, either OACSU or Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU), responding to Private Calls may or may not require user acknowledgment. For the OACSU configuration, your radio unmutes and the call connects automatically. 4.8.3.4 Accepting Private Calls The green LED blinks. 1 To accept a Private Call, perform the following Press the PTT button on any entry. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. NOTICE:

Both the call initiator and recipient are able to terminate an on-going Private Call by pressing the programmed Cancel button. When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

4.8.3.5 Declining Private Calls When you receive Private Calls configured as Full Off Air Call Set-Up (FOACSU):

44 The green LED blinks. Making All Calls To decline a Private Call, perform the following action:

Press the programmed Cancel button. 4.8.4 All Calls An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site or every radio at a group of sites, depending on system configuration. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the system cannot respond to an All Call. Capacity Max supports Site All Call and Multi-site All Call. The system administrator may configure one or both of these in your radio. NOTICE:

Subscribers can support System-Wide All Calls but Motorola Solutions infrastructure does not support System-Wide All Calls. Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 36. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. The call initiator can press the programmed Cancel button to end the All Call. 4.8.4.2 Receiving All Calls 4.8.4.1 When you receive an All Call, the following occur:

English 45 Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Ability to reject or accept a phone call English A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. through the speaker. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the call ends during an All Call. 4.8.5 Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call in between an individual radio or a group of radios and a telephone. Depending on how the radio is configured, the following features may or may not be made available:

Access code Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) tone 46 De-access code Displaying of caller alias or ID on receiving a phone call The Phone Call capability can be enabled by assigning and setting up phone numbers on the system. Check with your system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.8.5.1 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. When you attempt to make or end a Phone Call without the access and deaccess codes preconfigured, the attempt fails and a negative indicator tone sounds. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If successful:

The DMTF Tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The phone call fails. Repeat this step. Making Phone Calls with the Programmable Button Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls with the programmable button. English 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press the programmed Phone Exit button to end the call. If end-call-setup is successful:

A tone sounds. If end-call-setup is unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. Repeat this step, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. 4.8.5.2 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 Press or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. The green LED lights up. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, and call status. If the call-setup is successful:

The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the call waiting tone of the telephone user. The display shows Phone Call icon, subscriber alias or ID, Phone Call, and call status. If call-setup is unsuccessful:

A tone sounds. The display shows Phone Call Failed. 47 English Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press to end the call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Call. NOTICE:

During channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. 4.8.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the receiving radio is unable to talkback or respond. The recipient user is also not allowed to end the All Call. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. The green LED blinks. 48 Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 4.8.5.4 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. English NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. You hear a short tone. 4.8.5.5 Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

2 Release the PTT button to listen. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The green LED blinks. through the speaker. 3 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 49 English 3 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. NOTICE:

Your radio is not able to terminate a phone call as a group call. The telephone user must end the call. The recipient user is only allowed to talk back during the call. You hear a short tone. With the Call Preemption feature, the system interrupts and preempts ongoing calls in instances where trunked channels are unavailable. Higher priority calls such as an Emergency Call or an All Call preempt the transmitting radio to accommodate the higher priority call. If no other Radio Frequency (RF) channels are available, an Emergency Call preempts an All Call as well. 4.8.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. 4.8.7 Call Preemption Call Preemption allows a radio to stop any in-progress voice transmission and initiate a priority transmission. 50 4.8.8 Voice Interrupt Voice Interrupt allows the user to shut down an in-progress voice transmission. This feature uses reverse channel signaling to stop the in-

progress voice transmission of a radio, if the interrupting radio is configured to Voice Interrupt, and the transmitting radio is configured to be Voice Call Interruptible. The interrupting radio is then allowed to make a voice transmission to the participant in the stopped call. The Voice Interrupt feature significantly improves the probability of successfully delivering a new transmission to the intended parties when a call is in progress. Voice Interrupt is accessible to the user only if this feature has been set up in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.8.8.1 Enabling Voice Interrupt Follow the procedure to initiate Voice Interrupt on your radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 To interrupt the transmission during an on-going call, press the PTT button. The radio sounds a negative indicator tone until the PTT button is released. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. English 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4.9 Advanced Features This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.9.1 Call Queue When there are no resources available to process a call, Call Queue enables the call request to be placed in the system queue for the next available resources. You hear a Call Queue Tone after pressing the PTT button and radio screen displays Call In Queue indicating that 51 English the radio has entered Call Queue State. The PTT button may be released once the Call Queue Tone is heard. If the call setup is successful, the following occur:

The green LED blinks. The default settings for Priority Call are preconfigured. Press the programmable button to toggle between normal and high priority level. When you use the following features, the call priority level reverts automatically to the preconfigured setting. If enabled, the Talk Permit Tone sounds. All voice calls The radio user has up to 4 seconds to press the PTT DMR Text Message/Text Message button to begin voice transmission. If the call setup is unsuccessful, the following occur:

If enabled, the Reject Tone sounds. The call is terminated and the radio exits the call setup. Job Ticket Remote monitor High Priority The following are the types of Priority Call:

4.9.2 Priority Call Priority Call allows the system to preempt one of the ongoing non-priority calls and initiate the requested high priority call when all channels are busy. With all channels occupied with high priority calls, the system does not preempt any calls, and places the requesting high-priority call into call queue. If the system fails to place the requesting high-priority call into call queue, it declares failure. 52 The radio displays Next Call: High Priority. Call Priority High icon appears at the top of your radio display. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: High Priority. Normal Priority The radio displays Next Call: Normal Priority. Call Priority High icon disappears. Voice Announcement sounds Next Call: Normal Priority. 4.9.3 Talkgroup Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined by a Receive Group List. When scan is enabled, your radio unmutes to any member in its Receive Group List. When scan is disabled, your radio does not receive transmission from any members of the Receive Group List, except for All Call, Permanent Talkgroup, and the selected Talkgroup. 4.9.3.1 Turning Talkgroup Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn Talkgroup Scan on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Scan button. If scan is enabled:

The yellow LED blinks. A positive indicator tone sounds. If scan is disabled:

English The LED turns off. A negative indicator tone sounds. 4.9.4 Receive Group List Receive Group List is a feature that allows you to create and assign members on the talkgroup scan list. This list is created when your radio is programmed and it determines which groups can be scanned. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in this list. If a talkgroup is programmed as Permanent Talkgroup, you are unable to edit the talkgroup from the scan list. NOTICE:

Receive Group List is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.9.5 Priority Monitor The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from talkgroups with higher priority even when radio is in a talkgroup call. 53 English Radio leaves lower priority talkgroup call for higher priority talkgroup call. 4.9.6 Multi-Talkgroup Affiliation NOTICE:

This feature can only be accessed when Talkgroup Scan feature is enabled. Priority Monitor feature applies only to members in the Receive Group List. There are two Priority Talkgroups:

Priority 1 (P1) and Priority 2 (P2). P1 has higher priority than P2. In Capacity Max system, the radio receives transmission according to the priority order below:

1 Emergency Call for P1 Talkgroup 2 Emergency Call for P2 Talkgroup 3 Emergency Call for Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List 4 All Call 5 P1 Talkgroup Call 6 P2 Talkgroup Call 7 Non-priority Talkgroups in the Receive Group List NOTICE:

This feature is programmed by the system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 54 Your radio can be configured for up to seven talkgroups at a site. Of the 16 talkgroups in the Receive Group List, up to seven talkgroups can be assigned as affiliation talkgroups. The selected talkgroup and the priority talkgroups are automatically affiliated. 4.9.7 Talkback The Talkback feature allows you to respond to a transmission while scanning. If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and the call ends, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. 4.9.8 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and English your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:

If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. 55 English 4.9.8.1 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press the programmed Bluetooth Connect button. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. A tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 4.9.8.2 56 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. Press the programmed Bluetooth Disconnect button. A positive indicator tone sounds when the device has been disconnected. 4.9.8.3 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. 4.9.9 Multi-Site Controls 4.9.9.2 Site Lock On/Off These features are applicable when your current radio channel is configured to a Capacity Max system. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. English 4.9.9.1 Enabling Manual Site Search Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

A positive tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. A negative tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. 4.9.10 Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:

57 English sound. The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:

Return to the home channel. Mute the reminder temporarily by using the programmable button. Set a new home channel by using the programmable button. 4.9.10.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. Press the programmed Silence Home Channel Reminder button. 4.9.10.2 Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. 58 Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. 4.9.11 Remote Monitor You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. This feature automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. 4.9.11.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 4.9.12 Call Indicator Settings This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. 4.9.12.1 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 4.9.13 English Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible by using a programmed One Touch Access button. In Capacity Max, the Call Alert feature allows a radio user or a dispatcher to send an alert to another radio user requesting the radio user to call back the initiating radio user when available. Voice communication is not involved in this feature. The Call Alert Operation can be configured by the dealer or the system administrator to allow the user to press the PTT button to respond directly to the call initiator by making a Private Call. An Off Air Call Set-Up (OACSU) private call allows the user to respond immediately while a Full Off Air Call Set-Up

(FOACSU) private call requires user acknowledgment for the call. OACSU type calls are therefore, recommended being used for the Call Alert feature. See Private Call on page 42. 59 English 4.9.13.1 Making Call Alerts Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, a positive indicator tone sounds. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, a negative indicator tone sounds. 4.9.13.2 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. 60 The yellow LED blinks. Press the PTT button within 4 seconds of receiving a Call Alert page to respond with a Private Call. 4.9.14 Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. 4.9.14.1 Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. English Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Radio is muted. The blinking red LED turns off. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. 4.9.15 Emergency Operation 4.9.14.2 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Negative Indicator Tone sounds. An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. In Capacity Max, the receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. When an Emergency Alarm is received, the recipient may choose to either delete the alarm and exit the Alarm List, or respond to the Emergency Alarm by pressing the PTT button and transmitting non-emergency voice. Your dealer or system administrator can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

61 English Short Press Long Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. Silent The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. NOTICE:

If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow In addition, each alarm has the following types:

62 Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. 4.9.15.1 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The green LED lights up. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by the dealer or system administrator. NOTICE:

When configured for Emergency Alarm only, the emergency process consists only of the Emergency Alarm delivery. The emergency ends when an acknowledgment is received from the system, or when channel access attempts have been exhausted. No voice call is associated with the sending of an Emergency Alarm when operating as Emergency Alarm Only. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A low-pitched tone sounds. (Applicable to PMUE4426B only) 4.9.15.2 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios or a dispatcher. Upon acknowledgment by the infrastructure within the group, a group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. The radio must be configured for Emergency Alarm and Call to perform an emergency call after the alarm process. English 63 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. 3 Do one of the following:

The green LED lights up. NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is successfully received:

The Emergency tone sounds. The green LED blinks. If an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is not successfully received:

All retries are exhausted. A low-pitched tone sounds. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. The green LED lights up. 64 6 Press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. NOTICE:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you may or may not hear a Talk Permit tone. Your radio dealer or system administrator can provide more information on how your radio has been programmed for Emergency. The Emergency Call initiator may press the programmed Cancel button to end an on-

going emergency call. The radio returns to a call idle state. 4.9.15.3 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. English NOTICE:

Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. 65 NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with voice to follow on your radio. 4.9.15.4 Receiving Emergency Alarms The receiving radio can only support a single Emergency Alarm at a time. If initiated, a second Emergency Alarm will override the first alarm. Follow the procedure to receive and view Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

Emergency footswitch. The green LED lights up. A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. 2 Once the Emergency tone sounds, speak clearly into the microphone. NOTICE:

Your radio automatically acknowledges the Emergency Alarm (if enabled). The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

You can silence the tone. Do one of the following:

Press the PTT button to call the group of radios which received the Emergency Alarm. Press any programmable button. The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. The red LED blinks. The radio remains in Emergency mode. English 66 Exit Emergency mode. 4.9.15.5 Responding to Emergency Alarms with Call Follow the procedure to respond to Emergency Alarms with Call on your radio. When you receive an Emergency Call:

The Emergency Call Tone sounds if the Emergency Call Indication and Emergency Call Decode Tone is enabled. The Emergency Call Tone will not sound if only the Emergency Call Indication is enabled. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds:

The red LED blinks. 4.9.15.6 Exiting Emergency Mode Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds Your radio shows the following indications:

through the speaker. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. The tone ceased. The red LED extinguished. 4.9.16 Status Message This feature allows the user to send status messages to other radios. English 67 English The Quick Status list is configured by using CPS-RM and comprises up to a maximum of 99 statuses. The LED turns off. The maximum length for each status message is 16 characters. The Text-to-Speech feature if enabled, allows the radio to audibly indicate the status messages that are received. NOTICE:

Text-to-Speech is configured using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.9.16.1 Sending Status Messages Follow the procedure below to send a status message. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. The LED turns off. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 68 4.9.17 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 4.9.17.1 Quick Text Messages Privacy Your radio supports Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. 4.9.17.1.1 Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The green LED lights up. A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 4.9.18 English This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Your radio only supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 69 The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. NOTICE:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.9.18.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Privacy button. users from using it, and enable the radio when it is recovered. Once a radio is disabled, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone. When a radio is stunned, the radio cannot request nor receive any user initiated services on the system that performed the Stun procedure. However, the radio can switch to another system. The radio continues to send GNSS location reports and can be monitored remotely when it was stunned. NOTICE:

The dealer or system administrator may permanently disable a radio. See Radio Kill on page 70 for more information. 4.9.19 Stun/Revive This feature allows you to enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, the dealer or system administrator may want to disable a stolen radio to prevent unauthorized 4.9.20 Radio Kill This feature is an enhanced security measure to restrict unauthorized access to a radio. Radio Kill causes a radio to be rendered inoperable. For example, the dealer may want to kill a stolen or misplaced radio to prevent unauthorized usage. English 70 NOTICE:

A killed radio can only be revived at a Motorola Solutions service depot. Contact your dealer for more information. 4.9.21 Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an emergency condition as programmed by the dealer. 4.9.22 Password Lock You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. 4.9.22.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password Turn on your radio. 1 Enter the four-digit password. a To enter the first digit of the password, use the Channel Selector Knob. b To move to the next digit, press and hold the Channel Selector Knob. c Enter the remaining digit of the password in the same manner. NOTICE:

The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access the radio. 2 Your radio automatically checks the validity of the password when you enter the last digit of the password. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. English 71 English If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A continuous tone sounds. Repeat step 1. If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 4.9.22.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:

72 If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 71 to access the radio. If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 71 to access the radio. 4.9.23 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio by using Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. When your radio receives high volume data:

The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. NOTICE:

Once the programming is complete, a tone sounds, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). 4.9.24 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. English Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 4.9.24.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 73 English 4.9.24.2 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button can be customized according to user requirements by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds when Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-

Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. 74 4.9.25 Dynamic Group Number Assignment

(DGNA) Dynamic Group Number Assignment (DGNA) is a feature which allows the console to assign and remove a new talkgroup from your radio over the air. When the console assigns DGNA to your radio, your radio is in DGNA mode:

A tone sounds. A tone sounds. When the console removes DGNA from your radio, your radio returns to the previous talkgroup:

Depending on how your radio is programmed, you can view, edit, and listen to the original scan lists channels and the non-DGNA talkgroups. When your radio is in DGNA mode, pressing the PTT button allows you to communicate only with the current DGNA talkgroup. To communicate with the previous non-

DGNA talkgroup, program the One Touch Access button. See Making Non-DGNA Calls on page 75. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 4.9.25.1 Making DGNA Calls English NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a negative tone, indicating error. When your radio is in DGNA mode, press the PTT button to make the call. A DGNA tone sounds. NOTICE:

If your radio is not in DGNA mode and you press the One Touch Access button, your radio sounds a tone, indicating error. 2 Press PTT button before a negative tone sounds. NOTICE:

A PTT press after the tone makes call to the DGNA talkgroup. 4.9.25.3 Receiving and Responding to DGNA Calls 4.9.25.2 Making Non-DGNA Calls When you receive a DGNA call:

A DGNA tone sounds. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. through the speaker. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds A positive tone sounds. Voice Announcement sounds One Touch Replaced Call. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 75 English 4.10 Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 4.10.1 Power Levels You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. 4.10.1.1 Setting Power Levels High Low 76 Press the programmed Power Level button. If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Radio transmits at low power. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Radio transmits at high power. 4.10.2 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button. The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned on. Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. If successful:

If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. 4.10.3 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Horns and Lights feature is on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Horns and Lights feature is off. English 4.10.4 Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. Press the programmed Public Address button. One of the following tone sounds:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The Public Address system is turned on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The Public Address system is turned off. 4.10.5 Turning External Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. 77 English 78 Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. One of the following tone sounds:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. The external public address system is turned on. If unsuccessful:

If successful:

Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The external public address system is turned off. All tones and alerts are turned on. 4.10.6 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. 4.10.7 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. 4.10.8 Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. 4.10.8.1 Setting Text-to-Speech Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. Press the programmed Text-to-Speech button to listen to the received text message. 4.10.9 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect English transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 4.10.10 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating that Acoustic Feedback Suppressor is now enabled. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating that the radio is unable to activate Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. 79 4.10.11 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button to toggle the feature on or off. If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. English 4.10.12 80 Connect Plus Connect Plus is a full trunking solution based on DMR technology. Connect Plus uses a dedicated control channel for channel requests and allocations. 5.1 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 90). If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. 5.1.2 Programmable Buttons This chapter explains the additional radio controls available to the radio user through preprogrammed means such as programmable buttons and assignable radio functions. Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

5.1.1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 102 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. English 81 Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. English 5.1.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions Bluetooth Audio Switch Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Intelligent Audio Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Mic AGC On/Off Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Privacy Busy Queue Cancellation Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Phone Exit Ends a Phone Call. Toggles privacy on or off. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Ring Alert Type Roam Request Emergency On/Off Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Scan Toggles scan on or off. 82 Provides direct access to the Ring Alert Type Setting. Requests to search for a different site. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Site Lock On/Off Backlight Brightness Adjusts the brightness level. Channel Up/Down When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Power Level Unassigned Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Allows radio user to toggle between Zone 1 and Zone 2. Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. Zone Toggle 5.1.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. 5.1.3 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode English 83 English 5.1.3.1 LED Indicator Blinking red The LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Au-

to-Range Transponder System. Mute Mode is enabled. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-

ceived a text message or Scan is ena-

bled and is receiving activity. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Rapidly blinking red Blinking green and yellow Solid yellow 84 Double blinking yel-

low Blinking yel-

low Blinking green Double blinking green Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Radio is powering up, receiving a call or data. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. NOTICE:

Upon a PTT button press, if the radio is programmed for polite operation, the radio automatically determines whether a transmission is permitted via a Talk Permit or a Talk Denial tone. 5.1.3.2 Indicator Tones The following are the tones that sound through the radio speaker. Periodic Tone High pitched tone Low pitched tone Repetitive Tone Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. Momentary Tone English Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone 5.1.3.3 Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. 5.1.4 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-Connect Plus zones. 85 English 5.2 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode This section explains general radio operations and call features that are available in your radio. 5.2.1 Selecting a Site A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. 5.2.1.1 Roam Request The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. NOTICE:

This is programmed by your dealer. Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. 5.2.1.2 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. If there are no sites available:

If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

The radio continues to search through the list of sites. 86 You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the Using Multiple Networks radio is unlocked. 5.2.2 Selecting a Zone The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:

Group Call Multi-group Call Site All Call Private Call 5.2.3 Press the programmed Zone Toggle button. English If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. 5.2.4 Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use 87 English the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is set (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. 5.2.5 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is set, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. NOTICE:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID

(programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 107 for more information. 88 5.2.5.1 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. The LED blinks green. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. NOTICE:

See Making a Group Call on page 91 for details on making a Group Call. 5.2.5.2 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. English See Making a Private Call on page 91 for details on making a Private Call. 5.2.5.3 Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the user's full attention. When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to a Site All Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. 89 English 5.2.5.4 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the LED blinks green. The radio unmutes and the incoming private phone call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5.2.5.5 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the LED blinks green. The radio unmutes and the incoming group call sounds through the radio's speaker. Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 90 5.2.5.6 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the LED blinks green. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio speaker. 5.2.6 Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. 2 Press preprogrammed Phone Exit button to end the call. The Channel Selector Knob. A short feedback tone sounds. A programmed One Touch Access button The One NOTICE:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 107 for more information. 5.2.6.1 Making a Call This feature allows the radio users to make different call types : Group Call, Private Call, Site All Call, Multi-group Call. 5.2.6.1.1 Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 87. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. 5.2.6.1.2 Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call using the One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) 1 Do one of the following. from your mouth. English 91 English Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 87. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. 5.2.6.1.3 92 Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 87. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5.2.6.1.4 Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. NOTICE:

Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-

group Call. 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-

group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5.2.6.2 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button English The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 93 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Mute the reminder temporarily by using the programmable button. Set a new home channel by using the programmable 5.3 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. 5.3.1 Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled by using the CPS, the Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement sound periodically when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:

Return to the home channel. button. 5.3.2 Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact, if certain types of failures occur in the Connect Plus system. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but cannot communicate with either the site controller or Connect Plus network at that moment. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. English 94 5.3.2.1 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. 5.3.2.2 English Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode NOTICE:

Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time (or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is 95 possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode. English Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. 5.3.2.3 Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration "beep"

when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site (that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. 96 5.3.3 Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the LED blinks yellow when idle. 5.3.3.1 Starting and Stopping Scan NOTICE:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button. A tone sounds indicating that Scan has been turned on or off. When Scan is enabled, the tones pitch increases. When Scan is disabled, the tones pitch decreases. English Turning Scan On or Off NOTICE:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. A tone sounds indicating that Scan has been turned on or off. When Scan is enabled, the tones pitch increases. 5.3.3.2 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. 5.3.4 97 English When Scan is disabled, the tones pitch decreases. Scan Talkback 5.3.5 Understanding Scan Operation NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the calls Hang Time, switch to the proper zone and then select the groups channel position to talk back to that group. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for LED blinking yellow). You are participating in a call already. No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. Scan Talkback Disabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. Scan Talkback Enabled If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. 5.3.6 98 NOTICE:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. NOTICE:

If Default Emergency Revert Group ID is configured in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, there are three levels of priority for talkgroups: P0, P1, and P2. P0 is the permanent Emergency Revert Group ID and the highest priority. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.3.7 Editing Priority for a Talkgroup 5.3.8 Call Indicator Settings The Priority Monitor feature allows the radio to automatically receive transmission from the talkgroup with higher priority when it is in another call. A tone sounds when the radio switches to the call with higher priority. The MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS can configure two levels of priority for the talkgroups: P1 and P2. P1 has higher priority than P2. This feature allows the radio users to configure call or text message ringing tones. 5.3.8.1 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by English 99 English 5.3.9.2 100 automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button 5.3.9 Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible by using a programmed One Touch Access button. 5.3.9.1 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. Press the PTT button within 4 seconds of receiving a Call Alert page to respond with a Private Call. Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, a positive indicator tone sounds. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5.3.10 Mute Mode Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. 5.3.10.1 Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking until Mute Mode is exited. Radio is muted. Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. 5.3.10.2 Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The blinking red LED turns off. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. English 101 English 5.3.11 Emergency Operation NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more information see the Auto Fallback on page 94. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time, in any state, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down 102 feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Long press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:

Emergency Call Regular You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Silent For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. Silent with Voice The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. Emergency Alert An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert by using the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:

5.3.11.1 Responding to an Emergency Call The radio does not show that it is receiving an Emergency call. Respond the same way as you would to group calls. 5.3.11.2 Ignore Emergency Revert Call This feature enhancement provides an option for your radio to disregard an active Emergency Revert Call. English 103 English To enable Ignore Emergency Revert Call, your radio must be configured through the Connect Plus Customer Programming Software (CPCPS). When the feature is enabled, the radio does not receive any audio on the default Emergency Revert Group ID. Contact with your dealer for more information. 5.3.11.3 Initiating an Emergency Call 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. NOTICE:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 5.3.11.4 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as "hot mic". The "hot mic" applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent 104 English transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. Press the orange Emergency button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 The microphone remains active for the "hot mic" time specified in your radio codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. 5.3.11.5 Initiating an Emergency Alert NOTICE:

If your radio is programmed for "Silent" or "Silent with Voice", it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for "Silent", the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for "Emergency Off". If programmed for "Silent with Voice", the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds. 5.3.11.6 Exiting Emergency Mode NOTICE:

If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish 105 English to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. 5.3.12 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. 106 NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 5.3.12.1 Sending Quick Text Messages with the One Touch Access Button To send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias, press the programmed One Touch Access button. If message is successfully sent, your radio shows the following indications:

A positive tone sounds. The green LED illuminates. If message fails to be sent, your radio shows the following indications:

A negative tone sounds. The display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. 5.3.13 Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). English The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. NOTICE:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.3.13.1 Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving 107 English radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. 5.3.14 Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. 5.3.14.1 Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up the radio. 2 Enter your current four-digit password by rotating the Volume/Channel Knob to dial the number. Press and hold the Volume/Channel Knob to move to the next digit. Enter the remaining digits of the password in the same manner. If the password is correct, the radio proceeds to power up. See Turning the Radio On on page 25. If the password is incorrect, the radio sounds a continuous tone. Repeat step 2. 108 After the third incorrect password, A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. The radio enters into locked state. NOTICE:

The radio is unable to receive any call in locked state. The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access the radio. 5.3.14.2 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State locked state, power up the radio. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. 2 Wait for 15 minutes. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 108. The radio sounds a continuous tone. 1 If your radio was powered down after being in the 5.3.15 Bluetooth Operation NOTICE:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radio's Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW

(4 dBm) at the 10-meter/32 feet range. English Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device

(POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device's user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device's full capabilities. 5.3.15.1 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation. The radio connects to the Bluetooth-enabled device within range with either the strongest signal strength, or to one which it has connected to before in a prior session. 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled device user manual. 109 English 5.3.15.3 110 2 On your radio, press the programmed Bluetooth Connect button. A tone sounds and LED blinks yellow. 3 Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled device user manual. Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds. A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. NOTICE:

A pin code may be required to be programmed in your radio before it can pair with some devices. Contact your dealer for more information. 5.3.16 Wi-Fi Operation 5.3.15.2 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device On your radio, press the programmed Bluetooth Disconnect button. A positive indicator tone sounds when disconnected. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e only. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 5.3.16.1 English Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 5.3.16.2 Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button can be customized according to user requirements by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 111 Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds when Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-

Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button. This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. Tone heard ... Indication Positive Indicator tone Negative Indicator tone All tones and alerts are ON. All tones and alerts are OFF. 5.3.17.2 Setting the Power Level You can customize your radio power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. English 5.3.17 Utilities 5.3.17.1 112 Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button. Tone heard ... Radio transmitting at ... Positive Indicator tone Low Power Negative Indicator tone High Power 5.3.17.3 Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. 5.3.17.4 English Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through the rear accessory connector of your radio by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. Tone heard ... Positive Indicator tone Negative Indicator tone Radio indicating that ... Horns and Lights fea-

ture is on. Horns and Lights fea-

ture is off. 113 Turning GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press the programmed GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. English 5.3.17.5 Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. 5.3.17.6 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating that Acoustic Feedback Suppressor is now enabled. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating that the radio is unable to activate Acoustic Feedback Suppressor. 5.3.17.7 114 Other Systems Features that are available to the radio users under this system are available in this chapter. 6.1 Push-To-Talk Button The Push-to-Talk (PTT) button serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. Long press the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. is enabled, If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving English your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone if your call is interrupted. You should release the PTT button if you hear a continuous Talk Prohibit Tone. 6.2 Programmable Buttons Depending on the duration of a button press, your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions. Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. NOTICE:

See Emergency Operation on page 144 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. 115 English 6.2.1 Assignable Radio Functions The following radio functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Bluetooth Audio Switch Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Ext Public Address (PA) Toggles audio routing between the connected PA loudspeaker amplifier and the internal PA system of the radio. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Manual Site Roam 1 Starts the manual site search. Bluetooth Connect Initiates a Bluetooth find-and-connect operation. Mic AGC Bluetooth Disconnect Terminates all existing Bluetooth connections between your radio and any Bluetooth-enabled devices. Monitor Bluetooth Discoverable Enables your radio to enter Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Channel Announcement Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. 1 Not applicable in Capacity Plus. 116 Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control

(AGC) on or off. Monitors a selected channel for activity. Nuisance Channel Delete1 Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert, a Quick Text message, or Home Revert. English Phone Exit Ends a Phone Call. Privacy Toggles privacy on or off. Public Address (PA) Repeater/Talkaround1 Option Board Feature Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site when Voice Announcement is enabled. Site Info Site Lock1 Permanent Monitor1 Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Status Selects the status list menu. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a local or remote radio. Toggles the internal PA system of the radio on or off. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Stops an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Trill Enhancement Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Reset Home Channel Sets a new home channel. Silence Home Channel Reminder Mutes the Home Channel Reminder. Scan 2 Toggles scan on or off. 2 Not applicable in Capacity PlusSingle-Site. Voice Announcement On/Off Toggles voice announcement on or off. Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Toggles VOX on or off. Wi-Fi Toggles Wi-Fi on or off. 117 English Zone Toggle Allows radio user to toggle between Zone 1 and Zone 2. 6.3.1 LED Indicators 6.2.2 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions The following radio settings or utility functions can be assigned to the programmable buttons. Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Channel Up/Down Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. 6.3 Status Indicators This chapter explains the status indicators and audio tones used in the radio. LED indicators show the operational status of your radio. Blinking Red Radio has failed the self-test upon powering up. Radio is receiving an emergency transmission. Radio is transmitting in low battery state. Radio has moved out of range if Auto-Range Transponder System is configured. Mute Mode is enabled. Solid Green Radio is powering up. Radio is transmitting. Radio is sending a Call Alert or an emergency transmission. Blinking Green Radio is receiving a call or data. Radio is retrieving Over-the-Air Programming transmissions. Radio is detecting activity over the air. 118 NOTICE:

This activity may or may not affect the programmed channel of the radio due to the nature of the digital protocol. There is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air in Capacity Plus. 6.3.2 Tones English Radio is not connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus. All Capacity Plus channels are busy. The following are the tones that sound through on the radio speaker. Double Blinking Green Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Solid Yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel. Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Blinking Yellow Radio is scanning for activity. Radio has yet to respond to a Call Alert. Radio has Flexible Receive List enabled. All Capacity PlusMulti-Site channels are busy. Double Blinking Yellow Radio has Auto Roaming enabled. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Radio has yet to respond to a Group Call Alert. Radio is locked. High Pitched Tone Low Pitched Tone 6.3.2.1 Indicator Tones Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Indicator tones provide you with audible indications of the status after an action to perform a task is taken. 119 English 6.3.2.2 Audio Tones Audio tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously until termination. Periodic Tone Sounds periodically depending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. Repetitive Tone A single tone that repeats itself until it is terminated by the user. Momentary Tone Sounds once for a short duration set by the radio. 6.4 120 Conventional Analog and Digital Modes Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. 1 : Channel Selector Knob Use the Channel Rocker to switch between an analog or a digital channel. Certain features are unavailable when switching from digital to analog mode. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital modes. The minor differences in the way each feature works do not affect the performance of your radio. NOTICE:

Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan. See Scan on page 139 for more information. 6.5 Icon Information Selected features are also available in the multi-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus-Multi-Site. See Capacity PlusMulti-Site on page 122 for more information. Throughout this publication, the icons described are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional analog or conventional digital mode. 6.6 IP Site Connect Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional analog and digital modes, both icons are not shown. For features that are available in a conventional multi-site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 121 for more information. Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus-Single Site. See Capacity PlusSingle-Site on page 122 for more information. This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site by connecting to different available sites by using an Internet Protocol (IP) network. This is a conventional multi-site mode. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, the radio connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls or data transmissions. This is done either automatically or manually depending on your settings. In an automatic site search, the radio scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. The radio then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. English 121 English In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range but which may not have the strongest signal and locks on to the repeater. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusSingle-Site by using a programmable button press. NOTICE:

Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channels in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels, including the selected channel. NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry in the roam list. Contact your dealer for more information. 6.7 Capacity PlusSingle-Site Capacity PlusSingle-Site is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, and Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. 6.8 Capacity PlusMulti-Site Capacity PlusMulti-Site is a multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Capacity PlusMulti-Site allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected with an IP network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. 122 When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the repeater of the new site to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest RSSI value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Capacity PlusMulti-Site enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. NOTICE:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Similar to Capacity PlusSingle Site, icons of features not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity PlusMulti-Site by using a programmable button press. English 6.9 Zone and Channel Selections This chapter explains the operations to select a zone or channel on your radio. A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 32 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 32 channels per zone. Each channel can be programmed with different features and/or support different groups of users. 6.9.1 Selecting Zones Follow the procedure to select the required zone on your radio. Press the programmed Zone Toggle button. One of the following tone sounds:

Positive Indicator Tone Radio is in Zone 2. 123 English Negative Indicator Tone Radio is in Zone 1. 6.10 Calls NOTICE:

For all Non-keypad radio, you are recommended to enable Voice Announcement feature for selecting zone. The Voice Announcement feature can only be enabled through CPS. 6.9.2 Selecting Channels Follow the procedure to select the required channel on your radio after you have selected a zone. Do one of the following:

Use the Volume/Channel Knob. Press the programmed Channel Up/Down Press the programmed One Touch Access buttons. button. 124 This chapter explains the operations to receive, respond to, make, and stop calls. You can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID after you have selected a channel by using one of these features:

Programmed One Touch Access Button This method is used for Group, Private, and Phone Calls only. You can only have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button with a short or long programmable button press. Programmable Button This method is used for Phone Calls only. Volume/Channel Selector Knob This method manually selects a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID. 6.10.1 Group Calls Your radio must be configured as part of a group to receive a call from or make a call to the group of users. 6.10.1.1 Making Group Calls 1 Do one of the following:

Follow the procedure to make Group Calls on your radio. English 4 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.10.1.2 Responding to Group Calls Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Press the programmed One Touch Access To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. Follow the procedure to respond to Group Calls on your radio. button. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. When you receive a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 125 English indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.10.2 Private Calls A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. 126 There are two ways to set up a Private Call. The first type sets up the call after performing a radio presence check, while the second type sets up the call immediately. Only one of these types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. 6.10.2.1 Making Private Calls Your radio must be programmed to initiate a Private Call. If this feature is not enabled, a negative indicator tone sounds when you initiate the call. Follow the procedure to make Private Calls on your radio. 1 Do one of the following:

Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. button. Press the programmed One Touch Access 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. 1 Do one of the following:

The green LED blinks when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop an ongoing interruptible call and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 6.10.2.2 Responding to Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Private Call:

The green LED blinks. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. English 127 English 6.10.3 All Calls An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. An All Call is used to make important announcements, requiring full attention from the user. The users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 6.10.3.1 Receiving All Calls When you receive an All Call:

A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. through the speaker. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone when the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to use. You cannot respond to an All Call. 128 NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You are not able to continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of an All Call. 6.10.3.2 Making All Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an All Call. Follow the procedure to make All Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. 6.10.4 Selective Calls A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. 6.10.4.1 Making Selective Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. Follow the procedure to make Selective Calls on your radio. 1 Select a channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. English 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 6.10.4.2 Responding to Selective Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Selective Calls on your radio. When you receive a Selective Call:

The green LED blinks. 129 English Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. During the Phone Call, your radio attempts to end the call when:

1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. A tone sounds. 6.10.5 Phone Calls A Phone Call is a call from an individual radio to a telephone. If Phone Call capability is not enabled in your radio:

Your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 130 You press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured. You enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits. During channel access, access or deaccess code, or extra digits transmission, your radio responds to the On/Off , Volume Control, and Channel Selector buttons or knobs only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.5.1 Making Phone Calls Follow the procedure to make Phone Calls on your radio. When you attempt to make or end a Phone Call without the access and deaccess codes preconfigured, the attempt fails and a negative indicator tone sounds. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. Repeat this step, or wait for the telephone user to end the call. The (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) DMTF Tone You hear the dialling tone of the telephone user. If successful:

sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. The phone call fails. Repeat this step. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 3 Press the programmed Phone Exit button to end the call. If end-call-setup is successful:

A tone sounds. If end-call-setup is unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 6.10.5.2 Responding to Phone Calls as Group Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Group Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call:

The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, your radio mutes the call. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. English 131 English 6.10.5.4 132 6.10.5.3 Responding to Phone Calls as All Calls Responding to Phone Calls as Private Calls Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as Private Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call:

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. Follow the procedure to respond to Phone Calls as All Calls on your radio. When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call:

Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, your radio mutes the call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, your radio mutes the call. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED blinks. through the speaker. 1 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 2 The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. 6.10.6 Initiating Transmit Interrupt An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Press the Voice PTT button. Press the Emergency button. Perform data transmission. 6.10.7 Talkaround This feature allows you to continue communicating when your repeater is non-operational, or when your radio is out of range from the repeater but within the talk range of other radios. The talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. 6.10.7.1 Toggling Between Repeater and Talkaround Modes Follow the procedure to toggle between Repeater and Talkaround modes on your radio. English Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button. One of the following tones sounds:

Positive Indicator Tone Radio is in talkaround mode. Negative Indicator Tone Radio is in repeater mode. 6.10.8 Broadcast Voice Calls A Broadcast Voice Call is a one-way voice call from any user to an entire talkgroup. The Broadcast Voice Call feature allows only the call initiating user to transmit to the talkgroup, while the recipients of the call cannot respond (no Call Hang Time). Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 133 6.10.8.1 Making Broadcast Voice Calls Program your radio to make Broadcast Voice Calls. 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Programmable Number Key Follow the procedure to make Broadcast Voice Call on your radio by using the programmable number key. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

1 On the Home screen, long press the programmed number key assigned to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. NOTICE:

Users on the channel cannot respond to Broadcast Voice Calls. The radio returns to the previous menu after the call ends. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. See Assigning Entries to Programmable Number Keys for more information. 6.10.8.3 Making Broadcast Voice Calls by Using the Alias Search English 6.10.8.2 134 6.10.8.4 Receiving Broadcast Voice Calls When you receive a Broadcast Voice Call:

A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. A Broadcast Voice Call does not wait for a predetermined period before ending. You cannot respond to a Broadcast Voice Call. NOTICE:

The radio stops receiving the Broadcast Voice Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. You cannot continue with any menu navigation or editing until the end of the Broadcast Voice Call. 6.10.9 Unaddressed Calls An Unaddressed Call is a group call to one of the 16 predefined group IDs. English This feature is configured using CPS-RM. A contact for one of the predefined IDs is required to initiate and/or receive an Unaddressed Call. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.10.9.1 Making Unaddressed Calls 1 Select a channel with the active group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 3 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. The green LED lights up when the target radio responds. A momentary tone sounds. 135 English 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating that the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. The call initiator can press the programmed Cancel button to end a Group Call. 6.10.9.2 Responding to Unaddressed Calls When you receive an Unaddressed Call:

The green LED blinks. A momentary tone sounds. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. 1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 6.10.10 Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) An Open Voice Channel Mode (OVCM) allows a radio that is not preconfigured to work in a particular system to both receive and transmit during a group or individual call. 136 English The OVCM group call also supports broadcast calls. Program your radio to use this feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. The green LED blinks. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker. 6.10.10.1 Making OVCM Calls Your radio must be programmed for you to make an OVCM Call. Follow the procedure to make OVCM Calls on your radio. 1 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 6.10.10.2 Responding to OVCM Calls When you receive an OVCM Call:

1 Do one of the following:

If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to interrupt the audio from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to respond. The green LED lights up. 2 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. 137 English The call ends when there is no voice activity for a predetermined period. Return to the home channel. Mute the reminder temporarily using the programmable 6.11 Advanced Features button. button. Set a new home channel using the programmable This chapter explains the operations of the features available in your radio. Your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.1.1 Muting the Home Channel Reminder When the Home Channel Reminder sounds, you can temporarily mute the reminder. 6.11.1 Home Channel Reminder This feature provides a reminder when the radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time. If this feature is enabled through CPS, when your radio is not set to the home channel for a period of time, the following occurs periodically:

The Home Channel Reminder tone and announcement You can respond to the reminder by performing one of the following actions:

sound. 138 Press the programmed Silence Home Channel Reminder button. 6.11.1.2 Setting New Home Channels When the Home Channel Reminder occurs, you can set a new home channel. Press the Reset Home Channel programmable button to set the current channel as the new Home Channel. English 6.11.2 Remote Monitor 6.11.3 Scan Lists You can use this feature to remotely monitor any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Both your radio and the target radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. This feature stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. 6.11.2.1 Initiating Remote Monitor Follow the procedure to initiate Remote Monitor on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels or groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel or group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel or group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. 6.11.4 Scan Your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity when you start a scan. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus. During a dual-mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it 139 English automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. Do one of the following:

There are two ways of initiating scan:

Main Channel Scan (Manual) Your radio scans all the channels or groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may, depending on the settings, automatically start on the last scanned active channel or group, or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic) Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel or group that has Auto Scan enabled. NOTICE:

When you configure Receive Group Message In Scan, your radio is able to receive group messages from non-home channels. Your radio is able to reply the group messages on home channel but is not able to reply on non-home channels. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.4.1 Turning Scan On or Off Follow the procedure to turn scan on or off on your radio. 140 Press the programmed Scan button to start or stop Scan. Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select a channel programmed with a scan list. If scan is enabled:

The yellow LED blinks. A positive indicator tone sounds. If scan is disabled:

The LED turns off. A negative indicator tone sounds. 6.11.4.2 Responding to Transmissions During Scanning During scanning, your radio stops on a channel or group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed duration known as hang time. Follow the procedure to respond to transmissions during scanning. 1 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, 2 Release the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED lights up. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. The radio returns to scanning other channels or groups if you do not respond within the hang time. 6.11.4.3 Deleting Nuisance Channels If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise,

(termed a "nuisance" channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Follow the procedure to delete nuisance channels on your radio. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 6.11.4.4 Restoring Nuisance Channels Follow the procedure to restore nuisance channels on your radio. Do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. Stop and restart a scan using the programmed Scan button or menu. Change the channel using the Volume/Channel Knob or Channel Up/Down buttons. English 141 English 6.11.5 Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio receives transmissions from that base station. To respond to a transmission during a vote scan, see Responding to Transmissions During Scanning on page 140. 6.11.6 Call Indicator Settings This feature allows you to configure call or text message ringing tones. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume The radio can be programmed to continually alert, when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. 6.11.7 Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back. This feature is accessible using a programmed One Touch Access button. 6.11.7.1 Making Call Alerts Follow the procedure to make Call Alerts on your radio. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. The green LED lights up. 6.11.6.1 142 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is received, a positive indicator tone sounds. If the Call Alert acknowledgment is not received, a negative indicator tone sounds. 6.11.7.2 Responding to Call Alerts When you receive a Call Alert:

A repetitive tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. English When Mute Mode is initiated, all audio indicators are muted except higher priority features such as emergency operations. When Mute Mode is exited, your radio resumes playing ongoing tones and audio transmissions. IMPORTANT:

You can only enable either Face Down or Man Down one at a time. Both features cannot be enabled together. 6.11.8.1 Turning On Mute Mode Follow the procedure to turn on Mute Mode. Press the PTT button within 4 seconds of receiving a Call Alert page to respond with a Private Call. Access this feature by using the programmed Mute Mode button. 6.11.8 Mute Mode The following occurs when Mute mode is enabled:

Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The red LED light starts blinking and remains blinking Mute Mode provides an option to silence all audio indicators on your radio. until Mute Mode is exited. Radio is muted. 143 English Mute Mode Timer begins counting down the duration that is configured. 6.11.9 Emergency Operation 6.11.8.2 Exiting Mute Mode This feature can be exited automatically once the Mute Mode Timer expires. Do one of the following to exit Mute mode manually:

Press the programmed Mute Mode button. Press the PTT button on any entry. Long Press The following occurs when Mute mode is disabled:

Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The blinking red LED turns off. Your radio unmutes and speaker state is restored. If the timer has not expired, Mute mode timer is stopped. NOTICE:

Mute Mode is also exited if the user transmits voice or switches to an unprogrammed channel. 144 An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short Press Duration between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Duration between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. NOTICE:

If a short press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a long press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. If a long press to the Emergency button initiates Emergency mode, then a short press to the same enables the radio to exit Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow NOTICE:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the speaker, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over and/or you press the PTT button. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker. Regular Silent 6.11.9.1 English Receiving Emergency Alarms When you receive an Emergency Alarm:

A tone sounds. The red LED blinks. NOTICE:

Your radio automatically acknowledges the Emergency Alarm (if enabled). To return to home screen, perform the following actions:

a Press

. b Press or to Yes. c Press to select. The radio returns to the home screen and the display shows the Emergency icon. 145 English 6.11.9.2 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Do one of the following to exit Emergency mode after receiving Emergency alarm:

Change the channel. Press the Emergency Off button. Power down the radio. 6.11.9.3 Sending Emergency Alarms This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. Your radio does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when it is set to Silent. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button. The green LED lights up. 146 NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed through CPS. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. If unsuccessful after all retries have been exhausted:

A low-pitched tone sounds. The radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode. 6.11.9.4 Sending Emergency Alarms with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Call to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. Follow the procedure to send Emergency Alarms with call on your radio. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The green LED lights up. NOTICE:

If programmed, the Emergency Search tone sounds. This tone is muted when the radio transmits or receives voice, and stops when the radio exits Emergency mode. The Emergency Search tone can be programmed by your dealer or system administrator. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The Emergency tone sounds. The red LED blinks. English 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to end and speak clearly into the microphone if enabled. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond to the call. 7 To exit the Emergency mode once the call ends, press the Emergency Off button. If you do not press the Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode, the red LED blinks and the radio stays in Emergency mode. 147 English 6.11.9.5 Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow to a group of radios. Your radio microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. NOTICE:

Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. During Emergency Cycle Mode, received calls sound through the speaker. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT button press and remains in Emergency mode. 148 If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. NOTICE:

Some accessories may not support hot mic. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.9.6 Sending Emergency Alarms with Voice to Follow 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The green LED lights up. 2 Once the Emergency tone sounds, speak clearly into the microphone. The radio automatically stops transmitting when:

The cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. Press the programmed Emergency On button during an emergency initiation or transmission state. The hot mic duration expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is disabled. The radio exits the Emergency mode, and reinitiates Emergency. The red LED blinks. The radio remains in Emergency mode. 6.11.9.7 Reinitiating Emergency Mode 6.11.9.8 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. Perform one of the following actions:

Your radio exits Emergency mode when:

Change the channel while the radio is in An acknowledgment is received (for Emergency Alarm Emergency mode. only). All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. NOTICE:

You can reinitiate emergency mode only if you enable emergency alarm on the new channel. NOTICE:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio does not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. English 149 English Follow the procedure to exit Emergency mode on your radio. 6.11.10.1 Quick Text Messages Press the programmed Emergency Off button. Your radio supports Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. 6.11.10 Text Messaging Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. There are two types of text messages, Digital Mobile Radio

(DMR) Short Text Message and text message. The maximum length of a DMR Short Text Message is 23 characters. The maximum length of a text message is 280 characters, including the subject line. The subject line only appears when you receive messages from e-mail applications. NOTICE:

The maximum character length is only applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. For radio models with older software and hardware, the maximum length of a text message is 140 characters. Contact your dealer for more information. 150 6.11.10.1.1 Sending Quick Text Messages Follow the procedure to send predefined Quick Text messages on your radio to a predefined alias. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

The green LED lights up. A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 6.11.11 Privacy This feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-

based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear or unscrambled transmissions. Some radio models may not offer Privacy feature, or may have a different configuration. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Your radio supports two types of privacy, but only one can be assigned to your radio. They are:

Basic Privacy Enhanced Privacy To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key for Basic Privacy, or the same Key Value and Key ID for Enhanced Privacy as the transmitting radio. English If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or different Key Value and Key ID, you either hear a garbled transmission for Basic Privacy or nothing at all for Enhanced Privacy. On a privacy-enabled channel, your radio is able to receive clear or unscrambled calls, depending on how your radio is programmed. In addition, your radio may play a warning tone or not, depending on how it is programmed. The green LED lights up when the radio is transmitting, and blinks rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 6.11.11.1 Turning Privacy On or Off Follow the procedure to turn privacy on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Privacy button. 151 Enabling Manual Site Search Multi-Site Control Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button. Your radio is able to search for sites and switch between sites when signal is weak or your radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. A tone sounds. The green LED blinks. When the signal is strong, the radio remains on the current site. If the radio finds a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

This setting is applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Capacity PlusMulti-Site configuration. A positive tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. Your radio can perform either one of the following site searches:

If the radio fails to find a new site, your radio shows the following indications:

Automatic Site Search Manual Site Search If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, and the site is unlocked, your radio also performs automatic site search. A negative tone sounds. The LED extinguishes. English 6.11.12 6.11.12.1 152 6.11.12.2 Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. If the Site Lock function is toggled on:

Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio pre-warns you using an audio indicator once the inactivity timer expires. If there is still no acknowledgment by you before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this feature:

You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call If the Site Lock function is toggled off:

Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. 6.11.13 Lone Worker This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or channel selection, for a predefined time. The radio remains in the emergency state, allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 144 for more information on ways to exit Emergency. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English 153 English 6.11.14 Bluetooth This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-

enabled device (accessory) through a Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola Solutions and Commercially available Off-The-Shelf (COTS) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 m (32 ft) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. For high degree of reliability, Motorola Solutions recommends to not separate the radio and the accessory. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem, position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10 m defined range) to re-

establish clear audio reception. The Bluetooth function of your radio has maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10 m range. Your radio can support up to three simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, a sensor device, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with 154 Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to the user manual of your respective Bluetooth-

enabled device for more details on the full capabilities of your Bluetooth-enabled device. NOTICE:

If disabled through CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. 6.11.14.1 Connecting to Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to connect to Bluetooth devices. Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Press the programmed Bluetooth Connect button. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to the user manual of your Bluetooth-enabled device. A tone sounds. The yellow LED blinks. Wait for acknowledgment. If successful:

A positive indicator tone sounds. If unsuccessful:

A negative indicator tone sounds. 6.11.14.2 Disconnecting from Bluetooth Devices Follow the procedure to disconnect from Bluetooth devices. Press the programmed Bluetooth Disconnect button. A positive indicator tone sounds when the device has been disconnected. 6.11.14.3 English Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device Follow the procedure to toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth device. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds when the audio route has switched. 6.11.15 Indoor Location NOTICE:

Indoor Location feature is applicable for models with the latest software and hardware. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Indoor Location is use to keep track of the location of radio users. When Indoor Location is activated, the radio is in a limited discoverable mode. Dedicated beacons are used to locate the radio and determine its position. 155 6.11.15.1 Turning Indoor Location On or Off Auto-Range Transponder System Access this feature by using the programmed button. a. Long press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn on Indoor Location. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. If successful, Indoor Location is turned on. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. The Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-equipped radios. ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

b. Press the programmed Indoor Location button to turn off Indoor Location. You hear a positive indicator tone. One of the following scenarios occurs. First-Time Alert A tone sounds. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert If successful, Indoor Location is turned off. A tone sounds. The red LED rapidly blinks. If unsuccessful, you hear a negative indicator tone. NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. English 6.11.16 156 When your radio receives high volume data:

Channel Selector Knob. 6.11.17 Over-the-Air Programming Your dealer can remotely update your radio through Over-

the-Air Programming (OTAP) without any physical connection. Additionally, some settings can also be configured by using OTAP. When your radio undergoes OTAP, the green LED blinks. The channel becomes busy. A negative tone sounds if you press the PTT button. NOTICE:

Once the programming is complete, a tone sounds, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). 6.11.18 Password Lock You can set a password to restrict access to your radio. Each time you turn on your radio, you are asked to enter the password. Your radio supports a 4-digit password input. Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. 6.11.18.1 Accessing the Radio by Using Password Turn on your radio. 1 Enter the four-digit password. a To enter the first digit of the password, use the b To move to the next digit, press and hold the Channel Selector Knob. c Enter the remaining digit of the password in the same manner. NOTICE:

The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access the radio. 2 Your radio automatically checks the validity of the password when you enter the last digit of the password. If you enter the password correctly, the radio powers up. If you enter the wrong password after the first and second attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

English 157 English A continuous tone sounds. Repeat step 1. If you enter the wrong password after the third attempt, your radio shows the following indications:

A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes. Wait for the 15-minute locked state timer to end and then repeat step 1. NOTICE:

If you turn off and turn your radio on again, the 15-

minute timer restarts. 6.11.18.2 Unlocking Radios in Locked State Your radio is unable to receive calls in locked state. Follow the procedure to unlock your radio in locked state. Do one of the following:

If the radio is powered on, wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 71 to access the radio. 158 If the radio is powered off, power up the radio. Your radio restarts the 15-minute timer for locked state. A tone sounds. The yellow LED double blinks. Wait for 15 minutes and then repeat the steps in Accessing the Radio by Using Password on page 71 to access the radio. 6.11.19 Wi-Fi Operation This feature allows you to set up and connect to a Wi-Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. NOTICE:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e only. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Your radio supports WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal and WPA/

WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi networks. WEP/WPA/WPA2-Personal Wi-Fi network Uses pre-shared key (password) based authentication. Pre-shared key can be entered by using the menu or CPS/RM. WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network Uses certificate-based authentication. Your radio must be pre-configured with a certificate. Connecting to a Network Access Point When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. English NOTICE:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to connect to WPA/WPA2-Enterprise Wi-Fi network. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned by default. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button can be customized through CPS according to user requirements. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.11.19.1 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. 6.11.19.2 NOTICE:

The programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button is assigned by your dealer or system administrator. Voice Announcements for the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button can be customized according to user requirements by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi network access points are pre-configured. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press the programmed Wi-Fi Status Query button for the connection status using Voice Announcement. Voice Announcement sounds when Wi-Fi is Off, Wi-

Fi is On but No Connection, or Wi-Fi is On with Connection. 159 English 6.12 Utilities This chapter explains the operations of the utility functions available in your radio. 6.12.1 Squelch Levels Press the programmed Squelch button. One of the following tone sounds:

Positive Indicator Tone Radio is operating in tight squelch. Negative Indicator Tone Radio is operating in normal squelch. You can adjust the squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels with noise higher than normal background. 6.12.2 Power Levels Normal Tight This is the default setting. This setting filters out unwanted calls and/or background noise. Calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. 6.12.1.1 Setting Squelch Levels Follow the procedure to set the squelch levels on your radio. You can customize the power setting to high or low for each channel. High Low This enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. This enables communication with radios in closer proximity. 6.12.2.1 Setting Power Levels Follow the procedure to set the power levels on your radio. 160 Press the programmed Power Level button. If unsuccessful:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Radio transmits at low power. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Radio transmits at high power. 6.12.3 Turning Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts, if needed, except for incoming Emergency alert tone . Follow the procedure to turn tones and alerts on or off on your radio. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button. If unsuccessful:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned on. English The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. 6.12.4 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call through the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds the horn and turns on the lights of your vehicle. This feature needs to be installed through your radio rear accessory connector by your dealer. Follow the procedure to turn all horns and lights on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button. If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. Horns and Lights feature is on. The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. Horns and Lights feature is off. 161 English 6.12.5 Turning Public Address System On or Off Follow the procedure to enable or disable the internal public address (PA) system of your radio. Press the programmed Public Address button. One of the following tone sounds:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The Public Address system is turned on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The Public Address system is turned off. 6.12.6 Turning External Public Address System On or Off Press the programmed Ext Public Address button. One of the following tone sounds:

If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. The external public address system is turned on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. The external public address system is turned off. 6.12.7 Voice Operating Transmission The Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) allows you to initiate a hands-free voice-activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Follow the procedure to enable or disable the external public address (PA) system of your radio. You can enable or disable VOX by doing one of the following:

162 Turn the radio off and then power it on again to enable VOX. button. VOX. Change the channel by using the Scroll Up/Down buttons to enable VOX. Change the channel by using the Volume/Channel Knobto enable VOX. Turn VOX on or off by using the programmed VOX Press the PTT button during radio operation to disable NOTICE:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 6.12.7.1 Turning Voice Operating Transmission On or Off Follow the procedure to turn VOX on or off on your radio. If successful:

Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or off. English NOTICE:

If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. See Turning Talk Permit Tone On or Off for more information. 6.12.8 Turning Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current zone or channel the user has just assigned, or the programmable button the user has just pressed. This audio indicator can be customized according to customer requirements. Follow the procedure to turn Voice Announcement on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Voice Announcement button. The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned on. If unsuccessful:

163 English The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. 6.12.10.1 Setting Text-to-Speech 6.12.9 Turning Option Board On or Off Option board capabilities within each channel can be assigned to programmable buttons. A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Follow the procedure to turn option board on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Option Board button. 6.12.10 Text-to-Speech The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled by your dealer. If Text-to-Speech is enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled. If Voice Announcement is enabled, then the Text-to-Speech feature is automatically disabled. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. 164 Follow the procedure to set the Text-to-Speech feature. Press the programmed Text-to-Speech button to listen to the received text message. 6.12.11 Turning Intelligent Audio On or Off Your radio automatically adjusts the audio volume to overcome current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This is a receive-only feature and does not affect transmission audio. Follow the procedure to turn Intelligent Audio on or off on your radio. Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. NOTICE:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. 6.12.12 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize Acoustic Feedback Suppressor in received calls. Follow the procedure to turn the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor on or off on your radio. Press the programmed AF Suppressor button. One of the following tone sounds:

Positive Indicator Tone Acoustic Feedback Suppressor is activated. Negative Indicator Tone Acoustic Feedback Suppressor is not activated. 6.12.13 Turning Trill Enhancement On or Off You can enable this feature when you are speaking in a language that contains many words with alveolar trill

(rolling "R") pronunciations. Follow the procedure to turn Trill Enhancement on or off on your radio. English Press the programmed Trill Enhancement button to toggle the feature on or off. If successful:

The Positive Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned on. If unsuccessful:

The Negative Indicator Tone sounds. All tones and alerts are turned off. 6.12.14 Turning Global Navigation Satellite System On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radio precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System (BDS). 165 English NOTICE:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured by using CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 166 Authorized Accessories List Part Number Description Motorola Solutions provides a list of accessories to improve the productivity of your radio. Table 2: Antenna Part Number Description HAD4006_ HAD4007_ HAD4008_ HAD4009_ HAE4002_ HAE4003_ HAE4004_ VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U HAE4010_ HAE4011_ HAE4012_ HAE4013_ HAE6019_ HAE6020_ HAE6022_ HAE6024_ UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U English 167 English HAE6026_ HAF4027_ HAF4029_ HAF4030_ HAF4032_ HAF4033_ PMAE4030_ 168 Part Number Description Part Number Description Combination GPS/UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U 800/900, 806941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS+RF, 806941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U PMAE4031_ PMAE4032_ PMAE4033_ PMAE4034_ PMAN4002_ PMAN4004_ RAD4214_ Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Magnetic Mount GPS Active Anten-

na Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U PMAN4000_ Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna PMAN4001_ Window Mount GPS Active Antenna Part Number Description Table 3: Antenna for use with base PMAN4004_ only RAD4215_ RAD4216_ RAD4217_ RAD4218_ RAE4004_RB RAE4004_ Combination GPS/VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U Combination GPS/VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Moun, Mini-U (with base) UHF, 445470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (with-

out base) Part Number Description HAE6027_ HAE6028_ HAE6029_ HAE6030_ UHF, 494512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 470494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 403527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount UHF, 470527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount PMAE4039_ UHF, 403430 MHz, 1/4 Wave PMAE4041_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 1/4 Wave PMAE4040_ UHF, 406420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain PMAE4042_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain PMAE4043_ UHF, 450470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain RAD4223_ RAD4224_ RAD4225_ RAD4226_ VHF, 162174 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 150.8162 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 146150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave VHF, 136144 MHz, 1/4 Wave English 169 English Part Number Description Part Number Description RAD4227_ VHF, 146172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain NNTN8296_3 Table 4: Audio Accessories Part Number Description 89409N HK200 Bluetooth Headset with US Plug HMN4098_ Telephone Style Handset NNTN8125_ NNTN8126_ NNTN8127_ NNTN8189_ Operations Critical Wireless Ear-

piece, 12 in. Cable Operations Critical Wireless Ear-

piece, 9.5 in. Cable Operations Critical Wireless Push-

to-Talk POD Non-Secure Wireless Headset &

Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-

Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable NNTN8190_ Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5 in. Cable NNTN8385_5 PMLN7181_5 PMLN7203_5 RLN4922_5 RLN6490_ RLN6491_ RLN6500_ Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud (Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-the-shelf headphones Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook for Completely Dis-

creet Kit Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, Multipack Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset XBT Overhead, Non-secure Wire-

less Heavy Duty Headset MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA Power Supply 3 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 170 Part Number Description Part Number Description RLN6550_5 Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Micro-

phone for Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3 HKN4137_ HKN4191_ RMN5050_ Desktop Microphone RMN5052_ Compact Microphone HKN4192_ IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone HKN6184_ RMN5127_ RMN5053_ RMN5054_ Heavy Duty Microphone with En-

hanced Audio Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio Table 5: Cables Part Number Description 3075336B07 3075336B10 Compact Microphone Replacement Cable Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement Cable English Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-

metre) Cable, 15 amp (125 Watt) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-

metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-

metre) Cable, 20 amp (145 Watt) Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable PMKN4010_ MAP Programming Cable PMKN4016_ MAP Programming and Test Cable PMKN4018_ Mobile and Repeater Rear Acces-

sory Connector Universal Cable PMKN4033_ Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet PMKN4034_ Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet PMKN4143_ Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable PMKN4144_ Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable RKN4136_ Ignition Sense Cable 171 English Table 6: Desktop Accessories Part Number Description 3060665A04 US Line Cord GKN6266_ GLN7318_ GPN6145_ HPN4007_ HPN4011_ PMLN5072_ Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 Desktop Tray without Speaker Switchmode Power Supply with CE marked (125 Watt Models) Power Supply and Cable Power Supply 14 Volt 15 Amp UNI 117/240 VAC, UK Plug Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector RSN4005_ Desktop Tray with Speaker Table 7: Mounting Kits Part Number Description Part Number Description RLN6465_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6469_ PMLN6402_ PMLN6403_ In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit Low Profile Trunnion Kit High Profile Trunnion Kit Key Lock Trunnion Kit Low Profile Trunnion Bag Remote Mount Transceiver Inter-

face Remote Mount Control Head Inter-

face Table 8: Miscellaneous Accessories Part Number Description DQT1 Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit DSISB50LNC2 MA Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead AY000269A01_ 4 Screen Protector, Clear (single pack contains one unit) HKN9557_ PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8 feet (2.4 metre) Cable 4 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 172 English Table 9: Speakers Part Number Description RSN4002_ RSN4003_ RSN4004_ 13 W External Speaker 7.5 W External Speaker 5 W External Speaker Part Number Description HLN9073_ HLN9414_ PMKN4072_ PMKN4070_ PMLN7052_5 Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Mi-

crophones) Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip

(All Microphones) IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance Kit with translucent tube PMLN5718_S Generic Option Board RLN5926_ RLN5929_ Push Button PTT Emergency Footswitch 5 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. 173 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude 174 bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements Table 10: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

ber Frequency (MHz) Transmit A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. NOTICE:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 English Receive 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 175 English 16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 27 28 60

62 63

176 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 67**

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 78 79 80

77**

156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 NOTICE:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. NOTICE:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime English use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources Table 11: Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18 V USB 3.6 V SB9600 5 V Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impe-

dance 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm 177 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

Motorola Solutions, Inc. ("Motorola Solutions") warrants the Motorola Solutions manufactured Communication Products listed below ("Product") against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Mobile Radios Two (2) Years Product Accessories One (1) Year Motorola Solutions, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted 178 for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of Motorola Solutions. This express limited warranty is extended by Motorola Solutions to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of Motorola Solutions. Unless made in a separate agreement between Motorola Solutions and the original end user purchaser, Motorola Solutions does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. Motorola Solutions cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, Motorola Solutions disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. English II. GENERAL PROVISIONS This warranty sets forth the full extent of Motorola Solutions responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at Motorola Solutions option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola Solutions through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (for example, dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola Solutions at 1-800-927-2744. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER 1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 179 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized English neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-

Motorola Solutions supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola Solutions normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 180 alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with Motorola Solutions published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from Motorola Solutions. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS Motorola Solutions will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and Motorola Solutions will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 Motorola Solutions will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 Motorola Solutions will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 Should the Product or parts become, or in Motorola Solutions opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit Motorola Solutions, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by Motorola Solutions, nor will Motorola Solutions have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by Motorola Solutions which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of Motorola Solutions with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. English Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola Solutions software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola Solutions software. Motorola Solutions software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such Motorola Solutions software or exercise of rights in such Motorola Solutions software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under Motorola Solutions patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. 181 Franais (Canada) Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur Rglement CFR 47, partie 2, section 2.1077(a) de la FCC Partie responsable Nom : Motorola Solutions, Inc. Adresse : 2000 Progress Pkwy, Schaumburg, IL. 60196 Numro de tlphone : 1 800 927-2744 Dclare par les prsentes que le produit :

Nom du modle : XPR 5350/XPR 5380/XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e est conforme aux rglementations suivantes :

Partie 15, sous-partie B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) et section 15.109(a) des rglements de la FCC Appareil numrique de classe B En tant que priphrique dordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux dispositions de la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :

2 Franais (Canada) 1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; et 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. AVIS:

Cet quipement a fait lobjet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, conformment la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin doffrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie de radiofrquence et, sil nest pas install ou utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, il est impossible de garantir quil ny aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant lappareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre lquipement et le rcepteur. Brancher lappareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter le distributeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de laide. Pour un usage en fonction de la slection du code de pays (appareils WLAN) AVIS:

La slection du code de pays est pour les modles non .-U. seulement et nest pas disponible sur tous les modles amricains. Conformment la rglementation de la FCC, tous les produits Wi-Fi commercialiss aux tats-Unis doivent tre fixs sur des canaux fonctionnant aux tats-Unis uniquement. 3 Franais (Canada) Table des matires Dclaration de conformit du fournisseur.......................2 Consignes de scurit importantes.............................. 18 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC)...........................................19 Avis aux utilisateurs (Industrie Canada).......................20 Version du logiciel........................................................ 21 Droits dauteur.............................................................. 22 Droits dauteur du logiciel............................................. 24 Entretien de la radio..................................................... 25 Chapitre 1: Pour commencer...................................... 27 1.1 Mise sous tension de la radio...................... 27 1.2 teindre la radio.......................................... 27 1.3 Rglage du volume......................................27 Chapitre 2: Commandes de la radio............................28 2.1 Bouton Volume/Canal..................................28 3.1.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel de groupe WAVE.................................... 30 3.1.4 Recevoir et rpondre un appel priv WAVE............................................ 30 3.1.5 Passage du mode WAVE au mode Radio............................................ 31 Section I: Capacity Max...............................................32 4.1 Bouton dmission (PTT)............................. 32 4.2 Touches programmables.............................32 4.3 Fonctions attribuables de la radio................33 4.4 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables............. 35 4.5 Indicateurs d'tat......................................... 35 4.5.1 Voyant lumineux............................ 35 4.5.2 Tonalits........................................ 36 4.5.2.1 Tonalits audio.................36 4.5.2.2 Tonalits d'avertissement............................ 37 Chapitre 3: WAVE....................................................... 29 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise........................29 4.6 Enregistrement............................................ 37 4.7 Slection des zones et des canaux............. 38 3.1.1 Passage du mode Radio au mode WAVE........................................... 29 3.1.2 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE..................................................... 30 4.7.1 Slection des zones.......................39 4.7.2 Slection dun type dappel............39 4.7.3 Slectionner un site....................... 39 4 4.7.4 Demande ditinrance....................40 4.7.5 Verrouillage de site activ/

dsactiv.................................................40 4.7.6 Restriction de site.......................... 40 4.7.7 ADF de site.................................... 41 4.8 Appels..........................................................41 4.8.1 Appels de groupe...........................42 4.8.1.1 Faire des appels de groupe..........................................42 4.8.1.2 Rponse un appel de groupe..........................................43 4.8.2 Appel de diffusion ......................... 44 4.8.2.1 Faire des appels de diffusion .......................................44 4.8.2.2 Rception d'appels de diffusion .......................................44 4.8.3 Appel priv.....................................45 4.8.3.1 Passer des appels individuels.................................... 45 4.8.3.2 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche................................ 46 Franais (Canada) 4.8.3.3 Rception d'un appel individuel...................................... 47 4.8.3.4 Accepter des appels individuels.................................... 47 4.8.3.5 Refus des appels individuels.................................... 48 4.8.4 Appels gnraux ...........................48 4.8.4.1 Appels gnraux ............. 49 4.8.4.2 Rception d'un appel gnral ........................................ 49 4.8.5 Appels tlphoniques.................... 50 4.8.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique................................ 50 4.8.5.2 Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable ................. 51 4.8.5.3 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral......................................... 52 4.8.5.4 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe..........................................52 5 Franais (Canada) 4.9 Fonctions avances.....................................55 4.8.5.5 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel...................................... 53 4.8.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission............................................54 4.8.7 Priorit d'appel............................... 54 4.8.8 Interruption vocale......................... 54 4.8.8.1 Activation de l'interruption vocale...................... 55 4.9.1 Files dattente dappels.................. 55 4.9.2 Appel prioritaire..............................56 4.9.3 Balayage de groupe dappels ....... 57 4.9.3.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe..................... 57 4.9.4 Liste de groupe de rception......... 58 4.9.5 Surveillance de la priorit.............. 58 4.9.6 Affiliation de groupes multiples...... 59 4.9.7 TalkBack (rponse) .......................59 4.9.8 Bluetooth........................................60 4.9.8.1 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth..................... 60 6 4.9.8.2 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth..................... 61 4.9.8.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-

parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth.......................61 4.9.9 Rglages multisite......................... 61 4.9.9.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle................................ 62 4.9.9.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv........................... 62 4.9.10 Rappel du canal daccueil............62 4.9.10.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil............. 63 4.9.10.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil.......................... 63 4.9.11 coute distance........................ 63 4.9.11.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance......................... 63 4.9.12 Rglages de lindicateur dappel..64 4.9.12.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme..................64 4.9.13 Fonction Avis dappel...................64 4.9.13.1 Excution dune alerte dappel......................................... 65 4.9.13.2 Rponse un avertissement dappel.................. 65 4.9.14 Mode muet...................................65 4.9.14.1 Activation du mode muet............................................. 66 4.9.14.2 Quitter le mode muet..... 66 4.9.15 Fonctionnement durgence.......... 67 4.9.15.1 Envoi d'alarmes durgence..................................... 68 4.9.15.2 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel..............69 4.9.15.3 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal.............................................70 4.9.15.4 Rception dune alarme durgence..................................... 72 4.9.15.5 Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel...72 4.9.15.6 Quitter le mode durgence..................................... 73 4.9.16 Message d'tat.............................73 Franais (Canada) 4.9.16.1 Envoi de messages dtat............................................ 73 4.9.17 Messagerie texte ........................ 74 4.9.17.1 Message texte rapide ....74 4.9.17.1.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides ... 74 4.9.18 Confidentialit.............................. 75 4.9.18.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage....................................... 76 4.9.19 Interrompre/Raviver..................... 76 4.9.20 Dsactivation permanente de la radio........................................................76 4.9.21 Travailleur solitaire.......................77 4.9.22 Verrouillage par mot de passe.....77 4.9.22.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe........................77 4.9.22.2 Dverrouillage de la radio............................................. 78 4.9.23 Programmation par onde radio.... 78 4.9.24 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi..................79 4.9.24.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi............................... 80 7 Franais (Canada) 4.9.24.2 Connexion un point daccs rseau............................. 80 4.9.25 Attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe (DGNA).......... 80 4.9.25.1 Effectuer un appel DGNA...........................................81 4.9.25.2 Effectuer un appel non DGNA...........................................81 4.9.25.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel DGNA............................81 4.10 Utilitaires....................................................82 4.10.1 Niveaux de puissance..................82 4.10.1.1 Configuration de la puissance.....................................82 4.10.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio...............83 4.10.3 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares........................ 83 4.10.4 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique...............................84 4.10.5 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe..................84 4.10.6 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle.................................. 85 4.10.7 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption.......................................... 85 4.10.8 Synthse texte-parole..................85 4.10.8.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole.................................. 86 4.10.9 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent.........................86 4.10.10 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques.............................................86 4.10.11 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration................... 87 4.10.12 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial..................................87 Section II: Connect Plus.............................................. 88 5.1 Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus..................................................... 88 5.1.1 Bouton d'mission (PTT)............... 88 5.1.2 Touches programmables............... 88 5.1.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio.................................... 89 5.1.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables.................................. 90 8 5.1.3 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus........................... 91 5.1.3.1 Voyant lumineux.............. 91 5.1.3.2 Tonalits d'avertissement............................ 92 5.1.3.3 Tonalits dalerte..............92 5.1.4 Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus....................... 93 5.2 Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus..................................................... 93 5.2.1 Slectionner un site....................... 93 5.2.1.1 Demande ditinrance...... 93 5.2.1.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv........................... 94 5.2.2 Slection d'une zone......................94 5.2.3 Utilisation de rseaux multiples..... 94 5.2.4 Slection dun type dappel............95 5.2.5 Rception et rponse un appel...95 5.2.5.1 Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre....................96 5.2.5.2 Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre................ 97 Franais (Canada) 5.2.5.3 Rception d'un appel gnral......................................... 97 5.2.5.4 Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant.... 98 5.2.5.5 Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant.........................98 5.2.5.6 Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant...................... 98 5.2.6 Faire un appel radio.......................98 5.2.6.1 Faire un appel ................. 99 5.2.6.1.1 Pour passer un appel de groupe................ 99 5.2.6.1.2 Passer un appel individuel......................... 100 5.2.6.1.3 Faire un appel gnral de site.................100 5.2.6.1.4 Appel multigroupe..................... 101 5.2.6.2 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche.............................. 101 5.3 Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus..................................................................102 5.3.1 Rappel du canal daccueil............102 9 Franais (Canada) 10 5.3.2 Plan de secours automatique...... 103 5.3.2.1 Indications de mode de reprise dappel automatique.......103 5.3.2.2 Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise........ 104 5.3.2.3 Retour au fonctionnement normal.............. 105 5.3.3 Balayage......................................105 5.3.3.1 Dmarrer et arrter le balayage.................................... 106 5.3.3.2 Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage.................................... 106 5.3.4 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage 107 5.3.5 Comprendre la fonction de balayage............................................... 107 5.3.6 Rponse de balayage..................108 5.3.7 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels.................................... 108 5.3.8 Rglages de lindicateur dappel..109 5.3.8.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme..................... 109 5.3.9 Fonction Avertissement dappel...109 5.3.9.1 Rponse un avertissement dappel................ 109 5.3.9.2 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct.........110 5.3.10 Mode muet.................................110 5.3.10.1 Activation du mode muet........................................... 110 5.3.10.2 Quitter le mode muet... 111 5.3.11 Fonctionnement durgence........ 111 5.3.11.1 Rponse un appel d'urgence................................... 113 5.3.11.2 Ignorer Appel dannulation durgence...............113 5.3.11.3 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence................................... 114 5.3.11.4 Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal 114 5.3.11.5 Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence................................... 115 5.3.11.6 Quitter le mode durgence................................... 115 5.3.12 Messagerie texte ...................... 116 5.3.12.1 Envoyer des messages texte rapides au moyen de la touche daccs direct................. 116 5.3.13 Cryptage.................................... 117 5.3.13.1 Faire un appel crypt... 117 5.3.14 Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe........................................ 118 5.3.14.1 Accder la radio l'aide d'un mot de passe............ 118 5.3.14.2 Dverrouiller la radio.... 119 5.3.15 Bluetooth....................................119 5.3.15.1 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion 120 5.3.15.2 Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth.....................121 5.3.15.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth 121 5.3.16 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi................121 5.3.16.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi............................. 122 5.3.16.2 Connexion un point daccs rseau...........................122 Franais (Canada) 5.3.17 Utilitaires.................................... 123 5.3.17.1 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio......... 123 5.3.17.2 Rgler le niveau de puissance...................................123 5.3.17.3 Annonce vocale........... 124 5.3.17.4 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur /

des phares................................. 124 5.3.17.5 Audio intelligent............125 5.3.17.6 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques................ 125 5.3.17.7 Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS.............. 125 Section III: Autres systmes......................................126 6.1 Bouton PTT............................................... 126 6.2 Touches programmables...........................126 6.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio 127 6.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables........................................... 129 6.3 Indicateurs d'tat....................................... 129 11 6.5 Information relative aux icnes..................132 6.10.4 Appels slectifs

......................141 Franais (Canada) 6.3.1 Voyants DEL................................129 6.3.2 Tonalits...................................... 131 6.3.2.1 Tonalits d'avertissement.......................... 131 6.3.2.2 Tonalits audio...............131 6.4 Mode analogique ou numrique classique 132 6.6 Sites IP interconnects..............................133 6.7 Capacity Plus site unique .................... 134 6.8 Capacity Plus multisite ........................ 134 6.9 Slection des zones et des canaux........... 135 6.9.1 Slection des zones.....................135 6.9.2 Slection des canaux...................136 6.10 Appels......................................................136 6.10.1 Appels de groupe.......................137 6.10.1.1 Appels de groupe.........137 6.10.1.2 Rponse un appel de groupe........................................137 6.10.2 Appels privs

......................... 138 6.10.2.1 Passer des appels individuels

.............................. 138 12 6.10.2.2 Rponse des appels individuels ............................... 139 6.10.3 Appels gnraux........................140 6.10.3.1 Rception dun appel gnral....................................... 140 6.10.3.2 Appel gnral...............141 6.10.4.1 Excution dun appel slectif........................................141 6.10.4.2 Rponse un appel slectif

....................................142 6.10.5 Appels tlphoniques

............ 142 6.10.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique

.......................... 143 6.10.5.2 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe

....................................144 6.10.5.3 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral

...................................144 6.10.5.4 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel

................................145 6.10.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission

..................................... 145 6.10.7 Mode direct................................ 146 6.10.7.1 Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct.......... 146 6.10.8 Appel vocal de diffusion.............146 6.10.8.1 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion....................... 146 6.10.8.2 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion laide de la touche numrique programmable ........................... 147 6.10.8.3 Faire des appels vocaux de diffusion laide de la recherche dalias

....................148 6.10.8.4 Recevoir un appel vocal de diffusion....................... 148 6.10.9 Appel sans destinataire............. 148 6.10.9.1 Effectuer un appel sans destinataire................................ 148 6.10.9.2 Rpondre un appel sans destinataire........................ 149 6.10.10 Mode de canal vocal ouvert

(OVCM).................................................150 Franais (Canada) 6.10.10.1 Effectuer un appel OVCM........................................ 150 6.10.10.2 Rpondre un appel OVCM........................................ 151 6.11 Fonctions avances.................................151 6.11.1 Rappel du canal daccueil..........152 6.11.1.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil........... 152 6.11.1.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil........................ 152 6.11.2 coute distance...................... 152 6.11.2.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance....................... 153 6.11.3 Listes de balayage.....................153 6.11.4 Balayage....................................153 6.11.4.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage.................................... 154 6.11.4.2 Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage.................................... 155 6.11.4.3 Suppression des canaux nuisibles........................ 155 13 Franais (Canada) 14 6.11.4.4 Restauration des canaux nuisibles........................ 155 6.11.5 Balayage par vote

...........156 6.11.6 Rglages de lindicateur dappel 156 6.11.6.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme................ 156 6.11.7 Fonction Avertissement dappel.156 6.11.7.1 Excution dune alerte dappel....................................... 157 6.11.7.2 Rponse un avertissement dappel................ 157 6.11.8 Mode muet.................................157 6.11.8.1 Activation du mode muet........................................... 158 6.11.8.2 Quitter le mode muet... 158 6.11.9 Fonctionnement durgence ....... 158 6.11.9.1 Rception dune alarme durgence................................... 159 6.11.9.2 Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence......................160 6.11.9.3 Envoi des alarmes durgence................................... 160 6.11.9.4 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel............161 6.11.9.5 Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal............. 162 6.11.9.6 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal 6.11.9.7 Ractivation du mode durgence................................... 164

...................................... 163 6.11.9.8 Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence...................... 164 6.11.10 Messagerie texte .................... 165 6.11.10.1 Message texte rapide

................................................165 6.11.10.1.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides

..................................... 165 6.11.11 Confidentialit

......................166 6.11.11.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage

............................. 167 6.11.12 Commande multisite

...... 167 6.11.12.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle.........................167 6.11.12.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv......................... 168 6.11.13 Travailleur solitaire...................168 6.11.14 Bluetooth..................................169 6.11.14.1 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth................... 169 6.11.14.2 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth................... 170 6.11.14.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth 170 6.11.15.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur........171 6.11.16 Systme ARTS

............. 172 Franais (Canada) 6.11.17 Programmation par onde radio

...........................................................172 6.11.18 Verrouillage par mot de passe.173 6.11.18.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe............ 173 6.11.18.2 Dverrouillage de la radio........................................... 174 6.11.19 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi..............174 6.11.19.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi......................... 175 6.11.19.2 Connexion un point daccs rseau...........................175 6.12 Utilitaires..................................................176 6.12.1 Niveau de silencieux..................176 6.12.1.1 Configuration du niveau du silencieux.............................. 176 6.12.2.1 Configuration de la puissance...................................177 6.12.3 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio.............177 6.12.4 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares...................... 178 15 6.11.15 Localisation lintrieur........... 171 6.12.2 Niveaux de puissance................176 Franais (Canada) 16 6.12.5 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique.............................178 6.12.6 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe................179 6.12.7 Transmission vocale.................. 179 6.12.7.1 Activation ou dsactivation de lmission commande par la voix (VOX)... 180 6.12.8 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle................................ 180 6.12.9 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption........................................ 181 6.12.10 Synthse texte-parole..............181 6.12.10.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole.................181 6.12.11 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent................... 182 6.12.12 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques...........................................182 6.12.13 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration................. 183 6.12.14 Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial................................183 Section IV: Liste des accessoires approuvs............184 Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF........................................................... 192 Affectations de canaux spciaux..................... 192 Canal durgence....................................192 Canal dappel non commercial............. 193 Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement................................................ 193 Dclaration de conformit pour lutilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit............ 195 Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes......................... 195 Garantie limite.......................................................... 197 PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS.............................. 197 I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :...................................................... 197 II. CONDITIONS GNRALES....................... 198 III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :............................................ 198 IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE...................................................... 198 V. CE QUI NEST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE......................................... 199 VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS...................... 200 VII. LOI APPLICABLE..................................... 201 Franais (Canada) 17 gain de lantenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte quil ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola Solutions offrant le gain maximal autoris et limpdance requise pour le type dantenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit dutiliser avec cet appareil tout type dantenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Franais (Canada) Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit MISE EN GARDE:

Cette radio doit tre utilise des fins professionnelles uniquement. Avant dutiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient dimportantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur lexposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Selon la rglementation dIndustrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis quavec une antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le 18 Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC daprs les conditions suivantes : s Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. Toute modification apporte cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Franais (Canada) 19 Franais (Canada) Avis aux utilisateurs

(Industrie Canada) Le fonctionnement de votre radio Motorola Solutions est assujetti la Loi sur la radiocommunication et doit se conformer aux rgles et rglements du ministre Innovation, Sciences et Dveloppement conomique Canada du gouvernement fdral. Industrie Canada exige que les utilisateurs de frquences mobiles terrestres prives obtiennent une licence avant dutiliser leur quipement. 20 Version du logiciel Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version du logiciel R02.20.01.0000R02.20.02.0000R01.01.45.0000R03.01.01 R01.20.01.0000 ou une version ultrieure. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) 21 Franais (Canada) Droits dauteur Les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce document peuvent inclure des programmes informatiques protgs par des droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions. Les lois des tats-Unis et dautres pays rservent Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs pour les programmes informatiques protgs par droits dauteur. Par consquent, tout programme informatique protg par droits dauteur de Motorola Solutions compris dans les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans le prsent document ne peut tre copi ni reproduit de quelque manire que ce soit sans lautorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Aucune partie du prsent document ne peut tre reproduite, transmise, stocke dans un systme de recherche documentaire ou traduite dans une autre langue ou dans un langage informatique, sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans lautorisation crite pralable de Motorola Solutions, Inc. De plus, lachat de produits Motorola ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits dauteur, des droits de brevets ou dune demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, lexception 22 dune licence dutilisation normale et non exclusive, libre de toute redevance, prvue par la loi lors de la vente dun produit. Avis de non-responsabilit Veuillez noter que certaines fonctionnalits, installations et capacits dcrites dans ce document pourraient ne pas sappliquer ou tre accordes sous licence pour lutilisation sur un systme particulier, ou pourraient dpendre des caractristiques dune unit mobile dabonn ou dune configuration de certains paramtres. Veuillez consulter votre personne-ressource chez Motorola Solutions pour en savoir plus. Marques de commerce MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo au M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Contenu code source libre Ce produit contient des logiciels libres utiliss sous licence. Reportez-vous au support d'installation du produit pour obtenir tous les avis juridiques relatifs aux logiciels libres et les contenus d'attribution. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas) vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre. Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Franais (Canada) 23 intellectuelle, notamment les droits de brevet, les droits dauteur et les secrets industriels de Digital Voice Systems, Inc. Cette technologie de codage vocal nest concde sous licence que pour une utilisation avec cet quipement de tlcommunication. Il est explicitement interdit tout utilisateur de cette technologie de tenter de dcompiler, de faire lingnierie rebours ou de dsassembler le code excutable, ou encore de convertir de toute autre manire le code excutable dans un format lisible par lutilisateur. Brevets des tats-Unis n 5,870,405, n 5,826,222, n 5,754,974, n 5,701,390, n 5,715,365, n 5,649,050, n 5,630,011, n 5,581,656, n 5,517,511, n 5,491,772, n 5,247,579, n 5,226,084 et n 5,195,166. Franais (Canada) Droits dauteur du logiciel Les produits Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel peuvent inclure des logiciels Motorola Solutions protgs en vertu de la loi sur le droit dauteur enregistrs dans des mmoires semi-conducteurs ou dans dautres supports. Les lois du Canada, des tats-Unis et dautres pays protgent, au nom de Motorola Solutions, certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, notamment les droits exclusifs de copie et de reproduction sous toute forme que ce soit des logiciels protgs par la loi sur le droit dauteur. Par consquent, la loi sur le droit dauteur protgeant tous les logiciels de Motorola Solutions inclus avec les produits de Motorola Solutions dcrits dans ce manuel interdit toute copie, reproduction, modification, ingnierie rebours ou distribution de ces logiciels sans lautorisation crite expresse de Motorola Solutions. De plus, lachat de produits Motorola Solutions ne peut tre considr comme une transaction octroyant directement, par infrence, estoppel ou autrement une licence en vertu des droits dauteur, des droits de brevets ou dune demande de brevet de Motorola Solutions, lexception dune licence dutilisation normale et non exclusive prvue par la loi lors de la vente dun produit. La technologie de codage vocal AMBE+2 incluse dans ce produit est protge par les droits de proprit 24 Entretien de la radio Cette section dcrit les prcautions de base respecter lors de la manipulation de la radio. Tableau 1: Spcification IP Spcification IP Description IP67 Permet votre radio de rsister aux conditions difficiles sur le terrain comme une immersion dans leau. MISE EN GARDE:

Ne dmontez pas votre radio. Cela pourrait endommager les joints de lappareil et occasionner une infiltration deau dans la radio. Lentretien de la radio devrait tre effectu uniquement dans un centre de rparations quip pour mettre lessai et remplacer le joint sur lappareil. Si la radio a t submerge, secouez-la afin dvacuer leau susceptible dtre emprisonne dans la grille du haut-parleur et dans le port du microphone. Leau emprisonne pourrait nuire la qualit audio. Franais (Canada) Si la zone de contact de la batterie de la radio est expose leau, nettoyez et schez les contacts de batterie sur la radio et sur la batterie avant de connecter cette dernire lappareil. Leau rsiduelle pourrait court-circuiter la radio. Si la radio a t plonge dans un liquide corrosif (p. ex. de leau sale), rincez la radio et la batterie leau douce puis schez-les. Pour nettoyer les surfaces extrieures de la radio, utilisez une solution dilue deau et de dtergent liquide pour vaisselle (p. ex. une cuillre th de dtergent dans environ quatre litres deau). Nenfoncez rien dans louverture situe sur le chssis de la radio, sous le contact de la batterie. Cette ouverture permet dquilibrer la pression dans la radio. Le fait denfoncer un objet dans cette ouverture risque de provoquer des infiltrations deau dans la radio, qui ne serait alors plus submersible. Nobstruez jamais ou ne couvrez jamais cette ouverture, mme avec une tiquette. Assurez-vous quaucune substance huileuse nentre en contact avec cette ouverture. La radio, dont lantenne est correctement rattache, est conue pour tre submersible une profondeur 25 Franais (Canada) maximale de 1 mtre (3,28 pieds), pendant une dure maximale de 30 minutes. Une utilisation excessive, suprieure la limite maximale, ou sans antenne pourrait endommager la radio. Lorsque vous nettoyez la radio, nutilisez pas de jet haute pression, car la pression de leau serait alors suprieure la pression correspondant une profondeur de 1 mtre et leau risquerait de sinfiltrer dans la radio. 26 Pour commencer 1.2 teindre la radio Cette section fournit les instructions pour la prparation de votre radio en vue de son utilisation. 1.1 Mise sous tension de la radio Appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrt. En cas de russite, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. AVIS:

Si la fonction Tonalits/alertes est dsactive, il ny a aucune tonalit lors de la mise sous tension. Le voyant DEL vert sallume. Lcran sallume. Si la radio ne se met pas sous tension, vrifiez la batterie. Assurez-vous que la batterie est charge et correctement fixe. Contactez votre dtaillant si la radio ne sallume toujours pas. Franais (Canada) Maintenez le bouton Marche/Arrt enfonc. Il peut s'couler jusqu' 7 secondes avant que votre radio soit compltement teinte. 1.3 Rglage du volume Pour rgler le volume de votre radio, effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

Pour augmenter le volume, tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens horaire. Pour rduire le volume, tournez le bouton Marche/Arrt/Volume dans le sens antihoraire. AVIS:

Vous pouvez programmer un cart de volume minimal afin dempcher le rglage du volume un niveau plus faible que le niveau minimum programm. 27 Franais (Canada) Commandes de la radio 7 Voyants DEL Ce chapitre dcrit les touches de commande et les fonctions de la radio. 2.1 Bouton Volume/Canal Le bouton Volume/Canal peut tre programm comme un bouton double fonction pour le volume et le canal, ou comme commande de volume seulement. Pour rgler le volume, consultez la section Rglage du volume la page 27. Pour changer les canaux, appuyez et maintenez le bouton Volume/Canal jusqu' ce que l'cran clignote pour indiquer l'tat de slection de canal. Tournez le bouton Volume/

Canal pour slectionner le canal. L'affichage clignote tant que vous n'avez pas quitt le mode de slection de canal. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur le bouton Volume/Canal. Attendez que la minuterie du menu arrive son terme. 1 Bouton Marche/Arrt/Information 2 Bouton Volume/Canal 3 cran 4 Haut-parleur 5 Boutons programmables du panneau avant 6 Connecteur daccessoire 28 1236745 Franais (Canada) WAVE Lenvironnement de voix rseau tendu (Wide Area Voice Environment ou WAVE) offre une nouvelle mthode de faire des appels entre deux radios. WAVE vous permet de communiquer sur diffrents rseaux et appareils au moyen du Wi-Fi. Les appels WAVE sont effectus lorsque la radio est connecte un rseau IP par Wi-Fi. Votre radio prend en charge diffrentes configurations systme :

WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise La mthode pour lancer un appel WAVE est diffrente dun type de systme lautre. Reportez-vous la section correspondant la configuration systme de votre radio. AVIS:

Cette fonction s'applique seulement certains modles. Passage du mode Radio au mode WAVE Appuyez sur la touche programme WAVE. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant -. AVIS:

Votre radio active automatiquement le Wi-Fi lorsquelle passe au mode WAVE. En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignotant s'teint. L'cran affiche l<Index des canaux>. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. L'cran affiche --. 3.1 WAVE OnCloud/OnPremise 3.1.1 29 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

La synchronisation se produit lorsque de nouveaux paramtres sont diffuss sur votre radio. Lorsque la radio entre en mode WAVE, elle affiche Synchronisation. Une fois la synchronisation termine, la radio retourne l'cran d'accueil. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . 2 Pour couter, relchez le bouton PTT. 3.1.2 Effectuer un appel de groupe WAVE 1 Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal ou les touches pour slectionner un groupe WAVE. 2 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . Si lappel nest pas russi :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 3.1.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel de groupe WAVE Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe WAVE :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. 30 3.1.4 Recevoir et rpondre un appel priv WAVE Lorsque vous recevez un appel priv WAVE :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour faire un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT . 2 Pour couter, relchez le bouton PTT. 3.1.5 Passage du mode WAVE au mode Radio Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode Radio. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. L'cran affiche un curseur clignotant -. En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignotant s'teint. L'cran affiche <Index des canaux>. Franais (Canada) 31 Franais (Canada) Capacity Max Capacity Max est un systme radio ADF bas sur les canaux de contrle MOTOTRBO. Les radios numriques MOTOTRBO sont vendues par Motorola Solutions principalement aux entreprises et aux utilisateurs de lindustrie. MOTOTRBO se fonde sur la norme des radios mobiles numriques (DMR) de lInstitut europen des normes de tlcommunication (ETSI), cest-

-dire, le mode daccs multiple par rpartition dans le temps (AMRT) deux intervalles de temps, pour la prise en charge simultane de la voix et des donnes sur un canal de 12,5 kHz (quivalent 6,25 kHz). 4.1 Bouton dmission (PTT) Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales. Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. 32 Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT est activ, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. La tonalit continue dun signal dinterdiction se fait entendre si votre appel est interrompu, par exemple si la radio reoit un appel durgence. Dans ce cas, relchez le bouton PTT. 4.2 Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appui bref Appui long Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:

Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 4.3 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables par le dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. CGA Mic. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Franais (Canada) Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Annuler Urgence Permet aux utilisateurs de mettre fin aux appels slectionns. Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/

haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Itinrance de site manuelle Lance une recherche de site manuelle. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. 33 Franais (Canada) Accs direct Lance directement un appel de diffusion, individuel, tlphonique ou de groupe, un avertissement d'appel ou un message texte rapide prdfini. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Verrouillage de site Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Amlioration de la vibration Fonction de carte d'option tat Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. Quitter lappel Confidentialit Met fin un appel tlphonique. Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Diffusion publique (PA) Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Info site Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque lAnnonce vocale est active. Permet de slectionner le menu de la liste d'tats. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. Basculement entre les niveaux de priorit dappel Permet votre radio de passer au niveau de priorit dappel lev/normal. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Annonces vocales pour canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Cette fonction n'est pas accessible si les annonces vocales ne sont pas actives. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. 34 Franais (Canada) Basculement de zone Permet l'utilisateur de la radio de basculer entre la zone 1 et la zone 2. 4.5.1 Voyant lumineux 4.4 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. 4.5 Indicateurs d'tat Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio effectue une transmission. La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. 35 Franais (Canada) La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation par radiocommunication. Tonalits La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. AVIS:

Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. Jaune continu Jaune clignotant La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. Jaune clignotement double La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. 4.5.2 36 Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave 4.5.2.1 Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. La radio est verrouille. Tonalit priodique Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. 4.5.2.2 Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec 4.6 Enregistrement Il y a un certain nombre de messages lis l'enregistrement que vous pouvez recevoir. Franais (Canada) Enregistrement En rgle gnrale, l'enregistrement est envoy au systme lors de la mise sous tension, d'un changement de groupe d'appels ou durant l'itinrance de site. Si une radio ne parvient pas s'enregistrer sur un site, la radio tente automatiquement de se connecter un autre site. La radio supprime temporairement le site o l'enregistrement a t tent de la liste d'itinrance. L'indication signifie que la radio est occupe chercher un site pour l'itinrance ou qu'elle a russi trouver un site, mais est en attente d'une rponse aux messages d'enregistrement de la radio. Lorsque la radio s'enregistre, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. Si les indications persistent, l'utilisateur doit changer d'emplacements ou s'il est autoris, manuellement se connecter un autre site. Hors de porte Une radio est juge hors de porte lorsqu'elle est incapable de dtecter un signal provenant du systme ou du site actuel. Rgle gnrale, cette indication signifie que la radio 37 Franais (Canada) est l'extrieur de plage de couverture radio de la radiofrquence sortante gographique. Lorsqu'une radio est hors de porte, une tonalit rptitive retentit et le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit encore des indications comme tant hors de porte tout en tant dans une zone bnficiant d'une bonne couverture RF. chec d'affiliation au groupe d'appels Une radio tente de s'affilier au groupe d'appels spcifi dans les canaux ou la position du bouton unifie (UKP) au cours de l'enregistrement. Une radio qui est dans un tat d'chec d'affiliation ne peut pas mettre ou recevoir des appels du groupe d'appels auquel la radio tente de s'affilier. Contactez votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme si la radio reoit des indications d'chec d'affiliation. Enregistrement refus Les indicateurs d'enregistrement refus sont reus lorsque l'enregistrement avec le systme n'est pas accept. 38 La radio n'indique pas l'utilisateur radio la raison exacte du refus de l'enregistrement. Normalement, un enregistrement est refus lorsque l'oprateur du systme a dsactiv l'accs de la radio au systme. Lorsque l'enregistrement de la radio est refus, le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. 4.7 Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. La radio peut tre programme avec un maximum de 250 zones Capacity Max avec un maximum de 160 canaux par zone. Chaque zone Capacity Max contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables.Chaque zone Capacity Max contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables. 4.7.1 Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Basculement de zone. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

Tonalit de russite La radio est dans la zone 2. Tonalit d'chec La radio est dans la zone 1. AVIS:

Pour toutes les radios sans clavier, nous vous recommandons d'activer la fonction d'annonce vocale pour la slection de zone. La fonction d'annonce vocale peut tre active uniquement dans le CPS. 4.7.2 Franais (Canada) Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel de diffusion, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous modifier la position du bouton de slection de canaux ( une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le systme Capacity Max. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'appels qui a t programm pour le nouveau type d'appel de la position du bouton de slection de canal. tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non programm est slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. Lorsque la zone requise est dfinie (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. 4.7.3 Slectionner un site Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Capacity Max 39 Franais (Canada) recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. Le systme Capacity Max peut prendre en charge jusqu'

250 sites. 4.7.5 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. 4.7.4 Demande ditinrance Une demande ditinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Si aucun site nest disponible :

Lcran de la poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est toujours disponible. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. AVIS:

Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. 4.7.6 Restriction de site Appuyez sur la touche programme Itinrance de site manuelle. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. Pour les systmes Capacity Max, votre administrateur de systme radio est en mesure de dcider quels sites rseau sont autoriss ou non. Il n'est pas ncessaire de reprogrammer votre radio pour modifier la liste des sites autoriss et non autoriss. Si 40 Franais (Canada) votre radio tente de s'inscrire sur un site non autoris, votre radio reoit l'indication que le site est refus. La radio recherche alors un autre site rseau. journalisation, les passerelles de tlphone et les applications de donnes ne peuvent communiquer avec les radios sur le site. Lorsque vous rencontrez des restrictions de site, le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double pour indiquer une recherche de site. 4.7.7 ADF de site LADF de site est disponible uniquement avec le systme Capacity Max. Un site doit tre en mesure de communiquer avec le contrleur de site ADF pour tre considr comme un systme ADF. Si le site ne parvient pas communiquer avec le tronon contrleur de site ADF, alors la radio entre en mode ADF de site. Lorsquen mode ADF de site, la radio envoie une indication audible et visuelle priodiquement pour informer lutilisateur de sa fonctionnalit limite. Lorsquune radio est en mode ADF de site, une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Les radios en mode ADF de site sont toujours en mesure de passer des appels vocaux, individuels ou de groupe, et envoyer des messages texte dautres radios du mme site. Les consoles vocales, les enregistreurs de Une fois quelle est en mode ADF de site, une radio qui participe des appels sur des sites multiples ne sera en mesure de communiquer quavec dautres radios au sein dun mme site. La communication en provenance et destination dautres sites pourraient tre perdues. AVIS:

Sil y a plusieurs sites qui couvrent lemplacement actuel de la radio et lun des sites passe en mode ADF de site, les radios vont se connecter un autre site dans la couverture. 4.8 Appels Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :

Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. 41 Franais (Canada) Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique . Bouton Volume/Canal Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. 4.8.1 Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. 4.8.1.1 Faire des appels de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. 42 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 39. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur la touche programme Annuler pour mettre fin l'appel de groupe. 4.8.1.2 Rponse un appel de groupe Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Franais (Canada) sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. sonne sur le haut-parleur. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer 43 Franais (Canada) 4.8.2 Appel de diffusion Un appel de diffusion est un appel vocal de n'importe quel utilisateur un groupe d'appels en entier. La fonction Appel de diffusion permet uniquement au lanceur d'appel de transmettre au groupe d'appels, mais les destinataires de l'appel ne peuvent pas rpondre. L'initiateur de la diffusion peut galement mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou pour appeler ce dernier, votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie de ce groupe. 4.8.2.1 Faire des appels de diffusion 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 39. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 44 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. L'initiateur de l'appel peut appuyer sur la touche programme Annuler pour mettre fin l'appel de diffusion. 4.8.2.2 Rception d'appels de diffusion Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir des appels de diffusion sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un Appel de diffusion :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Franais (Canada) Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. appels FOACSU afin de terminer l'appel et permettre l'utilisateur d'accepter ou de refuser l'appel. AVIS:

Les destinataires ne sont pas en mesure de rpondre lors dun appel de diffusion. La tonalit de rponse interdite retentit pendant un court instant si l'utilisateur appuie sur le bouton PTT pendant un appel de diffusion. Le type d'appel est configur par l'administrateur systme. AVIS:

Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur la touche programme Annuler. 4.8.3 Appel priv Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type d'appel est appel appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission

(OACSU). Le mode OACSU dfinit l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio et met fin automatiquement l'appel. Le second type est appel tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU). Le mode FOACSU dfinit galement l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio. Cependant, un accus de rception de l'utilisateur est requis pour les 4.8.3.1 Passer des appels individuels Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction nest pas active, vous entendrez une tonalit dindication ngative lorsque vous lancez lappel. Si la radio cible nest pas disponible, une courte tonalit retentit. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez un canal qui correspond lalias ou lID dabonn. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 39. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 45 Franais (Canada) 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Vous entendrez une courte tonalit. Le lanceur dappel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur la touche programme Annuler. Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4.8.3.2 46 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur la touche programme Annuler. 4.8.3.3 Rception d'un appel individuel Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (OACSU) :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Selon la configuration de votre radio, soit en mode appel individuel OACSU, soit en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU), rpondre des appels individuels peut ncessiter ou non un accus de rception de l'utilisateur. Pour la configuration OACSU, la sourdine est dsactive et l'appel se connecte automatiquement. 4.8.3.4 Accepter des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 1 Pour accepter un appel individuel, effectuez l'opration suivante :

Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 47 Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. AVIS:

Le lanceur d'appel et le destinataire sont en mesure de mettre fin un appel individuel en cours en appuyant sur la touche programme Annuler. 4.8.3.5 Refus des appels individuels Lorsque vous recevez des appels individuels configurs comme un appel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale (FOACSU) :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Pour refuser un appel individuel, effectuez l'opration suivante :

48 Appuyez sur la touche programme Annuler. 4.8.4 Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le site ou toutes les radios sur un groupe de sites, selon la configuration du systme. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du systme ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. Le mode Capacity Max prend en charge l'appel gnral de site et appel gnral multisite. L'administrateur systme peut configurer une ou les deux actions dans votre radio. AVIS:

Les abonns peuvent prendre en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme, mais l'infrastructure Motorola Solutions ne prend pas en charge tous les appels de l'ensemble du systme. 4.8.4.1 Appels gnraux Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 39. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. Franais (Canada) Le lanceur d'appel peut appuyer sur la touche programme Annuler pour mettre fin l'appel gnral. 4.8.4.2 Rception d'un appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral, voici ce qui arrive :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. 49 Franais (Canada) 4.8.5 Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel entre une radio individuelle ou un groupe de radios et un tlphone. Selon la faon dont la radio est configure, les fonctions suivantes peuvent tre disponibles ou non :

Code daccs Doubles tonalits multi-frquence (DTMF) Code de non-accs tlphonique La capacit dappel tlphonique peut tre active par lattribution et la configuration des numros de tlphone sur le systme. Vrifiez auprs de votre administrateur systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.8.5.1 50 Effectuer un appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. Lorsque vous tentez de faire un appel tlphonique ou dy mettre fin alors que les codes daccs et de fin daccs ne sont pas configurs, la tentative choue et une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs une touche pour lalias ou lID prdfini. La tonalit DMTF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Lappel tlphonique choue. Rptez cette tape. Affichage de lalias ou de lID de lappelant sur rception dun appel tlphonique Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Possibilit de refuser ou daccepter un appel En cas de russite :

2 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Appuyez sur ou jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID voulu. Appuyez 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 4 Appuyez sur la touche programme Quitter lappel pour mettre fin lappel. Si la configuration de fin dappel russit :

Une tonalit retentit. Si la configuration de fin dappel choue :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. tlphone mette fin lappel. 4.8.5.2 Acheminement dappels tlphoniques laide de la touche programmable Suivez la procdure pour passer un appel tlphonique laide de la touche programmable. Franais (Canada) sur pour effectuer la slection. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias de labonn ou son ID et ltat de lappel. Si la configuration dappel russit :

La tonalit DTMF se fait entendre. Vous entendrez la tonalit dappel en attente de lutilisateur du tlphone. Lcran affiche licne Appel tl, lalias ou lID de Si la configuration dappel choue :

Une tonalit retentit. Lcran affiche Appel tl. chou. Votre radio retourne lcran de code daccs. Si le code daccs est prconfigur dans la liste de contacts, la radio revient lcran affich avant la tentative dappel. Rptez ltape ou attendez que lutilisateur du labonn, Appel tl et ltat de lappel. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Tlphone pour 3 Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le accder au rpertoire tlphonique. bouton PTT pour couter. 51 Franais (Canada) 4 Appuyez sur pour mettre fin lappel. En cas de russite de la configuration de fin dappel, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Appel tl. termin. En cas dchec de la prparation de lappel, votre radio retourne lcran dappel tlphonique. Quand vous appuyez sur la touche PTT lorsque lcran des contacts tlphoniques est affich, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message App. OK pour placer appel. Lorsque lutilisateur a termin dutiliser le tlphone, une tonalit se fait entendre et lcran affiche le message Fin appel tl. 4.8.5.3 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant qu'appel gnral, la radio rceptrice ne peut pas parler ou rpondre. L'utilisateur destinataire n'est pas non plus autoris mettre fin l'appel gnral. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. AVIS:

Pendant un accs un canal, appuyez sur pour mettre fin la tentative dappel (une tonalit se fait entendre). Pendant lappel, lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche Accs une touche, si le code de non-accs est prconfigur ou si vous entrez le code de non-accs en entre pour les autres chiffres, la radio tentera de mettre fin lappel. 4.8.5.4 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 52 Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :

1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 3 Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. AVIS:

Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Une courte tonalit retentit. 4.8.5.5 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 3 Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. AVIS:

Votre radio nest pas en mesure de mettre fin un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe. Lutilisateur du tlphone doit mettre fin lappel. Lutilisateur destinataire est uniquement autoris rpondre au cours de lappel. Une courte tonalit retentit. 53 Franais (Canada) 4.8.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission Un appel en cours est interrompu lorsque vous effectuez les actions suivantes :

Appuyez sur le bouton Voix PTT. Appuyez sur le bouton durgence. 4.8.7 Priorit d'appel La Priorit d'appel permet une radio d'arrter toute transmission vocale en cours et de lancer une transmission prioritaire. Grce la fonction Priorit d'appel, le systme des interrompt et place en priorit des appels en cours dans les cas o les canaux de ressources partages sont indisponibles. Des appels de priorit plus leve, comme un appel d'urgence ou un appel gnral passent en priorit sur la radio l'origine de la transmission afin de rpondre l'appel de priorit suprieure. En l'absence d'autres canaux 54 de radiofrquence (RF) disponibles, un appel d'urgence passe en priorit sur un appel gnral aussi. 4.8.8 Interruption vocale L'interruption vocale permet l'utilisateur d'arrter une transmission vocale en cours. Cette fonction utilise la composition de canal inverse pour arrter la transmission vocale en cours d'une radio, si la radio interrompue est configure pour l'interruption vocale et que la radio mettrice est configure pour pouvoir interrompre un appel vocal. La radio interrompue est alors autorise mettre une transmission vocale vers le participant dont l'appel est arrt. La fonction Interruption vocale amliore considrablement la probabilit de fournir une nouvelle transmission selon aux parties vises lorsqu'un appel est en cours. L'utilisateur accs l'interruption vocale uniquement si cette fonction a t configure. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.8.8.1 Activation de l'interruption vocale Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction Interruption vocale sur votre radio. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Franais (Canada) Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4.9 Fonctions avances 1 Pour interrompre la transmission pendant un appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Une tonalit d'chec retentit tant que le bouton PTT n'est pas relch. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.9.1 Files dattente dappels Lorsquil ny a pas de ressources disponibles pour traiter un appel, les files dattente dappels permettent de placer la demande dappel dans la file dattente du systme pour les prochaines ressources disponibles. 55 Franais (Canada) Vous entendez une tonalit de file dattente dappels aprs avoir appuy sur le bouton PTT et lcran de la radio affiche Attente appel, ce qui indique que la radio est passe ltat de file dattente dappels. Le bouton PTT peut tre relch ds que la tonalit de File dattente dappels se fait entendre. Si la configuration de lappel est tablie, ce qui suit se produit :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si cette option est active, la tonalit dautorisation se fait entendre. Lutilisateur de la radio a jusqu 4 secondes pour appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour commencer transmission vocale. Si la configuration de lappel choue, ce qui suit se produit :

Si cette option est active, la tonalit de rejet se fait Appel prioritaire La fonction dappel prioritaire permet au systme de traiter en priorit un des appels non prioritaires sortants et dinitier lappel priorit leve demand lorsque tous les canaux sont occups. Quand tous les canaux sont occups traiter des appels priorit leve, le systme ne traite aucun appel en priorit et place lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file dattente des appels. Si le systme ne russit pas placer lappel priorit leve dorigine dans la file dattente des appels, il gnre un avis dchec. Les paramtres par dfaut pour la fonction dappel prioritaire sont prconfigurs. Appuyez sur le bouton programmable pour basculer entre les niveaux de priorit normal et lev. Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions suivantes, le niveau de priorit de lappel revient automatiquement au rglage prconfigur. Lappel est termin et la radio quitte la configuration des Tous les appels vocaux Message texte DMR /Message texte Bon de travail coute distance Les lments suivants sont les types dappel prioritaire :

entendre. appels. 4.9.2 56 Franais (Canada) Priorit leve La radio affiche Appel suivant : Haute priorit. Licne Priorit dappel leve saffiche dans le haut de lcran de votre radio. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :

Priorit leve. de rception, sauf sil sagit dun appel gnral provenant dun groupe permanent tant le groupe slectionn. 4.9.3.1 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe Priorit normale La radio affiche Appel suivant : Prior. normale. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage de groupe sur votre radio. Licne Priorit dappel leve disparat. Lannonce vocale Appel suivant se fait entendre :

Priorit normale. 4.9.3 Balayage de groupe dappels Cette fonction permet votre radio dcouter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes dfinis dans une liste de groupe dappels de rception. Lorsque le balayage est activ, la radio dsactive la sourdine de tous les membres de sa liste de groupes de rception. Lorsque le balayage est dsactiv, votre radio ne reoit aucune transmission des membres de la liste de groupes Appuyez sur la touche programme Balayer. Si le balayage est activ :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si le balayage est dsactiv :

Le voyant DEL steint. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 57 Franais (Canada) 4.9.4 Liste de groupe de rception La Liste de groupe de rception flexible vous permet de crer et daffecter des membres la liste de groupe de rception. Cette liste est cre lors de la programmation de votre radio et dtermine les groupes qui peuvent tre balays. Votre radio peut prendre en charge un maximum de 16 membres dans la liste. Si un groupe est programm en tant que groupe permanent, vous ne pouvez pas modifier le groupe partir de la liste de balayage. AVIS:

Cette dernire est programme par ladministrateur systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. avec une priorit suprieure, mme lorsquelle est sur appel de groupe. La radio quitte lappel de groupe de priorit infrieure pour les appels de groupe de priorit plus leve. AVIS:

Cette fonction est accessible uniquement lorsque le balayage de groupe est activ. La fonction Surveillance prioritaire sapplique uniquement aux membres de la liste de groupe de rception. Il y a deux groupes de priorit : priorit 1 (P1) et priorit 2 (P2). P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. Dans le systme Capacity Max, la radio reoit la transmission selon lordre de priorit ci-dessous :

1 Appel durgence pour le groupe P1 2 Appel durgence pour le groupe P2 3 Appel durgence pour les groupes non prioritaires dans la liste de groupes de rception 4.9.5 Surveillance de la priorit La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio de recevoir automatiquement les transmissions de groupes 4 Tous les appels 5 Appel de groupe P1 6 Appel de groupe P2 7 Groupes non prioritaires dans la liste de groupe de rception 58 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Cette fonction est programme par ladministrateur de systme. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. de la radio dpendra de l'activation ou de la dsactivation de l'option Talkback pendant la programmation de la radio. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 4.9.6 Affiliation de groupes multiples Votre radio peut tre configure pour comprendre un maximum de sept groupes un site. Des 16 groupes dans la liste de groupe de rception, jusqu sept groupes peuvent tre attribus titre de laffiliation de groupe. Le groupe slectionn et la priorit des groupes de conversation sont automatiquement affilis. 4.9.7 TalkBack (rponse) La fonction Talkback vous permet de rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage. Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage d'appel, le fonctionnement La fonction Talkback est dsactive La radio abandonne l'appel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien d'appel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal d'accueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le balayage de groupe aprs que le dlai d'attente du balayage soit coul. La fonction Talback est active Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de l'appel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. AVIS:

Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui n'est pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que l'appel se termine, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. 59 Franais (Canada) 4.9.8 Bluetooth Cette fonctionnalit vous permet dutiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par lintermdiaire dune connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts lemploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. Cest--

dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et laccessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et lappareil Bluetooth ( moins de 10 m lun de lautre) afin de rtablir la rception. La fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Par exemple, un 60 scanneur, un appareil capteur et un appareil PTT seulement (POD). Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel dutilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur lensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes dappareil Bluetooth est efface. 4.9.8.1 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Appuyez sur la touche programme Connexion Bluetooth. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 4.9.8.2 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. Appuyez sur la touche programme Dconnexion Bluetooth. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre lorsque l'appareil est dconnect. Franais (Canada) 4.9.8.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque l'acheminement du signal audio a t chang. 4.9.9 Rglages multisite Ces fonctions s'appliquent lorsque le canal courant de la radio est configur pour un systme Capacity Max. 61 Franais (Canada) 4.9.9.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle Appuyez sur la touche programme Itinrance de site manuelle. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si la radio trouve un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL steint. Si la radio choue trouver un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL steint. 4.9.9.2 62 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. 4.9.10 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet dmettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active lorsque la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain laps de temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :

La tonalit de Rappel de canal daccueil et lannonce Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil sonore retentissent. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :

Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. 4.9.10.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal daccueil en sourdine. 4.9.10.2 Franais (Canada) Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. 4.9.11 coute distance Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Cette fonction s'arrte automatiquement aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. 4.9.11.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. 63 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 4.9.12 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Cette fonction vous permet de configurer des sonneries d'appel ou de message texte. 4.9.12.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors 64 4.9.13 Fonction Avis dappel Lenvoi dun avertissement dappel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez quil vous rappelle lorsquil lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est disponible par une touche daccs direct programme. En mode Capacity Max, la fonction Avertissement dappel permet un utilisateur radio ou un rpartiteur denvoyer une alerte un autre utilisateur radio lui demandant de rappeler lutilisateur radio qui a lanc lalerte lorsquil est disponible. La communication vocale nest pas concerne par cette fonction. Le dtaillant ou votre administrateur systme peut configurer la fonction Avertissement dappel pour permettre lutilisateur dappuyer sur le bouton PTT pour rpondre directement au lanceur dappel par la fonction Appel individuel. Franais (Canada) Un appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission (OACSU) permet lutilisateur de rpondre immdiatement, tandis que lutilisateur doit accuser rception dun appel individuel en mode tablissement dune connexion sans mission intgrale

(FOACSU). Par consquent, il est recommand dutiliser la fonction Avis dappel pour les appels de type OACSU. Voir Appel priv la page 45. 4.9.13.2 Rponse un avertissement dappel Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. 4.9.13.1 Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la confirmation de l'avertissement d'appel arrive, une tonalit d'indication positive retentit. Si la radio ne reoit pas de confirmation de rception de l'avertissement d'appel, une tonalit grave se fait entendre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT dans les 4 secondes suivant la rception d'un avertissement d'appel pour rpondre un appel individuel. 4.9.14 Mode muet Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. 65 Franais (Canada) IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. 4.9.14.1 Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

parleur est rtabli. ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est arrte. AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. 4.9.14.2 66 4.9.15 Fonctionnement durgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. En mode Capacity Max, la radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme d'urgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme d'urgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Lorsqu'une alarme d'urgence est reue, le destinataire peut choisir de supprimer l'alarme et quitter la liste des alarmes, ou il peut rpondre une alarme d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton PTT et la transmission voix sans urgence. Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf l'appui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons :

Appui bref Appui long De 0,05 0,75 seconde. De 1,00 3,75 secondes. Franais (Canada) La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. AVIS:

Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :

Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :

La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. Rgulier Silencieux La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans 67 Franais (Canada) qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. AVIS:

Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. 4.9.15.1 Envoi d'alarmes durgence Cette fonction vous permet denvoyer une alarme durgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication dalerte sur un groupe de radios. Suivez la procdure denvoi dalarmes durgence sur votre radio. Votre radio naffiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode durgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. 68 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit de recherche durgence peut tre programme par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. En cas dchec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :

Une tonalit grave retentit. (Sapplique au modle PMUE4426B seulement) La radio quitte alors le mode dalarme durgence. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence AVIS:

Lorsque la radio est configure pour une alarme durgence seulement, le processus durgence consiste uniquement lenvoi de lalarme durgence. Lurgence se termine lorsquun accus de rception est reu du systme ou lorsque les tentatives daccs au canal sont puises. Aucun appel vocal nest associ lenvoi dune alarme durgence lorsque la radio fonctionne en mode Alarme durgence seulement. 4.9.15.2 Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet denvoyer une alarme durgence avec un appel un groupe de radios ou un rpartiteur. Lorsquune infrastructure du groupe accuse rception de lalarme durgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal durgence programm. La radio doit tre configure avec pour lalarme et lappel durgence pour effectuer un appel durgence aprs le processus dalarme. Franais (Canada) active. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme, la tonalit de recherche durgence se fait entendre. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et sarrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode durgence. Si un accus de rception de lalarme durgence est reu :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si un accus de rception de lalarme durgence nest pas reu :

Toutes les tentatives sont puises. Une tonalit grave retentit. La radio quitte alors le mode dalarme durgence. 69 Franais (Canada) 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour lancer une 6 Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsact. pour quitter le mode durgence. transmission vocale. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 5 Pour prendre lappel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. AVIS:

Selon la configuration de votre radio, vous entendrez peut-tre une tonalit dautorisation de parler. Votre dtaillant ou administrateur de site peut vous fournir plus dinformation sur la faon dont votre radio a t programme pour les urgences. Linitiateur de lappel durgence peut appuyer sur la touche programme Annuler pour mettre fin un appel durgence. La radio revient un tat en attente dappel. 4.9.15.3 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de 70 microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . AVIS:

Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. Franais (Canada) Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:

Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Lorsque la tonalit durgence se fait entendre, parlez clairement dans le microphone. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :

Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre microphone branch et rception dappels arrive son terme. 71 Franais (Canada) Aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour appeler le groupe de radios pour lequel une alarme durgence a t mise. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. La radio reste en mode d'urgence. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche programmable. Quittez le mode durgence. 4.9.15.4 Rception dune alarme durgence La radio rceptrice peut prendre uniquement en charge une seule alarme durgence la fois. Si amorce, une deuxime alarme durgence a priorit sur la premire alarme. Suivez la procdure suivante pour recevoir et voir des alertes durgence sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez une alarme durgence :

Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. AVIS:

Votre radio confirme automatiquement lalarme durgence (si cette fonction est active). Vous pouvez couper la sonnerie. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

72 4.9.15.5 Rpondre des alarmes d'urgence par un appel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel d'urgence :

La tonalit d'appel d'urgence retentit si l'indication d'appel d'urgence et la tonalit de dchiffrement d'appel d'urgence sont actives. La tonalit d'appel d'urgence ne retentira pas si seulement que l'indication d'appel d'urgence est active. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre Franais (Canada) et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 4.9.16 Message d'tat Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio l'origine de la transmission d'urgence rpond :

Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. 4.9.15.6 Quitter le mode durgence Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. dsactiv. Votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

La tonalit a cess. Le voyant DEL rouge sest teint. Cette fonction permet l'utilisateur d'envoyer des messages d'tat d'autres radios. La liste d'tats rapides est configure dans le CPS-RM et comprend un maximum de 99 tats. Un message texte peut comporter au maximum 16 caractres. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, elle permet la radio d'indiquer par un signal sonore la rception des messages d'tat. AVIS:

La synthse texte-parole est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.9.16.1 Envoi de messages dtat Suivez la procdure ci-dessous pour envoyer un message d'tat. 73 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Franais (Canada) En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. Le voyant DEL steint. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Le voyant DEL steint. 4.9.17 Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. 74 AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 4.9.17.1 Message texte rapide Votre radio prend en charge les messages texte rapides selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. 4.9.17.1.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL vert sallume. Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 4.9.18 Confidentialit Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; l'activation de la fonction n'est cependant pas ncessaire la rception d'une telle transmission. Pendant qu'un canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue d'tre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Votre radio prend uniquement en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel ou une transmission de donnes crypts, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser la mme valeur et le mme ID de cl de cryptage amlior que la radio mettrice. Franais (Canada) Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (pour le cryptage amlior). Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. AVIS:

Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 75 Franais (Canada) 4.9.18.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage position GNSS et peut tre surveille distance lorsquelle a t interrompue. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. AVIS:

Le dtaillant ou ladministrateur de systme peut dsactiver en permanence une radio. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Dsactivation permanente de la radio la page 76. 4.9.19 Interrompre/Raviver Cette fonction vous permet dactiver ou dsactiver nimporte quelle radio du rseau. Par exemple, le dtaillant ou ladministrateur du systme pourrait vouloir dsactiver une radio vole pour empcher le voleur de sen servir, puis la ractiver une fois quelle est de nouveau en votre possession. Une fois que la radio est dsactive, la radio met une tonalit dchec. Lorsquune radio est dsactive temporairement, elle ne peut plus demander ni recevoir de services initis par lutilisateur sur le systme qui a effectu la procdure dinterruption. Cependant, la radio peut basculer vers un autre systme. La radio continue denvoyer des rapports de 4.9.20 Dsactivation permanente de la radio Cette fonction est une mesure de scurit amliore qui restreint laccs non autoris une radio. La dsactivation permanente de la radio rend la radio inutilisable. Par exemple, le dtaillant peut vouloir dsactiver une radio perdue ou vole pour en empcher toute utilisation non autorise. AVIS:

La radio dsactive peut uniquement tre ractive dans un centre de rparation de Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 76 Franais (Canada) 4.9.21 Travailleur solitaire Cette fonction dclenche le mode durgence sil ny a aucun signe dactivit par lutilisateur, tel quappuyer sur une quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. Si aucune activit nest dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit lutilisateur de lexpiration du dlai dinactivit au moyen dun signal sonore. Si vous ne rpondez pas avant que la minuterie de rappel expire, la radio active une condition durgence selon la programmation effectue par le dtaillant. 4.9.22 Verrouillage par mot de passe Vous pouvez dfinir un mot de passe pour restreindre laccs votre radio. Chaque fois que vous allumez votre radio, vous tes invit entrer le mot de passe. Votre radio prend en charge lentre de mots de passe de quatre chiffres. 4.9.22.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe Allumez la radio. 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. a Pour entrer le premier chiffre du mot de passe, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal. b Pour passer au chiffre suivant, appuyez et maintenez le bouton slecteur de canal. c Entrez tous les chiffres restants du mot de passe de cette faon. AVIS:

Lutilisation de linterrupteur au pied durgence permet daccder la radio sans entrer de mot de passe. 2 Votre radio vrifie automatiquement la validit du mot de passe lorsque vous entrez le dernier chiffre du mot de passe. Lorsquelle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Si vous entrez le mot de passe correctement, la radio se met sous tension. 77 Franais (Canada) Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs les premire et seconde tentatives, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit continue se fait entendre. Rptez la procdure tape 1. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs la troisime tentative, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 77 pour accder la radio. Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 77 pour accder la radio. Attendez 15 minutes, le temps que le dlai de la minuterie dtat de verrouillage sachve, puis recommencez la procdure tape 1. 4.9.23 Programmation par onde radio AVIS:

Si vous teignez et rallumez votre radio, la minuterie de 15 minutes redmarre. 4.9.22.2 Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. 78 Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :

Le canal devient occup. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT. La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. AVIS:

Lorsque la programmation est termine, une tonalit retentit et votre radio redmarre (mise hors tension, puis sous tension de nouveau). Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. Franais (Canada) 4.9.24 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 79 Franais (Canada) 4.9.24.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi pour connatre ltat de la connexion en utilisant lannonce vocale. Lannonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il ny a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. 4.9.24.2 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi est attribue par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises selon les exigences de lutilisateur partir du CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 80 4.9.25 Attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe (DGNA) L'attribution dynamique de numros dans un groupe

(DGNA) est une fonction qui permet la console d'assigner et de retirer par onde radio un nouveau groupe de votre radio. Lorsque la console assigne la fonction DGNA la radio, celle-ci est alors en mode DGNA. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Lorsque la console retire la fonction DGNA de la radio, elle est rassigne au groupe prcdent :

Une tonalit se fait entendre. Selon la faon dont la radio est programme, vous pouvez voir, modifier et couter les canaux des listes de balayage dorigine ainsi que les groupes non DGNA. Lorsque la radio est en mode DGNA, appuyer sur le bouton PTT permet de communiquer seulement avec le groupe DGNA actuel. Pour communiquer avec le groupe non DGNA prcdent, programmez la touche daccs direct. Voir Effectuer un appel non DGNA la page 81. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.9.25.1 Effectuer un appel DGNA Lorsque votre radio est en mode DGNA, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour effectuer l'appel. Une tonalit DGNA se fait entendre. AVIS:

Si votre radio n'est pas en mode DGNA et que vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, elle met une tonalit indiquant une erreur. Franais (Canada) 4.9.25.2 Effectuer un appel non DGNA 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Lannonce vocale met le son dappel remplac par accs direct. AVIS:

Si votre radio n'est pas en mode DGNA et que vous appuyez sur la touche daccs direct, elle met une tonalit dchec indiquant une erreur. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT avant quune tonalit d'chec se fasse entendre. AVIS:

Appuyer sur le bouton PTT aprs la tonalit lance un appel au groupe DGNA. 4.9.25.3 Recevoir et rpondre un appel DGNA Lorsque vous recevez un appel DGNA :

81 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit DGNA se fait entendre. Faible Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 4.10.1.1 Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. 4.10 Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 4.10.1 Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Haute 82 Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. La puissance de transmission de la radio est rgle Basse. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La puissance de transmission de la radio est rgle leve. 4.10.2 Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte d'urgence entrante Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm Toutes Tnlts/

Avert. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. 4.10.3 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./phares. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est active. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est dsactive. 83 Franais (Canada) 4.10.4 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le systme de diffusion publique externe est Le systme de diffusion publique est activ. activ. En cas dchec :

En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le systme de diffusion publique est teint. Le systme de diffusion publique externe est teint. 4.10.5 84 Franais (Canada) 4.10.6 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. Appuyez sur la touche programme Assistance parle. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. 4.10.8 Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, lAnnonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Lindicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. 4.10.7 85 Franais (Canada) 4.10.8.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. Appuyez sur la touche programme Synthse vocale pour couter les messages texte que vous recevez. 4.10.9 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. 86 AVIS:

Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. 4.10.10 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rduction bruit. Vous entendez une tonalit de russite qui indique que la suppression des ractions acoustiques est alors active. Vous entendez une tonalit d'chec qui indique que la radio ne peut pas activer la suppression des ractions acoustiques. Franais (Canada) Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 4.10.11 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. 4.10.12 87 Franais (Canada) Connect Plus Le mode Connect Plus est une solution ADF base sur la technologie DMR. Le mode Connect Plus utilise un canal de contrle rserv pour les requtes de canal et les attributions. 5.1 Autres commandes de la radio en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit les commandes radio supplmentaires disponibles pour l'utilisateur de la radio laide de moyens prprogramms tels que les touches programmables et les fonctions attribuables de la radio. 5.1.1 Bouton d'mission (PTT) Le bouton PTT situ sur le ct de la radio a deux fonctions principales :

Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. 88 Pour parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel (voir Faire un appel radio la page 98). Si la tonalit d'autorisation est active, attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. 5.1.2 Touches programmables Votre dtaillant peut programmer les touches pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur ces boutons :

Appui bref Appui long Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:

La dure programme pour la pression d'un bouton peut s'appliquer tous les rglages et toutes les fonctions attribuables de la radio. Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 111 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 5.1.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Franais (Canada) Annulation de file d'attente occupe La radio quitte le mode Occup quand un appel non urgent de la file d'attente Occup est effectu. Les appels d'urgence, une fois qu'ils sont accepts dans la file d'attente Occup, ne peuvent pas tre annuls. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. Urgence active/dsactive Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Avertisseur/phares Active ou dsactive la fonction d'avertisseurs et de phares. Audio intelligent Active ou dsactive la fonction Audio intelligent. Mic. CGA act./dsact. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Accs direct Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Permet de lancer un appel de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. 89 Franais (Canada) Quitter l'appel Met fin un appel tlphonique. Cryptage Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Type de sonnerie d'avertissement Fournit un accs direct au rglage du type de sonnerie d'avertissement. Demande d'itinrance Demande de recherche d'un autre site. Balayage Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsqu'elle est dsactive, la radio recherche d'autres sites en plus du site courant. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. 90 Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Basculement de zone Permet l'utilisateur de la radio de basculer entre la zone 1 et la zone 2. 5.1.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables FRduction bruit Active ou dsactive la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Toutes les tonalits/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Luminosit du rtroclairage Rgle le niveau de luminosit. Canal prcdent/suivant Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Systme satellite de navigation mondial (GNSS) Permet d'activer ou dsactiver le systme de navigation par satellite. Niveau de puissance Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. Non attribu Indique que la fonction du bouton n'a pas encore t attribue. Rouge clignotemen t rapide Franais (Canada) La radio reoit un transfert de fichier par radiocommunication (fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option, fichier de frquence rseau ou fichier de codeplug de carte d'option) ou la radio met niveau un nouveau fichier de micrologiciel de carte d'option. 5.1.3 Description des indicateurs d'tat en mode Connect Plus Clignoteme nt vert et jaune La radio reoit une alerte d'appel, a reu un message texte ou le balayage est activ et elle reoit de l'activit. Le voyant DEL indique l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. 5.1.3.1 Voyant lumineux Rouge clignotant La radio met alors que le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, reoit une transmission d'urgence ou n'a pas russi l'auto-vrification la mise sous tension, ou a quitt la zone de couverture si la radio est configure avec le systme ARTS (Auto-Range Transponder System). Mode Muet est activ. Jaune continu Clignoteme nt jaune double Jaune clignotant La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. La radio reoit une alerte d'appel ou le balayage est activ alors qu'elle est inactive (ne dsactive pas la sourdine pour toute activit). Vert continu La radio est s'allume ou transmet. Clignoteme nt vert La radio est en train de s'allumer, de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. 91 Franais (Canada) Clignoteme nt vert rapide La radio reoit un appel crypt. Tonalit d'chec 5.1.3.3 Tonalits dalerte La fonction Tonalits d'alerte vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. AVIS:

Lorsque vous appuyez sur la touche de transmission PTT, si la radio est programme pour fonctionner en mode politesse, celle-ci dtermine automatiquement s'il s'agit d'une transmission autorise en produisant une tonalit d'autorisation ou de refus. 5.1.3.2 Tonalits d'avertissement Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. Tonalit continue Tonalit priodique Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit rptitive Tonalit de russite 92 La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Le signal sonore retentit une fois pendant une courte priode, selon les rglages de la radio. 5.2.1 Slectionner un site 5.1.4 Slection des modes Connect Plus et non Connect Plus Pour passer un mode non Connect Plus, vous devez changer de zone, si la programmation par le dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme le prvoit. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir si votre radio a t programme avec des zones non Connect Plus, et quelles fonctions sont disponibles lors de lutilisation dans des zones non Connect Plus. 5.2 Recevoir et faire des appels en mode Connect Plus Cette section explique le fonctionnement gnral de la radio et les fonctions d'appel qui sont disponibles sur votre radio. Franais (Canada) Un site fournit la couverture pour une zone particulire. Un site Connect Plus est dot dun contrleur de site et dun maximum de 15 rpteurs. Dans les rseaux multisites, la radio Connect Plus recherche automatiquement un nouveau site lorsque la puissance du signal du site courant chute sous un niveau inacceptable. 5.2.1.1 Demande ditinrance Une demande d'itinrance dit la radio de rechercher un autre site, mme si le signal du site courant est acceptable. Si aucun site n'est disponible :

La radio poursuit la recherche dans la liste des sites. La radio reviendra au site prcdent si celui-ci est toujours disponible. 93 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Ceci est programm par votre dtaillant. 5.2.2 Slection d'une zone Appuyez sur la touche programme Demande d'itinrance. Une tonalit retentit pour indiquer que la radio est passe un nouveau site. La radio peut tre programme pour un maximum de 16 zones Connect Plus, et chaque zone contient un maximum de 16 positions assignables sur le bouton de slection de canaux. Chaque position assignable du bouton peut tre utilise pour dmarrer l'un des types d'appels vocaux suivants :

5.2.1.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appel de groupe Appel multigroupe Appel gnral de site Appel individuel Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. Appuyez sur la touche programme Basculement de zone. 5.2.3 Utilisation de rseaux multiples Si votre radio a t programme pour utiliser plusieurs rseaux Connect Plus, vous pouvez slectionner un autre rseau en passant la zone Connect Plus attribue au rseau dsir. Ces attributions rseau--zone sont 94 configures par votre dtaillant par le biais de la programmation de la radio. slectionn, utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal programm. Franais (Canada) 5.2.4 Slection dun type dappel Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner un type d'appel. Il peut s'agir d'un appel de groupe, d'un appel multigroupe, d'un appel gnral ou d'un appel individuel, selon la programmation de votre radio. Si vous changez la position du bouton de slection de canaux (pour une position laquelle un type d'appel est affect), la radio s'enregistrera nouveau sur le site Connect Plus. La radio s'enregistre en utilisant l'ID de groupe d'enregistrement qui a t programm pour la nouvelle position du bouton de slection de canal le nouveau type d'appel. Si vous slectionnez une position laquelle aucun type d'appel n'est attribu, votre radio met une tonalit continue. tant donn que votre radio ne peut pas fonctionner lorsqu'un canal non programm est Lorsque la zone requise est dfinie (si vous avez plusieurs zones sur votre radio), tournez le bouton slecteur de canal pour slectionner le type d'appel. 5.2.5 Rception et rponse un appel Une fois le canal, l'ID d'abonn ou le type d'appel dfini, vous pouvez recevoir des appels et y rpondre. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et clignote en vert lorsque la radio est en cours de rception. 95 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu lorsque la radio est en cours de transmission et met un clignotement rapide en vert durant la rception dun appel crypt . Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre dote de la mme cl de cryptage OU des mmes valeurs et ID de cl (programms par le dtaillant) que la radio mettrice (la radio de laquelle vous recevez lappel). Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 117. 5.2.5.1 Recevoir un appel de groupe et y rpondre Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-

parleur. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. AVIS:

Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel de groupe, consultez la section Pour passer un appel de groupe la page 99. 96 Franais (Canada) 5.2.5.2 Recevoir un appel individuel et y rpondre Pour en savoir davantage sur la fonction d'appel individuel, consultez la section Passer un appel individuel la page 100. Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. 5.2.5.3 Rception d'un appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un Appel individuel, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur de la radio. 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 2 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Un appel gnral est un appel provenant d'une radio individuelle et transmis toutes les radios du site. On l'utilise surtout pour faire une annonce importante exigeant toute l'attention de l'utilisateur. Lors de la rception d'un appel gnral de site, une tonalit retentit et le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral de site. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les fonctions des touches programmes tant que l'appel est en cours. 97 Franais (Canada) 5.2.5.4 Rception d'un appel tlphonique individuel entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel individuel entrant, Le voyant DEL clignote en vert. La radio dsactive la sourdine et la tonalit d'appel individuel entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Rception d'un appel de Talkgroup entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel de Talkgroup, clignote en vert. La radio dsactive la sourdine et la tonalit d'appel de groupe entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. Appuyez sur la touche PTT pour parler et relchez la touche pour couter. 1 Pour rpondre et parler, maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton prprogramm Quitter l'appel pour mettre fin l'appel. Une courte tonalit retentit. 5.2.5.6 Appel tlphonique multigroupe entrant Lorsque vous recevez un appel multigroupe, Le voyant DEL clignote en vert. La radio dsactive la sourdine et la tonalit d'appel multigroupe entrant se fait entendre sur le haut-parleur. 5.2.6 Faire un appel radio Aprs avoir slectionn un canal, vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn ou de groupe l'aide des lments suivants :

5.2.5.5 98 Le bouton de slection de canaux. Une touche programme daccs direct La fonction daccs direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel vers un ID prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. Vous ne pouvez attribuer quun seul ID une touche daccs direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs touches d'accs direct sur la radio. AVIS:

La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que ce canal soit en mesure d'envoyer des transmissions cryptes. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Cryptage la page 117. 5.2.6.1 Faire un appel Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de passer diffrents types d'appels : Appel de groupe, appel individuel, appel gnral de site, appel multigroupe. Franais (Canada) 5.2.6.1.1 Pour passer un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 95. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le tmoin DEL sallume en vert continu. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, . 99 Franais (Canada) S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. 5.2.6.1.2 Passer un appel individuel Bien que vous puissiez recevoir un appel individuel effectu par une radio individuelle autorise et y rpondre, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de passer un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'a pas t active, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre lorsque vous tentez de faire un appel individuel en passant par la touche d'accs direct, ou le bouton de slection de canaux,. 1 Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert, . S'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, l'appel prend fin. Une courte tonalit retentit. Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 95. 5.2.6.1.3 Faire un appel gnral de site Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre un appel tous les utilisateurs du site qui ne sont pas actuellement en communication pour un autre appel. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. 100 Franais (Canada) Les utilisateurs du canal ou du site ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral de site. AVIS:

Les utilisateurs des groupes ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel multigroupe. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias de groupe Appel gnral de site en surbrillance. Voir Slection dun type dappel la page 95. 1 Tournez le bouton de slection de canaux pour slectionner l'alias ou l'ID multigroupe. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 2 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de 5 cm de votre bouche. conversation PTT. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5.2.6.1.4 Appel multigroupe Cette fonction vous permet de transmettre tous les utilisateurs de groupes multiples. Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5.2.6.2 Appel individuel fait l'aide du bouton de composition une touche La fonction d'appel direct vous permet de passer aisment un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. Vous pouvez attribuer cette fonction une touche programmable avec une brve ou une longue pression. 101 Franais (Canada) Vous ne pouvez attribuer quUN SEUL alias ou ID un bouton d'appel direct. Vous pouvez programmer plusieurs boutons d'appel directs pour votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur le bouton d'appel direct programm pour passer un appel individuel un alias ou ID d'appel individuel prdfini. 2 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 3 Pour passer l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 4 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Lorsque la radio cible rpond, le voyant DEL clignote en vert. Sil ny a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme, lappel prend fin. 102 5.3 Fonctions avances en mode Connect Plus Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. 5.3.1 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active par le CPS, la tonalit de rappel du canal daccueil et lavertissement sonore retentissent de manire rpte lorsque la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :

Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. 5.3.2 Plan de secours automatique Le plan de secours automatique est une fonction du systme qui permet de continuer effectuer et recevoir des appels non urgents dans le groupe de contacts slectionn sil se produit certains types de dfaillance dans le systme Connect Plus. Si une telle dfaillance se produit, votre radio tente daccder un autre site Connect Plus. Ce processus de recherche peut amener votre radio trouver un site Connect Plus fonctionnel ou un canal de reprise dappel (si le plan de secours automatique est activ dans votre radio). Un canal de reprise dappel est un rpteur qui fait habituellement partie dun site Connect Plus fonctionnel, mais qui ne peut pas communiquer avec le contrleur de site ou le rseau Connect Plus ce moment. En mode de reprise dappel automatique, le rpteur fonctionne en tant que rpteur numrique autonome . Le mode de secours automatique ne prend en charge que les appels de groupe non urgents. Aucun autre type dappel nest pris en charge en mode de secours. 5.3.2.1 Franais (Canada) Indications de mode de reprise dappel automatique Lorsque votre radio utilise un canal de reprise dappel, vous pouvez entendre une tonalit de reprise intermittente peu prs toutes les quinze secondes (sauf durant la transmission). Votre radio permet dutiliser le PTT uniquement avec le groupe de contacts slectionn (appel de groupe, appel multigroupe ou appel gnral de site). Elle ne vous permet pas de passer dautres types dappels. 103 Franais (Canada) 5.3.2.2 104 Recevoir et passer des appels en mode de reprise AVIS:

Les appels ne sont entendus que par les radios qui coutent le mme canal de reprise et qui ont slectionn le mme groupe. Les appels ne sont pas mis en rseau avec d'autres sites ou d'autres relais. Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont disponibles en mode de reprise. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton d'urgence en mode de reprise, la radio met une tonalit de touche non valide. Les appels privs (de radio radio) et les appels tlphoniques ne sont pas disponibles en mode reprise. Si vous tentez d'appeler un contact individuel, vous recevrez une tonalit de refus. ce moment, vous devez slectionner un contact du groupe dsir. Voici d'autres types d'appels non pris en charge : coute ambiance, avertissement d'appel, vrification de la radio, activation de la radio, dsactivation de la radio, messagerie texte, actualisation demplacement et appels de donnes en paquets. L'accs amlior au canal de trafic (ETCA) n'est pas pris en charge en mode de reprise automatique. Si deux utilisateurs de radio ou plus appuient sur le bouton PTT en mme temps (ou presque en mme temps), il est possible que les deux radios mettent jusqu' ce que le bouton PTT soit relch. Dans ce cas, il est possible qu'aucune transmission ne soit comprise par les radios rceptrices. Pour passer des appels en mode de reprise, procdez comme pour le fonctionnement normal. Slectionnez simplement le contact de groupe que vous dsirez utiliser

(en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio), puis appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour faire votre appel. Il est possible que le canal soit dj utilis par un autre groupe. Si le canal est dj utilis, une tonalit occup retentit. Vous pouvez slectionner des contacts de groupe, multigroupe ou d'appel gnral de site en utilisant la mthode de slection habituelle de canal de la radio. Lorsque la radio est utilise sur le canal de reprise, les groupes multiples fonctionnent comme les autres groupes. Elle ne peut tre entendue que par les radios qui ont slectionn le mme multigroupe. 5.3.2.3 Franais (Canada) Retour au fonctionnement normal Si le site revient au fonctionnement ADF normal pendant que vous vous trouvez porte du rpteur de secours, votre radio quitte automatiquement le mode de secours automatique. Un bip retentit lorsque votre radio est enregistre. Si vous tes porte d'un site fonctionnel (qui n'est pas en mode de secours), vous pouvez appuyer sur le bouton de demande d'itinrance (si cette fonction est programme dans votre radio) pour forcer votre radio rechercher un site disponible et s'y enregistrer. Si aucun autre site n'est disponible, votre radio retourne au mode de secours automatique une fois la recherche termine. Si vous sortez de la zone de couverture de votre rpteur de secours, votre radio se met en mode de recherche 5.3.3 Balayage Cette fonction permet votre radio d'couter et de joindre des appels pour des groupes/canaux dfinis dans une liste de balayage prprogramme. Lorsque le balayage est activ, le voyant DEL clignote en jaune en mode veille. 105 Franais (Canada) 5.3.3.1 Dmarrer et arrter le balayage continu pour dtecter des membres de la liste de balayage lorsqu'elle se trouve sur le canal de contrle. AVIS:

Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes zones Connect Plus avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Vous pouvez lancer et arrter un balayage en appuyant sur la touche programme Balayage . Une tonalit indique que le balayage a t activ ou dsactiv. Lorsque le balayage est activ, la tonalit augmente. Lorsque le balayage est dsactiv, la tonalit diminue. 5.3.3.2 Rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio balaie en 1 Tenez le microphone une distance de 2,5 cm 5 cm de votre bouche. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de conversation (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si vous ne rpondez pas avant que la priode d'attente soit coule, la radio reprend le balayage des autres groupes. 106 Franais (Canada) 5.3.4 Activer ou dsactiver le balayage AVIS:

Cette procdure active ou dsactive le balayage pour toutes les zones avec la mme ID rseau que la zone actuellement slectionne. Lorsque le balayage est activ et que vous n'avez pas d'appel en cours, le voyant DEL clignote en vert et jaune. La procdure pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage dpend de la faon dont votre radio est programme. Si elle a t programme avec un bouton de balayage activ/

dsactiv, utilisez-le pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. Une tonalit indique que le balayage a t activ ou dsactiv. Comprendre la fonction de balayage AVIS:

Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui n'est pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que vous manquez le dlai de rponse, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir discuter avec ce groupe. Il y a des circonstances dans lesquelles vous pouvez manquer des appels de groupe qui se trouvent dans votre liste de balayage. Si vous manquez un appel pour l'une des raisons suivantes, cela n'indique pas que votre radio prsente un problme. Il s'agit du fonctionnement normal du balayage en mode Connect Plus. La fonction de balayage n'est pas active (vrifiez si le Lorsque le balayage est activ, la tonalit augmente. voyant DEL clignote en jaune). Lorsque le balayage est dsactiv, la tonalit diminue. Vous avez dj un appel en cours. 5.3.5 Aucun membre du groupe balay n'est enregistr auprs de votre site (systmes multisite seulement). 107 Franais (Canada) 5.3.6 Rponse de balayage Si votre radio balaye un appel partir de la liste de balayage de groupe slectionner, et si le bouton PTT est actionn au cours du balayage dappel, le fonctionnement de la radio dpendra de lactivation ou de la dsactivation de loption de rponse de balayage pendant la programmation de la radio. Rponse de balayage dsactive La radio abandonne lappel balay et tente de transmettre au contact pour la position de canal slectionne. Aprs expiration du temps de maintien dappel sur le contact actuellement slectionn, la radio revient au canal daccueil et dmarre la minuterie de mise en attente du balayage. La radio reprend le balayage de groupe une fois que le dlai dattente du balayage est coul. Rponse de balayage active Si le bouton PTT est actionn durant le temps de maintien de lappel de groupe balay, la radio essaie de transmettre au groupe balay. AVIS:

Si vous balayez un appel pour un groupe qui nest pas associ une position de canal dans la zone actuellement slectionne et que vous manquez le temps de maintien dappel, vous devez passer la zone approprie et slectionner la position de canal du groupe pour pouvoir rpondre ce groupe. 5.3.7 Modifier l'ordre de priorit d'un groupe d'appels La fonction Surveillance prioritaire permet la radio d'automatiquement recevoir les transmissions du groupe d'appels avec une priorit suprieure lorsqu'elle est sur un autre appel. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque la radio passe l'appel la priorit plus leve. Le CPS de la carte d'option MOTOTRBO Connect Plus peut configurer deux niveaux de priorit pour les groupes d'appels : P1 et P2. P1 est une priorit suprieure P2. 108 AVIS:

Si l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence par dfaut est configur dans le CPS de la carte d'option MOTOTRBO Connect Plus, il existe trois niveaux de priorit pour des groupes d'appels : P0, P1 et P2. P0 est l'ID de groupe d'annulation d'urgence permanente et la priorit la plus leve. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5.3.8 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Franais (Canada) graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 5.3.9 Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle lorsqu'il lui sera possible de le faire. Cette fonction est accessible en allant sur ou par la touche programme d'accs direct. Cette fonction permet aux utilisateurs radio de configurer un appel ou un message texte sonneries. 5.3.9.1 Rponse un avertissement dappel 5.3.8.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Vous pouvez programmer la radio pour qu'elle mette une alarme continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors Appuyez sur le bouton PTT dans les 4 secondes suivant la rception d'un avertissement d'appel pour rpondre un appel individuel. 109 Franais (Canada) 5.3.9.2 Envoyer un avertissement d'appel au moyen de la touche d'accs direct Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs direct pour envoyer un avertissement d'appel l'ID prdfini. Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant l'envoi de l'avertissement d'appel. Si la confirmation d'avertissement d'appel est reue, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si la confirmation de l'avis d'appel n'est pas reue, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 5.3.10 Mode muet Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. 110 Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. 5.3.10.1 Activation du mode muet Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. Franais (Canada) 5.3.10.2 Quitter le mode muet 5.3.11 Fonctionnement durgence Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle entre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

parleur est rtabli. arrte. Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme pour l'activation du mode durgence Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux dans la plupart des cas aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence ou de l'alerte d'urgence. L'exception cette rgle est le cas o Alerte d'urgence est le mode d'urgence configur et Silencieux est le type d'urgence configur. Si votre radio est programme de cette manire, le mode silencieux est maintenu jusqu' ce que vous l'annuliez en appuyant sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urgence dsactive . Ni les appels vocaux d'urgence ni les alertes d'urgence ne sont pris en charge en mode de secours automatique Connect Plus. Pour de plus amples renseignements, voir Plan de secours automatique la page 103. AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. Une alerte d'urgence sert signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps, dans n'importe quel tat, mme si de lactivit se droule sur le canal actuel. Le mode d'urgence programm se dclenche lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton Urgence. Le mode 111 Franais (Canada) d'urgence programm peut aussi tre dclench en activant la fonction de situation de dtresse en option. La fonction d'urgence peut tre dsactive sur votre radio. Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref Appui long De 0,05 0,75 seconde. De 1,00 3,75 secondes. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. Si l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si l'appui prolong sur la touche Urgence permet d'activer le mode d'urgence, alors l'appui bref sur la touche Urgence permet de quitter le mode d'urgence. Lorsqu'une zone Connect Plus est slectionne, votre radio prend en charge trois modes durgence :

112 Appel d'urgence Vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT pour parler dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu. Appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Lors de la premire transmission dans le crneau temporel d'urgence attribu, la sourdine du microphone est dsactive et vous pouvez parler sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. De cette faon, le microphone est branch pendant la dure programme dans la radio. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Alerte d'urgence Une alerte d'urgence n'est pas un appel vocal. Il s'agit d'une notification d'urgence qui est envoye aux radios configures pour recevoir de type d'alerte. La radio envoie une alerte d'urgence par le canal de contrle du site actuellement enregistr. L'alerte d'urgence est reue par les radios du rseau Connect Plus qui sont programmes pour les recevoir (quel que soit le site rseau auprs duquel elles sont enregistres). Seul un des modes d'urgence peut tre affect au bouton Urgence pour chaque zone. De plus, chaque mode durgence comprend les types suivants :

Franais (Canada) Rgulier Silencieux La radio met une alarme et active des indicateurs sonores et/ou visuels. La radio lance une urgence sans indication sonore ou visuelle. La radio coupe toutes les indications sonores ou visuelles relatives l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Silencieux avec voix Identique au mode Silencieux, sauf que la sourdine de la radio se dsactive galement pour certaines transmissions vocales. Ignorer Appel dannulation durgence Cette amlioration de la fonction propose une option permettant votre radio dignorer un appel dannulation durgence actif. Pour activer la fonction Ignorer lappel dannulation durgence, la radio doit tre configure avec le logiciel de programmation client Connect Plus (CPCPS). Lorsque la fonction est active, la radio ne reoit pas le signal audio de lID de groupe dannulation durgence par dfaut. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 5.3.11.1 Rponse un appel d'urgence La radio n'indique pas qu'elle reoit un appel d'urgence. Rpondez comme vous le feriez pour les appels de groupe. 5.3.11.2 113 Franais (Canada) 5.3.11.3 Initiation d'un appel d'urgence AVIS:

Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle durant l'urgence jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Si votre radio est rgle Silencieux avec voix, elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle de mode durgence. Cependant, votre radio dbloque le son pour les transmissions des radios qui rpondent votre urgence. Les indicateurs d'urgence ne se manifestent que lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour amorcer une transmission vocale. Tant en mode Silencieux que Silencieux avec voix , la radio quitte automatiquement le mode silencieux aprs la fin de l'appel d'urgence. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour diffuser une transmission vocale dans le groupe d'urgence. 114 Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit pendant la priode alloue comme dlai d'appel d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant ce temps, l'appel d'urgence se poursuit. 5.3.11.4 Lancement d'un appel d'urgence suivi d'un appel vocal Votre radio doit tre programme pour ce mode. Dans ce mode, lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton programm Urgence et que votre radio reoit un crneau temporel, le microphone est automatiquement activ sans que vous ayez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . Le microphone branch s'applique la premire transmission vocale de votre radio durant l'appel d'urgence. Pour les transmissions subsquentes du mme appel d'urgence, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton PTT. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence. 2 Le microphone reste actif pendant la dure de microphone branch prcise dans la programmation de la codeplug radio. Pendant ce temps, le voyant DEL s'allume en vert. 3 Maintenez le bouton PTT enfonc pour parler plus longtemps que la dure programme. 5.3.11.5 Lancement d'une alerte d'urgence AVIS:

Si votre radio est programme pour Silencieux ou Silencieux avec voix , elle ne fournit aucune indication sonore ou visuelle qu'elle est en train d'envoyer une alerte d'urgence. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux , le mode silencieux est maintenu indfiniment jusqu' ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT ou sur le bouton configur pour Urg. Ds. Si elle est programme pour Silencieux avec voix , la radio annule automatiquement le mode silencieux lorsque le contrleur de site diffuse l'alerte d'urgence. Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur le bouton Urgence orange. Une fois l'alerte d'urgence envoye avec succs et diffuse l'intention des autres radios, une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. 5.3.11.6 Quitter le mode durgence AVIS:

Si l'appel d'urgence prend fin en raison de l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence alors que la situation d'urgence existe toujours, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton Urgence pour redmarrer le processus. Si vous lancez une alerte d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, la radio quitte automatiquement le mode durgence aprs avoir reu une rponse du systme Connect Plus. Si vous lancez un appel d'urgence en appuyant sur le bouton programm Urgence, votre radio est automatiquement associe un canal ds qu'il y en a un de disponible. Une fois que votre radio a transmis un message pour signaler une urgence, vous ne pouvez pas annuler votre appel d'urgence. Cependant, si vous avez 115 Franais (Canada) appuy par accident sur le bouton ou si l'urgence n'existe plus, vous pourriez vouloir le dire sur le canal associ. Lorsque vous relchez le bouton PTT, l'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. Si votre radio est configure pour la fonction Urgence suivi d'un appel vocal, utilisez la priode de micro ouvert pour expliquer votre erreur, puis appuyez brivement sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin la transmission. L'appel d'urgence est coup aprs l'expiration du dlai d'appel d'urgence. 5.3.12 Messagerie texte Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. 116 AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 5.3.12.1 Envoyer des messages texte rapides au moyen de la touche daccs direct Pour envoyer un message texte rapide prdfini un alias prdfini, appuyez sur la touche programme daccs direct. Si le message est envoy avec succs, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert sallume. Si lenvoi du message a chou, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Lcran affiche chec de lenvoi du message. Si lenvoi du message texte choue, la radio affiche de nouveau lcran de loption Renvoyer. 5.3.13 Cryptage Si elle est active, cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir l'coute d'un canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et l'identification de l'utilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active la position courante du slecteur de canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; lactivation de la fonction nest cependant pas ncessaire la rception dune telle transmission. Lorsqu'elle est une position de slecteur de canal crypt, la radio reste en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Votre radio prend en charge le cryptage amlior. Pour dcoder un appel crypt, votre radio doit tre programme de faon utiliser les mmes valeurs et ID de cl (pour le cryptage amlior) que la radio mettrice. Franais (Canada) Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant des valeurs et ID de cl diffrentes, vous n'entendrez rien du tout (cryptage amlior). Le voyant DEL passe au vert continu pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et clignote rapidement en vert lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. Vous pouvez accder cette fonction en effectuant l'une des actions suivantes :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Cryptage pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. AVIS:

Certains modles de radio n'offrent pas cette fonction de cryptage. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5.3.13.1 Faire un appel crypt Le cryptage peut tre activ ou dsactiv au moyen de la touche programme Cryptage. La fonction de cryptage de votre radio doit tre active pour que la position du canal actuellement slectionn envoie des transmissions cryptes. Lorsque le cryptage est activ pour la position du 117 Franais (Canada) canal actuellement slectionn, toutes les transmissions vocales effectues par votre radio sont brouilles. Cela inclut les types dappels suivants : appel de groupe, appel multigroupe, rplique en cours dappel balay, appel gnral de site, appel d'urgence et appel individuel. Seule une radio cible dote des mmes valeurs et ID de cl que votre radio peut dcoder la transmission. 5.3.14 Fonctions de verrouillage par mot de passe Si elle est active, cette fonction vous permet d'accder votre radio si le bon mot de passe est entr lorsque vous l'allumez. 5.3.14.1 Accder la radio l'aide d'un mot de passe 1 Allumez la radio. La radio met une tonalit continue. 118 2 Entrez votre mot de passe quatre chiffres en faisant tourner le bouton Volume/Canal afin de composer le numro. Maintenez appuy le bouton Volume/Canal pour passer au chiffre suivant. Entrez tous les chiffres du mot de passe de la mme manire. Si le mot de passe est correct, la radio se met sous tension. Voir Mise sous tension de la radio la page 27. Si le mot de passe est incorrect, une tonalit continue retentit. Rptez l'tape tape 2. Aprs une troisime tentative incorrecte, Une tonalit se fait entendre et le voyant DEL met un double clignotement jaune. La radio se verrouille. AVIS:

Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel, y compris les . L'utilisation de l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied permet d'accder la radio sans devoir entrer un mot de passe. 5.3.14.2 Dverrouiller la radio 1 Si votre radio a t mise hors tension aprs qu'elle ait t verrouille, mettez-la sous tension. Une tonalit se fait entendre et le voyant DEL met un double clignotement jaune. 2 Patientez 15 minutes. La radio redmarre la minuterie de 15 minutes pour l'tat de verrouillage la mise sous tension. 3 Rptez tape 1 et tape 2 dans Accder la radio l'aide d'un mot de passe la page 118. 5.3.15 Bluetooth AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes d'appareil Bluetooth est efface. Franais (Canada) Cette fonctionnalit vous permet d'utiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par l'intermdiaire d'une connexion sans fil Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts l'emploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 mtres (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. C'est--dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Il n'est pas recommand de laisser votre radio l'cart et vous ne devez pas vous attendre ce que l'appareil Bluetooth offre une fiabilit leve lorsque les deux appareils sont spars. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et l'appareil Bluetooth moins de 10 mtres (32 pieds) l'un de l'autre afin de rtablir la rception. La fonctionnalit Bluetooth de votre radio offre une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi). Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu' quatre connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Vous pouvez par 119 Franais (Canada) exemple connecter un casque et un dispositif PTT. Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalits compltes de votre appareil compatible Bluetooth, reportez-vous son guide d'utilisation. 5.3.15.1 Dtecter un dispositif Bluetooth et tablir la connexion Il ne faut pas mettre le dispositif Bluetooth hors tension pendant le processus de dtection et de connexion, car cela annulerait l'opration. La radio tablit la connexion avec le dispositif Bluetooth porte dont le signal est le plus puissant ou un dispositif avec lequel elle a tabli une connexion antrieurement. 1 Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. 120 2 Sur la radio, appuyez sur la touche programme Connexion Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre et le voyant DEL met un clignotement jaune. 3 Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous au guide d'utilisation de l'appareil Bluetooth. Si l'appariement russit, tonalit de russite se fait entendre. En cas d'chec, une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. AVIS:

Vous devrez peut-tre programmer un code NIP dans votre radio avant de l'apparier d'autres dispositifs. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 5.3.15.2 Se dconnecter d'un dispositif Bluetooth Sur la radio, appuyez sur la touche programme Dconnexion Bluetooth. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre aprs la dconnexion. 5.3.15.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Vous pouvez faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque l'acheminement du signal audio a t chang. Franais (Canada) 5.3.16 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. 121 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 5.3.16.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. 5.3.16.2 122 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi est attribue par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises selon les exigences de lutilisateur partir du CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi pour connatre ltat de la connexion en utilisant lannonce vocale. Lannonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il ny a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. Franais (Canada) Tonalit entendue ... Indication Tonalit d'chec Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont DSACTIVES. 5.3.17.2 Rgler le niveau de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci lev ou bas pour chaque zone Connect Plus. Haute permet des communications, en mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs une distance considrable. Basse permet des communications, en 5.3.17 Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 5.3.17.1 Activer ou dsactiver les tonalits et les avertissements de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et tous les avertissements de la radio (sauf la tonalit davertissement durgence entrant), au besoin. Appuyez sur la touche programme Toutes Tnlts/

Avert.. Tonalit entendue ... Indication Tonalit de russite Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont ACTIVES. 123 Franais (Canada) mode Connect Plus, avec des sites de tour situs proximit. Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. Cette fonction doit tre installe par le connecteur d'accessoire larrire de votre radio par votre dtaillant. Tonalit entendue ... La radio transmet

... Tonalit de russite Faible puissance Tonalit d'chec Haute puissance Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./phares pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Avert./phares. 5.3.17.3 Annonce vocale Cette fonction permet la radio de faire entendre la zone ou le canal que l'utilisateur vient d'attribuer, ou de signaler l'appui sur une touche programmable. L'indicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. Appuyez sur la touche programme Assistance parle. Tonalit entendue ... Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec La radio indique que ... La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est active. La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est dsactive. 5.3.17.4 124 5.3.17.5 Audio intelligent Votre radio peut rgler automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans l'environnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. 5.3.17.6 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la raction acoustique reue lors de la rception d'appels. Appuyez sur la touche programme Rduction bruit. Vous entendez une tonalit de russite qui indique que la suppression des ractions acoustiques est alors active. Vous entendez une tonalit d'chec qui indique que la radio ne peut pas activer la suppression des ractions acoustiques. 5.3.17.7 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation du GNSS Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de navigation mondial (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Appuyez sur la touche programmeGNSS pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. 125 Franais (Canada) Autres systmes Les fonctions qui sont disponibles pour les utilisateurs radio en vertu de ce systme sont disponibles dans le prsent chapitre. 6.1 Bouton PTT Le bouton PTT a deux fonctions principales :

Le bouton PTT permet la radio de transmettre un message aux autres radios pendant un appel. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT, le microphone se met sous tension. Lorsque vous n'tes pas dj en cours d'appel, vous pouvez vous servir du bouton PTT pour faire un nouvel appel. Appuyez longuement sur la touche PTT pour parler. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Si la tonalit dautorisation ou leffet local PTT attendez la fin de la brve tonalit pour parler. est activ, Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ (programm par le dtaillant), une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit 126 lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio cible (la radio qui reoit la transmission) relche le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous entendez une tonalit d'interdiction de parler en continu si votre appel est interrompu. Vous devez relcher le bouton PTT si vous entendez une tonalit d'interdiction de parler continue. 6.2 Touches programmables Selon la dure pendant laquelle vous appuyez sur une touche, votre revendeur peut programmer les touches programmables pour en faire des raccourcis permettant d'accder aux fonctions de la radio. Appui bref Appui long Appuyer et relcher rapidement. Appuyez et maintenez enfonc pour la dure programme. AVIS:

Voir Fonctionnement durgence la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur la dure de programmation pour la touche Urgence. 6.2.1 Fonctions attribuables de la radio Urgence Les fonctions suivantes de la radio peuvent tre attribues aux boutons programmables. Commutateur audio Bluetooth Permet de faire alterner l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur de la radio ou par un accessoire Bluetooth externe. Connexion Bluetooth Permet de lancer l'excution d'une opration de recherche et de connexion Bluetooth. Dconnexion Bluetooth Met fin toutes les connexions Bluetooth entre votre radio et tout dispositif Bluetooth. Dtection Bluetooth Permet votre radio de passer en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Annonce du canal Transmet des messages vocaux pour une zone et un canal sur le canal slectionn. 1 Ne sapplique pas Capacity Plus. Franais (Canada) Selon la programmation choisie, dclenche ou annule une urgence. Quitter la diffusion publique (PA) Faire basculer le routage de l'audio entre l'amplificateur/

haut-parleur PA connect et le systme de sonorisation interne de la radio. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Itinrance de site manuelle 1 Lance une recherche de site manuelle. Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de contrle de gain automatique du microphone. CGA Mic. Moniteur Surveille l'activit du canal slectionn. Suppression des nuisances sur le canal1 Permet de retirer temporairement un canal nuisible de la liste de balayage, sauf le canal slectionn. Le canal slectionn rfre la zone ou la combinaison de canaux slectionne de l'utilisateur partir duquel le balayage est effectu. 127 Franais (Canada) Accs direct Permet de lancer un appel tlphonique, de groupe ou individuel prdfini et d'envoyer un avis d'appel, un message texte rapide automatiquement ou de revenir au mode Accueil. Fonction de carte d'option Active ou dsactive les fonctions de la carte d'option sur les canaux qui les utilisent. coute permanente1 Surveille le trafic radio d'un canal slectionn jusqu' ce que la fonction soit dsactive. Quitter l'appel Met fin un appel tlphonique. Cryptage Diffusion publique (PA) Relais/Direct1 Active ou dsactive la fonction de cryptage. tat Active/dsactive le systme PA interne de la radio. Contrle de la tlmtrie Permet d'alterner entre l'utilisation d'un rpteur et les communications directes avec une autre radio. 2 Ne s'applique pas Capacity Plus-Site unique. 128 Rinitialiser le canal d'accueil Dfinit un nouveau canal daccueil. Mettre en sourdine le Rappel du canal daccueil Mets en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil. Balayage 2 Info site Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la fonction de balayage. Transmet les messages vocaux pour le site actuel pour le site actuel lorsque lAnnonce vocale est active. Verrouillage de site1 Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Permet de slectionner le menu de la liste d'tats. Permet de contrler la broche de sortie sur une radio locale ou distante. Interruption de transmission Met fin un appel interruptible afin de librer le canal. Franais (Canada) Amlioration de la vibration Canal prcdent/suivant Permet d'activer et de dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration. Selon la programmation, passe au canal prcdent ou suivant. Annonce vocale active/dsactive Niveau de puissance Active ou dsactive la fonction d'annonce vocale. Alterne entre un niveau de puissance haut ou bas. Transmission vocale (VOX) Permet d'activer et de dsactiver la transmission vocale. Wi-Fi Permet d'activer ou de dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. Basculement de zone Permet l'utilisateur de la radio de basculer entre la zone 1 et la zone 2. 6.3 Indicateurs d'tat Ce chapitre explique les indicateurs d'tat et les tonalits audio utiliss par la radio. 6.3.1 Voyants DEL 6.2.2 Rglages ou fonctions attribuables Les fonctions ou paramtres radio suivants peuvent tre attribus aux touches programmables. Sonneries/alertes Permet d'activer et de dsactiver les sonneries et les avertissements. Les voyants DEL indiquent l'tat de fonctionnement de la radio. Rouge clignotant La radio na pas russi lautovrification la mise sous tension. La radio reoit une transmission d'urgence. La radio effectue une transmission avec un niveau de batterie faible. 129 Franais (Canada) La radio est maintenant hors de la zone de couverture si la fonction ARTS est configure. Jaune continu La radio surveille un canal classique. Mode Muet est activ. Vert continu La radio est en mode Dtection Bluetooth. Jaune clignotant La radio est en cours de mise sous tension. La radio effectue un balayage pour dtecter de l'activit. La radio est en cours de transmission. La radio envoie un avertissement d'appel ou une transmission d'urgence. Vert clignotant La radio est en train de recevoir un appel ou des donnes. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel. La Liste de rception flexible de la radio est active. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus multi-site sont occups. Jaune clignotement double La radio rcupre des transmissions de programmation. La fonction Itinrance automatique est active. La radio dtecte de l'activit de radiocommunication. La radio recherche activement un nouveau site. AVIS:

Cette activit peut influer ou non le canal programm de la radio en raison de la nature du protocole relatif aux donnes numriques. Le voyant DEL ne s'allume pas si la radio dtecte de l'activit de liaison radio Capacity Plus. La radio n'a pas encore rpondu un avertissement d'appel de groupe. La radio est verrouille. La radio n'est pas connecte au rpteur en mode Capacity Plus. Tous les canaux Capacity Plus sont occups. Vert clignotement double La radio reoit un appel ou des donnes cryptes. 130 Vous trouverez ci-dessous les tonalits mises par le haut-

parleur de la radio. 6.3.2 Tonalits Tonalit aigu Tonalit grave Tonalit de russite Tonalit d'chec 6.3.2.2 Franais (Canada) Tonalits audio La fonction Tonalits audio vous informe de manire audible de l'tat ou rpond la rception de donnes sur la radio. Tonalit continue La radio met un signal monophonique. Il retentit de manire continue jusqu' ce qu'il cesse. Tonalit rptitive Le signal sonore unique retentit et se rpte jusqu' ce que l'utilisateur y mette fin. Tonalit temporaire Son entendu une fois pendant une courte priode dfinie par la radio. 131 6.3.2.1 Tonalits d'avertissement Les tonalits d'avertissement vous informent de manire audible de l'tat d'une tche aprs l'avoir initie. Tonalit priodique Le signal sonore retentit de manire priodique en fonction des rglages de la radio. Il dmarre, s'arrte, puis reprend. Franais (Canada) 6.4 Mode analogique ou numrique classique Vous pouvez configurer chaque canal de la radio de manire analogique classique ou numrique classique. 1 : Bouton slecteur de canal Utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal pour alterner entre les canaux analogiques et numriques. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode analogique et numrique. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent pas au rendement de la radio. AVIS:

La radio peut aussi alterner entre les modes analogique et numrique pendant le balayage bimode. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Balayage la page 153. 132 6.5 Information relative aux icnes Dans le prsent document, les icnes dcrites sont utilises pour signaler les fonctions prises en charge en mode analogique classique ou en mode numrique classique. Indique une fonction propre au mode numrique classique seulement. Les fonctions offertes en mode conventionnel analogique et en mode numrique ne sont accompagnes d'aucune icne. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur les fonctions offertes en mode multisite conventionnel, consultez la section Sites IP interconnects la page 133. Certaines fonctions ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous basculez du mode numrique au mode analogique. Indique une fonction propre au mode analogique classique seulement. Franais (Canada) Certaines fonctions sont aussi offertes dans le mode de partage de canaux Capacity Plus site unique. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Capacity Plus site unique la page 134. actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le rpteur du site dont la valeur RSSI (indicateur d'intensit de rception du signal) est la plus leve. Certaines fonctions sont aussi offertes dans le mode ADF Capacity Plus multisite. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, consultez la section Capacity Plus multisite la page 134. 6.6 Sites IP interconnects Cette fonction permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP (Internet Protocol). Il s'agit d'un mode multisite classique. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Cette opration s'effectue automatiquement ou manuellement en fonction de vos paramtres. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement dans la zone de couverture dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance, mais qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant et s'y connecte. AVIS:

Pour chaque canal, seule l'option Balayage ou Itinrance peut tre active, mais non les deux en mme temps. Les canaux pour lesquels cette fonctionnalit est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche le ou les canaux dans la liste d'itinrance afin de dterminer le meilleur site. Une liste d'itinrance peut contenir un maximum de 16 canaux, y compris le canal slectionn. AVIS:

Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. 133 Franais (Canada) 6.7 Capacity Plus site unique Capacity Plus site unique est une configuration de partage de canaux site unique du systme radio MOTOTRBO qui prend en charge des centaines d'utilisateurs et un maximum de 254 groupes l'aide d'un bassin de canaux. Ainsi, votre radio peut utiliser efficacement tous les canaux programms disponibles en mode Rpteur. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus Site unique l'aide d'une touche programmable. Certaines fonctions de la radio sont accessibles en mode numrique conventionnel, Sites IP interconnects et Capacity Plus. Toutefois, les diffrences mineures de fonctionnement ne nuisent PAS la performance de la radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements au sujet de cette configuration, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.8 134 Capacity Plus multisite Capacity Plus multisite est une configuration de partage de canaux multisite du systme radio MOTOTRBO alliant les principaux avantages des configurations Capacity Plus et Sites IP interconnects. Capacity Plus Multisite permet votre appareil radio de fonctionner au-del de la zone de couverture d'un site unique en se connectant diffrents sites accessibles par l'intermdiaire d'un rseau IP. Cette fonction permet galement d'accrotre la capacit en utilisant efficacement le nombre disponible combin de canaux programms pris en charge par chacun des sites disponibles. Lorsque la radio quitte la zone de couverture d'un site et entre dans celle d'un autre site, elle se connecte au rpteur du nouveau site pour envoyer et recevoir les appels ou les transmissions de donnes. Selon la configuration choisie, cette opration se fait de faon automatique ou manuelle. Si la radio est configure en mode automatique, elle dtecte tous les sites accessibles lorsque le signal du site actuel est faible ou lorsqu'elle ne reoit aucun signal de ce site. Elle se verrouille alors sur le relais du site dont la valeur RSSI. Lors d'une recherche manuelle, la radio recherche le premier site actuellement porte dans la liste des sites disponibles en itinrance (qui ne prsente pas ncessairement le signal le plus puissant) et s'y connecte. Les canaux pour lesquels la configuration Capacity Plus multisite est active peuvent tre ajouts une liste d'itinrance particulire. En mode de recherche automatique en itinrance, la radio recherche ces canaux afin d'identifier le meilleur site. AVIS:

Il est impossible d'ajouter ou de supprimer manuellement une entre dans la liste d'itinrance. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Tout comme pour Capacity Plus site unique, les icnes des fonctions qui ne sont pas offertes en mode Capacity Plus multisite ne sont pas disponibles dans le menu. Une tonalit d'chec retentit lorsque vous tentez d'accder une fonction qui n'est pas accessible en mode Capacity Plus multisite l'aide d'une touche programmable. 6.9 Franais (Canada) Slection des zones et des canaux Ce chapitre dcrit la procdure pour slectionner une zone ou un canal sur votre radio. Une zone est un groupe de canaux. Votre radio prend en charge jusqu 32 canaux et 2 zones, avec un maximum de 32 canaux par zone. Chaque canal peut tre programm avec diffrentes fonctions ou divers groupes d'utilisateurs. 6.9.1 Slection des zones Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner la zone requise sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Basculement de zone. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

Tonalit de russite La radio est dans la zone 2. Tonalit d'chec La radio est dans la zone 1. 135 Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Pour toutes les radios sans clavier, nous vous recommandons d'activer la fonction d'annonce vocale pour la slection de zone. La fonction d'annonce vocale peut tre active uniquement dans le CPS. Appels 6.9.2 Slection des canaux Suivez la procdure suivante pour slectionner le canal voulu aprs avoir slectionn la zone. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Utilisez le bouton Volume/Canal. Ce chapitre dcrit les oprations pour recevoir et rpondre des appels, en faire et y mettre fin. Vous pouvez choisir un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe une fois que vous avez slectionn un canal l'aide d'une de ces fonctions :

Touche programme daccs direct Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire des appels de groupe, individuel et tlphonique. Vous pouvez attribuer uniquement un ID une touche d'accs direct programmable avec un appui prolong ou bref. Bouton programmable Cette mthode est utilise uniquement pour faire un appel tlphonique . Appuyez sur les touches programmes Canal prcdent/suivant. Bouton Volume/Canal Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Cette mthode slectionne manuellement un alias ou un ID d'abonn, ou un alias ou un ID de groupe. 6.10 136 6.10.1 Appels de groupe Votre radio doit avoir t configure comme faisant partie d'un groupe pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs ou de faire un appel un groupe d'utilisateurs. 6.10.1.1 Appels de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels de groupe partir de la radio. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. programme. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Franais (Canada) 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 4 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.1.2 Rponse un appel de groupe Pour tre en mesure de recevoir un appel provenant d'un groupe d'utilisateurs, votre radio doit avoir t pralablement dfinie comme partie intgrante de ce groupe. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel de groupe sur votre radio. Lorsque vous recevez un appel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 137 Franais (Canada) Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

6.10.2 Appels privs Un Appel individuel est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il existe deux manires de configurer un appel individuel. Le premier type transmet l'appel aprs avoir effectu une vrification de prsence radio, tandis que le deuxime type transmet l'appel immdiatement. Un seul de ces types d'appels peut tre programm dans votre radio par votre dtaillant. 6.10.2.1 Passer des appels individuels Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel individuel. Si cette fonction n'est pas active, une tonalit dindication ngative se fait entendre lorsque vous lancez l'appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels privs partir de la radio. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 138 Franais (Canada) 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. programme. Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. 6.10.2.2 Rponse des appels individuels Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un Appel individuel sur votre radio. 3 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Si vous recevez un Appel individuel :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert clignote lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 139 Franais (Canada) Si l'interruption de transmission est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour mettre fin un appel interruptible afin de librer le canal pour vous permettre de rpondre. 6.10.3.1 Rception dun appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel gnral :

Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.3 Appels gnraux Un appel gnral est un appel effectu partir d'une radio priv et destin toutes les radios prsentes sur le canal. Un appel gnral sert diffuser des annonces importantes qui sollicitent toute l'attention des utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre un appel gnral. 140 Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Les appels gnraux n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement se fait entendre lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, ce qui indique que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel gnral. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel gnral si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Pendant un appel gnral, vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements tant que l'appel est en cours. Franais (Canada) 6.10.3.2 Appel gnral 6.10.4 Appels slectifs Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels gnraux partir de la radio. Un appel slectif est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers une autre radio individuelle. Il s'agit d'un appel priv effectu en mode analogique. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe Appel gnral en surbrillance. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre l'appel gnral. 6.10.4.1 Excution dun appel slectif Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour vous permettre de faire un appel slectif. Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels slectifs partir de la radio. 1 Slectionnez un canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID d'abonn. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

141 Franais (Canada) Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Si vous recevez un appel slectif :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. 5 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.4.2 Rponse un appel slectif Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel slectif sur votre radio. 142 Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler

(si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Une tonalit retentit. 6.10.5 Appels tlphoniques Un appel tlphonique est un appel effectu partir d'une radio individuelle vers un tlphone. Franais (Canada) Si la fonction Appel tlphonique n'est pas active sur votre radio :

Votre radio dsactive le son de l'appel. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient l'cran prcdent. Lors de votre appel tlphonique, votre radio tente de mettre fin l'appel lorsque :

Vous appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct si le code de non-accs est prconfigur. Vous entrez le code de non-accs comme entre pour les autres chiffres. Durant laccs aux canaux, la transmission du code d'accs ou de retrait d'accs ou de chiffres supplmentaires, votre radio rpond la touche Activ/

dsactiv, du Rglage du volumeet du slecteur de canal seulement. Une tonalit se fait entendre pour toutes les entres non valides. AVIS:

Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.5.1 Effectuer un appel tlphonique Suivez la procdure suivante pour faire des appels tlphoniques partir de la radio. Lorsque vous tentez de faire un appel tlphonique ou dy mettre fin alors que les codes daccs et de fin daccs ne sont pas configurs, la tentative choue et une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Accs une touche pour lalias ou lID prdfini. Si la touche Accs une touche nest pas programme, une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. En cas de russite :

La multifrquence deux tonalits (DTMF) retentit. Vous entendrez la tonalit de composition du tlphone de l'utilisateur. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Lappel tlphonique choue. Rptez cette tape. 143 Franais (Canada) 2 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 3 Appuyez sur la touche programme Quitter lappel pour mettre fin lappel. Si la configuration de fin dappel russit :

Une tonalit retentit. Si la configuration de fin dappel choue :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. Rptez ltape ou attendez que lutilisateur du tlphone mette fin lappel. 6.10.5.2 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel de groupe sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel de groupe :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. 144 Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, votre radio met l'appel en sourdine. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.5.3 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral Lorsque vous recevez un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral, vous ne pouvez y rpondre ou y mettre fin que si le canal est du type appel gnral. Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode appel gnral sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel gnral :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Franais (Canada) Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, votre radio met l'appel en sourdine. Si la fonctionnalit dappel tlphonique nest pas active, votre radio met l'appel en sourdine. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 1 Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 2 L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.5.4 Rponse un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre un appel tlphonique en mode Appel individuel sur votre radio. Si vous recevez un appel tlphonique en tant quappel individuel :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 6.10.6 Activation de linterruption de transmission An ongoing call is interrupted, when you perform the following actions:

Appuyez sur le bouton Voix PTT. Appuyez sur le bouton durgence. Effectuez la transmission de donnes. 145 Franais (Canada) 6.10.7 Mode direct Cette fonction vous permet de continuer de communiquer lorsque votre rpteur ne fonctionne pas ou lorsque la radio est hors de la porte du rpteur, mais demeure la porte des autres radios. Ce rglage demeure activ mme aprs la mise hors tension. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. 6.10.7.1 Basculement entre les modes Rpteur et Direct Suivez la procdure pour alterner entre les modes Rpteur et Direct sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm Repeater/

Talkaround. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

Tonalit de russite La radio est en mode direct. 146 Tonalit d'chec La radio est en mode rpteur. 6.10.8 Appel vocal de diffusion Un appel vocal de diffusion est un appel vocal unidirectionnel effectu par n'importe quel utilisateur vers un groupe en entier. La fonction Appel vocal de diffusion permet uniquement au lanceur d'appel de transmettre au groupe, et les destinataires de l'appel ne peuvent pas rpondre (aucun dlai dexpiration). Votre radio doit tre programme de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.8.1 Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion Programmer votre radio pour effectuer des appels vocaux de diffusion. 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond l'alias ou l'ID de groupe. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion laide de la touche numrique programmable Suivez la procdure pour effectuer un appel vocal de diffusion l'aide de la touche numrique programmable. Franais (Canada) 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. AVIS:

Les utilisateurs du canal ne peuvent pas rpondre aux appels vocaux de diffusion. Lorsque l'appel prend fin, la radio revient au menu prcdent. 6.10.8.2 1 partir de l'cran d'accueil, appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique programme jusqu' l'alias ou l'ID prdfini. Si une touche numrique a t attribue une entre dans un mode particulier, la fonction nest pas prise en charge lorsque vous appuyez longuement sur la touche numrique dans un autre mode. Si la touche numrique na pas t attribue une entre, vous entendrez une tonalit dchec. 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Attribution dentres des touches numriques programmables. 147 6.10.8.4 Recevoir un appel vocal de diffusion Lorsque vous recevez un appel vocal de diffusion :

6.10.9 Appel sans destinataire Franais (Canada) 6.10.8.3 Faire des appels vocaux de diffusion laide de la recherche dalias Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. Les appels vocaux de diffusion n'attendent pas pendant un temps prdtermin avant de se terminer. Vous ne pouvez pas rpondre un appel vocal de diffusion. AVIS:

La radio interrompt la rception de l'appel vocal de diffusion si vous changez de canal pendant l'appel. Vous ne pouvez pas naviguer ni faire de changements dans les menus tant que l'appel vocal de diffusion est en cours. Un appel sans destinataire est un appel de groupe pour l'un des 16 ID de groupe prdfinis. Cette fonction se configure laide du CPS-RM. Un contact pour l'un des ID prdfinis est ncessaire pour lancer ou recevoir un appel sans destinataire. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.10.9.1 Effectuer un appel sans destinataire 1 Slectionnez le canal qui correspond lalias ou lID de groupe. 148 Franais (Canada) 2 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Linitiateur de lappel peut appuyer sur la touche programme Annuler pour mettre fin lappel de groupe. 3 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 4 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume lorsque la radio cible rpond. Une tonalit momentane se fait entendre. 5 Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.9.2 Rpondre un appel sans destinataire Lorsque vous recevez un appel sans destinataire :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Une tonalit momentane se fait entendre. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le 149 Franais (Canada) son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. pour permettre lutilisation de cette fonction. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. 6.10.10 Mode de canal vocal ouvert (OVCM) Le mode de canal vocal ouvert (OVCM) permet une radio qui n'est pas prconfigure pour une utilisation au sein dun systme particulier de recevoir et d'mettre pendant un appel de groupe ou individuel. Les appels de groupe OVCM prennent galement en charge les appels de diffusion. Programmez votre radio 150 6.10.10.1 Effectuer un appel OVCM Votre radio doit avoir t pralablement programme pour quil soit possible d'effectuer un appel OVCM. Suivez la procdure pour faire des appels OVCM partir de la radio. 1 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de l'effet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 6.10.10.2 Rpondre un appel OVCM Lorsque vous recevez un appel OVCM :

Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Franais (Canada) Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de leffet local PTT (sil est activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Votre radio dsactive la sourdine et l'appel entrant sonne sur le haut-parleur. 1 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

3 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. L'appel se termine lorsqu'il n'y a aucune activit vocale pendant une dure prprogramme. Si lindicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit davertissement se fait entendre lorsque lutilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse dappuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. Si la fonction Interruption vocale est active, appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour interrompre le son sur la radio qui met la transmission et librer le canal afin de vous permettre de rpondre. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6.11 Fonctions avances Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions disponibles sur votre radio. Cependant, votre dtaillant ou l'administrateur de votre systme peut avoir personnalis votre radio en fonction de vos besoins particuliers. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 2 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

151 Franais (Canada) 6.11.1 Rappel du canal daccueil Cette fonction permet d'mettre un rappel si la radio nest pas rgle sur le canal daccueil pendant un certain temps. Si cette fonction est active via le CPS lorsque la radio n'est pas rgle sur le canal d'accueil pendant un certain temps, voici ce qui se produit priodiquement :

La tonalit de Rappel de canal d'accueil et l'annonce sonore retentissent. Vous pouvez interrompre la diffusion du rappel en effectuant lune des actions suivantes :

Retourner au canal daccueil. Mettre temporairement en sourdine lavertissement laide du bouton programmable. Dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil laide du bouton programmable. 6.11.1.1 Mettre en sourdine le rappel du canal daccueil Lorsque survient le rappel du canal daccueil, vous pouvez le mettre en sourdine. 152 Appuyez sur la touche programme Rappel du canal daccueil en sourdine. 6.11.1.2 Rglage de nouveaux canaux daccueil Lorsque le rappel du canal daccueil retentit, vous pouvez dfinir un nouveau canal daccueil. Appuyez sur la touche programmable Rinitialiser canal d'accueil pour rgler le canal courant comme nouveau canal d'accueil. 6.11.2 coute distance Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonction pour couter distance toute activit audible entourant la radio cible. Votre radio et la radio cible doivent tre programmes de manire vous permettre d'utiliser cette fonction. Cette fonction s'arrte aprs une dure programme ou ds qu'une fonction de la radio cible est utilise. 6.11.2.1 Lancer la fonction coute ambiance Votre radio prend en charge jusqu' 250 listes de balayage, chacune pouvant comprendre jusqu' 16 membres. Suivez la procdure pour activer la fonction de surveillance distance sur votre radio. Chaque liste de balayage peut comprendre des entres analogiques et des entres numriques. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme coute distance. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 6.11.3 Listes de balayage Les listes de balayage sont cres et attribues des canaux ou des groupes. Votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la squence de canaux et de groupes dfinie dans la liste de balayage du canal ou du groupe actuel. 6.11.4 Balayage Lorsque vous dmarrez un balayage, votre radio recherche l'activit vocale en passant par le cycle complet de la liste de balayage du canal actuel. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte en mode Capacity Plus. Pendant un balayage bimode, si vous employez un canal numrique et si votre radio capte un canal analogique, votre radio passe automatiquement du mode numrique au mode analogique pendant la dure de la communication. L'inverse est galement vrai. Il y a deux faons de dmarrer un balayage :

153 Franais (Canada) Balayage du canal principal (manuel) Activer ou dsactiver le balayage Votre radio effectue le balayage de tous les canaux et de tous les groupes de votre liste de balayage. Au dmarrage du balayage, votre radio peut, selon les rglages dfinis, commencer automatiquement par le dernier canal ou groupe actif lors du dernier balayage ou par le canal partir duquel le balayage a t lanc. Balayage auto (automatique) Votre radio dmarre automatiquement le balayage lorsque vous slectionnez un canal ou un groupe pour lequel la fonction balayage auto est active. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le balayage sur votre radio. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Appuyez sur la touche programme Balayage pour dmarrer ou arrter le balayage. Utilisez le slecteur de canal pour slectionner un canal dont la programmation comprend une liste de balayage. AVIS:

Lorsque vous configurez la Rception de messages de groupe dans la liste de balayage, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des messages de groupe partir de canaux autres que de l'accueil. Votre radio est en mesure de rpondre au groupe des messages sur votre canal d'accueil, mais n'est pas en mesure de rpondre des canaux autres que ceux de l'accueil. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-

vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Si le balayage est activ :

Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Si le balayage est dsactiv :

Le voyant DEL steint. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 6.11.4.1 154 Franais (Canada) 6.11.4.2 Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage Lorsqu'elle excute un balayage, votre radio s'arrte sur un canal ou un groupe si elle y dtecte de l'activit. La radio demeure sur ce canal pendant une dure programme appele priode d'attente . Suivez la procdure suivante pour rpondre des transmissions pendant le balayage. Suppression des canaux nuisibles Si un canal met continuellement des appels indsirables ou du bruit (canal nuisible ), vous pouvez liminer temporairement ce canal indsirable de la liste de balayage. Cette possibilit n'existe pas pour le canal employ comme canal slectionn. Suivez la procdure suivante pour supprimer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. 1 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que vous pouvez rpondre. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode d'attente. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. La radio reprend le balayage des autres canaux ou des groupes si vous ne rpondez pas dans le dlai de mise en attente. 1 Lorsque votre radio capte un canal indsirable ou nuisible, appuyez sur la touche programme Suppr. canal nuisible et maintenez-la jusqu' ce qu'une tonalit retentisse. 2 Relchez la touche programme Suppr canal nuisible. Le canal nuisible est supprim. 6.11.4.4 Restauration des canaux nuisibles Suivez la procdure suivante pour restaurer les canaux nuisibles de votre radio. 6.11.4.3 155 Franais (Canada) Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la. 6.11.6 Rglages de lindicateur dappel Arrtez et redmarrez un balayage l'aide de la touche programme Balayage ou du menu. Cette fonction vous permet de configurer des sonneries d'appel ou de message texte. Servez-vous du bouton de slection Volume/

Canal ou Canal prcdent/Suivant pour changer le canal. 6.11.5 Balayage par vote Le balayage par vote vous permet d'obtenir une zone de couverture tendue l o plusieurs stations de base transmettent des donnes identiques sur diffrents canaux analogiques. Votre radio effectue le balayage des canaux analogiques de plusieurs stations de base et slectionne le signal reu le plus fort. Une fois la slection dtermine, la radio reoit les transmissions de cette station de base. Pour rpondre une transmission pendant un balayage par vote, consultez la section Rponse une transmission pendant un balayage la page 155. 156 6.11.6.1 Augmenter le volume de la tonalit dalarme Votre dtaillant peut programmer la radio pour vous alerter de faon continue lorsqu'un appel radio reste sans rponse. Le volume de la tonalit d'alarme augmente alors graduellement. Cette fonction porte le nom d'avertissement croissant. 6.11.7 Fonction Avertissement dappel L'envoi d'un avertissement d'appel vous permet de faire savoir un utilisateur de radio particulier que vous souhaitez qu'il vous rappelle. Cette fonction est disponible par une touche d'accs direct programme. Franais (Canada) 6.11.7.1 Excution dune alerte dappel Suivez la procdure suivante pour lancer des alertes d'appel partir de votre radio. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT dans les 4 secondes suivant la rception d'un avertissement d'appel pour rpondre un appel individuel. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 6.11.8 Mode muet 2 Attendez la confirmation. Si la confirmation de l'avertissement d'appel arrive, une tonalit d'indication positive retentit. Si la radio ne reoit pas de confirmation de rception de l'avertissement d'appel, une tonalit grave se fait entendre. 6.11.7.2 Rponse un avertissement dappel Lorsque vous recevez un avis d'appel :

Une tonalit rptitive se fait entendre. Le mode muet propose une option permettant de mettre en sourdine tous les indicateurs sonores de votre radio. Une fois le mode muet activ, tous les indicateurs sonores sont dsactivs lexception des indicateurs des fonctions priorit leve, comme les oprations durgence. Lorsque lon quitte le mode muet, la radio reprend la lecture des tonalits et de transmissions audio. IMPORTANT:

Une seule des fonctions de face vers le bas et davertissement de situation de dtresse peut tre active la fois. Ces deux fonctions ne peuvent tre actives ensemble. 157 Franais (Canada) 6.11.8.1 Activation du mode muet Appuyez sur la touche programme Mode muet. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pour n'importe quelle Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer le mode muet. entre. Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme Mode muet. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est activ :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Les lments suivants se produisent lorsque le mode muet est dsactiv :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignotant s'teint. Votre radio dsactive le mode muet et l'tat du haut-

Le voyant rouge clignote et continue de clignoter jusqu'

Si la minuterie n'est pas expire, cette dernire est parleur est rtabli. arrte. ce que l'on quitte le mode muet. La radio est en sourdine. La minuterie de mode muet commence pour toute la dure configure. AVIS:

Mode muet est galement abandonn si l'utilisateur transmet par la voix ou passa un canal non programm. 6.11.8.2 Quitter le mode muet Cette fonction peut tre quitte automatiquement une fois l'expiration de la minuterie de mode muet. Effectuez l'une des oprations suivantes pour quitter le mode muet manuellement :

6.11.9 Fonctionnement durgence Une alarme d'urgence est employe pour signaler une situation critique. Vous pouvez signaler une urgence en tout temps mme si de l'activit se droule sur le canal en cours d'utilisation. 158 Franais (Canada) Votre dtaillant peut dfinir la dure d'appui sur la touche Urgence programme, sauf la dure dappui prolong, qui est semblable celui de tous les autres boutons. Appui bref AVIS:

Une seule des alarmes d'urgence ci-dessus peut tre associe la touche durgence programme ou l'interrupteur d'urgence au pied. De 0,05 0,75 seconde. Appui long De 1,00 3,75 secondes. La fonction Urgence act./ds. est attribue la touche Urgence. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant le fonctionnement de la touche Urgence. AVIS:

Si un appui bref sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une longue pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Si un appui long sur la touche Urgence lance le mode d'urgence, alors une courte pression sur la mme touche permet la radio de quitter le mode d'urgence. Votre radio prend en charge trois alarmes d'urgence :

Alarme durgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal De plus, chaque alarme comprend les types suivants :

Rgulier Silencieux La radio transmet un signal d'alarme et active des indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels. La radio reoit les appels sans qu'aucun son ne se fasse entendre sur le haut-parleur, jusqu' ce que la priode de transmission micro ouvert programme se termine ou que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PTT. Silencieux avec voix La radio transmet un signal d'alarme sans indicateurs sonores ou visuels, mais permet aux appels entrants de se faire entendre sur le haut-parleur. 6.11.9.1 Rception dune alarme durgence Lorsque vous recevez une alarme d'urgence :

159 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit retentit. Changez de canal. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. Appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsactive. AVIS:

Votre radio confirme automatiquement lalarme durgence (si cette fonction est active). teignez la radio. 6.11.9.3 Envoi des alarmes durgence Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence (un signal sans voix) qui dclenche une indication d'alerte sur un groupe de radios. Votre radio n'affiche aucun indicateur sonore ou visuel durant le mode d'urgence lorsque celui-ci est rgl sur silencieux. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des alertes d'urgence partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Pour revenir l'cran d'accueil, effectuez les oprations suivantes :

a Appuyez sur

. b Appuyez sur ou jusqu' Oui. c Appuyez sur pour effectuer la slection. La radio revient l'cran d'accueil et l'cran affiche l'icne d'urgence. 6.11.9.2 Sortie du mode durgence aprs rception de lalarme durgence Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence aprs avoir reu une alarme d'urgence :

160 AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence. La tonalit Recherche d'urgence peut tre programme partir du CPS. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. En cas d'chec aprs que toutes les tentatives ont t utilises :

Une tonalit grave retentit. La radio quitte alors le mode d'alarme d'urgence. 6.11.9.4 Franais (Canada) Envoi dune alarme durgence avec un appel Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence avec un appel un groupe de radios. Lorsqu'une radio du groupe accuse rception de l'alarme d'urgence, le groupe de radios peut communiquer sur un canal d'urgence programm. Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer un message d'urgence avec appel partir de votre radio. 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence Act. ou sur la pdale d'urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. AVIS:

Si programme, la tonalit de recherche d'urgence retentit. Cette tonalit est silencieuse lorsque la radio transmet ou reoit des messages vocaux, et s'arrte lorsque la radio quitte le mode d'urgence.La tonalit de la recherche d'urgence peut tre programme par votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur systme. 161 La tonalit durgence se fait entendre. 7 Pour quitter le mode d'urgence une fois l'appel Franais (Canada) 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. 3 Pour faire l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton de conversation PTT. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 4 Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler (si elle est active) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. Attendez la fin de la tonalit PTT (si activ) et parlez clairement dans le microphone. 5 Relchez le bouton PTT pour couter. 6 Si l'indicateur Canal libre est activ, une courte tonalit d'avertissement retentit lorsque l'utilisateur de la radio mettrice cesse d'appuyer sur le bouton PTT, vous indiquant que le canal est libre et que 162 vous pouvez rpondre. Pour prendre l'appel, appuyez sur le bouton PTT. termin, appuyez sur la touche Urgence dsactive. Si vous n'appuyez pas sur le bouton Urgence dsactive pour quitter le mode d'urgence, le voyant DEL clignote en rouge et la radio demeure en mode d'urgence. 6.11.9.5 Alarmes d'urgence suivies d'un appel vocal Cette fonction vous permet d'envoyer une alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal un groupe de radios. Le microphone de votre radio est automatiquement activ, vous permettant de communiquer avec le groupe de radios sans avoir appuyer sur le bouton PTT. Cet tat de microphone activ est aussi appel microphone branch . Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Votre radio ne peut pas dtecter un microphone non IMPRES qui est attach au connecteur d'accessoire arrire. Si aucun microphone n'est dtect sur le connecteur programm indiqu, votre radio vrifie l'autre connecteur. Ainsi votre radio donne la priorit au microphone dtect. Si la demande d'alarme d'urgence choue, la radio ne fait pas d'autre tentative et passe directement l'tat de microphone branch. AVIS:

Certains accessoires ne prennent pas en charge la fonction microphone branch. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Si le mode de cycle d'urgence de votre radio est activ, les rptitions de microphone branch et de priode de rception s'appliquent pendant la dure programme. Pendant le mode de cycle d'urgence, le son des appels reus est diffus sur le haut-parleur de la radio. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de rception programme, une tonalit d'interdiction se fait entendre, indiquant que vous devez librer le bouton PTT. La radio ne tient pas compte du fait que le bouton PTT est enfonc et demeure en mode d'urgence. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant la priode de microphone branch programme et si vous maintenez le bouton enfonc aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, la radio continue de transmettre jusqu' ce que vous relchiez le bouton PTT. 6.11.9.6 Envoi dune alarme durgence suivie dun appel vocal 1 Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active ou sur l'interrupteur au pied Urgence. Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. 2 Lorsque la tonalit durgence se fait entendre, parlez clairement dans le microphone. La radio cesse automatiquement de transmettre dans les cas suivants :

163 Franais (Canada) Si le mode Cycle durgence est activ, la dure du cycle entre microphone branch et rception dappels arrive son terme. Aprs l'expiration de la dure de microphone branch, le mode cycle d'urgence est dsactiv. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote. La radio reste en mode d'urgence. 6.11.9.7 Ractivation du mode durgence Effectuez lune des actions suivantes :

AVIS:

Vous pouvez ractiver le mode d'urgence seulement si vous activez l'alarme d'urgence sur le nouveau canal. Appuyez sur la touche programme Urgence active pendant que la radio est dans un tat 164 d'activation du mode d'urgence ou de transmission d'urgence. La radio quitte alors le mode d'urgence et ractive l'urgence. 6.11.9.8 Quitter le mode d'urgence aprs l'envoi de l'alarme d'urgence Cette fonction n'est offerte que sur la radio qui envoie l'alarme d'urgence. Votre radio quitte le mode d'urgence lorsque :

Un accus de rception est reu (dans le cas de Toutes les tentatives d'envoi de l'alarme ont t effectues. AVIS:

Si la radio est mise hors tension, elle quitte le mode d'urgence. La radio ne ractive pas automatiquement le mode durgence lorsquelle est remise sous tension. Changez le canal pendant que la radio est en l'alarme d'urgence seulement). mode d'urgence. Suivez la procdure suivante pour quitter le mode d'urgence sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Urg. dsactiv. 6.11.10 Messagerie texte Il existe deux types de messages texte : court message texte et message texte de radio mobile numrique (DMR). La longueur maximale dun message texte court DMR est de 23 caractres. En mode transmission, un message texte peut comporter un maximum de 280 caractres, ce qui inclut la ligne dobjet. Vous voyez la ligne dobjet lorsque vous recevez un message provenant dune application courriel. Votre radio peut recevoir des donnes, par exemple un message texte, en provenance dune autre radio ou dune application de messagerie texte. 6.11.10.1 Message texte rapide Franais (Canada) AVIS:

La longueur maximale de 280 caractres sapplique uniquement pour les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour les modles de radio avec les anciens logiciels et matriels, la longueur maximale dun message texte est de 140 caractres. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements ce sujet, communiquez avec votre dtaillant. Votre radio prend en charge des messages texte rapides, selon la programmation effectue par votre dtaillant. 6.11.10.1.1 Envoi de messages texte rapides Suivez la procdure suivante pour envoyer des messages texte rapides prdfinis sur votre radio un alias prdfini. 1 Appuyez sur la touche d'accs direct programme. 2 Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

165 Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL vert s'allume. Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 6.11.11 Confidentialit Cette fonction fait appel une solution de brouillage logiciel pour prvenir lcoute dun canal par des utilisateurs non autoriss. Les parties de la transmission correspondant au signal et lidentification de lutilisateur ne sont pas brouilles. Sur votre radio, la fonction de cryptage doit tre active sur le canal pour envoyer une transmission crypte; lactivation de la fonction nest cependant pas ncessaire la rception dune telle transmission. Pendant quun canal crypt est slectionn, la radio continue dtre en mesure de recevoir des transmissions non brouilles. Certains modles de radio noffrent pas cette fonction de cryptage, ou peuvent avoir une configuration diffrente. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, 166 adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. Votre radio prend en charge deux types de cryptage, mais un seul peut tre attribu votre radio. Ces fonctions sont les suivantes :

Cryptage de base Cryptage amlior Pour dcoder un appel crypt ou une transmission de donnes crypte, votre radio doit tre programme de manire avoir la mme cl de cryptage (cryptage de base) ou la mme valeur et le mme ID de cl (cryptage amlior) que la radio lorigine de la transmission. Si votre radio reoit un appel brouill correspondant une cl de cryptage diffrente ou une valeur et un ID de cl diffrents, vous entendrez une transmission brouille

(cryptage de base) ou vous nentendrez rien du tout

(cryptage amlior). Sur un canal crypt, votre radio est en mesure de recevoir des appels dbrouills, selon la faon dont votre radio est programme. En outre, votre radio peut jouer un avertissement ou non, selon la faon dont elle est programme. Franais (Canada) Le voyant DEL vert sallume pendant que la radio envoie une transmission crypte et met un clignotement rapide lorsque la radio reoit une transmission crypte. Ce paramtre sapplique lorsque le canal actuel de la radio fait partie dune configuration de site IP interconnect ou multisite Capacity Plus. AVIS:

Cette fonction nest pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Votre radio peut excuter lune ou lautre des recherches de site suivantes :

Recherche de site automatique Recherche de site manuelle 6.11.11.1 Activer ou dsactiver le cryptage Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction confidentialit de votre radio. Si le canal courant est un canal multisite comportant une liste ditinrance et se trouvant hors de porte, et que le site est dverrouill, votre radio effectue galement la recherche de site automatique. Appuyez sur la touche programme Confidentialit. 6.11.12.1 Lancer une recherche de site manuelle 6.11.12 Commande multisite Votre radio peut rechercher des sites et passer dun site un autre lorsque le signal est faible ou quelle ne parvient pas dtecter le signal provenant du site actuel. Lorsque le signal est fort, la radio demeure sur le site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Itinrance de site manuelle. Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL vert clignote. Si la radio trouve un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

167 Franais (Canada) Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL steint. 6.11.13 Travailleur solitaire Si la radio choue trouver un nouveau site, elle affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit dchec se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL steint. 6.11.12.2 Verrouillage de site activ/dsactiv Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio ne recherche que le site courant. Lorsquelle est dsactive, la radio recherche dautres sites en plus du site courant. Appuyez sur la touche programme Verr. Site. Si la fonction Verrouillage de site est active :

Une tonalit de russite retentit pour indiquer que la radio s'est verrouille sur le site courant. Si la fonction Verrouillage du site est dsactive :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit pour indiquer que la radio est dverrouille. Cette fonction dclenche le mode d'urgence s'il n'y a aucun signe d'activit par l'utilisateur, tel qu'appuyer sur une quelconque touche de la radio ou activer le slecteur de canal, pendant une dure prdfinie. Si aucune activit n'est dtecte pendant la dure prdfinie, la radio avertit l'utilisateur de l'expiration du dlai d'inactivit au moyen d'un signal sonore. Si l'utilisateur ne donne aucune rponse l'avertissement avant l'expiration du dlai prdfini subsquent, la radio active une alarme d'urgence. Seulement une des alarmes d'urgence suivantes est associe cette fonction :

Alarme d'urgence Alarme d'urgence avec appel Alarme d'urgence suivie d'un appel vocal La radio demeure dans l'tat d'urgence, ce qui permet la transmission des messages vocaux, jusqu' ce qu'une action soit excute. Reportez-vous Fonctionnement durgence la page 158 pour en savoir plus sur les faons de quitter le mode Urgence. 168 AVIS:

Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.11.14 Bluetooth Cette fonctionnalit vous permet dutiliser votre radio avec un appareil compatible Bluetooth (un accessoire) par lintermdiaire dune connexion Bluetooth. Votre radio prend en charge les appareils compatibles Bluetooth de marque Motorola Solutions et autres produits commerciaux prts lemploi. La connectivit Bluetooth fonctionne dans un rayon de 10 m (32 pi) entre deux appareils en ligne directe. Cest--

dire un chemin sans obstruction entre votre radio et votre dispositif Bluetooth. Pour obtenir un haut degr de fiabilit, Motorola Solutions recommande de ne pas sparer la radio et laccessoire. la priphrie de la zone de couverture, la qualit de la rception diminue, et la voix et la tonalit peuvent devenir brouilles ou saccades. Pour corriger ce problme, il suffit de rapprocher votre radio et lappareil Bluetooth ( moins de 10 m lun de lautre) afin de rtablir la rception. La Franais (Canada) fonction Bluetooth de votre radio a une puissance maximale de 2,5 mW (4 dBm) dans un rayon de 10 m. Votre radio peut prendre en charge jusqu trois connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec des appareils compatibles Bluetooth de diffrents types. Par exemple, un scanneur, un appareil capteur et un appareil PTT seulement (POD). Les connexions Bluetooth simultanes avec plusieurs appareils Bluetooth de mme type ne sont pas prises en charge. Reportez-vous au manuel dutilisation de votre dispositif Bluetooth pour plus de dtails sur lensemble des possibilits de votre priphrique compatible Bluetooth. AVIS:

Si cette option est dsactive par le CPS, toutes les fonctionnalits associes Bluetooth sont dsactives et la base de donnes dappareil Bluetooth est efface. 6.11.14.1 Connexion aux dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour vous connecter des appareils Bluetooth disponibles. Allumez l'appareil Bluetooth et lancez le mode d'appariement. 169 Franais (Canada) Appuyez sur la touche programme Connexion Bluetooth. Appuyez sur la touche programme Dconnexion Bluetooth. Il est possible que l'appariement de votre appareil Bluetooth ncessite d'autres tapes. Reportez-vous aux manuels d'utilisation des appareils compatibles Bluetooth. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote. Attendez la confirmation. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite retentit. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec retentit. 6.11.14.2 Dconnexion de dispositifs Bluetooth Suivez la procdure suivante pour vous dconnecter de dispositifs Bluetooth. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre lorsque l'appareil est dconnect. 6.11.14.3 Changer lacheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth Suivez la procdure pour faire basculer l'acheminement du signal audio entre le haut-parleur interne de la radio et le dispositif Bluetooth externe. Appuyez sur la touche programme Interrupteur audio Bluetooth. Une tonalit se fait entendre lorsque l'acheminement du signal audio a t chang. 170 6.11.15 Localisation lintrieur AVIS:

La fonction Localisation interne concerne uniquement les modles avec la dernire version du logiciel et du matriel. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. La fonction Localisation interne est utilise pour assurer le suivi de lemplacement des utilisateurs de radio. Lorsque cette fonction est active, la radio est en mode Dtection limite. Des balises ddies sont utilises pour localiser la radio et dterminer sa position. 6.11.15.1 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Positionnement l'intrieur Accdez cette fonction partir de la touche programme. Franais (Canada) a. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. intrne pour activer cette fonction. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, la localisation interne est active. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. b. Appuyez longuement sur la touche programme Localis. interne pour dsactiver cette fonction. Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. L'un des vnements suivants se produit :

En cas de russite, le positionnement l'intrieur est dsactiv. En cas d'chec, vous entendez une tonalit d'indication ngative. 171 Franais (Canada) 6.11.16 Systme ARTS Le systme ARTS est une fonctionnalit analogique seulement conue pour vous informer quand votre radio est en dehors de la zone de couverture des autres radios dotes du systme ARTS. Les radios dotes du systme ARTS transmettent ou reoivent priodiquement des signaux pour confirmer qu'elles se trouvent dans la zone de couverture l'une de l'autre. Votre radio fournit des indications d'tat comme suit :

Alerte initiale Une tonalit se fait entendre. Alerte ARTS dans la zone de couverture Une tonalit se fait entendre, si programme. Alerte ARTS hors de la zone de couverture Une tonalit se fait entendre. Le voyant DEL rouge clignote rapidement. AVIS:

Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 172 6.11.17 Programmation par onde radio Votre dtaillant peut mettre jour distance votre radio partir de la programmation par radiocommunication (OTAP) sans connexion physique. De plus, certains paramtres peuvent tre configurs partir de la programmation par radiocommunication. Lorsque votre radio est programme par OTAP, le voyant DEL vert clignote. Lorsque votre radio reoit des donnes volume lev :

Le canal devient occup. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre si vous appuyez sur le bouton PTT. AVIS:

Lorsque la programmation est termine, une tonalit retentit et votre radio redmarre (mise hors tension, puis sous tension de nouveau). 6.11.18 Verrouillage par mot de passe Vous pouvez dfinir un mot de passe pour restreindre laccs votre radio. Chaque fois que vous allumez votre radio, vous tes invit entrer le mot de passe. Votre radio prend en charge lentre de mots de passe de quatre chiffres. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Lutilisation de linterrupteur au pied durgence permet daccder la radio sans entrer de mot de passe. 2 Votre radio vrifie automatiquement la validit du mot de passe lorsque vous entrez le dernier chiffre du mot de passe. Lorsquelle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Si vous entrez le mot de passe correctement, la radio se met sous tension. 6.11.18.1 Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe Allumez la radio. 1 Entrez le mot de passe quatre chiffres. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs les premire et seconde tentatives, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

Une tonalit continue se fait entendre. Rptez la procdure tape 1. Si vous entrez un mot de passe erron, aprs la troisime tentative, votre radio affiche les indications suivantes :

a Pour entrer le premier chiffre du mot de passe, Une tonalit se fait entendre. utilisez le bouton slecteur de canal. b Pour passer au chiffre suivant, appuyez et maintenez le bouton slecteur de canal. c Entrez tous les chiffres restants du mot de passe de cette faon. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. La radio se verrouille pendant 15 minutes. 173 Franais (Canada) Attendez 15 minutes, le temps que le dlai de la minuterie dtat de verrouillage sachve, puis recommencez la procdure tape 1. Patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 77 pour accder la radio. AVIS:

Si vous teignez et rallumez votre radio, la minuterie de 15 minutes redmarre. 6.11.19 Fonctionnement Wi-Fi 6.11.18.2 Dverrouillage de la radio Lorsqu'elle est verrouille, la radio ne peut recevoir aucun appel. Suivez la procdure suivante pour dverrouiller une radio verrouille. Effectuez l'une des actions ci-dessous :

Si la radio est allume, patientez 15 minutes et rptez les tapes de la section Accs la radio laide dun mot de passe la page 77 pour accder la radio. Si la radio est teinte, allumez-la. La radio redmarre la minuterie de verrouillage de 15 minutes. Une tonalit retentit. Le voyant DEL jaune clignote en double. Cette fonction vous permet de configurer un rseau Wi-Fi et de vous y connecter. Le Wi-Fi prend en charge les mises jour de micrologiciel de la radio, de la codeplug, et des ressources telles que les modules de langues et les annonces vocales. AVIS:

Cette fonction sapplique aux modles XPR 5350e/XPR 5380e uniquement. Wi-Fi est une marque dpose de Wi-Fi Alliance. Votre radio prend en charge les rseaux Wi-Fi dentreprise WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnels et WPA/WPA2 d'entreprise. Rseau Wi-Fi WEP/WPA/WPA2 personnel Utilise lauthentification base sur cl prpartage (mot de passe). La cl prpartage peut tre saisie partir du menu ou du CPS/RM. 174 Rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise Utilise lauthentification base sur certificat. Votre radio doit tre prconfigure avec un certificat. AVIS:

Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme la procdure de connexion un rseau Wi-Fi WPA/WPA2 dentreprise. La touche programme Wi-Fi Off ou On est attribue par dfaut. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Wi-Fi On ou Off peut tre personnalis par le CPS selon les exigences des utilisateurs. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. 6.11.19.1 Activer ou dsactiver la fonction Wi-Fi Appuyez sur la touche programme Wi-Fi activ ou dsactiv. Lannonce vocale Activation du Wi-Fi ou Dsactivation du Wi-Fi se fait entendre. Franais (Canada) 6.11.19.2 Connexion un point daccs rseau Lorsque vous activez le Wi-Fi, la radio recherche un point daccs rseau et sy connecte. AVIS:

La touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi est attribue par votre dtaillant ou administrateur de systme. Les annonces vocales pour la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi peuvent tre personnalises selon les exigences de lutilisateur partir du CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Les points daccs rseau Wi-Fi WPA dentreprise sont prconfigurs. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. Appuyez sur la touche programme Requte dtat Wi-Fi pour connatre ltat de la connexion en utilisant lannonce vocale. Lannonce vocale indique Le Wi-Fi est dsactiv lorsque le Wi-Fi est activ, mais il ny a pas de connexion ou Le Wi-Fi est activ avec connexion. 175 Franais (Canada) 6.12 Utilitaires Ce chapitre dcrit le fonctionnement des fonctions utilitaires disponibles sur votre radio. 6.12.1 Niveau de silencieux Vous pouvez rgler le niveau du silencieux de la radio de manire filtrer les appels indsirables faible intensit de signal ou les canaux caractriss par un bruit de fond anormalement lev. Il s'agit de la valeur par dfaut. Ce filtre limine les appels indsirables ou le bruit de fond. Cependant, les appels provenant d'emplacements distants risquent alors d'tre galement limins. Normal Serr 6.12.1.1 176 Configuration du niveau du silencieux Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer le niveau du silencieux de recherche de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Silencieux. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

Tonalit de russite La radio fonctionne en mode silencieux filtr. Tonalit d'chec La radio fonctionne en mode silencieux normal. 6.12.2 Niveaux de puissance Vous pouvez personnaliser le niveau de puissance de votre radio en rglant celui-ci Haut ou Bas pour chaque canal. Haute Faible Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios considrablement loignes. Ce rglage permet la communication avec des radios situes proximit. 6.12.2.1 Configuration de la puissance Suivez la procdure suivante pour configurer la puissance de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Niveau de puissance. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. La puissance de transmission de la radio est rgle Basse. En cas d'chec :

rgle leve. 6.12.3 Franais (Canada) Activation ou dsactivation des sonneries et alertes de la radio Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver toutes les tonalits et alertes, si ncessaire, l'exception de la tonalit dalerte d'urgence entrante Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver les sonneries et les alertes sur votre radio. Appuyez sur le bouton programm Toutes Tnlts/

Avert. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La puissance de transmission de la radio est En cas d'chec :

177 Franais (Canada) 6.12.4 Activation ou dsactivation de l'avertisseur / des phares Votre radio peut vous aviser d'un appel entrant en actionnant l'avertisseur et les phares. Lorsque cette fonction est active, les appels entrants font s'activer l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Cette fonction passe par le connecteur d'accessoire l'arrire de votre radio et doit tre installe par votre dtaillant. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'avertisseur et les phares de votre vhicule. Appuyez sur la touche programme Avert./phares. En cas de russite :

6.12.5 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique interne (PA) de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le systme de diffusion publique est activ. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est active. Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Le systme de diffusion publique est teint. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. La fonction d'avertisseur et de phares est dsactive. 178 6.12.6 Activer et dsactiver le systme de diffusion publique externe Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la diffusion publique externe (PA) de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Diffusion publique ext. L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Le systme de diffusion publique externe est activ. En cas dchec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. 6.12.7 Franais (Canada) Transmission vocale La transmission vocale (VOX) vous permet d'tablir une communication vocale en mode mains libres sur un canal programm. La radio transmet automatiquement, pendant une priode programme, ds que le microphone de l'accessoire VOX dtecte une voix. AVIS:

Cette fonction n'est pas offerte dans les canaux de bandes citoyennes qui se trouvent dans la mme frquence. Vous pouvez activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX en procdant de l'une ou l'autre des manires suivantes :

teignez la radio, puis rallumez-la pour activer la fonction VOX. Changez de canal l'aide de la touche Canal prcdent/suivant pour activer la fonction VOX. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction VOX l'aide de la touche programme VOX. Appuyez sur le bouton PTT pendant que la radio fonctionne pour dsactiver la fonction VOX. 179 Le systme de diffusion publique externe est Changez de canal l'aide du bouton Volume/Canal teint. pour activer la fonction VOX. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

L'activation ou la dsactivation de cette fonction est limite aux radios sur lesquelles la fonction associe est active. Pour obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. AVIS:

Si la fonction de tonalit d'autorisation est active, utilisez un mot dclencheur pour faire l'appel. Attendez la fin de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler, puis parlez clairement dans le microphone. Pour en savoir plus ce sujet, consultez la section Activation ou dsactivation de la tonalit d'autorisation de parler. 6.12.7.1 Activation ou dsactivation de lmission commande par la voix

(VOX) Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver le VOX sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programmeVOX pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. 6.12.8 Activation ou dsactivation de lassistance parle Cette fonction permet la radio de confirmer vocalement le code ou le nom de la zone ou du canal que l'utilisateur vient d'entrer ou la touche programmable sur laquelle il vient d'appuyer. L'assistance parle peut tre personnalise en fonction des exigences du client. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'assistance parle de votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Assistance parle. En cas de russite :

180 Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. 6.12.9 Activation ou dsactivation de la carte doption Les capacits de carte d'option de chaque canal peuvent tre attribues aux touches programmables. Un canal peut prendre en charge jusqu' six fonctions de carte d'option. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la carte d'option sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Carte d'option. 6.12.10 Franais (Canada) Synthse texte-parole La fonction de synthse vocale peut tre active uniquement par votre dtaillant. Si la synthse texte-parole est active, lAnnonce vocale est automatiquement dsactive. Si cette option est active, la fonction de synthse texte-parole est automatiquement dsactive. Lindicateur audio peut tre personnalis en fonction des exigences du client. 6.12.10.1 Rglage de la synthse texte-parole Suivez la procdure pour dfinir la fonction de synthse vocale. Appuyez sur la touche programme Synthse vocale pour couter les messages texte que vous recevez. 181 Franais (Canada) 6.12.11 Activation ou dsactivation de la fonction Audio intelligent Votre radio rgle automatiquement le volume audio pour compenser le bruit de fond actuel dans lenvironnement, y compris les sources de bruit mobiles et immobiles. Cette fonction est une fonction de rception uniquement et ne touche pas l'audio de transmission. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver l'audio intelligent sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Audio intelligent. AVIS:

Cette fonction ne s'applique pas la technologie Bluetooth. Activer ou dsactiver la fonction de suppression des ractions acoustiques Cette fonction vous permet de rduire la suppression de la raction acoustique lors de la rception d'appels. Suivez la procdure suivante pour activer ou dsactiver la suppression de la raction acoustique sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme AF Suppressor

(Suppression siffl). L'une des tonalits suivantes retentit :

Tonalit de russite La suppression des ractions acoustiques est active. Tonalit d'chec La suppression des ractions acoustiques est dsactive. 6.12.12 182 Franais (Canada) Activer et dsactiver le systme de systme satellite de navigation mondial Le systme mondial de navigation par satellite (GNSS) est un systme de navigation par satellite qui permet de dterminer l'emplacement prcis de la radio. Le GNSS comprend le systme de positionnement global (GPS), le systme mondial de satellites de navigation (GLONASS) et le systme de satellite de navigation BeiDou (BDS). Le AVIS:

Certains modles de radio peuvent offrir le GPS, le GLONASS et le BDS. La constellation GNSS est configure dans le CPS. Vrifiez auprs du dtaillant ou de votre administrateur de systme pour savoir de quelle faon votre radio a t programme. 6.12.13 Activer ou dsactiver lamlioration de la vibration Vous pouvez activer cette fonction lorsque vous parlez une langue qui contient beaucoup de consonnes vibrantes alvolaires ( R rouls). Suivez la procdure pour activer ou dsactiver l'amlioration de la vibration sur votre radio. Appuyez sur la touche programme Amlioration de la vibration pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction. En cas de russite :

Une tonalit de russite se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont actives. En cas d'chec :

Une tonalit d'chec se fait entendre. Toutes les tonalits et alertes sont dsactives. 6.12.14 183 Franais (Canada) Liste des accessoires approuvs Motorola Solutions fournit une liste daccessoires pour amliorer la productivit de votre radio. Tableau 2: Antenne Description Numro de pice HAD4006_ HAD4007_ HAD4008_ HAD4009_ HAE4002_ HAE4003_ 184 VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice HAE4004_ HAE4010_ HAE4011_ HAE4012_ HAE4013_ HAE6019_ HAE6020_ Description UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-

U GPS/UHF combins, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Description Description Numro de pice HAE6022_ HAE6024_ HAE6026_ HAF4027_ HAF4029_ HAF4030_ HAF4032_ UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U 800/900, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice HAF4033_ PMAE4030_ PMAE4031_ PMAE4032_ PMAE4033_ PMAE4034_ Franais (Canada) GPS+RF combins, 806 941 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/UHF combins, 450 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U PMAN4000_ Antenne GPS active fixe 185 Franais (Canada) Description Description Numro de pice PMAN4001_ PMAN4002_ PMAN4004_ RAD4214_ RAD4215_ RAD4216_ RAD4217_ 186 Antenne GPS active monte sur fentre Antenne GPS active support magntique GPS+RF combins, base uniquement, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U GPS/VHF combins, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion, Mini-U Numro de pice RAD4218_ RAE4004_RB RAE4004_ GPS/VHF combins, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (avec base) UHF, 445 470 MHz, gain 5 dB, montage par insertion, Mini-U (sans base) Tableau 3: Antenne pour une utilisation avec base PMAN4004_ uniquement Numro de pice HAE6027_ HAE6028_ HAE6029_ Description UHF, 494 512 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion UHF, 470 494 MHz, gain 3 dB, montage par insertion UHF, 403 527 MHz, gain 2 dB, montage par insertion Franais (Canada) Description Tableau 4: Accessoires audio Numro de pice HAE6030_ UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 donde, montage par insertion PMAE4039_ UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 donde Description Numro de pice 89409N Casque Bluetooth HK200 prise amricaine PMAE4041_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 donde HMN4098_ Combin style tlphone PMAE4040_ UHF, 406 420 MHz, gain 3,5 dB NNTN8125_ PMAE4042_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 3,5 dB PMAE4043_ UHF, 450 470 MHz, gain 5 dB RAD4223_ RAD4224_ RAD4225_ RAD4226_ RAD4227_ VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 150,8 162 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 146 150,8 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 donde VHF, 146 172 MHz, gain 3 dB NNTN8126_ NNTN8127_ NNTN8189_ Oreillette sans fil indispensable, cble de 30,5 cm (12 po) Oreillette sans fils indispensable, cble de 24 cm (9,5 po) Dispositif PTT de messagerie vocale instantane sans fil indispensable Casque sans fil non scuris et dispositif PTT avec audio PTT, cble de 30,5 cm (12 pouces) NNTN8190_ Ensemble daccessoires Bluetooth, SP, cble de 24 cm (9,5 po) 187 Description Description Franais (Canada) Numro de pice NNTN8296_3 NNTN8385_5 PMLN7181_5 PMLN7203_5 RLN4922_5 Ensemble discret sans fil, comprend deux ensembles dcouteurs 2 fils

(1 noir et 1 blanc), oreillette 1 fil

(noir) et un adaptateur de 3,5 mm brancher dans tous les modles dcouteurs disponibles dans le commerce Adaptateur sans fil en Y et crochet de rtention pour couteurs entirement dissimuls Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige Oreillette pivotante ajustement flexible avec microphone sur tige, emballage multiple Trousse doreillette entirement dissimule Numro de pice RLN6490_ RLN6491_ RLN6500_ RLN6550_5 Casque robuste sans fil non scuris contour doreille XBT Casque robuste sans fil non scuris serre-tte XBT Trousse daccessoires Bluetooth MOTOTRBO avec bloc dalimentation AN Oreillette pivotante avec microphone en ligne pour accessoire de bouton Bluetooth, paquet de 3 RMN5050_ Microphone de bureau RMN5052_ Microphone compact RMN5127_ RMN5053_ Microphone clavier IMPRES pour navigation quatre directions Microphone robuste avec audio avanc 3 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 188 Description Description Microphone pour pare-soleil fonction audio amliore Avant mobile (MMP), cble de programmation PMKN4010_ Cble de programmation MAP Tableau 5: Cbles Numro de pice RMN5054_ Numro de pice 3075336B07 3075336B10 HKN4137_ HKN4191_ HKN4192_ Description Cble de rechange pour microphone compact Cble de rechange pour microphone clavier ou microphone robuste Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 15 ampres

(1 25 watts) Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 3 m (10 pi), 20 ampres

(1 45 watts) Cble dalimentation vers la batterie, 6 m (20 pi), 20 ampres

(1 45 watts) Franais (Canada) Numro de pice HKN6184_ PMKN4016_ PMKN4018_ PMKN4033_ PMKN4034_ Cble de programmation et de test MAP Cble universel de connecteur daccessoire arrire pour dispositif sans fil et rpteur Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 3 m (10 pi) Cble de rallonge pour microphone sans fil, 6 m (20 pi) PMKN4143_ Cble pour support distant, 3 m PMKN4144_ Cble pour support distant, 5 m RKN4136_ Cble de dtection dallumage 189 Franais (Canada) Tableau 6: Accessoires de bureau Tableau 7: Trousses de montage Numro de pice Description Numro de pice Description 3060665A04 Cordon dalimentation .-U. AY000269A01_ 4 Protecteur dcran, clair (paquet dune seule unit) GKN6266_ GLN7318_ GPN6145_ HPN4007_ HPN4011_ PMLN5072_ RSN4005_ Cble dalimentation radio pour GPN6145 Support de bureau sans haut-

parleur Bloc dalimentation dcoupage, marqu CE (modles de 1 25 W) Bloc dalimentation et cble Bloc dalimentation 14 volts, 15 ampres UNI 117/240 V c.a., prise R.-U. Trousse pour connecteur daccessoire arrire Plateau de bureau avec haut-

parleur RLN6465_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6469_ PMLN6402_ PMLN6403_ Matriel de fixation pour tableau de bord (DIN) Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil bas Matriel de fixation par tourillons profil haut Ensemble de fixation du verrouillage par tourillons Sac de fixation par tourillons profil bas Interface dmetteur-rcepteur montage distance Interface de tte de commande de montage distance 4 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 190 Franais (Canada) Tableau 8: Accessoires divers Description Numro de pice DQT1 Protection contre les surtensions, trousse de montage sur tour Description Numro de pice PMLN7052_5 Trousse de surveillance un fil pour missions critiques avec tube translucide DSISB50LNC2 MA Protection contre les surtensions, cloison de protecteur coaxial RLN5926_ RLN5929_ Bouton PTT Interrupteur durgence au pied HKN9557_ HLN9073_ HLN9414_ PMKN4072_ PMKN4070_ Adaptateur dantenne PL259/Mini-

U, cble de 2,4 m (8 pi) Pince de suspension pour microphone (tous les microphones) Pince de suspension universelle pour microphone (tous les microphones) Adaptateur mobile MMP IMPRES, sans PC Adaptateur mobile MAP IMPRES, sans PC PMLN5718_S Carte doption gnrique Tableau 9: Haut-parleurs Description Numro de pice RSN4002_ RSN4003_ RSN4004_ Haut-parleur externe de 13 W Haut-parleur externe de 7,5 W Haut-parleur externe de 5 W 5 Votre radio est compatible avec les accessoires rpertoris ici. Pour en savoir davantage ce sujet, communiquez avec le dtaillant. 191 Franais (Canada) Utilisation de la radio maritime dans la gamme de frquence VHF Affectations de canaux spciaux Canal durgence Si vous tes expos un danger grave et imminent en mer et avez besoin dune aide durgence, utilisez le canal VHF 16 pour lancer un appel de dtresse aux navires qui se trouvent proximit et la Garde ctire des tats-

Unis. Transmettez les renseignements suivants dans cet ordre :

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 ICI _____________________, INDICATIF DAPPEL __________. Dites le nom du navire en dtresse trois fois, suivi de lindicatif dappel ou dune autre identification du navire, en lnonant trois fois. 3 Rptez MAYDAY et le nom du navire. 4 NOTRE POSITION EST _______________________. Indiquez la position du navire en dtresse en ajoutant tout renseignement pouvant aider les rpondants vous localiser, p. ex :

la latitude et la longitude;

le relvement (dites si vous utilisez le nord gographique ou magntique);

votre distance par rapport un point de repre connu;

la route, la vitesse ou la destination du navire. 5 noncez la nature de la situation de dtresse. 6 Prcisez laide dont vous avez besoin. 7 Indiquez le nombre de personnes bord du navire et le nombre de personnes ncessitant une assistance mdicale, le cas chant. 8 Mentionnez toute autre information pouvant tre utile aux rpondants, comme le type de navire, sa longueur ou son tonnage, la couleur de la coque, etc. 9 TERMIN. 10 Attendez une rponse. 11 Si vous ne recevez pas de rponse immdiate, restez prs de la radio et rptez votre transmission intervalles jusqu ce que lon vous rponde. Soyez prt suivre les instructions qui vous seront donnes. 192 Canal dappel non commercial Pour transmettre des messages non commerciaux, comme des rapports de pche, des arrangements de rendez-vous, des planifications de rparation ou des informations daccostage, utilisez le canal VHF 9. Exigences relatives la frquence de fonctionnement Toute radio conue pour la navigation doit tre conforme la section 80 des rglements de la Commission fdrale des communications (FCC), comme suit :

sur les navires soumis la section II du titre III de la Loi sur les communications (Communications Act) des tats-Unis, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner sur la frquence 156,800 MHz;

sur les navires soumis la Convention de scurit, la radio doit pouvoir fonctionner :

- en mode simplex sur le poste du navire qui transmet les frquences prcises sur la bande de frquences 156,025 -157,425 MHz, et

- en mode semi-duplex sur les deux canaux de frquence prciss dans le tableau ci-dessous. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82 et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements sur les exigences de fonctionnement des Services maritimes, consultez la version intgrale de la section 80 des rglements de la FCC ou communiquez avec la Garde ctire amricaine. Tableau 10: Liste des canaux de la bande maritime VHF Numro de canal Frquence (MHz) Transmission Rception 1 2

4 5 6 7 8 156,050 156,100 156,150 156,200 156,250 156,300 156,350 156,400 160,650 160,700 160,750 160,800 160,850 160,950 193 Franais (Canada) 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20 22

24 25 26 194 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 156,900 156,950 157,000 157,050 157,100 157,150 157,200 157,250 157,300 156,450 156,500 156,550 156,600 156,650 156,700 156,750 156,800 156,850 161,500 161,550 161,600 161,650 161,700 161,750 161,800 161,850 161,900 27 28 60

62 63

65 66 68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 67**

157,350 157,400 156,025 156,075 156,125 156,175 156,225 156,275 156,325 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,625 156,675 156,725

161,950 162,000 160,625 160,675 160,725 160,775 160,825 160,875 160,925 156,375 156,425 156,475 156,575 156,675 156,725

77**

78 79 80

84 85 86 87 88 156,875 156,925 156,975 157,025 157,075 157,125 157,175 157,225 157,275 157,325 157,375 157,425 161,525 161,575 161,625 161,675 161,725 161,775 161,825 161,875 161,925 161,975 162,025 AVIS:

*Les canaux simplex 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82 et 83 ne peuvent tre utiliss lgalement par le grand public dans les eaux amricaines.

**Faible puissance (1 W) seulement.

***Bande de garde. Franais (Canada) AVIS:

Le symbole dans la colonne Rception indique quil sagit dun canal de transmission seulement. Dclaration de conformit pour lutilisation des frquences de dtresse et de scurit L'quipement radio n'utilise pas de modulation autre que la modulation adopte l'chelle internationale pour l'usage en mer sur les frquences de dtresse et de scurit spcifies dans la section 7.3 du CNR-182. Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes Tableau 11: Paramtres techniques dinterface avec des sources de donnes externes RS232 18 V USB 3,6 V SB9600 5 V Tension d'entre 195 Franais (Canada) RS232 USB SB9600 28 kbit/s 12 Mbit/s 9,6 kbit/s 5000 ohms 90 ohms 120 ohms

(tension crte crte) Dbit binaire maximum Impdanc e 196 Franais (Canada) Garantie limite PRODUITS DE COMMUNICATIONS MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS I. PROTECTION ASSURE PAR LA PRSENTE GARANTIE ET DURE DE CELLE-CI :

Motorola Solutions Inc. ( Motorola Solutions ) garantit les produits de tlcommunications identifis ci-dessous (le Produit ) fabriqus par Motorola Solutions contre tout dfaut de matriel ou de fabrication dans des conditions normales dutilisation et dentretien, pour une priode suivant la date dachat, tel quil est stipul ci-dessous :

Radios mobiles Deux (2) ans Accessoires des produits Un (1) an sa discrtion, Motorola Solutions rparera sans frais le produit (avec des pices neuves ou remises neuf), le remplacera (par un produit neuf ou remis neuf) ou remboursera le prix dachat du produit durant la priode de garantie, condition que le produit soit retourn au lieu dachat conformment aux modalits de la prsente garantie. Les pices et les cartes remplaces sont garanties pour le reste de la priode de garantie dorigine. Toute pice remplace du produit devient la proprit de Motorola Solutions. Cette garantie limite expresse est accorde par Motorola Solutions lacheteur ou lutilisateur final dorigine seulement, et ne peut tre ni transfre ni cde un tiers. La prsente garantie constitue la garantie complte du produit fabriqu par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions nassume aucune obligation ni responsabilit pour quelque ajout ou modification la prsente garantie, moins dtre en prsence dun document crit sign par un cadre suprieur de Motorola Solutions. Sauf dans le cadre dune entente distincte conclue entre Motorola Solutions et lacheteur ou lutilisateur final dorigine, Motorola Solutions ne garantit pas linstallation, lentretien, ni la rparation du produit. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit lgard de tout quipement ou accessoire qui nest pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est branch sur le produit ou utilis conjointement avec celui-ci, ainsi qu lgard du fonctionnement du produit utilis conjointement 197 Franais (Canada) avec tout quipement ou accessoire, et tous les quipements de cette nature sont expressment exclus de la prsente garantie. Compte tenu du caractre unique de chaque systme pouvant utiliser le produit, Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit lgard de la porte, de la diffusion et du fonctionnement du systme. PERTES COMMERCIALES, DES PERTES DE PROFIT OU D'CONOMIES, NI RELATIVEMENT TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE ACCESSOIRE, SPCIAL OU INDIRECT RSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'INCAPACIT D'UTILISER CE PRODUIT. II. CONDITIONS GNRALES La prsente garantie prcise l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions l'gard du produit. la discrtion de Motorola Solutions, la rparation du produit, son remplacement ou le remboursement de son prix d'achat constituent le seul recours. CETTE GARANTIE REMPLACE TOUTE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPRESSE. TOUTES LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES, COMPRENANT, SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALIT MARCHANDE ET D'ADAPTATION UN USAGE PARTICULIER, SONT LIMITES LA PRIODE DFINIE PAR CETTE GARANTIE LIMITE. DANS LA MESURE AUTORISE PAR LA LOI, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS NE POURRA EN AUCUN CAS TRE TENUE RESPONSABLE DE DOMMAGES DONT LA VALEUR DPASSE LE PRIX D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT, NI L'GARD DES PERTES DE JOUISSANCE, DES PERTES DE TEMPS, DES DRANGEMENTS, DES 198 III. DROITS PRVUS PAR LES LOIS PROVINCIALES :

CERTAINES PROVINCES NE PERMETTENT AUCUNE EXCLUSION NI LIMITATION QUANT AUX DOMMAGES CONSCUTIFS OU INDIRECTS, NI AUCUNE LIMITE SUR LA DURE D'UNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, DE SORTE QUE LES LIMITES OU EXCLUSIONS MENTIONNES PLUS HAUT PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER DANS VOTRE CAS. La prsente garantie confre des droits juridiques prcis et il est possible que vous jouissiez d'autres droits, selon votre province de rsidence. IV. ENTRETIEN COUVERT PAR LA GARANTIE Pour que la rparation soit couverte par la garantie, vous devez fournir une preuve d'achat (portant la date d'achat et le numro de srie du Produit). De plus, vous devez livrer ou expdier le Produit, en payant d'avance les frais de transport et d'assurance, un centre de service homologu. Les rparations sous garantie seront effectues par Motorola Solutions l'un de ses centres de service autoriss. Dans certains cas, il est plus facile d'obtenir les rparations couvertes par la garantie en s'adressant d'abord l'entreprise qui vous a vendu le produit (p. ex. le dtaillant ou votre fournisseur de services de tlcommunication). Vous pouvez galement appeler Motorola Solutions au numro 1 800 927-2744. V. CE QUI NEST PAS COUVERT PAR CETTE GARANTIE 1 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant de l'utilisation du Produit autrement que dans des conditions normales et habituelles. 2 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant d'une mauvaise utilisation, d'un accident, de la ngligence ou de l'exposition des liquides. 3 Les dfectuosits et dommages rsultant de mthodes d'essai, de fonctionnement, d'entretien, d'installation, de modification ou de rglage non adquates. Franais (Canada) 4 Les bris et dommages des antennes, sauf si cela est caus directement par un dfaut de fabrication ou de main-d'uvre. 5 Un Produit soumis des modifications, des rparations ou un dmontage non autoriss (y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'ajout au Produit d'un quipement quelconque non fourni par Motorola Solutions) et qui ont un effet ngatif sur le rendement du Produit ou qui nuisent l'inspection ou l'essai normal sous garantie du Produit par Motorola Solutions en cas de rclamation. 6 Tout produit dont le numro de srie a t supprim ou rendu illisible. 7 Batteries rechargeables si :

une protection tanche du botier protgeant les cellules de la batterie a t rompue ou prsente des signes d'altration;

le dommage ou la dfectuosit sont provoqus par la charge ou l'utilisation de la batterie dans un quipement ou avec un service autres que ceux qui sont spcifis pour le Produit. 8 Frais de transport vers l'atelier de rparation. 9 Tout produit qui, cause de modifications illgales ou interdites apportes au logiciel ou au micrologiciel du Produit, ne fonctionne pas conformment aux 199 Franais (Canada) spcifications nonces par Motorola Solutions ou sur l'tiquette de conformit de la FCC en vigueur pour le Produit lorsque le Produit a t initialement distribu par Motorola Solutions. 10 Les gratignures et autres dommages superficiels ne nuisant pas au fonctionnement du Produit. 11 L'usure et le vieillissement normaux et habituels. VI. DISPOSITIONS RELATIVES AUX BREVETS ET AUX LOGICIELS Motorola Solutions dfendra ses frais toute poursuite mene en justice contre l'acheteur dans la mesure o la poursuite revendique que le produit ou certaines de ses pices enfreignent un brevet des tats-Unis, et Motorola Solutions paiera les frais et dommages finalement accords au dtriment de l'acheteur dans toute poursuite judiciaire attribuable une quelconque revendication de cette nature, une telle dfense et un tel paiement tant soumis aux conditions suivantes :

1 Motorola Solutions doit tre rapidement notifie, par crit, d'une telle rclamation par l'acheteur;

200 2 Motorola Solutions matrisera entirement la dfense de l'action juridique et toutes les ngociations d'accord ou de compromis;

3 Si le produit ou les pices font ou, de l'avis de Motorola Solutions, pourraient faire l'objet d'une poursuite pour contrefaon d'un brevet amricain ou canadien, l'acheteur accordera le droit Motorola Solutions, la discrtion et aux frais de cette dernire, soit de procurer l'acheteur le droit de continuer d'utiliser le produit ou les pices, soit de remplacer ou de modifier ces derniers de manire ce qu'ils n'enfreignent plus le brevet, soit d'accorder l'acheteur un crdit quivalent la valeur dprcie du produit ou des pices et d'accepter de reprendre ceux-ci. La dprciation reprsentera un montant gal pour chaque anne de dure de vie utile du produit ou des pices, tel que dtermin par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage de toute responsabilit l'gard de toute poursuite pour contrefaon de brevet fonde sur une adaptation du produit ou des pices mentionnes dans la prsente un logiciel, un appareil ou un quipement non fourni par Motorola Solutions. Motorola Solutions se dgage galement de toute responsabilit l'gard de tout quipement ou logiciel qui n'est pas fourni par Motorola Solutions et qui est rattach au produit ou utilis conjointement avec ce dernier. Ce qui prcde nonce l'entire responsabilit de Motorola Solutions pour la contrefaon de brevets relative au produit ou toute pice de ce dernier. Les lois au Canada, aux tats-Unis et dans d'autres pays protgent au nom de Motorola Solutions certains droits exclusifs visant les logiciels, comme ceux de reproduire des copies et de distribuer des copies desdits logiciels Motorola Solutions. Les logiciels Motorola Solutions ne peuvent tre utiliss qu'avec les produits l'intrieur desquels ils taient installs l'origine. Il est interdit de remplacer, de copier, de distribuer, de modifier d'aucune faon et d'utiliser le logiciel l'intrieur du produit en vue de fabriquer un quelconque produit driv. Aucune autre utilisation, y compris, sans s'y limiter, l'altration, la modification, la reproduction, la distribution ou l'ingnierie rebours, d'un quelconque logiciel Motorola Solutions n'est permise. Aucune licence n'est accorde pour infrence, estoppel ou autre en vertu des droits de brevets ou des droits d'auteur de Motorola Solutions ou de tiers. VII. LOI APPLICABLE Cette garantie est rgie par les lois de l'tat de l'Illinois, .-

U. Franais (Canada) 201 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo Motorola Solutions, Inc. 500 W Monroe Street Chicago, IL 60661 U.S.A. Printed in U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2017 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved.

 

 

en-US RF Energy Exposure Training and Product Safety Information for Mobile Two-Way Radios installed in Vehicles or as Fixed Site Control Stations fr-CA Formation sur lexposition aux RF et information sur la scurit du produit pour radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes dans des vhicules ou comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes es-LA pt-BR Capacitacin sobre la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia e informacin de proteccin del producto para radios de dos vas mviles instalados en vehculos o como estaciones de control fijas Treinamento sobre a Exposio Energia de RF e Informaes de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis Bidirecionais Instalados em Veculos ou como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo https://learning.motorolasolutions.com/User_Documentation English Caution Before using this radio, read this booklet which contains important operating instructions. For information on product details, brochures, user manuals and approved accessories. Please refer to www.motorolasolutions.com. Compliance with RF Exposure Standards National and international regulations require manufacturers to comply with the RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed. Your Motorola Solutions two-way radio is designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with all applicable national and international regulations for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, applicable regulations may require users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information and Operational Instructions for Occupational Use Notice: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions where users are aware of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet the requirements in national and international regulations. This radio device is not authorized for general population, consumer use. For more information on what RF energy exposure is, and how to control your exposure to ensure compliance with established RF exposure limits, consult the following websites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html For additional user training information on exposure requirements, consult the following websites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 English RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines To control exposure to yourself and others, and to ensure compliance with the relevant RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following guidelines:

Do not remove any of the RF Exposure Labels if present from this device or its related accessories. Attach these instructions to the device when you transfer it to other users. Do not use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. Operating Instructions Transmit no more than 50% of the time. To transmit (talk), press the Push-To-

Talk (PTT) button. To receive calls, release the PTT button. Transmitting more than 50% of the time may cause RF exposure compliance requirements to be exceeded. Transmit only when people (bystanders) outside the vehicle are at least at the recommended minimum lateral distance (as shown in Tables 1 and 2) away from the vehicle body. This separation will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed (according to the installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the relevant RF exposure limits. To ensure continued compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, use only Motorola Solutions approved, supplied or replacement antennas, batteries, and accessories. For a list of Motorola Solutions approved accessories please refer to your user manual or visit www.motorolasolutions.com Table 1 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed single-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for single-band radios, depend on the radio rated power. Table 1: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Single-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Single-Band Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Notice) Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body Less than 7 W 7 to 14 W 15 to 39 W 40 to 110 W 8 in. (20 cm) 1 ft (30 cm) 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) 2 English Notice: If you are not sure of the rated power of your single-band radio, contact your Motorola Solutions representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you cannot determine the rated power, then assure 3 ft (90 cm) separation for bystanders from the body of the vehicle. Table 2 lists the recommended lateral distance for bystanders from the body of a vehicle (For example, truck, van, car, motorcycle) equipped with an approved, properly installed multi-band mobile radio and associated antenna(s). These lateral distances, for multi-band radios, depend on whether the radio is installed on a motorcycle, or on other kinds of vehicles. Table 2: Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Multi-Band Mobile Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Type of Vehicle Motorcycle Other vehicles Minimum Lateral Distance of By-

standers from Vehicle Body 2 ft (60 cm) 3 ft (90 cm) Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines Make sure to follow the antenna installation guidelines that are provided in this mobile radio installation manual. Use only Motorola Solutions approved supplied antenna, or a Motorola Solutions approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed and operated at a fixed location, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits. The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure compliance with RF exposure limits. 3 English Vehicles To avoid possible interference between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission control modules, your mobile radio should be installed only by an experienced installer, using the following precautions when installing the radio:

1 Refer to the manufacturer instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2 Before installing the radio, determine the location of the vehicle electronic control modules and their harnesses within the vehicle. 3 Route all radio wiring, including the antenna cable, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated harnesses. Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. Operational Warnings The following explains the operational warnings:

For Vehicle With Air Bags Warning:

Refer to vehicle manufacturers manual prior to installation of electronic equipment to avoid interference with air bag wiring. DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Warning:

Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a potentially explosive atmosphere could result in a serious injury or death. You should only 4 English use a certified Intrinsically Safe radio in potentially explosive atmospheres. Explosive atmospheres refer to hazard classified locations that may contain hazardous gas, vapors, dusts, such as fueling areas below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transferor storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere unless it is a radio type specifically certified for use in hazardous location areas. DO NOT remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas, or remove or install antennas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas Warning: To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Batteries rating. If your mobile radio is equipped with a primary or backup battery, you must follow these instructions:

Charge your battery using the approved Motorola Solutions charger. Use the battery in accordance with its water and/or dust Ingress Protection (IP) Do not discard your battery into a fire. Do not replace the battery in any area labeled "Hazardous Atmosphere". Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt to change the Do not dry a wet or damp battery with an appliance or heat source, such as a form of your battery. hair dryer or microwave oven. Do not allow conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains to touch exposed battery terminals. Do not dispose of batteries with household waste. 5 English European Union(EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment

(WEEE) Directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. For Brazil, information for disposal and recycling of electronic waste, batteries, and packaging, please call: 0800168272. 6 Franais (Canada) Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser cette radio, lisez cette brochure qui contient d'importantes consignes d'utilisation. Pour obtenir plus dinformation sur les dtails du produit, les brochures, les manuels et les accessoires approuvs, Veuillez vous reporter www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformit aux normes sur l'exposition aux radiofrquences Les rglementations nationales et internationales noncent que les fabricants de radios bidirectionnelles portatives doivent sassurer que celles-ci sont conformes aux limites dexposition l'nergie RF avant de les commercialiser. Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola Solutions a t conue, fabrique et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes nationales et internationales lies l'exposition des tres humains l'nergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, la rglementation en vigueur exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de l'exposition et qu'ils soient capables de contrler le niveau d'exposition auquel ils se soumettent afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Information de sensibilisation et de gestion de l'exposition l'nergie RF, et consignes pour l'utilisation professionnelle Avis: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de l'exposition l'nergie RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par les rglements nationaux et internationaux. Ce dispositif radio n'est pas autoris pour l'utilisation grand public par des consommateurs ordinaires. Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce qu'est l'nergie RF et sur les moyens de contrle prendre afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire d'exposition aux radiofrquences :

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Pour plus de renseignements sur la formation des utilisateurs relativement aux limites d'exposition, consultez les sites suivants :

1 Franais (Canada) https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Directives de conformit et de contrle de l'exposition aux RF Pour contrler votre exposition ainsi que celle des autres personnes et garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, observez toujours les consignes suivantes :

Ne pas retirer les tiquettes relatives l'exposition aux RF qui sont apposes sur cet appareil ou sur ses accessoires. Joignez ces directives l'appareil lorsque vous le transfrez d'autres utilisateurs. N'utilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites aux prsentes ne sont pas runies. Consignes dutilisation Ne pas mettre plus de 50 % du temps. Pour transmettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton Push-to-talk (PTT). Pour recevoir les appels, relchez le bouton PTT. Le fait de transmettre plus de 50 % du temps peut entraner le dpassement de la limite dexposition normalise au rayonnement RF. Transmettez seulement lorsque les personnes (les passants) lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (comme illustr dans les tableaux 1 et 2) de la carrosserie du vhicule. Cet cart constitue une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences applicables en matire dexposition lnergie RF. Pour assurer la conformit continue avec les limites d'exposition aux RF applicables, utilisez uniquement les antennes, les batteries et les accessoires de remplacement ou fournis et approuvs par Motorola Solutions. Pour obtenir une liste des accessoires approuvs par Motorola Solutions, veuillez consulter votre manuel ou visitez le site www.motorolasolutions.com Le Tableau 1 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio monobande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio monobande, dpendent de la puissance nominale de la radio. 2 Franais (Canada) Tableau 1: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile monobande (voir avis) Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Moins de 7 W 7 14 W 15 39 W 40 110 W 20 cm (8 po) 30 cm (1 pi) 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Avis: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio monobande, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola Solutions et indiquez-lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de la radio. Si vous ne pouvez pas dterminer la puissance nominale, conservez une distance de sparation de 90 cm (3 pi) entre les passants et la carrosserie du vhicule. Le Tableau 2 indique la distance latrale recommande entre les passants et la carrosserie dun vhicule (par exemple, un camion, une fourgonnette, une voiture, une moto) dot dune radio multibande et son(ses) antenne(s) approuves et convenablement installes. Ces distances latrales, dans le cas dune radio multibande, varient selon que la radio est installe sur une moto ou sur dautres types de vhicules. Tableau 2: Puissance nominale de la radio mobile multibande installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule Type de vhicule Motocyclette Autres vhicules Distance latrale minimale des passants par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule 60 cm (2 pi) 90 cm (3 pi) Consignes d'installation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Veillez suivre les directives d'installation de l'antenne qui sont fournies dans le manuel d'installation de cette radio mobile. 3 Franais (Canada) Utilisez uniquement l'antenne agre fournie par Motorola Solutions ou une antenne de rechange agre par Motorola Solutions. L'utilisation d'antennes ou d'accessoires non agrs, ainsi que les modifications non agres peuvent endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire d'nergie de RF. Directives et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes Si de l'quipement de radio mobile est install et utilis dans un emplacement fixe, l'installation de l'antenne doit satisfaire aux exigences suivantes afin d'assurer un rendement optimal et la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. L'antenne devrait tre monte l'extrieur de l'difice sur le toit ou sur une tour, si possible. Comme pour toutes les installations d'antennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir l'emplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Les actions telles que les mesures de propagation, la signalisation et les restrictions d'accs l'emplacement peuvent tre ncessaires afin de garantir le respect des limites d'exposition aux radiofrquences. Vhicules Afin d'viter une ventuelle interfrence entre la radio mettrice et l'un des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule, comme le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou les modules de contrle de la transmission, il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser l'installation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1 Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour l'installation de la radio. 2 Avant d'installer la radio, dterminez l'emplacement des modules de commande lectronique du vhicule et leurs points d'ancrage lintrieur de celui-ci. 3 Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris le cble de l'antenne, le plus loin possible des units de commande lectronique et de leurs points dancrage. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC) Cet appareil est conforme la partie 15 des rglements de la FCC daprs les conditions suivantes : s Cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible. Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable. 4 Franais (Canada) Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans lautorisation explicite de Motorola Solutions peut annuler lautorisation dutiliser cet appareil. Avertissements de fonctionnement Le tableau suivant explique les avertissements de fonctionnement :

Pour vhicules quips de coussins gonflables Atmosphres potentiellement explosives Avertissement:

Consultez le manuel du fabricant du vhicule avant d'installer un appareil lectronique, afin d'viter toute interfrence avec le cblage des coussins gonflables. NE MONTEZ PAS ET NE PLACEZ PAS de radio mobile dans la zone situe au-dessus d'un coussin gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Un coussin gonflable de scurit se dploie avec beaucoup de force. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac, lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors d'occasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers du vhicule. Avertissement:

L'utilisation d'une radio autre qu'une radio scurit intrinsque dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive est susceptible d'entraner des blessures graves ou la mort. Vous ne devez pas utiliser de radio scurit intrinsque agre dans des atmosphres potentiellement explosives. On retrouve des atmosphres explosives dans les lieux classs comme tant dangereux en raison de la prsence de gaz, de vapeurs et de poussires reprsentant un danger, par exemple, les zones d'avitaillement en carburant dans des cales de bateau, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques, et les zones dans lesquelles l'air est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce n'est pas toujours le cas. teignez la radio avant d'accder un lieu prsentant une atmosphre potentiellement explosive, moins qu'il s'agisse d'un type de radio certifi spcifiquement pour une utilisation dans des zones dangereuses. VITEZ d'enlever, d'installer ou de charger les batteries, ou d'enlever ou d'installer des antennes dans de tels lieux. Les tincelles dans des 5 Franais (Canada) atmosphres potentiellement explosives peuvent provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles, voire la mort. Zone de dynamitage et dtonateurs Avertissement: teignez la radio lorsque vous vous trouvez proximit de dtonateurs lectriques ou dans une zone de dynamitage afin dviter de dclencher une explosion, ou lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un endroit o il est indiqu : teindre les radios bidirectionnelles . Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. Batteries Si votre radio mobile est dote dune batterie principale ou de secours, vous devez suivre ces instructions :

Chargez votre batterie l'aide du chargeur approuv par Motorola Solutions. Utilisez la batterie conformment son indice de protection (IP) contre l'eau et la Ne jetez pas votre batterie au feu. Ne remplacez pas la batterie dans un endroit qui porte la mention atmosphre Veillez ne pas dmonter, craser, percer, dcouper ou autrement modifier la poussire. dangereuse . forme de votre batterie. Ne faites pas scher une batterie mouille ou humide avec un appareil lectrique ou une source de chaleur, comme un schoir cheveux ou un four micro-

ondes. Ne permettez pas des matriaux conducteurs, comme des bijoux, des cls ou des mailles de chane dentrer en contact avec les bornes de la batterie. Ne jetez pas les batteries avec les ordures domestiques. Directive sur la mise au rebut des quipements lectriques et lectroniques de lUnion europenne (UE) (WEEE) La directive WEEE de lUnion europenne exige que les produits (ou leur emballage, dans certains cas) vendus dans les pays de lUE portent ltiquette de la poubelle barre. Comme le dfinit la directive WEEE, cette tiquette de poubelle barre signifie que les clients et les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE ne doivent pas jeter les quipements lectriques et lectroniques ou leurs accessoires dans les ordures domestiques. Les clients ou les utilisateurs finaux dans les pays de lUE doivent communiquer avec le reprsentant ou le centre de service de leur 6 fournisseur dquipement pour obtenir des renseignements sur le systme de collecte des dchets de leur pays. Franais (Canada) Pour obtenir des renseignements sur l'limination et le recyclage des dchets lectroniques, des batteries et des emballages pour le Brsil, veuillez appeler :

0800168272. 7 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Precaucin Antes de usar este radio, lea el folleto que contiene instrucciones de funcionamiento importantes. Para obtener informacin sobre los detalles del producto, folletos, manuales de usuario y accesorios aprobados. consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidad con las normas de exposicin a radiofrecuencia Las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales obligan a que los fabricantes cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia para radios mviles de dos vas antes de que se puedan comercializar. El radio de dos vas de Motorola Solutions est diseado, fabricado y probado para cumplir con todas las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales correspondientes en materia de exposicin humana a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Cuando los radios de dos vas se usan para trabajar, las regulaciones correspondientes podran exigir que los usuarios conozcan y controlen su nivel de exposicin para cumplir con los requisitos de uso profesional. Conocimiento de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia, informacin de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para uso ocupacional Nota: Este radio est diseado para usarse en condiciones controladas o profesionales, donde los usuarios tengan pleno conocimiento de su exposicin y puedan controlarla con el fin de cumplir con los requisitos de las regulaciones nacionales e internacionales. Este dispositivo de radio no est autorizado para el uso particular de la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms informacin sobre el significado de la exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia y cmo controlar la exposicin con el fin de asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias establecidos, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Para obtener informacin adicional de la capacitacin de los usuarios sobre los requisitos de exposicin, consulte los siguientes sitios web:

1 Espaol (Latinoamrica) https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

Cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia y pautas de control Para controlar el nivel de exposicin a la que usted y otros estn expuestos y garantizar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencias correspondientes, respete siempre las siguientes pautas:

No retire ninguna de las etiquetas de exposicin a radiofrecuencias, si las hubiere, de este dispositivo o sus accesorios respectivos. Adjunte estas instrucciones al dispositivo cuando se lo transfiera a otros usuarios. No utilice este dispositivo si no se cumple con los requisitos de funcionamiento descritos en este documento. Instrucciones de funcionamiento No transmita ms de un 50 % del tiempo. Para transmitir (hablar), presione el botn Push to Talk (PTT). Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Una transmisin superior al 50 % del tiempo de uso podra provocar que se superen los requisitos de cumplimiento de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Realice transmisiones solo cuando las personas (transentes) que estn fuera del vehculo se encuentren, por lo menos, a la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (segn se indica en las Tablas 1 y 2) del vehculo. Con esta separacin se garantiza que haya una distancia suficiente entre una antena instalada correctamente en el exterior (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes. Para garantizar el cumplimiento continuo de los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia correspondientes, utilice solamente las antenas, las bateras y los accesorios de repuesto suministrados o aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Para obtener una lista de los accesorios aprobados por Motorola Solutions, consulte el manual del usuario o visite www.motorolasolutions.com. En la Tabla 1 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil de banda nica y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios de banda nica, dependen de la potencia nominal del radio. 2 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Tabla 1: Potencia nominal del radio mvil de banda nica instalada en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Potencia nominal de radio mvil de banda nica (consulte Aviso) Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo Menor que 7 W De 7 a 14 W De 15 a 39 W De 40 a 110 W 8 pulg. (20 cm) 1 pie (30 cm) 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Nota: Si no est seguro de la potencia nominal del radio de banda nica, contctese con un representante, distribuidor o proveedor de Motorola Solutions e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que figura en la etiqueta. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal, asegrese de establecer una separacin de 3 pies (90 cm) entre los transentes y el vehculo. En la Tabla 2 se indica la distancia lateral recomendada para transentes desde un vehculo (por ejemplo, un camin, un furgn, un automvil, una motocicleta, etc.) equipado con un radio mvil multibanda y su(s) respectiva(s) antena(s), aprobados e instalados apropiadamente. Estas distancias laterales, para radios multibanda, dependen de si el radio est instalado en una motocicleta o en otro tipo de vehculos. Tabla 2: Potencia nominal del radio mvil multibanda instalado en el vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada desde el vehculo Tipo de vehculo Motocicleta Otros vehculos Distancia lateral mnima para transentes desde el vehculo 2 pies (60 cm) 3 pies (90 cm) Pautas de instalacin de la antena mvil Asegrese de seguir las pautas de instalacin de la antena incluidas en el manual de instalacin de este radio mvil. Use nicamente antenas suministradas y aprobadas por Motorola Solutions o una antena de repuesto aprobada por Motorola Solutions. Las antenas, las modificaciones o los agregados no autorizados podran daar el radio y causar el incumplimiento con los estndares de seguridad de RF. 3 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Pautas de control e instrucciones de funcionamiento para radios mviles de dos vas instalados en estaciones de control fijas Si el equipo de radio mvil se instala y utiliza en una ubicacin fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos para garantizar el rendimiento ptimo y el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a energa de radiofrecuencia correspondientes. La antena debe instalarse en el exterior de los edificios, en el techo o en una torre de ser posible. Al igual que en todas las instalaciones de antena en sitios fijos, la administracin del sitio, conforme a los requisitos normativos correspondientes, es responsabilidad del titular de la licencia. Es posible que sea necesario realizar acciones como inspeccionar el sitio, instalar sistemas de sealizacin y restricciones de acceso al sitio para garantizar el cumplimiento con los lmites de exposicin a radiofrecuencia. Vehculos Para evitar posibles interferencias entre el transmisor del radio y cualquier mdulo de control electrnico de un vehculo, como sistemas de frenado antibloqueo, motor o mdulos de control de transmisin, la instalacin del radio mvil debe ser responsabilidad de una sola persona con experiencia y que tome las siguientes precauciones durante la instalacin:

1 Consulte las pautas del fabricante u otros boletines tcnicos para ver las recomendaciones a la hora de instalar el radio. 2 Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y el cableado dentro del vehculo. 3 Enrute todo el cableado del radio, incluido el cable de la antena, lo ms alejado posible de las unidades de control electrnicas y el cableado asociado. Nota para los usuarios (FCC) Este dispositivo cumple con la Parte 15 de las normas de la FCC segn las siguientes condiciones:

Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencia nociva. Este dispositivo debe aceptar toda interferencia recibida, incluida aquella interferencia que pudiera causar un funcionamiento no deseado. Los cambios o las modificaciones que se realicen en este dispositivo, no aprobados expresamente por Motorola Solutions, podran anular el permiso del usuario de operar este equipo. 4 Espaol (Latinoamrica) Advertencias de funcionamiento A continuacin, se explican las advertencias de funcionamiento:

Para vehculos con bolsas de aire Atmsferas potencialmente explosivas Advertencia:

Consulte el manual del fabricante del vehculo antes de instalar equipos electrnicos para evitar la interferencia con el cableado de las bolsas de aire. NO instale ni ubique el radio mvil en el rea que se encuentra encima de la bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de esta. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se pone un radio en la zona de despliegue de la bolsa de aire y esta se infla, es posible que el radio salga disparado con gran fuerza y cause lesiones graves a los ocupantes del vehculo. Advertencia:

El uso de un radio que no sea intrnsecamente seguro en una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva puede provocar lesiones graves o la muerte. En atmsferas potencialmente explosivas, solo debe utilizar un radio que sea intrnsecamente seguro certificado. El trmino atmsferas explosivas se refiere a lugares clasificados como peligrosos en los que podra haber gases, vapores o polvos peligrosos, como reas con combustibles bajo las cubiertas de los botes o instalaciones de almacenamiento o transferencia de qumicos, y reas en que el aire contenga productos qumicos o partculas, como material granulado, polvo o polvo metlico. A menudo, en las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. Apague el radio antes de ingresar en cualquier rea que posea una atmsfera potencialmente explosiva, a menos que se trate de un tipo de radio certificado especficamente para usar en zonas de ubicaciones peligrosas. NO retire, instale ni cargue bateras, ni tampoco retire o instale antenas en dichas reas. Las chispas en ambientes potencialmente explosivos pueden desencadenar una explosin o un incendio, y ocasionar lesiones o incluso la muerte. 5 Espaol (Latinoamrica) reas de voladuras y explosivos Advertencia: Para evitar posibles interferencias en operaciones de voladuras, apague el radio cuando se encuentre cerca de zonas de voladuras elctricas, en un rea de explosivos o en reas donde se encuentre el siguiente aviso: Apague el radio de dos vas. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Bateras Si el radio mvil cuenta con una batera principal o de reserva, deber seguir estas instrucciones:

Cargue la batera con cargadores aprobados por Motorola Solutions. Utilice la batera de acuerdo con su clasificacin de proteccin de ingreso (IP) contra polvo y agua. No arroje la batera al fuego. No cambie la batera en un rea designada como Atmsfera peligrosa. No desarme, rompa, perfore, triture ni intente cambiar de ningn otro modo la forma de la batera. No intente secar una batera mojada o hmeda con un electrodomstico o una fuente de calor externa, como un secador de pelo o un horno microondas. No permita que materiales conductores como joyas, llaves o cadenas hagan contacto con los terminales expuestos de la batera. No bote las bateras en la basura domstica. Directiva de Residuos de Aparatos Elctricos y Electrnicos

(RAEE) de la Unin Europea (UE) La directiva de RAEE de la Unin Europea requiere que los productos que se venden en los pases de la UE tengan la etiqueta de un bote de residuos tachado sobre el producto (o en el paquete en algunos casos). Como se define en la Directiva de RAEE, esta etiqueta con un bote de basura tachado indica que los clientes y los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE no deben deshacerse de los equipos o accesorios elctricos y electrnicos con la basura domstica. Los clientes o los usuarios finales en los pases de la UE deben comunicarse con su representante distribuidor de equipos o el centro de servicio locales para obtener informacin sobre el sistema de recoleccin de residuos de su pas. Para Brasil, informacin de eliminacin y reciclaje de desechos electrnicos, bateras y embalajes, llame al: 0800168272. 6 Portugus (Brasil) Ateno Antes de usar o rdio, leia este folheto, que contm importantes instrues de operao. Para obter informaes sobre detalhes do produto, folhetos, manuais do usurio e acessrios aprovados. Consulte www.motorolasolutions.com. Conformidade com os Padres de Exposio RF Os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais exigem que os fabricantes estejam em conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF para rdios mveis bidirecionais antes de serem comercializados. O rdio bidirecional da Motorola Solutions foi projetado, fabricado e testado para estar em conformidade com todos os regulamentos nacionais e internacionais para exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofrequncia. Ao usar rdios bidirecionais por motivos de trabalho, os regulamentos aplicveis podem exigir que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes e aptos a controlar sua exposio de modo a atender s exigncias ocupacionais. Informaes sobre Conscientizao e Controle de Exposio Energia de RF e Instrues Operacionais para o Uso Ocupacional Comunicado: Este rdio destina-se ao uso em condies ocupacionais/

controladas, em que os usurios estejam cientes de sua exposio e possam exercer controle sobre ela, para atender aos requisitos nos regulamentos nacionais e internacionais. O uso do dispositivo de rdio pela populao em geral no autorizado. Para obter mais informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e como controlar a exposio para garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF estabelecidos, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.fcc.gov/

https://www.osha.gov/

https://osha.europa.eu/en http://www.who.int/peh-emf/project/en/

http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf11467.html http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.nsf/eng/sf01904.html Para informaes adicionais de treinamento sobre os requisitos de exposio, acesse os seguintes sites:

https://www.motorolasolutions.com/en_us/about/company-overview/corporate-

responsibility/governance-and-policies/wireless-communication-and-health-

faqs.html http://learning.motorolasolutions.com/

1 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle de Exposio RF Para controlar a exposio para si e demais pessoas, e garantir conformidade com os limites de exposio RF em questo, sempre siga estas diretrizes:

No remova as Etiquetas de Exposio RF, se houverem, do dispositivo ou acessrios relacionados. Anexe essas instrues ao dispositivo quando o transferir a outros usurios. No use este dispositivo se os requisitos operacionais descritos aqui no forem atendidos. Instrues Operacionais Transmita, no mximo, 50% do tempo. Para transmitir (falar), pressione o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk). Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT (Push-To-Talk, apertar para falar). Transmitir mais de 50% do tempo pode fazer que os requisitos de conformidade de exposio RF sejam excedidos. Transmita somente quando as pessoas (observadores) fora do veculo estiverem, pelo menos, distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme exibido na Tabela 1 e 2) da carroceria de um veculo. Essa separao garantir que haja distncia suficiente de uma antena externa adequadamente instalada

(de acordo com as instrues de instalao) para atender aos limites de exposio RF em questo. Para garantir constantemente a conformidade com os limites aplicveis de exposio RF, use apenas antenas, baterias e acessrios de reposio aprovados ou fornecidos pela Motorola Solutions. Para obter uma lista dos acessrios aprovados pela Motorola Solutions, consulte o manual do usurio ou acesse www.motorolasolutions.com A Tabela 1 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de banda nica aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncia laterais, para rdios de banda nica, dependem da potncia nominal do rdio. Tabela 1: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Banda nica Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada da Carroceria do Veculo Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo Inferior a 7 W 20 cm (8 polegadas) 2 Portugus (Brasil) Potncia Nominal do Rdio Mvel de Banda nica (consulte o Aviso) Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 7 a 14 W 15 a 39 W 40 a 110 W 30 cm (1 p) 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Comunicado: Se voc no tiver certeza da potncia nominal do seu rdio de banda nica, entre em contato com o representante ou o fornecedor da Motorola Solutions e fornea o nmero do modelo encontrado na etiqueta de modelo do rdio. Se voc no conseguir determinar a potncia nominal, garanta uma separao de 90 cm (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. A Tabela 2 lista a distncia lateral recomendada para os observadores, da carroceria de um veculo (por exemplo, caminho, van, carro, motocicleta) equipado com um rdio mvel de vrias bandas aprovado e instalado adequadamente e suas antenas associadas. Essas distncias laterais, para rdios de vrias bandas, dependem se o rdio est instalado em uma motocicleta ou em outros tipos de veculos. Tabela 2: Potncia Nominal de Rdios Mveis de Vrias Bandas Instalados em Veculos e Distncia Lateral Mnima Recomendada do da Carroceria do Veculo Tipo de Veculo Motocicleta Outros veculos Distncia Lateral Mnima dos Observadores da Carroceria do Veculo 60 cm (2 ps) 90 cm (3 ps) Diretrizes de Instalao da Antena Mvel No deixe de seguir as diretrizes de instalao da antena fornecidas neste manual de instalao do rdio mvel. Use somente antenas aprovadas, fornecidas ou de reposio aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions. Antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no autorizados podem danificar o rdio e resultar em no conformidade com os Padres de Segurana de RF. 3 Portugus (Brasil) Diretrizes e Instrues de Operao para Rdios Mveis Bidirecionais Instalados como Estaes de Controle de Site Fixo Se o equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado e operado em um local fixo, a instalao da antena dever seguir estes requisitos para garantir o desempenho ideal e o cumprimento dos limites de exposio energia de RF. A antena deve ser instalada fora do prdio, no teto ou em uma torre, se possvel. Assim como ocorre com todas as instalaes de antena em site fixo, de responsabilidade do licenciado gerenciar o site de acordo com os requisitos regulamentares. Aes adicionais, como medidas de inspeo do site, sinalizao, e restrio de acesso ao site podem ser necessrias a fim de garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio RF. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interferncia entre o transmissor de rdio e quaisquer mdulos de controle eletrnico de veculos, como ABS, motor ou de controle da transmisso, o rdio mvel dever ser instalado apenas por um profissional experiente, observando-se as precaues a seguir durante a instalao do rdio:

1 Consulte as instrues do fabricante ou outros boletins tcnicos para obter recomendaes sobre a instalao do rdio. 2 Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e sua fiao eltrica no veculo. 3 Direcione a fiao do rdio, incluindo o cabo da antena, o mais distante possvel de unidades de controle eletrnico e dos chicotes associados. Aviso aos Usurios (FCC) Este dispositivo est em conformidade com a parte 15 das normas da FCC, de acordo com as seguintes condies:

Este dispositivo no pode causar interferncias prejudiciais sade. Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferncia, inclusive as que possam causar operao indesejvel do dispositivo. Alteraes ou modificaes feitas neste dispositivo, que no sejam expressamente aprovadas pela Motorola Solutions, podero anular o direito do usurio de operar o equipamento. Avisos Operacionais A seguir so explicados os avisos operacionais:

4 Portugus (Brasil) Para Veculos Equipados com Air Bags Aviso:

Consulte o manual do fabricante do veculo antes de instalar equipamentos eletrnicos para evitar interferncia com o funcionamento do air bag. NO instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag ou sobre a rea de expanso dos air bags. Os air bags inflam com muita fora. Se um rdio estiver colocado na rea de abertura do air bag e ele inflar, o rdio poder ser impelido com grande fora e causar graves ferimentos aos ocupantes do veculo. Ambientes Potencialmente Explosivos Aviso:

O uso de um rdio que no intrinsecamente seguro em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo poder resultar em danos graves e at em morte. Voc deve usar apenas rdios Intrinsecamente Seguros certificados em ambientes potencialmente explosivos. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos referem-se a locais classificados como de risco que podem conter gases, vapores ou ps nocivos, como reas de abastecimento embaixo do convs principal em barcos, instalaes de armazenamento ou transferncia de produtos qumicos ou combustvel e reas onde o ar contm partculas ou elementos qumicos, como fibras, poeira ou ps metlicos. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos so frequentes, mas nem sempre h avisos sobre isso. Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em qualquer rea com ambientes potencialmente explosivos, a menos que o tipo de rdio seja especificamente certificado para utilizao em reas de risco. NO remova, instale ou carregue baterias nessas reas, nem remova ou instale antenas. Fascas em um ambiente potencialmente explosivo podem causar uma exploso ou incndio que pode resultar em ferimentos e, at mesmo, morte. reas e Equipamentos para Detonao Aviso: Para evitar possveis interferncias em operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo a detonadores eltricos, reas de detonao ou reas onde haja avisos tais como: Desligue rdios bidirecionais. Obedea a todas as sinalizaes e instrues. 5 Portugus (Brasil) Baterias Se o seu rdio mvel estiver equipado com uma bateria principal ou de reserva, voc deve seguir estas instrues:

Sempre carregue a bateria usando o carregador aprovado pela Motorola Use a bateria de acordo com sua classificao de Proteo contra entrada (IP) No descarte a bateria no fogo. No troque a bateria em lugares identificados como "Atmosferas Potencialmente No desmonte, comprima, perfure, fragmente nem tente alterar de outra maneira Solutions. de p e gua. Perigosas". a forma da bateria. No seque baterias molhadas nem midas usando aparelhos ou fontes de calor, como secadores de cabelo ou fornos de micro-ondas. No permita que materiais condutores como joias, chaves ou correntes toquem os terminais expostos da bateria. No descarte baterias no lixo domstico. Diretiva de Resduos de Equipamentos Eltricos e Eletrnicos

(WEEE) para a Unio Europeia (UE) A Diretiva de WEEE da Unio Europeia exige que os produtos vendidos nos pases da UE tenham a etiqueta de lixeira riscada no produto (ou no pacote, em alguns casos). Conforme definido pela diretiva WEEE, essa etiqueta de lixeira cruzada indica que os clientes e os usurios nos pases da UE no devem descartar equipamentos ou acessrios eltricos ou eletrnicos em lixo domstico. Os clientes ou os usurios nos pases da UE devem entrar em contato com o representante local do fornecedor do equipamento ou com a central de servios para obter informaes sobre o sistema de coleta de lixo em seu pas. Para informaes sobre descarte e reciclagem de resduos eletrnicos, baterias e embalagens, por favor, ligue: 0800168272. 6 Cover2.fm Page 1 Wednesday, April 24, 2019 1:07 PM MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 and 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in

*NNTN7851H*

NNTN7851H

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-KD

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 / IC: 109U-92FT7137 EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11), 2.1033(b)(7) and RSP 100 Annex C and Sec 3) See the Attached Photograph or Sketch Bottom of Radio Top of Radio Back of Radio Back of Radio under Belt Clip Electronic labeling: In the user manual (Section: XX) X The label is a polyester film laminate with a pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The adhesive is a permanent type acrylic with the minimum peel strength of 32 oz/inch. See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3 for the actual location of the FCC/IC label on the device. X Label Attached Below. See Attached Drawing. LOCATION X TYPE MARKINGS (TEXT) X EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 1 OF 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 / IC: 109U-92FT7137 Figure 1: FCC/IC Label for XPR 5550e 136-174MHz 25W GOB GNSS CFS BT/WiFi Color Display Figure 2: FCC/IC Label for XPR 5350e 136-174MHz 25W GOB GNSS CFS BT/WiFi Numeric Display EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 2 OF 3 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 / IC: 109U-92FT7137 Figure 3: RF Exposure Warning Label

*** END ***

EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 3 OF 3

 

 

Certification Department Date: 10 April 2021 Subject: Application Authorization for FCC filing To Whom It May Concern:

I hereby authorize Arine Lee to apply, on my behalf, the application for the following FCC ID:

FCC ID:

Please contact me if there are any questions or issues. Regards, AZ492FT7137 / 109U-92FT7137 Deanna Zakharia Regulatory Compliance Manager Tel: (954) 723 4707 Email: Deanna.zakharia@motorolasolutions.com ____________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Inc, 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard, Fort Lauderdale, Florida 33322

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7137/ IC: 109U-92FT7137 EXHIBIT 2 Statement of Certification

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.907, 2.908 and RSP 100 Sec 4) 2.1 Statement of Certification Transceiver type described herein (AZ492FT7137/109U-92FT7137) is in compliance with all applicable parts of the FCC rules and ISED RSS standards. Each unit manufactured, imported, or marketed will conform to the samples tested herein, within the statistical variations that can be expected due to high volume production and test measurement error. NAME: Jeff Linn SIGNATURE:

DATE: 27th Oct 2020 TITLE: Engineering Manager EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: AZ492FT7137/ IC: 109U-92FT7137 2.2 Attestation Statement (Equipment Class DTS and DSS Bluetooth/WiFi) This device contains an embedded Bluetooth device and WiFi device that are compliant with the applicable FCC Part 15C and ISED RSS 247 regulations. Part 15.247 (a)(1) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The hopping sequence must be pseudo random. Each frequency must be used equally on the average by each transmitter The receivers input bandwidth is approximately equal to the transmit bandwidth The receiver hops in sequence with the transmitted signal Part 15.247 (g) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system is designed to comply with all of the regulations in this section when the transmitter is presented with a continuous data (or information) Part 15.247(h) / RSS 247 Section 5.1 The system does not coordinate its channel selection/hopping sequence with other frequency hopping systems for the express purpose of avoiding the simultaneous occupancy of individual hopping frequencies by multiple transmitters. NAME: Nur Ayuni SIGNATURE:

DATE: 27th Oct 2020 TITLE: Electrical Engineer EXHIBIT 2 SHEET 2 OF 2

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Date: 12-April-2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Dear Sir/Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd herein submits application for Certification of the subject transmitter. This transmitter is intended for use in a mobile and fixed use radio application with capabilities for clear and coded communications with a variable transmit power operating within the following frequency ranges:

Product Name Model Numbers Frequency Range RF Power 136-174MHz 156-162MHz BT / BT LE :

2402-2480 MHz 802.11b,g,n :

2412-2462 MHz 1-25W; Max=30W Low power = 1W, Max=30W BT: 3.15 mW (max measured) BTLE: 3.92 mW (max measured) 802.11b:

15.62 mW (max measured) 802.11g:

11.08 mW (max measured) 802.11n:

6.8 mW (max measured) FCC Rules Part 22, 74, 90 80 15C XPR 5350e XPR 5550e AAM28JNC9RA1AN AAM28JNN9RA1AN We are requesting certification under Part(s) of the Commissions Rules listed above to allow operation of this equipment. The subject transmitter complies with Section 90.203 and 80.203(b) of the Rules in that the operator cannot directly program transmit frequencies using the unit's normally accessible external controls. A complete Certification application is enclosed. If you require any additional information, please contact me at

+604 224 0258. Sincerely, ____________________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13A

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST Date: 12-April-2021 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch FCC Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request for Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd is requesting that Exhibit 4 (Circuit Descriptions), Exhibit 5

(Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12 (Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions Inc considers the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d), 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 4, 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any additional information. Sincerely, ____________________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13B

 

 

FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Date: 12-April-2021 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: AZ492FT7137. Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter is designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band/Mode VHF Bluetooth Bluetooth LE Wi-Fi/ WLAN Frequency ranges 136-174 MHz 2402 2480 MHz 2402 2480 MHz 2412 2462 MHz FCC rule parts 22, 74, 80, 90 15C 15C 15C To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 22, 74, 80, and 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 22, 74, 80 and 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e) and 80.203(b), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range (MHz) Federal Emission Designator 150.8-173.4 157.77-158.67 157.83-158.07 156-162 161.625-161.775 138-144*

148-149.9*

150.05-174*

Part 22 Part 74 Part 80 Part 90 x x x x x x 11K0F3E, 7K60F1D, 7K60F1E, 7K60F1W, 7K60FXD, 7K60FXE 16K0F3E 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 7K60F1D, 7K60F1E, 7K60F1W, 7K60FXD, 7K60FXE

*Canada _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT13C FCC ID: AZ492FT7137 Please contact me if you required any additional information. Sincerely, ____________________ Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot 2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT13C